SERIES

37XXXD
VECTOR NETWORK ANALYZER

OPERATION MANUAL

490 JARVIS DRIVE · MORGAN HILL, CA 95037-2809 P/N: 10410-00261

REVISION: B
PRINTED: FEBRUARY 2007
COPYRIGHT 2007 ANRITSU CO.
 WARRANTY
The ANRITSU product(s) listed on the title page is (are) warranted against defects in materials and
workmanship for three years from the date of shipment.

ANRITSU’s obligation covers repairing or replacing products which prove to be defective during the
warranty period. Buyers shall prepay transportation charges for equipment returned to ANRITSU for
warranty repairs. Obligation is limited to the original purchaser. ANRITSU is not liable for consequential
damages.

LIMITATION OF WARRANTY
The foregoing warranty does not apply to ANRITSU connectors that have failed due to normal wear. Also,
the warranty does not apply to defects resulting from improper or inadequate maintenance by the Buyer,
unauthorized modification or misuse, or operation outside of the environmental specifications of the
product. No other warranty is expressed or implied, and the remedies provided herein are the Buyer’s sole
and exclusive remedies.

TRADEMARK ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
V Connector and K Connector are registered trademarks of ANRITSU Company.
GPC-7 is a registered trademark of Amphenol Corporation.
ANACAT is a registered trademark of EEsof, Inc.
QuietJet and ThinkJet are registered trademarks of Hewlett-Packard Co.
Microsoft, Excel, and MS-DOS are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
Acrobat and Acrobat Reader are trademarks of Adobe Corporation.
Iomega and Zip are registered trademarks of Iomega Company.

NOTICE
ANRITSU Company has prepared this manual for use by ANRITSU Company personnel and customers as
a guide for the proper installation, operation and maintenance of ANRITSU Company equipment and
computer programs. The drawings, specifications, and information contained herein are the property of
ANRITSU Company, and any unauthorized use or disclosure of these drawings, specifications, and
information is prohibited; they shall not be reproduced, copied, or used in whole or in part as the basis for
manufacture or sale of the equipment or software programs without the prior written consent of ANRITSU
Company.

UPDATES
Updates to this manual, if any, may be downloaded from the Anritsu Internet site at:
http://www.us.anritsu.com.
 Safety Symbols
To prevent the risk of personal injury or loss related to equipment malfunction, Anritsu Company uses the
following symbols to indicate safety-related information. For your own safety, please read the information
carefully BEFORE operating the equipment.

Symbols used in manuals

DANGER This indicates a very dangerous procedure that could result in serious
injury or death if not performed properly.

WARNING This indicates a hazardous procedure that could result in serious in-
jury or death if not performed properly.

CAUTION This indicates a hazardous procedure or danger that could result in

light-to-severe injury, or loss related to equipment malfunction, if
proper precautions are not taken.

Safety Symbols Used on Equipment and in Manuals

Some or all of the following five symbols may or may not be used on all Anritsu equipment. In addition, there
may be other labels attached to products that are not shown in the diagrams in this manual.

The following safety symbols are used inside or on the equipment near operation locations to provide infor-
mation about safety items and operation precautions. Ensure that you clearly understand the meanings of
the symbols and take the necessary precautions BEFORE operating the equipment.

This indicates a prohibited operation. The prohibited operation is indi-

cated symbolically in or near the barred circle.

his indicates a compulsory safety precaution. The required operation is

indicated symbolically in or near the circle.

This indicates warning or caution. The contents are indicated symboli-

cally in or near the triangle.

This indicates a note. The contents are described in the box.

These indicate that the marked part should be recycled.

37XXXD OM Safety-1
 For Safety
WARNING
Always refer to the operation manual when working near locations at
which the alert mark, shown on the left, is attached. If the operation,
etc., is performed without heeding the advice in the operation manual,
there is a risk of personal injury. In addition, the equipment perfor-
mance may be reduced.

Moreover, this alert mark is sometimes used with other marks and de-
scriptions indicating other dangers.

WARNING
When supplying power to this equipment, connect the accessory 3-pin
power cord to a 3-pin grounded power outlet. If a grounded 3-pin outlet
is not available, use a conversion adapter and ground the green wire, or
connect the frame ground on the rear panel of the equipment to ground.
If power is supplied without grounding the equipment, there is a risk of
receiving a severe or fatal electric shock.

WARNING
This equipment can not be repaired by the operator. DO NOT attempt to
Repair
remove the equipment covers or to disassemble internal components.
Only qualified service technicians with a knowledge of electrical fire
and shock hazards should service this equipment. There are
high-voltage parts in this equipment presenting a risk of severe injury
or fatal electric shock to untrained personnel. In addition, there is a risk
of damage to precision components.

WARNING
Use two or more people to lift and move this equipment, or use an
equipment cart. There is a risk of back injury, if this equipment is lifted
by one person.

Safety-2 37XXXD OM
Narrative Table Of Contents
Chapter 1—General Information
This chapter provides a general description of the Anritsu Model 37XXXD Vector Network Analyzer
System and its major units: network analyzer, test set, and frequency source. It also provides de-
scriptions for the precision component kits, and equipment options. Additionally, it contains the list-
ing of recommended test equipment.

Chapter 2—Installation
This chapter provides instructions for performing an initial inspection, preparing the equipment for
use, setting up for operation over the IEEE-488.2 (GPIB) Bus, using a printer, and preparing the
units for storage and/or shipment. It also provides a listing of Anritsu Customer Service Centers.

Chapter 3—Network Analyzers, A Primer

This chapter provides an introduction to network analysis and the types of measurements that can
be made using them. It provides general and introductory description.

Chapter 4—Front Panel Operation

This chapter describes the front panel controls and provides flow diagrams for the menus called up
using the front panel controls. It contains the following sub-chapters:
· Front Panel Control-Group Descriptions
· Calibration Keys and Indicators, Detailed Description
· Save/Recall Menu Key and Menus, Key Description and Menu Flow
· Measurement Keys and Menus, Key Descriptions and Menu Flow
· Channel Keys and Menu, Key Descriptions and Menu Flow
· Display Keys and Menus, Key Descriptions and Menu Flow
· Enhancement Keys and Menus, Key Descriptions and Menu Flow
· Hard Copy Keys and Menus, Key Descriptions and Menu Flow
· System State Keys and Menus, Key Descriptions and Menu Flow
· Markers/limits Keys and Menus, Key Descriptions and Menu Flow
· Disk Storage Interface, Detailed Description

Chapter 5—Error And Status Messages

This chapter describes the type of error messages you may encounter during operation and provides a
tabular listing. This listing describes and defines the error types.

Chapter 6—Data Displays

This chapter provides a detailed description of the various data displays. It describes the graph
types, frequency markers, measurement limit lines, status displays, and data display controls.

37XXXD OM i
 Narrative Table of Contents (Continued)

Chapter 7—Measurement Calibration

This chapter provides a discussion and tutorial on measurement calibration. It contains step-by-step
calibration procedures for the Standard (OSL), Offset-Short, TRM, and LRL/LRM methods. It also
has a procedure for calibrating using a sliding termination.
Chapter 8—Measurements
This chapter discusses measurements with the 37XXXD VNA. It contains sub-chapters that provide
a detailed descriptions for Transmission and Reflection, Low Level and Gain, Group Delay, Active
Device, Multiple Source Control, Adapter Removal, Gain Compression, and Receiver Mode measure-
ments

Chapter 9—Time Domain

This chapter describes the Option 2, Time Domain feature. It provides an operational procedure and
a flowchart of the time domain menus.

Chapter 10—AutoCal
This chapter describes the Automatic Calibrator (AutoCal) feature and provides operational informa-
tion and procedures.

Chapter 11—Operational Checkout Procedures

This chapter provides a procedure for operational checkout

Chapter 12—Calibration Kits

This chapter provides a description and listing of components for the calibration kits.

Chapter 13—Millimeter Wave System

This chapter contains description, operation, and checkout procedures for the millimeter wave mea-
surement capability that can be added to the 371XXD Vector Network Analyzer.

Chapter 14—ME7808C Broadband Measurement System

This chapter contains description, operation, and checkout procedures for the optional broadband
measurement capability that can be added to the 37XXXD Vector Network Analyzer.

Appendix A—Front Panel Menus, Alphabetical Listing

This appendix shows all of the menus that are called up using the front panel controls. It provides a
replica of the menu and descriptive text for all of the various menu choices. The listing is alphabeti-
cal by the menu call letters mentioned and/or illustrated in Chapter 4.

Appendix B—Model 37XXXD VNA Rear Panel Connectors

This appendix describes the rear panel connectors. It also provides pinout listing.

Appendix C—Performance Specifications

This appendix contains the Technical Data Sheet, part number 11410-00350, which provides perfor-
mance specifications.

Index

ii 37XXXD OM
Table of Contents

Chapter 1 General Information

1-1 SCOPE OF MANUAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
1-2 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
1-3 IDENTIFICATION NUMBER. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
1-4 ONLINE MANUALS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
1-5 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
372XXD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
373XXD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
1-6 MILLIMETER WAVE MEASUREMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
1-7 PRECISION COMPONENT KITS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Model 3650 SMA/3.5 mm Calibration Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Model 3651 GPC–7 Calibration Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Model 3652 K Connector Calibration Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Model 3653 Type N Calibration Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
Model 3654C V Connector® Calibration Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Model 3656 W1 Connector Calibration Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
Model 3657 Multiple Line Calibration Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
Model 3666 3.5 mm Verification Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
Model 3667 GPC–7 Verification Kit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
Model 3668 K Connector® Verification Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14
Model 3669/3669B V Connector® Verification Kits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
1-8 OPTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
1-9 PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
1-10 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16

Chapter 2 Installation
2-1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
2-2 INITIAL INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
2-3 PREPARATION FOR USE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Option 4, External SCSI Drive Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4

37XXXD OM iii
 Table of Contents (Continued)

2-4 GPIB SETUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6

Interface Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Cable Length Restrictions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
2-5 SYSTEM GPIB INTERCONNECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
GPIB Interface to an External Plotter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
GPIB Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
2-6 ETHERNET SETUP AND INTERCONNECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
2-7 EXTERNAL MONITOR CONNECTOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
2-8 RACK MOUNT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
2-9 STORAGE OR SHIPMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Preparation for Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Preparation for Shipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
2-10 SERVICE CENTERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12

Chapter 3 Network Analyzers, A Primer

3-1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
3-2 GENERAL DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Source Module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Test Set Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Analyzer Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
3-3 NETWORK ANALYZERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5

Chapter 4 Front Panel Operation

4-1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
4-2 KEY-GROUPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
4-3 CALIBRATION KEY-GROUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
4-4 SAVE/RECALL MENU KEY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
4-5 MEASUREMENT KEY-GROUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
4-6 CHANNELS KEY-GROUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
4-7 DISPLAY KEY-GROUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
4-8 ENHANCEMENT KEY-GROUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29
4-9 HARD COPY KEY-GROUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
4-10 SYSTEM STATE KEY-GROUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33
4-11 MARKERS/LIMITS KEY-GROUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36

iv 37XXXD OM
 Table of Contents (Continued)

4-12 DISK STORAGE INTERFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40

Disk Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40
Disk Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40
Disk File Output Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41
Formatting a Data File Disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41
Copying Data Files From Disk to Disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41
Recovering From Disk Write/Read Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41
4-13 COMMAND LINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42
Create Directory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42
List Directory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42
Change Directory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42
Delete Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42
Remove Directory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43
Copy Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43
Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43

Chapter 5 Error and Status Messages

5-1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
5-2 ERROR MESSAGES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3

Chapter 6 Data Displays

6-1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
6-2 DISPLAY MODES AND TYPES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Single Channel Display: Ch 1, 2, 3, 4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Dual Channel Display: Ch 1 and 3 or Ch 2 and 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Four Channel Display: Ch 1, 2, 3, 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Dual Trace Overlay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Graph Data Types. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
6-3 FREQUENCY MARKERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
Marker Designation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
6-4 LIMITS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11

37XXXD OM v
 Table of Contents (Continued)

6-5 STATUS DISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12

Reference Position Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Scale Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Frequency Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Analog Instrument Status. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Measurement Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
Sweep Indicator Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
6-6 DATA DISPLAY CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
S-parameter Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
Data Display Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
Display of Markers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
6-7 HARD COPY AND DISK OUTPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
Tabular Printout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
Screen-Image Printout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
Plotter Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
Disk Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15

Chapter 7 Measurement Calibration

7-1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
7-2 DISCUSSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Establishing the Test Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Understanding the Calibration System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Calibrating for a Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
Evaluating the Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
Verification Kits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
7-3 SLIDING TERMINATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
7-4 SOLT CALIBRATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19
7-5 OFFSET-SHORT CALIBRATION (SSLT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-28
7-6 TRIPLE OFFSET-SHORT CALIBRATION (SSST) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-32
7-7 LRL/LRM CALIBRATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-36
7-8 TRM CALIBRATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-46
7-9 MERGE CAL FILES APPLICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-47

vi 37XXXD OM
 Table of Contents (Continued)

Chapter 8 Measurements
8-1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
8-2 TRANSMISSION AND REFLECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
8-3 LOW LEVEL AND GAIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
8-5 ACTIVE DEVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-24
8-6 MULTIPLE SOURCE CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-29
Control Formula . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-29
8-7 ADAPTER REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-34
8-8 GAIN COMPRESSION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-39
Power and VNAs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-39
Swept Power Gain Compression . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-41
Swept Frequency Gain Compression . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-41
8-9 RECEIVER MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-58
Source Lock Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-58
Tracking Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-58
Set-on Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-58
Receiver Mode Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-59
Receiver Mode Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-59
Procedure, Receiver Mode Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-59
8-10 EMBEDDING/ DE-EMBEDDING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-62
Embedding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-63
De-embedding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-64
8-11 OPTICAL APPLICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-65
E/O Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-65
O/E Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-68
Creating a Characterization (*.S2P) File for E/O and O/E Measurements . . . 8-74

Chapter 9 Time Domain

9-1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
9-2 TIME DOMAIN MEASUREMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
9-3 OPERATING TIME DOMAIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
9-4 WINDOWING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11
9-5 GATING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12

37XXXD OM vii
 Table of Contents (Continued)

9-6 ANTI-GATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14

9-7 EXAMPLES, GATING AND ANTI-GATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14
9-8 TIME DOMAIN MENUS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14

Chapter 10 AutoCal
10-1 INTRODUCTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
10-2 DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
10-3 CALIBRATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4
10-4 DEFINITIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4
10-5 PHYSICAL SETUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6
10-6 CHARACTERIZATION FILES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7
10-7 USING AUTOCAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9
10-8 PIN DEPTH SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13
10-9 AUTOCAL MENUS FLOW DIAGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14

Chapter 11 Operational Checkout Procedures

11-1 INTRODUCTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3
11-2 REQUIRED EQUIPMENT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3
11-3 INITIAL SETUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3
11-4 SELF TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3
11-5 NON-RATIO POWER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4
11-6 HIGH LEVEL NOISE TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6

Chapter 12 Calibration Kits

12-1 INTRODUCTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-3
12-2 PURPOSE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-3
12-3 KIT CONTENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-3
Model 3650 Calibration Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-4
Model 3651 Calibration Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-5
Model 3652 Calibration Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-6
Model 3653 Calibration Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-7
Model 3654C Calibration Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-8
Model 3656 Calibration Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-9
Model 3657 Calibration Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-10

viii 37XXXD OM
 Table of Contents (Continued)

12-4 PRECAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-11

Pin Depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-11
Pin Depth Tolerance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-12
Over Torquing Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-12
Teflon Tuning Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-12
Mechanical Shock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-12
12-5 CLEANING INSTRUCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-13

Chapter 13 Millimeter Wave System

13-1 INTRODUCTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-3
13-2 DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-3
13-3 PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-4
System Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-4
Test Port Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5
Measurement Capabilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5
13-4 INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6
Console and Table Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7
Instrument Installation into Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8
System Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-10
13-5 CALIBRATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12
13-6 OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13
Entering/ Leaving Millimeter Wave Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13
Changing Bands/Modules While in Millimeter Wave . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-17
Allowable Millimeter Wave Module Configurations, Measurements and
Calibrations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-17
Effect of Default Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-18
Redefinition of Band Frequency Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-19
Use of Normal Multiple Source Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-20
Stored Setups and Calibrations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-20
External Source and Power Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-21
13-7 MEASUREMENT PROCEDURE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-22
13-8 REMOTE OPERATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-23
13-9 OPERATIONAL CHECKOUT— GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-24
13-10 OPERATION CHECKOUT—IF POWER LEVEL TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-25
13-11 OPERATIONAL CHECKOUT— TRANSMISSION HIGH LEVEL NOISE TEST 13-27

37XXXD OM ix
 Table of Contents (Continued)

13-12 OPERATIONAL CHECKOUT— REFLECTION HIGH LEVEL NOISE TEST . 13-29

Chapter 14 ME7808C Broadband Measurement System

14-1 INTRODUCTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-3
14-2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-4
Measurement Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-4
Console and Associated Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-4
Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-4
14-3 INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5
Console and Table Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-6
Instrument Installation into Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-7
System Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-9
14-4 INITIAL ELECTRICAL TESTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-11
Millimeter Module Checkout. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-11
40 MHz to 65 GHz Checkout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-12
14-5 WAFER PROBE STATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-13
14-6 BROADBAND MENUS, FLOW. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-15
14-7 BROADBAND CALIBRATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-16
Merging Calibrations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-16

Appendix A Front Panel Menus, Alphabetical Listing

Appendix B Rear Panel Connectors

Appendix C Performance Specifications

Subject Index

x 37XXXD OM
 Chapter 1
General Information
Table of Contents

1-1 SCOPE OF MANUAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3

1-2 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
1-3 IDENTIFICATION NUMBER. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
1-4 ONLINE MANUALS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
1-5 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
372XXD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
373XXD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
1-6 MILLIMETER WAVE MEASUREMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
1-7 PRECISION COMPONENT KITS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Model 3650 SMA/3.5 mm Calibration Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Model 3651 GPC–7 Calibration Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Model 3652 K Connector Calibration Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Model 3653 Type N Calibration Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
Model 3654C V Connector® Calibration Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Model 3656 W1 Connector Calibration Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
Model 3657 Multiple Line Calibration Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
Model 3666 3.5 mm Verification Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
Model 3667 GPC–7 Verification Kit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
Model 3668 K Connector® Verification Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14
Model 3669/3669B V Connector® Verification Kits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
1-8 OPTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
1-9 PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
1-10 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
Figure 1-1. Model 37397D Vector Network Analyzer System
 Chapter 1
General Information
1-1 SCOPE OF MANUAL This manual provides general information, installation, and operating
information for the Model 37XXXD Vector Network Analyzer (VNA)
system. (Throughout this manual, the terms VNA, 37XXXD VNA, and
37XXXD will be used interchangeably to refer to the system.)

1-2 INTRODUCTION This section provides general information about the 37XXXD VNA sys-
tem and one or more precision-component calibration or performance
verification kits. The section also provides a listing of recommended
test equipment.

1-3 IDENTIFICATION All Anritsu instruments are assigned a unique six-digit ID number,
NUMBER such as “940101.” This number is affixed to a decal on the rear panel of
each unit. In any correspondence with Anritsu Customer Service,
please use this number.

1-4 ONLINE MANUALS Manual updates, if any, are available on Anritsu's Internet download
page (http://www.us.anritsu.com/downloads/).

1-5 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION The 37XXXD Network Analyzer (Figure 1-1) is a single-instrument
system that contains a built-in source, test set, and analyzer. It is pro-
duced in two series— 372XXD and 373XXD—described below. All mod-
els provide up to 1601 measurement data points, a built-in hard-disk
drive for storing and recalling front panel setups and measurement
and calibration data. They also provide an on-screen display of total
operational time and dates of system calibrations. They support opera-
tion over the IEEE 488.2 General Purpose Interface Bus (GPIB).

37XXXD OM 1-3
MILLIMETER WAVE MEASUREMENTS GENERAL INFORMATION

372XXD The 372XXD is a fully functioning VNA for making passive-device

measurements. The series offers five models that cover a range from
22.5 MHz to 65 GHz. The models are shown below:

Model Frequency Range

37247D 40.0 MHz to 20.0 GHz
37269D 40.0 MHz to 40.0 GHz
37277D 40.0 MHz to 50.0 GHz
37297D 40.0 MHz to 65.0 GHz

373XXD The 373XXD is a fully functioning VNA for making passive- and ac-
tive-device measurements. The series offers five models that cover a
range from 22.5 MHz to 65 GHz. The models are shown below.

Model Frequency Range

37347D 40.0 MHz to 20.0 GHz
37369D 40.0 MHz to 40.0 GHz
37377D 40.0 MHz to 50.0 GHz
37397D 40.0 MHz to 65.0 GHz

1-6 MILLIMETER WAVE Any 37XXXD VNA can be used for making millimeter-wave measure-
MEASUREMENTS ments using the rear panel IF inputs. A description of this measure-
ment mode is described in Chapter 13.

1-7 PRECISION COMPONENT Two types of precision-component kits are available: calibration and
KITS verification. Calibration kits contain components used to identify and
separate error sources inherent in microwave test setups. Verification
kits consist of components with characteristics traceable to the
National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST). This type of
kit is usually kept in the metrology laboratory where it provides the
most dependable means of checking system accuracy. Each of these
kits contains a micro-floppy disk providing coefficient or measurement
data for each component. Details of these kits are described in the fol-
lowing paragraphs.

1-4 37XXXD OM
GENERAL INFORMATION PRECISION COMPONENT KITS

Model 3650 SMA/3.5 mm The 3650 Calibration Kit (Figure 1-2) contains all the precision compo-
Calibration Kit nents and tools required to calibrate the 37XXXD VNA for 12-term er-
ror-corrected measurements of test devices with SMA or 3.5 mm con-
nectors. Components are included for calibrating both male and female
test ports. The kit supports calibration with broadband loads. The kit
consists of the following components:

q 23S50 Short, SMA/3.5 mm Male

q 23SF50 Short, SMA/3.5 mm Female
q 24S50 Open, SMA/3.5 mm Male
q 24SF50 Open, SMA/3.5 mm Female
q 28S50–2 Termination, SMA/3.5 mm Male, 2 ea. (dc–26.5 GHz)
q 28SF50–2 Termination, SMA/3.5 mm Female, 2 ea.(dc–26.5 GHz)
Figure 1-2. Typical Model 365X
Calibration Kit q 33SFSF50 Insertable, SMA/3.5 mm Female/Female, 2 ea.
q 33SS50 Insertable, SMA/3.5 mm Male/Male
q 33SSF50 Insertable, SMA/3.5 mm Male/Female, 2 ea.
q 34AS50–2 Adapter, GPC–7 to SMA/3.5 mm Male, 2 ea.
q 34ASF50-2 Adapter, GPC–7 to SMA/3.5 mm Female, 2 ea.
q 01–201 Torque Wrench
q 01–210 Reference Flat
q 01–222 Connector Gauge
q 01–223 Gauge Kit Adapter
q Data Disk

Option 1: Adds 17S50 Sliding Load, SMA/3.5 mm Male; 17SF50

Sliding Load, SMA/3.5 mm Female; 01–211 Female Flush Short; and
01–212 Male Flush Short.

37XXXD OM 1-5
PRECISION COMPONENT KITS GENERAL INFORMATION

Model 3651 GPC–7 The 3651 Calibration Kit (Figure 1-3) contains all the precision compo-
Calibration Kit nents and tools required to calibrate the 37XXXD for 12-term er-
ror-corrected measurements of test devices with GPC–7 connectors.
The kit supports calibration with broadband loads. Option 1 adds a
sliding load and a pin depth gauge.

The kit consists of the following components:

q 23A50 Short, GPC–7

q 24A50 Open, GPC–7
q 28A50–2 Termination, GPC–7, 2 ea. (dc–18 GHz)
q 01–200 Torque Wrench
Figure 1-3. Typical Model 365X q 01–221 Collet Extractor Tool and Vial of Four Collets
Calibration Kit
q Data Disk

Option 1 Adds:

q 17A50 Sliding Load, GPC–7

q 01–220 GPCP–7 Connector Gauge
q 01–210 Reference Flat Model 3652 K Connector® Calibration Kit

1-6 37XXXD OM
GENERAL INFORMATION PRECISION COMPONENT KITS

Model 3652 K Connector The 3652 Calibration Kit (Figure 1-4) contains all the precision compo-
Calibration Kit nents and tools required to calibrate the 37XXXD for 12-term er-
ror-corrected measurements of test devices with K Connectors. Com-
ponents are included for calibrating both male and female test ports.
The kit supports calibration with broadband loads. Option 1 adds slid-
ing loads.

The kit consists of the following components:

q 23K50 Short, K Male

q 23KF50 Short, K Female
q 24K50 Open, K Male
Figure 1-4. Typical Model 365X q 24KF50 Open, K Female
Calibration Kit
q 28K50 Termination, K Male, 2 ea. (dc–40 GHz)
q 28KF50 Termination, K Female, 2 ea. (dc–40 GHz)
q 33KK50 Insertable, K Male/Male
q 33KFKF50 Insertable K Female/Female, 2 ea
q 33KKF50 Insertable, K Male/Female, 2 ea
q 34AK50 Adapter, GPC–7/K Male, 2 ea
q 34AKF50 Adapter, GPC–7/K Female, 2 ea
q 01–201 Torque Wrench
q 01–210 Reference Flat
q 01–222 Connector Gauge
q 01–223 Gauge Kit Adapter
q Data Disk

Option 1 Adds:

q 17K50 Sliding Load, K Male

q 17KF50 Sliding Load, K Female
q 01–211 Female Flush Short
q 01–212 Male Flush Short.

37XXXD OM 1-7
PRECISION COMPONENT KITS GENERAL INFORMATION

Model 3653 Type N The 3653 Calibration Kit (Figure 1-5) contains all the precision compo-
Calibration Kit nents and tools required to calibrate the 37XXXD for 12-term er-
ror-corrected measurements of test devices with Type N connectors.
Components are included for calibrating both male and female test
ports. The kit supports calibration with broadband loads. Option 1 for
sliding loads is not available in this calibration kit.

The kit consists of the following components:

q 23N50 Short, N Male

q 23NF50 Short, N Female
q 24N50 Open, N Male
q 24NF50 Open, N Female
Figure 1-5. Typical Model 365X q 28N50–2 Termination, N Male, 2 ea. (dc–18 GHz)
Calibration Kit
q 28NF50–2 Termination, N Female, 2 ea. (dc–18 GHz)
q 34AN50–2 Adapter, GPC–7/N Male, 2 ea.
q 34ANF50–2 Adapter, GPC–7/N Female, 2 ea.
q 01–213 Type N Reference Gauge
q 01–224 Type N Connector Gauge
q Data Disk Model 3654B

1-8 37XXXD OM
GENERAL INFORMATION PRECISION COMPONENT KITS

Model 3654C The 3654C Calibration Kit (Figure 1-6) contains all the precision com-
V Connector® Calibration ponents and tools required to calibrate the 372XXD for 12-term er-
Kit ror-corrected measurements of test devices with V Connectors. Compo-
nents are included for calibrating both male and female test ports.

The kit consists of the following components:

q 17VF50B Female Sliding Termination

q 17V50B Male Sliding Termination
q 33VVF50 Male-Female Adapter (2)
q Calibration Software, 2360-54B
q 28V50B Male and 28VF50B Female Broadband Terminations
(2 ea.)
Figure 1-6. Typical Model 365X
q 24V50B Male and 24VF50B Female Opens
Calibration Kit
q 23V50B-5.1 Male and 23VF50B-5.1 Female Shorts 5.1mm
q 33VV50 Male-Male Adapter
q 33VFVF50 Female-Female Adapter (2)
q Connector Thumb Wheel (4)
q 01-201 Torque Wrench
q 01-323 Female Adapter for Pin Gauge
q 01-322 Pin Depth Gauge
q 01-210 Reference Flat, 01-204 Adapter Wrench
q 01-312 Male Flush Short
q 01-311 Female Flush Short

37XXXD OM 1-9
PRECISION COMPONENT KITS GENERAL INFORMATION

Model 3656 W1 Connector The 3656 W1 (1.0 mm) Connector Calibration Kit (Figure 1-7) consists
Calibration Kit of precision components to calibrate the VNA to 110 GHz. The kit sup-
ports SOLT calibrations with opens, shorts, and loads to 65 GHz, and
Triple Offset short calibrations from 65 GHz to 110 GHz. The kit also
includes verification devices for determining system accuracy of the
VNA. A diskette containing factory measured test data is supplied for
comparison with customer measured data.

q 23W50-1, Male Offset Short 2.02 mm

q 23WF50-1, Female Offset Short 2.02 mm
q 23W50-2, Male Offset Short 2.65 mm
q 23WF50-2, Female Offset Short 2.65 mm
Figure 1-7. 3656 (W1) Calibration q 23W50-3, Male Offset Short 3.180 mm
Kit q 23WF50-3, Female Offset Short 3.180 mm
q 24W50, Male Open 1.510 mm
q 24WF50, Female Open 1.930 mm
q 28W50, Male Broadband Termination
q 28WF50, Female Broadband Termination
q 33WW50, Male-Male Adapter (1)
q 33WWF50, Male-Female Adapter (1)
q 33WFWF50, Female-Female Adapter (1)
q 01-401, Interchangeable Adapter Fixed Female
q 01-402, Interchangeable Adapter Fixed Male
q 18WWF50-1, 50 Matched Thruline (Verification Device)
q 18WWF50-1B, Stepped Impedance Thruline (Verification Device)
q 01-504, Torque Wrench
q 01-505, End Wrench
q Calibration coefficients diskette
q Verification kit diskette

1-10 37XXXD OM
GENERAL INFORMATION PRECISION COMPONENT KITS

Model 3657 Multiple Line The 3657 Multiple Line Calibration Kit (Figure 1-8) consists of
Calibration Kit precision components to calibrate the VNA to 110 GHz. The kit
includes verification devices for determining system accuracy of the
VNA.

q 65898-1, 15.00 mm V-LRL Male-Male, Outer Conductor

q 65899-1, 15.00 mm V-LRL Male-Male, Center Conductor
q 65898-2, 16.70 mm V-LRL Male-Male, Outer Conductor
q 65899-2, 16.70 mm V-LRL Male-Male, Center Conductor
q 65898-3, 18.40 mm V-LRL Male-Male, Outer Conductor
q 65899-3, 18.40 mm V-LRL Male-Male, Center Conductor

Figure 1-8. 3657 Multiple Line q 65898-4, 20.10 mm V-LRL Male-Male, Outer Conductor
Calibration Kit q 65899-4, 20.10 mm V-LRL Male-Male, Center Conductor
q 65898-5, 21.80 mm V-LRL Male-Male, Outer Conductor
q 65899-5, 21.80 mm V-LRL Male-Male, Center Conductor
q 65898-6, 49.84 mm V-LRL Male-Male, Outer Conductor
q 65899-6, 49.84 mm V-LRL Male-Male, Center Conductor
q 23V50B-5.1, 5.1 mm Male Short (3651-1 Only) (2)
q 23VF50B-5.1, 5.1 mm Female Short (3651-1 Only) (2)
q 65922, Center Conductor Removal Plug
q 65901-1, Center Conductor Installation/Removal Fixture
q 65901-6, Center Conductor Installation/Removal Fixture
q 783-1243, End Wrench, 7 mm
q 01-201, Torque Wrench, 8 in-lbs.

37XXXD OM 1-11
PRECISION COMPONENT KITS GENERAL INFORMATION

Model 3666 3.5 mm The 3666 Verification Kit (Figure 1-9) contains precision 3.5 mm
Verification Kit components with characteristics that are traceable to the NIST. Used
primarily by the metrology laboratory, these components provide the
most dependable means of determining system accuracy. A disk
containing factory-measured test data for all components is supplied
for comparison with customer-measured data.

The 3666 consists of the following components:

q 19S50–7 7.5 cm Air Line

q 19S50–7B 7.5 cm Stepped Impedance Air Line (Beatty Standard)
q 42S–20 20 dB Attenuator

Figure 1-9. Typical Model 366X

q 42S–50 50 dB Attenuator
Verification Kit

1-12 37XXXD OM
GENERAL INFORMATION PRECISION COMPONENT KITS

Model 3667 GPC–7 The 3667 Verification Kit (Figure 1-10) contains precision GPC–7
Verification Kit components with characteristics that are traceable to the NIST. Used
primarily by the metrology laboratory, these components provide the
most dependable means of determining system accuracy. A disk
containing factory-measured test data for each component is supplied
for comparison with customer-measured data.

The kit consists of the following components:

q 18A50–10B 10 cm Stepped Impedance Air Line

(Beatty Standard)
q 18A50–10 10 cm Air Line
q 42A–20 20 dB Attenuator
Figure 1-10. Typical Model 366X
Verification Kit
q 42A–50 50 dB Attenuator

37XXXC OM 1-13
PRECISION COMPONENT KITS GENERAL INFORMATION

Model 3668 The 3668 Verification Kit (Figure 1-11) contains precision K Connector
K Connector® Verification components with characteristics that are traceable to the NIST. Used
Kit primarily by the metrology laboratory, these components provide the
most dependable means of determining system accuracy. A disk
containing factory-measured test data for each component is supplied
for comparison with customer-measured data.

The kit consists of the following components:

q 19K50–7 7.5 cm Air Line

q 19K50–7B 7.5 cm Stepped Impedance Air Line (Beatty Stan-
dard)
q 42K–20 20 dB Attenuator

Figure 1-11. Typical Model 366X

q 42K–50 50 dB Attenuator
Verification Kit

1-14 37XXXD OM
GENERAL INFORMATION PRECISION COMPONENT KITS

Model 3669/3669B The 3669 and 3669B Verification Kits (Figure 1-12) contain precision
V Connector® Verification V Connector components with characteristics that are traceable to the
Kits NIST. Used primarily by the metrology laboratory, these components
provide the most dependable means of determining system accuracy. A
disk containing factory-measured test data for each component is
supplied for comparison with customer-measured data.

The kit consists of the following components:

q 19-V50-5 5 cm Air Line

q 19V50-5B 5 cm Stepped Impedance Air Line (Beatty Standard)
q 42V-20 20 dB Attenuator
q 42V-40 40 dB Attenuator
Figure 1-12. Typical Model 366X
Verification Kit

37XXXD OM 1-15
OPTIONS GENERAL INFORMATION

1-8 OPTIONS The following options are available:

q Option 1: Rack Mount Kit

q Option 2: Time (Distance) Domain Measurement Capability
q Option 4: External SCSI Hard Drive Interface
q Option 15: Flexible test set (provides access to all four samplers
and Source loops for each port)

1-9 PERFORMANCE System performance specifications are provided in Appendix C.

SPECIFICATIONS

1-10 PREVENTIVE The 37XXXD VNA system does not require any preventive mainte-
MAINTENANCE nance.

1-16 37XXXD OM
 Chapter 2
Installation

Table of Contents

2-1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3

2-2 INITIAL INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
2-3 PREPARATION FOR USE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Option 4, External SCSI Drive Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
2-4 GPIB SETUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Interface Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Cable Length Restrictions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
2-5 SYSTEM GPIB INTERCONNECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
GPIB Interface to an External Plotter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
GPIB Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
2-6 ETHERNET SETUP AND INTERCONNECTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
2-7 EXTERNAL MONITOR CONNECTOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
2-8 RACK MOUNT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
2-9 STORAGE OR SHIPMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Preparation for Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Preparation for Shipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
2-10 SERVICE CENTERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
 Chapter 2
Installation
2-1 INTRODUCTION This chapter provides information for the initial inspection and prepa-
ration for use of the 37XXXD Vector Network Analyzer. Information
for interfacing the 37XXXD to the IEEE-488 General Purpose Inter-
face Bus and reshipment and storage information is also included.

2-2 INITIAL INSPECTION Inspect the shipping container for damage. If the container or cushion-
ing material is damaged, retain until the contents of the shipment
have been checked against the packing list and the instrument has
been checked for mechanical and electrical operation.

If the 37XXXD is damaged mechanically, notify your local sales repre-

sentative or Anritsu Customer Service. If either the shipping container
is damaged or the cushioning material shows signs of stress, notify the
carrier as well as Anritsu. Keep the shipping materials for the car-
rier’s inspection.

WARNING

Use two or more people to lift and move this equipment, or use an
equipment cart. There is a risk of back injury, if this equipment is lifted
by one person.

2-3 PREPARATION FOR USE Except for units with Option 4 (see following page), no initial setup is
required. After unpacking, the 37XXXD is ready for use. The 37XXXD
is equipped with automatic line-power sensing, and will operate with
any of the following line voltages: 100V, 120V, 220V, 240V +5%, –10%,
48–63 Hz, 350 VA. The 37XXXD is intended for Installation Category
(Overvoltage Category) II.

WARNING

When supplying power to this equipment, always use a three-wire

power cable connected to a three-wire power line outlet. If power is sup-
plied without grounding the equipment, there is a risk of receiving a se-
vere or fatal electric shock.

37XXXD OM 2-3
PREPARATION FOR USE INSTALLATION

Option 4, The 37XXXD is available with an external SCSI drive interface as Op-
External SCSI Drive Setup tion 4. This option deletes the usual internal hard disk and provides
support for the use of an external SCSI drive.

An external SCSI drive and interface cable are not included with
Option 4, but may be purchased from Anritsu. Contact your local sales
representative for information on availability and price. Compatible
drives may also be purchased from your local computer retailer.

Requirements:
q Interface: SCSI, SCSI-2
q Supported Drives: Iomega Zip 100MB SCSI, Zip 250MB SCSI,
® ® ®

Jaz 1, Jaz 2 (other drives may operate, but are not guaranteed)
q Connector: Centronics 50 Male Pro Series SCSI I
(37XXXD is Female)
q SCSI ID: 5
q Terminated: Yes

System Boot:
Depending on your system configuration at the time of shipment, a
drive (and cartridge) may be included. If not, your external drive must
be connected to the 37XXXD and initialized with the system files as
described below before proceeding.

Ensure that the drive is configured correctly and powered on. If the
drive is a cartridge type, ensure that a cartridge with the system file
on it is installed. Turn on the 37XXXD and the system should boot
normally. Cartridges may then be exchanged if you wish to share files.

2-4 37XXXD OM
INSTALLATION PREPARATION FOR USE

Initializing the Drive:

A set of 37000 Basic Measurement Software floppy disks, Anritsu part
number 2300-212, is required. This 4-disk set is supplied with your
shipment. Anritsu recommends BMS version 4.01 or above when using
an external SCSI drive.

NOTE
This operation will erase all of the files on the SCSI drive.
Copy any important files before proceeding.

Step 1. Connect the external drive to the 37XXXD’s rear panel SCSI port with
the interface cable (refer to Appendix B for information on the rear
panel connectors). Ensure that the external SCSI drive is powered on
with a cartridge installed (if applicable).

Step 2. With the 37XXXD powered off, insert Disk 1 of the 37000 BMS into the
37XXXD floppy drive.

Step 3. Power up the 37XXXD and immediately press any key to view the
“Format Hard Drive” menu.

Step 4. Press 1 to format the drive. Disk 1 will load automatically.

Step 5. Follow the instructions on the 37XXXD display to load the next three
disks. During this step, the system files are transferred to the SCSI
drive.

The SCSI drive initialization is now complete. The 37XXXD should

sweep with no displayed errors and is now ready to boot-up from the
external drive at power-on.

37XXXD OM 2-5
GPIB SETUP
INSTALLATION

2-4 GPIB SETUP All functions of the 37XXXD (except power on/off and initialization of
the hard disk) can be controlled remotely by an external computer/con-
troller via the IEEE-488.2 GPIB. The information in this section per-
tains to interface connections and cable requirements for the rear
panel GPIB connector. Refer to the Model 37XXXD Programming Man-
ual, Anritsu Part Number 10410-00262, for information about remote
operation of the 37XXXD using the GPIB.

The 37XXXD GPIB operates with any IBM XT, AT, or PS/2 compatible
computer/controller equipped with a National Instruments
GPIB-PCII/IIA interface card and software.

Interface Connector Interface between the 37XXXD and other devices on the GPIB is via a
standard 24-wire GPIB interface cable. For proper operation, order
Anritsu part number 2100-1, -2, -4, or -5 (1, 2, 4, or 0.5 meter length)
cables through your local sales representative. This cable uses a dou-
ble-sided connector; one connector face is a plug, the other a receptacle.
These double-function connectors allow parallel connection of two or
more cables to a single instrument connector. The pin assignments for
the rear panel GPIB connector are shown in Figure B-2, located in Ap-
pendix B.

Cable Length Restrictions The GPIB system can accommodate up to 15 instruments at any one
time. To achieve design performance on the bus, proper timing and
voltage level relationships must be maintained. If either the cable
length between separate instruments or the accumulated cable length
between all instruments is too long, the data and control lines cannot
be driven properly and the system may fail to perform. Cable length
restrictions are as follows:

q No more than 15 instruments may be installed on the bus.

q Total accumulative cable length in meters may not exceed two
times the number of bus instruments or 20 meters—whichever is
less.
NOTE
For low EMI applications, the GPIB cable should be a fully
shielded type, with well-grounded metal-shell connec-
tors. (Use Anritsu 2100-series cables.)

2-6 37XXXD OM
INSTALLATION SYSTEM GPIB INTERCONNECTION

2-5 SYSTEM GPIB There are two rear panel GPIB IEEE-488 connectors. The IEEE 488.2
INTERCONNECTION connector used to interface the 37XXXD to an external computer/ con-
troller via a standard GPIB cable. The Dedicated GPIB connector is
used to interface to plotters and a second source for multiple source
operation via a standard GPIB cable.

GPIB Interface to an The 37XXXD GPIB interface can be configured to control a suitable ex-
External Plotter ternal plotter (refer to Chapter 6, Data Displays). In this mode of oper-
ation, the GPIB is dedicated to this application and only the 37XXXD
and the plotter are connected to the GPIB. Standard GPIB cables are
used to interconnect to the plotter.

GPIB Addresses The 37XXXD leaves the factory with the default GPIB address set to
six. This address may be changed using the GP7 menu (see Appendix
A).

2-6 ETHERNET SETUP AND The 37XXXD can be remotely controlled via a network server and an
INTERCONNECTION Ethernet connection via the standard RJ45 connector on the rear
panel. The 37XXXD software supports the TCP/IP network protocol.
The TCP/IP protocol setup requires the following:

q IP Address: Every computer/electronic device in a TCP/IP net-

work requires an IP address. An IP address has four numbers
(each between 0 and 255) separated by periods. For example:
128.111.122.42 is a valid IP address
q Subnet Mask: The subnet mask distinguishes the portion of the
IP address that is the network ID from the portion that is the
station ID. The subnet mask 255.255.0.0, when applied to the IP
address given above, would identify the network ID as 128.111
and the station ID as 122.42. All stations in the same Local Area
Network (LAN) should have the same network ID but different
station IDs
q Default Gateway: A TCP/IP network can have a gateway to com-
municate beyond the LAN identified by the network ID. A gate-
way is a computer or electronic device that is connected to two
different networks and can move TCP/IP data from one network
to the other. A single LAN that is not connected to other LANs
requires a default gateway setting of 0.0.0.0. This (0.0.0.0) is
Lightning’s default gateway setting. If you have a gateway, then
the default gateway would be set to the appropriate value of your
gateway.
NOTE
The default gateway setting is only activated after the sys-
tem power is recycled.

37XXXD OM 2-7
EXTERNAL MONITOR CONNECTOR INSTALLATION

q Ethernet Address: An Ethernet address is a unique 48-bit value

that identifies a network interface card to the rest of the net-
work. Every network card has a unique ethernet address perma-
nently stored into its memory Inappropriate setting of the De-
fault Gateway IP Address will cause the Lightning system to
appear to be locked up at start up. The instrument will appear to
stop working at the following message:

Application loaded successfully, starting system…

2-7 EXTERNAL MONITOR The rear panel External Monitor connector allows the internal display
CONNECTOR information of the 37XXXD to be connected to an external VGA moni-
tor (either color or monochrome). The pinout of this 15-pin Type D con-
nector is shown in Figure B-5, located in Appendix B.

2-8 RACK MOUNT To install the Option 1 Rack Mount rails, refer to the below-listed pro-
cedure.

Step 1. Disconnect the line cord and any other attachments from the instru-
ment.

Step 2. Carefully place the instrument on its top (bottom-side up) on a secure
and stable work surface.

2-8 37XXXD OM
INSTALLATION
RACK MOUNT

Step 3. Using a Phillips screwdriver, remove the two handles or four bumper
assemblies (and tilt bail, if installed) from the front of the unit, and
the four feet at the rear (Figure 2-1). Save the screws for later use.

Figure 2-1. Removing Cover

NOTES
q The green-headed screws are metric threads and must be used
only in the appropriately tapped holes
q The feet, handles, and bumpers are not reused in this application

Step 4. Remove the center screws from the rear of the left and right side cov-
ers.

Step 5. Remove the two side carrying handle screws (if so equipped) located
under the plastic handle ends.

Step 6. Remove the left and right side covers. These side covers are not reused
in this application.

Step 7. Install the two Rack Mount Handles using the green-headed screws
removed earlier.

Refer to Figure 2-2, on the following page, for the remainder of the
assembly procedure.

37XXXD OM 2-9
RACK MOUNT INSTALLATION

Step 8. Secure the new left cover (2) from this retrofit kit to the left side chas-
sis of the instrument by installing the two center screws (6) to the top
and bottom and the previously removed center screw at the rear of the
left cover.

Step 9. Secure the slide assembly (4) to the left cover by installing the four
mounting screws (5) to the left chassis.

Figure 2-2. Mounting Rails

Step 10. Secure the new right cover (3) from this retrofit kit to the right side
chassis of the instrument by installing the center screw (6) through
the center of the right side cover and the previously removed center
screw at the rear of the right side cover.

Step 11. Secure the slide assembly (4) to the right cover by installing the four
mounting screws (5) to the right chassis.

This completes the installation of the slide assembly.

2-10 37XXXD OM
INSTALLATION STORAGE OR SHIPMENT

2-9 STORAGE OR SHIPMENT The following paragraphs describe the procedure for preparing the
37XXXD for storage or shipment.

Preparation for Storage Preparing the 37XXXD for storage consists of cleaning the unit, pack-
ing the inside with moisture-absorbing desiccant crystals, and storing
the unit in a temperature environment that is maintained between
–40 and +70 degrees centigrade (–40 to 156 degrees Fahrenheit).

Preparation for Shipment To provide maximum protection against damage in transit, the
37XXXD should be repackaged in the original shipping container. If
this container is no longer available and the 37XXXD is being re-
turned to Anritsu for repair, advise Anritsu Customer Service; they
will send a new shipping container free of charge. In the event neither
of these two options is possible, instructions for packaging and ship-
ment are given below.

Use a Suitable Container

Obtain a corrugated cardboard carton with a 275-pound test strength.
This carton should have inside dimensions of no less than six inches
larger than the instrument dimensions to allow for cushioning.

Protect the Instrument

Surround the instrument with polyethylene sheeting to protect the fin-
ish.

Cushion the Instrument

Cushion the instrument on all sides by tightly packing dunnage or
urethane foam between the carton and the instrument. Provide at
least three inches of dunnage on all sides.

Seal the Container

Seal the carton by using either shipping tape or an industrial stapler.

Address the Container

If the instrument is being returned to Anritsu for service, mark the
Anritsu address and your return address on the carton in one or more
prominent locations. Refer to the address of your local representative
listed in Table 2-1 on the following page.

37XXXD OM 2-11
SERVICE CENTERS INSTALLATION

2-10 SERVICE CENTERS Table 2-1 provides a list of international service centers.
Table 2-1. Anritsu Service Centers

UNITED STATES FRANCE JAPAN

ANRITSU COMPANY ANRITSU S.A ANRITSU CUSTOMER SERVICES LTD.
490 Jarvis Drive 9 Avenue du Quebec 1800 Onna Atsugi-shi
Morgan Hill, CA 95037-2809 Zone de Courtaboeuf Kanagawa-Prf. 243 Japan
Telephone: (408) 776-8300 91951 Les Ulis Cedex Telephone: 0462-96-6688
1-800-ANRITSU Telephone: 016-09-21-550 FAX: 0462-25-8379
FAX: 408-776-1744 FAX: 016-44-61-065
GERMANY SINGAPORE
ANRITSU COMPANY ANRITSU GmbH ANRITSU (SINGAPORE) PTE LTD.
10 New Maple Ave., Unit 305 Grafenberger Allee 54-56 10, Hoe Chiang Road
Pine Brook, NJ 07058 D-40237 Dusseldorf, Germany #07-01/02 Keppel Towers
Telephone: (973) 227-8999 Telephone: 0211-968550 Singapore 089315
1-800-ANRITSU FAX: 0211-9685555 Telephone: 6-282-2400
FAX: 973-575-0092 FAX: 6-282-2533
INDIA SOUTH AFRICA
ANRITSU COMPANY MEERA AGENCIES PVT. LTD. ETECSA
1155 E. Collins Blvd 23 Community Centre 12 Surrey Square Office Park
Richardson, TX 75081 Zamroodpur, Kailash Colony Extension, 330 Surrey Avenue
Telephone: 1-800-ANRITSU New Delhi, India 110 048 Ferndale, Randburt, 2194
FAX: 972-671-1877 Phone: 011-2-6442700/6442800 South Africa
FAX : 011-2-644250023 Telephone: 011-27-11-787-7200
FAX: 011-27-11-787-0446
AUSTRALIA ISRAEL SWEDEN
ANRITSU PTY. LTD. TECH-CENT, LTD. ANRITSU AB
Unit 3, 170 Foster Road 4 Raul Valenberg St Borgafjordsgatan 13
Mt Waverley, VIC 3149 Tel-Aviv 69719 164 40 KISTA, Sweden
Australia Telephone: (03) 64-78-563 Telephone: +46-8-53470700
Telephone: 03-9558-8177 FAX: (03) 64-78-334 FAX: +46-8-53470730
FAX: 03-9558-8255
BRAZIL ITALY TAIWAN
ANRITSU ELECTRONICA LTDA. ANRITSU Sp.A ANRITSU CO., INC.
Praia de Botafogo, 440, Sala 2401 Roma Office 7F, No. 316, Section 1
CEP22250-040, Rio de Janeiro, RJ, Brazil Via E. Vittorini, 129 NeiHu Road
Telephone: 021-527-6922 00144 Roma EUR Taipei, Taiwan, R.O.C.
FAX: 021-53-71-456 Telephone: (06) 50-99-711 Telephone: 886-2-8751-1816
FAX: (06) 50-22-425 FAX: 886-2-8751-2126
CANADA KOREA UNITED KINGDOM
ANRITSU INSTRUMENTS LTD. ANRITSU CORPORATION LTD. ANRITSU LTD.
700 Silver Seven Road, Suite 120 Head Office: 200 Capability Green
Kanata, Ontario K2V 1C3 8F, Hyunjuk Building, 832-41 Luton, Bedfordshire
Telephone: (613) 591-2003 Yeoksam-Dong, Kangnam-Ku LU1 3LU, England
FAX: (613) 591-1006 Seoul 135-080, South Korea Telephone: 015-82-433200
Telephone: 02-553-6603 FAX: 015-82-731303
FAX: 02-553-6605
CHINA
ANRITSU ELECTRONICS (SHANGHAI) CO. LTD.
2F, Rm B, 52 Section Factory Building
No. 516 Fu Te Rd (N)
Shanghai 200131 P.R. China
Telephone:21-58680226, 58680227, 58680228
FAX: 21-58680588

2-12 37XXXD OM
 Chapter 3
Network Analyzers,
A Primer

Table of Contents

3-1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3

3-2 GENERAL DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Source Module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Test Set Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Analyzer Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
3-3 NETWORK ANALYZERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
 Chapter 3
Network Analyzers,
A Primer
3-1 INTRODUCTION This section provides front panel operating and measurement applica-
tion information and data. It includes discussions on the following top-
ics:

q System description
q General discussion about network analyzers
q Basic measurements and how to make them
q Error correction
q General discussion on test sets

3-2 GENERAL DESCRIPTION The Model 37XXXD Vector Network Analyzer System measures the
magnitude and phase characteristics of networks, amplifiers,
attenuators, and antennas. It compares the incident signal that leaves
the analyzer with either the signal that is transmitted through the
test device or the signal that is reflected from its input. Figure 3-1 and
Figure 3-2 illustrate the types of measurements that the 37XXXD can
make.

INCIDENT TRANSMITTED
TEST
DEVICE

Gain (dB)
Insertion Loss (dB)
Insertion Phase (degrees)
Transmission Coefficients (S12, S21)
Separation of Transmission
Components (Real and Imaginary)
Electrical Length (m)
Electrical Delay (s)
Deviation from Linear Phase (degrees)
Group Delay (s)

Figure 3-1. Transmission Measurements

37XXXD OM 3-3
GENERAL DESCRIPTION NETWORK ANALYZERS, A PRIMER

INCIDENT
TEST
DEVICE
TERMINATION
REFLECTED

Return Loss (dB)

Reflection Coefficients (S11, S22)
Reflection Coefficients vs Distance
(Fourier Transform)
Impedance (R + j X)
SWR

Figure 3-2. Reflection Measurements

The 37XXXD is a self-contained, fully integrated measurement system

that includes an optional time domain capability. The system hard-
ware consists of the following:

q Analyzer
q Precision components required for calibration and performance
verification
q Optional use of Anritsu 67XXB, 68XXXA/B/C, or 69XXXA/B as a
second source

The 37XXXD internal system modules perform the following functions:

Source Module This module provides the stimulus to the device under test (DUT). The
frequency range of the source and test set modules establish the fre-
quency range of the system. The frequency stability of the source is an
important factor in the accuracy (especially phase accuracy) of the net-
work analyzer. Hence, the 37XXXD always phase locks the source to
an internal 10 MHz crystal reference.

Test Set Module The test set module routes the stimulus signal to the DUT and sam-
ples the reflected and transmitted signals. The type of connector used
is important, as is the “Auto Reversing” feature. Auto Reversing means
that it applies the stimulus signal in both the forward and reverse di-
rection. The direction is reversed automatically. This saves you from
having to reverse the test device physically to measure all four scatter-
ing parameters (S-parameters). Frequency conversion (1st and 2nd
IFs) occurs in the test set module.

Analyzer Module The analyzer module down-converts, receives, and interprets the 3rd
IF signal for phase and magnitude data. It then displays the results of
this analysis on a large, 190 mm (7-1/2 inch) diagonal color display.
This display can show all four S-parameters simultaneously. In addi-
tion to the installed display, you can also view the measurement re-
sults on an external color monitor.

3-4 37XXXD OM
NETWORK ANALYZERS, A PRIMER NETWORK ANALYZERS

3-3 NETWORK ANALYZERS We will begin this discussion with a subject familiar to most Anritsu
customers: scalar network analysis. After showing comparisons, we
will proceed to the fundamentals of network analyzer terminology and
techniques. This discussion serves as an introduction to topics pre-
sented in greater detail later in this section. This discussion will touch
on new concepts that include the following:

q Reference Delay
q S-parameters: what they are and how they are displayed
q Complex Impedance and Smith Charts

Scalar Analyzer Comparison

Network Analyzers do everything that scalar analyzers do except dis-
play absolute power. In addition, they add the ability to measure the
phase characteristics of microwave devices and allow greater dynamic
range.

If all a Network Analyzer added was the capability for measuring

phase characteristics, its usefulness would be limited. While phase
measurements are important in themselves, it is the availability of
SCALAR NETWORK ANALYZERS this phase information that unlocks many new features for complex
measurements. These features include Smith Charts, Time Domain,
MICROWAVE MICROWAVE
DETECTOR
OUTPUT
and Group Delay. Phase information also allows greater accuracy
SIGNAL DETECTOR VOLTAGE through vector error correction of the measured signal.

First, let us look at scalar network analyzers (SNAs). SNAs measure

microwave signals by converting them to a DC voltage using a diode
DETECTOR OUTPUT VOLTAGE IS PROPORTIONAL
detector (Figure 3-3). This DC voltage is proportional to the magnitude
TO SIGNAL AMPLITUDE. of the incoming signal. The detection process, however, ignores any
information regarding the phase of the microwave signal.

In a network analyzer, access is needed to both the magnitude and

Figure 3-3. Scalar Analyzer phase of a microwave signal. There are several different ways to per-
Detection form the measurement. The method Anritsu employs (called Harmonic
Sampling or Harmonic Mixing) is to down-convert the signal to a lower
intermediate frequency (IF). This signal can then be measured directly
by a tuned receiver. The tuned receiver approach gives the system
greater dynamic range. The system is also much less sensitive to inter-
fering signals, including harmonics.

37XXXD OM 3-5
 NETWORK ANALYZERS NETWORK ANALYZERS, A PRIMER

Vector Network Analyzer Basics

The network analyzer is a tuned receiver (Figure 3-4, left). The
A NETWORK ANALYZER IS A TUNED RECEIVER
microwave signal is down converted into the passband of the IF. To
MICROWAVE
SIGNAL
INTERMEDIATE
FREQUENCY (IF)
measure the phase of this signal, we must have a reference to compare
it with. If the phase of a signal is 90 degrees, it is 90 degrees different
from the reference signal (Figure 3-5, left). The network analyzer
would read this as –90 degrees, since the test signal is delayed by 90
TUNABLE
degrees with respect to the reference signal.
LOCAL
OSCILLATOR
This phase reference can be obtained by splitting off some of the
• GREATER DYNAMIC RANGE
• LESS SENSIVITY TO INTERFERING SIGNALS microwave signal before the measurement (Figure 3-7, below).

REFERENCE TEST
Figure 3-4. Network Analyzer is SIGNAL PHASE SIGNAL
DETECTOR
a Tuned Receiver

MICROWAVE
SOURCE
PHASE MEASUREMENT
90 SPLITTER

REFERENCE
SIGNAL
DUT

TEST Figure 3-7. Splitting the Microwave Signal

SIGNAL

TIME
The phase of the microwave signal after it has passed through the de-
vice under test (DUT) is then compared with the reference signal. A
Figure 3-5. Signals with a network analyzer test set automatically samples the reference signal,
90 Degree Phase so no external hardware is needed.
Difference
Let us consider for a moment that you remove the DUT and substitute
a length of transmission line (Figure 3-6, left). Note that the path
length of the test signal is longer than that of the reference signal.
REFERENCE
SIGNAL
TEST
SIGNAL
Now let us see how this affects our measurement.
PHASE
DETECTOR

MICROWAVE
SOURCE

SPLITTER

LONGER
PATH
LENGTH

Figure 3-6. Split Signal where

a Length of Line
Replaces the DUT

3-6 37XXXD OM
NETWORK ANALYZERS, A PRIMER NETWORK ANALYZERS

Assume that we are making a measurement at 1 GHz and that the

difference in path-length between the two signals is exactly 1
wavelength. This means that test signal is lagging the reference signal
REFERENCE TEST
SIGNAL SIGNAL by 360 degrees (Figure 3-8). We cannot really tell the difference
PHASE
DETECTOR
between one sine wave maxima and the next (they are all identical), so
MICROWAVE
the network analyzer would measure a phase difference of 0 degrees.
SOURCE
SPLITTER
Now consider that we make this same measurement at 1.1 GHz. The
LONGER BY
ONE WAVELENGTH
LENGTH (360 degrees)
frequency is higher by 10 percent so therefore the wavelength is
shorter by 10 percent. The test signal path length is now 0.1
wavelength longer than that of the reference signal (Figure 3-9). This
test signal is:

1.1 X 360 = 396 degrees

Figure 3-8. Split Signal where
Path Length Differs This is 36 degrees different from the phase measurement at 1 GHz.
by Exactly One The network analyzer will display this phase difference as –36 de-
Wavelength grees.

The test signal at 1.1 GHz is delayed by 36 degrees more than the test
REFERENCE TEST signal at 1 GHz.
SIGNAL SIGNAL
PHASE
DETECTOR
You can see that if the measurement frequency is 1.2 GHz, we will get
MICROWAVE
SOURCE a reading of –72 degrees, –108 degrees for 1.3 GHz, etc. (Figure 3-10).
SPLITTER
SAME PATH
There is an electrical delay between the reference and test signals. For
LENGTH -BUT-
WAVELENGTH
this delay we will use the common industry term of reference delay.
IS NOW SHORTER
You also may hear it called phase delay. In older network analyzers
1.1 WAVELENGTHS = 396 degrees you had to equalize the length of the reference arm with that of the
test arm to make an appropriate measurement of phase vs. frequency.

To measure phase on a DUT, we want to remove this

phase-change-vs.-frequency due to changes in the electrical length.
Figure 3-9. Split Signal where
This will allow us to view the actual phase characteristics. These char-
Path Length is
acteristics may be much smaller than the phase change due to
Longer than One
electrical length difference.
MEASURED PHASE

+180

+90
1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 FREQUENCY,
0
GHz
-90

-180

Figure 3-10. Electrical Delay

37XXXD OM 3-7
NETWORK ANALYZERS NETWORK ANALYZERS, A PRIMER

There are two ways of accomplishing this. The most obvious way is to
insert a length of line into the reference signal path to make both
paths of equal length (Figure 3-11, below). With perfect transmission
lines and a perfect splitter, we would then measure a constant phase
as we change the frequency. The problem using this approach is that
we must change the line length with each measurement setup.
MEASURED PHASE

+180 REFERENCE TEST

+90 SIGNAL PHASE SIGNAL
0
1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 FREQUENCY, DETECTOR
GHz
-90

-180
SUBTRACT LINEAR
PHASE FROM MICROWAVE
MEASURED PHASE SOURCE

SPLITTER

BOTH LINE
LENGTHS
Figure 3-12. Phase Difference NOW EQUAL
Increases Linearly
with Frequency
Figure 3-11. Split Signal where Paths are of Equal Length

Another approach is to handle the path length difference in software.

Figure 3-12 (left) displays the phase-vs.-frequency of a device. This
device has different effects on the output phase at different
+2 frequencies. Because of these differences, we do not have a perfectly
RESULTANT PHASE

+1 linear phase response. We can easily detect this phase deviation by

0
1.1 1.3 1.4
FREQUENCY,
compensating for the linear phase. The size of the phase difference
-1
1.2 GHz increases linearly with frequency so we can modify the phase display
to eliminate this delay.
-2

The 37XXXD offers automatic reference delay compensation with the

push of a button. Figure 3-13 (left) shows the resultant measurement
when we compensate path length. In a system application you can
usually correct for length differences; however, the residual phase
characteristics are critical.
Figure 3-13. Resultant Phase
with Path
Length

3-8 37XXXD OM
NETWORK ANALYZERS, A PRIMER NETWORK ANALYZERS

Network Analyzer Measurements

Now let us consider measuring the DUT. Consider a two port device;
that is, a device with a connector on each end. What measurements
would be of interest?
PORT 1 PORT 2

FORWARD REVERSE
First, we could measure the reflection characteristics at either end
DUT
REFLECTION REFLECTION with the other end terminated into 50 ohms. If we designate one end
as the normal place for the input that gives a reference. We can then
define the reflection characteristics from the reference end as forward
reflection, and those from the other end as reverse reflection
(Figure 3-14).

Second, we can measure the forward and reverse transmission

Figure 3-14. Forward and characteristics. However, instead of saying “forward,” “reverse,”
Reverse “reflection,” and “transmission” all the time, we use a shorthand. That
Measurements is all that S-parameters are, a shorthand! The “S” stands for
scattering. The second number is the device port that the signal is
being injected into, while the first is the device port that the signal is
leaving. S11, therefore, is the signal being injected into port 1 relative
S21 FORWARD TRANSMISSION
to the signal leaving port 1. The four scattering parameters
(Figure 3-15) are:
PORT 1 PORT 2
q S11 Forward Reflection
S11 FORWARD S22 REVERSE
REFLECTION
DUT REFLECTION q S21 Forward Transmission
q S22 Reverse Reflection
S12 REVERSE TRANSMISSION q S12 Reverse Transmission

S-parameters can be displayed in many ways. An S-parameter consists

of a magnitude and a phase. We can display the magnitude in dB, just
Figure 3-15. S-parameters like a scalar network analyzer. We often call this term log magnitude.

We can display phase as “linear phase” (Figure 3-16). As discussed

earlier, we can’t tell the difference between one cycle and the next.
Therefore, after going through 360 degrees we are back to where we
began. We can display the measurement from –180 to +180 degrees.
The –180 to +180 approach is more common. It keeps the display
+180
discontinuity removed from the important 0 degree area used as the
PHASE

0 phase reference.

-180
FREQUENCY

Figure 3-16. Linear

Phase-with-frequen
cy Waveform

37XXXD OM 3-9
NETWORK ANALYZERS NETWORK ANALYZERS, A PRIMER

There are several ways in which all the information can be displayed
POLAR DISPLAY on one trace. One method is a polar display (Figure 3-17). The radial
90 parameter (distance from the center) is magnitude. The rotation
around the circle is phase. We sometimes use polar displays to view
transmission measurements, especially on cascaded devices (devices in
series). The transmission result is the addition of the phase and log
magnitude (dB) information of each device’s polar display.
180 0
As we have discussed, the signal reflected from a DUT has both mag-
nitude and phase. This is because the impedance of the device has
both a resistive and a reactive term of the form r+jx. We refer to the r
as the real or resistive term, while we call x the imaginary or reactive
-90
term. The j, which we sometimes denote as i, is an imaginary number.
It is the square root of –1. If x is positive, the impedance is inductive; if
Figure 3-17. Polar Display x is negative, the impedance is capacitive.

The size and polarity of the reactive component x is important in im-

pedance matching. The best match to a complex impedance is the com-
SMITH CHART plex conjugate. This complex-sounding term simply means an imped-
ance with the same value of r and x, but with x of opposite polarity.
This term is best analyzed using a Smith Chart (Figure 3-18), which is
a plot of r and x.
INDUCTIVE
To display all the information on a single S-parameter requires one or
50 two traces, depending upon the format we want. A very common re-
quirement is to view forward reflection on a Smith Chart (one trace)
while observing forward transmission in Log Magnitude and Phase
CAPACITIVE
(two traces). Let us see how to accomplish this in the 37XXXD.

The 37XXXD has four channels. Each channel can display a complete
S-parameter in any format on either one or two traces. All four S-pa-
Figure 3-18. Smith Chart rameters can be seen simultaneously in any desired format. A total of
eight traces can be viewed at the same time. While this is a lot of infor-
mation to digest, the 37XXXD’s large color display makes recognizing
and analyzing the data surprisingly easy.

3-10 37XXXD OM
NETWORK ANALYZERS, A PRIMER NETWORK ANALYZERS

Another important parameter we can measure when phase informa-

tion is available is group delay. In linear devices, the phase change
through the DUT is linear-with-frequency. Thus, doubling the fre-
quency also doubles the phase change. An important measurement, es-
pecially for communications system users, is the rate of
change-of-phase-vs.-frequency (group delay). If the rate of
phase-change-vs.-frequency is not constant, the DUT is nonlinear. This
nonlinearity can create distortion in communications systems.

Measurement Error Correction

Since we can measure microwave signals in both magnitude and
phase, it is possible to correct for six major error terms:

q Source Test Port Match

q Load Test Port Match
q Directivity
q Isolation
q Transmission Frequency Response
q Reflection Frequency Response

We can correct for each of these six error terms in both the forward
and reverse directions, hence the name 12-term error correction. Since
12-term error correction requires both forward and reverse measure-
ment information, the test set must be reversing. “Reversing” means
that it must be able to apply the measurement signal in either the for-
ward or reverse direction.

To accomplish this error correction, we measure the magnitude and

MAGNITUDE AND PHASE OF phase of each error signal (Figure 3-19). Magnitude and phase infor-
EACH ERROR SIGNAL IS MEASURED mation appear as a vector that is mathematically applied to the mea-
surement signal. This process is termed vector error correction.

MAG Summary
A vector network analyzer is similar to a scalar network analyzer. The
PHASE major difference is that it adds the capability for measuring phase as
well as amplitude. With phase measurements comes scattering, or
THEN THE RESULTANT VECTOR IS S-parameters, which are a shorthand method for identifying forward
APPLIED MATHEMATICALLY, HENCE and reverse transmission and reflection characteristics. The ability to
VECTOR ERROR CORRECTION
measure phase introduces two new displays, polar and Smith Chart. It
also adds vector error correction to the measurement trace. With vec-
tor error correction, errors introduced by the measurement system are
Figure 3-19. Magnitude and
compensated for and measurement uncertainty is minimized. Phase
Phase
measurements also add the capability for measuring group delay,
which is the rate of change-of-phase vs. frequency (group delay). All in
all, using a network analyzer provides for making a more complete
analysis of your test device.

37XXXD OM 3-11/3-12
 Chapter 4
Front Panel Operation
Table of Contents

4-1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3

4-2 KEY-GROUPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
4-3 CALIBRATION KEY-GROUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
4-4 SAVE/RECALL MENU KEY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
4-5 MEASUREMENT KEY-GROUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
4-6 CHANNELS KEY-GROUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
4-7 DISPLAY KEY-GROUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
4-8 ENHANCEMENT KEY-GROUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29
4-9 HARD COPY KEY-GROUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
4-10 SYSTEM STATE KEY-GROUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33
4-11 MARKERS/LIMITS KEY-GROUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36
4-12 DISK STORAGE INTERFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40
Disk Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40
Disk Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40
Disk File Output Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41
Formatting a Data File Disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41
Copying Data Files From Disk to Disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41
Recovering From Disk Write/Read Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41
4-13 COMMAND LINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42
Create Directory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42
List Directory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42
Change Directory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42
Delete Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42
Remove Directory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43
Copy Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43
Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43
 25

Data Entry

Menu
7 8 9
3
MHz X1 GHz 10

4 5 6 ns cm us m

Enter 24
-3
1 2 3 kHz 10 Clear
ps mm Ret Loc

0
. -
1
Markers/Limits Channels Measurement

Channel Ch 1 Ch 2 Setup Data

Limits
Menu Menu Points

23
Marker Readout Ch 3 Ch 4 Hold Domain Appl
Menu Marker

Display Enhancement
Hard Copy

Option Video
Menu Graph Set Auto
Menu IF BW
Type Scale Scale
GPIB
Remote
System State Calibration
22
Talk Save/ Avg/
2 Listen
Default
Program
Utility
Menu
Begin
Cal
Apply
Cal
Recall Start Stop
Print
S
Params
Ref
Plane
Trace
Memory
Smooth
Menu
Trace
Smooth
Average
Menu Print
SRQ
Power

3 Local Lockout

4
Port 1 Port 2
! +24 dBm ! +27 dBm ! +27 dBm
! +24 dBm
a a
1 2
CAUTION
+30 dBm MAX
CAUTION
+30 dBm MAX 21
40 VDC MAX Port 1 ! +20 dBm ! +20 dBm
Port 2 40 VDC MAX
Bias Input
AVOID STATIC
Source Source AVOID STATIC Keyboard
DISCHARGE DISCHARGE Port 1 Port 2
b1 b2

! +30 dBm ! +30 dBm

5 ! 0.5A MAX

6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

Figure 4-1. Model 37XXXD Front Panel

 Chapter 4
Front Panel Operation
4-1 INTRODUCTION This chapter describes the front panel keys, controls, and menus. The
chapter is organized into an overall description of the front panel
key-groups and detailed descriptions of individual keys within the
key-groups.

4-2 KEY-GROUPS The following pages provide descriptions of the front panel key-groups
illustrated in Figure 4-1 on the previous page.

Index 1. LCD display: Displays any or all of the four mea-

surement channels, plus menus.

Index 2. Power: Turns the 37XXXD on and off. When on, the
operating program runs a self test then recalls the
parameters and functions in effect when previously
powered down.

Index 3. GPIB Indicators:

Remote: Lights when the 37XXXD switches to re-

mote (GPIB) control. It remains lit until the unit re-
turns to local control.

Talk: Lights when you address the 37XXXD to talk

and remains lit until unaddressed.

Listen: Lights when you address the 37XXXD to

listen and remains lit until unaddressed.

SRQ: Lights when the 37XXXD sends a Service Re-

quests (SRQ) to the external controller. The LED re-
mains lit until the 37XXXD receives a serial poll or
until the controller resets the SRQ function.

Local Lockout: Lights when a local lockout mes-

sage is received. The LED remains lit until the mes-
sage is rescinded. When lit, you cannot return the
37XXXD to local control via the front panel.

37XXXD OM 4-3
KEY-GROUPS FRONT PANEL OPERATION

Index 4. System State Keys: (Refer to section 4-10,

page 4-33, for details and menu flow diagrams.)

Default Program: Resets the front panel to the fac-

tory-preset state and displays Menu SU1 or SU3
(Appendix A). Pressing this key in conjunction with
the “0” or “1” key resets certain internal memories
and front panel key states (refer to sections 4-5 and
4-10).

NOTE
Use of the Default Program key will destroy
front panel and calibration setup data, un-
less they have been saved to disk.

Utility Menu: Displays the first in a series of menus

that let you perform diskette and other utility-type
functions and operations.

Index 5. Port 1 Test Connector: Provides an input test con-

nection for the device-under-test (DUT).

Index 6. Port 1 Source Loop: Provides for inserting addi-

tional amplification on Port 1 before the coupler.

Index 7. Calibration Keys: (Refer to section 4-3, page 4-10,

for details and menu flow diagrams.)

Begin Cal: Calls up the first in a sequence of

menus that guide you through a measurement cali-
bration. Refer to section 4-3 for a detailed discussion
of the calibration keys, indicators, and menus.

Apply Cal: Turns on and off the applied error cor-

rection and tune mode.

Index 8. a1 Loop: Provides direct access to Reference A

channel on Port 1 over the entire frequency range.
Refer to the front panel for damage levels.

Index 9. a2 Loop: Provides direct access to Reference B

channel on Port 2 over the entire frequency range.
Refer to the front panel for damage levels.

Index 10. b1 Loop: Provides direct access to Test A channel

on Port 1 over the entire frequency range. Refer to
the front panel for damage levels.

Index 11. b2 Loop: Provides direct access to Test B channel

on Port 2 over the entire frequency range. Refer to
the front panel for damage levels.

4-4 37XXXD OM
FRONT PANEL OPERATION KEY-GROUPS

Index 12. Save/Recall Menu Key: Displays the first of several

menus that let you save the current calibration or
front panel setup or recall a previously saved cali-
bration or setup. Refer to section 4-4, page 4-20, for
menu flow diagram.

Index 13. Markers/Limits Keys: (Refer to section 4-11,

page 4-36, for details and menu flow diagrams.)

Marker Menu: Displays the first in a series of

menus that let you set and manipulate marker fre-
quencies, times, and distances.

Readout Marker: Displays a menu that lists all of

the active markers. If no markers are active, the
marker menu is displayed.

Limits: Displays one of the menus that let you ma-

nipulate the limit lines.

Index 14. Port 2 Source: Provides for inserting additional

amplification on Port 2 before the coupler.

Index 15. Hard Copy Keys: (Refer to section 4-9, page 4-31,
for details and menu flow diagrams.)

Menu: Displays option menus that let you define

what will happen each time you press the Start
Print key. The displayed menu also selects disk I/O
operations.

Start Print: Tells the printer or plotter to start out-

put based on the current selections.

Stop Print: Immediately stops printing the data,

clears the print buffer, and sends a form-feed com-
mand to the printer.

Index 16. Port 2 Test Connector: Provides an input test con-

nection for the device-under-test (DUT).

37XXXD OM 4-5
KEY-GROUPS FRONT PANEL OPERATION

Index 17. Display Keys: (Refer to section 4-7, page 4-25, for
details and menu flow diagrams.)

Graph Type: Displays the two menus that let you

choose the graph type for the active channel.

Set Scale: Displays the appropriate scaling menu,

based on the graph type for the active channel.

Auto Scale: Automatically scales the active chan-

nel for optimum viewing.

S Params: Displays Menu SP (Appendix A), which

lets you choose between S11, S12, S21, or S22. You
may display the same parameter on two or more
channels.

Ref Plane: Displays the first of two menus that let

you set the reference plane for the active channel in
time or distance. For a correct distance readout, you
must set the dielectric constant to the correct value.
Refer to the discussion in menu RD2 (Appendix A).

Trace Memory: Displays the menus that let you do

any of the following. (1) Store the measured data in
memory. (2) View the stored data. (3) Add, subtract,
multiply, or divide the measured data from the
stored data (normalize to the stored memory). (4)
View both the measured and the stored data simul-
taneously on the active channel. (5) Store/Recall
saved data to disk. Four memories exist—one for
each channel. This lets you normalize the data in
each channel independently. The LED on this but-
ton lights when the active channel is displaying
memory data or measurement data normalized to
memory.

Index 18. Bias Input Connectors:

Port 1: Provides for supplying a bias voltage for the

Port 1 input.

Port 2: Provides for supplying a bias voltage for the

Port 2 input.

4-6 37XXXD OM
FRONT PANEL OPERATION KEY-GROUPS

Index 19. Enhancement Keys: (Refer to section 4-8,

page 4-29 for details and menu flow diagrams.)

Option Menu: Displays a series of menus showing

the choice of optional features.

Video IF BW: Displays a menu that lets you chose

between 10 kHz, 1 kHz, 100 Hz, or 10 Hz intermedi-
ate frequency (IF) bandwidth filters.

Avg/Smooth Menu: Displays a menu that lets you

enter values for Averaging and Smoothing.

Trace Smooth: Turns the trace smoothing function

on and off.

Average: Turns the average function on and off.

Index 20. Keyboard Connector: Provides for connecting any

external keyboard with a standard PS2 connector.
All alphanumeric field entries can be input from
this keyboard. These inputs include Device ID,
Model, Date, Operator Identification, frequencies,
filenames, as well as comment-type entries. The an-
alog knob and keypad input for these entries re-
mains active. The F1 through F12 function keys can
be used to access certain key and menu functions. A
template is provided. Two versions of an actual-size
template are provided in a foldout page at the end of
this chapter in the event a replacement is needed.

Index 21. Diskette Drive: Provides a drive for the 3.5-inch,

high-density (1.44 MB) floppy diskette used to store
selected front panel setups and calibrations. Refer to
section 4-12, page 4-40, for disk storage information.

37XXXD OM 4-7
KEY-GROUPS FRONT PANEL OPERATION

Index 22. Channels Keys: (Refer to section 4-6, page 4-24, for
details and menu flow diagrams.)

Channel Menu: Displays a menu that lets you se-

lect the format for the number of channels dis-
played.

Ch 1: Makes Channel 1 the active channel. The ac-

tive channel is the one acted on by the keys in the
Display section. Only one channel can be active at
any one time.

Ch 2: Makes Channel 2 the active channel.

Ch 3: Makes Channel 3 the active channel.

Ch 4: Makes Channel 4 the active channel.

Index 23. Measurement Keys: (Refer to section 4-5, page 4-21

for details and menu flow diagrams.)

Setup Menu: Displays the first of several menus

that let you select functions affecting measure-
ments.

Data Points: Displays a menu that lets you select

between 1601, 801, 401, 201, 101, or 51 data points.

Hold: Toggles the instrument in and out of the hold

mode; or it triggers a sweep, depending on the func-
tion selected in menu SU4 (Appendix A).

Domain: Displays the first in a series of menus that

let you set the Time Domain display parameters.
(This key is only active if your 37XXXD is equipped
with the Time Domain option.)

• If already in the Domain menus, pressing this

key will return to the first menu in the sequence.

• If in the Domain menus and another (non-time

domain) menu is displayed by pushing a menu
key, the last displayed domain menu redisplays
when the Domain key is next pressed.

Applications Menu: Displays the first in a series of

menus that provide instructions for adapter removal
and gain compression.

4-8 37XXXD OM
FRONT PANEL OPERATION KEY-GROUPS

Index 24. Data Entry Keys:

Rotary Knob: Used to alter measurement values

for the active parameter (Start Frequency, Stop Fre-
quency, Offset, etc.).

Keypad: Provides for entering values for the active

parameter. The active parameter is the one to which
the menu cursor is pointing.

MHz/X1/ns/cm: Terminates a value entered on the

keypad in the units shown—that is; megahertz for
frequency, unity for dimensionless or angle entries,
nanoseconds for time, or centimeters for length.

GHz/103/ms/m: Terminates a value entered on the

keypad in the units shown—that is; gigahertz for
frequency, 1´103 power for dimensionless or angle
entries, microseconds for time, or meters for length.

kHz/10-3/ps/mm: Terminates a value entered on the

keypad in the units shown—that is; kilohertz for
frequency, 1´10-3 for dimensionless or angle entries,
picoseconds for time, or millimeters for length.

• Clear/Ret Loc: Local (Non-GPIB) Mode: (1) The

key clears entries not yet terminated by one of
the terminator keys above, which allows the pre-
viously displayed values to redisplay. Or (2) the
key turns off the displayed menu and expands
the data area to fill the entire screen, if you have
not made any keypad entries needing termina-
tion.

• GBIB Mode: The key returns the instrument to

local (front panel) control, unless the controller
has sent a local lockout message (LLO) over the
bus.

Index 25. Menu Keys:

Arrow Keys: Moves the menu cursor up and down

to select items appearing in the menu area of the
LCD.

Enter: Implements the menu selection chosen using

the arrow keys.

37XXXD OM 4-9
CALIBRATION KEY-GROUP FRONT PANEL OPERATION

4-3 CALIBRATION The Calibration keys (Begin Cal and Apply Cal, below) are described
KEY-GROUP below. The calibration menus are diagramed according to the method
of calibration performed: Standard, Offset-Short, TRM or LRL/LRM.
The menu sequencing is complex and looping and can be said to have
two parts: setup and calibration. The setup flow for the four calibra-
tion methods is diagramed in Figures 4-3 through 4-6. Each setup flow
chart leads to the main calibration sequence, which is diagramed in
Figure 4-6. A full description of each menu is provided in Appendix A,
where the menus are arranged in alphabetical order by call letter (C1,
C2, C3, etc).

Begin Cal Key: This key displays a menu that lets you initiate the
calibration sequence. That is, to begin a sequence of steps that corrects
for errors inherent in a measurement setup.

Apply Cal Key: This key displays a menu (below) that lets you turn
on and off the error correction that may be applied to the displayed
channel(s) using the currently valid error-correction indicator. Addi-
tionally, the menu lets you turn the tune mode on and off and change
the number of forward sweeps between reverse sweeps (or reverse
sweeps between forward sweeps).

NOTE
Pressing the Clear key while in a calibration setup or se-
quencing will let you abort the calibration and return to
the first setup menu. Pressing the Setup Menu key will do
the same, but without requesting confirmation.

MENU CAL_APPLIED
Channels
. -

Measurement
APPLY
CALIBRATION
Display Enhancement

FULL 12-TERM
(S11, S21
X22, S12

APPLY ON (OFF)
Begin Apply CALIBRATION
Cal Cal
TUNE MODE ON (OFF)

NO. OF FWD (REV)

SWEEPS BETWEEN
REV (FWD) SWEEPS
XXXXX SWEEPS
(XXXXX (REMAINING)

PRESS <APPLY CAL>

TO TURN ON/OFF
PRESS <ENTER>
TO TURN ON/OFF

Figure 4-2. Calibration Key Group Menu

4-10 37XXXD OM
FRONT PANEL OPERATION CALIBRATION KEY-GROUP

Standard Calibration Setup Flow—Description

1. Pressing the Begin Cal key calls Menu C11.

2. With one exception, the flow is from left to right in the direction of
the arrow head. The exception occurs in Menu C1, for the TIME
DOMAIN choice. Here the flow direction reverses to Menu C2C
then returns to a left-to-right flow on to Menu C3 or C3D.

3. Arrowheads that point both left and right indicate that the flow
returns to the right-most menu after a choice had been made.

4. The group of menus to the left of Menu C3 and C3D are the initial
selection set and are essentially the same for all four calibration
types: Standard, Offset-Short, TRM, and LRL/LRM.

5. The group of menus that follow Menu C3 or C3D are, for the most
part, type specific. The selection of Menu C3 or C3D depends upon
the choice made in Menu C11A: COAXIAL or MICROSTRIP. For
the Standard Calibration, the WAVEGUIDE selection in Menu
C11A is not used.

37XXXD OM 4-11
CALIBRATION KEY-GROUP FRONT PANEL OPERATION

M E N U C 2 _ C E N T E R
M E N U C 4 _ P 1 o r _ P 2 M E N U C 4 A _ P 1 o r _ P 2
M E N U C 2 A
M E N U C 1 1 A C A L F R E Q R A N G E S E L E C T P O R T X M E N U C 1 2 _ P 1 o r _ P 2
M E N U C 2 S E L E C T P O R T X
C H A N G E C E N T E R IN S E R T C O N N E C T O R T Y P E C O N N E C T O R T Y P E
C A L M E T H O D X X X .X X X X X X X X X G H z IN D IV ID U A L T Y P E N (M ) P O R T X
M E N U C 1 1 C A L F R E Q R A N G E
A N D L IN E T Y P E
S P A N
F R E Q U E N C IE S C O A X K -C O N N (M )
K -C O N N (F )
T Y P E N (F ) O P E N D E V IC E
B e g in S T A R T
C a l B E G IN C A L IB R A T IO N N E X T C A L S T E P X X X .X X X X X X X X X G H z X X X .X X X X X X X X X G H z IN P U T A F R E Q , (S e e M e n u C 1 1 A ) T Y P E N (M ) 7 5 W
E N T E R T H E
C A P A C IT A N C E
P R E S S < E N T E R > V -C O N N (M ) T Y P E N (F ) 7 5 W
K E E P E X IS T IN G T o M e n u C A L M E T H O D S T O P S E T S T A R T /S T O P T O IN S E R T M E N U C 3 V -C O N N (F ) C O E F F IC IE N T S
C A L D A T A S U 1 /S U 3 * X X X .X X X X X X X X X G H z
S O L T (S T A N D A R D ) X X X D A T A P O IN T (S ) 7 /1 6 (M ) T E R M 1 -C 0
N E X T F R E Q . W 1 -C O N N (M )
S E T C E N T E R /S P A N X X .X X X X X X X X X G H z C O N F IR M 7 /1 6 (F ) + X X .X X e - 1 5
R E P E A T T o C a l X X X .X X X X X X X X X G H z W 1 -C O N N (F )
S T E P S IZ E C A L IB R A T IO N
P R E V IO U S C A L S e q ** S S L T (D O U B L E
X X X D A T A P O IN T S X X X F R E Q S . P A R A M E T E R S T N C (M ) T E R M 2 -C 1
O F F S E T S H O R T N U M O F D A T A P O IN T S S M A (M )
A U T O C A L X X X .X X X X X X X X X G H z E N T E R E D , T N C (F ) + X X X .X X e - 2 7
W IT H L O A D ) 1 6 0 1 M A X P T S S M A (F )
S T E P S IZ E L A S T F R E Q W A S P O R T 1 C O N N
C A L M E T H O D 8 0 1 M A X P T S X X X .X X X X X X X X X G H z X X X X X X X X 2 .4 m m (M ) T E R M 3 -C 2
S S S T (T R IP L E G P C -3 .5 (M ) + X X X .X X e - 3 6
S T A N D A R D N U M O F D A T A P O IN T S 4 0 1 M A X P T S 2 .4 m m (F )
O F F S E T S H O R T ) P O R T 2 C O N N G P C -3 .5 (F )
2 0 1 M A X P T S A U T O IN C R O N (O F F )
T R A N S M IS S IO N 1 6 0 1 M A X P T S X X X X X X X X T E R M 4 -C 3
L R L /L R M 1 0 1 M A X P T S X X X .X X X X X X X X X G H z S P E C IA L (M )
L IN E T Y P E : 8 0 1 M A X P T S G P C -7 + X X X .X X e - 4 5
5 1 M A X P T S S P E C IA L (F )
X X X X X X X X 4 0 1 M A X P T S P R E V IO U S M E N U R E F L E C T IO N
T R M 2 0 1 M A X P T S E N T E R T H E
P A IR IN G U S E R D E F IN E D
1 0 1 M A X P T S N E X T C A L S T E P U S E R D E F IN E D O F F S E T L E N G T H
C H A N G E C A L T R A N S M IS S IO N P R E S S < E N T E R > X X X X X X
M E T H O D A N D L IN E T Y P E 5 1 M A X P T S P R E S S < E N T E R > T O S E L E C T M O R E
L O A D T Y P E M O R E O F F S E T L E N G T H
L IN E T Y P E T O S E L E C T O R T U R N O N /O F F C
X X X X X X X X C + X X .X X X X m m
C O A X IA L N E X T C A L S T E P P R E S S < E N T E R > P R E S S < E N T E R >
N E X T C A L S T E P T O S E L E C T P R E S S < E N T E R >
W A V E G U ID E P R E S S < E N T E R > T H R O U G H L IN E T O S E L E C T
O R C H A N G E W H E N C O M P L E T E
P R E S S < E N T E R > T O S E L E C T P A R A M E T E R S
M IC R O S T R IP
T O S E L E C T R E F E R E N C E
P R E S S
IM P E D A N C E
< E N T E R > M E N U C 1 3
T O S E L E C T M E N U C 4 B
T E S T S IG N A L S
M E N U C 5 S E L E C T M E N U C 6
M E N U C 1 2 A _ P 1 o r _ P 2
M E N U C 5 D S T A R T C A L R E F L E C T IO N S E L E C T P O R T X
S E L E C T P A IR IN G O P E N & S H O R T S E L E C T
P R E S S < E N T E R > P O R T X
C A L IB R A T IO N T Y P E S E L E C T U S E M E N U C 2 B S P E C IA L (M ) T Y P E O F L O A D
T O S E L E C T S H O R T D E V IC E
O F IS O L A T IO N O R C H A N G E M IX E D S P E C IA L (F )
F U L L 1 2 -T E R M IN C A L IB R A T IO N S IN G L E P O IN T (O P E N -S H O R T B R O A D B A N D E N T E R T H E
1 P A T H M E N U C 5 A C .W . C A L IB R A T IO N S H O R T -O P E N ) U S E R D E F IN E D F IX E D L O A D IN D U C T A N C E
M E N U C 1
2 P O R T IN C L U D E P R E S S < E N T E R > C O E F F IC IE N T S
C .W . F R E Q S L ID IN G L O A D
S E L E C T IS O L A T IO N S E L E C T M A T C H E D T O S E L E C T (M A Y A L S O
T R A N S M IS S IO N X X .X X X X X X X X G H z T E R M 1 - L 0
1 P A T H 2 P O R T (S T A N D A R D ) C A L IB R A T IO N A (O P E N -O P E N R E Q U IR E A
F R E Q U E N C Y C A L IB R A T IO N T Y P E D A T A P O IN T S S H O R T -S H O R T ) -X X X X .X X e -1 2
B R O A D B A N D
R E S P O N S E E X C L U D E N E X T C A L S T E P M E N U C 1 7
T o C a l T o M e n u F IX E D L O A D ) T E R M 2 - L 1
F O R W A R D P A T H IS O L A T IO N N O R M A L C A L _ S U 2 * P R E S S < E N T E R >
R E F L E C T IO N P R E S S < E N T E R > S e q ** -X X X X .X X e -2 4
(S 1 1 , S 2 1 ) (1 6 0 1 P O IN T S T O S E L E C T E N T E R
O N L Y M A X IM U M T O S E L E C T T E R M 3 - L 2
P R E S S < E N T E R > R E F E R E N C E P R E S S < E N T E R >
P R E S S < E N T E R >
R E V E R S E P A T H
(S 2 2 , S 1 2 )
T O S E L E C T C .W . M IC R O S T R IP IM P E D A N C E T O S E L E C T -X X X X .X X e -3 3
T O S E L E C T (1 P O IN T )
M E N U C 2 D (S e e M e n u C 1 1 A ) R E F E R E N C E
T E R M 4 - L 3
-X X X X .X X e -4 2
P R E S S < E N T E R > M E N U C 2 C N - D IS C R E T E IM P E D A N C E
T O S E L E C T F R E Q U E N C IE S D IS C R E T E F IL L M E N U C 3 D X X X .X X X 9 E N T E R T H E
C A L IB R A T IO N (2 T O 1 6 0 1 O F F S E T L E N G T H
R A N G E P O IN T S ) IN P U T S T A R T , C O N F IR M P R E S S < E N T E R > M E N U C 1 6 A
M E N U C 5 B IN C R , P O IN T S , C A L IB R A T IO N T o M e n u W H E N C O M P L E T E O F F S E T L E N G T H
H A R M O N IC C A L T IM E D O M A IN T H E N S E L E C T C 1 3 A o r B *** X X .X X X X m m
P A R A M E T R S E N T E R
F O R T IM E D O M A IN (H A R M O N IC ) "F IL L R A N G E "
S E L E C T M IC R O S T R IP
T R A N S M IS S IO N P O R T 1 P A R A M E T E R S P R E S S < E N T E R >
P R E S S < E N T E R > S T A R T F R E Q W H E N C O M P L E T E
F R E Q R E S P O N S E S T A R T (S T E P ) O P E N /S H O R T M E N U C 2 0
T O S E L E C T X X X .X X X X X X X X X G H z
C A L IB R A T IO N T Y P E X X X .X X X X X X X X X G H z
P O R T 2
IN C R E M E N T E N T E R W ID T H O F
F O R W A R D P A T H O P E N /S H O R T
M E N U C 5 C A P P R O X IM A T E S T O P X X X .X X X X X X X X X G H z T H R O U G H L IN E S T R IP
(S 2 1 ) X X X .X X X X X X X X X G H z R E F L E C T IO N P A R A M E T E R S X X .X X X X m m
S E L E C T N U M B E R O F P T S P A R IN G A
R E V E R S E P A T H U S IN G A B O V E X X X P O IN T (S ) O F F S E T L E N G T H T H IC K N E S S O F
R E F L E C T IO N O N L Y
(S 1 2 ) S T A R T A N D S T O P L O A D IM P E D A N C E X X X X X X m m S U B S T R A T E
C A L IB R A T IO N T Y P E
W IL L R E S U L T IN S T O P F R E Q X X X X X X X X X X .X X X X m m
B O T H P A T H S X X X D A T A P O IN T S X X X .X X X X X X X X X G H z T H R O U G H L IN E M E N U C 6 A
P O R T 1 O N L Y (S 2 1 , S 1 2 ) X X X .X X X X X X X X X G H z T H R O U G H L IN E IM P E D A N C E Z c
(S 1 1 ) F IL L R A N G E
T R U E S T O P F R E Q P A R A M E T E R S X .X X X X 9 M E N U C 1 6 X .X X X p 9 B R O A D B A N D L O A D
( X X X E N T E R E D )
P O R T 2 O N L Y P R E S S < E N T E R > X X X X X X X X P A R A M E T E R S
T O S E L E C T P R E S S < E N T E R > S U B S T R A T E
(S 2 2 ) N E X T C A L S T E P IN D IV ID U A L S E L E C T
W H E N C O M P L E T E D IE L E C T R IC IM P E D A N C E
F R E Q IN S E R T M IC R O S T R IP M IC R O S T R IP X .X X X X .X X X 9
B O T H P O R T S P A R A M E T E R S K IT T O U S E
(S 1 1 , S 2 2 ) P R E S S < E N T E R > C L E A R A L L X X X X X X X X X X X IN D U C D A N C E
T O S E L E C T 1 0 M IL K IT E F F E C T IV E X X .X X X p H
F IN IS H E D T E S T S IG N A L S D IE L E C T R IC
P R E S S < E N T E R > N E X T C A L S T E P 1 5 M IL K IT X .X X P R E S S < E N T E R >
T O S E L E C T S T A R T C A L W H E N C O M P L E T E
P R E S S < E N T E R > 2 5 M IL K IT (R E C O M M E N D E D
T O S E L E C T T o M e n u 1 .0 0 )
P R E S S < E N T E R > C A L _ S U 2 * U S E R D E F IN E D
T O S E L E C T
O R C H A N G E T o C a l P R E S S < E N T E R > P R E S S < E N T E R >
S e q ** T O S E L E C T W H E N C O M P L E T E A o r B

B
* Setup Menu SU1/SU3 – See Figure 4-6
** Cal Seq (Calibration Sequence) – See Figure 4-5
Figure 4-3. Menu Sequencing, Standard Calibration
*** Reflection Pairing Menu C13A or C13B – See Figure 4-4

4-12 37XXXD OM
FRONT PANEL OPERATION CALIBRATION KEY-GROUP

SSLT and SSST (Offset-Short)

Calibration Setup Flow—Description

1. Pressing the Begin Cal key calls Menu C13.

2. With one exception, the flow is from left to right in the direction of
the arrow head. The exception occurs in Menu C1, for the TIME
DOMAIN choice. Here the flow direction reverses to Menu C2C
then returns to a left-to-right flow on to Menu C3A, C3C, or C3B.

3. Arrowheads that point both left and right indicate that the flow
returns to the right-most menu after a choice had been made.

4. The group of menus to the left of Menu C3A, C3C, or C3B are the
initial selection set and are essentially the same for all four
calibration types: Standard, Offset-Short, TRM, and LRL/LRM.

5. The group of menus that follow Menu C3A, C3C, or C3B are, for
the most part, type specific. The selection of Menu C3A, C3C, or
C3B depends upon the choice made in Menu C11A: COAXIAL,
WAVEGUIDE, or MICROSTRIP.

37XXXD OM 4-13
FRONT PANEL OPERATION CALIBRATION KEY-GROUP

M E N U C 1 1 A M E N U C 2 _ C E N T E R C O A X M E N U C 3 A M E N U C 1 4 M E N U C 2 1 A M E N U C 2 1 B M E N U C 2 1 C M E N U C 2 0
C H A N G E C A L F R E Q R A N G E (S e e M e n u C 1 1 A ) C O N F IR M S E L E C T P O R T X P O R T X P O R T X P O R T X E N T E R
C A L M E T H O D A C A L IB R A T IO N O F F S E T S H O R T O F F S E T S H O R T 1 O F F S E T S H O R T 2 O F F S E T S H O R T 3 T H R O U G H L IN E
A N D L IN E T Y P E C E N T E R P A R A M E T R S C O N N E C O T R T Y P E E N T E R T H E E N T E R T H E E N T E R T H E P A R A M E T E R S
M E N U C 2
X X X .X X X X X X X X X G H z IN D U C T A N C E IN D U C T A N C E IN D U C T A N C E
P O R T 1 C O N N W 1 -C O N N (M )
M E N U C 1 1 T o M e n u N E X T C A L S T E P C O E F F IC IE N T S C O E F F IC IE N T S C O E F F IC IE N T S O F F S E T L E N G T H
C A L F R E Q R A N G E S P A N W 1 -C O N N (M ) W 1 -C O N N (F )
S U 1 /S U 3 * X X X X X X m m
C A L M E T H O D X X X .X X X X X X X X X G H z
B E G IN C A L IB R A T IO N
S T A R T P O R T 2 C O N N S P E C IA L A (M ) L 0 [e -1 2 H ] L 0 [e -1 2 H ] L 0 [e -1 2 H ] D
S O L T (S T A N D A R D ) X X X .X X X X X X X X X G H z S E T S T A R T /S T O P + X X X X .X X X X + X X X X .X X X X + X X X X .X X X X T H R O U G H L IN E
W 1 -C O N N (M ) S P E C IA L A (F )
B e g in K E E P E X IS T IN G IM P E D A N C E
S T O P X X X D A T A P O IN T (S ) X .X X X X 9
C a l C A L D A T A S S L T (D O U B L E R E F L E C T IO N S P E C IA L B (M ) L 1 [e -2 4 H /H z ] L 1 [e -2 4 H /H z ] L 1 [e -2 4 H /H z ]
X X X .X X X X X X X X X G H z X X .X X X X X X X X X G H z
O F F S E T S H O R T S T E P S IZ E P A IR IN G F S P E C IA L B (F ) + X X X X .X X X X + X X X X .X X X X + X X X X .X X X X
P R E S S < E N T E R >
R E P E A T W IT H L O A D ) S E T C E N T E R /S P A N X X X X X X X X
L 2 [e -3 3 H /H z 2] L 2 [e -3 3 H /H z 2] L 2 [e -3 3 H /H z 2] W H E N C O M P L E T E
P R E V IO U S C A L N U M O F D A T A P O IN T S S P E C IA L C (M )
S S S T (T R IP L E X X X D A T A P O IN T S + X X X X .X X X X + X X X X .X X X X + X X X X .X X X X
A U T O C A L X X X .X X X X X X X X X G H z 1 6 0 1 M A X P T S L O A D T Y P E E S P E C IA L C (F )
O F F S E T S H O R T ) X X X X X X X X
T o C a l S T E P S IZ E 8 0 1 M A X P T S L 3 [e -4 2 H /H z 3] L 3 [e -4 2 H /H z 3] L 3 [e -4 2 H /H z 3]
C A L M E T H O D S e q ** 4 0 1 M A X P T S U S E R D E F IN E D
L R L /L R M T H R O U G H L IN E + X X X X .X X X X + X X X X .X X X X + X X X X .X X X X
S T A N D A R D N U M O F D A T A P O IN T S 2 0 1 M A X P T S D P R E S S < E N T E R >
T R M 1 0 1 M A X P T S P A R A M E T E R S W H E N C O M P L E T E
1 6 0 1 M A X P T S E N T E R T H E E N T E R T H E E N T E R T H E M E N U C 1 3 A
T R A N S M IS S IO N 5 1 M A X P T S
8 0 1 M A X P T S R E F E R E N C E O F F S E T L E N G T H O F F S E T L E N G T H O F F S E T L E N G T H
L IN E T Y P E : T R A N S M IS S IO N
4 0 1 M A X P T S IM P E D A N C E M E N U C 1 7 S E L E C T
X X X X X X X X L IN E T Y P E N E X T C A L S T E P
2 0 1 M A X P T S O F F S E T L E N G T H O F F S E T L E N G T H O F F S E T L E N G T H R E F L E C T IO N
C H A N G E C A L C O A X IA L 1 0 1 M A X P T S P R E S S < E N T E R > T E S T S IG N A L S E N T E R + X X X .X X X X m m + X X X .X X X X m m + X X X .X X X X m m P A IR IN G
M E T H O D A N D 5 1 M A X P T S T O S E L E C T R E F E R E N C E P R E S S < E N T E R > P R E S S < E N T E R > P R E S S < E N T E R >
W A V E G U ID E M IX E D
L IN E T Y P E S T A R T C A L IM P E D A N C E W H E N C O M P L E T E W H E N C O M P L E T E W H E N C O M P L E T E (S H O R T 1 -S H O R T 2 ,
M IC R O S T R IP N E X T C A L S T E P T o M e n u F o r S S L T S H O R T 2 -S H O R T 1 )
P R E S S < E N T E R > C A L _ S U 2 * R E F E R E N C E
N E X T C A L S T E P
P R E S S P R E S S < E N T E R > T O S E L E C T IM P E D A N C E
< E N T E R > T O S E L E C T O R C H A N G E T o C a l M E N U C 1 6 A M A T C H E D
P R E S S < E N T E R > X X X .X X X 9
T O S E L E C T S e q ** (S H O R T 1 -S H O R T 1 ,
T O S E L E C T E N T E R
M E N U C 2 D S H O R T 2 -S H O R T 2 )
P R E S S < E N T E R >
M IC R O S T R IP
W H E N C O M P L E T E P R E S S < E N T E R >
P A R A M E T E R S
D IS C R E T E F IL L
M E N U C 5 M IC R O S T R IP M E N U C 3 C
W ID T H O F
T O S E L E C T
IN P U T S T A R T ,
M E N U C 5 D IN C R , P O IN T S , (S e e M e n u C 1 1 A ) C O N F IR M M E N U C 1 4 A M E N U C 1 6 S T R IP
S E L E C T
T H E N S E L E C T B C A L IB R A T IO N X X .X X X X m m F M E N U C 1 3 B
C A L IB R A T IO N T Y P E S E L E C T P O R T X S E L E C T
"F IL L R A N G E " P A R A M E T E R S
S E L E C T U S E O F F S E T S H O R T M IC R O S T R IP T H IC K N E S S O F S E L E C T
F U L L 1 2 -T E R M O F IS O L A T IO N P O R T 1 S H O R T S C O N N E C O T R T Y P E
S T A R T F R E Q K IT T O U S E S U B S T R A T E R E F L E C T IO N
IN C A L IB R A T IO N U S E R D E F IN E D
1 P A T H X X X .X X X X X X X X X G H z X X X X .X X X X m m P A IR IN G
M E N U C 5 A S P E C IA L A (M )
2 P O R T 1 0 M IL K IT M IX E D
P O R T 2 S H O R T S S P E C IA L A (F ) Z c
IN C L U D E IN C R E M E N T (S H O R T 1 -S H O R T 2 ,
S E L E C T U S E R D E F IN E D 1 5 M IL K IT X .X X X p 9
T R A N S M IS S IO N IS O L A T IO N X X X .X X X X X X X X X G H z S H O R T 2 -S H O R T 3 ,
1 P A T H 2 P O R T S P E C IA L B (M )
F R E Q U E N C Y (S T A N D A R D ) 2 5 M IL K IT S H O R T 3 -S H O R T 1 )
C A L IB R A T IO N T Y P E N U M B E R O F P T S R E F L E C T IO N S P E C IA L B (F ) S U B S T R A T E
R E S P O N S E P A IR IN G F D IE L E C T R IC
E X C L U D E X X X P O IN T (S ) U S E R D E F IN E D F o r S S S T M A T C H E D
F O R W A R D P A T H X X X X X X S P E C IA L C (M ) X .X X
R E F L E C T IO N IS O L A T IO N S T O P F R E Q S P E C IA L C (F ) (S H O R T 1 -S H O R T 1 ,
(S 1 1 , S 2 1 ) P R E S S < E N T E R >
O N L Y X X X .X X X X X X X X X G H z L O A D T Y P E S H O R T 2 -S H O R T 2 ,
E T O S E L E C T E F F E C T IV E
P R E S S < E N T E R > X X X X X X X X U S E R D E F IN E D S H O R T 3 -S H O R T 3 )
P R E S S < E N T E R > R E V E R S E P A T H F IL L R A N G E D IE L E C T R IC
T O S E L E C T
T O S E L E C T (S 2 2 , S 1 2 ) ( X X X E N T E R E D ) X .X X P R E S S < E N T E R >
T H R O U G H L IN E P R E S S < E N T E R >
P A R A M E T E R S
D W H E N C O M P L E T E (R E C O M M E N D E D T O S E L E C T
P R E S S < E N T E R > IN D IV ID U A L 1 .0 0 )
T O S E L E C T F R E Q IN S E R T
M E N U C 5 C M IC R O S T R IP
C L E A R A L L P A R A M E T E R S P R E S S < E N T E R >
S E L E C T X X X X X X X X X X X W H E N C O M P L E T E
R E F L E C T IO N O N L Y F IN IS H E D
C A L IB R A T IO N T Y P E M E N U C 1 N E X T C A L S T E P T E S T S IG N A L S M E N U C 6
M E N U C 1 5
S E L E C T P R E S S < E N T E R > S E L E C T
P O R T 1 O N L Y S T A R T C A L
C A L IB R A T IO N T O S E L E C T T Y P E O F L O A D
(S 1 1 ) T o M e n u S E L E C T
D A T A P O IN T S P R E S S < E N T E R > C A L _ S U 2 * W A V E G U ID E
C
P O R T 2 O N L Y T O S E L E C T M E N U C 1 5 A B R O A D B A N D
N O R M A L K IT T O U S E
(S 2 2 ) M E N U C 2 A O R C H A N G E T o C a l F IX E D L O A D
(1 6 0 1 P O IN T S S e q ** E N T E R W A V E G U ID E M E N U C 1 5 C
M A X IM U M -IN S T A L L E D K IT -
IN S E R T P A R A M E T E R S S L ID IN G L O A D
B O T H P O R T S
ID E N T IF IE R E
(S 1 1 , S 2 2 ) C .W . IN D IV ID U A L S E L E C T (M A Y A L S O
F R E Q U E N C IE S X X X X W A V E G U ID E W A V E G U ID E M E N U C 1 5 D R E Q U IR E A
M E N U C 2 C
(1 P O IN T )
W A V E G U ID E M E N U C 3 B C U T O F F F R E Q K IT T O U S E B R O A D B A N D
P R E S S < E N T E R > C U T O F F F R E Q : X X X .X X X X X X X X X G H z
T O S E L E C T C A L IB R A T IO N
N -
F R
D IS
E Q
C R E T E
U E N C IE S
IN P U T A F R E Q ,
P R E S S < E N T E R >
(S e e M e n u C 1 1 A ) C O N F IR M X X .X X X X X X X X G H z -IN S T A L L E D K IT - S E L E C
W A V E G U
T
ID E
F IX E D L O A D )
R A N G E (2 T O 1 6 0 1 T O IN S E R T
C C A L IB R A T IO N O F F S E T L E N G T H
K IT T O U S E
S H O R T 1 O F S H O R T 1 ID E N T IF IE R :
P O IN T S ) P A R A M E T E R S P R E S S < E N T E R >
H A R M O N IC C A L X X .X X X X m m X .X X X X m m X X X X W A V E G U ID E
N E X T F R E Q . T O S E L E C T
F O R T IM E D O M A IN W A V E G U ID E F o r S S L T C U T O F F F R E Q
T IM E D O M A IN X X X .X X X X X X X X X G H z S H O R T 2
P A R A M E T E R S O F F S E T L E N G T H C U T O F F F R E Q : X X X .X X X X X X X X X G H z
M E N U C 5 B (H A R M O N IC ) X X .X X X X m m
X X X F R E Q S . X X X X X X O F S H O R T 2 X X X .X X X X X X X X X G H z
S T A R T (S T E P ) O F F S E T L E N G T H
P R E S S < E N T E R > E N T E R E D , X .X X X X m m
S E L E C T X X X .X X X X X X X X X G H z U S E IN S T A L L E D O F S H O R T 1
T O S E L E C T L A S T F R E Q W A S R E F L E C T IO N S H O R T 1 : M E N U C 6 A
T R A N S M IS S IO N F W A V E G U ID E K IT P R E S S < E N T E R > + X .X X X X m m
X X X .X X X X X X X X X G H z P A IR IN G + X X .X X X X m m
F R E Q R E S P O N S E A P P R O X IM A T E S T O P W H E N C O M P L E T E B R O A D B A N D L O A D
X X X X X X U S E R D E F IN E D
C A L IB R A T IO N T Y P E X X X .X X X X X X X X X G H z O F F S E T L E N G T H P A R A M E T E R S
M E N U C 2 B A U T O IN C R O N (O F F ) S H O R T 2 :
X X X .X X X X X X X X X G H z L O A D T Y P E P R E S S < E N T E R > + X X .X X X X m m O F S H O R T 2 IM P E D A N C E
F O R W A R D P A T H U S IN G A B O V E
S IN G L E P O IN T X X X X X X X X E T O S E L E C T + X .X X X X m m X X .X X X 9
(S 2 1 ) S T A R T A N D S T O P
C .W . C A L IB R A T IO N P R E V IO U S M E N U C S H O R T 3 :
W IL L R E S U L T IN F o r S S S T + X X .X X X X m m O F F S E T L E N G T H
R E V E R S E P A T H T H R O U G H L IN E IN D U C T A N C E
X X X D A T A P O IN T S P R E S S < E N T E R > D O F S H O R T 3
(S 1 2 ) C .W . F R E Q P A R A M E T E R S X X .X X X p H
X X X .X X X X X X X X X G H z T O S E L E C T + X .X X X X m m
X X .X X X X X X X X G H z U S E IN S T A L L E D
T R U E S T O P F R E Q O R T U R N O N /O F F
B O T H P A T H S T E S T S IG N A L S W A V E G U ID E K IT
P R E S S < E N T E R > P R E S S < E N T E R >
(S 2 1 , S 1 2 ) N E X T C A L S T E P T O S E L E C T
N E X T C A L S T E P S T A R T C A L T o M e n u U S E R D E F IN E D W H E N C O M P L E T E
P R E S S < E N T E R > P R E S S < E N T E R > P R E S S < E N T E R > C A L _ S U 2 *
T O S E L E C T P R E S S < E N T E R > T O S E L E C T T O S E L E C T T o C a l P R E S S < E N T E R >
S e q ** T O S E L E C T
T O S E L E C T O R C H A N G E C A

Figure 4-4. Menu Sequencing, SSLT and SSST

(Offset-Short) Calibration

4-14 37XXXD OM
FRONT PANEL OPERATION CALIBRATION KEY-GROUP

LRL/LRM Calibration Setup Flow—Description

1. Pressing the Begin Cal key calls Menu C15.

2. With one exception, the flow is from left to right in the direction of
the arrow head. The exception occurs in Menu C1, for the TIME
DOMAIN choice. Here the flow direction reverses to Menu C2C
then returns to a left-to-right flow on to Menu C3E, C3G, or C3F.

3. Arrowheads that point both left and right indicate that the flow
returns to the right-most menu after a choice had been made.

4. The group of menus to the left of Menu C3E, C3G, or C3F are the
initial selection set and are essentially the same for all four
calibration types: Standard, Offset-Short, TRM, and LRL/LRM.

5. The group of menus that follow Menu C3E, C3G, or C3F are, for
the most part, type specific. The selection of Menu C3E, C3G, or
C3F depends upon the choice made in Menu C11A: COAXIAL,
WAVEGUIDE, or MICROSTRIP.

37XXXD OM 4-15
CALIBRATION KEY-GROUP FRONT PANEL OPERATION

M E N U C 2 _ C E N T E R C O A X M E N U C 1 8 M E N U C 1 9
M E N U C 1 1 M E N U C 2 C A L F R E Q R A N G E (S e e M e n u C 1 1 A ) M E N U C 1 8 A
C H A N G E L R L /L R M
M E N U C 1 1 A C H A N G E L R L /L R M
C H A N G E L R L /L R M P A R A M E T E R S
C A L F R E Q R A N G E C E N T E R M E N U C 3 E P A R A M E T E R S
B E G IN C A L IB R A T IO N O N E B A N D P A R A M E T E R S
C H A N G E X X X .X X X X X X X X X G H z N E X T C A L S T E P A
B e g in T o M e n u S T A R T N E X T C A L S T E P N E X T C A L S T E P
K E E P E X IS T IN G C A L M E T H O D C O N F IR M
C a l S U 1 /S U 3 * X X X .X X X X X X X X X G H z S P A N B
C A L D A T A A N D L IN E T Y P E C A L IB R A T IO N N U M B E R O F R E F L E C T IO N
X X X .X X X X X X X X X G H z C H A R A C T E R IZ E
S T O P P A R A M E T E R S B A N D S U S E D O F F S E T L E N G T H
R E P E A T C A L D E V IC E S C
T o C a l N E X T C A L S T E P X X X .X X X X X X X X X G H z S E T S T A R T /S T O P + X X X .X X X m m
P R E V IO U S C A L S e q ** L R L /L R M O N E B A N D D E V IC E 1
C A L M E T H O D S E T C E N T E R /S P A N X X X D A T A P O IN T (S ) P A R A M E T E R S R E F L E C T IO N T Y P E
A U T O C A L T W O B A N D S L IN E 1 (R E F )
X X .X X X X X X X X X G H z
S T A N D A R D X X X D A T A P O IN T S X .X X X X m m
S T E P S IZ E A R E F E R E N C E L O C A T IO N O F T W O B A N D S G R E A T E R T H A N Z o
C A L M E T H O D (N O T U S E D F O R X X X .X X X X X X X X X G H z IM P E D A N C E R E F E R E N C E D E V IC E 2
S T A N D A R D W A V E G U ID E ) S T E P S IZ E N U M O F D A T A P O IN T S
T o M e n u P L A N E S L IN E /M A T C H L E S S T H A N Z o
1 6 0 1 M A X P T S T E S T S IG N A L S C A L _ S U 2 *
T R A N S M IS S IO N O F F S E T S H O R T N U M O F D A T A P O IN T S X .X X X X m m /F U L L B A N D
8 0 1 M A X P T S M ID D L E O F M A T C H P A R A M E T E R S
L IN E T Y P E : S T A R T C A L
L R L /L R M 1 6 0 1 M A X P T S 4 0 1 M A X P T S L IN E 1 (R E F ) P R E S S < E N T E R >
X X X X X X X X
8 0 1 M A X P T S 2 0 1 M A X P T S P R E S S < E N T E R > T O S E L E C T M A T C H IM P E D A N C E
T R A N S M IS S IO N 4 0 1 M A X P T S 1 0 1 M A X P T S T O S E L E C T E N D S O F O R S W IT C H
C H A N G E C A L T o C a l + X X X .X X X 9
L IN E T Y P E 2 0 1 M A X P T S 5 1 M A X P T S O R C H A N G E L IN E 1 (R E F )
M E T H O D A N D S e q **
L IN E T Y P E 1 0 1 M A X P T S M A T C H IN D U C T A N C E
C O A X IA L P R E S S < E N T E R >
5 1 M A X P T S N E X T C A L S T E P + X X X X .X X X X p H
T O S E L E C T
N E X T C A L S T E P W A V E G U ID E P R E S S < E N T E R >
N E X T C A L S T E P M E N U C 1 8 B P R E S S < E N T E R >
P R E S S < E N T E R > M IC R O S T R IP T O S E L E C T T O S E L E C T
T O S E L E C T P R E S S < E N T E R > C H A N G E L R L /L R M
P R E S S T O S E L E C T P A R A M E T E R S
< E N T E R >
T O S E L E C T M IC R O S T R IP N E X T C A L S T E P

(S e e M e n u C 1 1 A ) C H A R A C T E R IZ E
C A L D E V IC E S
M E N U C 3 G
M E N U C 5 D D E V IC E 1
C O N F IR M L IN E 1 (R E F )
S E L E C T U S E M E N U C 2 B C A L IB R A T IO N X X .X X X X
O F IS O L A T IO N P A R A M E T E R S
IN C A L IB R A T IO N S IN G L E P O IN T D E V IC E 2
C .W . C A L IB R A T IO N M E N U C 1 7 L IN E /M A T C H
M E N U C 1 L R L /L R M
IN C L U D E B P A R A M E T E R S X X .X X X X /L O W B A N D
C .W . F R E Q E N T E R
IS O L A T IO N S E L E C T
X X .X X X X X X X X G H z M IC R O S T R IP R E F E R E N C E D E V IC E 3
(S T A N D A R D ) C A L IB R A T IO N
P A R A M E T E R S IM P E D A N C E L IN E /M A T C H
D A T A P O IN T S
N E X T C A L S T E P U S E R D E F IN E D X X .X X X X /H IG H B A N D
E X C L U D E R E F E R E N C E
IS O L A T IO N N O R M A L T o M e n u F R E Q A F T E R
(1 6 0 1 P O IN T S P R E S S < E N T E R > IM P E D A N C E
T E S T S IG N A L S C A L _ S U 2 * W H IC H T H E U S E
M A X IM U M T O S E L E C T X X X .X X X 9
P R E S S < E N T E R > S T A R T C A L O F D E V IC E 2
T O S E L E C T C .W . P R E S S < E N T E R > A N D D E V IC E 3
M E N U C 2 A P R E S S < E N T E R > W H E N C O M P L E T E IS E X C H A N G E D
(1 P O IN T )
M E N U C 2 D T O S E L E C T
N - D IS C R E T E IN S E R T O R C H A N G E T o C a l M E N U C 1 6 A
F R E Q U E N C IE S IN D IV ID U A L S e q ** B R E A K P O IN T
D IS C R E T E F IL L
M E N U C 2 C (2 T O 1 6 0 1 F R E Q U E N C IE S X X X .X X X X X X X X X G H Z E N T E R
P O IN T S ) IN P U T S T A R T , M IC R O S T R IP
IN C R , P O IN T S , P R E S S < E N T E R >
C A L IB R A T IO N IN P U T A F R E Q , P A R A M E T E R S
T H E N S E L E C T T O S E L E C T
R A N G E T IM E D O M A IN P R E S S < E N T E R >
"F IL L R A N G E " O R S W IT C H
(H A R M O N IC ) T O IN S E R T M E N U C 1 6
H A R M O N IC C A L
F O R T IM E D O M A IN P R E S S < E N T E R > S T A R T F R E Q N E X T F R E Q . W A V E G U ID E S E L E C T
W ID T H O F
T O S E L E C T S T R IP
X X X .X X X X X X X X X G H z X X X .X X X X X X X X X G H z (S e e M e n u C 1 1 A ) M IC R O S T R IP X X .X X X X m m
S T A R T (S T E P ) K IT T O U S E
IN C R E M E N T X X X F R E Q S .
X X X .X X X X X X X X X G H z M E N U C 3 F T H IC K N E S S O F
X X X .X X X X X X X X X G H z E N T E R E D , M E N U C 1 5 B 1 0 M IL K IT S U B S T R A T E
L A S T F R E Q W A S
A P P R O X IM A T E S T O P N U M B E R O F P T S C O N F IR M X X X X .X X X X m m
X X X .X X X X X X X X X G H z E N T E R 1 5 M IL K IT
X X X .X X X X X X X X X G H z X X X P O IN T (S ) C A L IB R A T IO N
P A R A M E T E R S W A V E G U ID E Z c
A U T O IN C R O N (O F F ) C U T O F F 2 5 M IL K IT
U S IN G A B O V E S T O P F R E Q X .X X X p 9
X X X .X X X X X X X X X G H z F R E Q U E N C Y
S T A R T A N D S T O P X X X .X X X X X X X X X G H z L R L /L R M U S E R D E F IN E D
P A R A M E T E R S S U B S T R A T E
W IL L R E S U L T IN F IL L R A N G E P R E V IO U S M E N U
W A V E G U ID E P R E S S < E N T E R > D IE L E C T R IC
X X X D A T A P O IN T S ( X X X E N T E R E D ) T O S E L E C T
P R E S S < E N T E R > C U T O F F F R E Q X .X X
X X X .X X X X X X X X X G H z W A V E G U ID E
T R U E S T O P F R E Q IN D IV ID U A L T O S E L E C T C U T O F F F R E Q X X X .X X X X X X X X X G H z
F R E Q IN S E R T O R T U R N O N /O F F T o M e n u E F F E C T IV E
P R E S S < E N T E R >
T E S T S IG N A L S C A L _ S U 2 * W H E N C O M P L E T E D IE L E C T R IC
N E X T C A L S T E P C L E A R A L L X .X X
S T A R T C A L
(R E C O M M E N D E D
P R E S S < E N T E R > F IN IS H E D
P R E S S < E N T E R > 1 .0 0 )
T O S E L E C T N E X T C A L S T E P
T O S E L E C T
P R E S S < E N T E R > O R C H A N G E T o C a l
T O S E L E C T S e q ** P R E S S < E N T E R >
W H E N C O M P L E T E
C

Figure 4-5. Menu Sequencing, LRL/LRM Calibration

4-16 37XXXD OM
FRONT PANEL OPERATION CALIBRATION KEY-GROUP

TRM Calibration Setup Flow—Description

1. Pressing the Begin Cal key calls Menu C17.

2. With one exception, the flow is from left to right in the direction of
the arrow head. The exception occurs in Menu C1, for the TIME
DOMAIN choice. Here the flow direction reverses to Menu C2C
then returns to a left-to-right flow on to Menu C3H, C3J, or C3I.

3. Arrowheads that point both left and right indicate that the flow
returns to the right-most menu after a choice had been made.

4. The group of menus to the left of Menu C3H, C3J, or C3I are the
initial selection set and are essentially the same for all four
calibration types: Standard, Offset-Short, TRM, and LRL/LRM.

5. The group of menus that follow Menu C3H, C3J, or C3I are, for the
most part, type specific. The selection of Menu C3H, C3I, or C3J
depends upon the choice made in Menu C11A: COAXIAL,
WAVEGUIDE, or MICROSTRIP.

37XXXD OM 4-17
CALIBRATION KEY-GROUP FRONT PANEL OPERATION

C O A X
M E N U C 2 _ C E N T E R
(S e e M e n u C 1 1 A )
M E N U C 1 1 M E N U C 2 C A L F R E Q R A N G E
M E N U C 1 1 A M E N U C 3 H
C A L F R E Q R A N G E C E N T E R C O N F IR M
B E G IN C A L IB R A T IO N
C H A N G E X X X .X X X X X X X X X G H z C A L IB R A T IO N
B e g in S T A R T
C a l K E E P E X IS T IN G T o M e n u C A L M E T H O D S P A N P A R A M E T E R S
X X X .X X X X X X X X X G H z
C A L D A T A S U 1 /S U 3 * A N D L IN E T Y P E X X X .X X X X X X X X X G H z T R M R E F L E C T
S T O P O F F S E T L E N G T H
R E P E A T T o C a l N E X T C A L S T E P X X X .X X X X X X X X X G H z S E T S T A R T /S T O P + X X X .X X X X m m
P R E V IO U S C A L S e q **
C A L M E T H O D S E T C E N T E R /S P A N X X X D A T A P O IN T (S ) T R M R E F L E C T T Y P E
A U T O C A L X X .X X X X X X X X X G H z
S T A N D A R D X X X D A T A P O IN T S S T E P S IZ E
C A L M E T H O D (N O T U S E D F O R X X X .X X X X X X X X X G H z A G R E A T E R T H A N Z o
S T A N D A R D W A V E G U ID E ) S T E P S IZ E N U M O F D A T A P O IN T S
L E S S T H A N Z o
1 6 0 1 M A X P T S
T R A N S M IS S IO N O F F S E T S H O R T N U M O F D A T A P O IN T S 8 0 1 M A X P T S
L IN E T Y P E : T R M M A T C H M E N U C 1 7
X X X X X X X X L R L /L R M 1 6 0 1 M A X P T S 4 0 1 M A X P T S IM P E D A N C E D
8 0 1 M A X P T S 2 0 1 M A X P T S
T R M 4 0 1 M A X P T S 1 0 1 M A X P T S E N T E R
C H A N G E C A L R E F E R E N C E R E F E R E N C E
2 0 1 M A X P T S 5 1 M A X P T S IM P E D A N C E
M E T H O D A N D T R A N S M IS S IO N IM P E D A N C E
1 0 1 M A X P T S
L IN E T Y P E L IN E T Y P E T o M e n u
5 1 M A X P T S N E X T C A L S T E P T E S T S IG N A L S
C A L _ S U 2 * R E F E R E N C E
N E X T C A L S T E P C O A X IA L P R E S S < E N T E R >
N E X T C A L S T E P S T A R T C A L IM P E D A N C E
T O S E L E C T
P R E S S < E N T E R > W A V E G U ID E X X X .X X X 9
P R E S S < E N T E R > P R E S S < E N T E R >
T O S E L E C T T O S E L E C T
M IC R O S T R IP T O S E L E C T T o C a l P R E S S < E N T E R >
O R C H A N G E S e q ** W H E N C O M P L E T E
P R E S S < E N T E R >
T O S E L E C T M IC R O S T R IP
(S e e M e n u C 1 1 A )
M E N U C 5 D M E N U C 3 J

S E L E C T U S E C O N F IR M
M E N U C 2 B M E N U C 6 B
O F IS O L A T IO N C A L IB R A T IO N
IN C A L IB R A T IO N S IN G L E P O IN T P A R A M E T E R S
C .W . C A L IB R A T IO N T R M R E F L E C T T R M M A T C H
M E N U C 1 O F F S E T L E N G T H P A R A M E T E R S
IN C L U D E B
C .W . F R E Q + X X X .X X X X m m IM P E D A N C E
IS O L A T IO N S E L E C T
X X .X X X X X X X X G H z + X X X .X X X 9
(S T A N D A R D ) C A L IB R A T IO N
T R M R E F L E C T T Y P E D
D A T A P O IN T S
E X C L U D E N E X T C A L S T E P IN D U C T A N C E
G R E A T E R T H A N Z o + X X X X .X X X X p H
IS O L A T IO N N O R M A L
(1 6 0 1 P O IN T S P R E S S < E N T E R >
T O S E L E C T L E S S T H A N Z o P R E S S < E N T E R >
P R E S S < E N T E R > M A X IM U M
W H E N C O M P L E T E
T O S E L E C T C .W . T R M M A T C H
(1 P O IN T )
M E N U C 2 A IM P E D A N C E D
M E N U C 2 D
N - D IS C R E T E IN S E R T M IC R O S T R IP M E N U C 1 6 A
F R E Q U E N C IE S D IS C R E T E F IL L IN D IV ID U A L P A R A M E T E R S
M E N U C 2 C (2 T O 1 6 0 1 F R E Q U E N C IE S X X X X X X X X E N T E R
P O IN T S ) IN P U T S T A R T , M IC R O S T R IP
IN C R , P O IN T S , T o M e n u
C A L IB R A T IO N IN P U T A F R E Q , T E S T S IG N A L S C A L _ S U 2 * P A R A M E T E R S
R A N G E T IM E D O M A IN T H E N S E L E C T P R E S S < E N T E R >
(H A R M O N IC ) "F IL L R A N G E " T O IN S E R T M E N U C 1 6
S T A R T C A L
H A R M O N IC C A L W ID T H O F
F O R T IM E D O M A IN P R E S S < E N T E R > S T A R T F R E Q N E X T F R E Q . P R E S S < E N T E R > S E L E C T
T O S E L E C T T O S E L E C T S T R IP
X X X .X X X X X X X X X G H z X X X .X X X X X X X X X G H z M IC R O S T R IP
O R C H A N G E T o C a l X X .X X X X m m
S T A R T (S T E P ) S e q ** K IT T O U S E
IN C R E M E N T X X X F R E Q S .
X X X .X X X X X X X X X G H z X X X .X X X X X X X X X G H z E N T E R E D , W A V E G U ID E T H IC K N E S S O F
1 0 M IL K IT S U B S T R A T E
A P P R O X IM A T E S T O P N U M B E R O F P T S
L A S T F R E Q W A S (S e e M e n u C 1 1 A ) X X X X .X X X X m m
X X X .X X X X X X X X X G H z 1 5 M IL K IT
X X X .X X X X X X X X X G H z X X X P O IN T (S ) M E N U C 3 I
2 5 M IL K IT Z c
A U T O IN C R O N (O F F )
U S IN G A B O V E S T O P F R E Q C O N F IR M X .X X X p 9
X X X .X X X X X X X X X G H z
S T A R T A N D S T O P X X X .X X X X X X X X X G H z C A L IB R A T IO N U S E R D E F IN E D
P A R A M E T E R S S U B S T R A T E
W IL L R E S U L T IN F IL L R A N G E P R E V IO U S M E N U
M E N U C 1 5 B P R E S S < E N T E R > D IE L E C T R IC
X X X D A T A P O IN T S ( X X X E N T E R E D ) T O S E L E C T
P R E S S < E N T E R > T R M R E F L E C T X .X X
X X X .X X X X X X X X X G H z
IN D IV ID U A L T O S E L E C T O F F S E T L E N G T H E N T E R
T R U E S T O P F R E Q
F R E Q IN S E R T O R T U R N O N /O F F + X X X .X X X X m m W A V E G U ID E E F F E C T IV E
C U T O F F D IE L E C T R IC
N E X T C A L S T E P C L E A R A L L T R M M A T C H F R E Q U E N C Y
IM P E D A N C E D X .X X
(R E C O M M E N D E D
P R E S S < E N T E R > F IN IS H E D W A V E G U ID E 1 .0 0 )
T O S E L E C T N E X T C A L S T E P W A V E G U ID E C U T O F F F R E Q
P R E S S < E N T E R > C U T O F F F R E Q X X X .X X X X X X X X X G H z
T O S E L E C T P R E S S < E N T E R >
T o M e n u P R E S S < E N T E R > W H E N C O M P L E T E
T E S T S IG N A L S
C C A L _ S U 2 * W H E N C O M P L E T E
S T A R T C A L
P R E S S < E N T E R >
T O S E L E C T T o C a l B
O R C H A N G E S e q **

Figure 4-6. Menu Sequencing, TRM Calibration

4-18 37XXXD OM
FRONT PANEL OPERATION CALIBRATION KEY-GROUP

From Standard,
Offset-Short, and
LRL/LRM Calibration
Flowcharts

MENU C7, C8, C9 Series <ENTER>

CALIBRATION
SEQUENCE
CONNECT
CALIBRATION CAL_MEAS_DEV MENU CAL_NEXT_DEV
DEVICE(S)
PORT 1: MEASURING P R E S S <E N TE R > YES
XXXXXXXXXXXX
FOR NE XT C AL
PORT 2: S TE P CAL
XXXXXXXXXXXX OR DONE
P R ES S <C L EA R >
PRESS <ENTER> TO R E-ME A SU R E
TO MEASURE
DEVICE(S) NO
PRESS <1> FOR
PORT 1 DEVICE
PRESS <2> FOR GO
PORT 2 DEVICE TO NEXT
CAL STEP

MENU CAL_COMPLETED
CONNECT NEW CALIBRATION STANDARDS
CALIBRATION
SEQUENCE
COMPLETED
* C7 SERIES = REFLECTION DEVICES
C8 SERIES = SLIDING LOAD PRESS
C9 SERIES = TRANSMISSION DEVICES <SAVE/RECALL>
TO STORE CAL
DATA ON DISK
OR
PRESS <ENTER>
TO PROCEED

Figure 4-6. Calibration Sequence Menus

37XXXD OM 4-19
SAVE/RECALL MENU KEY FRONT PANEL OPERATION

4-4 SAVE/RECALL MENU Pressing this key displays the first of a menu set (below) that lets you
KEY save or recall control panel setups and calibration data. Full menu de-
scriptions can be found in the alphabetically ordered Appendix A un-
der the menu’s call letters (SR1, SR2, SR3, etc).

A L T E R N A T IV E T E X T
M E N U S R 3

. - S A V E F R O N T R E C A L L F R O N T
C h a n n e ls M e a s u re m e n t
P A N E L S E T U P T O P A N E L S E T U P F R O M
IN T E R N A L M E M O R Y IN T E R N A L M E M O R Y .

D is p la y E n h a n c e m e n t

M E M O R Y 1
M E M O R Y 2
M E M O R Y 3 N o te
A n a s te r is k (* ) n e x t to
M E M O R Y 4 a m e m o ry lo c a tio n in d ic a te s
th a t it h a s s to re d d a ta .
M E M O R Y 4
M E M O R Y 5

S a v e / M E M O R Y 6
R e c a ll
M E M O R Y 7
M e n u
M E M O R Y 8
M E N U S R 2
M E M O R Y 9
M E N U S R 1 R E C A L L M E M O R Y 1 0
(O R S A V E )
S A V E /R E C A L L P R E V IO U S M E N U
F R O N T P A N E L F R O N T P A N E L
A N D C A L D A T A S E T U P IN P R E S S < E N T E R >
IN T E R N A L M E M O R Y T O S E L E C T
S A V E O R
U S E K E Y P A D
R E C A L L F R O N T P A N E L
P R E S S < E N T E R > S E T U P A N D
T O S E L E C T C A L D A T A
F U N C T IO N O N H A R D D IS K

F R O N T P A N E L
S E T U P A N D
C A L D A T A E ith e r D is k
O N F L O P P Y D IS K
S A V E R E C A L L
P R E S S < E N T E R >
T O S E L E C T M E N U D S K 3 M E N U D S K 2

S E L E C T F IL E S E L E C T F IL E
T O O V E R W R IT E T O R E A D

C R E A T E N E W F IL E F IL E 1
F IL E 2
F IL E 1 F IL E 3
F IL E 2 F IL E 4
F IL E 3 F IL E 5
F IL E 4 F IL E 6
F IL E 5 F IL E 7
F IL E 6 F IL E 8
F IL E 7
P R E V IO U S M E N U
F IL E 8
P R E S S < E N T E R >
P R E V IO U S M E N U T O S E L E C T
P R E S S < E N T E R > P R E S S < 1 > F O R
T O S E L E C T P R E V IO U S P A G E
P R E S S < 1 > F O R
P R E S S < 2 > F O R
P R E V IO U S P A G E
N E X T P A G E
P R E S S < 2 > F O R
N E X T P A G E

Figure 4-7 Save/Recall Key-Group Menus

4-20 37XXXD OM
FRONT PANEL OPERATION MEASUREMENT KEY-GROUP

4-5 MEASUREMENT The individual keys within the Measurement key-group are described
KEY-GROUP below. Flowcharts of the Setup Key and Data Points key menus are
shown in Figure 4-8. As described for the calibration menus, the flow
is left-to-right and the double arrowhead lines indicate that the flow
returns to the calling menu once a selection has been made. Full menu
descriptions can be found in the alphabetically ordered Appendix A
under the menu’s call letters (SU1, SU2, DF, etc).

Setup Menu Key: Pressing this key calls Sweep Setup Menu SU1 or
SU3. Depending upon which menu items you select, additional menus
may also be called.

Data Points Key: Pressing this key calls Menu SU9 or SU9A. Menu
SU9 provides for data point selection. Menu SU9A is called if the C.W.
MODE selection in Menu SU1 is on.

Hold Key: If the instrument is sweeping, pressing this key results in

an immediate halt of the sweep at the current data point. The LED on
the button lights, indicating that the Hold Mode is active.

If you restart the sweep after performing any recall-from-disk opera-

tions in the Hold Mode (sweep stopped at some data point), the sweep
restarts from the beginning. The instrument may be taken out of the
hold mode as follows:

q By pressing the Default Program key. This causes the 37XXXD to

revert to a predefined state
q By pressing the Begin Cal key. This causes the 37XXXD to re-
sume sweeping and begin the Calibration Menu sequence
NOTE
See the description for Menu SU4 for a discussion of the
interaction between the Hold Mode and the selection of
“Single Sweep” or “Restart Sweep.”

Domain Key: This key function is fully described in paragraph 4-2

(page 4-8). Additionally, if the Time Domain option is installed, making
a selection other than “Frequency Domain” lets you display measured
data in the time domain. It also calls a further sequence of Time Do-
main Menus. Refer to section 9-2 for additional details.

Appl: Pressing this key calls a menu that lets you select the following
applications: Adapter Removal, Swept Frequency Gain Compression,
or Swept Power Gain Compression.

37XXXD OM 4-21
MEASUREMENT KEY-GROUP FRONT PANEL OPERATION

M E N U S U 1 _ C E N T E R

S W E E P S E T U P
M E N U S U 9 M E N U S U 9 A
C E N T E R
M E N U S U 1 X X X .X X X X X X X X X G H z N U M B E R O F N U M B E R O F
S P A N D A T A P O IN T S D A T A P O IN T S
S W E E P S E T U P
X X X .X X X X X X X X X G H z
S T A R T 1 6 0 1 M A X P T S
S E T S T A R T /S T O P P O IN T S D R A W N
X X .X X X X X X G H z 8 0 1 M A X P T S
X X X D A T A P O IN T (S ) IN C W
M e a s u re m e n t S T O P 4 0 1 M A X P T S
X X .X X X X X X X X X G H z X X X X P O IN T (S )
X X .X X X X X X G z 2 0 1 M A X P T S
S T E P S IZ E
S e tu p D a ta M E N U S U 5 M E N U S U 6 1 0 1 M A X P T S
M e n u P o in ts S E T C E N T E R /S P A N
C .W . M O D E O N (O F F )
F R E Q U E N C Y F R E Q U E N C Y 5 1 M A X P T S
X X X D A T A P O IN T (S ) X X .X X X X X X X X X G H Z
M A R K E R S W E E P M A R K E R C .W .
H o ld D o m a in A p p l
X X .X X X X X X X X X G H z M A R K E R S W E E P
S T E P S IZ E S T A R T S W E E P C .W F R E Q P R E S S < E N T E R >
D IS C R E T E F IL L M A R K E R (n ) M A R K E R (n ) T O S E L E C T
C .W . M O D E O N (O F F ) X X X .X X X X X X X X X G H z X X X X .X X X X X X X X X G H z
H O L D B U T T O N
S e e X X .X X X X X X X X X G H Z
S e e F U N C T IO N S T O P S W E E P U S E K E Y P A D
S h e e t 2
C h a p te r 9 M A R K E R (n ) T O S E L E C T
M A R K E R S W E E P T E S T S IG N A L S M A R K E R (1 -6 )
X X X .X X X X X X X X X G H z
D IS C R E T E F IL L P R E S S < E N T E R >
T O S E L E C T U S E K E Y P A D
O R T U R N O N /O F F T O S E L E C T
H O L D B U T T O N
M A R K E R (1 -6 )
F U N C T IO N

M E N U S U 3 T E S T S IG N A L S
S IN G L E P O IN T
M E A S U R E M E N T P R E S S < E N T E R >
S E T U P T O S E L E C T
O R T U R N O N /O F F
C .W . F R E Q
X X X .X X X X X X X X X G H z
M E N U S U 8 o r C A L _ S U 8
H O L D B U T T O N M E N U S U 4 M E N U D F 1
F U N C T IO N M E N U S U 3 A C A L IB R A T E F O R
S E L E C T F U N C T IO N D IS C R E T E F IL L F L A T P O R T P O W E R
T E S T S W E P T P O W E R F O R
F O R W A R D
S IG N A L S S E T U P H O L D B U T T O N IN P U T S T A R T ,
D IR E C T IO N O N L Y
IN C R , P O IN T S ,
S W E P T P O W E R H O L D /C O N T IN U E T H E N S E L E C T X X X P O IN T S
R E T U R N T O F R E Q U E N C Y M E N U S U 2 A "F IL L R A N G E " M E N U D F 2 M E A S U R E 1 P W R
S W E E P M O D E X X X .X X X X X X X X X G H z H O L D /R E S T A R T P O IN T E V E R
T E S T S IG N A L S
P R E S S < E N T E R > P S T A R T IN S E R T X X P O I N T S
S IN G L E S W E E P S T A R T F R E Q
T O S E L E C T -X X .X X d B m A N D H O L D IN D IV ID U A L
S O U R C E 1 P W R X X .X X X X G H z
M E N U S U 2 , S U 2 a , C A L _ S U 2 F R E Q U E N C IE S P O W E R T A R G E T
P S T O P -X X .X X d B M -X X X .X d B m
B IA S /R F H O L D IN C R E M E N T
-X X .X X d B m T E S T S IG N A L S IN P U T A F R E Q ,
C O N D IT IO N S X .X X X X G H z
S O U R C E 2 P W R S T A R T F L A T
P R E S S < E N T E R >
P O W E R S W E E P O N (O F F ) -X X .X X d B M P O W E R C A L IB R A T IO N
P O W E R C O N T R O L B IA S O N T O IN S E R T
M e n u S U 1 -X X .X X d B
X X .X d B N U M B E R O F P T S
( D e s tr o y s C a lib r a tio n ) R F O N P R E V IO U S M E N U
(0 T O -1 5 d B ) X X X P O IN T S N E X T F R E Q
H O L D B U T T O N P O R T 1 A T T N

.
F U N C T IO N D U T /A U T O N (O F F ) X X .X X X X G H z P R E S S < E N T E R >
0 *1 0 d B (0 - 7 0 ) T O S E L E C T
P O R T 1 A T T N P R O T E C T IO N S T O P F R E Q
S W E P T P O W E R 2 0 d B (0 - 7 0 ) P O R T 2 A T T N D E F A U L T R E S E T X X .X X X X X X X F R E Q S T U R N K N O B T O
G A IN C O M P R E S S IO N 0 *1 0 d B (0 -0 0 ) T U R N S O N H O L D E N T E R E D C H A N G E N U M B E R
P O R T 1 P O W E R W IT H B IA S /R F L A S T F R E Q W A S O F P O IN T S
R E T U R N T O S W E P T -X X .X X d B m P R E S S < E N T E R > T U R N E D O F F F IL L R A N G E X X .X X X X G H z
F R E Q U E N C Y M O D E T O S E L E C T (X X X E N T E R E D )
P O R T 2 A T T N P R E S S < E N T E R >
O R T U R N O N /O F F A U T O IN C R O N (O F F )
P R E S S < E N T E R > X X X d B (0 -X 0 ) T O S E L E C T IN D IV ID U A L X X .X X X X G H z
T O S E L E C T F R E Q IN S E R T
O R T U R N O N /O F F C A L IB R A T E
F O R F L A T N E S S P R E V IO U S M E N U
(C A L E X IS T S ) C L E A R A L L
P R E S S < E N T E R >
F L A T N E S S O N (O F F ) F IN IS H E D T O S E L E C T
R E T U R N T O S W P O R T U R N O N /O F F
C O R R E C T IO N
A T X X .X d B m
P R E S S < E N T E R >
T O S E L E C T
T o M e n u S O U R C E 2 P W R
G C 4 X X .X d B m

E X IT A P P L IC A T IO N * T o M e n u
S U 1
* E x it A p p lic a tio n a p p e a r s o n ly P R E S S < E N T E R >
w h e n in th e S w e p t F r e q u e n c y T O S E L E C T
G a in C o m p r e s s io n a p p lic a tio n

Figure 4-8. Measurement Key-Group Menus Menu Flow (Sheet 1 of 2)

4-22 37XXXD OM
FRONT PANEL OPERATION MEASUREMENT KEY-GROUP

M E N U D S K 2
B
F ro m M E N U C A R 1 M E N U D S K 2 M E N U C A R 3
S h e e t 1
A D A P T E R R E M O V A L A D A P T E R R E M O V A L S E L E C T F IL E
S E L E C T F IL E M E N U D E _ 8
R E A D C A L F IL E O F T O R E A D
1 2 -T E R M C A L S F O R T O R E A D
X A N D Y M U S T T H E Y T E S T P O R T F IL E 1 E M B E D /D E -E M B E D
E X IS T S IN T H E F IL E 1 F R O M H A R D D IS K S 2 P F IL E
M E N U A P P S F IL E 2
C U R R E N T D IR E C T O R Y F IL E 2 (A D A P T E R O N
A P P L IC A T IO N S P O R T 1 ) F IL E 3 P O R T 1 /P O R T 2
M E N U C A R 2 F IL E 3
E L E C T R IC A L L E N G T H F IL E 4
A D A P T E R R E M O V A L F IL E 4
O F T H E A D A P T E R R E A D C A L F IL E O F M E T H O D
+ X X X .X X X X p s A D A P T E R R E M O V A L T H E Y T E S T P O R T F IL E 5
S W E P T F R E Q U E N C Y F IL E 5 E M B E D /D E -E M B E D
G A IN C O M P R E S S IO N R E A D C A L F IL E O F F R O M F L O P P Y D IS K F IL E 6
R E M O V E A D A P T E R F IL E 6
(A D A P T E R O N
S W E P T P O W E R B H E L P
T H
F R
E X T
O M H
E S
A R
T P O R T
D D IS K F IL E 7 P O R T 1 )
F IL E 7 S W A P P O R T S
O F S 2 P D A T A
O F F /O N
G A IN C O M P R E S S IO N F IL E 8
(A D A P T E R O N F IL E 8
N x N S O L U T IO N P R E S S < E N T E R > P O R T 2 ) P R E S S < E N T E R > P R E V IO U S M E N U A P P L Y N E T W O R K
T O S E L E C T P R E V IO U S M E N U
E /O M E A S U R E M E N T T O S E L E C T S 2 P F IL E D A T A T O
R E A D C A L F IL E O F P R E S S < E N T E R >
O /E M E A S U R E M E N T P R E S S < E N T E R > C A L F IL E D A T A
T H E X T E S T P O R T P R E S S < C L E A R > T O S E L E C T
T O S E L E C T
E M B E D /D E -E M B E D M E N U G C -D F 2 F R O M F L O P P Y D IS K T O A B O R T P R E S S < 1 > F O R P R E S S < E N T E R >
E X T _ C A R 1 P R E S S < 1 > F O R
M E R G E C A L F IL E S S W E P T P O W E R H E L P F IL E (A D A P T E R O N P R E V IO U S P A G E T O S E L E C T
F R E Q U E N C IE S P O R T 2 ) P R E V IO U S P A G E
O R C H A N G E
P R E S S < E N T E R > P R E S S < 2 > F O R
T O S E L E C T P R E S S < 2 > F O R
S E T F R E Q U E N C IE S N E X T P A G E
A IN P U T A F R E Q
P R E S S < E N T E R >
T O S E L E C T
N E X T P A G E

P R E S S < E N T E R > S U 8 A P R E S S < C L E A R >

S e e T O IN S E R T S h e e t 1 T O A B O R T
C h a p te r 8 M E N U G C 1
S W E P T P O W E R M E N U G C -S U 8 A
F R E Q U E N C Y S W E P T F R E Q U E N C Y
X X X .X X X X X X X X X G H z G A IN C O M P R E S S IO N C A L IB R A T E F O R
C L E A R F R E Q N U M B E R L IN E A R P O W E R
N O M IN A L O F F S E T M E N U G C -S U 8 A _ A B O R T M E N U D E _ 9
X X
-X X .X X d B F O R W A R D L IN E A R P O W E R
C L E A R A L L D IR E C T IO N O N L Y E M B E D /D E -E M B E D
C A L IB R A T E C A L IB R A T IO N
M E N U G C 2 F IN IS H E D , F O R F L A T N E S S S 2 P F IL E
S T A R T L IN E A R M E N U D S K 2
R E T U R N T O P O W E R (N O C A L E X IS T S ) C A L IB R A T IN G F O R F O R C A L F IL E S
S W E P T P O W E R P O W E R C A L IB R A T IO N
S W E E P S E T U P L IN E A R P O W E R O R IG IN A L C A L F IL E O N H D D
G A IN C O M P R E S S IO N
F L A T N E S S T O A P P L Y N E T W O R K
P R E S S < E N T E R > P R E V IO U S M E N U P R E S S < C L E A R >
S E T F R E Q U E N C IE S C O R R E C T IO N
T O S E L E C T A T -X X .X X d B m P R E S S < E N T E R > T O A B O R T R E A D C A L F IL E
P S T A R T T O S E L E C T F R O M H A R D D IS K
-X X .X X d B m C A L IB R A T E
M E N U G C _ S U 2 R E C E IV E R
P S T O P (N O C A L E X IS T S ) M E N U G C _ N O R M R E A D C A L F IL E
S W E P T P O W E R F R O M F L O P P Y D IS K
-X X .X X d B m N O R M A L IZ E S 2 1
G A IN C O M P R E S S IO N N O R M A L IZ E S 2 1
S T E P S IZ E (N O T S T O R E D )
X .X X d B P R E S S < E N T E R > M E N U D S K 2
P O R T 1 A T T N
G A IN C O M P R E S S IO N C O N N E C T A U T T O S E L E C T F O R C A L F IL E S
A T T E N U A T IO N 0 *1 0 d B (0 - 0 0 ) P O IN T (0 d B R E F )
X X .X X d B A N D A P P L Y B IA S O N F D D
G A IN C O M P R E S S IO N P O R T 2 A T T N P R E S S < C L E A R >
P O IN T (M A X R E F ) 0 *1 0 d B (0 - 0 0 ) W A IT F O R O N E T O A B O R T
T E S T A U T
X X .X X d B C O M P L E T E S W E E P
P R E V IO U S M E N U E X IT A P P L IC A T IO N M E N U G C _ S 2 1 _ O P T B E F O R E S T O R IN G
N O M IN A L O F F S E T
-X X .X X d B
M E N U G C _ R C V R N O R M A L IZ E S 2 1 P R E S S < E N T E R >
M O R E T O S T O R E M E N U D E _ 9 A
S U 1 R E C E IV E R C O N N E C T A U T
P R E S S < E N T E R > S h e e t 1 C A L IB R A T IO N A N D A P P L Y B IA S P R E S S < C L E A R >
T O A B O R T E M B E D /D E -E M B E D
T O S E L E C T
C O N N E C T R E S U L T S IN A S 2 P F IL E
M E N U D S K 2
T H R O U G H L IN E D IS P L A Y T H A T IS F O R S 2 P F IL E S
S U 2 A B E T W E E N N O R M A IL Z E D T O T H E S 2 P F IL E D A T A
O N H D D
S h e e t 1 T E S T P O R T S A U T P E R F O R M A N C E O F T H E N E T W O R K
A T P S T A R T .
M E N U G C 3 N O R M A L IZ A T IO N IS R E A D S 2 P F IL E
IN C L U D E A N Y
A U T O M A T IC F O R F R O M H A R D D IS K
S W E P T P O W E R C O M P O N E N T S W IT H
G A IN C O M P R E S S IO N A R E P A R T O F T H E E A C H P O W E R S W E E P
M E N U N X N R E A D S 2 P F IL E
M E A S U R E M E N T P A T H D IS P L A Y S 2 1
C A L IB R A T E F R O M F L O P P Y D IS K
N x N S O L U T IO N F O R L IN E A R IT Y C O N N E C T T H R O U G H
(N O C A L E X IS T S ) W A IT F O R O N E P R E S S < E N T E R > M E N U D S K 2
R E S U L T S IN A F O R C A L F IL E S
L O C A T IO N O F C O M P L E T E S W E E P T O S E L E C T
L IN E A R IT Y O N (O F F ) D IS P L A Y S H O W IN G O N F D D
C U R R E N T D IR E C T O R Y B E F O R E S T O R IN G
C O R R E C T IO N T H E V A L U E O F
H A R D D IS K /F L O P P Y P R E S S < C L E A R >
S 2 1 F O R E A C H
C A L I B R A T E P R E S S < E N T E R > T O A B O R T
R E C E I V E R P O W E R S W E E P
D E V IC E P A IR (1 + 2 ) T O S T O R E
( N O C A L E X IS T S )
P A IR _ 1 _ 3 .S 2 P W A IT F O R O N
S 2 1 O P T IO N S P R E S S < C L E A R >
C O M P L E T E S W E E P
D E V IC E P A IR (2 + 3 ) (N O T S T O R E D ) T O A B O R T
B E F O R E S T O R IN G
P A IR _ 2 _ 3 .S 2 P
A L L T E S T T Y P E S P R E S S < E N T E R > M E N U M E R G 2 M E N U M E R G 3
D E V IC E 1 L E N G T H G A IN C O M P R E S S IO N M E N U G C 4 T O S T O R E
+ X X X .X X X m m M E N U G C 4 _ A B O R T M E R G E C A L F IL E S M E R G E C A L F IL E S
A M /P M M U L T IP L E F R E Q U E N C Y
+ X X X .X X X p s G A IN C O M P R E S S IO N M U L T IP L E F R E Q U E N C Y
R E T U R N T O S W E P T M E N U M E R G 1 R E A D C A L F IL E 1 R E A D C A L F IL E 2
G A IN C O M P R E S S IO N F R O M H A R D D IS K
D E V IC E 2 L E N G T H F R E Q U E N C Y M O D E T E S T A U T F R O M H A R D D IS K
M E R G E C A L F IL E S
+ X X X .X X X m m M U L T IP L E F R E Q U E N C Y T E X T D A T A T E S T IN G A U T
+ X X X .X X X p s G A IN C O M P R E S S IO N T O H A R D D IS K R E A D C A L F IL E 1 R E A D C A L F IL E 2
P R E S S < C L E A R > C A L F IL E S M U S T F R O M F L O P P Y D IS K F R O M F L O P P Y D IS K
P R E V IO U S M E N U T E X T D A T A E X IS T IN T H E
D E V IC E 3 L E N G T H
P R E S S < E N T E R >
T O F L O P P Y D IS K T O A B O R T A C U R R E N T D IR E C T O R Y P R E S S < E N T E R > P R E S S < E N T E R >
+ X X X .X X X m m S U 8 A
T O S E L E C T S W E P T P O W E R T O S E L E C T T O S E L E C T
+ X X X .X X X p s S h e e t 1 G A IN C O M P R E S S IO N
O R T U R N O N /O F F M E R G E C A L F IL E S
R E T U R N T O S W E P T P R E S S < C L E A R > P R E S S < C L E A R >
S O L V E D E V IC E 1 F R E Q U E N C Y M O D E P R E S S < E N T E R > T O A B O R T T O A B O R T
S O L V E D E V IC E 2
P R E S S < E N T E R > T O S E L E C T
S O L V E D E V IC E 3
T O S E L E C T

Figure 4-8. Measurement Key-Group Menus Menu Flow

(Sheet 2 of 2)

37XXXD OM 4-23
CHANNELS KEY-GROUP FRONT PANEL OPERATION

4-6 CHANNELS KEY-GROUP The individual keys within the Channels key-group are described be-
low:

Ch 1-4 Keys: These keys (below) define the active channel. One (and
only one) must always be active as indicated by the associated LED.
Pressing a button makes the indicated channel active. If channel indi-
cated by the key is already active, pressing the key has no effect.

The active channel will be the channel acted upon by the S Params,
Graph Type, Ref Plane, Trace Memory, Set Scale, Auto Scale,
Markers/Limits and Domain keys. When in the single channel display
mode, the active channel will be the one displayed.

Channel Menu: Pressing this key calls menu CM (below). Here, you
select the number of channels to be displayed. When in the single dis-
play mode, only the active channel will be displayed. Full menu de-
scription can be found in the alphabetical listing (Appendix A) under
the menu’s call letters (CM).

. -

C h a n n e ls M e a s u re m e n t

D is p la y E n h a n c e m e n t

C h a n n e ls

C h a n n e l C h 1 C h 2
M e n u

C h 3 C h 4

M E N U C M
S E L E C T
D IS P L A Y M O D E

S IN G L E
C H A N N E L

D U A L
C H A N N E L S 1 & 3

O V E R L A Y D U A L
C H A N N E L S 1 & 3
D U A L
C H A N N E L S 2 & 4

O V E R L A Y D U A L
C H A N N E L S 2 & 4

A L L F O U R
C H A N N E L S

P R E S S < E N T E R >
T O S E L E C T

Figure 4-9. Channel Key-Group Menu

4-24 37XXXD OM
FRONT PANEL OPERATION DISPLAY KEY-GROUP

4-7 DISPLAY KEY-GROUP The individual keys within the Display key-group are described below.
Menu flow diagrams are shown in Figure 4-10. Full menu descrip-
tion(s) for menu SP and all others mentioned below can be found in
the Appendix A alphabetical listing under the menu’s call letters (SP,
GT1, RD1, etc.).

Graph Type Key: Pressing this key calls menu GT1 or GT2. These
menus let you select the type of display to appear on the active chan-
nel for the selected S-Parameter.

Set Scale Key: Pressing this key calls the appropriate scaling menu
(SS1, SS2, SS3, etc.) depending upon the graph type being displayed
on the active channel for the selected S-Parameter.

Auto Scale Key: Pressing this key autoscales the trace or traces for
the active channel. The new scaling values are then displayed on the
menu (if it is displayed) and graticule. The resolution will be selected
from the normal sequence of values you have available using the knob.
When the active channel has a Real and Imaginary type display, the
larger of the two signals will be used to autoscale both the real and
imaginary graphs. Both graphs will be displayed at the same resolu-
tion.

S Params Key: Pressing this key calls menu SP. This menu allows
you to select the S-Parameter to be displayed by the active channel for
the selected S-Parameter.

Ref Plane Key: Pressing this key calls menu RD1. This menu lets you
input the reference plane in time or distance. You do this by selecting
the appropriate menu item. For a correct distance readout, the dielec-
tric constant must be set to the correct value. This is accomplished by
selecting SET DIELECTRIC, which calls menu RD2.

37XXXD OM 4-25
DISPLAY KEY-GROUP FRONT PANEL OPERATION

On menu RD1, selecting AUTO automatically adjusts the reference de-

lay to unwind the phase for the active channel.

The 37XXXD unwinds the phase as follows:

q First, it sums the phase increments between each pair of mea-

sured data points, then it takes the average “Pdelta” over the en-
tire set of points
q Next, it corrects the phase data by applying the following for-
mula:

Pcorrect = Pmeasured - NxPdelta

Where P = phase

Assuming there are fewer than 360 degrees of phase rotation between
each data point, the operation described above removes any net phase
offset. The endpoints of the phase display then fall at the same phase
value.

Trace Memory Key: Pressing this key brings up menu NO1. This
menu—which relates to the active channel—allows you to store data
to memory, view memory, perform operations with the stored memory,
and view both data and memory simultaneously. Four memories exist,
one for each channel. This allows each channel to be stored and nor-
malized independent of the other channels. Data from the trace mem-
ory may be stored on the disk or recalled from it.

NOTE
Trace memory will automatically be set to VIEW DATA
(that is, turned off), if a sweep with a greater number of
points is selected while operating on a stored trace.

4-26 37XXXD OM
FRONT PANEL OPERATION DISPLAY KEY-GROUP

. -

C h a n n e ls M e a s u re m e n t

D is p la y E n h a n c e m e n t

M E N U S S 1 M E N U S S 4 M E N U S S 9 o r M E N U S S 8 o r M E N U S S 5 M E N U S S 1 1 M E N U S S 2 M E N U S S 3 _ Z o r _ Y M E N U S S 6
o r C A L _ S S 1 o r C A L _ S S 4 C A L _ S S 9 C A L _ S S 8 o r C A L _ S S 5 o r C A L _ S S 1 1 o r C A L _ S S 2 o r C A L _ S S 3 _ Z o r _ Y o r C A L _ S S 6
S E T S C A L IN G S E T S C A L IN G S E T S C A L IN G
S E T S C A L IN G S E T S C A L IN G
S E T S C A L IN G S E T S C A L IN G S E T S C A L IN G O R P R E S S O R P R E S S S E T S C A L IN G
O R P R E S S O R P R E S S O R P R E S S
O R P R E S S O R P R E S S O R P R E S S < A U T O S C A L E > < A U T O S C A L E > O R P R E S S
< A U T O S C A L E > < A U T O S C A L E > < A U T O S C A L E >
< A U T O S C A L E > < A U T O S C A L E > < A U T O S C A L E > < A U T O C A L E >
-P H A S E -
D is p la y
-L IN E A R M A G - -IM A G IN A R Y - -L IN E A R P O L A R - -L O G P O L A R -
-L O G M A G - -L O G M A G - -L IN E A R M A G - R E S O L U T IO N
R E S O L U T IO N R E S O L U T IO N R E S O L U T IO N IM P E D A N C E R E S O L U T IO N
S e t R E S O L U T IO N R E S O L U T IO N X X .X X X * /D IV
G ra p h
S c a le
A u to
X X .X X X U /D IV X X .X X X U /D IV X X .X X X U /D IV (A D M IT T A N C E ) X X .X X X d B /D IV
T y p e S c a le
X X .X X X d B /D IV R E S O L U T IO N X X .X X X U /D IV R E F E R E N C E V A L U E -S M IT H C H A R T -
X X .X X X d B /D IV R E F E R E N C E V A L U E R E F E R E N C E V A L U E R E F E R E N C E V A L U E R E F E R E N C E V A L U E
R E F E R E N C E V A L U E R E F E R E N C E V A L U E X X X .X X X *
S R e f T ra c e
X X X .X X X p U X X X .X X X p U X X X .X X X U X X X .X X X d B
P a ra m s P la n e M e m o ry X X X .X X X d B R E F E R E N C E V A L U E X X X .X X X p U R E F E R E N C E L IN E N O R M A L S M IT H
F IX E D F IX E D
X X X .X X X d B R E F E R E N C E L IN E X R E F E R E N C E L IN E (R E F L = 1 .0 0 0 0 0 0 0
R E F E R E N C E L IN E R E F E R E N C E L IN E R E F E R E N C E L IN E R E F E R E N C E L IN E
X P H A S E S H IF T X F U L L S C A L E )
X X
R E F E R E N C E L IN E X .X X ° S E L E C T P O L A R
S e e s h e e t 2 X -P H A S E - P R E S S < E N T E R > * S E L E C T P O L A R E X P A N D 1 0 d B
-P H A S E - P R E S S < E N T E R > C H A R T M O D E C H A R T M O D E
* P R E S S < E N T E R > T O R E S U M E C A L (R E F L = O .3 1 6 2 2 7 8
R E S O L U T IO N T O R E S U M E C A L *
M E N U G T 2 R E S O L U T IO N P R E S S < E N T E R > T O R E S U M E C A L M A G N IT U D E , F U L L S C A L E ) M A G N IT U D E ,
X X .X X ° /D IV * X X .X X ° /D IV P H A S E
M E N U G T 1 T O R E S U M E C A L P H A S E
S E L E C T R E F E R E N C E V A L U E E X P E N D 2 0 d B
S E L E C T R E F E R E N C E V A L U E P R E S S < E N T E R >
G R A P H T Y P E X X X .X X ° P R E S S < E N T E R > (R E F L = 0 .1 0 0 0 0 0 0
G R A P H T Y P E X X X .X X ° T O S E L E C T
T O S E L E C T F U L L S C A L E )
R E F E R E N C E L IN E R E F E R E N C E L IN E A N D R E S U M E C A L *
L O G M A G N IT U D E S M IT H C H A R T *
X X A N D R E S U M E C A L E X P A N D 3 0 d B
(A D M IT T A N C E )
P H A S E P H A S E S H IF T P R E S S < E N T E R > (R E F L = 0 .0 3 1 6 2 2 8
L IN E A R P O L A R * F U L L S C A L E )
X .X X ° T O R E S U M E C A L

L O G M A G N IT U D E L O G P O L A R P R E S S < E N T E R > C O M P R E S S 3 d B
*
A N D P H A S E T O R E S U M E C A L (R E F L = 1 .4 1 2 5 3 7 5
L IN E A R M A G
* F U L L S C A L E )
S M IT H C H A R T L IN E A R M A G
(IM P E D A N C E ) A N D P H A S E P R E S S < E N T E R >
S W R T O S E L E C T
R E A L
A N D R E S U M E C A L *
G R O U P D E L A Y IM A G IN A R Y
P O W E R O U T R E A L A N D
IM A G IN A R Y
M O R E
P R E S S < E N T E R > M O R E
M E N U P C 1
T O S E L E C T
P R E S S < E N T E R > M E N U S S 7 o r C A L _ S S 7 M E N U S S 1 3 o r C A L _ S S 1 3 M E N U S S 1 2 o r C A L _ S S 1 2 M E N U S S 1 0 o r C A L _ S S 1 0 M E N U S S 1 4
A N D R E S U M E C A L * S E L E C T P O L A R
T O S E L E C T S E T S C A L IN G
S E T S C A L IN G S E T S C A L IN G S E T S C A L IN G C H A R T M O D E
* O R P R E S S O R P R E S S S E T S C A L IN G O R P R E S S
A N D R E S U M E C A L O R P R E S S
< A U T O S C A L E > < A U T 0 S C A L E > O R P R E S S < A U T O S C A L E >
< A U T O S C A L E > M A G N IT U D E
< A U T O S C A L E >
P H A S E
-G R O U P D E L A Y - -S W R - -P O W E R O U T -
-R E A L - -R E A L - M A G N IT U D E
R E S O L U T IO N R E S O L U T IO N R E S O L U T IO N S W P P O S IT IO N
X X .X X X U / R E S O L U T IO N X X .X X X U /
X X X .X X X fs /D IV R E S O L U T O N
X X .X X X U /D IV
X X .X X X U /D IV S E T S W E E P
R E F E R E N C E V A L U E R E F E R E N C E V A L U E R E F E R E N C E V A L U E P O S IT IO N
X X X .X X X fs X X X .X X X U R E F E R E N C E V A L U E X X X .X X X U B O U N D A R IE S
R E F E R E N C E V A L U E X X X .X X X p U
R E F E R E N C E L IN E R E F E R E N C E L IN E X X X .X X X p U R E F E R E N C E L IN E
S T A R T A N G L E
X X R E F E R E N C E L IN E X
X .X X
R E F E R E N C E L IN E X
A P E R T U R E P R E S S < E N T E R > * X S T O P A N G L E
X .X P E R C E N T T O R E S U M E C A L P R E S S < E N T E R > * X .X X
O F S W E E P T O R E S U M E C A L
X X .X X -IM A G IN A R Y - P R E S S < E N T E R >
T O S E L E C T
P R E S S < E N T E R > R E S O L U T IO N
*
T O R E S U M E C A L X X .X X D E G /D IV

R E F E R E N C E V A L U E
X X X .X X X °
R E F E R E N C E L IN E
X

* A p p e a rs fo r C A L _ S S X X M e n u s P R E S S < E N T E R > *
T O R E S U M E C A L

Figure 4-10. Display Key-Group Menus (1 of 2)

37XXXD OM 4-27
DISPLAY KEY-GROUP FRONT PANEL OPERATION

D is p la y

G ra p h S e t A u to
T y p e S c a le S c a le

S R e f T ra c e
P a ra m s P la n e M e m o ry

M E N U N O 1
M E N U N O 2
T R A C E M E M O R Y
F U N C T IO N S S E L E C T
T R A C E M A T H
V IE W D A T A
A D D (+ )
V IE W M E M O R Y
S U B T R A C T (-)
V IE W D A T A
M E N U S P A N D M E M O R Y M U L T IP L Y (* )

V IE W D A T A (X ) D IV ID E (/)
S E L E C T
P A R A M E T E R M E N U P D 2 M E N U R D 2 B Y M E M O R Y P R E S S < E N T E R >
M E N U R D I T O S E L E C T
P A R A M E T E R R A T IO S E L E C T
S 2 1 , F W D T R A N S S E T
S E T T R A C E M A T H
b 2 / a 1 D IE L E C T R IC
R E F E R E N C E
N U M E R A T O R C O N S T A N T S T O R E D A T A
S 1 1 , U S E R 2 P L A N E
b 2 / 1 T O M E M O R Y M E N U N O 3
a 1 (R a ) A IR (S T O R E D )
a 2 (R b ) A U T O (1 .0 0 0 6 4 9 ) (N O T S T O R E D )
S 1 2 , R E V T R A N S T R A C E M E M O R Y
b 1 / a 2 b 1 (T a ) D IS T A N C E D IS K O P E R A T IO N S
P O L Y E T H Y L E N E
X X X .X X X m m D IS K
S 2 2 , R E V R E F L b 2 (T b ) (2 .2 6 )
O P E R A T IO N S C H A N N E L X
b 2 / a 2 T IM E
1 (U N IT Y ) T E F L O N S A V E M E M O R Y
X X X .X X X m s (2 .1 0 ) P R E S S < E N T E R > T O H A R D D IS K
P R E S S < E N T E R >
D E N O M IN A T O R S E T D IE L E C T R IC T O S E L E C T
T O S E L E C T M IC R O P O R O U S
M E N U P D 1 X X X S A V E M E M O R Y
a 1 (R a ) T E F L O N T O F L O P P Y D IS K
P R E S S < 1 > P A R A M E T E R (1 .6 9 )
a 2 (R b ) P R E S S < E N T E R >
T O R E D E F IN E D E F IN IT IO N M E N U P D 3 R E C A L L M E M O R Y
T O S E L E C T
S E L E C T E D P A R A M E T E R b 1 (T a ) O T H E R F R O M H A R D D IS K
P A R A M E T E R
S 2 1 / U S E R 1 b 2 (T b ) X X X X .X X
D E F IN IT IO N
M E N U D S K 2 o r R E C A L L M E M O R Y
U S E R R A T IO 1 (U N IT Y ) P R E S S < E N T E R > F R O M F L O P P Y D IS K
D S K 3
b 2 / a 1 P H A S E L O C K T O S E L E C T
P R E V IO U S M E N U a 1 (R a ) M E N U G P 5 P R E S S < E N T E R >
U S E R P H A S E L O C K T O S E L E C T
a 1 P R E S S < E N T E R > a 2 (R b )
S E L E C T L A B E L
U S E R L A B E L T O S E L E C T ---------
P R E V IO U S M E N U
C H A N G E R A T IO A B C D E F G H IJ K L M
P R E S S < E N T E R > N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z
C H A N G E
T O S E L E C T
P H A S E L O C K 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 ( )-
! # $ % & @ ^ _ '{ } ~
C H A N G E L A B E L B K S P C L R D O N E
P R E V IO U S M E N U
P R E S S < E N T E R > T U R N K N O B
T O S E L E C T T O IN D IC A T E
O R S W IT C H C H A R A C T E R O R
F U N C T IO N

P R E S S < E N T E R >
T O S E L E C T
N U M B E R S M A Y
A L S O B E
S E L E C T E D
U S IN G K E Y P A D

Figure 4-10. Display Key-Group Menus (2 of 2)

4-28 37XXXD OM
FRONT PANEL OPERATION ENHANCEMENT KEY-GROUP

4-8 ENHANCEMENT The individual keys within the Enhancement key-group are described
KEY-GROUP below. Full menu description(s) for menu OPTNS and all others men-
tioned below can be found in the Appendix A alphabetical listing un-
der the menu’s call letters (OPTNS, EM, CAL_BW, etc).

Option Menu Key: This key brings up the OPTNS menu. Depending
on choices selected, this menu causes other menus to appear. A menu
flow diagram for this key is shown in Figure 4-12 on the following
page.

Video IF BW Key: Pressing this produces a menu that lets you choose
between four different IF bandwidths. This menu is shown below.

Avg/Smooth Menu Key: Pressing this key brings up the EM Menu

(Figure 4-11). When pressed during the calibration sequence, it brings
up the EM Cal Menu instead. These menus are shown below.

Trace Smooth and Average Keys: The Average and Trace Smooth
keys set their respective functions on and off with the appropriate
LED indicating when the function is selected.

. -

C h a n n e ls M e a s u re m e n t

D is p la y E n h a n c e m e n t

E n h a n c e m e n t

M E N U E M
O p tio n V id e o
M e n u IF B W
D A T A E N H A N C E M E N T
M E N U C A L _ E M
A v g
A V E R A G IN G S m o o th T ra c e A v e ra g e
X X X X M E A S . M e n u S m o o th D A T A E N H A N C E M E N T
M E N U B W 1 o r C A L _ B W 1
A V E R A G IN G T Y P E A V E R A G IN G
X X X X M E A S . S E L E C T V ID E O
P O IN T -B Y -P O IN T B A N D W ID T H
S W E E P -B Y -S W E E P
T h is m e n u o n ly A V E R A G IN G T Y P E
a p p e a r s d u r in g P O IN T -B Y -P O IN T M A X IM U M
R E S E T A V G C O U N T (1 0 k H z )
X X X X S W E E P (S ) c a lib r a tio n . S W E E P -B Y -S W E E P
N O R M A L
S M O O T H IN G R E S E T A V G C O U N T (1 k H z )
X .X P E R C E N T . X X X X S W E E P (S )
O F S W E E P R E D U C E D
S A M P L E R S U S E D
X X X P O IN T ( S ) (1 0 0 H z )
P E R S W E E P
X S A M P L E R S
S A M P L E R S U S E D M IN IM U M
P E R S W E E P R E S U M E C A L (1 0 H z )
X S A M P L E R S
P R E S S < E N T E R > P R E S S < E N T E R >
P R E S S < E N T E R > T O S E L E C T T O S E L E C T
T O S E L E C T A N D R E S U M E C A L
P R E S S *
P R E S S < A V G /S M O O T H M E N U >
< A V G /S M O O T H M E N U > T O R E S E T A V G C O U N T
T O R E S E T A V G C O U N T * A p p e a rs fo r M e n u C A L _ B W 1

Figure 4-11. Enhancement Key-Group Menus

37XXXD OM 4-29
ENHANCEMENT KEY-GROUP FRONT PANEL OPERATION

M E N U T R IG M E N U O R P 1 M E N U D G 4 _ L O 1
. -
T R IG G E R S R E A R P A N E L T R O U B L E S H O O T IN G
O U T P U T C O N T R O L L O 1
C h a n n e ls M e a s u re m e n t

M E A S U R E M E N T M E N U O R P 2
O U T P U T O N (O F F ) P H A S E L O C K
IN T E R N A L
D is p la y E n h a n c e m e n t

S E L E C T M O D E M E N U D G 4 _ L O 2 V O L T A G E
S E L E C T M O D E F O R O U T P U T
E X T E R N A L
X X X X X X X X X X T R O U B L E S H O O T IN G
M E A S U R E M E N T O N (O F F ) D /A V O L T A G E
H O R IZ O N T A L M E N U D G 2 M E N U D G 4 L O 2
D E L A Y H O R IZ O N T A L P R E V IO U S M E N U
X X .X X X s e c O R P H A S E L O C K V E R T IC A L S E R V IC E L O G T R O U B L E S H O O T IN G M A IN P H A S E
S C A L IN G
I.F . C A L IB R A T IO N P H A S E L O C K (F O R S E R V IC E L O C K V O L T A G E P R E S S < E N T E R >
D IS P L A Y L O G T O S E L E C T
S T A R T /L O C K a 1 U S E O N L Y )
A U T O M A T IC O N (O F F ) P R E S S < E N T E R >
X .X X X X V P R IN T L O G O F F S E T P H A S E
I.F . C A L T O S E L E C T N O N -R A T IO E D M E N U D G 4 _ S O U R C E
E n h a n c e m e n t L O C K V O L T A G E
S T O P /L O C K a 2 S A V E L O G P A R A M E T E R S
T R IG G E R T O F L O P P Y D IS K T R O U B L E S H O O T IN G
I.F . C A L X .X X X X V D D S P H A S E
L O 1 S O U R C E
O p tio n V id e o L O C K V O L T A G E
M e n u IF B W V E R T IC A L S C A L IN G C L E A R L O G L O 2
P R E S S < E N T E R >
S O U R C E L IN E A R IT Y M A IN D /A
T O S E L E C T P R E V IO U S M E N U
R E S O L U T IO N S O U R C E V O L T A G E V O L T A G E
A v g O R T U R N O N /O F F
T ra c e
S m o o th S m o o th A v e ra g e 1 .0 0 0 V /D IV P R E S S < E N T E R > F IR S T I.F .
M e n u
T O S E L E C T P O W E R O U T P U T O F F S E T D /A
B A N D P A S S V O L T A G E V O L T A G E
R E F E R E N C E V A L U E
0 .0 0 V /D IV E X T E R N A L P R E V IO U S M E N U
M E N U O P T N S P R E V IO U S M E N U
M E N U D G 1 M E N U D G 3 A T O D IN P U T
M E N U D G 4 A P R E S S < E N T E R >
O P T IO N S P R E S S < E N T E R > P E R IP H E R A L T E S T S P R E S S < E N T E R > T O S E L E C T
D IA G N O S T IC S T O S E L E C T M O R E T O S E L E C T
T R IG G E R S O R T U R N O N /O F F T R O U B L E S H O O T IN G
C R T F IN IS H E D , (F O R S E R V IC E
R E A R P A N E L S T A R T S E L F T E S T R E C O V E R F R O M
F R O N T P A N E L U S E O N L Y )
O U T P U T T R O U B L E S H O O T IN G
R E A D S E R V IC E L O G
D IA G N O S T IC S E X T E R N A L K E Y B O A R D
P R E S S < E N T E R > R E C E IV E R M O D E M E N U D G 4 _ IF B P
M IL L IM E T E R W A V E IN S T A L L E D O P T IO N S P R IN T E R IN T E R F A C E T O S E L E C T S O U R C E L O C K
* B A N D D E F IN IT IO N T R O U B L E S H O O T IN G
G P IB IN T E R F A C E S E A R C H O N (O F F ) F IR S T I.F .
** B R O A D B A N D S e e N O T E 2 P E R IP H E R A L T E S T S
F O R L O C K B A N D P A S S
D E F IN IT IO N P R E V IO U S M E N U
M E N U D G 5 _ S R C
R E C E IV E R M O D E T R O U B L E S H O O T IN G D V M C H A N N E L
(F O R S E R V IC E H A R D W A R E P R E S S < E N T E R > X X X X F IR S T I.F .
S O U R C E C O N F IG U S E O N L Y ) T O S E L E C T B A N D P A S S
C A L IB R A T IO N (U N U S E D C H A N N E L )
T E S T S E T C O N F IG M E N U D G 5 (F O R S E R V IC E
H /W C A L IB R A T IO N S M E N U D G 4 _ R C V R
R F O N [O F F ] (F O R S E R V IC E H A R D W A R E U S E O N L Y ) L A T C H C O N T R O L L O 1 F R E Q U E N C Y
D U R IN G R E T R A C E U S E O N L Y ) C A L IB R A T IO N S X X .X X X X G H z
A D D R E S S T R O U B L E S H O O T IN G
P R E S S < E N T E R > (F O R S E R V IC E R E C E IV E R M O D E
P R E S S < E N T E R > S T A R T S O U R C E X X X H A R M O N IC N U M
T O S E L E C T U S E O N L Y )
T O S E L E C T F R E Q C A L IB R A T IO N (U N U S E D A D D R E S S ) X X X
O r M E N U O M 2 S O U R C E L O C K
* M U L T IP L E S O U R C E L O 1 M E N U O M 3
T R IG G E R R E A D T R A C K IN G P R E V IO U S M E N U
C O N T R O L C A L IB R A T IO N P R E V IO U S M E N U D E F IN E B A N D S E D IT S Y S T E M O U T P U T : X
A p p e a r s if O p tio n 1 2 S E T O N P R E S S < E N T E R >
** L O 2 P R E S S < E N T E R > E Q U A T IO N S T O S E L E C T
in s ta lle d B A N D 1
C A L IB R A T IO N T O S E L E C T T R IG G E R W R IT E P R E S S < E N T E R >
D IS P L A Y E D E Q U A T IO N IN P U T : X T O S E L E C T A
M E N U S C S E E N O T E 1 S O U R C E F R E Q U E N C Y T O E D IT
F R E Q R A N G E
C A L IB R A T IO N P R E V IO U S M E N U
S O U R C E C O N F IG M E N U D G 5 _ A L C B A N D S T A R T F R E Q
M E N U O M 1 S O U R C E A L C S O U R C E 1 P R E S S < E N T E R >
S O U R C E 1 X X X .X X X X X X X X X G H z T O S E L E C T
M U L T IP L E C A L IB R A T IO N H A R D W A R E M E N U O M 1 A
S O U R C E 2 O R T U R N O N /O F F
A C T IV E / IN A C T IV E S O U R C E C O N T R O L C A L IB R A T IO N B A N D S T O P F R E Q
S O U R C E L O C K S O U R C E L O C K
(F O R S E R V IC E X X X .X X X X X X X X X G H z
S O U R C E L O C A T IO N D E F IN E B A N D S T H R E S H O L D R E C E IV E R P O L A R IT Y
U S E O N L Y )
IN T E R N A L / E X T E R N A L C A L IB R A T IO N B A N D F U N C T IO N S N O R M A L
S O U R C E C O N F IG E Q U A T IO N
G P IB A D D R E S S E D IT S Y S T E M S U M M A R Y R E V E R S E
D IS K S T A R T A L C
4 M U L T IP L E E Q U A T IO N S
O P E R A T IO N S F R E Q C A L IB R A T IO N
S O U R C E M O D E S E L E C T < R E V E R S E >
G P IB C O N T R O L O N (O F F ) S T O R E B A N D 1 C .W . O N (O F F )
O F F M E N U S O U R C E L O C K
B A N D S S T O R E D : P O L A R IT Y IF :
S O U R C E 2 P R E V IO U S M E N U M U L T IP L IE R
D E F IN E P R E S S < E N T E R > ( X X X X X X ) M E N U L O 2 M E N U L O 1
A C T IV E / IN A C T IV E T O S E L E C T P R E S S < E N T E R > X X T H E D U T C O N T A IN S
O N T O S E L E C T C L E A R A L L H A R D W A R E H A R D W A R E M U L T I-C O N V E R S IO N
S O U R C E L O C A T IO N C A L IB R A T IO N C A L IB R A T IO N
D E F IN IT IO N S
E X T E R N A L A M O R E D IV IS O R
X X
S T A G E S , A N D
S E T M U L T IP L E (F O R S E R V IC E (F O R S E R V IC E T H E P H A S E O F T H E
G P IB A D D R E S S P R E S S < E N T E R >
S O U R C E M O D E U S E O N L Y ) U S E O N L Y ) F IN A L O U T P U T I.F .
5 M E N U R C V 1 T O S E L E C T O F F S E T F R E Q
M E N U R C V 2 S T A R T L O 2 S T A R T L O 1 IS O P P O S IT E O F
G P IB C O N T R O L O N (O F F ) P R E S S < E N T E R > X X X .X X X X X X X X X G H z
R E C E IV E R M O D E C A L IB R A T IO N C A L IB R A T IO N N O R M A L
P R E V IO U S M E N U U S E R D E F IN E D T O S E L E C T
S T A N D A R D R E C E IV E R M O D E P R E V IO U S M E N U P R E V IO U S M E N U N O R M A L P O L A R IT Y
P R E S S < E N T E R > P R E V IO U S M E N U M E N U S L T
T O S E L E C T U S E R D E F IN E D IS D E F IN E D B Y T H E
S O U R C E L O C K P R E S S < E N T E R > P R E S S < E N T E R >
M E N U O T S 2 H A R D W A R E S O U R C E 1 A N D 2
O R T U R N O N /O F F S O U R C E C O N F IG P R E S S < E N T E R > T O S E L E C T T O S E L E C T
T R A C K IN G M E N U O T S 1 C A L IB R A T IO N E Q U A T IO N S
IN T E R N A L T O S E L E C T
S P U R R E D U C T IO N S E T O N T E S T S E T T E S T S E T (F O R S E R V IC E IF S O U R C E 1 F R E Q
N O R M A L /O F F
C O N F IG U R A T IO N U S E O N L Y ) IS G R E A T E R T H A N
P R E S S < E N T E R > P R E S S < E N T E R > W A R N IN G : S O U R C E 2 F R E Q ,
T O S E L E C T T O S E L E C T IN T E R N A L S T A R T S L T T H E T H E I.F .
C O N T IN U IN G
W IL L IN V A L ID A T E C A L IB R A T IO N IS A S S U M E D T O B E
M IL L IM E T E R W A V E
C U R R E N T P R E V IO U S M E N U P O S IT IV E P O L A R IT Y
P R E S S < E N T E R > S E T U P A N D A N D V IC E V E R S A
P R E S S < E N T E R >
T O S E L E C T C A L IB R A T IO N T O S E L E C T
N O T E 1 : G O E S T O M E N U M M W 4 IF N O T E 2 : G O E S T O M E N U B B 2 IF P R E S S < E N T E R >
3 7 3 5 A T E S T S E T IS IN S T A L L E D (S E E C H A P T E R 1 4 ) O P T IO N 1 2 IS IN S T A L L E D (S E E C H A P T E R 1 5 ) T O C O N T IN U E
P R E S S < C L E A R >
T O A B O R T

Figure 4-12. Enhancement Key-Group (Options Menu Key)

4-30 37XXXD OM
FRONT PANEL OPERATION HARD COPY KEY-GROUP

4-9 HARD COPY KEY-GROUP The individual keys within the Hard Copy key-group are described be-
low. Full descriptions for menus can be found in the alphabetical list-
ing (Appendix A) under the menu’s call letters (PM1, PM2, PM3, etc.)

Menu Key: Pressing this key brings up menu PM1. This menu allows
you to define what will happen every time you press the Start Print
key. A menu flow diagram is shown in Figure 4-13.

Start Print Key: Pressing this key starts outputting the measured
data as defined by the setup defined by the selected MENU key.

Stop Print Key: Pressing this key can result in any of the following
actions if the printer is selected:

q If the printer is active, the key aborts the printing and sends a
form feed command to the printer. Aborting the printing clears
the print buffer
q If the printer is not active and another form of output is active,
pressing this key aborts printing, but does not send a form feed
to the printer

Plotting Functions: The 37XXXD can plot an image of either the en-
tire screen or subsets of it. Plots can be either full size or they can be
quarter size and located in any of the four quadrants. You can select
different pens for plotting different parts of the screen. You cannot,
however, plot tabular data.

37XXXD OM 4-31
HARD COPY KEY-GROUP FRONT PANEL OPERATION

M E N U P M 2 M E N U G P 5
D A T A O U T P U T
H E A D E R S S E L E C T L A B E L
. - ------- --
C h a n n e ls M e a s u re m e n t
M O D E L O N (O F F ) A B C D E F G H IJ K L M
X X X X X X X X X X X X N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 ( )-
D is p la y E n h a n c e m e n t
D E V IC E ID O N (O F F ) !# $ % & @ ^ _ '{ } ~
X X X X X X X X X X X X
B K S P C L R D O N E
M E N U P M 2 A O P E R A T O R O N (O F F )
X X X X X X X X X X X X X
L O G O S E T U P T U R N K N O B
C O M M E N T O N (O F F ) T O IN D IC A T E
L O G O O N (O F F )
C H A R A C T E R O R
L O G O T Y P E D A T E O N (O F F ) F U N C T IO N
S T A N D A R D W IL T R O N
H a rd C o p y S E T U P L O G O P R E S S < E N T E R >
U S E R L O G O
M E N U P M 1 T O S E L E C T
IN S T A L L U S E R L O G O P R E S S < E N T E R >
M e n u F R O M F L O P P Y D IS K T O T U R N O N /O F F N U M B E R S M A Y
O U T P U T D E V IC E O R A L S O B E
P R IN T E R F O R P R IN T E R P R E S S < 1 > S E L E C T E D
S ta rt S to p P L O T T E R T O C H A N G E U S IN G K E Y P A D
F O R P L O T T E R
P r in t P r in t D IS K F IL E P R E V IO U S M E N U
S E T U P & O P E R A T IO N S P R E S S < E N T E R >
P r in t S E T U P H E A D E R S T O T U R N O N /O F F
D IS K O P E R A T IO N S M E N U P M 4
O R
O U T P U T O P T IO N S H A R D C O P Y
D IS K O P E R A T IO N S
P lo t P R IN T O P T IO N S
M E N U P M 5
P L O T O P T IO N S T A B U L A R D A T A
O R F R O M H A R D D IS K
D IS K F IL E O P T IO N S P R IN T O P T IO N S T O P R IN T E R
M E N U D S K 3 P R IN T E R T Y P E T A B U L A R D A T A M E N U P M 4 A
P R E S S < E N T E R >
T O S E L E C T T H IN K J E T F R O M F L O P P Y D IS K D IS K F IL E O P T IO N S
S E L E C T F IL E T O P R IN T E R
T O O V E R W R IT E D E S K J E T D E S T IN A T IO N M E N U D S K 2
P R E S S < E N T E R > H A R D D IS K
C R E A T E N E W F IL E E P S O N T O S E L E C T
F L O P P Y D IS K S E L E C T F IL E
F IL E 1 F O R M A T O F T O R E A D
F O R M A T
P R IN T E R O U T P U T
F IL E 2 T E X T F IL E 1
F IL E 3 G R A P H IC A L D A T A S 2 P F IL E 2
T A B U L A R D A T A F IL E 3
F IL E 4 T A B U L A R D A T A
B I T M A P F IL E 4
F IL E 5 H P G L F IL E 5
P R E S S < E N T E R >
F IL E 6 T O S E L E C T P R E S S < E N T E R > F IL E 6
F IL E 7 T O S E L E C T F IL E 7
U S E < S T A R T P R IN T > F IL E 8
F IL E 8
T O C A P T U R E D A T A P R E V IO U S M E N U
P R E S S < E N T E R > M E N U P L 1
T O S E L E C T P R E S S < E N T E R >
P L O T O P T IO N S T O S E L E C T
P R E S S < 1 > F O R P R E S S < 1 > F O R
P R E V IO U S P A G E P R E V IO U S P A G E
F U L L P L O T
P R E S S < 2 > F O R P R E S S < 2 > F O R
N E X T P A G E O B J E C T S T O P L O T M E N U P M 3 M E N U P M 3 A
N E X T P A G E
H E A D E R O N (O F F ) T A B U L A R P R IN T O U T G R A P H IC A L P R IN T E R
M E N U P L 2 O U T P U T F O R M A T O U T P U T F O R M A T
M E N U O N (O F F )
L IM IT S O N (O F F ) P L O T S IZ E M A R K E R D A T A O N (O F F ) H E A D E R O N (O F F )
G R A T IC U L E O N (O F F ) M E N U P L 3 F U L L S IZ E
S W E E P D A T A (O N ) (O F F ) S C R E E N A R E A
D A T A T R A C E S O N (O F F ) -Q U A R T E R T O O U T P U T
S E L E C T
A N D M A R K E R S S IZ E P L O T S - H E A D E R A N D O N (O F F )
P E N C O L O R S P A G E B R E A K S F U L L S C R E E N
U P P E R L E F T
P L O T F O R M A T D A T A P E N G R A P H O N L Y
U P P E R R IG H T P R IN T D E N S IT Y
P L O T S IZ E n
B IT M A P F IL E
L O W E R L E F T X X X P R IN T P T (S ) O U T P U T O P T IO N S
P E N C O L O R S D A T A T R A C E
O U T P U T P R IN T S
O V E R L A Y P E N L O W E R R IG H T T R U E C O L O R
P L O T O R IE N T A T IO N 1 P O IN T E V E R Y
n
X X X P O IN T (S ) C O L O R O N
P O R T R A IT P R E S S < E N T E R >
G R A T IC U L E P E N W H IT E B A C K G R O U N D
L A N D S C A P E T O S E L E C T
n P R E V IO U S M E N U B L A C K O N
P R E S S < E N T E R > P R E S S < E N T E R > W H IT E B A C K G R O U N D
T O S E L E C T M A R K E R S A N D
L IM IT S P E N T O S E L E C T
O R T U R N O N /O F F P R E V IO U S M E N U
n O R T U R N O N /O F F
P R E S S < E N T E R >
H E A D E R P E N T U R N K N O B T O
T O S E L E C T
n C H A N G E N U M B E R
O R T U R N O N /O F F
O F P O IN T S
P E N S P E E D
1 0 0 P E R C E N T
O F M A X IM U M

P R E V IO U S M E N U
P R E S S < E N T E R >
T O S E L E C T

Figure 4-13. Hard Copy Key-Group Menus

4-32 37XXXD OM
FRONT PANEL OPERATION SYSTEM STATE KEY-GROUP

4-10 SYSTEM STATE The individual keys within the System State key-group are described
KEY-GROUP below. The menu flow for the Utility Menu key is shown in Figure 4-14
on page 4-35. Full descriptions for menus can be found in the
alphabetical listing (Appendix 1) under the menu’s call letters (U1, U2,
U3, etc.)

Default Program Key: Pressing this key brings up the default menu.
If pressed again, it recalls the factory selected default values for the
control panel controls. The values are defined in Table 4-2 on the
following page.

Pressing this key then the 1 key resets front panel key states and in-
ternal memories 1 through 4.

Pressing this key then the 0 key resets front panel key states, internal
memories 1 through 10, and certain hardware settings.

NOTE
Use of this key will destroy control panel and calibration
setup data, unless they have been saved to disk.

Utility Menu Key: Pressing this key calls menu U1. This menu ac-
cesses subordinate menus to perform system, disk, and system utili-
ties. The only functions performed directly from the U1 Menu are
“Blank Frequency Information.” and “Data Drawing.”

37XXXD OM 4-33
SYSTEM STATE KEY-GROUP FRONT PANEL OPERATION

Table 4-2. Default Settings

Function Default Setting

Instrument Measurement Setup Menu Displayed
State
Measurement Maximum sweep range of source and test set
Source Power: Model Dependent
Resolution: Normal (401 points)
Channel Quad (four-channel) display
Channel 1 active
Display Channel 1: S11, 1:1 Smith Chart
Channel 2: S12, Log Magnitude and Phase
Channel 3: S21, Log Magnitude and Phase
Channel 4: S22, 1:1 Smith Chart
Scale: 10 dB/Division or 90/Division
Offset: 0.000dB or 0.00 degree
Reference Position: Midscale
Electrical Delay: 0.00 seconds
Dielectric: Air (1.000649)
Normalization: Off
Normalization Sets: Erased
Enhancement Video IF Bandwidth: Normal
Averaging: Off
Smoothing: Off
Calibration Correction: Off and Calibration erased
Connector: K Connector
Load: Broadband
Markers/Limits Markers On/Off: All off
Markers Enabled/Disabled: All enabled
Marker Frequency: All set to the start-sweep frequency
(or start -time distance)
D Reference: Off
Limits: All set to reference position value (all off all en-
abled)
System State GPIB Addresses: Unchanged
Frequency Blanking : Disengaged,
Error(s): GPIB SRQ errors are cleared, Service Log
errors are not cleared
Measurement: Restarted

4-34 37XXXD OM
FRONT PANEL OPERATION SYSTEM STATE KEY-GROUP

M E N U G P 8 M E N U D S K 6 M E N U A C A L _ C H A R
M E N U D S K 7
N E T W O R K S E T U P T Y P E O F F IL E S A U T O C A L
S E L E C T F IL E
. -

C h a n n e ls M e a s u re m e n t
T O D E L E T E C H A R A C T E R IZ A T IO N
E T H E R N E T A D D R E S S T O D E L E T E
M E N U G P 7 S W IT C H A V E R A G IN G
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C F R O N T P A N E L
S E T U P A N D F IL E 1 X X X X
G P IB A D D R E S S E S
D is p la y E n h a n c e m e n t

IP A D D R E S S C A L D A T A F IL E 2
X X X .X X X .X X X .X X X P O R T C O N F IG
F IL E 3 M E N U D S K 1 -F D
IE E E 4 8 8 .2 T R A C E D A T A L = 1 , R = 2 /
G P IB IN T E R F A C E S U B N E T M A S K F IL E 4 R = 1 , L -2
T A B U L A R D A T A F L O P P Y D IS K
X X X .X X X .X X X .X X X F IL E 5
A D D R E S S U T IL IT IE S N U M B E R O F A V G S
M E N U U 2 6 W A R N IN G T E X T D A T A F IL E 6
M E N U D S K 1 -H D R E F L E C T IO N
D O N O T C H A N G E F IL E 7 D IS P L A Y X X X X
D E D IC A T E D S 2 P D A T A
D IS P L A Y IN S T R U M E N T D E F A U L T G A T E W A Y D IR E C T O R Y
S y s te m S ta te G P IB IN T E R F A C E H A R D D IS K F IL E 8
F R O M 0 .0 .0 .0 B IT M A P D A T A L O A D
S T A T E P A R A M E T E R S U T IL IT IE S U N L E S S O N E E X IS T S P R E V IO U S M E N U D E L E T E F IL E S X X X X
E X T E R N A L S O U R C E 1 H P G L D A T A
D e fa u lt U tility S Y S T E M 4 D E F A L U T G A T E W A Y P R E S S < E N T E R > C O P Y F IL E S T H R U
P r o g r a m M e n u D IS P L A Y X X X .X X X .X X X .X X X A L L T Y P E S (* .* ) T O S E L E C T T 0 H A R D D IS K X X X X
C A L IB R A T IO N E X T E R N A L S O U R C E 2 D IR E C T O R Y
5 P R E V IO U S M E N U P R E S S < 1 > F O R IS O L A T IO N
M O R E C A L IB R A T IO N D E L E T E F IL E S P R E V IO U S P A G E F O R M A T X X X X
P L O T T E R P R E S S < E N T E R > F L O P P Y D IS K
O P E R A T IN G 8 C O P Y F IL E S T O S E L E C T P R E S S < 2 > F O R S T A R T A U T O C A L
M E N U U 1 T 0 F L O P P Y D IS K N E X T P A G E H A R D D IS K C H A R A C T E R IZ A T IO N
C H A N N E L S 1 & 2 P O W E R M E T E R U T IL IT IE S
S E L E C T U T IL IT Y
2 3 F O R M A T P R E S S < E N T E R >
F U N C T IO N O P T IO N S C H A N N E L S 3 & 4 H A R D D IS K C O M M A N D L IN E M E N U A C A L _ U T IL S T O S E L E C T
G P IB A D D R E S S E S N E X T P A R A M P A G E F R E Q U E N C Y C O U N T E R O R S W IT C H
7 P R E S S < E N T E R > A U T O C A L
N E T W O R K S E T U P P R E S S < E N T E R > C O M M A N D L IN E
T O S E L E C T U T IL IT IE S
T O S E L E C T
D IS P L A Y A U T O C A L
IN S T R U M E N T F L O P P Y D IS K M E N U D S K 9
M E N U D S K 8 C H A R A C T E R IZ A T IO N
P A R A M E T E R S U T IL IT IE S
S A V E
P R E S S < E N T E R > T Y P E O F F IL E S S E L E C T F IL E
D IS K U T IL IT IE S T O H A R D D IS K
T O S E L E C T T O C O P Y T O C O P Y
M E N U U 3 S A V E
C A L C O M P O N E N T M E N U U 4
U T IL IT IE S M E N U U 4 B F R O N T P A N E L F IL E 1 T O F L O P P Y D IS K
C A L IB R A T IO N D IS P L A Y IN S T A L L E D D IS P L A Y IN S T A L L E D S E T U P A N D F IL E 2
A U T O C A L C O M P O N E N T C A L D A T A R E C A L L
O P E N & S H O R T M E N U U 4 A O P E N & S H O R T F IL E 3 F R O M H A R D D IS K
U T IL IT IE S U T IL IT IE S T E S T P O R T T E S T P O R T M E N U U 5 A
D IS P L A Y IN S T A L L E D T R A C E D A T A F IL E 4 R E C A L L
C O N N E C T O R IN F O C O N N E C T O R IN F O
C O L O R C O N F IG IN S T A L L K IT O P E N & S H O R T F IL E 5 F R O M F L O P P Y D IS K C O L O R S C H E M E S
T A B U L A R D A T A
IN F O R M A T IO N K - C O N N (M ) T E S T P O R T
W 1 - C O N N (M ) F IL E 6 P R E S S < E N T E R >
D A T A O N (O F F ) F R O M F L O P P Y D IS K K - C O N N (F ) C O N N E C T O R IN F O T E X T D A T A
W 1 - C O N N (F ) F IL E 7 T O S E L E C T R E S E T C O L O R S
D R A W IN G
V - C O N N (M ) S 2 P D A T A F IL E 8 N E W C O L O R S
B L A N K D IS P L A Y C O A X IA L T Y P E N (M ) S P E C IA L A (M )
F R E Q IN F O R M A T IO N O P E N & S H O R T V - C O N N (F )
T Y P E N (F ) S P E C IA L A (F ) B IT M A P D A T A P R E V IO U S M E N U C L A S S IC C O L O R S
IN F O R M A T IO N
S E T D A T E /T IM E W 1 - C O N N (M ) H P G L D A T A P R E S S < E N T E R > IN V E R S E C O L O R S
T Y P E N (M ) 7 5 9 S P E C IA L B (M )
D IS P L A Y C O A X IA L W 1 - C O N N (F ) T O S E L E C T
T Y P E N (F ) 7 5 9 S P E C IA L B (F ) A L L T Y P E S (* .* )
P R E S S < E N T E R > O F F S E T S H O R T P R E S S < 1 > F O R B R IL L IA N T C O L O R S
T O S E L E C T IN F O R M A T IO N S M A (M ) P R E V IO U S M E N U
7 /1 6 (M ) S P E C IA L C (M ) P R E V IO U S P A G E
O R T U R N O N /O F F S M A (F )
7 /1 6 (F ) S P E C IA L C (F ) P R E S S < E N T E R > S O F T C O L O R S
D IS P L A Y T O S E L E C T P R E S S < 2 > F O R
W A V E G U ID E G P C - 3 .5 (M ) N E X T P A G E M E N U U 5
T N C (M ) N E X T C O N N E C T O R T O C U S T O M IZ E
IN F O R M A T IO N G P C - 3 .5 (F )
M E N U D F L T T N C (F ) C O L O R S E L E C T A C O L O R
P R E V IO U S M E N U C O N F IG U R A T IO N S C H E M E A N D /O R
G P C - 7
P R E S S < E N T E R > 2 .4 m m (M ) M O D IF Y T H E C O L O R
W A R N IN G M E N U U 6 D A T A
T O S E L E C T N E X T C O N N E C T O R 2 .4 m m (F ) T O S E L E C T C O N F IG , T H E N
X X X X
D E F A U L T P R E S S < E N T E R > S T O R E A S R E S E T
S E T D A T E /T IM E S P E C IA L (M ) O V E R L A Y D A T A
P R O G R A M M O R E C O N N E C T O R S
S E L E C T E D Y E A R S P E C IA L (F ) X X X X S T O R E C O L O R
X X X X P R E V IO U S M E N U M E M O R Y D A T A C O N F IG A S R E S E T
C O N T IN U IN G N E X T C O N N E C T O R X X X X (D E F A U L T ) C O L O R S
M O N T H P R E S S < E N T E R >
W IL L E R A S E M A R K E R S & L IM IT S
X X T O S E L E C T M O R E C O N N E C T O R P R E V IO U S M E N U
C U R R E N T X X X X
S E T U P A N D D A Y
C A L IB R A T IO N X X P R E V IO U S M E N U G R A T IC U L E
P R E S S < E N T E R >
X X X X T O S E L E C T
H O U R T O S E L E C T
P R E S S X X
< D E F A U L T P R O G R A M > P R E S S < E N T E R > A N N O T A T IO N &
T O C O N F IR M M IN U T E M E N U T E X T
X X X X X X
P R E S S < C L E A R > M E N U H E A D E R S
D O N E ,
T O A B O R T (T IT L E S & IN F O )
(S E T D A T E /T IM E )
X X X X
P R E V IO U S M E N U B A C K G R O U N D
(D A T E /T IM E X X X X
N O T S E T )
R E S E T C O L O R S
P R E S S < E N T E R > C O L O R S C H E M E S
T O S E L E C T

Figure 4-14. System State Key-Group Menus

37XXXD OM 4-35
MARKERS/LIMITS KEY-GROUP FRONT PANEL OPERATION

4-11 MARKERS/LIMITS The individual keys within the Markers/Limits key-group are de-
KEY-GROUP scribed below. The menu flow for the Marker Menu key is shown in
Figure 4-15 on the following page. Full descriptions for these menus
can be found in the alphabetical listing (Appendix A) under the menu’s
call letters (M1, M2, M3, etc.)

Marker Menu Key: Pressing the Marker Menu key calls Menu M1. This
menu lets you toggle markers on and off and set marker frequencies,
times, or distances.

Readout Marker Key: Pressing this key calls different menus, depend-
ing upon front panel key selections, as described below:

q It calls menu M1 if there are no markers available within the se-

lected frequency range
q It calls menu M3 if no Delta ref marker has been selected
q It calls menu M4 if the DReference mode is off and the selected
marker is in the current sweep range (or time/distance)
q It calls menu M5 if the DReference mode and marker are both on
and the DReference marker is in the selected sweep range (or
time/distance)
q It calls menu M6 if ACTIVE MARKER ON ALL CHANNELS has
been previously selected in menu M9
q It calls menu M7 if SEARCH has been previously selected in
menu M9
q It calls menu M8 if FILTER PARAMETER has been previously
selected in menu M9

Limits Key: Pressing this key calls the appropriate Limit menu based
on the graph type selected using the Graph Type key and menu.

Marker Readout Functions: This menu choice, which appears on sev-

eral marker menus, provides for several filter-related measurements.
It also allows for performing a marker-value search and for reading
the active marker value on all displayed channels.

Limit Frequency Readout Function: The 37XXXD has a Limit-Fre-

quency Readout function. This function allows frequency values to be
NOTE read at a specified level (such as the 3 dB point) on the data trace.
Full menu descriptions can This function is available for all rectilinear graph-types.
be found in the alphabetical The graph-type and their menu call letters are listed below:
listing (Appendix A) under the
q Log Magnitude, Menu LF1 q Imaginary, Menu LF7
menu call letters (LF1, LF2,
LF3, etc.) q Phase, Menu LF2 q Power Out, Menu LF8
q Group Delay, Menu LF3 q Real, Menu LF6
q Linear Magnitude, Menu LF4 q Imaginary, Menu LF7
q SWR, Menu LF5 q Power Out, Menu LF8
q Real, Menu LF6

4-36 37XXXD OM
FRONT PANEL OPERATION MARKERS/LIMITS KEY-GROUP

. -

C h a n n e ls M e a s u re m e n t

D is p la y E n h a n c e m e n t

M a r k e r s /L im its

L im its S e e S h e e t 2

N O T E 2 N O T E 3 N O T E 4 N O T E 5 N O T E 6 N O T E 7
M a rk e r R e a d o u t
M e n u M a rk e r
M E N U M 3 M E N U M 4 M E N U M 5 M E N U M 6 M E N U M 7 M E N U M 8
N O T E 1 + X X X .X X X X m m R E F + X X X .X X X X m m R E F M A R K E R X S E A R C H F IL T E R P A R A M E T E R S
S E L E C T + X X X .X X X d B O F F S E T + X X X .X X X d B O F F S E T A L L D IS P L A Y E D
R E A D O U T M A R K E R + X X X .X X ° O F F S E T + X X X .X X ° O F F S E T C H A N N E L S V A L U E
M E N U M 1 C E N T E R F R E Q
-X X X .X X X d B
X X .X X X X X X X X G H z
M A R K E R 1 M A R K E R 1 M A R K E R 1 C H 1 - S 1 1
S E T M A R K E R S X X .X X X X X X G H z X X .X X X X X X G H z R E F E R E N C E
X X .X X X X X X G H z X X .X X X X X X X X G H z B A N D W ID T H
M A R K E R 1 O N (O F F ) X X .X X X d B M A R K E R T O M A X -X X X .X X X d B M A X IM U M V A L U E
M A R K E R 2 -X X X .X X X d B
X X .X X X X X X G H z X X X .X X X D E G M A R K E R T O M IN -X X X .X X ° R E F M A R K E R
X X .X X X X X X G H z R E F M A R K E R
0 d B
M A R K E R 2 R E F O N (1 - 2 ) X X .X X X X X X X X G H z
M A R K E R 3 M A R K E R T O M A X C H 2 - S 2 1
X X .X X X X X X G H z M A R K E R T O M IN X X .X X X X X G H z V A L U E A T R E F E R E N C E
X X .X X X X X X G H z X X .X X X d B L O S S A T R E F
C H 3 - S 1 2 -X X X .X X X d B -X X X .X X X d B
M A R K E R 3 O N (O F F ) M A R K E R 4 2 X X .X X X X G H z (X X X .X X ° )
X X .X X X X X X G H z X X .X X X d B X X .X X X X X X X X G H z S E A R C H L E F T
X X .X X X X X X G H z -X X X .X X X d B Q
X X .X X D E G (1 - 3 ) S E A R C H R IG H T
M A R K E R 4 O N (O F F ) X X .X X X X X G H z -X X X .X X ° X X X X .X X X
M A R K E R 5 X X .X X X X X X X X G H z
3 X X .X X X X G H z X X .X X X d B
M A R K E R 5 O N (O F F ) X X .X X X X X X G H z S H A P E F A C T O R
X X .X X X d B (X X X .X X D E G ) C H 4 - S 2 2 S E A R C H M R K R V A L U E S
M A R K E R 6 O N (O F F ) M A R K E R 6 X X .X X D E G X X X .X X X
C H 1 : -X X .X X X d B
X X .X X X X X X G H z X X .X X X X X X G H z ( 1 - 4 ) M A R K E R T O M A X
4 X X .X X X X G H z C H 2 : -X X .X X X d B T R A C K IN G O N
X X .X X X X X G H z M A R K E R T O M IN
X X .X X X d B C H 3 : -X X .X X X d B
D IS P L A Y O N (O F F ) X X .X X X d B
R E F M O D E IS O N (O F F ) X X .X X D E G M A R K E R R E A D O U T C H 4 : -X X .X X X d B
M A R K E R S M E N U M 2 ( X X X .X X D E G ) F IL T E R S E T U P
F U N C T IO N S
R E F M O D E O N (O F F ) S E L E C T P R E S S < E N T E R > 5 X X .X X X X G H z
( 1 - 5 ) T R A C K IN G O N (O F F ) M A R K E R R E A D O U T
R E F M A R K E R T O S E L E C T X X .X X X d B P R E S S < E N T E R >
S E L E C T X X .X X X X X G H z F U N C T IO N S
X X .X X D E G T O S E L E C T M A R K E R R E A D O U T
R E F M A R K E R M A R K E R 1 X X .X X X d B
6 X X .X X X X G H z ( X X X .X X D E G ) F U N C T IO N S P R E S S < E N T E R >
X X .X X X X X X G H z
M A R K E R R E A D O U T X X .X X X d B T O S E L E C T
F U N C T IO N S M A R K E R 3 X X .X X D E G ( 1 - 6 ) O R T U R N O N /O F F
X X .X X X X X X G H z X X .X X X X X G H z M E N U M 8 A
M A R K E R R E A D O U T X X .X X X d B
M A R K E R 4 F U N C T IO N S ( X X X .X X D E G ) F IL T E R S E T U P
X X .X X X X X X G H z
M A R K E R R E A D O U T B A N D W ID T H
P R E S S < E N T E R > F U N C T IO N S L O S S V A L U E
T O S E L E C T X X X .X X X D B

R E F E R E N C E
M A X IM U M V A L U E
R E F M A R K E R
0 D B
S H A P E F A C T O R
H IG H
M E N U M 9 X X X .X X X d B

N O T E 1 : M e n u M 1 a p p e a r s if n o m a r k e r s a r e a v a ila b le w ith in th e s e le c te d fr e q u e n c y r a n g e . L O W
M A R K E R R E A D O U T
X X X .X X X d B
F U N C T IO N S N O T E 2 : M e n u M 3 a p p e a r s w h e n M A R K E R S O N A C T IV E C H A N N E L h a s b e e n p r e v io u s ly s e le c te d in M e n u M 9 a n d
M e n u M 3 , ( 1 ) If th e D e lta R e fe r e n c e m o d e is o ff a n d th e r e is n o s e le c te d m a r k e r o r if th e s e le c te d m a r k e r is n o t w ith in th e s w e e p r a n g e . R E A D O U T S
M A R K E R S O N M 4 , o r M 5 ( 2 ) If th e D e lta R e fe r e n c e m o d e is o n a n d th e D e lta R e fe r e n c e m a r k e r is n o t w ith in th e s w e e p r a n g e o r if n o D e lta R e fe r e n c e m a r k e r is s e le c te d .
A C T IV E C H A N N E L Q O F F
N O T E 3 : M e n u M 4 a p p e a r s w h e n M A R K E R S O N A C T IV E C H A N N E L h a s b e e n p r e v io u s ly s e le c te d in M e n u M 9
A C T IV E M A R K E R S a n d if th e D e lta R e fe r e n c e m o d e is o ff a n d th e s e le c te d m a r k e r is w ith in th e c u r r e n t s w e e p r a n g e . S H A P E O F F
M e n u M 6 F A C T O R
O N A L L C H A N N E L S
N O T E 4 : M e n u M 5
a p p e a r s w h e n M A R K E R S O N A C T IV E C H A N N E L h a s b e e n p r e v io u s ly s e le c te d in M e n u M 9 a n d if th e D e lta R e fe r e n c e m o d e
S E A R C H M e n u M 7 a n d m a r k e r a r e b o th o n a n d th e D e lta R e fe r e n c e m a r k e r is w ith in th e s e le c te d s w e e p r a n g e . P R E V IO U S M E N U
F IL T E R N O T E 5 : M e n u M 6 a p p e a r s w h e n A C T IV E M A R K E R S O N A L L C H A N N E L S h a s b e e n p r e v io u s ly s e le c te d in M e n u M 9 .
P A R A M E T E R S M e n u M 8
N O T E 6 : M e n u M 7 a p p e a r s w h e n S E A R C H h a s b e e n p r e v io u s ly s e le c te d in M e n u M 9 .
M A R K E R M O D E
N O T E 7 : M e n u M 8 a p p e a r s w h e n F IL T E R P A R A M E T E R S h a s b e e n p r e v io u s ly s e le c te d in M e n u M 9 .
C O N T IN U O U S
D IS C R E T E
S E T M A R K E R S M e n u M 1

Figure 4-15. Markers Menus (1 of 3)

37XXXD OM 4-37
MARKERS/LIMITS KEY-GROUP FRONT PANEL OPERATION

Markers/Limits
Markers/Limits Markers/Limits
Markers/Limits
Limits
Limits Limits
Limits

MENU L2
MENU L1
SINGLE LIMITS MENU L3 MENU L4
SINGLE LIMITS
- LINEAR POLAR- SINGLE LIMITS SINGLE LIMITS
- LOG MAG - UPPER LIMIT ON(OFF) - SMITH CHART-
- LOG MAG -
UPPER LIMIT ON(OFF) XXX.XXX mV UPPER LIMIT ON(OFF)
UPPER LIMIT ON(OFF)
XXX.XXX dB LOWER LIMIT ON(OFF) XXX.XXX mV
XXX.XXX dB
LOWER LIMIT ON(OFF) XXX.XXX mV
LOWER LIMIT ON(OFF) LOWER LIMIT ON(OFF)
XXX.XXX dB DISPLAY ON(OFF)
XXX.XXX mV XXX.XXX dB
A LIMITS
READOUT LIMIT DISPLAY ON(OFF) A
B READOUT LIMIT
TEST LIMITS LIMITS
DISPLAY ON(OFF)
- PHASE - TEST LIMITS B
PRESS <ENTER> LIMITS
UPPER LIMIT ON/OFF TO SELECT B
PRESS <ENTER> TEST LIMITS
XXX.XXX ˚ OR TURN ON/OFF
TO SELECT SEGMENTED LIMITS C
LOWER LIMIT ON(OFF) OR TURN ON/OFF
XXX.XXX ˚
PRESS <ENTER>
READOUT LIMIT TO SELECT
OR TURN ON/OFF
DISPLAY ON(OFF)
LIMITS
TEST LIMITS B

SEGMENTED LIMITS C

PRESS <ENTER>
TO SELECT
OR TURN ON/OFF

Markers/Limits Markers/Limits Markers/Limits Markers/Limits

Limits Limits Limits Limits

MENU L5 MENU L6 MENU L7 MENU L8

SINGLE LIMITS SINGLE LIMITS SINGLE LIMITS SINGLE LIMITS

- PHASE - - LOG POLAR - - GROUP DELAY- - LINEAR MAG -

UPPER LIMIT ON/OFF UPPER LIMIT ON(OFF) UPPER LIMIT ON(OFF) UPPER LIMIT ON(OFF)
XXX.XXX ˚ XXX.XXX dB XXX.XXX fs XXX.XXX pU
LOWER LIMIT ON(OFF) LOWER LIMIT ON(OFF) LOWER LIMIT ON(OFF) LOWER LIMIT ON(OFF)
XXX.XXX ˚ XXX.XXX dB XXX.XXX fs XXX.XXX pU
READOUT LIMIT A READOUT LIMIT A READOUT LIMIT A
DISPLAY ON(OFF)
DISPLAY ON(OFF) LIMITS DISPLAY ON(OFF) DISPLAY ON(OFF)
LIMITS TEST LIMITS B LIMITS LIMITS
TEST LIMITS B TEST LIMITS B TEST LIMITS B
PRESS <ENTER>
SEGMENTED LIMITS C TO SELECT SEGMENTED LIMITS C SEGMENTED LIMITS C
OR TURN ON/OFF
PRESS <ENTER> PRESS <ENTER> PRESS <ENTER>
TO SELECT TO SELECT TO SELECT
OR TURN ON/OFF OR TURN ON/OFF OR TURN ON/OFF

Figure 4-15. Markers/Limits Key-Group Menus (2 of 3)

4-38 37XXXD OM
FRONT PANEL OPERATION MARKERS/LIMITS KEY-GROUP

Markers/Limits
Markers/Limits Markers/Limits
Markers/Limits

Limits
Limits Limits
Limits

MENU L11 MENU L12

MENU L9 MENU L10
SINGLE LIMITS SINGLE LIMITS
SINGLE LIMITS SINGLE LIMITS
- REAL -
- LINEAR MAG - - IMAGINARY-
- REAL -
UPPER LIMIT ON(OFF) UPPER LIMIT ON(OFF)
UPPER LIMIT ON(OFF) UPPER LIMIT ON(OFF) XXX.XXX pU
XXX.XXX dB XXX.XXX pU
XXX.XXX pU
LOWER LIMIT ON(OFF)
LOWER LIMIT ON(OFF) LOWER LIMIT ON(OFF)
LOWER LIMIT ON(OFF) XXX.XXX pU
XXX.XXX dB XXX.XXX pU
XXX.XXX pU A
READOUT LIMIT A READOUT LIMIT
READOUT LIMIT A A
READOUT LIMIT
DISPLAY ON(OFF)
DISPLAY ON(OFF) - IMAGINARY -
LIMITS
- PHASE - LIMITS
B UPPER LIMIT ON(OFF)
UPPER LIMIT ON/OFF B TEST LIMITS
TEST LIMITS XXX.XXX pU
XXX.XXX ˚ SEGMENTED LIMITS C
SEGMENTED LIMITS C LOWER LIMIT ON(OFF)
LOWER LIMIT ON(OFF) XXX.XXX pU
XXX.XXX ˚ PRESS <ENTER>
PRESS <ENTER> MENU LD1
TO SELECT READOUT LIMIT A
READOUT LIMIT A TO SELECT
OR TURN ON/OFF DEFINE UPPER SEGS
OR TURN ON/OFF DISPLAY ON(OFF)
DISPLAY ON(OFF) SEGMENT ON (OFF) LIMITS
LIMITS X
TEST LIMITS B
B A C
TEST LIMITS START POSITION
HORIZONTAL SEGMENTED LIMITS C
SEGMENTED LIMITS C
MENU LFX XXX.XXXXXXXXX GHz
PRESS <ENTER>
PRESS <ENTER> VERTICAL
READOUT LIMIT MENU LSX XX.XXX dB TO SELECT
TO SELECT OR TURN ON/OFF
INTERCEPTS SEGMENTED LIMITS STOP POSITION
OR TURN ON/OFF
- XXXXXXX - HORIZONTAL
XXXXXXXXX
Markers/Limits XXX.XXXXXXXXX GHz
UPPER LIMIT (REF)
UPPER LIMIT ON(OFF) VERTICAL
XXX.XXX xx
XX.XXX dB B
Limits DEFINE UPPER
LOWER LIMIT
LOWER LIMIT ON(OFF) BEGIN NEXT
XXX.XXX xx
L IMIT DIFFERENCE ATTACH NEXT
DEFINE LOWER
Δ (UPPER-LOWER) CLEAR SEGMENT MENU LTST
SEGMENTED OFFSETS PREVIOUS MENU
MENU L13 INTERCEPTS AT TEST LIMITS
HORIZONTAL PRESS <ENTER>
SINGLE LIMITS LOWER LIMIT XXX.XXXXXXXXX GHz LIMIT ON (OFF)
TO SELECT
X.XXXX GHz VERTICAL OR TURN ON/OFF TESTING
- SWR- X.XXXX GHz XX.XXX dB
X.XXXX GHz BEEP FOR ON (OFF)
UPPER LIMIT ON(OFF) X.XXXX GHz CLEAR ALL TEST FAILURE
X.XXXX GHz MENU LD1
XXX.XXX pU
X.XXXX GHz DISPLAY ON(OFF) LIMIT TEST TTL
DEFINE LOWER SEGS
LOWER LIMIT ON(OFF) LIMITS FAIL CONDITION
XXX.XXX pU SEGMENT ON (OFF) TTL LOW/TTL HIGH
Markers/Limits TEST LIMITS X
READOUT LIMIT A CHANNEL 1 TEST
SINGLE LIMITS START POSITION
PASS (FAIL)
DISPLAY ON(OFF) Limits HORIZONTAL
LIMITS PRESS <ENTER> XXX.XXXXXXXXX GHz CHANNEL 2 TEST
TO SELECT PASS (FAIL)
TEST LIMITS B VERTICAL
OR TURN ON/OFF XX.XXX dB CHANNEL 3 TEST
MENU L14
SEGMENTED LIMITS C PASS (FAIL)
SINGLE LIMITS STOP POSITION
CHANNEL 4 TEST
PRESS <ENTER> HORIZONTAL
PASS (FAIL)
- POWER OUT-- XXX.XXXXXXXXX GHz
TO SELECT
OR TURN ON/OFF UPPER LIMIT ON(OFF) VERTICAL PRESS <ENTER>
XXX.XXX pU XX.XXX dB
TO SELECT
BEGIN NEXT OR TURN ON/OFF
LOWER LIMIT ON(OFF)
ATTACH NEXT
XXX.XXX pU
CLEAR SEGMENT
READOUT LIMIT A
PREVIOUS MENU
DISPLAY ON(OFF) PRESS <ENTER>
LIMITS TO SELECT
B OR TURN ON/OFF
TEST LIMITS
PRESS <ENTER>
TO SELECT
OR TURN ON/OFF

Figure 4-15. Markers/Limits Key-Group Menus (3 of 3)

37XXXD OM 4-39
DISK STORAGE INTERFACE FRONT PANEL OPERATION

4-12 DISK STORAGE The 37XXXD has two internally mounted disk drives: an 80 MB hard
INTERFACE disk and a 3.5 inch floppy. The format, files, and directory are compati-
ble with MS-DOS, Version 5.0 and above.

Disk Format Floppy diskettes are MS-DOS compatible and have a 1.44 MByte ca-
pacity.

Disk Files You may find any of the following file-types on the 37XXXD disk:

q Program Files: These are binary files used to load the operating
program. They are provided on the hard drive, and a backup copy
is provided on floppy diskettes. Application programs cannot
read them
q Calibration Data Files: These are binary files used to store and
retrieve calibration and other data. Application programs cannot
read them. File size depends on calibration type
q Text Files: These are tab-delimited ASCII files with the “txt” file
extension. They can be read by application programs
q S2P Parameter Data Files: These files define a 2-port file format
that includes all four S parameters. They can be read by applica-
tions programs. They have a file extension of “S2P”

NOTE q Tabular Measurement Data Files: These are ASCII files used to
store actual measurement data. They can be read by applications
File names must begin with programs. File size depends on selected options
alphabetical, not numeric
characters. q Trace Memory Files: These are binary files used to store trace
data. Applications programs cannot read them. You use them to
perform trace math operations on data
q Cal Kit File for Coax or Waveguide
q AutoCal Characterization file

4-40 37XXXD OM
FRONT PANEL OPERATION DISK STORAGE INTERFACE

Disk File Output Device You can select the output drive destination for the disk file as either
the hard disk (C:) or the floppy drive (A:). The format of the disk file is
also selected. The default condition is text disk file to the hard disk.

You may then proceed with normal measurements. The Start Print key
may then be used at the instant you intend to capture the data. Menu
DISK 3 then appears and allows the creation of a new file or to over-
write an existing file in the current directory.

Note that the output for text and S2P files have predefined formats.
Tabular data format is configured via the Print Options (Menu PM5)
or Tabular Data (Menu PM3). Bitmap format is configured via the
Print Options (Menu PM5), Options (Menu PM5, or Graphical Data
(Menu PM3A). HPGL format is configured via the Plot Options (Menu
PL1).

You are able to direct hard copy output to the HDD or floppy, in addi-
tion to the printer and plotter. In addition to text (*.txt), S2P (*.s2p),
and tabular (*.dat) files, bitmaps (*.bmp) and HPGL (*.hgl) files are of-
fered to satisfy your desktop publishing requirements. Specifically,
color bitmaps and graphic language files can be imported into Win-
dows applications, such as Cap3700.

Formatting a Data File Disk You may format additional diskettes to hold calibration, tabular mea-
surement, and trace-memory data files. Do this using the FORMAT
DISK selection on the “Floppy Disk Utilities” menu. Using this selec-
tion will format the target disk and overwrite any existing data it con-
tains.

A format hard disk utility is provided in case of hard disk failure.

Using this feature overwrites your system software and requires boot-
ing from the backup floppy diskettes.

Copying Data Files From Use the COPY FILES selection on the “Floppy Disk Utilities” and
Disk to Disk “Hard Disk Utilities” menus to copy data files between hard and floppy
diskettes.

Recovering From Disk If you experience a read or write error during a disk operation, you
Write/Read Errors should:

q Verify first character of filename is alphabetical and not numeric

q Verify that the diskette has been properly formatted
q Verify that the diskette is high density (1.44 MB). Low density
(720 KB) diskettes are not supported
q Verify that the write-protect tab on the disk is engaged
q Retry the disk operation

Repeated disk errors may indicate a defective diskette and format.

37XXXD OM 4-41
COMMAND LINE FRONT PANEL OPERATION

4-13 COMMAND LINE The Command Line menu choice provides several DOS compatible
commands. Command line options are:

q CREATE DIRECTORY (MD)

q LIST DIRECTORY (DIR)
q CHANGE DIRECTORY (CD)
q DELETE FILES (DEL)
q REMOVE DIRECTORY (RD)
q COPY FILES (COPY)

These options are NOT case sensitive.

Create Directory This command is performed by: MD c:\pat-h\dir_name or

MD a:\path\dir_name. The c: is used to refer to the hard disk, and a:
is for the floppy disk.

List Directory This command is performed by “DIR” command. This may be used as
DIR c:\path or without any path specified. The syntax is:

DIR c:\path or DIR a:\path.

If c: or a: is not used, the default is the current hard disk directory. You
may use wild cards as follows:

q DIR *.cal
q DIR filter?.cal

Change Directory This command is performed by CD c:\path or CD a:\path. Both of

these options do not require a device name. The device name is re-
ferred to by c: or a:.

If you choose to do CD dir_name, this implies the current Hard disk di-
rectory.

Delete Files This command is used to delete a particular file(s) in a directory, or de-
lete the entire contents of the directory by using the wild card option.
The command line is:

q DEL filename
q DEL c:\path\filename
q DEL a:\path\*

4-42 37XXXD OM
FRONT PANEL OPERATION COMMAND LINE

Remove Directory This command is used to delete a particular directory. The command is
only valid when the entire directory is empty:

q RD c:\path\directory
q RD a:\path\directory

Copy Files This command is performed by the command line COPY source: desti-
nation:

COPY c:\path\name a:\path\name

Any combination of the drive is allowed, except for the same directory,
and the same name.

Once the COMMAND LINE is selected, the system will prompt a one
line dialog box to allow command entry. The dialog box remains open
only for the user interface.

Conventions Be aware of the following conventions when using the Command Line
choice. There is a limitation of five sublevel directories in the 37XXXD
models:

q Any directory change will force the system to use that as the cur-
rent directory for other menus that deal with the file system. For
example, if the user changes the directory to c:\lib\junk, then
any activity for saving hard copy or calibration files will be saved
on the junk directory.
q The default directory is the root directory.
q GPIB support: GPIB mnemonics will provide functionality for
each of the above operations. The format is shown below:

Function Path
List directory DIR “[device:/][”
Make directory MD “[device:/][path]name”
Change directory CD “[device:/][path]napath]nameme”
Delete File(s) DEL “[device:/][path]name”
Remove directory RD “[device:/][path]name”
Copy files COPY “[device:][/path/][source]” “[de-
vice:][/path/][destination]”

37XXXD OM 4-43
COMMAND LINE FRONT PANEL OPERATION

Default Command Recall CAL Recall NRM Save TXT Save S2P Save DAT
Program Utility Menu Options Menu Ctrl Line Recall from HDD from HDD Ctrl to Floppy to Floppy to Floppy
Avg/Smooth Save CAL Save NRM Save TXT Save S2P Save DAT Hardcopy
Vector Network Analyzer Menu Trace Smooth Average Video IF BW Alt Save to HDD to HDD Alt to HDD to HDD to HDD Menu
Readout
Clear/Ret Loc _____ Esc Channel Menu Marker Menu Marker
Limits Shift S Params Set Scale Ref Plane Trace Memory Shift Domain Applications Begin Cal Stop Print
Start Print ________ Print Screen, F12
Auto Ref Store Data
Hold _____________ Pause Ch 1 Ch 2 Ch 3 Ch 4 Graph Type Auto Scale Setup Menu Data Points Apply Cal Start Print
Plane to Memory
Copyright (c) 1994-98 by Anritsu Company

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 F11 F12

Default Command Recall CAL Recall NRM Save TXT Save S2P Save DAT
Ctrl Program Utility Menu Options Menu Line Recall from HDD from HDD to Floppy to Floppy to Floppy Ctrl
Avg/Smooth Save CAL Save NRM Save TXT Save S2P Save DAT Hardcopy
Vector Network Analyzer Alt Menu Trace Smooth Average Video IF BW Save to HDD to HDD to HDD to HDD to HDD Menu Alt
Readout
Clear/Ret Loc _____ Esc Shift Channel Menu Marker Menu Marker Limits S Params Set Scale Ref Plane Trace Memory Domain Applications Begin Cal Stop Print Shift
Start Print ________ Print Screen, F12
Auto Ref Store Data
Hold _____________ Pause Ch 1 Ch 2 Ch 3 Ch 4 Graph Type Auto Scale Plane to Memory Setup Menu Data Points Apply Cal Start Print
Copyright (c) 1994-98 by Anritsu Company

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 F11 F12

Actual-Size Keyboard Templates for 37XXXD

4-44 37XXXD OM
 Chapter 5
Error and Status

Table of Contents

5-1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3

5-2 ERROR MESSAGES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
 Chapter 5
Error and Status Messages
5-1 INTRODUCTION This chapter lists, describes, and provides corrective action for the er-
ror messages that point to problems that the operator can correct. Any
error messages that appear on the display but do not appear in this
chapter will require action by a qualified service representative.

5-2 ERROR MESSAGES Error messages are provided in Tables 5-1 and 5-2.

Table 5-1. General Error Messages (1 of 3)

Error Message Description Corrective Action

ATTENUATOR UNAVAILABLE Option 6 Port 2 Test Step Attenuator is Install Option 6 Step Attenuator,
not installed.
BANDS MUST SEQUENCE Frequency bands in Multiple Source None, no skipping is allowed.
mode must sequence in a 1-2-3-4-5 or-
der.
BOTH LIMITS MUST BE ON Must have both limits activated. Turn on limits.
DIFFERENT H/W SETUP. RECALL Source is different from the recalled Reconfigure system to duplicate the
ABORTED setup. hardware setup that was used to store
the saved data.
DIFFERENT S/W VERSION, RECALL Saved state not compatible with hard- Load compatible software (S/W) version
ABORTED ware or software version. and retry.
DISCRETE FREQS LOST Change in frequency caused discrete fill None.
frequencies to be lost.
DISPERSIVE MEDIUM, ONLY TIME Distance does not apply for dispersive None.
USED media.
FREQUENCIES HAVE REACHED UPPER Frequencies being defined in Multiple Redefine frequencies to not exceed lim-
LIMIT Source mode have reached upper limits its of Sources.
of Sources.
ILLEGAL IN C.W. MODE Attempted to readout limit frequency. None, no limit lines are permitted in CW
mode.
ILLEGAL IN TIME DOMAIN Attempted to readout limit frequency None.
LOGO FILE NOT FOUND Attempted to read a non-existent logo Create user-defined logo using applica-
file from disk. tion on external controller.
MEAS DATA NOT AVAILABLE FOR Measurement data is not available for None.
STORAGE storage on floppy or hard disk.
MEMORY LOCATION CORRUPTED Requested memory location is cor- None. If problem reoccurs after storing a
rupted. new setup, contact Anritsu Customer
Service.
NO BANDS ARE STORED No frequency bands have been defined Need to define and store frequency
and stored. bands to turn on Multiple Source mode.

37XXXD OM 5-3
ERROR MESSAGES ERROR AND STATUS MESSAGES

Table 5-1. General Error Messages (2 of 3)

Error Message Description Corrective Action

NO STORED MEMORY DATA No data is stored in floppy or hard disk None.
memory.
OPTION NOT INSTALLED Selected an option that is not installed. None.
OUT OF CAL RANGE Entered values out of the selected cali- Change calibration range or re-enter val-
bration range. ues that are within the current range.
OUT OF H/W RANGE Entered value is out of the instrument’s Re-enter values that are within range.
hardware range.
OUT OF RANGE Entered value is out of range. Re-enter values that are within range.
OUT OF RANGE, 10 PERCENT MIN Entered value is out of the instrument’s Re-enter frequency or power value.
range by greater than 10 percent.
OUT OF RANGE, 20 PERCENT MAX Entered smoothing or group delay value Re-enter values that are within range, 0
exceeds the range by greater than 20 to 20%.
percent.
OUT OF SWEEP RANGE Entered a frequency that is out of the in- Re-enter frequency.
strument sweep range.
OUT OF WINDOW RANGE Attempted to set marker outside start to Redefine marker to be within frequency
stop range. start/stop range.
POWER OUT OF CALIBRATED RANGE Power range has been changed to be Perform linearity calibration over new
outside the range of the active linearity power range.
calibration. Linearity calibration is turned
off.
POWER RESTORED TO CAL RANGE Power range is outside of the linearity If new power range is desired, perform
calibration range when the calibration new linearity calibration over new power
was turned on. The power range is range.
changed to the calibration range.
RECEIVER OUT OF RANGE BY EQUA- Equation defined in Multiple Source Redefine frequency.
TION mode places receiver frequency out of
range when attempting to store band.
SOURCE 1 OUT OF RANGE BY EQUA- Equation defined in Multiple Source Redefine frequency.
TION mode places Source 1 frequency out of
range when attempting to store band.
SOURCE 2 OUT OF RANGE BY EQUA- Equation defined in Multiple Source Redefine frequency.
TION mode places Source 2 frequency out of
range when attempting to store band.
STANDARD CAL NOT VALID FOR WAVE- Cannot use waveguide when calibrating Use the Offset Short method with wave-
GUIDE with the standard method. guide.
START F FOLLOWS PREVIOUS STOP F Start frequency of current band immedi- None.
ately follows stop frequency of previous
band. Cannot be modified.
START GREATER THAN STOP Entered start frequency is greater than Re-enter frequency values such that the
the stop frequency. start frequency is lower than the stop
frequency.
START MUST BE LESS THAN STOP Entered start frequency is greater than Re-enter frequency values such that the
the stop frequency. start frequency is lower than the stop
frequency.
STEP IS TOO LARGE Entered discrete fill step extends the Re-enter so that step is within range.
stop fill out of range.

5-4 37XXXD OM
ERROR AND STATUS MESSAGES ERROR MESSAGES

Table 5-1. General Error Messages (3 of 3)

Error Message Description Corrective Action

STOP IS OVER RANGE Entered value exceeds the instrument’s Re-enter stop frequency.
stop frequency.
SYSTEM BUS ADDRESSES MUST BE GPIB address is being used by another Select a different, unique GPIB address.
UNIQUE bus instrument.
SYSTEM UNCALIBRATED 37XXXD is uncalibrated for the selected Perform a measurement calibration.
measurement values.
TOO FEW POINTS, 2 MINIMUM Entered too few discrete file points, 2 is Re-enter data points.
minimum.
TOO MANY POINTS, 1601 MAXIMUM Entered too many discrete file points, Re-enter data points.
1601 points are the maximum allowed.
UNDEFINED DIVIDE BY ZERO Denominator cannot be zero in equation. Make denominator a value other than
zero.
WARNING: NO GPIB CONTROL OF Neither Source power nor flat-port power None.
SOURCE SWEEP can be modified when receiver mode is
user-defined with NO Source GPIB con-
trol.
WARNING: SET ON RECEIVER MODE Phase-lock setting is undefined when None.
VNA is Set-On Receiver mode.
WARNING: SOURCE 2 DOES NOT EX- 2nd, external, frequency source is not Connect frequency source.
IST present.
WINDOW TOO SMALL Attempted to set start greater than or Re-enter frequency values.
equal to stop.

37XXXD OM 5-5
ERROR MESSAGES ERROR AND STATUS MESSAGES

Table 5-2. Disk Error Messages

Error Message Description Corrective Action

7140: FLOPPY DISK GENERAL ERROR Invalid disk media or format. Use 1.44 MB diskette and format in the
37XXXD.
7142: FLOPPY DISK READ ERROR Read error when accessing disk file. Use 1.44 MB diskette and format in the
37XXXD.
7143: DISK WRITE ERROR Error in writing to disk file. Use 1.44 MB diskette and format in the
37XXXD.
7147: FLOPPY DISK UNAVAILABLE Floppy disk is not available. Install floppy diskette or floppy disk drive.
7170: HARD DISK GENERAL ERROR General error in accessing hard disk. Retry and if still fails, reformat the hard
disk drive.
7172: HARD DISK READ ERROR Read error when accessing disk file. Retry and if still fails, reformat the hard
disk drive.
7173: HARD DISK WRITE ERROR Error in writing to disk file. Retry and if still fails, reformat the hard
disk drive.
7177: HARD DISK UNAVAILABLE Hard disk is not available. Install hard disk drive circuit board.
8140: GENERAL DISK BUFFER ERROR Out of RAM. Press the System State, Default Program
key and retry.
FILE NOT FOUND Disk file not found. None.
FLOPPY DISK HAS NO ROOM FOR Floppy diskette is full. Delete files or install new diskette.
FILE
FLOPPY DISK NOT READY Floppy disk is not ready (or not in- Install diskette in floppy drive.
stalled.).
FLOPPY DISK WRITE PROTECTED Write protect tab in place on floppy dis- Remove write-protect tab.
kette.
HARD DISK HAS NO ROOM FOR FILE, Hard disk is full. Delete files.
DELETE EXISTING FILES(S) TO CRE-
ATE SPACE

5-6 37XXXD OM
 Chapter 6
Data Displays

Table of Contents

6-1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

6-2 DISPLAY MODES AND TYPES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Single Channel Display: Ch 1, 2, 3, 4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Dual Channel Display: Ch 1 and 3 or Ch 2 and 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Four Channel Display: Ch 1, 2, 3, 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Dual Trace Overlay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Graph Data Types. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
6-3 FREQUENCY MARKERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
Marker Designation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
6-4 LIMITS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
6-5 STATUS DISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Reference Position Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Scale Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Frequency Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Analog Instrument Status. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Measurement Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
Sweep Indicator Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
6-6 DATA DISPLAY CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
S-parameter Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
Data Display Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
Display of Markers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
6-7 HARD COPY AND DISK OUTPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
Tabular Printout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
Screen-Image Printout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
Plotter Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
Disk Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
 Chapter 6
Data Displays
6-1 INTRODUCTION This chapter provides discussion and examples of the various types of
data displays.

6-2 DISPLAY MODES AND The 37XXXD displays measurement data using a “Channel Concept.”
TYPES This means that each channel can display both a different S-Parame-
ter and a different graph type. As you select each channel, the graph
type, scaling, reference delay, S-Parameter, etc., associated with that
channel appears on the screen. You can display the same S-Parameter
on two or more channels.

Several graph-types are possible: polar, rectilinear, or Smith chart. The

rectilinear graph-type may be magnitude, phase, magnitude and
phase, SWR, group delay, real, imaginary, and real and imaginary. The
Smith chart graph-type is specifically designed to plot complex imped-
ances.

Single Channel Display: You select this display type (Figures 6-1 and 6-2) by choosing “Single
Ch 1, 2, 3, 4 Display” on Menu CM (Appendix A). Possible graph types are Smith,
polar, rectilinear, or dual (split) rectilinear (magnitude and phase).

S11 FORWARD REFLECTION

LOG MAG. REF= 0.000 dB 10.000 dB/DIV

0.040000000 GHz 20.000000000

Figure 6-1. Single Channel Display, Log Magnitude

37XXXD OM 6-3
DISPLAY MODES AND TYPES DATA DISPLAYS

S11 FORWARD REFLECTION

LOG MAG. REF= 0.000 dB 10.000 dB/DIV

0.040000000 GHz 20.000000000

PHASE REF= |
0.00 |
90.00 /DIV

Figure 6-2. Single Channel Display, Magnitude and Phase

Dual Channel Display: If you have chosen a dual display of magnitude and phase, the affected
Ch 1 and 3 or Ch 2 and 4 area of the LCD screen is subdivided into two smaller portions (Figure
6-3). You select this display type by choosing “Dual Display” in Menu
CM (Appendix A).
S11 FORWARD REFLECTION 1
IMPEDANCE
.5 2

.2 5

-.2 -5

-.5 -2

2.036000000 - 5.030000000 GHz

S12 REVERSE TRANSMISSION

PHASE REF= 0.00
| 90.00
| /DIV

2.036000000 GHz 5.030000000

Figure 6-3. Dual Channel Display

6-4 37XXXD OM
DATA DISPLAYS DISPLAY MODES AND TYPES

Four Channel Display: From four-to-eight graph types are displayed. In each quadrant, the
Ch 1, 2, 3, 4 graph type can be any of the possible choices listed in the GT menu
(Appendix A). If you have chosen to display magnitude and phase on a
channel, the quadrant displaying that channel is further subdivided as
described above. You select this display type by choosing “All Four
Channels” in Menu CM. An example of a four-channel display appears
in Figure 6-4, below.

S11 1 S21 LOGM+P

Z 0.000 dB 10.000 dB/DIV
.5 2

.2 5

0
2.036000000 GHz 5.030000000

-.2 -5

-.5 -2

-1 0.00
| 90.00
| /DIV

S12 LOGM+P S22 1

0.000 dB 10.000 dB/DIV Z
.5 2

.2 5

0
2.036000000 GHz 5.030000000

-.2 -5

-.5 -2

0.00
| 90.00
| /DIV -1

Figure 6-4. Four-Channel Display

37XXXD OM 6-5
DISPLAY MODES AND TYPES DATA DISPLAYS

Dual Trace Overlay For rectilinear graph types, two traces can be displayed, one overlaid
(superimposed) on the other (Figure 6-5). By menu selection, the two
traces can be Channel 1 overlaid on Channel 3 or Channel 2 overlaid
on Channel 4. Each trace is in a different color. Channels 1 and 2 are
displayed in red, while Channels 3 and 4 are displayed in yellow.

CH1:S11 FWD REFL CH3:S21 FWD TRANS

LOG MAG. LOG MAG.
REF= 0.000 dB REF= 0.000 dB
10.000 dB/DIV 10.000 dB/DIV

2.036000000 GHz 5.030000000

Figure 6-5. Dual Trace Overlay

6-6 37XXXD OM
DATA DISPLAYS DISPLAY MODES AND TYPES

Graph Data Types The data types (real, imaginary, magnitude, phase) used in the dis-
played graph-types reflect the possible ways in which S-Parameter
data can be represented in polar, Smith, or rectilinear graphs. For ex-
ample: Complex data—that is, data in which both phase and magni-
tude are graphed—may be represented and displayed in any of the
ways described below:

q Complex Impedance—displayed on a Smith chart graph

q Real and imaginary—displayed on a real and imaginary graph
q Phase and magnitude components—displayed on a rectilinear
(Cartesian) or polar graph
q Group delay plot—group-delay measurement units are time,
those of the associated aperture are frequency and SWR

The quantity group delay is displayed using a modified rectilin-

ear-magnitude format. In this format the vertical scale is in linear
units of time (ps-ns-ms). With one exception, the reference value and
reference line functions operate the same as they do with a normal
magnitude display. The exception is that they appear in units of time
instead of magnitude.

Examples of graph-data types are shown in Figure 6-6 through 6-11,

on the following pages.

37XXXD OM 6-7
DISPLAY MODES AND TYPES DATA DISPLAYS

S11 FWD REFL REF= 1.000 U 200.000 mU/DIV

LINEAR POLAR 90

135 45

180 0
0

-135 -45

-90

Figure 6-6. Linear Polar Graticule

S21 FORWARD TRANSMISSION

LOG MAG. REF= -38.569 dB 20.000 dB/DIV

2.036000000 GHz 10.020000000

S21 FORWARD TRANSMISSION

LINEAR MAG. REF= 483.588 mU 200.000 mU/DIV

2.036000000 GHz 10.020000000

Figure 6-7. Dual Channel Rectilinear Graticule

6-8 37XXXD OM
DATA DISPLAYS DISPLAY MODES AND TYPES

S21 FWD TRANS REF= 0.000 dB 1.000 dB/DIV

LOG POLAR 90

135 45

180 0

-135 -45

-90

Figure 6-8. Log Polar Graticule

S11 FORWARD REFLECTION

1
IMPEDANCE

.5 2

.2 5

0
.2 .5 1 2 5

-5
-.2

-.5 -2

-1

2.036000000 - 10.020000000 GHz

Figure 6-9. Normal Smith Chart

37XXXD OM 6-9
DISPLAY MODES AND TYPES DATA DISPLAYS

S11 FORWARD REFLECTION

1
IMPEDANCE

.5

.2

-.17 0 .2 .5 1 2 5 -5.8

-.2

-2

-.5

-1

2.036000000 - 10.020000000 GHz

Figure 6-10. 3 dB Compressed Smith Chart

S11 FORWARD REFLECTION

.20
IMPEDANCE

.15

.10

.05

0
.82 .85 .90 .95 1.0 1.05 1.10 1.15 1.20

-.05

-.10

-.15

20

Figure 6-11. 20 dB Compressed Smith Chart

6-10 37XXXD OM
DATA DISPLAYS FREQUENCY MARKERS

6-3 FREQUENCY MARKERS The example below shows how the 37XXXD annotates markers for the
different graph-types. Each marker is identified with its own number.
When a marker reaches the top of its graticule, it will flip over and its
number will appear below the symbol. When markers approach the
same frequency, they will overlap. Their number will appear as close to
the marker as possible without overlapping.

S11 1 S12 LOGM+P

Z -20.000 dB 10.000 dB/DIV
.5 2

.2 5 2
1 3

2
0
2.036000000 GHz 10.020000000

-.2 -5

2 3
1
1
-.5 -2

-1 3.91
| 60.00
| /DIV

S21 LOGM+P S22 1

0.000 dB 10.000 dB/DIV Z
.5 2

.2 1 5
2
1 3

0
2.036000000 GHz 10.020000000
3

2
-.2 -5
3
1

-.5 -2

7.99
| 60.00
| /DIV -1

Figure 6-12. Marker Annotation

Marker Designation Depending on menu selection, you may designate a marker as the “ac-
tive” or the “delta reference” marker. If you choose a marker to be ac-
tive—indicated by its number being enclosed in a square box—you
may change its frequency or time (distance) (or point number in CW
Draw) with the Data Entry keypad or knob. If you have chosen it to be
the delta-reference marker, a delta symbol (D) appears one character
space above the marker number (or one character space below a
“flipped” marker). If the marker is both active and the delta reference
marker, the number and the delta symbol appear above (below) the
marker. The delta symbol appears above (below) the number.

6-4 LIMITS Limit lines function as settable maximum and minimum indicators for
the value of displayed data. These lines are settable in the basic units
of the measurement on a channel-by-channel basis. If the display is
rescaled, the limit line(s) will move automatically and thereby main-
tain their correct value(s).

37XXXD OM 6-11
STATUS DISPLAY DATA DISPLAYS

Each channel has two limit lines (four for dual displays), each of which
may take on any value. Limit lines are either horizontal lines in recti-
linear displays or concentric circles around the origin in Smith and po-
lar displays.

Each channel can produce segmented limits. They allow different up-
per and lower limit values to be set at up to ten segments across the
measurement range.

6-5 STATUS DISPLAY In addition to the graticules, data, markers, and marker annotation,
the 37XXXD displays certain instrument status information in the
data display area. This information is described below.

Reference Position Marker The Reference Position Marker indicates the location of the reference
value. It is displayed at the left edge of each rectilinear graph-type. It
consists of a green triangular symbol similar to the cursor displayed in
the menu area. You can center this symbol on one of the vertical
graticule divisions and move it up or down using the “Reference Posi-
tion” option. When you do this, the data trace moves accordingly. If you
also select the reference value option, the marker will remain station-
ary and the trace will move with the maximum allowable resolution.
When changing from a full-screen display to half- or quarter-screen
display, the marker will stay as close to the same position as possible.

Scale Resolution Each measurement display is annotated with the scale resolution. For
log-magnitude displays resolution ranges from 0.001 to 50 dB per divi-
sion. Linear displays of magnitude range from 0.001 to 50 units per di-
vision. Cartesian phase displays can range from 0.01 to 90 degrees per
division. The polar display is 45 degrees per display graticule.

Frequency Range Each measurement display is annotated with the frequency range of
the measurement.

Analog Instrument Status The 37XXXD displays analog-instrument-status messages (in red
when appropriate) in the upper right corner of the data-display area
(left). They appear at the same vertical position as line 2 of the menu
area. If more than one message appears, they stack up below that line.

Display Menu
Area Area

Display screen
showing the data

6-12 37XXXD OM
DATA DISPLAYS DATA DISPLAY CONTROL

Measurement Status The 37XXXD displays measurement-status messages (in red when ap-
propriate) in the upper-right corner of the graticule (channel) to which
they apply.

Sweep Indicator Marker A blue sweep-indicator marker appears at the bottom of each dis-
played graph-type. It indicates the progress of the current sweep.
When measuring quiet data—that is, data having few or no perturba-
tions—this indicator assures that the instrument is indeed sweeping.
Its position is proportional to the number of data points measured in
the current sweep. If the sweep should stop for any reason, the posi-
tion of the indicator will stop changing until the sweep resumes.

6-6 DATA DISPLAY The following figure shows the algorithm that the 37XXXD uses to dis-
CONTROL play the active channel.

S E L E C T A C T IV E C H A N N E L
(P R E S S C H 1 , C H 2 , C H 3 , C H 4 )

S IN G L E D U A L
C H A N N E L
N O C H A N N E L N O C H A N N E L N O
P R E S E N T L Y
D IS P L A Y E D D IS P L A Y E D
D IS P L A Y E D
? 1 -3 ?
?
C H A N G E T O D U A L 1 -3
Y E S Y E S + C H A N G E T O
A C T IV E C H A N N E L
Y E S
C H A N G E T O
A C T IV E C H A N N E L
C O N T IN U E
D IS P L A Y IN G A C T IV E C H A N N E L C H A N G E T O D U A L 2 -4
(S IN G L E , D U A L , O R F O U R -C H A N N E L + C H A N G E T O
D IS P L A Y ) A C T IV E C H A N N E L

Figure 6-13. Active Channel Algorithm

37XXXD OM 6-13
DATA DISPLAY CONTROL DATA DISPLAYS

S-parameter Selection If you select a new S-parameter using Menu SP (Appendix A), it ap-
pears on the then-active channel in the same graph-type in which it
was last displayed. The following table shows the displayable S-pa-
rameters based on the correction type you have in place. If you at-
tempt to display other S-parameters, an error message appears. In
cases when there is no last-displayed S-parameter stored, the display
will default as shown. If an S-parameter is selected for which there
was no last-displayed graph-type, the display defaults to S21, S12 Log
Magnitude and Phase and S11, S22 Smith.

Data Display Update When you change a control panel parameter that affects the appear-
ance of the display, the entire display changes immediately to reflect
that change. For example, if you press Autoscale, the entire display
rescales immediately. You do not have to wait for the next sweep to see
the results of the change. The following parameters are supported for
this feature: Reference Delay, Offset, Scaling, Auto Scale, Auto Refer-
ence Delay, Trace Math, IF BW, and Smoothing. In the case of Aver-
aging, the sweep restarts.

Correction Type Displayable Default Display Position

S-parameters
CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4
None All S11 S12 S21 S22
Frequency
Response
Reverse Transmission S12 S12
Forward Transmission S21 S21
Both S12, S21 S12 S21
Port 1 Reflection Only S11 S11
Port 2Reflection Only S22 S22
Reflection Only, Both S11, S22 S11 S22
Forward 1-Path 2-Port S11, S21 S11 S21
Reverse 1-Path 2-Port S12, S22 S12 S22
12-Term All S11 S12 S21 S22

If the knob is used to vary any of the above parameters, the change oc-
curs as the measurement progresses–that is, the continuing trace will
reflect the new setting(s).

When you change a marker frequency or time (distance), the readout

parameters will change. This change reflects the changes in measure-
ment data at the marker’s new frequency, using data stored from the
previous sweep.

Display of Markers Once you have selected a marker to display, it will appear on the
screen. It does not matter what resolution you have selected. When
you set a marker to another calibrated frequency and then lower the

6-14 37XXXD OM
DATA DISPLAYS HARD COPY AND DISK OUTPUT

resolution, that frequency and the marker will continue to display. It

will display even if its frequency is not consistent with the data points
in the lower-resolution sweep.

6-7 HARD COPY AND DISK In addition to the LCD screen, the Model 37XXXD is capable of out-
OUTPUT putting measured data as a:

q Tabular Printout
q Screen-Image Printout
q Pen Plot
q Disk Image of the Tabular Data Values

The selection and initiation of this output is controlled by the Hard

Copy keys.

Tabular Printout An example of a tabular format is shown in Figure 6-14 (page 6-16).
The tabular formats are used as follows:

q Tabular Printout Format: Used when printing three or four chan-

nels.
q Alternate Data Format: Used when printing one or two channels.

In tabular printouts, the 37XXXD shifts the data columns to the left
when an S-Parameter is omitted. Leading zeroes are always sup-
pressed. The heading (Model, Device ID, Date, Operator, Page) appears
on each page.

Screen-Image Printout In a Screen-Image Printout, the exact data displayed on the screen is
dumped to the printer. The dump is in the graphics mode, on a
pixel-by-pixel basis.

Plotter Output The protocol used to control plotters is “HP-GL (Hewlett-Packard

Graphics Language). HP-GL contains a comprehensive set of vector
graphics type commands. These commands are explained in the Inter-
facing and Programming Manual for any current model
Hewlett-Packard plotter, such as the 7470A.

When the plotter is selected as the output device, it is capable of draw-

ing the graph shown on the screen or of drawing only the data trace(s).
Multiple traces may be drawn on a single sheet of paper (in different
colors, if needed).

Disk Output The 37XXXD can write-to or read-from the disk all measured data.
This data is stored as an ASCII file in the exact same format as that
shown for the tabular printout in Figure 6-14 (page 6-16). If read back
from the disk, the data is output to the printer. There, it prints as tab-
ular data.

37XXXD OM 6-15
HARD COPY AND DISK OUTPUT DATA DISPLAYS

Figure 6-14. Example of a Tabular Printout

6-16 37XXXD OM
 Chapter 7
Measurement
Calibration
Table of Contents

7-1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3

7-2 DISCUSSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Establishing the Test Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Understanding the Calibration System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Calibrating for a Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
Evaluating the Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
Verification Kits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
7-3 SLIDING TERMINATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
7-4 SOLT CALIBRATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19
7-5 OFFSET-SHORT CALIBRATION (SSLT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-28
7-6 TRIPLE OFFSET-SHORT CALIBRATION (SSST) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-32
7-7 LRL/LRM CALIBRATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-36
7-8 TRM CALIBRATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-46
7-9 MERGE CAL FILES APPLICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-47
 Chapter 7
Measurement Calibration
7-1 INTRODUCTION This section provides discussion and examples for performing a mea-
surement calibration. It also provides a detailed procedure for calibrat-
ing with a sliding termination.

7-2 DISCUSSION Measurements always include a degree of uncertainty due to imperfec-

tions in the measurement system. The measured value is always a
combination of the actual value plus the systematic measurement er-
rors. Calibration, as it applies to network analysis, characterizes the
systematic measurement errors and subtracts them from the mea-
sured value to obtain the actual value.

The calibration process requires that you establish the test ports, per-
form the calibration, and confirm its quality. Let us examine each of
these steps.

Establishing the Test Ports Figures 7-1 and 7-2 are two of the most common approaches used to
make measurements on two-port devices. In many cases, you may need
adapters to change between connector types (N, SMA, GPC-7, etc.) or
between genders (male [M] or female [F]).

PORT 1
PORT 2

Figure 7-1. Establishing the Test Port

37XXXD OM 7-3
DISCUSSION MEASUREMENT CALIBRATION

The use of cables and/or adapters does not effect the final measure-
ment result, if they were in place for the calibration process. The vec-
tor error corrections established during the calibration process elimi-
nates cable and/or adapter effects as long as the ports used are stable
and exhibit good repeatability. Figure 7-2 shows such a configuration.

ADAPTERS

PORT 1 PORT 2

Figure 7-2. Using Adapters on the Test Port

Many calibration kits include adapters that are designed to have equal
phase length. These parts are called phase equal adapters (PEA).
Anritsu designs in-series adapters (e.g., K Connector M-M, M-F, F-F)
to be phase insertable when technically possible. When available, it is
good practice to use PEAs to establish test ports (Figure 7-3).

TEST SET CONNECTOR

KM
TEST PORT 1
33KKF50 KM

33KFKF50 TEST PORT 2

KF

CABLE CONNECTOR
KM

Figure 7-3. Use of PEAs to Establish Test Ports

7-4 37XXXD OM
MEASUREMENT CALIBRATION DISCUSSION

This approach offers two advantages:

q It minimizes wear on the more expensive test set and cable con-
nectors
q It provides a simple solution to measuring non-insertable devices
(e.g., a filter with K female input and output connectors) by
merely swapping PEAs after calibration. See Figure 7-4
NOTE
In this and other discussions, we will talk about
“insertable” and “non-insertable” devices. Insertable de-
vices have an insertable connector pair (i.e., male input
and female output connectors) and can be measured after
a through calibration. A non-insertable device has a
non-insertable pair of connectors. This would be the case if
it included female connectors on both ports or different
connector types on each port. Therefore, “non-insertables”
cannot be connected directly into the measurement path
without an adapter.
USING THE PHASE-EQUAL INSERTABLE
(PEI)
Calibration
M F M F F M
PEA PEA
TEST TEST
PORT PORT
Measurement
M F M F F M F M

PEA DUT PEA

TEST TEST
PORT PORT

Figure 7-4. Using Phase-Equal Insertables

Understanding the Measurement errors must be reduced by a process that uses calibra-
Calibration System tion standards. The standards most commonly used are Opens, Shorts,
and Z0 (Characteristic Impedance) Loads. In conjunction with a
through connection, these standards can correct for the major errors in
a microwave test system. These errors are Directivity, Source Match,
Load Match, Isolation, and Frequency Tracking (reflection and trans-
mission).

Calibration also corrects for many internal system errors, such as RF

leakage, IF leakage, and system component interaction.

Random errors such as noise, temperature, connector repeatability,

DUT sensitive leakages, frequency repeatability, and calibration vari-
ables are not completely correctable. However, some of them can be
minimized by careful control. For instance: temperature effects can be
reduced by room temperature control, calibration variables can be re-

37XXXD OM 7-5
DISCUSSION MEASUREMENT CALIBRATION

duced through improved technique and training, and frequency errors

can be virtually eliminated by the fully synthesized internal source.

We know that adapters and cables degrade the basic directivity of the
ERRORS REDUCED BY CALIBRATION system, but these errors are compensated by vector error correction.
· Directivity
In general, transmission measurement errors are source match, load
· Source Match match, and tracking; while reflection measurement errors are source
· Load Match
match, directivity, and tracking.

· Frequency Sensitivity (Tracking) Error modeling and flow graphs are techniques used to analyze the
· Isolation errors in a system. Error models describe the errors, while flow graphs
show how these errors influence the system. Error models (Figure 7-5)
can become quite complex.

DIRECTIVITY, SOURCE MATCH,

INTERNAL SYSTEM ERRORS
AND TRACKING ERRORS
· RF Leakage DISTORTED MEASUREMENT
· IF Leakage

· System Interaction E
ED S
S 11M S 11A

RANDOM ERRORS

· Frequency
Figure 7-5. Example of Error Modeling
· Repeatability

· Noise The 37XXXD offers a selection of calibration possibilities depending on

the user’s needs. These possibilities are as follows:
· Connector Repeatability

· Temperature/Environmental q Frequency Response

Changes
q Reflection Only—1 Port
· Calibration Variables
q 1 Path, 2 Port
q 12-Term—2 Port, Both Directions

These calibration types are described below.

TRANSMISSION MEASUREMENT
ERRORS
Frequency Response: Corrects for one or both of the transmission error
· Source Match terms associated with measurements of S21, S12, or both.
· Load Match

· Tracking

7-6 37XXXD OM
MEASUREMENT CALIBRATION DISCUSSION

Reflection Only: Corrects for the three error terms associated with an
S11 measurement (EDF, ESF, and ERF), an S22 measurement (EDR,
ESR, and ERR), or both.
REFLECTION MEASUREMENT ERRORS
1 Path, 2 Port: Corrects for the four forward-direction error terms
· Source Match
(EDF, ESF, ERF, and ETF), or the four reverse-direction error terms
· Directivity (EDR, ESR, ERR, and ETR).
· Tracking
Full 12-Term: Corrects for all twelve error terms associated with a
two-port measurement. A 12-Term error model is shown in Figure 7-6.

Measurement calibration using the 37XXXD is straightforward and

menu directed. A short time spent in preparation and preplanning will
make the process simple and routine. (Example: Adjusting the coaxial
cables used in the measurement setup such that insertion of the DUT
causes minimal flexing of these cables).
CALIBRATION TYPES

· Frequency Response The screen prompts on the 37XXXD guide you through the calibration
· Reflection Only—1 Port process—a process that consists of connecting and disconnecting con-
nectors and moving the slide on a sliding load (if one is used).
· 1 Path, 2 Port

· 12 Term—2 Port, Both Directions The most critical part of the calibration process is properly seating and
torquing the connectors. Also, you will notice that the calibration takes
longer when the ports are terminated with a load. This is intentional.
It allows for more averaging during the isolation measurement.

37XXXD OM 7-7
DISCUSSION MEASUREMENT CALIBRATION

E XF PORT 1 PORT 2
ERR
S22
PORT 1 PORT 2 S2 1
1
RF IN S21M
S21 ETF DUT
ELR S11 S22 ESR EDR
EDF
DUT ELF
S11 S22
E SF
ETR S12 1
S12M RF
ERF S12 EXR
S11M
Forward Direction Terms Reverse Direction Terms
12 - TERM
E XF

PORT 1 PORT 2 PORT 1 PORT 2

RF IN S21M RF IN S21
S21 ETF S21 ETF

EDF DUT DUT

S11
E SF

ERF
S11M
1 Path - 2 Port Terms Frequency Response - Transmission Only Terms

PORT 1 PORT 2 PORT 1 PORT 2

RF IN RF IN

DUT DUT
EDF
S11 S1 1
E SF

ERF ER F
S11M
Reflection Only Terms Frequency Response - Reflection Only Terms

Figure 7-6. Error Models

7-8 37XXXD OM
MEASUREMENT CALIBRATION DISCUSSION

Calibrating for a Let us assume that we want to correct for three errors in the reflection
Measurement measurement: source match, directivity, and tracking. We accomplish
this using three standards.

Shorts are the easiest to visualize. They totally reflect all of the inci-
dent RF energy output at a precise phase. The terms zero-ohms imped-
CALIBRATING FOR A REFLECTION
MEASUREMENT USES THREE
ance, voltage null, and 180° phase all define an RF Short.
STANDARDS:
Opens are similar to Shorts, but their response is more complex. The
· Short terms voltage maximum, infinite impedance, and 0° phase all define a
· Open perfect Open. A perfect Open, however, is only a concept. In reality
Opens always have a small fringing capacitance.
· Termination

To account for the fact that the Open will not predictably reflect im-
pedance at an exact 0° phase reference, we alter its response using co-
efficients that accurately characterize the fringing capacitance. The co-
IDEAL TERMINATIONS
efficients are different for each coaxial line size, since each size has a
different fringing capacitance. To maximize accuracy, ensure that
· Reflectionless these coefficients are installed prior to the calibration (Menu U3).
· Perfect Connector
As Opens and Shorts provide two references for a full reflection, Z0 ter-
· Infinite-Length, Dimensionally Ex-
minations provide a zero-reflection reference.
act, Reflectionless Transmission
Line
Ideal Z0 terminations must consist of two parts, a perfect connector
and an infinite-length perfect transmission line that absorbs all of the
RF energy that enters it (no reflections).

PRACTICAL Zo TERMINATIONS Infinite length transmission lines are unwieldy at best, so you must
use less-than-ideal terminations. For calibration purposes there are
· Broadband Load
two common types: broadband loads and sliding terminations.
· Sliding Termination

37XXXD OM 7-9
DISCUSSION MEASUREMENT CALIBRATION

Broadband loads are widely used. An example is the Anritsu 28 Series

BROADBAND LOAD Termination. These terminations are easy to use as calibration tools,
· Easy to Use and they are adequate for most applications.
· Inexpensive
Sliding Loads are the traditional vector network analyzer Z0 calibra-
· Adequate for Most Applications tion reference. They provide the best performance when the applica-
tion requires high-precision return loss measurements. Sliding loads
consist of a connector, a long section of precision transmission line, and
a microwave load that is movable within the transmission line. One
thing to remember with sliding loads is that they have a low-frequency
limit and must be used with a fixed load below this cutoff frequency
SLIDING LOAD for full frequency coverage. Anritsu sliding loads cut off at 2 GHz.
(V-connector sliding loads cut off at 4 GHz).
· Connector

· Long Transmission Line Pin depth—the relationship between the interface positions of the
· Movable Microwave Load
outer and center conductors—is the most critical parameter under
your control in a sliding load. An example of its criticality is that an
incorrect pin depth of 0.001 inch can cause a reflection return loss of
44 dB. And, since we are trying to calibrate to accurately measure a 40
dB return loss, correct pin depth makes a big difference!

Cables in the measurement system are another cause for concern. The
main criteria for a cable are stability and repeatability. Anritsu offers
two types of cables that meet these criteria: semi-rigid and flexible.
Our semi-rigid cables provide maximum stability with limited flexibil-
ity of movement. Our flexible cables allow more freedom of movement
and provide good phase stability.

7-10 37XXXD OM
MEASUREMENT CALIBRATION DISCUSSION

Evaluating the Calibration The 37XXXD provides an accurate representation of complex data.
However, it can only provide accuracy to the extent of the supplied cal-
ibration data. For this reason, it is necessary to periodically verify the
calibration data and the 37XXXD system performance.

Calibration verification reveals problems such as a poor contact with

one of the calibration components, improper torquing, or a test port out
of specification. Problems like these can easily occur during a calibra-
tion procedure. Anyone who has experienced one of these problems and
stored bad data—after having performed a complete calibration proce-
dure—knows the frustration it can cause. Additionally, it can be very
costly to use incorrectly taken measurement data for design or quality
assurance purposes.

The best way to confirm a calibration is to measure a precision,

known-good device and confirm its specifications.

Verification Kits Anritsu has developed several precision-component kits: for 3.5 mm
connectors, for GPC-7 connectors, K Connectorsâ and V Connectorsâ.
These are, respectively, the Models 3666, 3667, and 3668 and 3669 Ver-
ification Kits.

Each of the kits contain 20 dB and 50 dB attenuators, an airline, and a

Beatty Standard. A Beatty Standard is a two-port mismatch similar to
a beadless airline. It consists of a center conductor with a discontinuity
in the middle providing the mismatch (Figure 7-7).

Typically, these verification kits will be used by calibration or metrol-

ogy labs. Each of the kits contain several precision components, all of
which have been characterized at specified frequencies. The data on
these components is stored on a disk provided with the verification kit.

5 0 9 5 0 9 5 0 9
S 1 1 2 5 9

Figure 7-7. The Beatty Standard

37XXXD OM 7-11
DISCUSSION MEASUREMENT CALIBRATION

The verification of the kit components is straight forward. The compo-

nents are first measured with the 37XXXD, then they are compared
with the data recorded on the disk. If the measured data compares fa-
vorably with the recorded data (taking tolerances into consideration),
then the system is known to be operating properly and providing accu-
rate data.

There is one caution that you need to observe when using Verification
Kits. Because the verification components have been characterized,
you must handle them carefully so that you do not change their known
characteristics. Consequently, you should not have them available for
daily use. Rather, you should only use them for the accuracy verifica-
tion checks taken every 6-to-12 months (or at any other time the sys-
tem’s integrity is in doubt).

This completes the discussion on calibration. Refer to paragraph 7-3

for a procedure showing how to calibrate the sliding load.

7-12 37XXXD OM
MEASUREMENT CALIBRATION SLIDING TERMINATION

7-3 SLIDING TERMINATION Sliding terminations (loads) are the traditional Z0 calibration-refer-
ence devices for vector network analyzer calibration. When correctly
used and perfectly aligned, they can be more accurate than precision
fixed loads. However, sliding terminations have a 2 GHz (4 GHz for
V-Connector sliding loads) low-frequency limit and must be used with
a fixed load for full frequency-range coverage.

Sliding terminations consist of a connector, a long section of precision

transmission line, and a microwave load that is movable within the
transmission line. Pin depth—the relationship between the interface
positions of the outer and center conductors—is the most critical pa-
rameter that you can control in a sliding termination. An example of
its criticality is that an incorrect pin depth of 0.001 inch can cause a
reflection return loss of 44 dB. Since you are usually calibrating to ac-
curately measure a greater than 40 dB return loss, correct pin depth is
essential.

Since setting an accurate pin depth is so important, this discussion

centers on describing how to set the pin depth for male and female
sliding terminations. Calibration with the sliding termination is essen-
tially the same as described below for the broadband load.

The procedure below uses the Model 3652 Calibration Kit and its
17KF50 and 17K50 Sliding Terminations. Calibration is similar for the
Model 3650 SMA/3.5mm, Model 3651 GPC-7 and Model 3654 V con-
nector kits. For the 3651, the procedure is simpler because the GPC-7
connector is genderless, there are no male and female versions.

Procedure

Step 1. Remove the Pin Depth Gauge from the kit, place it
on the bench top.

NOTE
The gauge is convertible between male and female. The
following procedure describes the zeroing process for the
female fitting. The procedure for the male fitting begins
with Step 16.

37XXXD OM 7-13
SLIDING TERMINATION MEASUREMENT CALIBRATION

Step 2. Push the outer locking ring towards the gauge to ex-
pose the center pin.

Step 3. Take the 01-210 Ref Flat from the kit.

Step 4. While holding the gauge as shown, press the Ref

Flat firmly against the end of the exposed center
pin.

7-14 37XXXD OM
MEASUREMENT CALIBRATION SLIDING TERMINATION

Step 5. While pressing the Ref Flat against the center pin,
check that the pointer aligns with the “0” mark. If it
does not, loosen the bezel lockscrew and rotate the
bezel to align the pointer with the “0” mark. Tighten
the bezel lock screw.

NOTE
Gently rock the Ref Flat against the center
pin to ensure that it is fully depressed and
you have accurately set the gauge for zero.

Step 6. Remove the sliding termination with the fe-

male-connector (17KF50, for this example) from the
kit, and slide the load all the way toward the end
closest to the connector.

Step 7. With either hand, pick up the sliding termination

near its connector end.

Step 8. Cup the sliding termination in your palm, and sup-

port the barrel between your body and crooked el-
bow.

37XXXD OM 7-15
SLIDING TERMINATION MEASUREMENT CALIBRATION

Step 9. Remove the flush short by holding its body and un-
screwing its connector.

Step 10. Install the gauge onto the end of the sliding termi-
nation.

Step 11. If the COARSE SET adjustment—which has been

set at the factory—has not moved, the inner dial on
the gauge will read “0.” If it doesn’t, perform the
Coarse Set Adjustment in Step 15.

Step 12. Place the sliding termination, with the gauge at-
tached, on the bench top.

7-16 37XXXD OM
MEASUREMENT CALIBRATION SLIDING TERMINATION

Step 13. Loosen the FINE LOCK ring and turn the FINE
ADJ ring to position the gauge pointer 2-3 small di-
visions on the “–” side of zero.

Step 14. Turn the FINE LOCK ring clockwise to both tighten
the adjustment and place the pointer exactly to “0.”
The Sliding Termination is now ready to use.

NOTES
Ensure that the inner dial reads “0.”
The following step is not normally necessary.
It needs to be done only if the adjustment
has changed since it was set at the factory.

Step 15. With the 01-211 Flush Short installed, loosen the
COARSE LOCK and gently push the COARSE SET
adjustment rod in as far as it will go. This coarsely
sets the center conductor to be flush against the at-
tached short. Return to Step 2.

Step 16. The procedure for adjusting the male-connector slid-

ing termination is essentially the same as that de-
scribed above. The only difference is that you must
install the female adapter on the end of the gauge
shaft, over the center conductor. To install this
adapter, proceed as follows:

š Zero-set the gauge as described in Steps 2

through 5.
š Push the outer locking ring back toward the
gauge and turn it clockwise onto the exposed
threads.
š Loosen the lock ring one turn in a counterclock-
wise direction.

37XXXD OM 7-17
SLIDING TERMINATION MEASUREMENT CALIBRATION

Step 17. Remove the 01-223 Female Adapter (“F ADAPTER

FOR PIN GAUGE”) from the kit.

Step 18. Install the female adapter over the center pin and
screw it into the locking ring, and tighten the outer
ring until it is snug against the housing.

Step 19. Inspect the end of the adapter, you should see no
more than two exposed threads. If so, repeat Steps 7
through 10.

Step 20. Connect the gauge to the sliding termination and

zero set the center pin using the FINE ADJ as pre-
viously described in Steps 2 through 5.

7-18 37XXXD OM
MEASUREMENT CALIBRATION SOLT CALIBRATION

7-4 SOLT CALIBRATION The SOLT calibration for the 37XXXD Vector Network Analyzer sys-
tem uses a Short, Open, Load, and a Thru line connection to categorize
the inherent errors in the measurement system. These errors include
those caused by connectors as well as internal system errors such as
RF leakage, IF leakage, and component interaction. For maximum ac-
curacy, install the capacitive coefficients (for the open device) using
Menu U3.

NOTE
The SOLT calibration, in conjuction with the SSST calibra-
tion, are merged to create a continuous, single sweep broad-
band calibration on the ME7808C system. Refer to Chapter
15 for details about the broadband mode of operation.

Calibration Procedure A detailed, step-by-step procedure for performing a

Short-Open-Load-Throughline calibration is given below.

Step 1. Press the Begin Cal key.

. -

Channels Measurement

Display Enhancement

MENU C11
BEGIN CALIBRATION
KEEP EXISTING
CAL DATA Begin Apply
REPEAT Cal Cal
PREVIOUS CAL
AUTOCAL
CAL METHOD
Step 2. Select CHANGE CAL METHOD AND LINE
STANDARD
TYPE, in menu C11 (left). (This assumes SOLT and
TRANSMISSION
COAXIAL are not presently shown in blue as being
LINE TYPE:
XXXXXXXX selected.)
CHANGE CAL
METHOD AND
LINE TYPE
NEXT CAL STEP
PRESS <ENTER>
TO SELECT

37XXXD OM 7-19
SOLT CALIBRATION MEASUREMENT CALIBRATION

Step 3. When menu C11A (left) appears, move the cursor to

MENU C11A the following:
CHANGE CAL METHOD
AND LINE TYPE
a. SOLT (STANDARD), then press the Enter key.
This selects Standard (SOLT) as the calibration
NEXT CAL STEP
method.
CAL METHOD
SOLT (STANDARD) b. COAXIAL, then press the Enter key. This se-
SSLT (DOUBLE lects coaxial transmission line media.
OFFSET SHORT
WITH LOAD) c. NEXT CAL STEP, then press the Enter key.
SSST (TRIPLE This causes menu C11 to return to the screen.
OFFSET SHORT)
LRL/LRM Step 4. When menu C11 reappears, confirm that the SOLT
TRM calibration method and COAXIAL line type have
TRANSMISSION
been selected. Select NEXT CAL STEP and press
LINE TYPE the Enter key to proceed. This brings up menu C5.
COAXIAL
Step 5. Menu C5 (left) lets you select the type of calibration.
WAVE GUIDE For this example, move the cursor to FULL
MICROSTRIP 12-TERM and press the Enter key. This selection cal-
PRESS <ENTER> ibrates for all twelve error terms.
TO SELECT
Step 6. The next menu, C5D, lets you choose whether to in-
clude or exclude the error terms associated with
leakage between measurement channels. For a nor-
mal calibration, you would choose to include these
error terms. Therefore, move the cursor to IN-
CLUDE ISOLATION ( STANDARD ) and press
MENU C5
the Enter key.
CALIBRATION
TYPE
FULL 12-TERM
1 PATH MENU C5D
2 PORT
SELECT USE
TRANSMISSION OF ISOLATION
FREQUENCY IN CALIBRATION
RESPONSE
INCLUDE
REFLECTION ISOLATION
ONLY (STANDARD)
PRESS <ENTER> EXCLUDE
TO SELECT ISOLATION
PRESS <ENTER>
TO SELECT

7-20 37XXXD OM
MEASUREMENT CALIBRATION SOLT CALIBRATION

Step 7. Next, menu C1 appears. It lets you select the number

MENU C1 of frequency points at which calibration data is to be
taken. The choices are:
SELECT
CALIBRATION
DATA POINTS a. NORMAL: Data is taken at up to 1601 equally
spaced frequencies across the calibration fre-
NORMAL
(1601 POINTS quency range. Use this selection for this example.
MAXIMUM)
C.W. b. C.W.: Data is taken at one point. This choice
(1 POINT) brings up menu C2B (below) that lets you select
N-DISCRETE the single CW frequency point.
FREQUENCIES
(2 TO 1601
POINTS) MENU C2B
TIME DOMAIN SINGLE POINT
(HARMONIC) CALIBRATION
PRESS <ENTER> C.W. FREQ
TO SELECT XX.XXXX GHz
FINISHED
ENTRY, NEXT
CAL STEP
INPUT FREQ AND
PRESS <ENTER>
TO SELECT

c. N-DISCRETE FREQUENCIES: This selection

MENU C2 lets you specify a discrete number of frequency
FREQ RANGE OF
points, from 2 to 1601.
CALIBRATION
START
d. TIME DOMAIN: This selection is the calibra-
0.0400000000GHz tion mode for low-pass time-domain processing.
STOP
It lets you select frequencies at integer (har-
20.000000000 GHz monic) multiples of the start frequency.
201 DATA PTS
0.099800000 GHz
Step 8. The next menu, C2 (left), lets you set your start and
STEP SIZE stop frequencies. For this example, move the cursor
MAXIMUM NUMBER
to START, press 40 on the keypad, and hit the MHz
OF DATA POINTS terminator key. Perform like operations for the
1601 MAX PTS STOP choice, except make entry read 20 GHz. After
801 MAX PTS setting the frequencies, select NEXT CAL STEP
401 MAX PTS and press the Enter key.
201 MAX PTS
101 MAX PTS
51 MAX PTS
NEXT CAL STEP
PRESS <ENTER>
TO SELECT

37XXXD OM 7-21
SOLT CALIBRATION MEASUREMENT CALIBRATION

Step 9. When menu C3 (left) appears, if you want to change

MENU C3 any of the parameters shown in blue letters, place
the cursor on that parameter and press the Enter
CONFIRM
CALIBRATION
key. For this example, we will change them all, start-
PARAMETERS ing with the top one. Move the cursor to PORT 1
PORT 1 CONN
CONN and press the Enter key.
K CONN (M)
Step 10. In menu C4 (below), which appears next, move the
PORT 2 CONN
SMA (M)
cursor to K CONN (M) and then press the Enter key.
This choice presumes that you have a K-Female con-
REFLECTION
nector on the device-under-test (DUT). Remember, in
PAIRING
MIXED this menu you choose the connector type on the test
port, or the connector type that mates with the DUT
LOAD TYPE
SLIDING connector. When menu C3 returns, observe that K
CONN (M) is now shown in blue for the PORT 1
THROUGHLINE
PARAMETERS CONN choice.
REFERENCE
IMPEDANCE
TEST SIGNALS MENU C4

START CAL SELECT PORT 1

CONNECTOR TYPE
PRESS <ENTER>
TO SELECT K-CONN (M)
OR CHANGE K-CONN (F)
V-CONN (M)
V-CONN (F)
W1-CONN (M)
W1-CONN (F)
SMA (M)
SMA (F)
GPC-3.5 (M)
GPC-3.5 (F)
GPC-7
USER DEFINED
MORE
PRESS <ENTER>
TO SELECT

7-22 37XXXD OM
MEASUREMENT CALIBRATION SOLT CALIBRATION

Step 11. With menu C3 (left) displayed, move the cursor to

MENU C3 PORT 2 CONN and press the Enter key. Following
the procedure in Step 10, select K CONN (M) for the
CONFIRM
CALIBRATION
Port 2 connector.
PARAMETERS
Step 12. When menu C3 returns:
PORT 1 CONN
K CONN (M)
a. Observe that PORT 2 CONN now reflects K
PORT 2 CONN
K CONN (M)
CONN (M).
REFLECTION
PAIRING
b. Move the cursor to REFLECTION PARING
MIXED and press the Enter key. This brings up menu
LOAD TYPE
C13 (below).
SLIDING
THROUGH
PARAMETERS
MENU C13
REFERENCE
SELECT
IMPEDANCE
REFLECTION
TEST SIGNALS PAIRING
START CAL MIXED
PRESS <ENTER> (OPEN–SHORT
TO SELECT SHORT–OPEN)
OR CHANGE MATCHED
(OPEN–OPEN
SHORT–SHORT)
PRESS <ENTER>
TO SELECT

Reflection Pairing lets you mix or match the

Open and Short reflection devices in the Cali-
bration Sequence menus. The MIXED choice
lets you calibrate using first an Open on one
port and a Short on the other, then a Short on
one port and an Open on the other. Conversely,
MATCHED lets you calibrate first using an
Open on both ports then using a Short on both
ports. For this example, choose MIXED and
press the Enter key.

37XXXD OM 7-23
SOLT CALIBRATION MEASUREMENT CALIBRATION

Step 13. When menu C3 returns:

MENU C3 a. Observe that REFLECTION PARING now re-

CONFIRM flects MIXED.
CALIBRATION
PARAMETERS b. Move cursor to LOAD TYPE and press the En-
PORT 1 CONN ter key. This brings up menu C6 (below).
TYPE N (M)
PORT 2 CONN
TYPE N (F)
MENU C6
REFLECTION
PARING SELECT
MIXED TYPE OF LOAD

LOAD TYPE BROADBAND

BROADBAND FIXED LOAD

THROUGH SLIDING LOAD

PARAMETERS (MAY ALSO
REQUIRE
REFERENCE BROADBAND
IMPEDANCE FIXED LOAD)
TEST SIGNALS PRESS <ENTER>
START CAL TO SELECT
PRESS <ENTER>
TO SELECT

This menu lets you select either of two load

types, broadband or sliding. Broadband loads
are adequate for all but the most demanding re-
flection measurements. They are easier to use
and less expensive than sliding loads. If you
choose a sliding load, refer to paragraph 7-3 for
a procedure on setting pin depth.

For this example, select BROADBAND LOAD

and press the Enter key.

c. The next menu to appear, C6A (left), prompts

you to enter an impedance value. For this exam-
MENU C6A
ple, use the rotary knob to change the displayed
ENTER value to 50W. Alternatively, you can key in
BROADBAND LOAD
50 ohms. That is, press 50 on the keypad and
IMPEDANCE
the X1 terminator key. If the value is 1 mW, key
BROADBAND
in .001 and press the 10–3 terminator key. Con-
LOAD
IMPEDANCE versely, if the value is 1 MW, key in 1000 and
50.000 W press the 103 terminator key.
PRESS <ENTER>
TO SELECT

7-24 37XXXD OM
MEASUREMENT CALIBRATION SOLT CALIBRATION

Step 14. When menu C3 again returns:

MENU C20
a. Observe that LOAD TYPE now shows
ENTER
THROUGH LINE BROADBAND.
PARAMETERS
OFFSET LENGTH b. Move cursor to THROUGH PARAMETERS
0.0000 mm and press the Enter key.
THROUGHLINE
IMPEDANCE Step 15. Menu C20 (left) appears next. It lets you define the
50.000 W length of the offset and the impedance of the
PRESS <ENTER> throughline. For this example, enter 0 mm for length
WHEN COMPLETE and 50 ohms for impedance.

Step 16. When menu C3 reappears, move the cursor to REF-

ERENCE IMPEDANCE and press the Enter key.
This brings up menu C17 (left).

Step 17. Move cursor to REFERENCE IMPEDANCE and

MENU C17 use the rotary knob to change the displayed value to
ENTER 50W.
REFERENCE
IMPEDANCE Press the Enter key when you have completed your
REFERENCE value entry.
IMPEDANCE
50.000 W
PRESS <ENTER>
WHEN COMPLETE

37XXXD OM 7-25
SOLT CALIBRATION MEASUREMENT CALIBRATION

Step 18. When menu C3 returns, select TEST SIGNALS to

bring up menu SU2 (left).
MENU SU2
TEST SIGNALS Step 19. Menu SU2 lets you define the power level of the sig-
POWER CONTROL nals at the two test ports. Power delivered to the
0.0 dB DUT by the test set must be such that the measured
(0 TO -20) signals are well above the noise floor but below the
PORT 1 ATTN 0.1 dB compression level of the Test Set samplers.
20 dB (0 - 70) (Noise floor and maximum signal into Port 2 levels
PORT 1 POWER are specified in Appendix C.)
XX.XX dBm
PORT 2 ATTN For measuring high power signals, a Port 2 attenu-
X0 dB (0-40) ator in the forward transmission path allows up to
CALIBRATE 1 Watt of power (30 dBm) before 0.1 dB compression
FOR FLATNESS occurs.
(CAL EXISTS)
FLATNESS Determine the required input power level and the
CORRECTION expected output RF power level from the DUT.
AT XX.X dBm Ideally, the Port 2 step attenuator should be set so
SOURCE 2 PWR that the input to the test sampler (left) is less than
XX.X dBm –10 dBm. For example, if the input to the DUT is set
PREVIOUS MENU for –20 dBm and the device gain is 40 dB, set the
PRESS <ENTER> PORT 2 ATTN menu option for 20 dB.
TO SELECT
(If you needed to calibrate the test port for power
flatness, you would move the cursor to FLATNESS
CORRECTION and press the Enter key.)

Finally, move the cursor to PREVIOUS MENU and

press the Enter key. This returns you to menu SU1.
When you get there, press the Enter key to return to
menu C3.

P2

TB

0 to 40 dB Sampler

7-26 37XXXD OM
MEASUREMENT CALIBRATION SOLT CALIBRATION

Step 20. When menu C3 reappears, select START CAL and

press the Enter key to begin the calibration proce-
MENU C3 dure.
CONFIRM
CALIBRATION Continue the calibration sequence by following the
PARAMETERS prompts as they appear. Connect the appropriate Iso-
PORT 1 CONN lation Devices, Broadband Loads, Opens, Shorts, and
TYPE N (M) Throughlines, when requested in the calibration se-
PORT 2 CONN quence.
SMA (M)
REFLECTION
PAIRING
MIXED
LOAD TYPE
SLIDING
THROUGH
PARAMETERS
REFERENCE
IMPEDANCE
TEST SIGNALS
START CAL
PRESS <ENTER>
TO SELECT
OR CHANGE

37XXXD OM 7-27
OFFSET-SHORT CALIBRATION (SSLT) MEASUREMENT CALIBRATION

7-5 OFFSET-SHORT The Offset-Short calibration, now also referred to as the Double Off-
CALIBRATION (SSLT) set-Short Calibration, is the standard technique for waveguide; how-
ever, this method can be used for the coaxial and microstrip line types
as well. It uses two shorts, two loads, and a thru line to categorize the
inherent errors in the waveguide measurement system. These errors
include those caused by connectors as well as internal system errors
such as RF leakage, IF leakage, and component interaction.

Calibration Procedure A detailed, step-by-step procedure for performing an Offset-Short cali-

bration for waveguide is given below.

Step 1. Press the Begin Cal key.

. -

Channels Measurement

Display Enhancement

Begin Apply
Cal Cal
MENU C11
BEGIN CALIBRATION
Step 2. Select CHANGE CAL METHOD AND LINE
KEEP EXISTING
CAL DATA
TYPE, in menu C11 (left). (This assumes OFFSET
SHORT and WAVEGUIDE are not presently shown
REPEAT
PREVIOUS CAL
in blue as being selected.)
AUTOCAL
CAL METHOD
XXXXXXX
TRANSMISSION
LINE TYPE:
XXXXXXXX
CHANGE CAL
METHOD AND
LINE TYPE
NEXT CAL STEP
PRESS <ENTER>
TO SELECT

7-28 37XXXD OM
MEASUREMENT CALIBRATION OFFSET-SHORT CALIBRATION (SSLT)

Step 3. When menu C11A (left) appears, move cursor to the

MENU C11A following:
CHANGE CAL METHOD
AND LINE TYPE
a. SSLT (DOUBLE OFFSET SHORT), then
press the Enter key. This selects Offset Short as
NEXT CAL STEP
the calibration method.
CAL METHOD
SOLT (STANDARD) b. WAVEGUIDE, then press the Enter key. This
SSLT (DOUBLE OFF- brings menu C5 (bottom left) to the screen.
SET SHORT WITH
LOAD) c. NEXT CAL STEP, then press the Enter key.
SSST (TRIPLE This causes menu C11 to return to the screen.
OFFSET SHORT)
LRL/LRM Step 4. When menu C11 reappears, confirm that the OFF-
TRM SET SHORT calibration method and WAVEGUIDE
TRANSMISSION
line-type have been selected. Select NEXT CAL
LINE TYPE STEP and press the Enter key to proceed.
COAXIAL
Step 5. Menu C5 appears next. This menu (bottom left) lets
WAVEGUIDE you select the type of calibration. For this example,
MICROSTRIP move the cursor to FULL 12-TERM and press the
PRESS <ENTER> Enter key.
TO SELECT
Step 6. The next menu, C5D (below), lets you choose
whether to include or exclude the error terms associ-
ated with leakage between measurement channels.
For a normal calibration, you would choose to include
these error terms. Therefore, move the cursor to IN-
CLUDE ISOLATION (STANDARD) and press the
Enter key.
MENU C5
SELECT
CALIBRATION TYPE MENU C5D
FULL 12-TERM
SELECT USE
1 PATH OF ISOLATION
2 PORT IN CALIBRATION
INCLUDE
TRANSMISSION ISOLATION
FREQUENCY (STANDARD)
RESPONSE
EXCLUDE
REFLECTION ISOLATION
ONLY
PRESS <ENTER>
PRESS <ENTER> TO SELECT
TO SELECT

37XXXD OM 7-29
OFFSET-SHORT CALIBRATION (SSLT) MEASUREMENT CALIBRATION

Step 7. Menu C1 (left), which appears next, lets you select

MENU C1
the number of frequency points at which calibration
data is to be taken. Of these choices, which were de-
SELECT
scribed in paragraph 7-4, choose NORMAL (1601
CALIBRATION
DATA POINTS POINTS MAXIMUM) for this example.
NORMAL
Step 8. The next menu, C2 (below), lets you set your start
(1601 POINTS
MAXIMUM) and stop frequencies. For this example, move cursor
to START, press 40 on keypad, and press the MHz
C.W.
(1 POINT) terminator key. Perform like operations for the
STOP choice, except make entry read 20 GHz. After
N-DISCRETE
FREQUENCIES setting the frequencies, select NEXT CAL STEP
(2 TO 1601 and press the Enter key.
POINTS)
TIME DOMAIN
(HARMONIC) MENU C2
PRESS <ENTER>
FREQ RANGE OF
TO SELECT
CALIBRATION
START
0.0400000000GHz
STOP
20.000000000 GHz
201 DATA PTS
0.099800000 GHz
STEP SIZE
MAXIMUM NUMBER
OF DATA POINTS
1601 MAX PTS
MENU C3B
801 MAX PTS
CONFIRM 401 MAX PTS
CALIBRATION 201 MAX PTS
PARAMETERS 101 MAX PTS
51 MAX PTS
WAVEGUIDE
PARAMETERS NEXT CAL STEP
INSTALLED
PRESS <ENTER>
REFLECTION TO SELECT
PAIRING
XXXXXXXX
LOAD TYPE
BROADBAND
Step 9. When menu C3B (bottom left) appears, if you want
THROUGH LINE
PARAMETERS
to change any of the parameters shown in blue let-
ters, place the cursor on that parameter and press
TEST SIGNALS
the Enter key. (These choices operate the same as
START CAL was described for menu C3 in section 7-4.) For this
PRESS <ENTER> example, we change the waveguide parameters.
TO SELECT Move the cursor to WAVEGUIDE PARAMETERS
OR CHANGE
and press the Enter key.

7-30 37XXXD OM
MEASUREMENT CALIBRATION OFFSET-SHORT CALIBRATION (SSLT)

Step 10. When menu C15 (left) appears, move cursor to one of
the two available choices and press the Enter key.
MENU C15 These choices are described below.
SELECT
WAVEGUIDE
a. USE INSTALLED WAVEGUIDE KIT: Se-
KIT TO USE lecting this choice uses the values shown in blue
–INSTALLED KIT—
for IDENTIFIER, CUTOFF FREQ, SHORT 1,
and SHORT 2. Select this choice, for this exam-
IDENTIFIER
XXXX
ple.
CUTOFF FREQ:
XXX.XXXXXXXXX GHz
b. USER DEFINED: Selecting this choice brings
up menu C15A (below), which lets you specify
SHORT 1
XX.XXXX mm
waveguide parameters. After defining your
waveguide parameters, you are returned to
SHORT 2
XX.XXXX mm
menu C3B.
USE INSTALLED
WAVEGUIDE KIT MENU C15A
USER DEFINED
ENTER
PRESS <ENTER> WAVEGUIDE
TO SELECT PARAMETERS
WAVEGUIDE
CUTOFF FREQ:
XXX.XXXXXXXXX GHz
OFFSET LENGTH
OF SHORT 1
XX.XXXX mm
OFFSET LENGTH
OF SHORT 2
XX.XXXX mm
PRESS <ENTER>
WHEN COMPLETE

Step 11. Continue the calibration sequence by following the

prompts as they appear. Connect the appropriate Iso-
lation Devices, Broadband Loads, Shorts, and
Throughlines, when requested in the calibration se-
quence.

37XXXD OM 7-31
TRIPLE OFFSET-SHORT CALIBRATION (SSST) MEASUREMENT
CALIBRATION

7-6 TRIPLE OFFSET-SHORT The Triple Offset-Short calibration method can be used in coax, wave-
CALIBRATION (SSST) guide, and microstrip line types, and is most accurate when used over
narrower frequency ranges. As the name implies, this method uses
three offset-shorts to categorize the inherent errors in the measure-
ment system. These errors include those caused by connectors as well
as internal system errors such as RF leakage, IF leakage, and compo-
nent interaction.

NOTE
A continuous single sweep bradband calibration from
40 MHz to 110 GHz can be created by merging a 40 MHz to
65 GHz SOLT calibration with a 65 GHz to 110 GHz SSST
calibration. For more information, refer to section 7-9, Merge
Cal Files, and to Chapter 15 for details about the broadband
mode of operation.

Calibration Procedure A detailed, step-by-step procedure for performing a Triple Offset-Short

calibration is given below:

Step 1. Press the Begin Cal key.

. -

Channels Measurement

Display Enhancement

MENU C11
BEGIN CALIBRATION
KEEP EXISTING Begin Apply
CAL DATA
Cal Cal
REPEAT
PREVIOUS CAL
AUTOCAL
CAL METHOD Step 2. Select CHANGE CAL METHOD AND LINE
STANDARD TYPE, in menu C11 (left). (This assumes that OFF-
TRANSMISSION SET SHORT and WAVEGUIDE are not presently
LINE TYPE: shown in blue as being selected.)
XXXXXXXX
CHANGE CAL
METHOD AND
LINE TYPE
NEXT CAL STEP
PRESS <ENTER>
TO SELECT

7-32 37XXXD OM
MEASUREMENT CALIBRATION TRIPLE OFFSET-SHORT CALIBRATION
(SSST)

Step 3. When menu C11A (left) appears, move cursor to the

following:
MENU C11A
a. SSST (TRIPLE OFFSET SHORT), then press
CHANGE CAL METHOD the Enter key. This selects Triple Offset-Short as
AND LINE TYPE
the calibration method.
NEXT CAL STEP
CAL METHOD b. COAXIAL, then press the Enter key. This brings
SOLT (STANDARD) menu C5 (left) to the screen.
SSLT (DOUBLE OFF-
SET SHORT WITH c. NEXT CAL STEP, then press the Enter key.
LOAD) This causes menu C11 to return to the screen.
SSST (TRIPLE OFFSET
SHORT) Step 4. When menu C11 reappears, confirm that the SSST
LRL/LRM calibration method and COAXIAL line-type have
been selected. Select NEXT CAL STEP and press
TRM
the Enter key to proceed.
TRANSMISSION
LINE TYPE
Step 5. Menu C5 appears next (lower left). This menu lets
COAXIAL you select the type of calibration. For this example,
WAVEGUIDE move the cursor to FULL 12-TERM and press the
MICROSTRIP Enter key.
PRESS <ENTER>
TO SELECT
Step 6. The next menu, C5D (below), lets you choose
whether to include or exclude the error terms associ-
ated with leakage between measurement channels.
For a normal calibration, you would choose to include
these error terms. Therefore, move the cursor to
INCLUDE ISOLATION (STANDARD) and press
Menu C5 the Enter key.
CALIBRATION
TYPE Menu C5D
FULL 12-TERM
SELECT USE
1 PATH OF ISLOATION
2 PORT IN CALIBRATION
TRANSMISSION INCLUDE
FREQUENCY ISOLATION
RESPONSE (STANDARD)
REFLECTION ONLY EXCLUDE
PRESS <ENTER> ISOLATION
TO SELECT PRESS <ENTER>
TO SELECT

37XXXD OM 7-33
TRIPLE OFFSET-SHORT CALIBRATION (SSST) MEASUREMENT
CALIBRATION

Step 7. Menu C1 appears next (left) and lets you select the
number of frequency points for which calibration
data is to be taken. Select NORMAL (1601 POINTS
MENU C1
MAXIMUM) (refer to section 7-4 for a description).
SELECT
CALIBRATION Step 8. The next menu, C2 (below), lets you set your start
DATA POINTS
and stop frequencies. For this example, move the cur-
NORMAL sor to START, press 65 on the keypad, then press
(1601 POINTS
MAXIMUM)
the GHz terminator key. Perform like operations for
the STOP choice, except make the entry read
C.W.
(1 POINT)
110 GHz. After setting the frequencies, select NEXT
CAL STEP and press the Enter key.
N-DISCRETE
FREQUENCIES
(2 TO 1601 MENU C2
POINTS)
FREQ RANGE OF
TIME DOMAIN
CALIBRATION
(HARMONIC)
START
PRESS <ENTER>
0.0400000000GHz
TO SELECT
STOP
20.000000000 GHz
201 DATA PTS
0.099800000 GHz
STEP SIZE
MAXIMUM NUMBER
OF DATA POINTS
1601 MAX PTS
801 MAX PTS
401 MAX PTS
201 MAX PTS
101 MAX PTS
51 MAX PTS
NEXT CAL STEP
PRESS <ENTER>
TO SELECT
Menu C14
SELECT PORT n
OFFSET SHORT
CONNECTOR TYPE
Step 9. This brings up the Menu C14 (lower left) for select-
W1-CONN (M) ing the connector types on ports 1 and 2. Select the
W1-CONN (F)
W1-CONN connectors with the appropriate sex for a
SPECIAL A (M) W1 (1mm) calibration.
SPECIAL A (F)
SPECIAL B (M)
SPECIAL B (F)
SPECIAL C (M)
SPECIAL C (F)
USER DEFINED
PRESS <ENTER>
TO SELECT

7-34 37XXXD OM
MEASUREMENT CALIBRATION TRIPLE OFFSET-SHORT CALIBRATION
(SSST)

Step 10. When menu C3B (left) appears, if you want to

change any of the parameters shown in blue letters,
MENU C3B place the cursor on that parameter and press the En-
CONFIRM ter key.
CALIBRATION
PARAMETERS Step 11. When menu C3 (lower left) returns:
WAVEGUIDE
PARAMETERS a. Observe that PORT 1 CONN and
INSTALLED PORT 2 CONN now reflects W1 CONN (M).
REFLECTION
PAIRING b. Move the cursor to REFLECTION PARING
MIXED
and press the Enter key. This brings up menu
LOAD TYPE C13 (below).
BROADBAND
THROUGH LINE MENU C13
PARAMETERS
SELECT
TEST SIGNALS
REFLECTION
START CAL PAIRING
PRESS <ENTER> MIXED
TO SELECT (SHORT1-SHORT2,
OR CHANGE SHORT2-SHORT3,
SHORT3-SHORT1)
MATCHED
(SHORT1-SHORT1,
MENU C3 SHORT2-SHORT2,
SHORT3-SHORT3)
CONFIRM
CALIBRATION PRESS <ENTER>
PARAMETERS TO SELECT
OR CHANGE
PORT 1 CONN
W1-CONN (M)
PORT 2 CONN Step 12. Reflection Pairing lets you mix or match Offset Short
W1-CONN (M) devices in the Calibration Sequence menus, as per
REFLECTION the kit available. Generally, on-wafer calibration sub-
PAIRING strates have matched components; however, it is
XXXXXXXX
more convenient, on a coaxial calibration, to use
LOAD TYPE MIXED pairing in the case of the same connector
BROADBAND types on both ports. The MIXED choice lets you cali-
THROUGH LINE brate using different offset shorts on the two ports.
PARAMETERS Conversely, MATCHED pairing lets you calibrate in
REFERENCE sequence using one offset short type in each step. For
IMPEDANCE this example, choose MIXED and press the Enter
TEST SIGNALS key.
START CAL
Step 13. When menu C3 reappears, confirm the calibration
PRESS <ENTER>
TO SELECT parameters selected for the calibration, then select
OR CHANGE START CAL and continue the calibration sequence
by following the prompts as they appear.

Step 14. Connect the appropriate Isolation Devices, the three

Offset Shorts, and the Throughlines when requested
in the calibration sequence.

37XXXD OM 7-35
LRL/LRM CALIBRATION MEASUREMENT CALIBRATION

7-7 LRL/LRM CALIBRATION The LRL/LRM (line-reflect-line/line-reflect-match) calibration* feature

provides an enhanced capability for error compensation when making
measurements in coaxial, microstrip and waveguide transmission me-
dia. Instead of using the standard Open, Short, and Load, the
LRL/LRM calibration method uses two lines and a reflection or match.
The difference in length between line 1 and line 2 creates the mea-
surements necessary for the error solutions.

The LRL/LRM calibration technique uses the characteristic impedance

of a length of transmission line or a precision match as the calibration
standard. A full LRL/LRM calibration consists of two transmission line
measurements, a high reflection measurement, and an isolation mea-
surement. Using this technique full 12-term error correction can be
performed with the 37XXXD.

Three-line LRL/LRM calibration can also be selected. In a two-line

LRL measurement, the difference in length between line one and line
two is necessary for calibration but limits the frequency range to a 9:1
span. The use of three lines in the calibration extends the frequency
range to an 81:1 span. A combination of LRL and LRM can accomodate
any broadband measurement.

1. Through the use of LRL/LRM calibration and an external com-

puter, in conjunction with ANACAT software, multiple-level de-em-
bedding is possible. This calibration allows you to make semi-con-
ductor chip measurements up to 40 GHz with a single test fixture.

2. In addition, any non-coaxial transmission media, including mixed

media interconnects, can be accommodated. For example, a test de-
vice with a waveguide input and a coplanar microstrip output can
be measured. Software automatically compensates for the
microstrip dispersion.

A detailed procedure for calibrating for a measurement using the

LRL/LRM method is provided in the following pages.

*LRM Calibration Method of Rhode & Scharwz, Germany

7-36 37XXXD OM
MEASUREMENT CALIBRATION LRL/LRM CALIBRATION

LRL/LRM Calibration Microstrip is a dispersive media. The 37XXXD applies dispersion com-
(Microstrip) pensation during calibration for microstrip measurements. Because
the 37XXXD must know the specific microstrip parameters, during the
calibration procedure menus are available for entering the:

q width of the strip

q thickness of the substrate
q substrate dielectric constant
q effective dielectric constant Zc
q characteristic impedance (reference)
When testing microstrip devices it is necessary to launch from coax to
microstrip. In production testing this launching must be temporary, so
that the device can easily be installed in and be removed from the fix-
ture. The requirement for launching to 65 GHz is met by the Anritsu
Universal Test Fixture (UTF). The UTF provides accurate, repeatable
launch to substrates from 5 to 70 mils thick, and from 0.15 to 2 inches
long. Offset connections and right angles can be configured. DC bias
probes can be mounted to the UTF to inject bias onto the substrate.
UTF calibration/verification kits are available for alumina in 10 mil,
15 mil, and 25 mil microstrip, and for 25 mil coplanar waveguide. Al-
though a UTF is not essential, the following calibration procedures
presume its use.

Step 1. Select the desired LRL line substrates from the ap-
propriate microstrip calibration kit. When called for
in the calibration sequence, mount the LRL line sub-
strates on the UTF following the procedure given in
the 3680 OMM.

Step 2. Press the Begin Cal key.

. -

Channels Measurement

Display Enhancement

Begin Apply
Cal Cal

37XXXD OM 7-37
LRL/LRM CALIBRATION MEASUREMENT CALIBRATION

Step 3. Select CHANGE CAL METHOD AND LINE

TYPE, in menu C11 (left). (This assumes LRL and
MENU C11 MICROSTRIP are not presently shown in blue as be-
ing selected.)
BEGIN CALIBRATION
KEEP EXISTING Step 4. When menu C11A (bottom left) appears, highlight
CAL DATA the following selections.
REPEAT
PREVIOUS CAL a. LRL/LRM and press the Enter key.
AUTOCAL
CAL METHOD b. MICROSTRIP and press the Enter key.
XXXXXXXX
TRANSMISSION c. NEXT CAL STEP and press the Enter key.
LINE TYPE:
XXXXXXXX Step 5. When menu C11 reappears, confirm that the
CHANGE CAL LRL/LRM calibration method and MICROSTRIP
METHOD AND line-type have been selected. Select NEXT CAL
LINE TYPE STEP and press the Enter key to proceed.
NEXT CAL STEP
PRESS <ENTER> Step 6. Continue through the calibration sequence, and
TO SELECT make the following selections from the menus that
appear:

INCLUDE ISOLATION (STANDARD) (Menu

C5D)
MENU C11A NORMAL (1601 POINTS MAXIMUM) (Menu C1)
START (Your start frequency) (Menu C2)
CHANGE CAL METHOD
AND LINE TYPE
STOP (Your stop frequency) (Menu C2)
NEXT CAL STEP
CAL METHOD MENU C5D MENU C1 MENU C2

SOLT (STANDARD) SELECT USE SELECT FREQ RANGE OF

OF ISOLATION CALIBRATION CALIBRATION
SSLT (DOUBLE OFF-
IN CALIBRATION DATA POINTS
SET SHORT WITH START
LOAD) INCLUDE NORMAL 0.0400000000GHz
ISOLATION (1601 POINTS
SSST (TRIPLE OFF- STOP
(STANDARD) MAXIMUM)
SET SHORT) 20.000000000 GHz
EXCLUDE C.W.
LRL/LRM 201 DATA PTS
ISOLATION (1 POINT)
0.099800000 GHz
TRM
PRESS <ENTER> N-DISCRETE STEP SIZE
TRANSMISSION TO SELECT FREQUENCIES
MAXIMUM NUMBER
LINE TYPE (2 TO 1601
OF DATA POINTS
COAXIAL POINTS)
1601 MAX PTS
TIME DOMAIN 801 MAX PTS
WAVEGUIDE
(HARMONIC) 401 MAX PTS
MICROSTRIP 201 MAX PTS
PRESS <ENTER>
PRESS <ENTER> 101 MAX PTS
TO SELECT
TO SELECT 51 MAX PTS
NEXT CAL STEP
PRESS <ENTER>
TO SELECT

7-38 37XXXD OM
MEASUREMENT CALIBRATION LRL/LRM CALIBRATION

Step 7. When menu C3G appears, if you want to change

microstrip parameters to be different from those
MENU C3G shown in blue, place the cursor on MICROSTRIP
PARAMETERS and press the Enter key.
CONFIRM
CALIBRATION
PARAMETERS
Step 8. When menu C16 (left) appears, move the cursor to
the Anritsu 3680 UTF calibration kit you wish to use
LRL/LRM
PARAMETERS
or to USER DEFINED; then press the Enter key.
MICROSTRIP
PARAMETERS
The calibration kit selections shown in menu C16
USER DEFINED are for the following 3680 Connection Substrate
Kits:
TEST SIGNALS
10 MIL KIT — 36804B-10M
START CAL
15 MIL KIT — 36804B-15M
PRESS <ENTER> 25 MIL KIT — 36804B-25M
TO SELECT
OR CHANGE
If you choose USER DEFINED, the next menu that
appears (C16A), lets you characterize your parame-
ters. Move the cursor to each selection, key in a
value, then press the Enter key to return to menu
C16.

MENU C16
SELECT MENU C16A
MICROSTRIP ENTER
KIT TO USE MICROSTRIP
10 MIL KIT PARAMETERS

15 MIL KIT WIDTH OF

STRIP
25 MIL KIT XX.XXXX mm
USER DEFINED THICKNESS OF
PRESS <ENTER> SUBSTRATE
WHEN COMPLETE XXXX.XXXX mm
Zc
XXX.XXX pW
SUBSTRATE
DIELECTRIC
XX.XX
EFFECTIVE
DIELECTRIC
XX.XX
(RECOMMENDED
0.00)
PRESS <ENTER>
WHEN COMPLETE

37XXXD OM 7-39
LRL/LRM CALIBRATION MEASUREMENT CALIBRATION

Step 9. Select LRL/LRM PARAMETERS, when menu C3G

returns.
MENU C3G
Step 10. When menu C18 appears, you have two choices to
CONFIRM make: whether your calibration is to be two-line or
CALIBRATION
PARAMETERS
three-line, and where you want to have your refer-
ence plane.
LRL/LRM
PARAMETERS
a. Select the reference plane: Highlight MIDDLE
CHANGE
MICROSTRIP
OF LINE 1 (REF) or ENDS OF LINE 1
PARAMETERS (REF) and press the Enter key.
XXXXXXXXX
START CAL b. Select the type of LRL/LRM calibration: High-
PRESS <ENTER>
light ONE BAND for a two-line calibration or
TO SELECT TWO BANDS for a three-line calibration.

As mentioned earlier in a two-line measurement,

the difference in length between line 1 and line 2 is
necessary for calibration, but limits the frequency
range to a 9:1 span. By using three lines in the cali-
MENU C18 bration, you extend the frequency range to an 81:1
span.
CHANGE LRL/LRM
PARAMETERS
If you select TWO BANDS, skip to Step 12.
NEXT CAL STEP
NUMBER OF
BANDS USED
ONE BAND
TWO BANDS
LOCATION OF
REFERENCE
PLANES
MIDDLE OF
LINE 1 (REF)
ENDS OF
LINE 1 (REF)
PRESS <ENTER>
TO SELECT

7-40 37XXXD OM
MEASUREMENT CALIBRATION LRL/LRM CALIBRATION

Step 11. When menu C18A (left) appears, make the following
selections (for 2-line):
MENU C18A
a. Move the cursor to DEVICE 1 LINE 1 (REF)
CHANGE LRL/LRM
PARAMETERS
and key in the value.
NEXT CAL STEP
b. Move the cursor to DEVICE 2 LINE/MATCH.
CHARACTERIZE Here you have another decision to make:
CAL DEVICES
whether your calibration is to be LRL or LRM.
DEVICE 1 For this selection, the Enter key acts as a toggle.
LINE 1 (REF)
X.XXXX mm
c. If you toggle such that LINE turns red, then
DEVICE 2
LINE /MATCH
key in the value for line 2. This value depends
X.XXXX mm on your frequency range.
PRESS <ENTER>
TO SELECT d. If you toggle MATCH red, observe that
OR SWITCH FULLBAND appears. This indicates that your
reflective device covers the full calibration
range.

e. When you have made both selections, move the

cursor to NEXT CAL STEP and press the Enter
key to produce the next menu. Skip to Step 13.

37XXXD OM 7-41
LRL/LRM CALIBRATION MEASUREMENT CALIBRATION

Step 12. When menu C18B (left) appears, make the following
selections (for 3-line):
MENU C18B
a. Move the cursor to DEVICE 1 LINE 1 (REF)
CHANGE LRL/LRM
PARAMETERS
and key in the value (typically 1.00 cm). Press
the Enter key to select.
NEXT CAL STEP
CHARACTERIZE b. Move the cursor to DEVICE 2 LINE/MATCH.
CAL DEVICES
Both here, and for the next choice, you have an-
DEVICE 1 other decision to make: whether your calibration
LINE 1 (REF)
XX.XXXX
is to be LRL or LRM. For this selection, the En-
ter key acts as a toggle.
DEVICE 2
LINE/MATCH
XX.XXXX/LOWBAND c. If you toggle such that LINE turns red, then
DEVICE 3
key in the value for line 2. This value depends
LINE/MATCH on your frequency range.
XX.XXXX/HIGHBAND
FREQ AFTER d. If you toggle MATCH red, observe that
WHICH THE USE LOWBAND appears. This indicates that your
OF DEVICE 2 reflection device is a low-band load. This load
AND DEVICE 3 must have a passband such that it passes all
IS EXCHANGED
frequencies from the start to the breakpoint (see
BREAKPOINT below).
XXX.XXXXXXXXXGHZ
PRESS <ENTER> e. Move the cursor to DEVICE 3 LINE/MATCH.
TO SELECT
OR SWITCH
If device 3 is a line, key in the value. If it is a
match, the term HIGHBAND will appear. This
indicates that your match is a high-band load.
This load must have a passband such that it
passes all frequencies from the breakpoint to
the stop frequency.

f. Move the cursor to BREAKPOINT and enter

your breakpoint frequency. For two-line LRL cal-
ibrations, select a breakpoint equal to the upper
frequency of the low frequency LRL line. For a
combined LRL and LRM calibration, select a
breakpoint equal to the top frequency of the cali-
bration divided by six; for instance, to cover the
frequency range 0.04 to 60 GHz, select 10 GHz
as the breakpoint.

g. When you have made all selections, move the

cursor to NEXT CAL STEP and press Enter to
produce the next menu.

7-42 37XXXD OM
MEASUREMENT CALIBRATION LRL/LRM CALIBRATION

Step 13. The next menu, C19, gives you choices for your re-
flective device.
MENU C19
a. Move the cursor to REFLECTION OFFSET
CHANGE LRL/LRM
PARAMETERS
LENGTH and key in a value (typically
0.0000 mm).
NEXT CAL STEP
REFLECTION b. Move the cursor to GREATER THAN Z0 or
OFFSET LENGTH
+XXX.XXXX mm LESS THAN Z0, depending on whether your re-
flective device is an Open or a Short. Press the
REFLECTION TYPE
Enter key to select.
GREATER THAN Zo
LESS THAN Zo NOTE
MATCH PARAMETERS Choose GREATER THAN Z0 for an Open
MATCH IMPEDANCE and LESS THAN Z0 for a Short.
+XXX.XXX W
MATCH INDUCTANCE c. When you complete your choices, move the cur-
+XXXX.XXXX pH sor to NEXT CAL STEP and press the Enter
PRESS <ENTER> key.
TO SELECT
Step 14. When menu C3G reappears, move cursor to START
CAL and press Enter.

Step 15. Continue the calibration sequence by following the

prompts as they appear. Mount the appropriate LRL
MENU C3G line substrates when requested in the calibration se-
quence.
CONFIRM
CALIBRATION
PARAMETERS For the REFLECTIVE DEVICE and BROAD-
CHANGE
BAND LOAD prompts, remove all substrates from
LRL/LRM the UTF and allow the lower jaws to short the cen-
PARAMETERS ter conductor. Separate the connector blocks by at
CHANGE least an inch. (The BROADBAND LOAD prompt
MICROSTRIP only appears if you selected to include isolation in
PARAMETERS menu C5B.)
XXXXXXXXX
START CAL Step 16. Store the calibration.
PRESS <ENTER>
TO SELECT

37XXXD OM 7-43
LRL/LRM CALIBRATION MEASUREMENT CALIBRATION

LRL/LRM Calibration An LRL cal kit is necessary to perform the coaxial calibration. Calibra-
(Coaxial) tion kits for GPC-7 are available from Maury Microwave and Hewlett
Packard.

Two line lengths are used as the impedance standard. The calibration
frequency range is limited by the difference in the lengths of the two
lines. Their length must be different by approximately 90 degrees at
the mid-band frequency. A good calibration can be achieved over the
range of 18 degrees to 162 degrees making it possible to calibrate LRL
over a 9:1 frequency range.

LRL calibration is very sensitive to uncalibrated source match. If some

padding is placed at the test ports, the directivity and source match
will be improved. If the goal is high level measurements, then padding
should be included. If low level measurements are being performed,
then the padding must be left out.

Step 1. Same as Steps 1 through 6 in the Microstrip proce-

MENU C3E dure, except choose COAXIAL in menu C11A.
CONFIRM
CALIBRATION
Step 2. When menu C3E (left) appears, if you want to
PARAMETERS change line impedance, place cursor on REFER-
LRL/LRM ENCE IMPEDANCE and press the Enter key.
PARAMETERS
Step 3. When menu C17 (left) appears, move cursor to REF-
REFERENCE
IMPEDANCE ERENCE IMPEDANCE, key in the value, then
press the Enter key.
TEST SIGNALS
START CAL Step 4. Same as Steps 9 through 16 in the microstrip proce-
PRESS <ENTER> dure.
TO SELECT
OR CHANGE In the coaxial, three-line calibration there are fac-
tors you need to be aware of. Note that it is the line
length differences that are important to the LRL cal-
ibration, namely (L2–L1) and (L3–L1) where L1 is
the length of line 1, L2 is the length of line 2, and L3
is the length of line 3.

MENU C17 Longer length differences are used for longer wave-
lengths (lower frequencies). For frequencies up to
ENTER
REFERENCE
and including the breakpoint frequency, the larger
IMPEDANCE absolute value of the (L2–L1) and (L3–L1) differ-
ences is used. At frequencies above the breakpoint,
REFERENCE
IMPEDANCE the smaller absolute value of the (L2–L1) and
50.000 W (L3–L1) differences is used.
PRESS <ENTER>
WHEN COMPLETE

7-44 37XXXD OM
MEASUREMENT CALIBRATION LRL/LRM CALIBRATION

Consideration must also be given to selecting the

breakpoint frequency. Divide the frequency range to
satisfy the 9:1 rule for any given pair of lines. The
range is thus divided by the frequency breakpoint
into the intervals [f1, f2] and [f2, f3]. Based on these
intervals, next determine the appropriate length dif-
ferences; the longer difference is associated with the
lower interval [f1, f2]. Note that if the differences
are equal to each other, concurrent frequency ranges
are implied and only two lines need be used.

Select a line 1 reference (L1) around which to place

these two differences. Use any combination of posi-
tive or negative differences around line 1. The soft-
ware selects which interval is associated with either
of line 2 or line 3 by comparing the absolute values
of the differences with line 1. Data from the two
lines, which make up the larger absolute difference,
are used for the interval [f1, f2]. Data from the two
lines, which make up the smaller absolute differ-
ence, are used for the interval [f2, f3].

37XXXD OM 7-45
TRM CALIBRATION MEASUREMENT CALIBRATION

LRL/LRM Calibration The waveguide procedure is very similar to the coaxial and microstrip
(Waveguide) procedures already described.

Step 1. Follow Steps 1 through 6 in the Microstrip proce-

dure, page 7-37, except choose WAVEGUIDE in
MENU C3F menu C11A.
CONFIRM
CALIBRATION
The only difference is with menu C3F (left). For a
PARAMETERS waveguide calibration, move the cursor to WAVE-
LRL/LRM
GUIDE CUTOFF FREQ and press Enter. This ac-
PARAMETERS tion calls menu C15B, which lets you enter the
WAVEGUIDE
waveguide cutoff frequency. After doing so, you are
CUTOFF FREQ returned to menu C3F.
TEST SIGNALS
Step 2. When menu C3F reappears, place cursor on
START CAL
CHANGE LRL/LRM PARAMETERS and press
PRESS <ENTER> the Enter key.
TO SELECT
OR CHANGE
Step 3. Follow Steps 9 through 13, page 7-40, in the
Microstrip procedure.

MENU C15B
ENTER
WAVEGUIDE
CUTOFF
FREQUENCY
WAVEGUIDE
CUTOFF FREQ
XX.XXXX GHz
PRESS <ENTER>
WHEN COMPLETE

7-8 TRM CALIBRATION The TRM Calibration procedure is the same as the LRL/LRM proce-
dure, previous page, except that certain parameters have been set by
default so that the calibration is simpler to perform (e.g., the L-param-
eter in the LRM calibration has been set to equal a length of 0 mm for
a through, and the R-parameter is set for a short).

7-46 37XXXD OM
MEASUREMENT CALIBRATION MERGE CAL FILES APPLICATION

7-9 MERGE CAL FILES The Merge Cal Files application allows the user to combine two or
APPLICATION more calibrations that were performed on the VNA, but having differ-
ing frequency ranges. This is of particular importance when a wide
band RF calibration cannot be performed because wide band calibra-
tion components, such as loads and shorts, are not available. Such a
case exists when using Anritsu’s 37X97D wideband VNAs. Here, the
preferred calibration method would be to perform a standard method
(SOLT) coaxial calibration in the 0.04 to 65 GHz bands, a triple off-
set-short (SSST) coaxial calibration in the 65 to 110 GHz band, then
combine the calibrations to yield a wideband 0.04 to 110 GHz calibra-
tion that can be saved and recalled.

The resultant calibration file setup will be the first calibration file
setup except that the frequency points and RF correction values of the
second calibration file will be intermingled with the frequency points
and RF correction values of the first.The start and stop frequencies
will be adjusted to reflect the lowest and highest frequencies in the in-
termingling. If there are frequency points in common, then the correc-
tion values of the first file will be used and that frequency and data
point in the second file will be discarded.

Both RF calibration files must be the same type, that is, full 12 Term,
1 Path 2 Port Forward, 1 Path 2 Port Reverse, etc., and the total num-
ber of frequency points of the first and second files added together can-
not exceed 1601.

In most cases, it doesn’t matter which calibration file is chosen as the

first calibration file; however, if the VNA is a 37397C used in a Broad-
band setup that crosses the 65 GHz switchpoint, it is advised that the
first calibration data be from the lower frequency band and the second
calibration data be from the higher frequency band. Additionally, if the
higher frequency band calibration starts at 65.0 GHz, the lower fre-
quency band calibration must end at 65.0 GHz. This will prevent a
spike at the 65.0 GHz band switch point.

NOTE
Refer to Appendix A, Front Panel Menus, for descriptions
of menus MRG1, EXT_MRG1, MRG2, and MRG3 that re-
late to this application.

37XXXD OM 7-47/7-48
 Chapter 8
Measurements

Table of Contents

8-1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3

8-2 TRANSMISSION AND REFLECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
8-3 LOW LEVEL AND GAIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
8-4 GROUP DELAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20
8-5 ACTIVE DEVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-24
8-6 MULTIPLE SOURCE CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-29
Control Formula . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-29
8-7 ADAPTER REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-34
8-8 GAIN COMPRESSION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-39
Power and VNAs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-39
Swept Power Gain Compression . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-41
Swept Frequency Gain Compression . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-41
8-9 RECEIVER MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-58
Source Lock Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-58
Tracking Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-58
Set-on Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-58
Receiver Mode Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-59
Receiver Mode Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-59
Procedure, Receiver Mode Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-59
8-10 EMBEDDING/ DE-EMBEDDING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-62
Embedding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-63
De-embedding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-64
8-11 OPTICAL APPLICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-65
E/O Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-65
O/E Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-68
Creating a Characterization (*.S2P) File for E/O and O/E Measurements . . . 8-74
 Chapter 8
Measurements
8-1 INTRODUCTION This section discusses typical measurements that can be made with
the Model 37XXXD Vector Network Analyzer.

8-2 TRANSMISSION AND This discussion provides information on general measurement consid-
REFLECTION erations and transmission and reflection measurements using the
37XXXD.

Setup and Calibration

To get started, apply power to the system.

After turning on the power, allow the system to warm up for at least
60 minutes before operation.

In normal operation, the system comes on line in the state that it was
in when last turned off. If you want to return the system to its default
state, you can do so by pressing the Default Program key twice.

The default parameters provide a known starting point. For example,

they reset the start and stop frequencies for maximum sweep width,
the source control to 0 dB, and the display resolution to 401 data
points.

The Sweep Setup menu should now appear on the display (it also can
be displayed using the Setup Menu key). If you like, you can select a
new start frequency, stop frequency, or source power.

You can further reduce the power level at Ports 1 and 2 with the
built-in attenuators. Using the Reduced Test Signals option in the
Sweep Setup menu, you can change the setting of the Port 1 source at-
tenuator over a range of from 0 to 70 dB. The Port 2 test attenuator
has a range of from 0 to 40 dB (in 10 dB steps) (if Option 6 is in-
stalled).

37XXXD OM 8-3
TRANSMISSION AND REFLECTION MEASUREMENTS

Install the calibration kit devices to the test ports as instructed by the
U3 menu. Both the capacitance coefficients for the Open and the offset
lengths for the Open and Short can be modified or defined.

Selecting the Begin Cal key starts the calibration process. The Calibra-
tion menus step you through the calibration process, as follows:

Select the type of calibration desired.

Select the frequency range of calibration. Using the Data Points key,
you can choose from 51 up to 1601 measurement data points.

When the calibration is completed, you can store the calibration data
on a disk. You are now ready to install the test device and proceed with
the measurement. At this point you have a number of measurement
options to consider such as displays, markers, limits, outputs, sweeps,
and enhancements.

You can select any of the available graph types and display them for
any calibrated parameter on any of the four channels (if a 12-term cal-
ibration was performed).

8-4 37XXXD OM
MEASUREMENTS TRANSMISSION AND REFLECTION

Up to six markers are available. Using the Marker Menu, you can set
the frequency of each one, you can set each one in the delta marker
mode, and you can set each marker’s level to maximum or minimum.

In some cases—such as in a production environment—limit lines are

desirable. Options within the menu called up using the Limits key, pro-
vide for one or two flat, sloped, or single-point-segmented limit lines
for each channel. These limit lines function with all of the graph types,
including Smith and admittance. The color of the limit lines (blue) dif-
fers from that of the measurement trace. This allows for easy analysis
of results.

The Hard Copy Menu key menu (Figure 8-1) gives you a choice be-
tween a printer and a colored-pen plotter. It also lets you select menus
from which you may chose from a variety of print or plot options.To
output the display, press the Start Print key. The default setting pro-
vides for a full display printout from the associated printer.

SELECT OUTPUT
DEVICE
PRINTER
PLOTTER
OUTPUT OPTIONS
SETUP OUTPUT
HEADERS
OPERATIONS
PRINT OPTIONS
PLOT OPTIONS
PRESS <ENTER>
TO SELECT

Figure 8-1. Output Menu

37XXXD OM 8-5
TRANSMISSION AND REFLECTION MEASUREMENTS

To label the output, select Setup Output Headers in the Output Menu
or press the Device ID key.

On the output to the printer, plotter, or disk. a menu then appears that
lets you specify the device name/serial number, the date, the operator’s
name, and user comments (Figure 8-2).

SELECT NAME
DATA OUTPUT
FILTER_#2—-
HEADERS
ABCDEFGHIJKLM
MODEL
NOPQRSTUVWXYZ
ON
0123456788-_/#
FILTER
DEL CLEAR DONE
DEVICE ID
ON
TURN KNOB
870124
TO INDICATE
DATE
CHARACTER
ON
OR FUNCTION
28-_JUNE_87
Á OPERATOR ON
PRESS <ENTER>
MIKE
TO SELECT
COMMENTS

NUMBERS MAY
ALSO BE
SELECTED
USING KEYPAD

Figure 8-2. Label Menus

Sweep frequencies can be changed with the calibration applied as long

as the frequencies are between the calibration start and stop frequen-
cies.

Additionally, a marker sweep can be selected from the Setup Menu.

This allows you to sweep between any two active markers as long as
the frequency of each falls between the calibrated start and stop fre-
quencies.

Using the Data Points key, you can select the number of data points for
optimal resolution-vs-speed.

8-6 37XXXD OM
MEASUREMENTS TRANSMISSION AND REFLECTION

Finally, you can enhance the measurement data by reducing the IF

bandwidth and using averaging and/or smoothing.

q Change the IF bandwidth by selecting the Video IF BW key

q Set the averaging and smoothing values by selecting the
Avg/Smooth Menu key
q Turn on the averaging and smoothing using the Trace Smooth
and Average keys, which have LED’s to let you know that the en-
hancement is being applied

Measurement Discussion
Before going any further, let us take a few moments to review some ba-
sic principles of network measurements. First, we apply incident en-
ergy to the input of a test device. If the device’s input impedance dif-
fers from the measurement system’s impedance, some of that energy is
reflected. The remainder is transmitted through the device. We call the
ratio of reflected-to-incident energy the reflection coefficient. The ratio
of transmitted-to-incident energy we call the transmission coefficient
(Figure 8-3).

B A S IC M E A S U R E M E N T P R IN C IP L E S

IN C ID E N T
E N E R G Y
T R A N S M IT T E D
D U T
R E F L E C T E D E N E R G Y
E N E R G Y

R E F L E C T E D E N E R G Y
R E F L E C T IO N C O E F F IC IE N T =
IN C ID E N T E N E R G Y

T R A N S M IT T E D E N E R G Y
T R A N S M IS S IO N C O E F F IC IE N T =
IN C ID E N T E N E R G Y

Figure 8-3. Basic Measurement Principles

These ratios are complex quantities that have magnitude and phase
components. Using vector representation, the vector magnitude is the
ratio of reflected-to-incident magnitude (or transmitted-to-incident
magnitude), while the vector phase is the difference in phase between
the incident energy and the reflected/transmitted energy (Figure 8-4).

37XXXD OM 8-7
TRANSMISSION AND REFLECTION MEASUREMENTS

IM A G IN A R Y

M A G N IT U D E

P H A S E
R E A L

R E F L E C T IO N (M A G N IT U D E )
R E F L E C T IO N C O E F F IC IE N T =
IN C ID E N T (M A G N IT U D E )

P H A S E = IN C ID E N T (P H A S E ) - R E F L E C T E D (P H A S E )

Figure 8-4. Magnitude/Phase Vector

The measurement reference for the incident energy is the point at

which the device connects to the measurement system. We call this
point the reference plane. The incident energy at the reference plane is
defined as having a magnitude of 1 and a phase of 0 degrees. We estab-
lish this during the calibration.

q The ratio of reflected and transmitted energy to the incident en-

ergy can be represented by a number of different measurements
and units, as shown below.
q The default display for reflection measurements is the Smith
chart. The default display for transmission measurements is the
Log Magnitude and Phase graph.

The Smith chart is a convenient way to display device impedance and

is a useful aid for the graphical design and analysis of microwave cir-
cuits (Figure 8-5).

SMITH CHART

INDUCTIVE

50 Ω

CAPACITIVE

Figure 8-5 Smith Chart Display 1

8-8 37XXXD OM
MEASUREMENTS TRANSMISSION AND REFLECTION

Let us assume both that our system is already calibrated and that we
have equalized the system for the test port in use. We would then

1. Connect the Short: A Short always appears as a dot at the left-most

edge of the Smith chart’s horizontal axis.

2. Connect a Termination: Now you will see another dot located at the
center (1+j0) of the chart (this assumes a 50-ohm load).

3. Connect the Open: An Open appears as an arc on the chart’s right

edge. This is due to the fringing capacitance of the Open standard
(Figure 8-6).

SMITH CHART

TERMINATION
SHORT OPEN
ARC

Figure 8-6. Smith Chart Display 2

37XXXD OM 8-9
TRANSMISSION AND REFLECTION MEASUREMENTS

Now let’s perform a reflection measurement on a 20 dB attenuator

over the 1 to 18 GHz range.

We need to determine the setup, calibration, and measurement re-

quirements.

A known good starting point is to reset with Default Program parame-

ters. Since our measurement lies between 1 and 18 GHz, set the Start
and Stop frequencies using the Sweep Setup menu that appears on the
display following system reset.

Let’s perform a simple Reflection Only calibration, which uses an open,

a short, and a broadband load. To do this, press the Begin Cal key and
follow the directions in the menu area.

When you complete the calibration, the “CHANNEL 1 WITH S11”

Smith chart appears on the display. Now:

1. Select the Log Magnitude display and install the attenuator.

2. Select Auto Scale to optimize the display data.

3. Use Markers 1 and 2 to find the maximum and minimum imped-

ance.

8-10 37XXXD OM
MEASUREMENTS TRANSMISSION AND REFLECTION

Now let us perform a transmission measurement on the same 20 dB

attenuator over the same frequency range. We will follow the same
steps as before, but this time we will use additional features.

Once again, reset the system using the Default Program key.

In this calibration we will select the N-Discrete Frequencies menu op-

tion and step all frequencies in increments of 50 MHz.

When the calibration is complete, Channel 1 will display “S21 FOR-

WARD TRANSMISSION WITH LOG MAGNITUDE AND PHASE.”
You can use Markers 1 and 2 to find the maximum and minimum val-
ues of the attenuators insertion loss.

37XXXD OM 8-11
LOW LEVEL AND GAIN MEASUREMENTS

8-3 LOW LEVEL AND GAIN This discussion provides methods and techniques for making gain and
low-signal-level measurements. It is divided into 37XXXD system con-
siderations and test device considerations.

37XXXD System Considerations

The 37XXXD system is limited in its ability to test low-signal levels by
its dynamic range and signal-to-noise-power ratio. First we will dis-
cuss receiver dynamic range, which is the difference between the maxi-
mum and minimum acceptable signal levels (Receiver Dynamic Range
= Pmax – Pmin).

Receiver Dynamic Range

The dynamic range of the 37XXXD is limited by the 0.1 dB compres-
sion level of the samplers at high signal levels. It is further limited at
low signal levels by leakage signals and noise.

Figure 8-7 shows the detected output signal as a function of the power
level at the sampler. The 0.1 dB compression level is on the order of
–10 dBm. The 37XXXD is designed such that all other conversions
compress at a much greater level, which leaves the samplers as the
main source of nonlinearity.

C O M P R E S S IO N L E V E L

-1 0

D E T E C T E D
P O W E R O U T P U T
(d B m )
0 .1 d B C O M P R E S S IO N

-1 0
P O W E R L E V E L A T IN P U T T O S A M P L E R
(d B m )

Figure 8-7. Compression at 0.1 dB

The small signal response is limited by errors due to noise and leakage
signals. The leakage signals are both from within the 37XXXD and at
the device-under-test (DUT) connectors.

8-12 37XXXD OM
MEASUREMENTS LOW LEVEL AND GAIN

The detected signal is the vector sum of the desired signals, the noise
signals, and the leakage signals. These signals introduce an error or
uncertainty (Figure 8-8).

D E T E C T E D O U T P U T S IG N A L
U N C E R T A IN T Y

N O IS E S IG N A L
RNAY L E A K A G E O R
M G A II
F A L S E S IG N A L
M E A S U R E D
S IG N A L
A C T U A L S IG N A L

P H A S E E R R O R

R E A L

Figure 8-8. Amplitude and Phase Uncertainty

Some of the possible leakage paths for the 37XXXD are the transfer
switch, the frequency conversion module, and the DUT. The system
limits these leakages to greater than 100 dB. The 12-term error correc-
tion can reduce this leakage to better than 110 dB at 18 GHz and
90 dB at 40 GHz.

NOTE
We recommend using an isolation cell to decrease leakage
signals for sensitive measurements. For best results, in-
crease the default averaging value and decrease the de-
fault IF bandwidth setting during calibration and
measurement. Using higher enhancement during the mea-
surement than the calibration will not result in any accu-
racy improvements.

The DUT connectors should have internally captivated center pins.

Those connectors which use external pins to captivate the center con-
ductor should have silver loaded epoxy on the pins to reduce radiation
to better than 80 dB.

Signal-to-Noise-Power Ratio
The signal-to-noise-power ratio for each of the test or reference chan-
nels is as shown. The “signal power” is the power level of the 80 kHz
IF signal at the internal synchronous detectors, and the “noise power”
is the total power contained within the bandwidth of the bandpass fil-
ter at 80 kHz.

The uncertainty, or error, in a measurement is a function of the ampli-

tude of leakage signals and of the noise level. The uncertainty in the
measurement of magnitude and phase of the S-parameters are calcula-
ble and shown in Figures 8-9 and 8-10.

37XXXD OM 8-13
LOW LEVEL AND GAIN MEASUREMENTS

M A X U N C E R T A IN T Y F O R M A G N IT U D E
A S A F U N C T IO N O F S /N R A T IO

1 0 0 .0

1 0 .0

1 .0
M A X IM U M
U N C E R T A IN T Y .1
(d B m )
.0 1

.0 0 1

.0 0 0 1
0 1 0 2 0 3 0 4 0 5 0 6 0
S IG N A L /N O IS E R A T IO
(d B )

Figure 8-9. The Effect of S/N Ratio On Magnitude Measurements (Noise

Only)

M A X U N C E R T A IN T Y F O R P H A S E
A S A F U N C T IO N O F S /N R A T IO

1 0 0 .0

1 0 .0
M A X IM U M
U N C E R T A IN T Y
(D E G R E E S ) 1 .0

.1

0 1 0 2 0 3 0 4 0 5 0 6 0
S IG N A L /N O IS E R A T IO
(d B )

Figure 8-10. The Effect of S/N Ratio On Phase Measurements (Noise Only)

8-14 37XXXD OM
MEASUREMENTS LOW LEVEL AND GAIN

The most difficult types of measurements are those that exercise the
full dynamic range of the 37XXXD, such as filters (Figure 8-11. Filter
measurements are examples of where one must observe both low-in-
sertion loss (in the passband) and high attenuation (in the stop band).

B A N D P A S S F IL T E R
< 1 d B
S d B P A S S B A N D
2 1

0 d B

> 5 0 d B
S T O P B A N D

F R E Q U E N C Y

Figure 8-11. Filter Measurements

There are two techniques that you can use to optimize the sig-
nal-to-noise ratio. They are (1) maximizing the RF signal level and (2)
using signal enhancement.

To maximize the RF signal level, use the default settings of the

37XXXD.

The 37XXXD provides two enhancements for improving the sig-

nal-to-noise ratio: IF bandwidth reduction and averaging.

Reducing the IF bandwidth is a primary method for enhancing accu-

racy. The 37XXXD has a choice of four bandwidths available from the
front panel: Maximum (10 kHz), Normal (1 kHz), Reduced (100 Hz),
and Minimum (10 Hz). The noise level should decrease by a factor
equal to the square root of the IF bandwidth. Using IF Bandwidth re-
duction makes for faster measurements than with the use of an equiv-
alent amount of averaging.

37XXXD OM 8-15
LOW LEVEL AND GAIN MEASUREMENTS

Averaging is another way to improve accuracy. The improvement is

proportional to the square root of the number of averages. Two types of
averaging are supported: Sweep-by-sweep and point-by-point.

Point-by-point averaging works by collecting multiple measurements

while at each frequency point and then averaging them together.
Sweep-by-sweep averaging works by performing multiple complete
sweeps and averaging the individual the individual frequency points
by taking data from the different sweeps. The primary difference is the
amount of time between samples at a given frequency point (short for
point-by-point, longer for sweep-by-sweep).

Sweep-by-sweep averaging may produce lower trace noise because the

averaging time is more likely to exceed the coherence time of the noise
source. The disadvantage is that any slow drift or transient response
of the device under test will be lost in the averaging process.
Sweep-by-sweep is hence less suitable for use during device tuning.

Conversely, point-by-point averaging will better preserve device tuning

response or device drift. It may, however, result in slightly elevated
trace noise (relative to sweep-by-sweep) since the measurement time
may be less than the coherence time of the noise source.

Figure 8-12 shows the measured reduction in noise due to bandwidth

and averaging.

M E A S U R E M E N T S O N A 7 0 d B A T T E N U A T O R
A L L D A T A N O R M A L IZ E D T O
A 1 k H z IF B A N D W ID T H A N D 1 A V E R A G E

7 .0 1 0 K H z (IF B W )

3 .5 1 K H z
R E L A T IV E 1 .4 1 0 0 H z
N O IS E (d B )
.7

.3 5

.1 4
1 2 5 1 0 2 0 5 0 1 0 0 2 0 0 5 0 0
N U M B E R O F A V E R A G E S

Figure 8-12. Reduction in Noise Using Averaging

Example: Using 1 kHz BW reduction and 10 averages, you would in-

crease the signal-to-noise ratio by 7.6 dB but would lengthen the time
required for the measurement by a factor of 4.3. This example assumes
a constant signal power.

8-16 37XXXD OM
MEASUREMENTS LOW LEVEL AND GAIN

Test Device (DUT) Considerations

In order to test a device, the required input RF level and the expected
device output RF level must be determined.

The RF level at Port 1 must be set for the device input RF power level
required. Attenuation can be added in steps of 10 dB up to 70 dB using
the built-in source attenuator. Amplification can be added by removing
the front panel loop and adding an external amplifier.

Before calibration, ensure that the test setup is correct by setting the
power level and adding attenuation as needed.

37XXXD OM 8-17
LOW LEVEL AND GAIN MEASUREMENTS

The 37XXXD uses enhancements in the calibration to ensure a wide

dynamic range. It automatically selects 1 kHz IF bandwidth and var-
ies the number of averages with the calibration device. Terminations
require the most averages.

If desired, the Video IF bandwidth and number of averages can be

specified for the calibration measurements. Using 100 averages (Avg =
100) appears to be sufficient for most measurements.

To obtain the maximum performance from the 37XXXD for measure-

ments of attenuation, you can use the capability of the N discrete fre-
quency calibration to spot check measurements in the frequency band
of interest.

8-18 37XXXD OM
MEASUREMENTS LOW LEVEL AND GAIN

Wide Dynamic Range Device - Filter

Since you do both low-insertion-loss and high- attenuation measure-
ments simultaneously, use the maximum RF signal level and no atten-
uation. Selecting the 1 kHz Video IF BW setting and 100 averages will
likely suffice for this kind of measurement (Figure 8-13).

B A N D P A S S F IL T E R
< 1 d B
S d B P A S S B A N D
2 1

0 d B

> 5 0 d B
S T O P B A N D

F R E Q U E N C Y

Figure 8-13. Filter Measurements

High Gain Device - FET

This device has a typical 15 dB gain and requires an input level of
about –30 dBm. Set the Port 1 Source Attenuator to 30 dB. Since the
device RF output level is –15 dBm (–30 dBm + 15 dB[gain] = –15 dBm)
no attenuation is needed at Port 2.

Medium Power Device - Amplifier

Measure the small signal parameters of a 10 dB gain device that re-
quires an input power level of 0 dBm. Here, Port 1 will have no attenu-
ation. The device RF output level is 10 dBm. This level equals 10 dBm
(0 dBm + 10 dB[gain] = 10 dBm) into Port 2 and will cause compres-
sion in the measurement. At least 10 dB of test attenuation will be
needed at Port 2, which will reduce the Port 2 RF level to 0 dB.

37XXXD OM 8-19
GROUP DELAY MEASUREMENTS

8-4 GROUP DELAY Group delay is the measure of transit time through a device at a par-
ticular frequency. Ideally, we want to measure a constant—or rela-
tively constant—transit time over frequency. The top waveform shown
in Figure 8-14 is measured at one frequency. The bottom waveform is
identical to the first, simply delayed in time.

M A G N IT U D E

t 0 t 1 T IM E

Figure 8-14. Two Waveforms Delayed in Time

Referring to Figure 8-15, the first waveform shown is the original

waveform. It is made up of many frequency components. After travel-
ing through a device the signal is delayed in time. Some frequencies
are delayed more than others and thus our waveform does not have ex-
actly the same shape as before.

M A G N IT U D E

IN P U T

O U T P U T

T IM E

Figure 8-15. Waveform with Frequency Differences

When delay is nonlinear, as shown above, distortion occurs. By meas-

uring group delay with a network analyzer you can characterize the
distortion that occurs from a signal traveling through your test device.

8-20 37XXXD OM
MEASUREMENTS GROUP DELAY

When designing components it is important to measure group delay so

that you can compensate for any distortion caused by the component.
You may be able to tune the device so as to optimize the performance
of group delay over the frequency range of interest. Outside of the
specified frequency range, the group delay may or may not be linear.

So how is group delay measured? Signals travel too fast to enable

measuring the input and output times of each frequency component.
Consequently, we must use mathematical calculations to derive the
group delay from the phase slope.

Group delay is mathematically represented by the following equations:

- dq -1 dq -1 dq 1 Dq
t = - = = =
dw 2p df 360 df 2p Df

What this equation shows is that group delay is a measure of the

change in phase with relation to the change in frequency.

The change in frequency is referred to as an aperture.

Df = Aperture

To measure group delay the frequency aperture must be selected. De-

pending on the size of aperture, different levels of precision can result
for the measurement of group delay.

Frequency Range
Aperture =
# Of Data Points

A wide aperture results in a loss of fine-grain variations but gives

more sensitivity in the measurement of time delay. A small aperture
gives better frequency resolution, but at the cost of lost sensitivity.
Thus, for any comparison of group delay data you must know the aper-
ture used to make the measurement (Figure 8-16).

M A G N IT U D E
A P E R T U R E T O O W ID E

A P E R T U R E T O O N A R R O W

F R E Q U E N C Y

Figure 8-16. Waveforms With Aperture Differences

37XXXD OM 8-21
GROUP DELAY MEASUREMENTS

Let us take a look at a group delay measurement made on the Anritsu

37347D Vector Network Analyzer. Group delay, as a measurement op-
tion, can be found in the Graph Type menu. After selecting the option,
the VNA displays the data in a time-vs-frequency graph, or to be more
exact, a group-delay-vs-frequency graph (Figure 8-17).

S 2 1 F O R W A R D T R A N S M IS S IO N

G R O U P D E L A Y R E F = 1 .0 0 0 n S 6 0 0 .0 0 0 p S /D IV

3 .0 0 0 0 G H z 9 .0 0 0 0

Figure 8-17. Group Delay-vs-Frequency Graph

The 37XXXD automatically selects the frequency spacing between

data points—that is, the aperture. Notice that this value is displayed
on the screen with the measurement (Figure 8-18).

S 2 1 F O R W A R D T R A N S M IS S IO N

G R O U P D E L A Y R E F = 1 .0 0 0 n S 6 0 0 .0 0 0 p S /D IV

3 .0 0 0 0 G H z 9 .0 0 0 0

Figure 8-18. Group Delay Screen Showing Aperture

8-22 37XXXD OM
MEASUREMENTS GROUP DELAY

The aperture defaults to the smallest setting for the frequency range
and number of data points selected. This value is displayed in the Set
Scale key menu when measuring group delay (Figure 8-19).

S 2 1 F O R W A R D T R A N S M IS S IO N

G R O U P D E L A Y R E F = 1 .0 0 0 n S 6 0 0 .0 0 0 p S /D IV

3 .0 0 0 0 G H z 9 .0 0 0 0

Figure 8-19. 37XXXD Aperture

Group delay applications are found throughout the microwave indus-

try, although the majority of such measurements are made in the tele-
communications area.

One occurrence of group delay that you may have experienced is with
a long-distance telephone call. Occasionally a phone call can be dis-
turbing because of the delay in time from when you speak and when
the other person responds. If there is simply a delay, then time de-
lay—or linear group delay—has occurred. But if the voices are also dis-
torted, then non-linear group delay has occurred. It is this distortion
that we must avoid. We can avoid linear group delay by measuring
group delay both during the design and development stages and dur-
ing recalibration in the field.

One final group-delay application is found in the development of com-

ponents. In this application, group delay is measured for the transit
time of a signal through the device. When time is of the essence in a
fast switching system, as in a modern computer, the travel time
through a device is critical.

37XXXD OM 8-23
ACTIVE DEVICE MEASUREMENTS

8-5 ACTIVE DEVICE Active devices are key components in microwave systems.

The measurements that are made on active devices are similar to

those made on passive devices.

Active devices come in many shapes and sizes. In most cases we are
going to have to develop a fixture in which to mount the device.

Active devices require bias voltages, and in many cases they are easily
damaged. High gain amplifiers may saturate with input signals of
–50 dBm. With active devices, we have a new set of measurement re-
quirements.

The 373XXD has been designed to help you make these types of mea-
surements. It includes one 70 dB step attenuator (60 dB for 37377D
and 37397D) used to adjust the Port 1 power level. A second 40 dB
step attenuator is also included (with Option 6) in the forward trans-
mission path to allow measurement of high gain devices without sacri-
ficing reverse transmission and reflection measurements (S12, S22).
Bias tees on each port are used to bias the device via the test port cen-
ter conductor. This approach to bias is useful for testing transistors;
however, MMIC’s usually require bias injection at other points (Fig-
ure 8-20).

B ia s T e e s

V B IA S

R F T E S T
IN P O R T

Figure 8-20. Bias Tee

8-24 37XXXD OM
MEASUREMENTS ACTIVE DEVICE

Test fixtures are necessary for mounting the device so that it can be
measured in our coaxial (or waveguide) measuring system
(Figure 8-21).

Figure 8-21. Active Device Test Fixture

Now we have an interesting situation. While we can measure the per-

formance at the connector—which is the calibration plane—what we
really want to know is how our device performs (Figure 8-22).

F E T

G P C -7 G P C -7

S 1 1

S 1 1
M

Figure 8-22. View of a Test Device

You can consider the device embedded in the fixture and can measure
the S-parameters of the fixture with the device installed.

The most elementary situation is a system in which the test fixture is

electrically ideal or transparent. In this case, the solution is sim-
ple—merely move the reference plane out to the device (Figure 8-23).

37XXXD OM 8-25
ACTIVE DEVICE MEASUREMENTS

5 0 O H M L IN E

G P C -7 D U T

N O L O S S , R E F L E C T IO N L E S S

Figure 8-23. Simple Example of De-Embedding

In some cases—depending on the fixture or the device being meas-

ured—this is satisfactory. But when it is not, we need to employ other
techniques.

One of the reasons that moving the reference plane out to the device
does not always work, is that the test fixture includes a transition
from coax to a structure such as microstrip, coplanar waveguide, or
stripline (Figure 8-24).

F E T A L U M IN A
C A R R IE R

G R O U N D G R O U N D

IN P U T IN P U T

G R O U N D G R O U N D
C O P L A N A R C O P L A N A R
L A U N C H E R L A U N C H E R

Figure 8-24. Coax-to-Substrate Transition

Engineers have come to grips with the general problem. However,

there is no established standard approach. Two of the more common
approaches are to calibrate the fixture as a part of the analyzer, and to
characterize the fixture and compute the desired result.

8-26 37XXXD OM
MEASUREMENTS ACTIVE DEVICE

In the discussion on calibration we saw that the calibration compo-

nents establish the reference plane and determine the quality of the
measurement. If we have a good Open, Short and Z0 load to place at
the end of a microstrip line, we can calibrate the system at the point of
measurement.

Figure 8-25 shows some of the special test-fixture calibration stan-

dards that are available.

5 0 O H M 2 4 0 /5 2 - O C

T H R U L IN E O P E N

1 8 0 /8 2 - S C 2 4 0 /5 2 - S C

O F F S E T S H O R T O F F S E T S H O R T

Figure 8-25. Special Test Fixtures

These special calibration kits are far from perfect, but they are supe-
rior to our perfect transmission line assumption.

You may also have heard of the probe stations built to permit on-wafer
calibration measurements.

The Open, Short, termination approach provides three known stan-

dards that permit the analyzer to solve for three unknowns (Fig-
ure 8-26).

P R O B E P R O B E

O P E N C IR C U IT 1 0 0 O H M
(IN A IR ) 1 0 0 O H M
5 0 O H M
T E R M IN A T IO N
P R O B E P R O B E P R O B E

S H O R T
C IR C U IT

5 0 O H M
T H R O U G H L IN E

Figure 8-26. Solving for Unknowns

37XXXD OM 8-27
ACTIVE DEVICE MEASUREMENTS

CAUTION

You should turn off or disconnect the bias supplies during the calibra-
tion, since you are using a Short as the calibration standard.

It is also possible to use three known impedances. For instance, a var-

actor with three voltages applied (Figure 8-27).

S P E C IA L C A L IB R A T IO N K IT S

C 1
C IS V A R IE D
C 2 B Y C H A N G IN G
V O L T A G E

C 3

N O T P E R F E C T E IT H E R

Figure 8-27. Three Known Impedances

The second approach is to model the fixture. Modeling is elegant but of

limited use due to the non-ideal characteristics of the fixture. Modeling
can be accomplished in a CAD system.

In summary, there are quite a variety of approaches—all with their

own characteristic pitfalls. Engineers try to choose the most appropri-
ate technique for their application.

8-28 37XXXD OM
MEASUREMENTS MULTIPLE SOURCE CONTROL

8-6 MULTIPLE SOURCE The Multiple Source Control mode permits independent control of the
CONTROL 37XXXD source, receiver, and an external Anritsu synthesizer (67XXB,
68XXXB, MG36XXA/B), without the need of an external controller
(Figure 8-28).

37XXXD VNA.
1. Remove a1 loop on the front panel (Opt. 15 only).
2. Set up equipment as shown. . -

3. Normalize the data trace with the standard mixer installed. Channels Measurement

4. Subsequent mixers can be tested for magnitude

or phase match with respect to the "Standard Mixer." Display Enhancement

To
a1 In
(Opt.
15).
Power
Divider

RF I.F.

Phase-Lock RF
Mixer. Mixer 2 Mixer 1
I.F.
Standard
LO Mixer.
LO

Power
Divider

Figure 8-28. Test Setup for Mixer Measurement Using Multiple Source Control Operation

Operation in this mode requires Option 15. Removing the reference

loop lets you isolate the receiver from the source. This permits testing
of frequency converters such as mixers.

The software lets the frequency ranges and output powers of the two
sources be specified. A frequency sweep can comprise up to five sepa-
rate bands, each with independent source and receiver settings for
convenient testing of frequency translation devices such as mixers. Up
to five sub-bands (harmonics) can be tested in one sweep.

Control Formula Multiple Source control is specified as a displayed frequency range

partitioned into from one-to-five consecutive bands. For each band
Source 1, Source 2, and receiver frequencies may be interdependently
specified per the formula:

Source 1 = (1/1) * (F+0.000000000 GHz)

Source 2 = (1/1) * (F+0.000000000 GHz)
Receiver = (1/1) * (F+0.000000000 GHz)
where, the multiplier, divisor and frequency offset can be entered spe-
cific to the DUT.

37XXXD OM 8-29
MULTIPLE SOURCE CONTROL MEASUREMENTS

Multiple Source Control Pre-operational Setup

MENU U1 The two sources receive control information from the 37XXXD VNA.
The GPIB address assigned to the external source must be identical to
SELECT UTILITY
FUNCTION OPTIONS
the address contained in the data directed to the source by the
37XXXD VNA. Assure source/VNA address compatibility as follows:
GPIB ADDRESSES
DISPLAY Step 1. Install Sources 1 and 2 on the Dedicated GPIB bus.
INSTRUMENT
STATE PARAMS
Step 2. Press the Utility Menu key.
GENERAL DISK
UTILITIES
CAL COMPONENT
UTILITIES
. -

AUTOCAL UTILITIES Channels Measurement

COLOR
CONFIGURATION Display Enhancement

DATA ON(OFF)
DRAWING
BLANKING
FREQUENCY
INFORMATION
SET DATA/TIME Utility
Menu

PRESS <ENTER>
TO SELECT
OR TURN ON/OFF
Step 3. Move cursor to GPIB ADDRESSES and press Enter,
when menu U1 (left) appears.

MENU 7 Step 4. When menu GP7 (left) appears, observe that the ad-
dress number is correct. If necessary, use the keypad
GPIB ADDRESSES
to enter a new address.
IEEE 488.2
GPIB INTERFACE
ADDRESS
6
DEDICATED
GPIB INTERFACE
EXTERNAL SOURCE 1
4
EXTERNAL SOURCE 2
5
PLOTTER
8
POWER METER
23
FREQUENCY COUNTER
7

8-30 37XXXD OM
MEASUREMENTS MULTIPLE SOURCE CONTROL

Multiple Source Control Operation

MENU OPTNS
Step 5. Press the Option Menu key.
OPTIONS
TRIGGERS
REAR PANEL
OUTPUT
. -

DIAGNOSTICS Channels Measurement

MULTIPLE SOURCE
CONTROL Display Enhancement

RECEIVER MODE
SOURCE CONFIG
RF ON/OFF
DURING RETRACE
PRESS <ENTER>
TO SELECT Option
Menu

Step 6. When menu OPTIONS (left) appears, move cursor to

MULTIPLE SOURCE CONTROL and press the
Enter key.
MENU OM1
Step 7. When menu OM1(left) appears, move cursor to DE-
MULTIPLE SOURCE FINE BANDS and press the Enter key. This brings
CONTROL
menu OM 1 to the screen.
DEFINE BANDS
SOURCE CONFIG
MULTIPLE
SOURCE MODE
OFF
STANDBY
ON
MORE
PRESS <ENTER>
TO SELECT

37XXXD OM 8-31
MULTIPLE SOURCE CONTROL MEASUREMENTS

Step 8. Coincident with menu OM2 (left), the data display

MENU OM2 area of the screen presents a chart entitled
“RANGES OF BANDS STORED.” This chart shows
DEFINE BANDS
the band start and band stop frequencies that have
BAND 1 been stored for each of five bands.
DISPLAYED
FREQ RANGE Using menu OM2, the displayed frequency range can
BAND START F be divided into one to five bands.
XXX.XXXXXX XXX GHz
BAND STOP F Band 1 must start at the beginning of the frequency
XXX.XXXXXXXXX GHz range and end at either the user-specified stop fre-
BAND FUNCTIONS quency or the end of the frequency range.
EDIT SYSTEM
EQUATIONS Band 2 must begin at the next point after band 1
STORE BAND 1 ends and end at either the user-specified stop fre-
BANDS STORED: quency or the end of the frequency range.
(1 2 3 4 5)
CLEAR ALL Step 9. Move cursor to BAND; select BAND 1 by entering
DEFINITIONS “1” using the keypad or rotary knob.
SET MULTIPLE
SOURCE MODE Step 10. Move cursor to BAND START F, and use keypad or
PRESS <ENTER> rotary knob to enter the band 1 start frequency.
TO SELECT
Step 11. Move cursor to BAND STOP F, and enter the
band 1 stop frequency.

Step 12. Move cursor to EDIT SYSTEM EQUATIONS and

press the Enter key.
MENU OM3
EDIT SYSTEM Step 13. When menu OM3 (left) appears, select SOURCE 1.
EQUATIONS
EQUATION Step 14. Move cursor to MULTIPLIER and use keypad or ro-
TO EDIT tary knob to enter desired multiplier for Source 1.
SOURCE 1 This is the multiplier term in the following equation:
SOURCE 2
Freq = (Multiplier/Divisor) X (F + Offset Frequency)
RECEIVER
EQUATION Step 15. Move cursor to DIVISOR and use keypad or rotary
SUMMARY knob to enter desired DIVISOR for source 1. This is
C.W. OFF the divisor term given in the above equation.
MULTIPLIER
XX Step 16. Move cursor to either OFFSET FREQUENCY, and
DIVISOR use keypad or rotary knob to enter desired offset fre-
XX quency for Source 1; or C.W., and press Enter to tog-
OFFSET FREQ gle C.W. to OFF.
XXX.XXXXXXXXX GHz
PREVIOUS MENU
The Offset Frequency choice is the offset frequency
given in the above equation. The C.W. choice removes
PRESS <ENTER>
TO SELECT
F from the equation and places Source 1 in the CW
mode.

8-32 37XXXD OM
MEASUREMENTS MULTIPLE SOURCE CONTROL

Step 17. Move the cursor to PREVIOUS MENU and press

MENU OM2 the Enter key. This returns you to menu OM2 (left).
DEFINE BANDS Step 18. Move cursor to STORE BAND 1 and press the Enter
BAND 2 key. This stores the band start frequency, the band
DISPLAYED stop frequency and the Source 1, Source 2 and Re-
FREQ RANGE ceiver equations.
BAND START F
XX.XXXXXX GHz Step 19. Note that the BAND number has incremented to 2.
BAND STOP F
XX.XXXXXX GHz Step 20. Repeat the above steps to define the start and stop
frequencies for bands 2 through 5. Set up the system
BAND FUNCTIONS
equations for each band.
EDIT SYSTEM
EQUATIONS
NOTE
STORE BAND 1
Except for band 1, the system software constrains all start
BANDS STORED:
( NONE ) frequencies to follow the previous band’s stop frequency.
However, while frequency bands are being defined or the
CLEAR ALL
DEFINITIONS system equations are being edited, the system is automati-
cally placed in the standby mode. In this mode, frequencies
SET MULTIPLE
SOURCE STATE
that may be entered are not supervised by the system soft-
ware; any frequency can be entered and displayed. When
PRESS <ENTER>
TO SELECT
the mode is switched to ON (in menu OM1, left), the sys-
tem software restricts the frequencies to band limits.
When the mode is switched to OFF, the frequencies are re-
stricted to system limits.

Source Lock Polarity: Normal/Reverse

MENU OM1
When making frequency translated devices measurements using the
MULTIPLE SOURCE Multiple Source Control mode, enter the RF (source 1) and LO (source
CONTROL
2) frequencies. If the LO frequency is lower than the RF frequency, no
DEFINE BANDS phase inversion is expected by the VNA. The opposite is true if the LO
SOURCE CONFIG frequency is higher than the RF frequency. These determinations may
MULTIPLE be wrong if the DUT is a cascaded multiple conversion device. In that
SOURCE MODE case, determine if the final phase polarity is inverse of what is as-
OFF sumed by the VNA, and set the Source Lock Polarity to Reverse. Fail-
ure to do so may cause the RF source to be erroneously locked at a
STANDBY
5 MHz offset.
ON
MORE
PRESS <ENTER>
TO SELECT

37XXXD OM 8-33
ADAPTER REMOVAL MEASUREMENTS

8-7 ADAPTER REMOVAL Using adapters in VNA measurement applications can introduce com-
plex errors that add to measurement uncertainty. The VNA Adapter
Removal procedure provides for adapter compensation. This on-screen,
menu-driven procedure allows the use of a through-line device or
adapter with different connector types (non-insertables) on either end
to be used for measurement calibration. The electrical effects are sub-
sequently compensated for. The Adapter Removal procedure is de-
scribed below.

NOTE
For purposes of explanation, assume that the adapter to be
used is a length of rigid coax with a type N male connector
MENU APPL
on one end and an SMA male connector on the other end.
Further assume that the Test Port 1 connector is a type N
female and that the Test Port 2 connector is an SMA fe-
APPLICATIONS
male (below).
ADAPTER REMOVAL
SWEPT FREQUENCY
GAIN COMPRESSION
Electrical Length: 170 ps
Type N Male SMA Male
SWEPT POWER (X’) (Y’)
GAIN COMPRESSION
Test Adapter
E/O MEASUREMENT
O/E MEASUREMENT
MERGE CAL FILES
Procedure:
PRESS <ENTER>
TO SELECT
Step 1. Press the Appl key (below) to display the APPLICA-
TIONS menu (top left).

. -

Channels Measurement

MENU CAR1
Display Enhancement

ADAPTER REMOVAL
12-TERM CALS FOR
X AND Y
MUST EXIST IN THE
CURRENT DIREC-
TORY Appl

ELECTRICAL LENGTH
OF THE ADAPTER
+XXX.XXXXX ps
Step 2. Move the cursor to ADAPTER REMOVAL and
REMOVE ADAPTER
press the Enter key.
HELP
PRESS <ENTER> Step 3. Select HELP in the next menu (bottom left) to pro-
TO SELECT duce the step-by-step procedure shown in
Figure 8-29 (next page).

8-34 37XXXD OM
MEASUREMENTS ADAPTER REMOVAL

Step 4. Follow the on-line procedure and connect the

Adapter’s N male connector (X’) to the N female con-
nector on the VNA’s Test Port 1.

Figure 8-29. Adapter Removal Help Screen

37XXXD OM 8-35
ADAPTER REMOVAL MEASUREMENTS

Step 5. Press the Begin Cal key (below).

MENU SR1

SAVE/RECALL Channels
. -

Measurement

FRONT PANEL
AND CAL DATA Display Enhancement

SAVE
RECALL
SET UP OUTPUT
HEADERS
PRESS <ENTER>
TO SELECT Begin Apply
FUNCTION Cal Cal

Step 6. Follow the menu prompts and choose to perform a

full 12-term calibration. Use the Adapter’s SMA
male connector (Y') as Test Port 1 and the VNA’s Test
Port 2 connector as Test Port Y (Figure 8-27).
MENU SR2
Step 7. Press the Save/Recall Menu key (below).
SAVE
FRONT PANEL
SETUP IN
INTERNAL MEMORY Channels
. -

Measurement

FRONT PANEL
SETUP AND Display Enhancement

CAL DATA
ON HARD DISK
FRONT PANEL
SETUP AND
CAL DATA
ON FLOPPY DISK
Save/
Recall
PRESS <ENTER> Menu

TO SELECT

Step 8. Choose SAVE from the displayed menu (top left).

Step 9. Choose the appropriate hard or floppy disk location,

based on individual preference (Menu SR2, bottom
left).

Step 10. When prompted, select CREATE NEW FILE and en-
ter a conventional DOS filename, such as YP-
RIME_Y.CAL. (Store this file in the current direc-
tory.)

Step 11. Now connect the Adapter’s SMA male end to the
VNA’s Test Port 2 SMA female connector.

8-36 37XXXD OM
MEASUREMENTS ADAPTER REMOVAL

Step 12. Press the Begin Cal key again.

MENU CAR1
Step 13. Follow the menu prompts; again choose to perform a
full 12-term calibration. Now use the Adapter’s Type
ADAPTER REMOVAL
N male connector (X’) as Test Port 2. Use the VNA’s
12-TERM CALS FOR Test Port 1 connector as Test Port X.
X AND Y
MUST EXIST IN THE
CURRENT DIREC-
Step 14. Save the calibration as described in Steps 7 and 8,
TORY above. Give this file a unique filename, such as
ELECTRICAL LENGTH
X_XPRIME.CAL. (Store this file in the current direc-
OF THE ADAPTER tory.)
+170.0000 ps
Step 15. Press the Appl key and chose ADAPTER RE-
REMOVE ADAPTER
MOVAL to return to Menu CAR1 (top left).
HELP
PRESS <ENTER> Step 16. Enter the electrical length of the Adapter (170 ps for
TO SELECT the test adapter) in the appropriate place in Menu
CAR1.

NOTE
Electrical length does not have to be precise.
MENU CAR2 Plus or minus 5 ps is adequate for this pro-
cedure.
ADAPTER REMOVAL
Step 17. Move the cursor to REMOVE ADAPTER, and press
READ CAL FILE OF
THE X TEST PORT the Enter key.
FROM HARD DISK
(ADAPTER ON Step 18. Move the cursor to the appropriate READ CAL
PORT 2) FILE OF THE X TEST PORT . . . , depending on
READ CAL FILE OF where the calibration data is stored (hard or floppy
THE X TEST PORT disk). Press the Enter key.
FROM FLOPPY DISK
(ADAPTER ON
PORT 2)
NOTE
At this juncture, the “X” calibration file is
PRESS <ENTER>
marked for reading, but not actually read.
TO SELECT
Both the “X” and “Y” files will be read into
PRESS <CLEAR>
the VNA together in the next step.
TO ABORT

37XXXD OM 8-37
ADAPTER REMOVAL MEASUREMENTS

Step 19. Move the cursor to the appropriate READ CAL

FILE OF THE Y TEST PORT. . . choice (top left)
MENU CAR3 and press the Enter key.

Step 20. Observe that the text READING . . . FROM DISK

ADAPTER REMOVAL
appears in the menu area.
READ CAL FILE OF
THE Y TEST PORT Step 21. When the file has finished reading, the procedure is
FROM HARD DISK
(ADAPTER ON
complete and the program returns to the SWEEP
PORT 2) SETUP menu (below).
READ CAL FILE OF
THE Y TEST PORT If the adapter is still connected, the display will
FROM FLOPPY DISK show the S-parameters of the adapter. Any device to
(ADAPTER ON be measured with that same connector configuration
PORT 2) will be measured in an absolute sense.
PRESS <ENTER>
TO SELECT Also, you may wish to store the resulting Adapter
PRESS <CLEAR> Removal calibration for later use.
TO ABORT

MENU SU1

SWEEP SETUP
START
XX.XXXXXXXXX GHz
STOP
XX.XXXXXXXXX GHz
SET CENTER/SPAN
XXX DATA POINT(S)
XX.XXXXXXXXX GHz
STEP SIZE
C.W. MODE ON (OFF)
XX.XXXXXXXXX GHz
MARKER SWEEP
DISCRETE FILL
HOLD BUTTON
FUNCTION
TEST SIGNALS
PRESS <ENTER>
TO SELECT
OR TURN/OFF

8-38 37XXXD OM
MEASUREMENTS GAIN COMPRESSION

8-8 GAIN COMPRESSION There are a number of ways to measure Gain Compression. With a
VNA two approaches are possible: Swept Frequency Gain Compression
(SFGC) and Swept Power Gain Compression (SPGC). The 37XXXD of-
fers a very straightforward approach to each of these measurements.

It is normally desirable to make S-parameter measurements in the

linear operating region of an amplifier and then observe Compression
or amplitude-modulation/phase-modulation (AM/PM) characteristics
by increasing the input power to drive the amplifier into it's nonlinear
region. The characteristics of the amplifier-under-test (AUT) dictate
the operating power levels required for the tests. Prior to making
measurements on a specific amplifier the user must determine the de-
sired operating levels. A recommended level for linear region operation
is:

P = PG – Gain – 15dB (PGC=Nominal l dB compression of the AUT)

The actual level is constrained by the power available from the VNA
and the built in 70 dB step attenuator. (In the case of the 37XXXD,
available power is easily supplemented by the addition of an external
amplifier/attenuator combination.) Power input to Port 2 must also be
considered as the test should not drive the VNA into nonlinear opera-
tion. Typical specifications show 0.1dB compression at a VNA receiver
input level of –10 dBm. The receiver signal is derived through a 13 dB
coupler from the Port 2 signal. The 37XXXD also includes a 40 dB step
attenuator in this path that enables linear operation with input sig-
nals as high as 30 dBm (1 watt), the maximum signal level that should
be input to Port 2. Higher power levels can be measured by attenuat-
ing the signal prior to Port 2.

A typical power configuration example that will also be used through-

out this section is included in Figure 8-28. A 10 dB pad has been used
at both Port 1 and Port 2 to minimize mismatch errors.

Power and VNAs It is necessary to measure absolute power to deter-

mine Gain Compression. VNA receiver channels are
typically down-converters and do not measure
power directly. They are, however, linear so that an
accurate power calibration at one level will result in
a receiver channel that will accurately indicate
power in dBm.

The 37XXXD firmware supports calibration with

the following power meters: Anritsu ML2430A,
HP437B, HP438, and Gigatronics 8541C/8542C.
These meters differ in the way they handle sensor
efficiency (consult the power meter manual), and
the 37XXXD does expect to receive corrected data
from the power meter.

37XXXD OM 8-39
GAIN COMPRESSION MEASUREMENTS

Gain Compression Power Configuration

Amplifier Specifications:
Frequency Range: 8 to 12 GHz
Gain 25 dB nominal
1 dB Gain Compres- 12 dBm minimum
sion (GC)

Gain Compression Formula: P = 12 – 25 – 15 = –28 dBm

37369C Setup
Default Power: –7 dBm
Power Control: –8 dB
Port 1 Attenuator: 0 dB
External Port 1 Attenuator: 10 dB
The above setting result in
Port 1 Power: –25 dBm
Maximum Amplifier Output @15 dBm
Coupler Loss: @13 dB
Port 2 Attenuator: 10 dB

Figure 8-28. Gain Compression Measurement Plan (Example)

Pstop

Input Output Phase

Power Power

Pstart
Input Power Input Power
Time

Figure 8-29. Power In (Pi) versus Power Out (Po) Graphical Example

8-40 37XXXD OM
MEASUREMENTS GAIN COMPRESSION

Errors can result if the proper correction factor is

not applied by the power meter, as shown below.

Correction Factor (%) Error (dB)

1 0.043
3 0.128
5 0.212
10 0.414

It is desirable to set the power control at or near the

minimum (this varies from −20 to−30 dB, depending
upon model) when establishing P, as this provides
the full ALC range for a power sweep.

The vector error correction available in VNAs is de-

pendent upon ratioed S-parameter measurements.
Power is measured using a single, unratioed chan-
nel; therefore, when power is being measured error
correction is turned off.

Swept Power Gain A swept power test is done at a CW frequency. The

Compression input power will be increased with a step sweep
starting at Pstart and ending at Pstop. The step in-
crement is also user defined. This lets you observe
the conventional Po vs. Pi presentation or a display
of Phase vs. Pi. Figure 8-29 (previous page) illus-
trates this process. The SPGC process is imple-
mented in the 37XXXD by following the procedure
that begins on page 8-43. The test setup required for
this procedure is shown in Figure 8-30 (page 8-42).

Swept Frequency Gain This is a manual procedure that provides a normal-

Compression ized amplifier response as a function of frequency at
Pstart and manually increases the input power
while observing the decrease in gain as the ampli-
fier goes into compression. This lets you easily ob-
serve the most critical compression frequency of a
broadband amplifier. The SFGC process is imple-
mented in the 37XXXD by following the procedure
that begins on page 8-52. The test setup required for
this procedure is shown in Figure 8-30 (following
page).

37XXXD OM 8-41
GAIN COMPRESSION MEASUREMENTS

Figure 8-30. Test Setup for Gain Compression Measurements

8-42 37XXXD OM
MEASUREMENTS GAIN COMPRESSION

Swept Power Gain Compression Measurement

The following procedures describes the Swept Power Gain Compres-
sion Measurement.

Step 1. Press the Appl key.

MENU APPL
ADAPTER REMOVAL
. -

SWEPT FREQUENCY Channels Measurement

GAIN COMPRESSION
SWEPT POWER Display Enhancement

GAIN COMPRESSION
E/O MEASUREMENTS
O/E MEASUREMENTS
MERGE CAL FILES
PRESS <ENTER>
Appl
TO SELECT

NOTE
A 12-Term S-parameter calibration is not
necessary for gain compression calibration
and measurement. If such a calibration is in
MENU GC2
place, it will be disabled during the gain
SWEPT POWER compression operation.
GAIN COMPRESSION
SET FREQUENCIES Step 2. Move cursor to SWEPT POWER GAIN COM-
P START PRESSION and press Enter, when menu Appl (top
–25.00 dBm left) appears.
P STOP
–5.00 dBm Step 3. When menu GC2 (bottom left) appears, follow the di-
STEP SIZE rections that appear adjacent to the menu, as de-
1.00 dB scribed below:
ATTENUATION
GAIN COMPRESSION
Move cursor to SET FREQUENCIES, press Enter
POINT (MAX REF) and select from 1 to 10 frequencies.
1.00 dB
NOMINAL OFFSET Enter the frequency value, press a terminator key (e.g.
0.00 dB GHz/103/ms/m), then Enter to add the frequency to the
MORE list.
PRESS <ENTER>
TO SELECT NOTE
The number of frequencies and step size,
that is entered later, directly affect the time
required for Linear Power Calibration, in a
later step.

37XXXD OM 8-43
GAIN COMPRESSION MEASUREMENTS

Move cursor to FINISHED, RETURN TO POWER

MENU GC_DF2 SWEEP SETUP and press Enter.
SWEPT POWER
FREQUENCIES Move cursor to P START (previous page), set per
power plan (Figure 8-28), and press Enter.
INPUT A FREQ,
PRESS <ENTER>
TO INSERT Move cursor to P STOP (previous page), set per
SWEPT POWER power plan, and press Enter.
FREQUENCY
12.000000000 GHz Move cursor to STEP SIZE (previous page), enter a
CLEAR FREQ NUMBER value, and press Enter.
1
CLEAR ALL The 1 dB default value is reasonable. This value,
FINISHED, RETURN TO
along with the number of frequencies entered in a
POWER SWEEP SETUP previous step, directly affect the time required for Lin-
PRESS <ENTER>
ear Power Calibration, in a later step.
TO SELECT
Move cursor to ATTENUATION (previous page) and
press Enter. Set power values (bottom left) per power
plan. Move cursor to PREVIOUS MENU and press
Enter when finished.

Move cursor to GAIN COMPRESSION (previous

MENU GC_DF2 page), enter the desired value (1 dB is typical), and
press Enter.
SWEPT POWER
GAIN COMPRESSION
Move cursor to NOMINAL OFFSET (previous
PORT 1 ATTN
0*10 dB (0 - 70)
page), enter the value of any external device(s) con-
nected between the front panel Input and Output con-
PORT 2 ATTN
2*10 dB (0 - 40)
nectors. Press Enter when done. In the example use
-10 dB.
PREVIOUS MENU
PRESS <ENTER> A setting of 0.00 dB is normal when no external de-
TO SELECT
vices are connected.

Move cursor to MORE (previous page) and press En-

ter to proceed to the next menu (GC3) (next page).

8-44 37XXXD OM
MEASUREMENTS GAIN COMPRESSION

Step 4. Move the cursor to CALIBRATE FOR LINEARITY,

MENU GC3 press Enter, and follow the instructions that (1) ap-
pear adjacent to the follow-on menu and (2) are de-
SWEPT POWER
GAIN COMPRESSION scribed below.
CALIBRATE
FOR LINEARITY
If a calibration already exists, the menu choice will indi-
([NO] CAL EXIST) cate CAL EXIST in blue letters.
LINEARITY ON [OFF]
CORRECTION NOTE
CALIBRATE
This step is not required for a successful
RECEIVER gain compression measurement; however,
([NO] CAL EXISTS) linearizing the power from Port 1 (which is
S21 OPTIONS what this step does) provides increased ac-
([NOT] STORED) curacy.
AUT TEST TYPES
Prepare the power meter as described in the
GAIN COMPRESSION
following instructions:
AM/PM
MULTIPLE FREQ a. Preset, zero, and calibrate the power meter.
GAIN COMPRESSION
RETURN TO SWEPT b. Set power meter offset, if required.
FREQUENCY MODE
PREVIOUS MENU c. Connect the power meter to the dedicated GPIB
interface and the power sensor to the test port.

d. Select <START LINEAR POWER CALIBRA-

TION>.

Connect the power sensor to Test Port 1.

With START LINEAR POWER CALIBRATION

highlighted (bottom left), press Enter to begin the cal-
ibration.
MENU GC_SU8A
Step 5. Observe LINEARITY CORRECTION choice (top
CALIBRATE FOR
LINEAR POWER left). If a linearity correction has been performed, it
FORWARD
will indicate ON in blue letters.
DIRECTION ONLY
Step 6. Move cursor to CALIBRATE RECEIVER and fol-
START LINEAR
low the instructions, as follows:
POWER CALIBRATION
PREVIOUS MENU
Connect a through line between Test Port 1 and Test
PRESS <ENTER> Port 2. Be sure to include all components that are
TO SELECT
part of the measurement path.

37XXXD OM 8-45
GAIN COMPRESSION MEASUREMENTS

Wait until one complete sweep has completed, then

MENU GC3 press Enter to store the calibration.
SWEPT POWER
GAIN COMPRESSION
NOTE
It is likely that the trace will be off screen at
CALIBRATE
FOR LINEARITY
the bottom of the display. If so, press Autos-
([NO] CAL EXIST) cale to obtain a discernable trace. If this
trace shows vertical instability, then do the
LINEARITY ON [OFF]
CORRECTION following:
CALIBRATE
RECEIVER 1. Press Video IF BW and select REDUCED
([NO] CAL EXISTS) (100 Hz) from the menu.
S21 OPTIONS
([NOT] STORED) 2. Press Avg/Smooth Menu and select AVER-
AUT TEST TYPES AGING 100 MEAS. PER POINT from the
GAIN COMPRESSION
menu.
AM/PM
3. Press Average to turn averaging on.
MULTIPLE FREQ
GAIN COMPRESSION
Step 7. Press Appl to return to the gain compression menu
RETURN TO SWEPT set, and follow the prompts to return to Menu GC3.
FREQUENCY MODE
Repeat Step 6.
PREVIOUS MENU
Step 8. Move the cursor to S21 OPTIONS (top left), select
NORMALIZE S21 in the next menu (not shown),
then NORMALIZE S21 again (bottom left); then
press Enter and follow the menu instructions:
MENU GC_NORM
NORMALIZE S21 Remove the through line and connect the ampli-
CONNECT AUT fier-under-test (AUT) between Port 1 and Port 2.
AND APPLY BIAS .
WAIT FOR ONE Apply bias to the AUT.
COMPLETE SWEEP
BEFORE STORING Wait until one complete sweep has completed, then
PRESS <ENTER> press Enter to store the normalization measurement.
TO STORE
PRESS <CLEAR> Step 9. Move the cursor to the desired test and press Enter.
TO ABORT The steps that follow presume that gain compression
has been selected.

8-46 37XXXD OM
MEASUREMENTS GAIN COMPRESSION

Step 10. Observe that the SWEPT POWER SETUP menu and
MENU SU3A the dual-trace display resembles that shown below.
SWEPT POWER
SETUP
SWEPT POWER
FREQUENCY
9.000000000 GHz
P START
–25.00 dBm
P STOP
–5.00 dBm
STEP SIZE
1.00 dB
POWER SWEEP ON

HOLD BUTTON
FUNCTION
MULTIPLE FREQ
GAIN COMPRESSION
RETURN TO SWEPT
FREQUENCY MODE
PRESS <ENTER>
TO SELECT
OR TURN ON/OFF

MENU M7
SEARCH Step 11. Press Readout Marker (below) for a display of gain
VALUE compression at the marker frequency.
–1.000dB
REFERENCE
MAXIMUM VALUE
DREF MARKER
. -

0 dB Channels Measurement

VALUE AT REFERENCE
–0.000 dB Display Enhancement

SEARCH LEFT
SEARCH RIGHT
–9.56 dBm
SEARCH MRKR VALUES
CH1: 13.753dBm
CH2: Readout
Marker
CH3: –1.000 dB
CH4:
TRACKING ON
MARKER READOUT Step 12. Observe the readout marker values from the dis-
FUNCTIONS played menu (left).

37XXXD OM 8-47
GAIN COMPRESSION MEASUREMENTS

Step 13. Press Setup Menu (below) to return to SWEPT

MENU SU3A POWER SETUP menu.
SWEPT POWER
SETUP
SWEPT POWER . -

Channels Measurement

FREQUENCY
9.000000000 GHz Display Enhancement

P START
–25.00 dBm
P STOP
–5.00 dBm
Setup

STEP SIZE Menu

1.00 dB
POWER SWEEP ON

Step 14. Move cursor to SWEPT POWER FREQUENCY

HOLD BUTTON
(top left), select the next frequency from the SET
FUNCTION
FREQUENCY list, and press Enter.
MULTIPLE FREQ
GAIN COMPRESSION
Step 15. Repeat Steps 11 through 13.
RETURN TO SWEPT
FREQUENCY MODE Step 16. Repeat Steps 14 and 15 until all frequencies have
PRESS <ENTER> been observed.
TO SELECT
OR TURN ON/OFF Step 17. To examine the phase performance for a swept input
power, AM/PM should be selected. This leads to the
two channel display (Channels 2 and 4) with Chan-
nel 4 active shown below. The sweep mode is contin-
uous to facilitate tuning, Markers are set to the
DReference mode on the active channel.
MENU
CH2 - 21
REFERENCE PLANE
0.0000mm
MARKER 1
-25.00 dBm
MARKER TO MAX
MARKER TO MIN
D(1-2)
-15.44 dBm
4.17°
MARKER READOUT
FUNCTIONS

8-48 37XXXD OM
MEASUREMENTS GAIN COMPRESSION

Step 18. Repeat Steps 13 through 16 until all desired fre-

MENU GC4 quencies have been observed.
MULTIPLE FREQUENCY Step 19. If desired, a multiple frequency gain compression
GAIN COMPRESSION
display can be obtained by selecting MULTIPLE
TEST AUT FREQUENCY GAIN COMPRESSION (left) and
TEXT DATA pressing Enter.
TO HARD DISK
TEXT DATA Step 20. Move cursor to TEST AUT (top left) and press Enter.
TO FLOPPY DISK
SWEPT POWER Step 21. Observe that the Multiple Frequency Gain Compres-
GAIN COMPRESSION sion display resembles that shown below.
RETURN TO SWEPT
FREQUENCY MODE
PRESS <ENTER>
TO SELECT

Step 22. Make desired selection from menu to copy text and
data to hard or floppy disk (top left).

Step 23. The power linearity calibration, receiver calibration,

and DUT normalized data exists in volatile memory.
At this time, the data can be stored for subsequent
recall using the SAVE function.

NOTE
It is prudent to save this calibration; other-
wise, it will be destroyed if you move any-
where in the program except between this
calibration and the S-parameters menu.

37XXXD OM 8-49
GAIN COMPRESSION MEASUREMENTS

Step 24. Move cursor to RETURN TO SWEPT FRE-

QUENCY MODE and press Enter to exit the gain
compression mode.

NOTE
When exiting the Swept Frequency Power Gain Compres-
sion mode, the DUT should be turned off, unless the user
has selected the proper attenuator settings for standard
swept frequency (S-parameter) operation.

8-50 37XXXD OM
MEASUREMENTS GAIN COMPRESSION

Swept Frequency Gain Compression Measurement

The following procedure describes the Swept Frequency Gain Com-
pression Measurement.

Preliminary: Refer to Figure 8-28 and set the Power Control and Port
1 Attenuator for the values shown in the power plan for the example,
or in the power plan constructed for measurement of a test device.
MENU APPL
These power plan values should also be used in the S-parameter cali-
ADAPTER REMOVAL bration that may be performed using the Begin Cal key and menus.
SWEPT FREQUENCY
GAIN COMPRESSION Step 1. Press the Appl key.
SWEPT POWER
GAIN COMPRESSION
E/O MEASUREMENTS
. -

O/E MEASUREMENTS Channels Measurement

MERGE CAL FILES

PRESS <ENTER> Display Enhancement

TO SELECT

Appl

MENU GC3
Step 2. Move cursor to SWEPT FREQUENCY GAIN
SWEPT FREQUENCY COMPRESSION and press Enter, when menu
GAIN COMPRESSION
APPL (top left) appears.
NOMINAL OFFSET
0.00 dB Step 3. When menu GC3 (bottom left) appears, follow the di-
CALIBRATE rections that appear adjacent to the menu, as de-
FOR FLATNESS scribed below:
(N0 CAL EXISTS)
FLATNESS OFF Move the cursor to NOMINAL OFFSET, enter the
CORRECTION
value of any external device(s) connected between
CALIBRATE the front panel Input and Output connectors. Press
RECEIVER
the Enter key when done.
[NO CAL EXISTS)
NORMALIZE S21
Optionally, move the cursor to CALIBRATE FOR
(NOT STORED)
FLATNESS, press Enter and follow the instruction
GAIN COMPRESSION
menu as described on the following page.
POINT (0 dB REF)
1.00 dB
If a calibration already exists, the menu choice will
TEST AUT
indicate CAL EXIST in blue letters.
EXIT APPLICATION

37XXXD OM 8-51
GAIN COMPRESSION MEASUREMENTS

NOTE
This step is not required for a successful
gain compression measurement; however,
calibrating the power from Port 1 (which is
what this step does) provides increased ac-
curacy.

Prepare the power meter as described in the follow-

ing instructions:

a. Preset, zero, and calibrate the power meter.

b. Set power meter offset, if required.

c. Connect the power meter to the dedicated GPIB

interface and the power sensor to the test port.

d. Select <START LINEAR POWER CALIBRA-

TION>.

Connect the power sensor to Port 1.

Set the number of power calibration points.

If, in a previous menu, data points had been set to

401 points, entering 8 provides 50 power points
MENU GC_SU8A (every 8th point); entering 4 provides 100 power
CALIBRATE FOR point (every 4th point)s, and entering 1 provides 401
FLAT PORT POWER power points. The VNA interpolates between power
FORWARD calibration frequencies.
DIRECTION ONLY
101 POINTS Enter a POWER TARGET value.
MEASURE 1 PWR
POINT EVERY Make this value the same as resulting Port 1 power
1 POINT(S)
value shown in Figure 8-28 (page 8-40). –25 dBm for
POWER TARGET the example.
–25.00 dBm
START FLAT With START FLAT POWER CALIBRATION high-
POWER CALIBRATION lighted (bottom left), press Enter to begin the calibra-
PREVIOUS MENU tion.
PRESS <ENTER>
TO SELECT NOTE
TURN KNOW TO When the above calibration finishes, the
CHANGE NUMBER source power will have been accurately cali-
OF POINTS brated. In the next step, this power calibra-
tion will be transferred via the through line
to the receiver.

8-52 37XXXD OM
MEASUREMENTS GAIN COMPRESSION

Step 4. Move cursor to CALIBRATE RECEIVER and fol-

MENU GC1 low the instructions, as follows:
SWEPT FREQUENCY
GAIN COMPRESSION
Connect a through line between Test Port 1 and Test
Port 2. Be sure to include all components that are
NOMINAL OFFSET
-10.00 dB
part of the measurement path.
CALIBRATE
FOR FLATNESS
Wait until one complete sweep has completed, then
(]CAL EXISTS) press Enter to store the calibration.
FLATNESS
CORRECTION NOTE
AT -25.00 dBm It is likely that the trace will be off screen at
CALIBRATE the bottom of the display. If so, press
RECEIVER Autoscale to obtain a discernable trace. If
(CAL EXISTS) this trace shows vertical instability,
NORMALIZE S21
([NOT]STORED) · Press Video IF BW and select REDUCED
GAIN COMPRESSION (100 Hz) from the menu
POINT (0 dB REF)
1.00 dB · Press Avg/Smooth Menu and select AV-
TEST AUT ERAGING 100 MEAS. PER POINT
EXIT APPLICATION from the menu

· Press Average to turn averaging on

Step 5. Press Appl to return to the gain compression menu,

and follow the prompts to return to Menu GC1. Re-
peat Step 4.
MENU GC_SU8A
RECEIVER Step 6. Move the cursor to NORMALIZE S21 (top left),
CALIBRATION press Enter, and follow the menu instructions (bot-
CONNECT tom left):
THROUGHLINE
BETWEEN Remove the through line and connect the amplifier-
TEST PORTS under-test (AUT) between Port 1 and Port 2.
INCLUDE ANY
COMPONENTS WHICH Apply bias to the AUT.
ARE PART OF THE
MEASUREMENT PATH
Wait until one complete sweep has completed, then
WAIT FOR ONE
COMPLETE SWEEP
press Enter to store the normalization measurement.
BEFORE STORING
PRESS <ENTER>
Step 7. Move the cursor to TEST AUT (top left) and press
TO STORE Enter.
PRESS <CLEAR>
TO ABORT

37XXXD OM 8-53
GAIN COMPRESSION MEASUREMENTS

Step 8. Observe that the dual-trace display resembles that

shown below.

Step 9. Note that the top display (Channel 1), shows the
power out from the AUT. For the example test device,
the nominal output power is about 0 dBm with the
input at –25 dBm. To better evaluate this device,
turn on markers and set the Channel 1 reference to
0 dB, as shown below.

8-54 37XXXD OM
MEASUREMENTS GAIN COMPRESSION

Step 10. Press the Ch1 key (top left) to make channel 1 active.

Step 11. Press the Marker Menu key (middle left), turn on
marker 1, and position it to a desired point on the
. -

Channels Measurement

trace (below). (Press the Readout Marker key for fre-

Display Enhancement
quency and amplitude information.)

Ch 1

. -

Channels Measurement

Display Enhancement

Marker
Menu

Step 12. Press the Appl key to return to the TEST SIGNALS
menu (Menu SU2, next page).

. -

Channels Measurement

Display Enhancement

Appl

37XXXD OM 8-55
GAIN COMPRESSION MEASUREMENTS

Step 13. Press the Setup Menu key (top left), select POWER
CONTROL (bottom left) and increase the value
while observing compression in channel 3 (S21).
. -

Channels Measurement

NOTE
Display Enhancement
The rotary knob or the keypad can be used
to set the POWER CONTROL value. In us-
ing the rotary knob, the displayed value
does not change in real time with movement
of the control. Change occurs after the rota-
Setup
tion of the knob is complete.
Menu

Step 14. Press the Marker Menu key again, and observe the
displayed Ch 3 trace and the marker values from the
displayed menu (below).

MENU SU2 MENU SU2

TEST SIGNALS MARKER 1
POWER CONTROL ALL DISPLAYED
5.47 dB CHANNELS
0 TO –20.00 dB CH 1 - S11 USER
PORT 1 ATTN 10.000000 GHz
0 * 10 dB (0 – 70) 12.06 dBm
PORT 1 POWER CH 2 - S12
–1.53 dBm CH 3 - S21
PORT 2 ATTN 10.000000 GHz
0 * 10 dB (0 –40) -0.992 dB
CALIBRATE CH 4 - S21
FOR FLATNESS MARKER TO MAX
(CAL EXISTS) MARKER TO MIN
FLATNESS MARKER READOUT
CORRECTION FUNCTIONS
AT –11.53 dBm
PRESS <ENTER>
PORT 2 POWER TO SELECT
0.00 dBm
EXIT APPLICATION
PRESS <ENTER>
TO SELECT
OR TURN ON/OFF Step 15. The power linearity calibration, receiver calibration,
and DUT normalized data exists in volatile memory.
At this time, the data can be stored for subsequent
recall using the SAVE function.

NOTE
It is prudent to save this calibration; other-
wise, it will be destroyed if you move any-
where in the program except between this
calibration and the S-parameters menu.

8-56 37XXXD OM
MEASUREMENTS GAIN COMPRESSION

Step 16. Move cursor to RETURN TO SWEPT

MENU SU2 FREQUENCY MODE and press Enter to exit the
gain compression mode.
TEST SIGNALS
POWER CONTROL Step 17. Press the Appl key to return to the TEST SIGNALS
5.47 dB
menu (left), highlight EXIT APPLICATION and
0 TO –20.00 dB
press Enter to exit the gain compression measure-
PORT 1 ATTN ment area.
0 * 10 dB (0 – 70)
PORT 1 POWER CAUTION
–1.53 dBm
When exiting the Swept Frequency Power Gain Compres-
PORT 2 ATTN
0 * 10 dB (0 –40) sion mode, the DUT should be turned off, unless the user
has selected the proper attenuator settings for standard
CALIBRATE
FOR FLATNESS swept frequency (S-parameter) operation.
(CAL EXISTS)
FLATNESS
CORRECTION
AT –11.53 dBm
PORT 2 POWER
0.00 dBm
EXIT APPLICATION
PRESS <ENTER>
TO SELECT
OR TURN ON/OFF

37XXXD OM 8-57
RECEIVER MODE MEASUREMENTS

8-9 RECEIVER MODE The Receiver Mode provides three distinct modes of operation:

q Sweep/Source Lock mode, phase locks the internal source

q Synthesizer/Tracking mode, lets the receiver track a 67XXB,
68XXXB, or 69XXXA synthesizer
q Set-On mode, lets the VNA operate as a tuned receiver

Source Lock Mode The Source Lock mode enables the 37XXXD to phase lock to its inter-
nal source.

Tracking Mode In the Tracking Mode, the 37XXXD steers its second local oscillator
frequency and phase signal so as to phase-lock itself to the reference
signal. Typically the source is a synthesizer, since it must be accurate
to better than ±10 MHz for the 37XXXD to achieve lock. Due to the in-
herent resolution of the 37XXXD, frequency resolution is limited to
1 kHz intervals. If Option 3 is installed frequency resolution is limited
to 1 Hz.

For receive frequencies outside the indicated test set range, the use of
external mixers and a synthesizer is required. Dual Source Control is
required in this case.

Set-on Mode In the Set-On mode, the source lock circuitry of the 37XXXD is com-
pletely by-passed. Reference signals are no longer necessary for system
operation. This allows all of the 37XXXD samplers to operate over
their full dynamic range. As a result, the source and the 37XXXD must
be locked to the same 10 MHz time base, otherwise coherent detection
is not possible. Only synthesized sources may be used in this mode.
Dual source control is required.

Due to the inherent resolution of the 37XXXD local oscillators, fre-

quency resolution is limited to 1 kHz intervals over the frequency
range of the VNA. If Option 3 is installed, frequency resolution is lim-
ited to 1 Hz.

8-58 37XXXD OM
MEASUREMENTS RECEIVER MODE

Receiver Mode Block The block diagram shown in Figure 8-31 shows how the system is con-
Diagram figured for all of the possible modes of operation. With the switches set
as shown, the system operates in the Set-On mode. LO1 and LO2 are
pre-set to allow only a prescribed signal to be detected by the synchro-
nous detector. With the switch in SOURCE LOCK position the system
is operating in the internal source-lock mode. With the switch in the
TRACKING position, the system is in the synthesizer tracking mode.

Receiver Mode Menus The menus associated with the Receiver Mode are described in the al-
phabetical listing (Appendix A) under their call sign: RCV1, RCV2,
RCV3, etc.

Procedure, Receiver Mode A detailed procedure for operation using the Receiver Mode option is
Operation provided in the following pages.

SOURCE LOCK ANALOG LOCK SIGNAL

2.5 MHz

TRACKING
SET ON
SAMPLER 10 MHz
RF MEASURE SYNCHRONOUS
REAL
CIRCUIT DETECTOR
IMAGINARY

10 MHz
(SYNTHESIZER) TRACKING
3RD L.O. 4TH L.O.
2.42 MHz 80 KHz
SOURCE LOCK/
1ST L.O. 2ND L.O. SET ON

10 MHz 10 MHz
PLL PLL

10 MHz 10 MHz

Figure 8-31. 37XXXD Phase Lock Modes

37XXXD OM 8-59
RECEIVER MODE MEASUREMENTS

Operating Procedure, Receiver Mode

The three operational modes that comprise the Receiver Mode can be
MENU OPTNS set up as follows:
OPTIONS
TRIGGERS
Step 1. Press the Option Menu key (below).
REAR PANEL
OUTPUT
DIAGNOSTICS
. -

MULTIPLE Channels Measurement

SOURCE
CONTROL
Display Enhancement

RECEIVER MODE
SOURCE CONFIG
RF ON/OFF
DURING RETRACE
PRESS <ENTER>
TO SELECT
Option
Menu

Step 2. When menu OPTNS (top left) appears, select RE-

MENU RCV1
CEIVER MODE.
RECEIVER MODE
STANDARD Step 3. When menu RCV1 (middle left) appears, select ei-
ther STANDARD (Step 4) or USER DEFINED
USER DEFINED
(Step 5). Your selection depends on the application.
SOURCE CONFIG
SPUR REDUCTION Step 4. The Standard mode uses the Source Lock mode for
NORMAL/OFF operation with the internal source. The user has no
PRESS <ENTER> control over selections within the Standard Mode.
TO SELECT
Because entering the standard mode from the User
Defined Mode erases the current stored calibration
data, a warning menu (RCV3, bottom left) appears
MENU RCV3 when STANDARD is selected. Press Enter to enter
STANDARD
into the Standard mode or press Clear to abort.
RECEIVER MODE
WARNING:
NOTE
Spur Reduction: Normal/OFF: Spur Reduction Off may be
CONTINUING selected when making non-ratioed measurements or using
MAY INVALIDATE the Set-On Receiver mode. Under those measurement con-
CURRENT ditions, it may reduce high level noise. In normal
SETUP AND
CALIBRATION
S-parameter measurement mode, Spur Reduction should
remain “Normal,” as the noise level is not affected.
PRESS <ENTER>
TO CONTINUE
PRESS <CLEAR>
TO ABORT

8-60 37XXXD OM
MEASUREMENTS RECEIVER MODE

Step 5. Selecting USER DEFINED RECEIVER MODE in

MENU RCV1 menu RCV1 brings menu RCV 2 to the screen. When
menu RCV 2 appears, the last mode selected is high-
RECEIVER MODE
lighted in red. The default selection is SOURCE
STANDARD
LOCK.
USER DEFINED
SOURCE CONFIG Source Lock, Tracking or Set-On modes can be se-
SPUR REDUCTION lected from this menu. When a mode is selected, in-
NORMAL/OFF formation about that mode is displayed on the
PRESS <ENTER> screen. This information describes the mode and the
TO SELECT capabilities required of the RF source.

MENU RCV2
USER DEFINED
RECEIVER MODE
SOURCE LOCK
TRACKING
SET ON
PRESS ENTER
TO SELECT

MENU RCV4
USER DEFINED
RECEIVER MODE
WARNING:

CONTINUING
MAY INVALIDATE
CURRENT
SETUP AND
CALIBRATION
PRESS <ENTER>
TO CONTINUE
PRESS <CLEAR>
TO ABORT

37XXXD OM 8-61
EMBEDDING/ DE-EMBEDDING MEASUREMENTS

8-10 EMBEDDING/ In many S-parameter measurements, the measurement of the DUT

DE-EMBEDDING may also include other set-up components that affect the overall mea-
surement result. For example, there may be a test fixture required be-
tween the normal coaxial calibration planes and the DUT. It may be
useful to see the DUT performance with a certain matching network in
place or it may be desired to see what the subsystem performance
would be when the given DUT is inserted, etc. The classical purposes
of embedding and de-embedding are shown in Figure 8-32, below.

De-embed
Fixture DUT Fixture DUT

Calibration Planes Effective New Measurement Planes

Embed
Matching Matching
DUT DUT
Network Network

Effective New Measurement Planes Calibration Planes

Figure 8-32. Classic Embedding and De-embedding

One way of handling these chores within the instrument itself is

through embedding and de-embedding: the process of mathematically
adding or subtracting networks to or from the measured result. This
feature is available in all 37XXXD VNAs as shown in the following
paragraphs.

8-62 37XXXD OM
MEASUREMENTS EMBEDDING/ DE-EMBEDDING

Embedding Embedding of Matching Networks, or other components, can be done

as follows:
MENU DE8
Step 1. Press the APPL menu key on the instrument’s front
EMBED/DE-EMBED panel.
S2P FILE
PORT 1/PORT 2
METHOD
EMBED/DE-EMBED
. -

SWAP PORTS OFF Channels Measurement

OF S2P DATA
APPLY NETWORK
S2P FILE DATA TO Display Enhancement

CAL FILE DATA

PRESS <ENTER>
TO SELECT
OR CHANGE

MENU DE9 Appl

EMBED/DE-EMBED
S2P FILE
ORIGINAL CAL FILE Step 2. Select the VNA test port where the network will be
TO APPLY NETWORK
embedded, then select the EMBED function under
READ CAL FILE the EMBED/DE-EMBED S2P FILE menu (menu
FROM HARD DISK
DE8, top left).
READ CAL FILE
FROM FLOPPY DISK Step 3. Select APPLY NETWORK S2P FILE TO CAL
PRESS <ENTER> FILE DATA. This will take you to the
TO SELECT EMBED/DE-EMBED S2P FILE menu (menu DE9,
PRESS <CLEAR> middle left).
TO ABORT
Step 4. Select where to read the calibration file from.

The calibration file to be embedded can be stored on

MENU DE9A either the floppy or the hard disk. Once the calibra-
tion file is recalled, the EMBED/DE-EMBED S2P
EMBED/DE-EMBED
S2P FILE FILE menu (menu DE9A, bottom left) is displayed.
S2P FILE DATA Step 5. Menu DE9A allows you to choose the .S2P file to be
OF THE NETWORK
embedded from either the floppy or hard disk. Select
READ S2P FILE the .S2P file to read.
FROM HARD DISK
READ S2P FILE Once the .S2P file is selected, it is embedded with
FROM FLOPPY DISK
the calibration file. To embed additional files, save
PRESS <ENTER> the calibration along with the embeded .S2P file onto
TO SELECT
the hard disk or floppy disk for later recall upon the
PRESS <CLEAR> next embedding operation.
TO ABORT

37XXXD OM 8-63
EMBEDDING/ DE-EMBEDDING MEASUREMENTS

De-embedding De-embedding is a common technique for removing test fixture effects

from a calibration, generally of microstrip or on-wafer devices. This is
performed by the following:
MENU DE8
EMBED/DE-EMBED Step 1. Press the APPL key on the instrument’s front panel.
S2P FILE
PORT 1/PORT 2
METHOD
EMBED/DE-EMBED
. -

SWAP PORTS OFF Channels Measurement

OF S2P DATA
APPLY NETWORK
S2P FILE DATA TO Display Enhancement

CAL FILE DATA

PRESS <ENTER>
TO SELECT
OR CHANGE

MENU DE9 Appl

EMBED/DE-EMBED
S2P FILE
ORIGINAL CAL FILE Step 2. Select the VNA test port where the network will be
TO APPLY NETWORK embedded, then select the DE-EMBED function un-
READ CAL FILE der the EMBED/DE-EMBED S2P FILE menu (menu
FROM HARD DISK DE8, top left).
READ CAL FILE
FROM FLOPPY DISK Step 3. Select APPLY NETWORK S2P FILE TO CAL
PRESS <ENTER> FILE DATA. This will take you to the
TO SELECT EMBED/DE-EMBED S2P FILE menu (menu DE9,
PRESS <CLEAR> middle left).
TO ABORT
Step 4. Select where to read the calibration file from.

The calibration file to be embedded can be stored on

MENU DE9A either the floppy or the hard disk. Once the calibra-
tion file is recalled, the EMBED/DE-EMBED S2P
EMBED/DE-EMBED
S2P FILE FILE menu (menu DE9A, bottom left) is displayed.
S2P FILE DATA Step 5. Menu DE9A allows you to choose the .S2P file to be
OF THE NETWORK
de-embedded from either the floppy or hard disk. Se-
READ S2P FILE lect the .S2P file to read.
FROM HARD DISK
READ S2P FILE Once the .S2P file is selected, it is de-embedded with
FROM FLOPPY DISK
the calibration file. To de-embed additional files, save
PRESS <ENTER> the calibration along with the de-embeded .S2P file
TO SELECT
onto the hard disk or floppy disk for later recall upon
PRESS <CLEAR> the next de-embedding operation.
TO ABORT

8-64 37XXXD OM
MEASUREMENTS OPTICAL APPLICATION

8-11 OPTICAL Optical applications are divided into two measurement categories,
APPLICATION electro-optical (E/O) and opto-electrical (O/E).

E/O measurements can be performed with the 372XXD/373XXD series

VNAs using the built-in E/O measurement application. On-screen
menu-driven procedures guide you through the set-up and calibration
required for E/O measurements of optical modulators such as band-
width, flatness, and group delay.

O/E measurements of a photo-diode or photo-receiver can be per-

formed with the 372XXD/373XXD series VNAs by using the built-in
O/E measurement application. On-screen-menu-driven procedures
guide you through the set-up and calibration required for O/E mea-
surements such as bandwidth, flatness, and group delay.

E/O Measurements Optical modulators modulate digital data signals over a light wave
carrier and send it over fiber optic networks. Since a VNA is only capa-
ble of generating and measuring electrical signals, a laser source is re-
quired to provide optical input to the modulator DUT and a photo-di-
ode/photo-receiver is required to convert the modulator output back to
an electrical signal that can be measured by the VNA. The MN4765A
(65 GHz characterized photo-diode) is used with the following proce-
dure. The equipment set up for an E/O measurement is shown in Fig-
ure 8-33, below.

372XXD/373XXD

. -

Channels Measurement

Display Enhancement

Port 1 Port 2

RF In RF Out

Fiber Fiber
Laser Modulator Photo-diode
Source
Figure 8-33. E/O Measurement Setup

The E/O measurement application de-embeds the response of the

photo-diode/photo-receiver transfer standard from a 12-term calibra-
tion to enable measurements of a modulator DUT.

37XXXD OM 8-65
OPTICAL APPLICATION MEASUREMENTS

E/O Measurement Procedure

The following procedure will explain ways of using the MN4765A
photo-diode to make an E/O measurement of a modulator DUT. The
same set up can be used for a user characterized photo-diode as well.

Step 1. Set-up the measurement as shown in Figure 8-33.

Step 2. Perform a 12-term calibration on the VNA over the

MENU APPL
frequency range of interest with reference planes at
the DUT input and the photo-diode output. (Refer to
APPLICATIONS
section 7-4 for the 12-term calibration steps.)
ADAPTER REMOVAL
SWEPT FREQUENCY Step 3. Press Save/Recall to save the calibration and set-up
GAIN COMPRESSION to the hard disk or a floppy disk.
SWEPT POWER
GAIN COMPRESSION Step 4. Press the Appl key to display the applications menu
E/O MEASUREMENT
(left).
O/E MEASUREMENT Step 5. Move the cursor to E/O MEASUREMENT and
MERGE CAL FILES press Enter.
PRESS <ENTER>
TO SELECT This brings up menu DE1 (left) and the step-by-step
procedure, Figure 8-34, for making the measure-
ment.

MENU DE1
E/O MEASUREMENT
MEASURE E/O DUT
MODULATOR
DE-EMBED TRANSFER
FUNCTION OF A
GENERIC NETWORK
PRESS <ENTER>
TO SELECT

Figure 8-34. E/O Measurement Menu

Step 6. Select MEASURE E/O DUT (MODULATOR) and

press Enter.

8-66 37XXXD OM
MEASUREMENTS OPTICAL APPLICATION

This brings up menu DE3 (top left).

MENU DE3
Step 7. Select READ CAL FILE FROM HARD DISK or
E/O MEASUREMENT
READ CAL FILE FROM FLOPPY DISK depend-
ORIGINAL CAL FILE ing on where the 12-term calibration was saved in
WITH FWD TRANS
CORRECTION
Step 3.
READ CAL FILE
FROM HARD DISK
This bring up menu DSK2 (middle left).
READ CAL FILE
FROM FLOPPY DISK
Step 8. Select the calibration file and press Enter.
PRESS <ENTER> Step 9. Read the S2P file (characterization data file) for the
TO SELECT
photo-diode transfer standard. This will de-embed
PRESS <CLEAR> the photo-diode for an E/O measurement (menu
TO ABORT
DE3A, bottom left).

NOTE
If an S2P file is not available, it can be gen-
MENU DSK2
erated from the characterization data pro-
vided by the vendor. This is explained on
SELECT FILE page 8-74.
TO READ
TESTCAL CAL The VNA now displays the measurement of the mod-
ulator DUT. An example measurement of a 40 Gb/s
PREVIOUS MENU NRZ modulator is shown in Figure 8-35 below.
PRESS <ENTER>
TO SELECT
PRESS <1> FOR
PREVIOUS PAGE
PRESS <2> FOR
NEXT PAGE

MENU DE3A
E/O MEASUREMENT
TRANSFER STANDARD
TO BE DE-EMBEDDED
(DETECTOR STD)
READ S2P FILE
FROM HARD DISK
READ S2P FILE
FROM FLOPPY DISK
PRESS <ENTER>
TO SELECT
PRESS <CLEAR>
TO ABORT Figure 8-35. E/O Measurement of a 40 Gb/s NRZ Modulator

37XXXD OM 8-67
OPTICAL APPLICATION MEASUREMENTS

Step 10. Press Save/Recall and save this de-embedded cali-

bration to the hard disk or the floppy disk.

NOTE
Observe that the S11 graph displays the electrical return
loss (port match) of the modulator and S21 represents the
transfer function of the modulator. The bandwidth of the
modulator can be calculated from the S21 data by setting
the delta markers or using the marker search function to
find the 3 dB change in magnitude. The 3 dB bandwidth of
the modulator measured in this example is 24 GHz.

O/E Measurements Photo-diodes/photo-receivers convert an optical signal into an electri-

cal signal. Bandwidth measurements can be made on a photo-di-
ode/photo-receiver by stimulating its input with a modulated optical
source and measuring the output signal. A laser and a characterized
modulator are required, in addition to the VNA, to make O/E measure-
ments. See Figure 8-36, below, for the equipment set-up.

372XXD/373XXD

. -

Channels Measurement

Display Enhancement

Port 1 Port 2

RF In RF Out

Fiber Fiber
Laser Modulator Photo-diode
Source
Figure 8-36. O/E Measurement Set-up

The O/E measurement application de-embeds the response of the mod-

ulator transfer standard from a 12-term calibration to enable mea-
surements of the photo-diode DUT.

O/E Measurement Procedure

The following procedure will explain ways of obtaining characteriza-
tion data for a modulator and then how to use it to make an O/E mea-
surement of a photo-receiver.

8-68 37XXXD OM
MEASUREMENTS OPTICAL APPLICATION

Step 1. Set-up the measurement as shown in Figure 8-36,

previous page.

Step 2. Perform a 12-term calibration on the VNA over the

frequency range of interest with reference planes at
the modulator input and the photo-receiver DUT
output. (Refer to section 7-4 for the 12-term calibra-
tion steps.)

Step 3. Press Save/Recall to save the calibration and set up

to the hard disk or a floppy disk.

Step 4. Press the Appl key to display the applications menu

MENU APPL (left).

APPLICATIONS
Step 5. Move the cursor to O/E MEASUREMENT and
press Enter.
ADAPTER REMOVAL
SWEPT FREQUENCY This brings up menu DE2 (bottom left) and the
GAIN COMPRESSION
step-by-step procedure for making the measurement
SWEPT POWER as shown in Figure 8-37, below.
GAIN COMPRESSION
E/O MEASUREMENT
O/E MEASUREMENT
MERGE CAL FILES
PRESS <ENTER>
TO SELECT

MENU DE2
O/E MEASUREMENT
DE-EMBED O/E S2P
(DETECTOR STD)
GENERATE E/O S2P
CHARACTERIZATION
(MODULATOR)
MEASURE O/E DUT
(DETECTOR)
PRESS <ENTER>
TO SELECT
PRESS <CLEAR>
TO ABORT

Figure 8-37. O/E Measurement Menu

37XXXD OM 8-69
OPTICAL APPLICATION MEASUREMENTS

The measurement of the photo-receiver DUT relies

MENU DE5 on a characterized modulator standard. If a charac-
terized modulator is not available, an S2P file can be
DE-EMBED O/E S2P
created by using a characterized photo-diode and
ORIGINAL CAL FILE de-embedding it from the 12-term calibration per-
WITH FWD TRANS
CORRECTION
formed in Step 2.
READ CAL FILE
FROM HARD DISK
Step 6. With the measurement set-up as shown in Fig-
ure 8-36, select DE-EMBED O/E S2P (DETEC-
READ CAL FILE
FROM FLOPPY DISK
TOR STD) (menu DE2, previous page).
PRESS <ENTER>
TO SELECT
This brings up menu DE5 (top left).
PRESS <CLEAR>
TO ABORT
Step 7. Select READ CAL FILE FROM HARD DISK or
READ CAL FILE FROM FLOPPY DISK depend-
ing on where the 12-term calibration was saved in
Step 3.

This brings up menu DSK2 (middle left).

MENU DSK2
SELECT FILE
Step 8. Select the calibration file and press Enter.
TO READ
Step 9. Select READ THE S2P FILE FROM HARD DISK
TESTCAL CAL
or READ THE S2P FILE FROM FLOPPY DISK
(menu DE5A, bottom left). This is the characteriza-
PREVIOUS MENU tion data file for the photo-diode transfer standard.
PRESS <ENTER> This will de-embed the photo-diode for an O/E mea-
TO SELECT surement.
PRESS <1> FOR
PREVIOUS PAGE Step 10. Press the Appl key, select O/E MEASUREMENT.
PRESS <2> FOR Again, then press Enter. This recalls menu DE2 (left).
NEXT PAGE

MENU DE5A
DE-EMBED E/O S2P
TRANSFER STANDARD
TO BE DE-EMBEDDED
(DETECTOR STD)
READ S2P FILE
FROM HARD DISK
READ S2P FILE
FROM FLOPPY DISK
PRESS <ENTER>
TO SELECT
PRESS <CLEAR>
TO ABORT

8-70 37XXXD OM
MEASUREMENTS OPTICAL APPLICATION

Step 11. Move the cursor to GENERATE E/O S2P CHAR-

ACTERIZATION (MODULATOR STD) (menu
MENU DE2 DE2, left) and press Enter. This will generate an S2P
characterization file for the modulator.
O/E MEASUREMENT
DE-EMBED O/E S2P Once the modulator characterization S2P file has
(DETECTOR STD)
been generated, it can be used as a transfer standard
GENERATE E/O S2P for the photo-receiver DUT measurement.
CHARACTERIZATION
(MODULATOR)
After the characterization file has been saved, the
MEASURE O/E DUT
VNA returns to the O/E measurement menu shown
(DETECTOR)
in Figure 8-38, below.
PRESS <ENTER>
TO SELECT
PRESS <CLEAR>
TO ABORT

Figure 8-38. O/E Measurement Menu

Step 12. Press the Appl key, select O/E MEASUREMENT.

Again, then press Enter. This recalls menu DE2 (top
left).

37XXXD OM 8-71
OPTICAL APPLICATION MEASUREMENTS

Step 13. Move the cursor to MEASURE O/E DUT (DETEC-

TOR) (menu DE2, top left) and press Enter.
MENU DE2
This brings up menu DE7 (middle left).
O/E MEASUREMENT
DE-EMBED O/E S2P Step 14. Select READ CAL FILE FROM HARD DISK or
(DETECTOR STD)
READ CAL FILE FROM FLOPPY DISK depend-
GENERATE E/O S2P ing on where the original 12-term calibration was
CHARACTERIZATION
(MODULATOR) saved in Step 3.
MEASURE O/E DUT
(DETECTOR)
This brings up menu DSK2 (bottom left).
PRESS <ENTER>
TO SELECT
PRESS <CLEAR>
TO ABORT

MENU DE7
O/E MEASUREMENT
ORIGINAL CAL FILE
WITH FWD TRANS
CORRECTION
READ CAL FILE
FROM HARD DISK
READ CAL FILE
FROM FLOPPY DISK
PRESS <ENTER>
TO SELECT
PRESS <CLEAR>
TO ABORT

MENU DSK2
SELECT FILE
TO READ
TESTCAL CAL

PREVIOUS MENU
PRESS <ENTER>
TO SELECT
PRESS <1> FOR
PREVIOUS PAGE
PRESS <2> FOR
NEXT PAGE

8-72 37XXXD OM
MEASUREMENTS OPTICAL APPLICATION

Step 15. Read the S2P file for the modulator that was gener-
ated in Step 10 from the hard drive or floppy drive
MENU DE7A (menu DE7A, left). This will de-embed the modulator
response from the set-up for an O/E measurement.
O/E MEASUREMENT
TRANSFER STANDARD NOTE
TO BE DE-EMBEDDED
If an S2P file is not available, it can be gen-
(MODULATOR)
erated from the characterization data pro-
READ S2P FILE
vided by the vendor. This is explained on
FROM HARD DISK
page 8-74.
READ S2P FILE
FROM FLOPPY DISK
An O/E measurement of a photo-receiver is shown in Figure 8-39 be-
PRESS <ENTER>
low. The S21 measurement represents the transfer function of the
TO SELECT
photo-receiver and S22 represents the electrical return loss.
PRESS <CLEAR>
TO ABORT

Figure 8-39. O/E Measurement of a Photo-receiver

37XXXD OM 8-73
OPTICAL APPLICATION MEASUREMENTS

Creating a Characterization This section guides you through the process of creating an S2P file
(*.S2P) File for E/O and O/E from vendor supplied characterization data. The S2P file can then be
Measurements read into the VNA for de-embedding the response of the transfer stan-
dard used for either a modulator or photo-diode.

Microsoft Excel is the recommended application for creating and stor-

ing the S2P file containing the characterization data. A sample S2P
file is available for reference (contact Anritsu MMD Customer Service
for a copy).

The file format is the standard S2P format that includes the four S-pa-
rameters (see the section below for details on the S2P format). The
transfer function data supplied by the vendor should be copied into the
columns designated for S21 data and the frequencies into the FREQ
column. Once the data has been entered, the file should be saved as an
S2P file (as shown in Figure 8-40 below).

Figure 8-40. Saving the S2P File in Excel

S2P File Format

S2P data files are ASCII text files in which data appears line by line,
one line per data point, in increasing order of frequency. Each line of
data consists of a frequency value and one or more pairs of values for
the magnitude and phase of each S-parameter at that frequency.

Values are separated by one or more spaces, tabs, or commands. Com-

ments are preceded by an exclamation mark (!). Comments can appear
on separate lines or after the data on any line.

8-74 37XXXD OM
MEASUREMENTS OPTICAL APPLICATION

The standard S2P file format consists of:

q Option Lines
q Data Lines
q Comments

The option line contains the specifications of the data, for example, the
frequency units, the normalizing impedance, and the measured param-
eter (S, Y, Z, etc.).

The option line format is:

# <frequency unit> <parameter> <format> <Rn>

where:

# The delimiter that tells the program you are specifying these param-
eters
frequency unit The set of units desired (GHz, MHz, KHz, Hz)
parameter The parameter desired (S, Y or Z for S1P components; S, Y, Z, G, or
H for S2P components; S for S3P or S4P components)
format The format desired (DB for dB-angle, MA for magnitude-angle, or RI
for real-imaginary)
Rn The reference resistance in ohms, where n is a positive number of
ohms (the real impedance to which the parameters are normalized)

The default option line for a component data files is:

# GHZ S MA R 50

For Y-parameters with real imaginary data, the option line header will
change to:

# GHz Y RI R 50

The data lines contain the data of interest. Data for all four S-parame-
ters will be listed on a single line for a particular frequency point. The
format is:

37XXXD OM 8-75
OPTICAL APPLICATION MEASUREMENTS

Frequency S11 S21 S12 S22

Data Line Examples:

Frequency S11 (magnitude) S11 (angle)
0.040000000 1.426492E-04 18.642
0.139900000 2.840961E-03 22.262

Finally, the comment lines begin with an exclamation point “ ! .” They

can be inserted at any point in an S2P file and are ignored by the ap-
plication program. An S2P file example appears in Figure 8-41 below.

! Anritsu Company
! DATE 04/11/2002 13:16 PAGE 1
! Photo-diode receiver characterization – NRZ-40G
# GHz S MA R 50.00
!FREQ S11M S11A S21M S21A S12M S12A S22M S22A
0.040000000 1.426492E-04 18.642 3.008963E-04 87.040 1.618370E-04 27.317 2.708149E-04 129.056
0.139900000 2.840961E-03 22.262 6.185992E-03 -114.026 2.539190E-03 125.940 5.977178E-03 -7.691
0.239800000 3.072268E-03 97.851 7.423908E-03 109.019 3.147963E-03 -88.205 7.634960E-03 -75.071
0.339700000 1.887820E-02 81.836 3.814256E-02 -135.753 1.632677E-02 -27.669 3.348942E-02 117.818
0.439600000 2.173782E-02 142.412 4.595363E-02 72.973 1.962434E-02 107.429 3.946349E-02 40.979
0.539500000 2.634556E-02 -62.971 5.206176E-02 31.589 2.257828E-02 -22.787 4.638838E-02 70.663
0.639400000 3.060178E-02 -103.325 6.416773E-02 120.463 2.732290E-02 5.656 5.685493E-02 -124.645

Figure 8-41. S2P File Example

8-76 37XXXD OM
 Chapter 9
Time Domain

Table of Contents

9-1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3

9-2 TIME DOMAIN MEASUREMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
9-3 OPERATING TIME DOMAIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
9-4 WINDOWING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11
9-5 GATING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12
9-6 ANTI-GATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14
9-7 EXAMPLES, GATING AND ANTI-GATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14
9-8 TIME DOMAIN MENUS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14
 Chapter 9
Time Domain
9-1 INTRODUCTION This chapter describes the optional Time Domain feature.

9-2 TIME DOMAIN The Option 2, Time Domain feature provides a useful measurement
MEASUREMENTS tool for determining the location of impedance discontinuities. Some
typical applications are identifying and analyzing circuit elements, iso-
lating and analyzing a desired response, locating faults in cables, and
measuring antennas.

The relationship between the frequency-domain response and the

time-domain response of a network is described mathematically by the
Fourier transform.

The 37XXXD makes measurements in the frequency domain then cal-

culates the inverse Fourier transform to give the time-domain re-
sponse. The time-domain response is displayed as a function of time
(or distance). This computational technique benefits from the wide dy-
namic range and the error correction of the frequency-domain data.

Let us examine the time-domain capabilities. Two measurement

modes are available: lowpass and bandpass.

We use the lowpass mode with devices that have a dc or low-frequency

response. In the lowpass mode two responses to the device-under-test
(DUT) are available: impulse or step response.

The frequencies used for the test must be harmonically related (inte-
ger multiples) to the start frequency. The simplest way to calculate
this relationship is to divide the highest frequency in the calibration
by 1600 (the default number-of-points available); this is the start fre-
quency. For example, if the highest frequency is 40 GHz, the calculated
start frequency is 0.025 GHz (40/1600). If the highest frequency is 65
GHz, the calculated start frequency is 0.040625 GHz (65/1600).

37XXXD OM 9-3
TIME DOMAIN MEASUREMENTS TIME DOMAIN

The lowpass impulse response displays the location of discontinuities

as well as information useful in determining the impedance (R, L, or
C) of each discontinuity.

The impulse response is a peak that goes positive for R>Z0 and nega-
tive for R<Z0. The height of the response is equal to the reflection coef-
ficient:

R - Z0
r=
R + Z0
C IR C U IT E L E M E N T S
L o w p a s s Im p u ls e R e s p o n s e The impulse response for a shunt capacitance is a negative-then-
positive peak and for a series inductance is a positive-then-negative
IM P E D A N C E S 1 1 R E A L peak (Figure 9-1).
R > Z O
An example of using an impulse response is a circuit impedance analy-
R < Z O sis. With an impulse response we can observe the circuit response of a
passive device, such as a multi-element step attenuator (Figure 9-2),
S H U N T C
and make final, realtime adjustments during the test.
S E R IE S L
S T E P A T T E N U A T O R

Figure 9-1. Lowpass Impulse

Response 0C 0 H . 0 1 0 0 - S p 1 s 1 d i y

S 1 1 F O R W A R D R E F L E C T IO N L P w /G
M 3 5A 6 1 R . 2 8 K . 9 2 E 0 9 R 1 m 1 p U s
L IN E A R M A G . R E F = 5 .0 0 0 m U 7 .0 0 0 m U /D IV

MM AA RR KK EE RR TT OO MM IA N X
1
2 4 1 6 5 5 . 6 . 3 2 6 4 3 m p Us
6
3 3 1 7 5 5 . 0 . 4 2 1 0 9 m p Us

3 2
5 4 2 99 .3 5 . 92 3 9 6 m p U s
4

5 1 1 9 1 5 . 6 . 5 2 3 4 1 m p Us

6 1 2 5 7 2 . 5 . 5 3 1 4 4 m p Us

0 .0 0 0 p s 7 0 0 .0 0 0 p s

Figure 9-2. Example of Lowpass Impulse Response

In the above example, the connectors at each end have been gated out
(page 9-12), which lets you better observe the internal circuit response.
Each displayed marker has been manually set to the peak of the re-
sponse at each adjustable circuit element. In this way, the data display
lets you make the adjustment in realtime, while the marker menu
shows the magnitude of the response at each marker.

9-4 37XXXD OM
TIME DOMAIN TIME DOMAIN MEASUREMENTS

The lowpass step response displays the location of discontinuities as

well as information useful in determining the impedance (R, L, or C) of
each discontinuity. If you are familiar with time-domain reflectometry
(TDR) you may feel more comfortable with step response, as the dis-
plays are similar.

The lowpass step response for a resistive impedance is a positive level

shift for R>Z0 and a negative level shift for R<Z0. The height of the re-
sponse is equal to the reflection coefficient

R - Z0
r=
R + Z0
C IR C U IT E L E M E N T S
L o w p a s s S te p R e s p o n s e The step response for a shunt capacitance is a negative peak, and for a
IM P E D A N C E S 1 1 R E A L series inductance it is a positive peak (Figure 9-3).
R > Z O An example of using the lowpass step response is cable-fault location.
R < Z O
In the frequency domain a cable with a fault exhibits a much worse
S H U N T C
C A B L E O P E N
S E R IE S L

Figure 9-3. Lowpass Step 3

Response
1

0 .0 0 0 m m 4 0 .0 0 0 c m

Figure 9-4. Example of Lowpass Step Response

match than a good cable. Using lowpass step response, both the loca-
tion of the discontinuity and the information about its type are avail-
able (Figure 9-4).

In the above example, the dip in the display shows the shunt-
capacitive response caused by a crimp in the cable. The response at the
end of the cable shows the step-up that is typical of an open (Figure
9-3, left).

The 37XXXD bandpass mode gives the response of the DUT to an

RF-burst stimulus. Two types of response are available: impulse and
phasor-impulse. An advantage of the bandpass mode is that any fre-
quency range can be used. Use this mode with devices that do not have
a dc or low-frequency path.

37XXXD OM 9-5
TIME DOMAIN MEASUREMENTS TIME DOMAIN

Use the bandpass-impulse response to show the location of a disconti-

nuity in time or distance, as indicated by changes in its magnitude.
Unlike the lowpass mode, no information as to the type of the disconti-
nuity is available. A typical use for this mode is to measure de-
vices—such as, filters, waveguide, high-pass networks, bandpass net-
works—where a low-frequency response is not available.

The bandpass-impulse response for various impedance discontinuities

is shown in Figure 9-5. As we can see, no information about the type of
discontinuity is available.

An example of using the bandpass-impulse response, is the pulse

height, ringing, and pulse envelope of a bandpass filter (Figure
9-6).Use the phasor-impulse response with bandpass response to de-
C IR C U IT E L E M E N T S termine the type of an isolated impedance discontinuity.
B a n d p a s s Im p u ls e R e s p o n s e
S 2 1 F O R W A R D T R A N S M IS S IO N S 2 1 F O R W A R D T R A N S M IS S IO N B P w /G
IM P E D A N C E S 1 1 L O G M A G N IT U D E L O G M A G . R E F = 2 0 .0 0 0 d B 2 0 .0 0 0 d B /D IV L O G M A G . R E F = 3 0 .0 0 0 d B 1 0 .0 0 0 d B /D IV
R > Z O

R < Z O

S H U N T C

S E R IE S L

Figure 9-5. Bandpass Impulse

Response 0 .5 0 0 0 G H z 4 .0 0 0 0 0 .5 0 0 0 G H z 4 .0 0 0 0

Figure 9-6. Example of Bandpass-Impulse Response

After the bandpass-impulse response has been isolated, the phasor-im-

pulse response for a resistive-impedance-level change is a peak that
goes positive (R>Z0) for the real part of S11 and negative for R<Z0. The
imaginary part remains relatively constant. In each case the peak is
proportional to the reflection coefficient. The phasor-impulse response
for a shunt capacitance is a negative-going peak in the imaginary part
of S11. For a series inductance, it is a positive going peak (Figure 9-7).

9-6 37XXXD OM
TIME DOMAIN TIME DOMAIN MEASUREMENTS

1 0 c m 5 c m 1 0 c m

5 0 9 2 0 9 5 0 9

R E A L S
1 1
L O W P A S S
R E S P O N S E

R E A L S
1 1
L O W P A S S
R E S P O N S E

M A G N IT U D E S
1 1
B A N D P A S S
R E S P O N S E

Figure 9-7. Complex Impedances

Next, let us look at a complex circuit. A resistive impedance change
R<Z0 and a shunt capacitance and series inductance. These impedance
C IR C U IT E L E M E N T S changes are shown in the time domain for the lowpass-impulse re-
B a n d p a s s -P h a s o r Im p u ls e R e s p o n s e sponse, lowpass-step response, and bandpass-impulse response (Figure
IM P E D A N C E R E A L S IM A G IN A R Y S
9-8).
1 1 1 1

R > Z O
R < Z O
The 37XXXD processes bandpass-impulse-response data to obtain
phasor-impulse response. This becomes most advantageous where both
S H U N T C
a reactive reflection and an impedance change occur at the same loca-
S E R IE S L tion. The real part of the time-domain response shows the location of
impedance level changes, while the imaginary part shows the type of
reactive discontinuity. Phasor-impulse response displays one disconti-
nuity at a time (Figure 9-9).
Figure 9-8. Bandpass Phasor
Response 5 c m 1 0 c m

2 0 9 C 5 0 9
S P A N
M A G N IT U D E B A N D P A S S

IM P U L S E
P H A S O R
R E A L

IM A G IN A R Y

Figure 9-9. Phasor-Impulse Response Data

37XXXD OM 9-7
OPERATING TIME DOMAIN TIME DOMAIN

9-3 OPERATING TIME To operate in the time domain mode, press the Domain key (below). A
DOMAIN domain menu (Figure 9-10) lets you select the frequency- or time-do-
main modes by simple cursor selection. The 37XXXD defaults to the
frequency domain.

Select time or distance for the horizontal axis. The 37XXXD defaults to
time axis.

. -

Channels Measurement

Display Enhancement

Domain

SET NOTE
DIELECTRIC
If you select distance, be sure to set the dielectric constant
CONSTANT
in the Reference Delay menu (Figure 9-11).
AIR
(1.000649)
POLYETHYLENE
(2.26)
TEFLON DOMAIN DOMAIN DOMAIN
(2.10) FREQUENCY FREQUENCY FREQUENCY
MICROPOROUS FREQUENCY FREQUENCY FREQUENCY
TEFLON WITH TIME WITH TIME WITH TIME
(1.69) GATE GATE GATE
OTHER TIME TIME TIME
XXXX.XX LOWPASS MODE LOWPASS MODE LOWPASS MODE
PRESS <ENTER> TIME TIME TIME
TO SELECT BANDPASS BANDPASS BANDPASS MODE
MODE MODE DISPLAY
DISPLAY DISPLAY TIME/DISTANCE
TIME/DISTANCE TIME/DISTANCE SET RANGE
SET RANGE SET RANGE SET GATE
SET GATE SET GATE
Figure 9-11. Reference Delay GATE ON/OFF
GATE ON/OFF GATE ON/OFF
Menu HELP
HELP HELP PRESS <ENTER>
PRESS <ENTER> PRESS <ENTER> TO SELECT
TO SELECT TO SELECT OR SWITCH
OR SWITCH OR SWITCH

Figure 9-10. Domain Menu

9-8 37XXXD OM
TIME DOMAIN OPERATING TIME DOMAIN

Select SET RANGE and use the START/STOP or GATE/SPAN selec-

tions to set the range (Figure 9-12).

DOMAIN LOWPASS TIME BANDPASS TIME

FREQUENCY DOMAIN SETUP DOMAIN SETUP
FREQUENCY START START
WITH TIME XXX.XXX ps XXX.XXX ps
GATE
STOP STOP
TIME XXX.XXX ps XXX.XXX ps
LOWPASS
MODE CENTER CENTER
XXX.XXX ps XXX.XXX ps
TIME
BANDPASS SPAN SPAN
MODE XXX.XXX ps XXX.XXX ps
DISPLAY MARKER RANGE MARKER RANGE
TIME/DISTANCE
RESPONSE PHASOR ON/OFF
SET RANGE IMPULSE/STEP
SET GATE MORE IMPULSE
GATE ON/OFF PRESS <ENTER> HELP - PHASOR
HELP TO SELECT IMPULSE
PRESS <ENTER> MORE
TO SELECT
OR SWITCH

Figure 9-12. Set Range Menu

For the lowpass mode select either IMPULSE or STEP Response and
set the DC term. The 37XXXDdefaults to the IMPULSE Response and
the AUTO EXTRAPOLATE mode for the DC term (Figure 9-13).

NOTE
The bandpass mode displays Bandpass Impulse Response
unless we select Phasor Impulse Response.

37XXXD OM 9-9
OPERATING TIME DOMAIN TIME DOMAIN

LOWPASS TIME SET D.C. TERM BANDPASS TIME

DOMAIN SETUP FOR LOWPASS DOMAIN SETUP
START PROCESSING START
XXX.XXX ps AUTO XXX.XXX ps
STOP EXTRAPOLATE STOP
XXX.XXX ps XXX.XXX ps
LINE
CENTER IMPEDANCE CENTER
XXX.XXX ps XXX.XXX ps
OPEN
SPAN SPAN
SHORT
XXX.XXX ps XXX.XXX ps
OTHER
MARKER RANGE MARKER RANGE
–XXX.XXX #
ABOVE VALUE
RESPONSE REPRESENTS A PHASOR ON/OFF
IMPULSE/STEP IMPULSE
REFLECTION
MORE COEFF. OF HELP-PHASOR
PRESS <ENTER> XX.XXX mU IMPULSE
TO SELECT PREVIOUS MENU MORE
PRESS <ENTER> PRESS <ENTER>
TO SELECT TO SELECT

Figure 9-13. Response Menus

The Marker Range menu allows us to zoom in and display the range
between two selected markers (Figure 9-14).

LOWPASS TIME TIME

DOMAIN SETUP MARKER SWEEP
START START TIME
XXX.XXX ps MARKER ( )
XXX.XXX nS
STOP
XXX.XXX ps STOP TIME
MARKER ( )
CENTER XXX.XXX nS
XXX.XXX ps
RESTORE
SPAN ORIGINAL
XXX.XXX ps RANGE
MARKER RANGE PREVIOUS MENU
RESPONSE USE KEYPAD
IMPULSE/STEP
TO CHOOSE
MORE MARKER (1 - 6)
PRESS <ENTER> OR
TO SELECT PRESS <ENTER>
TO SELECT

Figure 9-14. Marker Range Menus

9-10 37XXXD OM
TIME DOMAIN WINDOWING

9-4 WINDOWING Windowing is a frequency filter that we apply to the frequency-domain

data when we convert it to time-domain data. This filtering rolls off
the abrupt transition at F1 and F2. This effectively produces a time-
domain response with lower sidelobes. Windowing allows a limited de-
gree of control over the pulse shape, trading off ringing (sidelobes) for
pulse width (Figure 9-15).
W IN D O W IN G
F R E Q U E N C Y D O M A IN T IM E D O M A IN
1 -T E R M W IN D O W
We select windowing from the Time Domain Setup menu. Four differ-
ent windows are available: RECTANGLE, NOMINAL, LOW
SIDELOBE, and MIN SIDELOBE. The RECTANGLE option provides
the narrowest pulse width, while the MIN SIDELOBE option provides
F 1 F 2
the least ringing (fewest sidelobes). The 37XXXD defaults to the NOM-
2 -T E R M W IN D O W
INAL option, which is acceptable for most measurements. Windowing
menus are shown in Figure 9-16.
N O T E : W id e r b u t n o r in g in g

LOWPASS TIME LOWPASS TIME SHAPE

Figure 9-15. Windowing DOMAIN SETUP DOMAIN SETUP RECTANGULAR
START SET WINDOW NOMINAL
XXX.XXX ps NOMINAL
LOW SIDELOBE
STOP SET GATE
XXX.XXX ps MIN SIDELOBE
SET D.C. TERM HELP
CENTER XXX.XXX
XXX.XXX ps PRESS <ENTER>
PREVIOUS MENU
SPAN TO SELECT
XXX.XXX ps PRESS <ENTER>
TO SELECT
MARKER RANGE

RESPONSE
IMPULSE/STEP
MORE
PRESS <ENTER>
TO SELECT

Figure 9-16. Window Shape Menus

37XXXD OM 9-11
GATING TIME DOMAIN

9-5 GATING Gating is a time filter that allows for removing unwanted time-domain
responses by gating the desired response. We can view the isolated re-
sponse in both time domain—and in the frequency domain—using the
FREQUENCY WITH TIME GATE selection (Figure 9-17).
G A T IN G
G A T E There are four different gate shapes available: MINIMUM, NOMI-
NAL, WIDE, and MAXIMUM (Figure 9-18). The 37XXXD defaults to
the NOMINAL gate. To specify a different shape simply enter the Gate
menu and select the desired gating shape. The MINIMUM has the
sharpest rolloff and some frequency domain ripple, while MAXIMUM
D IS T A N C E has the least rolloff and best residual ripple. Figures 9-18A through
9-18D, on the next page, show gating shapes.

The combinations of gate/window shapes will be restricted. For the

MINIMUM gate shape, the LOW and MIN SIDELOBE window shape
G A T E A P P L IE D will not be allowed. For the NOMINAL gate shape, the MIN SIDE-
LOBE window will not be allowed. If the user has set the window
Figure 9-17. Gating shape to MIN or LOW SIDELOBE and changes the-gate shape to
MINIMUM, the window will be reset to NOMINAL. If the user has set
the window to MIN SIDELOBE and changes the gate shape to NOMI-
NAL, the window will be reset to LOW SIDELOBE. Gate shapes will
be adjusted in a similar manner.

LOWPASS TIME LOWPASS TIME SELECT GATE

DOMAIN SETUP DOMAIN SETUP SHAPE
START
XXX.XXX ps MINIMUM
SET WINDOW
STOP
XXX.XXX ps NOMINAL
NOMINAL
CENTER
XXX.XXX ps SET GATE
SPAN WIDE
XXX.XXX ps SET DC TERM
MARKER RANGE XXX.XXX MAXIMUM

RESPONSE HELP
IMPULSE/STEP PREVIOUS MENU
PRESS <ENTER>
MORE TO SELECT
PRESS <ENTER>
PRESS <ENTER>
TO SELECT
TO SELECT

Figure 9-18. Gating Menus

9-12 37XXXD OM
TIME DOMAIN GATING

An informational message will be displayed in the data area when the

window or gate shape reset in this way. The message will last two
sweeps and will say:

“GATE SHAPE ADJUSTED” or “WINDOW SHAPE ADJUSTED”

depending on which was changed by the software.

Figure 9-18A. Minimum Gate Shape Figure 9-18B. Nominal Gate Shape

Figure 9-18C. Wide Gate Shape Figure 9-18D. Maximum Gate Shape

37XXXD OM 9-13
ANTI-GATING TIME DOMAIN

9-6 ANTI-GATING Anti-gating is the opposite of gating. Whereby, gating provides for re-
moving all but the desired response, anti-gating displays all but the
desired response. To provide anti-gating, gate in the normal manner,
except use a minus value for the SPAN width.

9-7 EXAMPLES, GATING Examples of anti-gating are shown in Figures 9-19 through 9-24. The
AND ANTI-GATING figures, all captured from an actual VNA display, show a sequence of
measurements using gating and anti-gating to enhance measurement
technique and accuracy. The examples use a dented length of semi-
rigid cable having a connector on one end and a connector-DUT on the
other end, as shown below. The DUT has a smoothly varying 15 dB re-
turn loss.

15 dB
Connector DUT

Dent

9-8 TIME DOMAIN MENUS A flow diagram of the menus associated with the Time Domain Option
is shown in foldout Figure 9-25. The menu choices are described in Ap-
pendix A. They appear in alphabetical order by their call letters: TD1,
TD2, TD2dl, etc.

9-14 37XXXD OM
TIME DOMAIN TIME DOMAIN MENUS

37369A
37369A

MODEL: DATE: 03/27/96 15:10

DEVICE: OPERATOR:

START: 4.000000000 GHz GATE START: ERROR CORR: REFL PORT1

STOP: 40.000000000 GHz GATE STOP: AVERAGING: 1 PT
STEP: 0.090000000 GHz GATE: IF BNDWDTH: 1 KHz
WINDOW:

S11 FORWARDREFLECTION

DOMAIN
LOG MAGNITUDE REF= -40.000 dB 20.000 dB/DIV
FREQUENCY

FREQUENCY
WITH TIME GATE

TIME
LOWPASSMODE

TIME
BANDPASSMODE

SETUP

DISPLAY
TIME/ DISTANCE

SET RANGE

SET GATE

GATE OFF

HELP

PRESS <ENTER>
TO SELECT
4.000000000 GHz 40.000000000 OR SWITCH

Figure 9-19. Frequency Domain Trace of Test Cable—Gating Off

37XXXD OM 9-15
TIME DOMAIN MENUS TIME DOMAIN

37369A

MODEL: DATE: 03/27/96 15:12

DEVICE: OPERATOR:

START: 4.000000000 GHz GATE START: 315.0000 ps ERROR CORR: REFL PORT1
STOP: 40.000000000 GHz GATE STOP: 165.0000 ps AVERAGING: 1 PT
STEP: 0.090000000 GHz GATE: NOMINAL IF BNDWDTH: 1 KHz
WINDOW: NOMINAL

S11 FORWARDREFLECTION BP
CH 1 - S11
REFERENCEPLANE
LOG MAGNITUDE REF= -40.000 dB 20.000 dB/DIV 0.0000 mm

MARKER3
240.0000 ps
Connector interface with -16.260 dB
VNA DUT Interface
Dent
MARKERTO MAX
3 MARKERTO MIN
2

1 1 0.0000 ps
-29.255 dB

2 705.0000 ps
-18.001 dB

MARKERREADOUT
-500.0000 ps 1.5000 ns FUNCTIONS

Figure 9-20. Time Domain Trace of Test Cable—Gating Off

9-16 37XXXD OM
TIME DOMAIN TIME DOMAIN MENUS

37369A

MODEL: DATE: 03/27/96 15:14

DEVICE: OPERATOR:

START: 4.000000000 GHz GATE START: 642.5000 ps ERROR CORR: REFL PORT1
STOP: 40.000000000 GHz GATE STOP: 767.5000 ps AVERAGING: 1 PT
STEP: 0.090000000 GHz GATE: NOMINAL IF BNDWDTH: 1 KHz
WINDOW: NOMINAL

S11 FORWARDREFLECTION BP w/GATE

LOG MAGNITUDE REF= -40.000 dB 20.000 dB/DIV

GATE

START
642.5000 ps
DUT Interface
gated for display
STOP
Dent removed 767.5000 ps
by gating
2
Connector interface with VNA CENTER
removed by gating
705.0000 ps

SPAN
125.0000 ps
Flag
Flag GATE SHAPE
NOMINAL
3
1 GATE ON

SET RANGE
Note that gating is turned on and span is set to cover the
discontinuity (125 ps down line from connection with VNA).
Further note that the gating flags point inward. PRESS <ENTER>
TO SELECT

-500.0000 ps 1.5000 ns

Figure 9-21. Time Domain Trace of Test Cable—Gating On and Positioned Over DUT Interface Discontinuity.

37XXXD OM 9-17
TIME DOMAIN MENUS TIME DOMAIN

37369A

MODEL: DATE: 03/27/96 15:16

DEVICE: OPERATOR:

START: 4.000000000 GHz GATE START: 642.5000 ps ERROR CORR: REFL PORT1
STOP: 40.000000000 GHz GATE STOP: 767.5000 ps AVERAGING: 1 PT
STEP: 0.090000000 GHz GATE: NOMINAL IF BNDWDTH: 1 KHz
WINDOW: NOMINAL

S11 FORWARDREFLECTION FGT

LOG MAGNITUDE REF= 0.000 dB 10.000 dB/DIV

SET SCALING
OR PRESS
<AUTOSCALE>

-LOG MAG-

DUT Interface RESOLUTION

enlarged for evaluation 10.000 dB/DIV

REFERENCEVALUE
0.000 dB

12 3 REFERENCELINE
4

Note that the reference value is 0 dB and the resolution is

10 db per division. These values are optimum for viewing
the smoothly varying return loss characteristics of the DUT
interface - approximately 15 dB

4.000000000 GHz 40.000000000

Figure 9-22. Frequency Domain Trace of DUT

9-18 37XXXD OM
 TIME DOMAIN TIME DOMAIN MENUS

37369A

MODEL: DATE: 03/27/96 15:19

DEVICE: OPERATOR:

START: 4.000000000 GHz GATE START: 315.0000 ps ERROR CORR: REFL PORT1
STOP: 40.000000000 GHz GATE STOP: 165.0000 ps AVERAGING: 1 PT
STEP: 0.090000000 GHz GATE: NOMINAL IF BNDWDTH: 1 KHz
WINDOW: NOMINAL

S11 FORWARDREFLECTION BP w/GATE

LOG MAGNITUDE REF= -87.348 dB 20.000 dB/DIV

GATE

Dent removed 2 START

by anti-gating
Flag
315.0000 ps
1Flag
STOP
165.0000 ps
3
CENTER
240.0000 ps

SPAN
-150.0000 ps

GATE SHAPE
Note that anti-gating is turned on by changing the polarity of NOMINAL
the SPAN to negative and changing its value to cover the dent.
Also, note that the flags point outward. GATE O

SET RANGE

PRESS <ENTER>
TO SELECT

-500.0000 ps 1.5000 ns

Figure 9-23. Time Domain Trace of Test Cable—Gating On and Positioned Over Dent (Cable Fault)
Interface Discontinuity.

37XXXD OM 9-19
TIME DOMAIN MENUS TIME DOMAIN

37369A

MODEL: DATE: 03/27/96 15:23

DEVICE: OPERATOR:

START: 4.000000000 GHz GATE START: 340.0000 ps ERROR CORR: REFL PORT1
STOP: 40.000000000 GHz GATE STOP: 140.0000 ps AVERAGING: 1 PT
STEP: 0.090000000 GHz GATE: NOMINAL IF BNDWDTH: 1 KHz
WINDOW: NOMINAL

S11 FORWARDREFLECTION FGT

LOG MAGNITUDE REF= 0.000 dB 10.000 dB/DIV

SET SCALING
OR PRESS
<AUTOSCALE>

-LOG MAG-

RESOLUTION
10.000 dB/DIV

REFERENCEVALUE
0.000 dB
12 3
REFERENCELINE
4

4.000000000 GHz 40.000000000

Figure 9-24. Frequency Domain Trace of Test Cable—Gating On

9-20 37XXXD OM
TIME DOMAIN MENU FLOWCHART

N O T E 1 N O T E 2 N O T E 3 N O T E 4 N O T E 1 : F o r "D IS P L A Y = "D IS T A N C E " a n d "T IM E , L O W P A S S M O D E ." "

M E N U T D 2 d l M E N U T D 2 tl M E N U T D 2 tb N O T E 2 : F o r "D IS P L A Y = "T IM E " a n d " T IM E , L O W P A S S M O D E .""

M E N U T D 2 d b
L O W P A S S T IM E N O T E 3 : F o r " D IS P L A Y = " D IS T A N C E " a n d " T IM E ,B A N D P A S S M O D E ." " a n d
L O W P A S S D O M A IN S E T U P B A N D P A S S T IM E
D IS T A N C E B A N D P A S S "F R E Q U E N C Y " o r "F R E Q U E N C Y W IT H T IM E G A T E "
D IS T A N C E D O M A IN S E T U P
D IS P L A Y S E T U P S T A R T
D IS P L A Y S E T U P N O T E 4 : F o r " D IS P L A Y = " T IM E " a n d " T IM E ,B A N D P A S S M O D E ." " a n d
X X X .X X X p s S T A R T
S T A R T X X X .X X X p s "F R E Q U E N C Y " o r "F R E Q U E N C Y W IT H T IM E G A T E "
M e a s u re m e n t X X X .X X X m m S T O P S T A R T
X X X .X X X p s X X X .X X X m m S T O P
S T O P X X X .X X X p s
S e tu p D a ta
X X X .X X X m m C E N T E R S T O P
M e n u P o in ts
X X X .X X X p s X X X .X X X m m C E N T E R
C E N T E R X X X .X X X p s
D e v ic e
X X X .X X X m m M A R K E R R A N G E C E N T E R
H o ld D o m a in ID
R E S P O N S E
B X X X .X X X m m S P A N
S P A N X X X .X X X p s
X X X .X X X m m IM P U L S E /S T E P S P A N
X X X .X X X m m
M O R E
M A R K E R R A N G E A
M A R K E R R A N G E B M A R K E R R A N G E A P H A S O R O N /O F F
M E N U T D 1 P R E S S < E N T E R >
R E S P O N S E P H A S O R O N /O F F IM P U L S E
T O S E L E C T M E N U T D 3 b
D O M A IN IM P U L S E /S T E P IM P U L S E H E L P - P H A S O R
M O R E H E L P - P H A S O R IM P U L S E B A N D P A S S T IM E
F R E Q U E N C Y
IM P U L S E D O M A IN S E T U P
F R E Q U E N C Y R E L . V E L O C IT Y M O R E
W IT H T IM E X .X M O R E P R E S S < E N T E R > S E T W IN D O W
T O S E L E C T N O M IN A L
G A T E P R E S S < E N T E R > R E L . V E L O C IT Y
O R T U R N O N /O F F S E T G A T E
T O S E L E C T X .X
T IM E
L O W P A S S M O D E P R E S S < E N T E R > P R E V IO U S M E N U
M E N U T D 3 l
T O S E L E C T
T IM E P R E S S < E N T E R >
O R T U R N O N /O F F
B A N D P A S S M O D E L O W P A S S T IM E T O S E L E C T
D O M A IN S E T U P
-D IS P L A Y -
S E T W IN D O W
T IM E /D IS T A N C E X X X X X X X
S E T R A N G E S E T G A T E
S E T G A T E S E T D .C . T E R M
G A T E O N /O F F X X X X X
X X X X X X X X X X
H E L P M E N U T D 6
P R E V IO U S M E N U
P R E S S < E N T E R >
T O S E L E C T P R E S S < E N T E R > S E T D .C . T E R M
O R S W IT C H T O S E L E C T F O R L O W P A S S
A B P R O C E S S IN G

A U T O
E X T R A P O L A T E
M E N U T D 4 d /t
M E N U T D 7 t M E N U T D 7 d L IN E
IM P E D A N C E
G A T E
T IM E D IS T A N C E O P E N
M A R K E R S W E E P M A R K E R S W E E P S T A R T
S H O R T X X X .X X X x x
S T A R T T IM E S T A R T D IS T M E N U T D 5 w M E N U T D 5 g
M A R K E R () O T H E R S T O P
M A R K E R ()
X X X .X X X n s X X X .X X X X X X .X X X x x
X X .X X X X c m S E T W IN D O W S E T G A T E
A B O V E V A L U E
R E P R E S E N T S A C E N T E R S H A P E S H A P E
S T O P T IM E S T O P D IS T
M A R K E R () R E F L E C T IO N X X X .X X X x x
M A R K E R () R E C T A N G U L A R M IN IM U M
X X X .X X X n s X .X X X X m C O E F F . O F
S P A N
X .X X X p U N O M IN A L N O M IN A L
X X X .X X X x x
R E S T O R E R E S T O R E
O R IG IN A L L O W S ID E L O B E W ID E
O R IG IN A L P R E V IO U S M E N U S E T S H A P E
R A N G E R A N G E X X X X X X X X X M IN S ID E L O B E M A X IM U M
P R E S S < E N T E R >
P R E V IO U S M E N U P R E V IO U S M E N U T O S E L E C T G A T E O N /O F F H E L P H E L P
U S E K E Y P A D U S E K E Y P A D S E T R A N G E P R E S S < E N T E R > P R E S S < E N T E R >
T O C H O O S E T O C H O O S E T O S E L E C T T O S E L E C T
M A R K E R (1 - 6 ) M A R K E R (1 - 6 ) P R E S S < E N T E R >
O R O R T O S E L E C T
P R E S S < E N T E R > P R E S S < E N T E R >
T O S E L E C T T O S E L E C T

Figure 9-25. Time Domain Menu Flow

37XXXD OM 9-21/9-22
 Chapter 10
AutoCal
Table of Contents

10-1 INTRODUCTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3

10-2 DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
10-3 CALIBRATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4
10-4 DEFINITION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4
10-5 PHYSICAL SETUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6
10-6 CHARACTERIZATION FILES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7
10-7 USING AUTOCAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9
10-8 PIN DEPTH SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13
10-9 AUTOCAL MENUS FLOW DIAGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14
 Power Supply

AutoCal

A
U
T
O
C
LE

A
F

L
T

M MH z
40

O -2
D 0G
U Hz
LE
36
58
P
ow

1K
er

K
F
R
IG
O
pe

H
T
ra
te

Calibration Coefficients
Disk

Figure 10-1. AutoCal Module, Power Supply, and Calibration Coefficients Disk
 Chapter 10
AutoCal
10-1 INTRODUCTION This chapter provides a general description of the AutoCal calibrators,
including specifications, setup, and the use of the associated software
and on-line documentation. This series has three models, as shown be-
low. Throughout this manual, the term AutoCal will refer to the series.
Individual models will be referred to by model number. Figure 10-1
shows the AutoCal module and all of its attaching parts.

Model Switch Freq. Range Connector

36581NNF Electronic 40MHz-18 GHz N (Male)-N(Fem)

36581KKF Electronic 40MHz-20 GHz K(Male)-K(Fem)

36582KKF Mechanical 40MHz-40 GHz K(Male)-K(Fem)

10-2 DESCRIPTION The AutoCal module provides an automatic system for fast, repeatable
high-quality calibrations of a Vector Network Analyzer (VNA). The
AutoCal module is connected between the VNA's test ports 1 and 2 to
perform the calibration. Refer to Figure 10-2 for a diagram of the
AutoCal connections.

The electronic AutoCal modules use solid state electronic switches to

exchange the internal calibration standards. Note that these units
have a lower frequency limit (18 and 20 GHz). The mechanical module
uses electro-mechanical actuators to exchange the standards and has
the highest frequency limit, but has a small non-repeatability error.
The mechanical module contains internal standards used to measure
port isolation; the electronic module does NOT contain isolation stan-
dards and requires a manual operation to perform this measurement.

A standard serial RS-232 interface cable is used to connect the

AutoCal module to the 37XXXD. Power is supplied by a connecting ca-
ble from a universal power supply (+5V, +15V, –15V for the electronic
modules; +5V, +24V for the mechanical modules). A power on-off
switch is not provided.

Test Port Cable Converters (Anritsu series 36583) are used during and
after the calibration process to establish the desired test port connec-
tor type and sex.

37XXXD OM 10-3
CALIBRATIONS AUTOCAL

10-3 CALIBRATIONS Four types of calibration can be performed using AutoCal:

One-Port: S11 1-Port and S22 1-Port are 1-port calibrations per-
formed on the indicated port of the VNA and are equivalent to the tra-
ditional Open-Short-Load calibrations.

Full 2-Port: This type is equivalent to the traditional

Open-Short-Load-Thru (OSLT) calibration.

Thru Update: This type is a new form of calibration which is used to

update an existing 12-term calibration in the VNA. This calibration
could have been performed using any method of calibration which
yields 12 terms (LRL, LRM, AutoCal, or OSLT). Due to cable move-
ment and aging, the calibration may have degraded over time. The
Thru Update refreshes the calibration by measuring a Thru connec-
tion and updating the Transmission Tracking and Load Match calibra-
tion coefficients.

Adapter Removal: This calibration measures the characteristics of

male-male or female-female test port cables for subsequent measure-
ment of non-insertable devices. An adapter is required for this calibra-
tion. Adapter Removal requires two calibration procedures in order to
calculate the parameters and electrical length of the adapter.

10-4 DEFINITIONS The following terms are used in explaining the calibration procedure
using the AutoCal module:

Thru: A thru is a connection of the two test ports. Two kinds of thru
connections are defined for the AutoCal calibration: (1) a Calibrator
thru is an internal path through the calibrator. (2) a True thru is a di-
rect cable connection between the test ports, with no intervening con-
nectors. The calibrator thru is not as accurate as a true thru, so the
you have the option during a calibration to use the more accurate
method, if necessary.

Switch Averaging: The mechanical AutoCal module uses electro-me-

chanical switches to select calibration standards. These switches have
a small amount of non-repeatability (typically less than –55 dB). For
most calibrations, this is more than adequate because it is below con-
nector repeatability error. If desired, you can choose to reduce the ef-
fect of this non-repeatability in the mechanical module by using
Switch Averaging, which causes additional calibration measurements.
By setting a Switch Averaging factor larger than 1, switch repeatabil-
ity error will be reduced. The tradeoff is that calibration time will be
proportionally increased.

10-4 37XXXD OM
AUTOCAL DEFINITIONS

Isolation: For certain measurements which require accurate S21 or

S12 readings for very small values of those parameters, an isolation
step is required to characterize the leakage of the VNA and test setup.
The isolation step can be performed automatically as part of a “Full
2-Port” calibration when using the mechanical module. The isolation
step requires a manual operation for the electronic module. In order to
achieve high accuracy for the characterization of the leakage, a high
averaging factor is needed.

VNA Measurement Averaging Factor: This is the number of

measurements taken at a given data point (frequency) and may be
adjusted to meet the measurement requirements. The average of all
the measurements will become the measured data. For example, if 256
averages is selected, each data point is measured 256 times and the
average of these measurements is displayed, then the VNA moves to
the next data point.

VNA Video IF Bandwidth: The bandwidth of the receiver may be

changed to enhance the measurement accuracy or, conversely, to in-
crease the measurement speed. Selecting the minimum IF bandwidth
results in the greatest accuracy for low-signal-level measurements and
the slowest measurement speed. Selecting the maximum IF band-
width results in the greatest measurement speed and reduced accu-
racy on low-signal-level measurements.This can be set by using the
Video IF BW key and selecting the desired IFBW.

Characterization File: Each calibrator module has a file containing

data which characterizes each standard in the calibrator. This file also
contains information (identification number, start and stop frequen-
cies) concerning the capabilities of the calibrator. Each characteriza-
tion file has the extension “.acd.” When modules are changed, you
must install the appropriate new characterization file. This file can be
installed using the Util key (AutoCal Utilities) to recall the character-
ization file from a disk. In addition, each AutoCal module can be
re-characterized using the VNA. A valid 12-term calibration must be
active, which is used to characterize the standards within the module.

37XXXD OM 10-5
PHYSICAL SETUP AUTOCAL

10-5 PHYSICAL SETUP See Figure 10-2 for an illustration of the connections necessary to per-
form an automatic calibration using the AutoCal module. Note that
the connection is very simple. Different power cable connectors are
used with the mechanical modules and the electronic modules to pre-
vent connecting the wrong power supply in error.

There is no on-off switch. When power is connected to the AutoCal

module, the LED labeled POWER should come on immediately. The
second LED, labeled OPERATE, should come on in about five minutes,
after the internal temperature control oven has stabilized. The
internal temperature is held within a 5 oC window.

37XXXD

SERIAL
.
PORT
-

Channels Measurement

Display Enhancement

AUTOCAL
POWER
SUPPLY SERIAL
CABLE

AUTOCAL MODULE 36581KKF

40 MHz - 20 GHz

LEFT RIGHT

Power Operate

AUTOCAL

Figure 10-2. AutoCal Equipment Setup

10-6 37XXXD OM
AUTOCAL CHARACTERIZATION FILES

10-6 CHARACTERIZATION Before performing an AutoCal on a 37XXXD, the Characterization File

FILES for the AutoCal Module has to be loaded. This file may be recalled
from the floppy disk accompanying the Module. It may also be recalled
from one generated using the user's specialized manual calibration.

. - Insert the AutoCal Module Characterization Disk into the floppy drive.
Press the Utility Menu key (left), then select the following menu options,
Channels Measurement

Display Enhancement
in turn: AUTOCAL UTILITIES, RECALL FROM FLOPPY DISK.
Select the file “Lxxxxxx.ACD“.

If a copy of the Characterization File is in the hard-disk, you can recall

it by choosing RECALL FROM HARD DISK instead. Select the
same file “Lxxxxxx.ACD”.
Utility
Menu

NOTE
The “xxxxxx” in the above paragraphs correspond to the
serial number of the AutoCal module.
MENU UTIL
Should you desire to re-characterize the module, which is recom-
SELECT UTILITY
mended every six months of usage, perform the following procedure:
FUNCTION OPTIONS

GPIB ADDRESSES Step 1. Using a 365x or 375x Calibration Kit, perform a

DISPLAY 12-Term calibration over the desired frequency range
INSTRUMENT of characterization, but within the range of the
STATE PARAMS AutoCal module and the VNA.
GENERAL DISK
UTILITIES NOTE
Any calibration method may be used (Stan-
CAL COMPONENT
dard, Offset Short, LRL/LRM, or TRM)
UTILITIES
along with either the Coaxial or Waveguide
AUTOCAL line types.
UTILITIES

COLOR Step 2. Upon completion of the calibration, press the Utility

CONFIGURATION Menu key.
DATA ON (OFF)
DRAWING

BLANKING
FREQUENCY
INFORMATION

SET DATE/TIME

PRESS <ENTER>
TO SELECT
OR TURN ON/OFF

37XXXD OM 10-7
CHARACTERIZATION FILES AUTOCAL

Step 3. Select AUTOCAL UTILITIES then AUTOCAL

CHARACTERIZATION, from the next menu to ap-
pear.
AUTOCAL
CHARACTERIZATION
AUTOCAL
SWITCH AVERAGING UTILITIES
XXXX
AUTOCAL
PORT CONFIG CHARACTERIZATION
L=1, R=2
R=1, L=2 SAVE
TO HARD DISK
NUMBER OF
AVERAGES SAVE
REFLECTION TO FLOPPY DISK
XXXX
RECALL
LOAD FROM HARD DISK
XXXX
RECALL
THRU FROM FLOPPY DISK
XXXX
PRESS <ENTER>
ISOLATION TO SELECT
XXXX

START AUTOCAL
CHARACTERIZATION Step 4. Select an appropriate amount of SWITCH AVER-
PRESS <ENTER>
AGING (recommend 4 for the electronic modules,
TO SELECT and 16 for the electro-mechanical modules).
OR SWITCH
Step 5. Ensure the Module Configuration is correct (L=1,
R=2 or R=1, L=2).

Step 6. If desired, you may change the amount of averaging

during characterization of each standard, by enter-
ing the NUMBER OF AVERAGES.

Step 7. Ensure the Autocal Module is connected between the

Test Ports, power is applied, and the serial cable is
connected to the VNA. Verify that both the “Power”
and “Operate” LED’s are ON.

Step 8. Select START AUTOCAL CHARACTERIZATION.

The VNA will proceed through a characterization of
the attached Autocal Module.

Step 9. When the calibration is complete, press the Save/Re-

call key.

Step 10. Select SAVE then FRONT PANEL SETUP AND

CAL DATA TO HARD DISK (middle and bottom
left).

10-8 37XXXD OM
AUTOCAL USING AUTOCAL

Step 11. Select a file or CREATE NEW FILE and press En-
ter.

If you are creating a new file, enter the filename and

select DONE when finished.

10-7 USING AUTOCAL An example procedure for using the AutoCal module is given below.
This example assumes a frequency range of 40 MHz to 40 GHz, a
power level of -7 dBm, and use of a Series 36582 AutoCal module.

Step 1. Press the Begin Cal key (top left).

Step 2. Select AUTOCAL from the displayed menu (C11,

left).
. -

Channels Measurement

Display Enhancement

Begin Apply
Cal Cal

MENU C11

BEGIN CALIBRATION

KEEP EXISTING
CAL DATA

REPEAT
PREVIOUS CAL

AUTOCAL

CAL METHOD
XXXXXXXXX

TRANSMISSION
LINE TYPE:
XXXXXXXXX

CHANGE CAL
METHOD AND
LINE TYPE

NEXT CAL STEP

PRESS <ENTER>
TO SELECT

37XXXD OM 10-9
USING AUTOCAL AUTOCAL

Step 3. The selections in the next menu to appear, MENU

MENU ACAL ACAL, will depend on current instrument conditions,
as follows:
AUTOCAL

AUTOCAL TYPE: a. THRU UPDATE lets you update the Thru cali-
XXXXXXXX
bration of an active 12-term Calibration. This
CHANGE updates the transmission frequency response
AUTOCAL SETUP and load match coefficients.
START AUTOCAL
b. START AUTOCAL lets you start a calibration
THRU UPDATE using the current setup.
CONNECT THROUGH
LINE BETWEEN c. CHANGE AUTOCAL SETUP lets you set up a
PORTS 1 AND 2 new calibration, which is what we will do for
NUMBER OF AVGS this example. This example also assumes that
XXX you have selected the transmission medium and,
if waveguide, identified the cutoff frequency.
START THRU UPDATE

USE PREVIOUS
AUTOCAL SETUP

PRESS <ENTER>
TO SELECT
OR SWITCH

10-10 37XXXD OM
AUTOCAL USING AUTOCAL

Step 4. Select CHANGE AUTOCAL SETUP. This causes

MENU ACAL_SETUP
MENU ACAL_SETUP (left) to appear.
AUTOCAL SETUP

LINE TYPE
Step 5. Enter a SWITCH AVERAGING value of 8.
COAXIAL/WAVEGUIDE
To improve the effect of switch repeatability error
WAVEGUIDE CUTOFF
with the 36582 series (mechanical switch), you can
XX.XXXXXX GHz
change the switch averaging. Note, however, that
SWITCH AVERAGING switch averaging will have no affect on the 36581 se-
8 ries (electronic switch).
NUMBER OF AVGS
Step 6. Select FULL 2 PORT. This displays a menu (MENU
REFLECTION
XXXX
ACAL_FULL) that lets you set up the calibration
(bottom left).
LOAD
XXXX
You could have also selected S11 1-PORT, S22
THRU 1-PORT, or ADAPTER REMOVAL. The last of
XXXX these lets you remove the effects of an adapter used
ISOLATION in the calibration.
XXXX
Step 7. Select the PORT CONFIG setting that matches the
AUTOCAL TYPE
physical setup (R-1, L=2 or L=1, R=2).
SII 1 PORT
S22 1 PORT It is critical to ensure the correct module orientation
FULL 2 PORT
ADAPTER REMOVAL
is established. Each side (left) and right) of the mod-
ule is labeled.

Step 8. Select the THRU TYPE to be either CALIBRATOR

MENU ACAL_FULL or TRUE.
AUTOCAL
FULL 2-PORT
By default, the CALIBRATOR (internal) thru stan-
dard is used for the Thru Calibration. The transmis-
ISOLATION sion response of the calibration may be improved by
AVERAGING
selecting the TRUE thru standard. This will result
OMIT in an added manual step.
DEFAULT
Step 9. Observe that OMIT is shown for the ISOLATION
AVERAGING AVERAGING.
FACTOR
XXXX
Isolation may be omitted (default). You may also se-
THRU TYPE lect DEFAULT to use the default value during the
CALIBRATOR/TRUE
isolation step. You may also use your own AVER-
PORT CONFIG AGING FACTOR. Including isolation involves a
L=1, R=2 manual step for the 36581 models.
R=1, L=2

START AUTOCAL Step 10. Ensure the AutoCal module is properly connected
between Ports 1 and 2, then select START
PRESS <ENTER>
TO SELECT
AUTOCAL.
OR SWITCH

37XXXD OM 10-11
USING AUTOCAL AUTOCAL

Follow the on-screen instructions and do not disturb

the setup during the calibration. Please note that
. -
you should not start a calibration until both LED's
Channels Measurement

on the AutoCal module are lit. This will ensure accu-

rate calibration of the VNA.
Display Enhancement

Step 11. When the calibration is complete, press the Save/Re-

call key.

Step 12. Select SAVE then FRONT PANEL SETUP AND

Save/
Recall
Menu
CAL DATA TO HARD DISK (middle and bottom
left).

Step 13. Select a file or CREATE NEW FILE and press En-
ter.

MENU SR1 If you are creating a new file, enter the filename and
SAVE/RECALL
select DONE when finished.
FRONT PANEL
AND CAL DATA

SAVE

RECALL

PRESS <ENTER>
TO SELECT
FUNCTION

MENU SR2

SAVE

FRONT PANEL
SETUP IN
INTERNAL MEMORY

FRONT PANEL
SETUP AND
CAL DATA
TO HARD DISK

FRONT PANEL
SETUP AND
CAL DATA
TO FLOPPY
DISK
PRESS <ENTER>
TO SELECT

10-12 37XXXD OM
AUTOCAL PIN DEPTH SPECIFICATIONS

10-8 PIN DEPTH The depth of the center pin on connectors is a critical specification,
SPECIFICATIONS which if not met, can cause damage to mating connectors. Table 10-1
provides pin depth examples and Table 10-2 provides pin-depth speci-
fications for associated AutoCal connectors.

Table 10-1. Checking Connector Pin Depth (Example)

Example 1:
FEMALE MASTER GAUGE BLOCK (protrusion)
Desired nominal value: 0.2070
Case1 Actual value of master gauge 0.2071 (protrusions 0.0001 more than desired)
Gauge should be set to indicate: +0.0001
Case2 Actual value of master gauge 0.2069 (protrusions 0.0001 less than desired)
Gauge should be set to indicate: -0.0001
Example 2:
MALE MASTER GAUGE BLOCK (cavity)
Desired nominal value: 0.2070
Case1 Actual value of master gauge 0.2071 (cavity 0.0001 deeper than desired)
Gauge should be set to indicate: -0.0001
Case2 Actual value of master gauge 0.2069 (cavity 0.0001 shallower than desired)
Gauge should be set to indicate: +0.0001

Table 10-2. AutoCal Module Connector Pin Depth Specifications

Device Connector Pin Depth (inches)

3658XXX K-Female +0.0000 to -0.005

3658XXX K-Male +0.0000 to -0.005

3658XXX N-Female *[0.207](+0.000, -0.005)

3658XXX K-Female *[0.207](+0.000, -0.005)

32K50 K-Male (cable side) **Negative Indication

32KF50
K-Female +0.0000 to -0.0005

K-Male (DUT side) +0.0000 to -0.0005

32L50 K-Male (cable side) **Negative Indication

32LF50
3.5mm-Female (DUT side) +0.006 to -0.008

3.5mm-Male (DUT side) +0.006 to -0.008

32S50 K-Male (cable side) **Negative Indication

32SF50
SMA-Female (DUT side) +0.0005 to -0.0015

SMA-Male (DUT side) +0.0005 to -0.0015

*Gauging Type N Connectors: The actual value of a Type N master gauge block will always vary to some degree from the desired nomi-
nal value. The recorded measured value of the master gauge must be observed when calibrating the Pin Depth Gauge to the desired
nominal value. Although the AutoCal Module Pin Depths are not critical, this information may be helpful in the measurement of Type N
mating components. Examples are shown in Table 10-1, on the preceding page.

37XXXD OM 10-13
AUTOCAL MENUS FLOW DIAGRAM AUTOCAL

10-9 AUTOCAL MENUS A flow diagram for the AutoCal menus is provided in Figure 10-3.
FLOW DIAGRAM

Menu ACAL_S11
Menu C11 AUTOCAL
S11 1 PORT
BEGIN CALIBRATION Menu ACAL
PORT 1
KEEP EXISTING AUTOCAL CONNECTION
Begin CAL DATA
Cal AUTOCAL TYPE Menu ACAL_SETUP LEFT/RIGHT
REPEAT PREVIOUS XXXXXXXX TEST SIGNALS
CAL CHANGE AUTOCAL SETUP
AUTOCAL AUTOCAL SETUP START AUTOCAL
LINE TYPE
START AUTOCAL COAXIAL/WAVEGUIDE
CAL METHOD PRESS <ENTER>
XXXXXXXX THRU UPDATE WAVEGUIDE CUTOFF TO SELECT
XX.XXXXXX GHz OR SWITCH
TRANSMISSION CONNECT THROUGH
LINE TYPE: LINE BETWEEN SWITCH AVERAGING Menu ACAL_S22
XXXXXXXX PORTS 1 AND 2 XXXX
CHANGE CAL AUTOCAL
NUMBER OF AVGS NUMBER OF AVGS S22 1 PORT
METHOD AND XXX
LINE TYPE REFLECTION PORT 1
START THRU UPDATE XXXX CONNECTION
NEXT CAL STEP
LOAD LEFT/RIGHT
PRESS <ENTER> PRESS <ENTER> XXXX
TO SELECT TEST SIGNALS
TO SELECT THRU
OR SWITCH START AUTOCAL
XXXX
PRESS <ENTER>
ISOLATION TO SELECT
XXXX OR SWITCH
Cal Sequence AUTOCAL TYPE
Menus,
S11 1 PORT Menu ACAL_FULL
Page 4-18
S22 1 PORT
AUTOCAL
FULL 2 PORT FULL 2 PORT
ADAPTER REMOVAL ISOLATION
AVERAGING
OMIT
DEFAULT
AVERAGING
FACTOR
XXXX
THRU TYPE
CALIBRATOR/TRUE
PORT CONFIG
L=1, R=2
R=1, L=2
TEST SIGNALS
START AUTOCAL
PRESS <ENTER>
TO SELECT
OR SWITCH

Menu ACAL_AR
Menu U1 AUTOCAL
ADAPTER REMOVAL
UTILITY
ISOLATION
GPIB ADDRESSES AVERAGING
Utility DISPLAY Menu ACAL_UTIL OMIT
Menu INSTRUMENT
PARAMETERS AUTOCAL DEFAULT
UTILITIES Menu ACAL_CHAR AVERAGING
GENERAL
DISK UTILITIES AUTOCAL FACTOR
AUTOCAL XXXX
CAL COMPONENT CHARACTERIZATION
CHARACTERIZATION
UTILITIES SAVE PORT CONFIG
SWITCH AVERAGING
AUTOCAL TO HARD DISK ADAPT&L=1, R=2
XXXX
UTILITIES SAVE L=1, ADAPT&R=2
TO FLOPPY DISK PORT CONFIG ADAPT&R=1, L=2
COLOR L=1, R=2 R=1, ADAPT&L=2
CONFIGURATION RECALL R=1, L=2K
DATA ON(OFF) FROM HARD DISK TEST SIGNALS
NUMBER OF AVGS
DRAWING RECALL
REFLECTION START AUTOCAL
BLANK(ING) FROM FLOPPY DISK
XXXX
FREQUENCY PRESS <ENTER> PRESS <ENTER>
LOAD TO SELECT
INFORMATION TO SELECT
XXXX OR SWITCH
SET DATE/TIME Cal Sequence
THRU Menus,
PRESS <ENTER> XXXX Page 4-18
TO SELECT
OR TURN ON/OFF ISOLATION
XXXX
Cal Sequence
START AUTOCAL Menus,
CHARACTERIZATION Page 4-18
PRESS <ENTER>
TO SELECT
OR SWITCH

Figure 10-3. AutoCal Menus Flow Diagram

10-14 37XXXD OM
 Chapter 11
Operational Checkout
Procedures
Table of Contents

11-1 INTRODUCTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3

11-2 REQUIRED EQUIPMENT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3
11-3 INITIAL SETUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3
11-4 SELF TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3
11-5 NON-RATIO POWER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4
11-6 HIGH LEVEL NOISE TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6
 WARNING
This equipment can not be repaired by the operator. DO NOT attempt to
Repair
remove the equipment covers or to disassemble internal components.
Only qualified service technicians with a knowledge of electrical fire
and shock hazards should service this equipment. There are
high-voltage parts in this equipment presenting a risk of severe injury
or fatal electric shock to untrained personnel. In addition, there is a risk
of damage to precision components.
 Chapter 11
Operational Checkout
Procedures
11-1 INTRODUCTION This chapter provides quick operational checkout procedures that may
be used by incoming inspectors to ensure that the Model 37XXXD Vec-
tor Network Analyzer is operational. This is a quick-check procedure.
For the full performance verification procedure, refer to the Series
37XXXD Maintenance Manual, Anritsu Part Number 10410-00264.

11-2 REQUIRED The following equipment is required for the procedures in this chapter:
EQUIPMENT
q Flexible microwave cable (through line)
q Short

11-3 INITIAL SETUP Before starting the performance tests, press the Power key (left) to On.

NOTE
. -
Allow the system to warm up for at least 60 minutes to en-
Channels Measurement

sure operation to performance specifications.

Display Enhancement

Power

11-4 SELF TEST Perform an instrument self test to ensure that the VNA is operating
properly. To start a self test, Press the Option Menu key and make the
menu choices shown in Figure 11-1.

37XXXD OM 11-3
NON-RATIO POWER OPERATIONAL CHECKOUT

OPTIONS

TRIGGERS

REAR PANEL DIAGNOSTICS

OUTPUT

DIAGNOSTICS START SELF TEST

MULTIPLE SOURCE READ SERVICE LOG

CONTROL
INSTALLED OPTIONS
RECEIVER MODE
PERIPHERAL TESTS
SOURCE CONFIG
TROUBLESHOOTING
PRESS < ENTER> (FOR SERVICE
TO SELECT USE ONLY)

H/W CALIBRATIONS
(FOR SERVICE
USE ONLY)

PRESS < Enter>

Figure 11-1. Performing a Self Test

11-5 NON-RATIO POWER This test verifies that each individual receiver channel operates prop-
erly. Measurement calibration of the system is not required for this
test.

This test requires that you press specified front panel keys and make
choices from the displayed menu(s). The keys used in this test are
shown below.

. -

Channels Measurement

Display Enhancement

Channels Measurement

Channel Menu Channel

Menu
Ch 1 Ch 2 Setup
Menu
Data
Points Setup
Ch 3 Ch 4
Menu
Hold Domain Appl

Display Enhancement

Graph Type Graph

Type
Set
Scale
Auto
Scale
Option
Menu
Video
IF BW
Graph
Type
Avg/

S Params S
Params
Ref
Plane
Trace
Memory
Smooth
Menu
Trace
Smooth
Average

11-4 37XXXD OM
OPERATIONAL CHECKOUT NON-RATIO POWER

Test Procedure Perform test as described below.

Key Menu Choice

Step 1. Connect Test Ports 1 and 2 together using a
high-quality through line (below).
Options Non-Ratioed Parameters,
Menu see Figure 11-2
Setup START: 1 GHz
Menu STOP: High-End Fre-
quency
PORT 1 PORT 2
Channel FOUR CHANNELS TEST PORT 1
Menu
TEST PORT 2
Graph LOG MAGNITUDE
Type (All channels)
S-PARAMS USER 1: (Channel 3)
Parameter: Ra/1
Phase Lock: Ra
USER 2: (Channel 1)
Parameter: Ta/1
Phase Lock: Ra Step 2. Reset the VNA using the Default Program key.
USER 3: (Channel 2)
Parameter: Tb/1 Step 3. Set up the VNA as shown in table at left.
Phase Lock: Ra
USER 4: (Channel 4)
Step 4. Observe the sweep indicators and allow at least one
Parameter: Rb/1
Phase Lock: Rb complete sweep to occur on all four channels.
SET RESOLUTION:
Step 5. Verify that the minimum amplitude meets the speci-
SCALE 20 dB/DIV
REF VALUE: fications shown below.
0 dB
(All four channels) Model Test Channel Reference Channel
37217C >-28 dB >-35 dB
37317C >-28 dB >-35 dB
37225C >-25 dB >-34 dB
37325C >-30 dB >-32 dB
37247C >-26 dB >-35 dB
37347C >-31 dB >-33 dB
. -
37269C >-40 dB >-40 dB
Channels Measurement

37369C >-34 dB >-34 dB

Display Enhancement
37277C >-45 dB >-45 dB
37377C >-45 dB >-45 dB
37297C >-60 dB >-55 dB
37397C >-60 dB >-55 dB

Marker
Menu
Readout
Marker
NOTE
Use the Marker Menu and Readout Marker keys ( left) and
menus to obtain precise frequency and amplitude values.

37XXXD OM 11-5
HIGH LEVEL NOISE TEST OPERATIONAL CHECKOUT

11-6 HIGH LEVEL NOISE The following test verifies that the high-level signal noise in the VNA
TEST will not significantly affect the accuracy of subsequent measurements.
Calibration of the system is not required for this test.

This test requires that you press specified front panel keys and make
choices from the displayed menu(s). The keys used in this test are
highlighted below.

. -

Key Menu Choice

Channels Measurement

Limits
Setup START: 40 MHz Display Enhancement

Menu STOP: High-end frequency

Channel DUAL CHANNELS 1-3
Menu
Graph LOG MAGNITUDE
Type (Both channels)
Set RESOLUTION: Channels Measurement
Setup Menu
Scale 0.020 dB/DIV
REF VALUE:
Channel Menu Channel
Menu
Ch 1 Ch 2 Setup
Menu
Data
Points
Data Points
0.0 dB Ch 3 Ch 4 Hold Domain Appl

(Both channels)
S-Params Channel 1 – S12 Set Scale Display Enhancement

Channel 3 – S21 Option

Graph Type Video IF BW

Graph Video
Set Auto IF BW
Type Scale Scale Menu

Data 201 Avg/

Points S Params S
Params
Ref
Plane
Trace
Memory
Smooth
Menu
Trace
Smooth
Average
Average
Video NORMAL (1 kHz)
Avg/Smooth Menu
IF BW
Limits UPPER LIMIT ON
0.015 if less than 40 GHz
0.04 if 40 GHz
Setup the VNA as described in the table at the left.
0.14 if above 40 GHz
LOWER LIMIT ON
-0.015 if less than 40 GHz
-0.04 if 40 GHz
-0.14 if above 40 GHz

DISPLAY LIMITS ON

11-6 37XXXD OM
OPERATIONAL CHECKOUT HIGH LEVEL NOISE TEST

Perform the test as described below:

Step 1. Reset the VNA using the Default Program key.

Step 2. Connect Test Port 1 and Test Port 2 (top left) to-
gether.

Step 3. Press the Ch 1 key.

PORT 1 PORT 2 Step 4. Press the Trace Memory key.

TEST PORT 1

TEST PORT 2 Step 5. Choose VIEW DATA from the menu and press the
Enter key.

Step 6. While observing the sweep indicators, allow at least

two complete sweeps to occur.

Step 7. Choose STORE DATA TO MEMORY from the

menu and press the Enter key.

Step 8. Choose VIEW DATA / MEMORY from the menu

and press the Enter key.

Step 9. While observing the sweep indicators, allow at least

two complete sweeps to occur.

Step 10. Verify that the peak-to-peak High Level Noise falls
within the area between the two limit lines (Fig-
ure 11-2, following page).

Step 11. Press the Ch 3 key.

Step 12. Repeat Steps 4 through 9 for channel 3.

Step 13. Press the S Params key; set Ch 1 for S11 and Ch 3 for
S22.

Step 14. Connect a Short to Test Port 1 and an Open to Test

Port 2 (left).
PORT 1 PORT 2 Step 15. Repeat Steps 2 through 9.
TEST SHORT
PORT 1

TEST OPEN
PORT 2

37XXXD OM 11-7
HIGH LEVEL NOISE TEST OPERATIONAL CHECKOUT

S12 REVERSE TRANSMISSION

LOG MAG. REF= 0.000 dB 0.020 dB/DIV

0.040000000 GHz 20.000000000

S21 FORWARD TRANSMISSION

LOG MAG. REF= 0.000 dB 0.020 dB/DIV

0.040000000 GHz 20.000000000

Figure 11-2. High Level Noise Test Waveform

11-8 37XXXD OM
 Chapter 12
Calibration Kits

Table of Contents

12-1 INTRODUCTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-3

12-2 PURPOSE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-3
12-3 KIT CONTENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-3
Model 3650 Calibration Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-4
Model 3651 Calibration Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-5
Model 3652 Calibration Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-6
Model 3653 Calibration Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-7
Model 3654/ 3654C Calibration Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-8
Model 3656 Calibration Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-9
Model 3657 Calibration Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-10
12-4 PRECAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-11
Pin Depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-11
Pin Depth Tolerance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-12
Over Torquing Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-12
Teflon Tuning Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-12
Mechanical Shock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-12
12-5 CLEANING INSTRUCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-13
 Chapter 12
Calibration Kits
12-1 INTRODUCTION This chapter provides illustrations and contents for the Models 3650,
3651, 3652, 3653, 3654C, 3657, 36550 and 36552 Calibration Kits.

12-2 PURPOSE The calibration kits contain all of the precision components and tools
required to calibrate the 37XXXD Vector Network Analyzer System for
a 12-term error-corrected measurement.

12-3 KIT CONTENTS The contents and illustrations of the calibration kits are listed on the
following pages.

37XXXD OM 12-3
KIT CONTENTS CALIBRATION KITS

Model 3650 Calibration Kit Table 12-1. Model 3650 (SMA/3.5 mm) Calibration Kit Contents

Index Anritsu Part Description Qty.

Number
1 01-212 Female Flush Short (Option 1) 1
2 01-211 Male Flush Short (Option 1) 1
3 17SF50 Female Sliding Termination 1
4 17S50 Male Sliding Termination (Option 1) 1
5 34ASF50-2 Female Adapter 2
6 Calibration Software Diskette 1
7 33FSF50 Female-Female Adapter 2
8 33SS50 Male-Male Adapter* 1
9 28S50-2 Male Termination 2
10 28SF50-2 Broadband Female Termination 2
11 33SSF50 Male-Female Adapter* 2
12 24S50 Male Open 1
13 23SF50 Female Open 1
14 23S50 Male Short 1
15 23SF50 Female Short 1
16 34AS50-2 Male Adapter 2
17 Connector Thumb Wheel 4
18 01-201 Torque Wrench 1
19 01-210 Reference Flat 1
20 01-222 Pin Depth Gauge 1
21 01-223 Pin Depth Gauge 1

W IL T R O N M O D E L 3 6 5 0

4
3
2
1 6 *
2 1
2 2 7 *
8
1 9
1 8

1 7 1 6 1 5 1 4 1 3 1 2 1 1 * 1 0 9

Figure 12-1. Model 3650 (SMA/3.5 mm) Calibration Kit Components

* Phase Equal Adapters

12-4 37XXXD OM
CALIBRATION KITS KIT CONTENTS

Model 3651 Calibration Kit Table 12-2. Model 3651 (GPC-7) Calibration Kit Contents

Index Anritsu Part Description Qty.

Number
1 01-221 Collet and Extractor Tool 1
2 28A50-2 Broadband Termination 2
3 24A50 Open 1
4 23A50 Short 1
5 Calibration Software Diskettet 1
6 17A50 Sliding Termination (Option 1) 1
7 01-200 Torque Wrench 1
8 01-210 Reference Flat 1
9 01-220 Pin Depth Gauge 1

1 2 3 4

WILTRON MODEL 3651

9 5

8
6
7

Figure 12-2. Model 3651 (GPC-7) Calibration Kit Components

37XXXD OM 12-5
KIT CONTENTS CALIBRATION KITS

Model 3652 Calibration Kit Table 12-3. Model 3652 (K-Connector) Calibration Kit Contents

Index Anritsu Part Description Qty.

Number
1 01-212 Female Flush Short (Option 1) 1
2 01-211 Male Flush Short (Option 1) 1
3 17KF50 Female Sliding Termination 1
4 17K50 Male Sliding Termination (Option 1) 1
5 34AKF50-2 Female Adapter 2
6 Calibration Software Diskette 1
7 33FKF50 Female-Female Adapter 2
8 33KK50 Male-Male Adapter* 1
9 28K50-2 Male Termination 2
10 28KF50-2 Broadband Female Termination 2
11 33KKF50 Male-Female Adapter* 2
12 24K50 Male Open 1
13 23KF50 Female Open 1
14 23K50 Male Short 1
15 23KF50 Female Short 1
16 34AK50-2 Male Adapter 2
17 Connector Thumb Wheel 4
18 01-201 Torque Wrench 1
19 01-210 Reference Flat 1
20 01-222 Pin Depth Gauge 1
21 01-223 Pin Depth Gauge 1

W IL T R O N M O D E L 3 6 5 2

4
3
2
1 6 *
2 1
2 2 7 *
8
1 9
1 8

1 7 1 6 1 5 1 4 1 3 1 2 1 1 * 1 0 9

Figure 12-3. Model 3652 (K-Connector) Calibration Kit Components

* Phase Equal Adapters

12-6 37XXXD OM
CALIBRATION KITS KIT CONTENTS

Model 3653 Calibration Kit Table 12-4. Model 3653 (Type N) Calibration Kit Contents

Index Anritsu Part Description Qty.

Number
1 28N50-2 Broadband Male Termination 2
2 34AN50-2 Male Adapter 2
3 Calibration Software Diskette 1
4 34ANF50-2 Female Adapter 2
5 28NF50-2B Braodband Female Termination 2
6 24NF50 Female Open 1
7 24N50 Male Open 1
8 23NF50 Female Short 1
9 23N50 Male Short 1
10 01-213 Reference Gauge 1
11 01-224 Pin Depth Gauge 1

1 2

WILTRON MODEL 3653

11
3

10 9 8 7 6 5 4

Figure 12-4. Model 3653 (Type N) Calibration Kit Components

37XXXD OM 12-7
KIT CONTENTS CALIBRATION KITS

Model 3654C Calibration Kit Table 12-5. Model 3654C/3654C-1 (V-Connector) Calibration Kit Contents

Index Anritsu Part Description Qty.

Number
1 17VF50B Female Sliding Termination (3654C-1 only) 1
2 17V50B Male Sliding Termination (3654C-1 only) 1
3 33VVF50 Male-Female Adapter 2
4 2360-54B Calibration Software Diskette 1
5 28V50C Male Broadband Termination 2
6 28VF50C Female Broadband Termination 2
7 24V50B Male Open 1
8 24VF50B Female Open 1
9 23V50B-5.1 Male Short, 5.1 mm 1
10 23VF50B-5.1 Female Short, 5.1 mm 1
11 33VV50 Male-Male Adapter 1
12 33VFVF50 Female-Female Adapter 2
13 Connector Thumb Wheel 4
14 01-201 Torque Wrench 1
15 01-323 Female Adapter For Pin Gauge 1
16 01-322 Pin Depth Gauge 1
17 01-210 Reference Flat 1
18 01-204 Adapter Wrench 1
19 01-312 Male Flush Short 1
20 01-311 Female Flush Short 1

1 2

WILTRON MODEL 3654

20 3
19

18
17

16 4

15
14 5

13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6
Figure 12-5. Model 3654 (V-Connector) Calibration Kit Components
* Phase Equal Adapters

12-8 37XXXD OM
CALIBRATION KITS KIT CONTENTS

Model 3656 Calibration Kit Table 12-6. Model 3656 (W1-Connector) Calibration Kit Contents

Index Anritsu Description Qty.

Part Number
1 23W50-1 Male Offset Short 1 (2.02 mm) 1
23W50-2 Male Offset Short 2 (2.65 mm) 1
23W50-3 Male Offset Short 3 (3.180 mm) 1
2 24W50 Male Open (1.510 mm) 1
3 28W50 Male Broadband Termination 1
4 23WF50-1 Female Offset Short 1 (2.02 mm) 1
23WF50-2 Female Offset Short 2 (2.65 mm) 1
23WF50-3 Female Offset Short 3 (3.180 mm) 1
5 28WF50 Female Broadband Termination 1
6 24WF50 Female Open (1.930 mm) 1
7 33WSC50 Fixed Male SC Connector 1
8 33WFSC50 Fixed Female SC Connector 1
9 Interchangeable Sliders, SC Connectors 1
10 Locking Keys, SC Connectors 1
11 01-402 Interchangeable Adapter Fixed Male 1
12 33WWF50 Male-Female Adapter 1
13 33WW50 Male-Male Adapter 1
14 33WFWF50 Female-Female Adapter 1
15 01-504 6 mm Torque Wrench 1
16 01-505 6x7 mm End Wrench 1
17 18-WWF50-1B Stepped Impedance Thruline (Verification Device) 1
18 18-WWF50-1 50W Matched Thruline (Verification Device) 1
19 Calibration/Verification Software

Figure 12-6. Model 3656 (W1-Connector) Calibration Kit Components

37XXXD OM 12-9
KIT CONTENTS CALIBRATION KITS

Model 3657 Calibration Kit

Table 12-7. Model 3657/3657-1 (Multiple Line) Calibration Kit Contents

Index Anritsu Description Qty.

Part Number
1 65898-1 15.00 mm V-LRL MALE-MALE, Outer Conductor 1
2 65899-1 15.00 mm V-LRL MALE-MALE, Center Conductor 1
3 65898-2 16.70 mm V-LRL MALE-MALE, Outer Conductor 1
4 65899-2 16.70 mm V-LRL MALE-MALE, Center Conductor 1
5 65898-3 18.40 mm V-LRL MALE-MALE, Outer Conductor 1
6 65899-3 18.40 mm V-LRL MALE-MALE, Center Conductor 1
7 65898-4 20.10 mm V-LRL MALE-MALE, Outer Conductor 1
8 65899-4 20.10 mm V-LRL MALE-MALE, Center Conductor 1
9 65898-5 21.80 mm V-LRL MALE-MALE, Outer Conductor 1
10 65899-5 21.80 mm V-LRL MALE-MALE, Center Conductor 1
11 65898-6 49.84 mm V-LRL MALE-MALE, Outer Conductor 1
12 65899-6 49.84 mm V-LRL MALE-MALE, Center Conductor 1
13, 14 23V50B-5.1 5.1 mm Male Short (3657-1 Only) 2
15, 16 23VF50B-5.1 5.1 mm Female Short (3657-1 Only) 2
17 65922 Center Conductor Removal Plug 1
18 65901-1 Center Conductor Installation/Removal Fixture 1
19 65901-6 Center Conductor Installation/Removal Fixture 1
20 783-1243 End Wrench 1
21 01-201 Torque Wrench, 8 in/lbs 1

1
2
3
MODEL 3657/3657-1
4
5 11

6 12
13
7
14
8
9
10

15
16

18
20
19
17 21

Figure 12-7. Model 3657 (Multiple Line) Calibration Kit Components

12-10 37XXXD OM
CALIBRATION KITS PRECAUTIONS

12-4 PRECAUTIONS The following are precautionary notes related to the use of connectors.
For specific information on setting pin depths on sliding terminations,
refer to the 37XXXD Operation Manual, Chapter 7.

Pin Depth Before mating, measure the pin depth (Figure 12-7) of the device that
will mate with the RF component, using an Anritsu Pin Depth Gauge
or equivalent (Figure 12-8). Based on RF components returned for re-
pair, destructive pin depth of mating connectors is the major cause of
failure in the field. When an RF component is mated with a connector
having a destructive pin depth, damage will likely occur to the RF
component connector. (A destructive pin depth has a center pin that is
too long in respect to the connector’s reference plane.)

REFERENCE REFERENCE
PLANE PLANE

PIN PIN
DEPTH DEPTH
(INCHES) (INCHES)

FEMALE MALE

Figure 12-8. N-Connector Pin Depth

37XXXD OM 12-11
PRECAUTIONS CALIBRATION KITS

Pin Depth Tolerance The center pin of RF component connectors has a precision tolerance
measured in mils (1/1000 inch). Connectors on test devices that mate
with RF components may not be precision types and may not have the
proper depth. They must be measured before mating to ensure suit-
ability. When gauging pin depth, if the test device connector measures
out of tolerance (Table 12-7) in the “+” region of the gauge (Fig-
ure 12-8), the center pin is too long. Mating under this condition will
likely damage the termination connector. On the other hand, if the test
device connector measures out of tolerance in the “–” region, the center
pin is too short. While this will not cause any damage, it will result in
a poor connection and a consequent degradation in performance.
Table 12-8. Pin Depth Tolerances

Port/Connector Type Pin Depth (mils) Anritsu Gauge Setting

GPC 7 +0.000 to –0.003 Same as pin depth

0 N Male
1 1 .207
+0.003
Same as pin depth
-0.003
N Female
2 2
WSMA Male
1 1
–0.0025
2 2
Same as pin depth
–0.0035
3 3 WSMA Male

K Male
4 4 +0.000 to –0.003 Same as pin depth
5 K Female

V Male +0.000 to –0.001

Same as pin depth
Figure 12-9. Pin Depth Gauge V Female +0.000 to –0.001

Over Torquing Connectors Over torquing connectors is destructive; it may damage the connector
center pin. Finger-tight is usually sufficient, especially on Type N con-
nectors. Never use pliers to tighten connectors.

Teflon Tuning Washers The center conductor on most RF components contains a small teflon
tuning washer located near the point of mating (interface). This
washer compensates for minor impedance discontinuities at the inter-
face. The washer’s location is critical to the RF component’s perfor-
mance. Do not disturb it.

Mechanical Shock RF components are designed to withstand years of normal bench han-
dling. However, do not drop or otherwise treat them roughly. They are
laboratory-quality devices, and like other such devices, they require
careful handling.

12-12 37XXXD OM
CALIBRATION KITS CLEANING INSTRUCTIONS

12-5 CLEANING Connector interfaces—especially the outer conductors on the GPC 7

INSTRUCTIONS and SMA connectors—should be kept clean and free of dirt and other
debris.

Denatured alcohol applied with a cotton swab applicator is recom-

mended for cleaning connector interfaces.

NOTE
Most cotton swabs are too large to fit in the smaller con-
nector types. It is necessary to remove most of the cotton
and then twist the remaining cotton tight. Be sure that the
remaining cotton does not get stuck in the connector.

The following are some important tips on cleaning connectors:

q Use only denatured alcohol as a solvent

q Always use an appropriate size of cotton swab
q Gently move the cotton swab around the center conductor
q Never put lateral pressure on the connector’s center pin
q Verify that no cotton or other foreign material remains in the
connector after cleaning
q Only dampen the cotton swab. Do NOT saturate it
q Compressed air can be used to remove foreign particles and to
dry the connector
q Verify that the center pin has not been bent or damaged

Figure 12-10, following page, illustrates how to clean connectors.

37XXXD OM 12-13
CLEANING INSTRUCTIONS CALIBRATION KITS

W A T E R
IN D U S T R IA L

D E N A T U R E D
S O L V E N T S

A L C O H O L
D o N O T u s e In d u s tr ia l S o lv e n ts o r W a te r o n c o n n e c to r . U s e o n ly D e n a tu r e d A lc o h o l.

U s e o n ly d e n a tu r e d a lc o h o l a n d th e p r o p e r s iz e o f c o tto n s w a b . G e n tly r o ta te th e s w a b
a r o u n d th e c e n te r p in b e in g c a r e fu l n o t to s tr e s s o r b e n d th e p in o r y o u w ill d a m a g e
th e c o n n e c to r.

D o N O T p u t c o tto n s w a b s in a t a n a n g le , o r y o u w ill d a m a g e th e c o n n e c to r s .

D o N O T u s e to o la r g e o f c o tto n s w a b , o r y o u w ill d a m a g e th e c o n n e c to r s .

Figure 12-10. How to Clean Connectors

12-14 37XXXD OM
 Chapter 13
Millimeter Wave
System
Table of Contents

13-1 INTRODUCTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-3

13-2 DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-3
13-3 PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-4
System Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-4
Test Port Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5
Measurement Capabilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5
13-4 INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6
Console and Table Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7
Instrument Installation into Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8
System Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-10
13-5 CALIBRATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12
13-6 OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13
Entering/ Leaving Millimeter Wave Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13
Changing Bands/Modules While in Millimeter Wave . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-17
Allowable Millimeter Wave Module Configurations, Measurements and
Calibrations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-17
Effect of Default Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-18
Redefinition of Band Frequency Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-19
Use of Normal Multiple Source Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-20
Stored Setups and Calibrations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-20
External Source and Power Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-21
13-7 MEASUREMENT PROCEDURE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-22
13-8 REMOTE OPERATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-23
13-9 OPERATIONAL CHECKOUT— GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-24
13-10 OPERATION CHECKOUT—IF POWER LEVEL TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-25
 Table of Contents (Continued)

13-11 OPERATIONAL CHECKOUT— TRANSMISSION HIGH LEVEL NOISE TEST 13-27

13-12 OPERATIONAL CHECKOUT— REFLECTION HIGH LEVEL NOISE TEST . 13-29

13-2 37XXXD OM
 Chapter 13
Millimeter Wave System
13-1 INTRODUCTION This chapter describes the ME7808C Millimeter Wave System, its op-
eration, and its measurement capabilities. For information on
ME7808C Broadband System, refer to Chapter 14.

13-2 DESCRIPTION The ME7808C Millimeter Wave System can be constructed upon any
37XXXD VNA, 37247D being the most economical choice. It also re-
quires two 680XXC or MG369XA Frequency Synthesizers, and a
3735B Millimeter Test Set having two 374X Millimeter Wave Modules.
There are 14 different 374X modules available (below) to accommodate
different measurement types and frequency ranges.
q 3741A-V 50 to 75 GHz Transmission Module
q 3741A-E 60 to 90 GHz Transmission Module
q 3741A-EE56 to 94 GHz Transmission Module
q 3741A-W 75 to 110 GHz Transmission Module
q 3741A-EW 65 to 110 GHz Transmission Module
q 3740A-V 50 to 75 GHz Transmission/Reflection Module
q 3740A-E 60 to 90 GHz Transmission/Reflection Module
q 3740A-EE 56 to 94 GHz Transmission/Reflection Module
q 3740A-W 75 to 110 GHz Transmission/Reflection Module
q 3740A-EW 65 to 110 GHz Transmission/Reflection Module

37XXXC OM 13-3
PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATIONS MILLIMETER WAVE

13-3 PERFORMANCE Performance specifications are given below in Table 13-1.

SPECIFICATIONS

System Performance “Receiver Dynamic Range” is defined as the ratio of the maximum sig-
nal level at Port 2 for 0.1 dB compression to the noise floor at Port 2.
"System Dynamic Range" is defined as the ratio of the power incident
on Port 2 in a through line connection (reference) to the noise floor at
Port 2 (forward measurements only). The "Noise Floor" is the maxi-
mum measured signal with the test ports terminated using 10 Hz IF
bandwidth and 512 averages.

Table 13-1. Performance Specifications, Millimeter Wave Modules

Model

Specification
V Band E Band Extended W Band Extended
(WR-15) (WR-12) E Band (WR-10) W Band

56–60 65–75
75–100
Frequency Range (GHz) 50–75 60– 90 60–85 75–100
100–110
85–94 100–110

Frequency Resolution 3 Hz 6 Hz 6 Hz 6 Hz 6 Hz

Max Signal Into Port 2 +8 dBm +8 dBm +8 dBm +6 dBm +6 dBm

–85 dBm –90 dBm

–90 dBm
Noise Floor –90 dBm –90 dBm –90 dBm –89 dBm
–90 dBm
–76 dBm –87 dBm

93 dB 96 dB
96 dB
Receiver Dynamic Range 98 dB 98 dB 98 dB 95 dB
96 dB
84 dB 93 dB

High Level Noise (typical) 0.05 dB 0.06 dB 0.08 dB 0.06 dB 0.08 dB

+5 dBm –5 dBm
+5 dBm
Power Out (typical) +7 dBm +6 dBm +6 dBm +5 dBm
+2 dBm
+4 dBm +2 dBm

90 dB 85 dB
95 dB
System Dynamic Range 97 dB 96 dB 96 dB 94 dB
92 dB
80 dB 89 dB

13-4 37XXXD OM
MILLIMETER WAVE PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATIONS

Test Port Characteristics Test port characteristics for the waveguide connector used on the vari-
ous modules are given in Table 13-2.

Table 13-2. Test Port Characteristics

Waveguide Designation

Offset Short Calibration LRL Calibration

Specification
WR-15 WR-12 WR-12 WR-10 WR-10 WR-15 WR- WR-12 WR- WR-10
Ext. Ext. 12 Ext. 10 Ext.

Frequency
50–75 60–90 56–94 75–110 65–110 50–75 60–90 56–94 75–110 65–110
(GHz)

Directivity
>46 >46 >44 >46 >40 >46 >46 >44 >46 >40
(dB)

Source
>37 >36 >33 >36 >30 >46 >46 >43 >46 >40
Match (dB)

Load Match
>46 >46 >44 >46 >40 >46 >46 >44 >46 >40
(dB)

Reflection
Frequency ±0.030 ±0.040 ±0.080 ±0.040 ±0.080 ±0.02 ±0.02 ±0.06 ±0.02 ±0.06
Tracking (dB)

Transmission
Frequency ±0.060 ±0.060 ±0.100 ±0.070 ±0.100 ±0.02 ±0.02 ±0.06 ±0.02 ±0.06
Tracking (dB)

Isolation (dB) >90 >90 >80 >90 >80 >90 >90 >80 >90 >80

Measurement Capabilities Measurement capabilities are the same as the standard 37XXXD. That
is: Four Channels, Standard S-parameters as well as User Defined Pa-
rameters, Auto-Reversing, Data Points 1601, 801, 201, 51, N Discrete,
and CW (see Appendix D).

NOTE
When a 37XXXD is configured as a Millimeter Wave Sys-
tem, the frequency range is extended per the specifications
of the Millimeter Wave Modules and the system will be
limited to operate with only two external sources. That is,
the internal source is removed or disabled.

37XXXD OM 13-5
INSTALLATION MILLIMETER WAVE

13-4 INSTALLATION This section describes installation and system check-out. For instruc-
tions on installation of the wafer probe test station, refer to section
14-5.

IMPORTANT NOTES
· The empty console weighs approximately 66kg
(145 pounds). Use two people to remove the console from
the pallet.

· Many of the instruments are quite heavy and require

two people to lift them.

· Instruments should be loaded into the bottom sections of

the console first, to prevent tipping of the console.

· The VNA instrument has fragile RF cables connected to

both the front and rear panels. Be careful not to bend
these cables when handling the instrument.

· If the synthesizers are not installed precisely as de-

scribed below, the system will be non-functional.

· We suggest using an 8 in/lb torque wrench to tighten

SMA connectors (available in most Anritsu VNA Cali-
bration kits) Do not tighten any connectors over 8 in/lbs.

13-6 37XXXD OM
MILLIMETER WAVE INSTALLATION

Console and Table Setup Set up the console and table as described below.

Step 1. Remove the shipping container and all packaging

and accessories from around the console. Set the ta-
ble aside. Instructions for table installation appear
later.

Step 2. Lift or roll the console off the pallet (to lift: insert
two sections of lumber through the console top and
lift it, using one person on each side).

Step 3. Cut the tie wraps which are securing the table
mounting rails at the console rear door. Cut the tie
wraps which are securing the power cords and wrist
strap ground wire.

Step 4. Attach the mounting rails to the table as shown in

Figure 13-1.

1 0 -3 2 x 1 /2 IN C H 1 0 -3 2 x 1 /2 IN C H
# 1 0 L O C K W A S H E R # 1 0 L O C K W A S H E R
IN S T A L L IN 6 P L A C E S # 1 0 F L A T W A S H E R

IN S T A L L IN T W O P L A C E S A F T E R
P L A C IN G T H E W R IT IN G S U R F A C E
IN T O T H E C O N S O L E .

Figure 13-1. Console Table

37XXXD OM 13-7
INSTALLATION MILLIMETER WAVE

Instrument Installation Refer to Figures 13-2, 13-, and 13-3 for installation of major instru-
into Console ments and cables.

Step 1. Check the rear panel serial number labels of the syn-
thesizers. The instrument without Option 15 belongs
in the bottom compartment (“RF” synthesizer).

Step 2. Install the synthesizer with Option 15 in the second

opening from the bottom.

Step 3. Install the VNA into the top compartment. Ensure

the three small RF cables are installed onto the front
and rear panels (one in front, and two in back).

Step 4. Install the 3738A Test Set into the compartment be-
low the VNA.

Step 5. Secure all instruments in the console using the

screws provided.

Step 6. On the left front of the console, move the black

ground wire away from the guide of the table-mount-
ing rail, and install the table by sliding the table
rails into the guides.

Step 7. Secure the table rails at the rear of the console using
the screws provided.

13-8 37XXXD OM
MILLIMETER WAVE INSTALLATION

37XXXD
Vector Network Analyzer
3738A
Broadband Test Set
Millimeter-wave
Modules

Synthesizers with
Options 1B and 3

Figure 13-2. ME7808C Console Showing Major Components

Step 8. Lay the static-safe mat on the table and attach the
ground cable.

Step 9. Unpack the millimeter-wave modules and set them

on the table.

37XXXD OM 13-9
INSTALLATION MILLIMETER WAVE

System Cabling Connect ME7808C system cables as described below and shown in Fig-
ure 13-3 on the following page.

Step 1. From the front, connect the rigid RF cable between

the upper synthesizer and the 3738A LO IN connec-
tor. Ensure the connectors are seated correctly and
tightened securely.

Step 2. From the front, connect the rigid RF cable between

the bottom synthesizer and the 3738A RF IN connec-
tor. Ensure the connectors are seated correctly and
tightened securely.

Step 3. From the front, install the two RF cable sets between
the 3738A and the mmW modules. Connect exactly
as the labels indicate.

Step 4. From the rear, unscrew the four small

chain-mounted terminations from on VNA (let them
hang loose) and install the Cable Set. Connect indi-
vidual cables as indicated on the labels .

Step 5. Connect one GPIB cable from the lower (Dedicated)

GPIB connector of the VNA to the upper synthesizer.
Connect the second GPIB cable between the two syn-
thesizers.

Step 6. Insert the power cords into all 4 instruments and

turn all the instruments on.

Step 7. Ensure that the two synthesizers' GPIB addresses

are set correctly. The top unit should be set to ad-
dress 4 and the bottom unit should be set to ad-
dress 5. This can be verified or changed by pressing
SYSTEM |CONFIG |GPIB ADDRESS and entering
the appropriate GPIB address.

13-10 37XXXD OM
MILLIMETER WAVE INSTALLATION

Cable Set.
Install individual
GPIB Cable cables as marked

GPIB Cable

GPIB Cable

Power Cords

Figure 13-3. ME7808C Console Rear Panel Cabling

37XXXD OM 13-11
CALIBRATION MILLIMETER WAVE

13-5 CALIBRATION Calibration for millimeter wave measurements is accomplished using

a waveguide offset-short method. Anritsu provides the Series 3655X,
3655X-1, 3755X, and 3755X-1 Calibration Kits, which contain all re-
quired precision calibration components. For optimum calibration and
measurement results, the following apply to modules that are not pro-
vided with precision waveguide extensions. (Refer to Figure 13-4 below,
for a supporting illustration.)

q Use the precision waveguide extension from the calibration kit to

connect to the waveguide module
q During calibration connect the highly polished (non-beveled) side
of the short toward the module

Waveguide Extension
from Calibration Kit

MODULE
New reference
plane

OFFSET
Reference SHORT
Plane

MODULE Beveled side

Highly Polished
Side

Figure 13-4. Waveguide Connections for Optimum Measurement and Calibration Results

13-12 37XXXD OM
MILLIMETER WAVE OPERATION

13-6 OPERATION The ME7808C Millimeter Wave System is menu driven and the
millimeter wave operation is entered into via the Enhancement
Key-Group’s Options Menu key. Selecting Millimeter Wave BAND
DEFINITION in that menu provides for defining measurement
parameters; selecting TEST SET CONFIG provides for configuring
the 3735B Test Set parameters (Figure 13-5, next page).

The menu options shown in Figure 13-5, Millimeter Wave System

Menu Flow, are described in Appendix A, along with all of the other
ME7808C menus. Additional operating instructions are provided
below.

Entering/ Leaving Millimeter Before entering the Millimeter Wave mode, users should have com-
Wave Operation pleted all of the steps in the “Installation” section of this manual. The
system should be ready for operation, with all connections properly
made to the Millimeter Wave test set, modules, and frequency synthe-
sizers. The system should then be powered up, and the procedure be-
MENU OPTNS low followed.

OPTIONS NOTE
Until the Millimeter Wave configuration is activated, the
TRIGGERS
system will not operate and it will fail to lock.
REAR PANEL
OUTPUT CAUTION
The transition to or from Millimeter Wave operation is a
Millimeter Wave
BAND DEFINITION major setup change that does NOT preserve the previous
setup. All current set up and RF calibration information
RECEIVER MODE will be lost on entering or leaving the Millimeter Wave
mode configuration. If the existing setup needs to be saved,
SOURCE CONFIG
this should be done before the system is reconfigured for
TEST SET CONFIG Millimeter Wave mode operation.

When the millimeter wave band is selected, the system automatically

reconfigures itself to measure at that frequency range. The lower and
upper limits of the displayed sweep frequencies will change to the
band selected. The frequency resolution changes to account for multi-
plier factors. However, users will (1) have access to the multiple source
MENU OTS1 control definitions and (2) be able to change the sweep frequencies as
desired.
TEST SET
CONFIGURATION
Procedure
INTERNAL The first step is to press the Options button on the front panel. This
brings up the menu OPTNS (top left). Select TEST SET CONFIG.
MILLIMETER WAVE
This causes the menu OTS1 (bottom left) to appear.

37XXXD OM 13-13
OPERATION MILLIMETER WAVE

. -

Channels Measurement

Display Enhancement

Option
Menu

MENU OPTNS

OPTIONS
REAR PANEL
OUTPUT
DIAGNOSTICS
MILLIMETER WAVE
BAND DEFINITION

RECEIVER MODE

SOURCE CONFIG
PLOT OPTIONS
TEST SET CONFIG MENU MMW4
TO SELECT Mm WAVE BAND
PRESS <ENTER>
BAND START FREQ
XX.XXXXXX
XX.XXXXXX
MENU OTS1 BAND STOP FREQ
TEST SET EQUATION TO EDIT
CONFIGURATION SOURCE 1
INTERNAL SOURCE 2
RECEIVER
MILLIMETER WAVE EQUATION SUMMARY
PRESS <ENTER> C.W. ON/OFF
TO SELECT MULTIPLIER
XXX
MENU OTS2 DIVISOR
XXX
MENU MMW1 TEST SET
CONFIGURATION OFFSET FREQ
MILLIMETER WAVE XXXXXXXX
TEST SET BAND WARNING
DEFAULT EQUATIONS
WR-22 CONTINUING ACCEPT EQUATIONS
(33 - 50 GHz) WILL INVALIDATE
WR-15 CURRENT
SETUP AND
(50 - 75 GHz) CALIBRATION
WR-12
(60 - 90 GHz) PRESS <ENTER> TO MENU SU1/SU2
TO SELECT
WR-12 EXTENDED
(56 - 94 GHz)
WR-10
(75 - 110 GHz)
WR-10 EXTENDED
MENU MMW3
(65 - 110 GHz)
TEST SET
WR-8
CONFIGURATION
90- 140 GHz)
PRESS <ENTER> mm WAVE BAND:
TO SELECT XXXXXXXXXX
PRESS <CLEAR> MENU MMW2 PORT 1 MODULE
TO ABORT
MILLIMETER WAVE 3740/3741/NONE
TEST SET MODULES PORT 2 MODULE
PORT 1 MODULE 3740/3741/NONE
3740/3741/NONE
WARNING
PORT 2 MODULE
3740/3741/NONE CONTINUING
ACCEPT CONFIG WILL INVALIDATE
CURRENT
PRESS <ENTER> SETUP AND
TO SELECT CALIBRATION
PRESS <CLEAR>
PRESS <ENTER>
TO ABORT
TO SELECT

Figure 13-5. Millimeter Wave System Menu Flow

13-14 37XXXD OM
MILLIMETER WAVE OPERATION

If the system is not already configured for Millimeter Wave operation,

select Millimeter Wave to call menu MMW1 (top left).
MENU MMW1
In menu MMW1, select the millimeter wave band for which modules
MILLIMETER WAVE have been installed.
TEST SET BAND

WR-22 CAUTION
(33 - 50 GHz)
A band other than the one for which hardware is installed
WR-15 can be selected. In this case, the system may appear to op-
(50 - 75 GHz) erate normally, but it will not make accurate measure-
ments.
WR-12
(60 - 90 GHz)
Upon completing the selection in the menu MMW1, menu MMW2 (bot-
WR-12 EXTENDED tom left), appears.
(56 - 94 GHz)

WR-10
(75 - 110 GHz)

WR-10 EXTENDED
(65 - 110 GHz)

MENU MMW2

MILLIMETER WAVE
TEST SET MODULES

PORT 1 MODULE
3740/41/42/NONE

PORT 2 MODULE
3740/41/42/NONE

ACCEPT CONFIG

PRESS <ENTER>
TO SELECT
PRESS <CLEAR>
TO ABORT

37XXXD OM 13-15
OPERATION MILLIMETER WAVE

In this menu, select which module is Transmission-Reflection and

which is Transmission Only. Do this carefully, as an incorrect selection
MENU MMW3 causes the wrong S-parameters to be displayed. Once the selection is
made in this menu, MMW3 (left) appears.
TEST SET
CONFIGURATION
At this point, users have one last opportunity to abort the change in
mmWAVE BAND configuration, by pressing the Clear key. If the Enter key is pressed, the
XXXXXXXX old configuration is lost. The system is reconfigured for millimeter
wave operation.
PORT 1 MODULE
3740

PORT 2 MODULE
3740

WARNING
CONTINIUING
MAY INVALIDATE
CURRENT
SETUP AND
CALIBRATION
PRESS <ENTER>
TO SELECT
PRESS <CLEAR>
TO ABORT

13-16 37XXXD OM
MILLIMETER WAVE OPERATION

Changing Bands/Modules The effect of changing millimeter wave bands while in Millimeter
While in Millimeter Wave Wave mode operation will be to (1) change the sweep frequency range
to the default range for the new band and (2) delete any current RF
calibrations. Therefore, the Caution on page 13-13 applies, and it is un-
likely that any calibration would be valid if the modules are changed.
(This is because of manufacturing variations from module to module.)

To configure the system for a different band or for one or more differ-
ent modules, follow the exact same steps as described on pages 13-14
through 13-16, except that only the new band or module types are
changed.

Allowable Millimeter Wave The S-parameter measurements and RF calibrations allowed are a
Module Configurations, function of the type of millimeter wave module users have selected in
Measurements and menu MMW2. Note that one could actually have only one module and
Calibrations still make reflection-only measurements. The criteria in Table 13-4 ap-
plies.

Table 13-4. Calibration Criteria

MMW Allowed Allowed RF Calibrations

Modules S-parameters

Port 1 Port 2 S11 S12 S21 S22 12 Forward Reverse Reflection Reflection Forward Reverse
Term 1 Path 2 Port 1 Path 2 Port P1 P2 Trans Trans

3740 3740 X X X X X X X X X X X

3740 3741 X X X X X

3741 3740 X X X X X

3741 3740 b1/1 b2/1 b2/1 b1/1 X X X

37XXXD OM 13-17
OPERATION MILLIMETER WAVE

Effect of Default Program Because the system is reconfigured for Millimeter Wave mode opera-
tion, the effects of performing a “Default Program” are somewhat dif-
ferent. Performing a default program operation, either from the front
panel or via the GPIB will have the following results:

q Pressing the Default Program key twice:

The Millimeter Wave operating band, its associated frequency
range, multipliers, and millimeter wave module types will re-
main unchanged. If the frequency range has been modified from
the default values for the band, the modified values will remain
in force. The current sweep range will be set to the band fre-
quency range. This is consistent with other similar setup param-
eters, such as GPIB addresses
q Pressing the Default Program key, then the 1 data entry key:
Except for clearing the internal setup memories, the effect will be
the same as for pressing the Default Program key twice
q Pressing the Default Program key, then the 0 data entry key:
The system resets to its default, non-millimeter wave configura-
tion; that is, internal source active, no multiple source equations,
normal default system frequency range, and internal test set con-
figuration. If the “delete source” option is active, the system will
attempt to use an external source for source 1

The restrictions stated in the above “Allowable Microwave Modules

Configurations, Measurements, and Calibrations” section (previous
page) will impact the display resulting from a “Default - Default” ac-
tion. S-parameters displayed will be as indicated above, while the
channel configuration will be as shown in Table 13-5.

Table 13-5. Channel Configuration

MMW Modules Default Channel S-parameters Assigned
Configuration
Port 1 Port 2 Ch 1 Ch 2 Ch 3 Ch 4

3740 3740 All Four Channels S11 S12 S21 S22

3740 3741 Dual, Channels 1 and 3 S11 S21 S21 S11

3741 3740 Dual, Channels 2 and 4 S22 S12 S12 S22

3741 3741 All Four Channels b1/1 b2/1 b2/1 b1/1

Note: In the case of two 3741’s, the system will be put into SET ON mode. If users provide a phase-lock signal, they may set the
“user-defined” receiver mode to TRACKING.

13-18 37XXXD OM
MILLIMETER WAVE OPERATION

Redefinition of Band It is possible to modify the Millimeter Wave band equations to a range
Frequency Ranges different than the default range for the band currently installed. This
is done by pressing the Options key to display menu OPTNS (top left).
In this menu, select Millimeter Wave BAND DEFINITION and
MENU OPTNS cause menu MMW4 (bottom left) to appear.

OPTIONS The receiver equation or either of the sources may be edited. New val-
ues for the multiplier, the divisor, or the offset may be entered. To ap-
TRIGGERS
ply the selections, select ACCEPT EQUATIONS. Or select DE-
REAR PANEL FAULT EQUATIONS to return selections or edits to the standard
OUTPUT default values.

Millimeter Wave The EXT_MILLIMETER WAVE 4 menu (Figure 13-6, following page)
BAND DEFINITION
appears next to menu Millimeter Wave 4 to provide the current or pro-
RECEIVER MODE posed band information.

SOURCE CONFIG CAUTION

TEST SET CONFIG It is possible for the equations to be set to values that may
prevent normal operation of the system, due to excessive
frequency range beyond the capabilities of the system
hardware. The only way of restoring the system to its
known default settings is by selecting DEFAULT EQUA-
TIONS then ACCEPT EQUATIONS in menu MMW 4.
Using the DEFAULT-DEFAULT method will not reset
the equations.

If the frequency range of a millimeter wave band is changed to a range

where some or all of the frequencies are outside of the default range
MENU MMW4 for that band, or if the frequency multipliers are altered, the change
will be allowed, but upon selecting ACCEPT EQUATIONS in menu
mmWAVE BAND MMW4, a warning message will be issued in the data area: “CAU-
TION: NON-STD BAND DEFINITION.” If the frequency range of a
BAND START FREQ Millimeter Wave band is changed to a range that is a subset of the de-
65.000000 fault range for that band, no warning message will be issued.
BAND STOP FREQ
110.000000

37XXXD OM 13-19
OPERATION MILLIMETER WAVE

- MILLIMETER WAVE BAND DEFINITION SUMMARY -

BAND FREQUENCY RANGE
BAND START F
BAND STOP F
XXX,XXXXXX XXX
XXX.XXXXXX XXX

FREQUENCY = (MULTIPLIER/DIVISOR) * F + OFFSET FREQ)

SOURCE 1 = (1/ 8) * (F– 0.270000 GHz)
SOURCE 2 = (1/ 6) * (F + 0.000000 GHz)
RECEIVER = (1/ 1) * (0.270000 GHz C.W.)
- NOTES -
1. SELECT <DEFAULT EQUATIONS> TO OVERWRITE DEFINITION
WITH VALUES SUITABLE FOR THE MILLIMETER WAVE BAND.
2. SELECT <ACCEPT EQUATIONS> TO CONFIRM ANY CHANGES.
3. PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATIONS ARE VALID ONLY WHILE
USING THE DEFAULT EQUATIONS OVER THE DEFAULT BAND
FREQUENCY RANGE.
4. DEVIATING FROM THE DEFAULT MAY CAUSE LOCK FAILURES.

Figure 13-6. Menu EXT_MMW4

Use of Normal Multiple While the millimeter wave feature is active, the normal multiple
Source Mode source mode will not be available. Access to the menus OM0 through
OM2 will not be allowed. If the system is in multiple source mode
when switched to millimeter wave, all multiple source information will
be lost, and the unit will return to normal (single source) operation
when millimeter wave operation is ended. In Millimeter Wave mode,
users may change the default values of the current waveguide band
frequency range, multipliers, and offset (CW-IF) frequency, by using
menu MMW4.

Stored Setups and The Millimeter Wave band definition and module information is stored
Calibrations with a stored setup in internal memory, and with the setup and RF
CAL on disk. When a setup is recalled, first the band and module
types will be compared with the current settings. If different, the setup
will be rejected, and a message “ABORTED: HARDWARE DIFFER-
ENT” will be posted. If the hardware settings are compatible, the fre-
quency range of the stored setup will be compared with the current
system low and high frequency limits, in case the user has employed a
customized-band definition. If the recalled setup is within the current
frequency range of the system, it will be recalled with no warn-
ing—even if the current range is customized. If the recalled setup is
outside the normal frequency range, or if it has changed equations
(been customized) it will be recalled. However, a time-out warning
message will be issued in the data area: “CAUTION: NON-STD BAND
DEFINITION.”

13-20 37XXXD OM
MILLIMETER WAVE OPERATION

External Source and Power When MILLIMETER WAVE has been selected in menu OTS1, the
Levels system checks for the existence of two external sources. If either
source is not connected and operating, a warning message is posted to
the screen. On entering Millimeter Wave mode operation, the system
will automatically be configured to use the two external sources. The
Millimeter Wave mode will not function properly with low
source-power levels. Therefore, on entering this mode the source-power
levels will be adjusted to a predefined level. However the Source
Config and Test Signals menus will still be available to users, to
change power settings and source configuration if so desired.

37XXXD OM 13-21
MEASUREMENT PROCEDURE MILLIMETER WAVE

13-7 MEASUREMENT The measurement of a Device Under Test (DUT) using the Millimeter
PROCEDURE Wave mode is quite similar to one using a coaxial measurement tech-
nique. However, due to the more complex nature of the Millimeter
Wave System equipment, additional care must be taken to ensure that
everything is set up properly. Depending upon the type of measure-
MENU MMW1 ment being performed, the setup may vary. The following is a descrip-
tion of a typical measurement procedure for a passive two-port DUT.
MILLIMETER WAVE
TEST SET BAND
Step 1. Verify Correct Band Definition
WR-22 Use menu MMW1 (top left) to examine the current
(33 - 50 GHz) millimeter wave band selection, and menu MMW2
(bottom left) to examine the current module selec-
WR-15
(50 - 75 GHz) tions to be sure that they match the installed hard-
ware. Examine menuMMW4 (next page) to verify
WR-12 that the band equations are set correctly. If there is
(60 - 90 GHz) any doubt whether the setting are correct, use the
DEFAULT EQUATIONS selection to reset them.
WR-12 EXTENDED
(56 - 94 GHz)
Step 2. Verify Correct Setup for the System
WR-10 The safest way to do this is to press the Default key
(75 - 110 GHz) twice. This returns the system to the proper fre-
quency range and power settings for the current mil-
WR-10 EXTENDED
(65 - 110 GHz) limeter wave hardware configuration. It is very im-
portant that the RF sources be set to the correct
WR-8 power levels. Set Source 1 (LO) to +17 dBm and
(90 - 140 GHz) Source 2 (RF) to +13 dBm.
PRESS <ENTER>
TO SELECT Step 3. Perform and Verify an RF Calibration
The system may now be calibrated using an appro-
priate Anritsu Calibration Kit. Be sure to load the
calibration kit information from the provided floppy
disk into the instrument first. The default calibra-
tion type is Offset-Short, but an LRL/LRM calibra-
MENU MMW2 tion may also be used. See Chapters 4 and 7 for help
with RF Calibration details. Consult Table 13-4 for
MILLIMETER WAVE limitations on which calibrations may be performed
TEST SET MODULES
as a function of the module types installed.
PORT 1 MODULE
3740/3741/NONE Step 4. Attach the DUT
Use the calibrated torque wrench provided with the
PORT 2 MODULE
3740/3741/NONE
Calibration Kit to tighten the waveguide flange re-
taining screws on the DUT. This results in more re-
ACCEPT CONFIG producible measurements.
PRESS <ENTER>
TO SELECT
Step 5. Select the S-parameter(s) and Graph Type(s) to Be
Used for the Measurement
The selection may be limited due to the types of mil-
limeter wave modules installed. Consult Table 13-4
on page 13-17 for further information.

13-22 37XXXD OM
MILLIMETER WAVE REMOTE OPERATION

Step 6. Set the Display Scale

MENU MMW4 This may be done most quickly by selecting each ac-
tive channel, and pressing the Autoscale key. The
mmWAVE BAND
scale and reference values may then be set to a de-
sired value using the appropriate SET SCALE menu
BAND START FREQ for the graph type selected.
65.000000

BAND STOP FREQ Step 7. Observe the Measured Data

110.000000 It should not vary from sweep to sweep, and should
be within the range expected for the type of mea-
EQUATION TO EDIT surement. Re-check tightness of the flange retaining
SOURCE 1 screws if data appears abnormal.

SOURCE 2 Step 8. Save the Calibration and Setup On the Hard Disk
RECEIVER Press the Save/Recall key to initiate the saving of
the current setup. An instrument setup in the milli-
EQUATION SUMMARY meter wave configuration may be saved exactly like
any other VNA setup and RF calibration.
CW OFF

MULTIPLIER NOTE
1 Anritsu strongly recommends that any setup and calibra-
tion used for measurement be saved.
DIVISOR
8

DEFAULT EQUATIONS

13-8 REMOTE OPERATION All functions of the ME7808C can be controlled remotely, via the IEEE
488 Bus (GPIB). The remote operation and controlling commands are
provided in the 37XXX Programming Manual (PN: 10410-00262).

37XXXD OM 13-23
OPERATIONAL CHECKOUT MILLIMETER WAVE

13-9 OPERATIONAL The Operational Checkout subsection provides for checking that the
CHECKOUT— ME7808C Millimeter Wave System is functioning properly.
GENERAL

Required Equipment
The following equipment is required to perform the verification tests.

MENU OPTNS Model Description Quantity

OPTIONS Anritsu Waveguide Calibration Kit, with Option 1: Sliding Termination 1

3655 Series
TRIGGERS

REAR PANEL Step 1. Remove the silver straight waveguide sections from
OUTPUT the modules, if installed.

Millimeter Wave Step 2. Install the precision-straight waveguide sections

BAND DEFINITION
that are contained in the calibration kit on the wave-
RECEIVER MODE guide output connector of each millimeter module.

SOURCE CONFIG NOTE

These waveguide sections (test port adapters) use high
TEST SET CONFIG
precision flanges to improve connection repeatability and
calibration quality. They must be used to ensure specified
system performance.

Step 3. Apply power to both system Sources and allow them

to complete self test.

Step 4. Apply power to the network analyzer.

Step 5. Press the Option Menu key, select TEST SET

CONFIG to configure the system for the types of
millimeter modules used.

Step 6. Allow the system to warm up for at least 60 minutes

to ensure operation to performance specifications.

13-24 37XXXD OM
MILLIMETER WAVE OPERATIONAL CHECKOUT

13-10 OPERATION This test verifies that each individual receiver channel operates prop-
CHECKOUT—IF erly. Measurement calibration of the system is not required for this
POWER LEVEL TEST test.

Test Setup
Set up test equipment as described below:
Key Menu Choice

SETUP START: Low-end Fre- Step 1. Install a flush short on the output of the 3740A-X
MENU quency module connected to Port 1.
STOP: High-end Fre-
quency
Step 2. Set up the network analyzer controls as shown at
CHANNEL DUAL CHANNELS left.
MENU 1&3

GRAPH LOG MAGNITUDE NOTE

TYPE (both channels) For 3741A Series, use limit settings for
b1/1 (b2/1).
S-PARAMS Channel 1
User Ratio: a1/1
User Phase Lock: a1 Test Procedure
Channel 3 The test procedure is described below:
User Ratio: b1/1
User Phase Lock: a1
Step 1. Observe sweep indicator and allow at least one com-
SET RESOLUTION: 10.0 plete sweep to occur.
SCALE dB/DIV
REF VALUE: -10.0 dB Step 2. Verify that the measurement traces fall within the
(both channels)
limit lines (Table 13-6, following page).

Step 3. If the second module connected to Port 2 is also a

Model 3740A-X Transmission/Reflection module,
Key Menu Choice
change the setup to that shown at the top left and
CHANNEL DUAL CHANNELS perform Step 4. Otherwise, skip to Step 7.
MENU 2&4

S-PARAMS Channel 2 Step 4. Install a flush short to the output of the 3740A-X
User Ratio: a2/1 module on Port 2.
User Phase Lock: a2
Channel 4 Step 5. Verify that the measurement traces fall within the
User Ratio: b2/1
limit lines.
User Phase Lock: a2

Step 6. If the second module to be tested is a Model

3741A-X, connect the two modules together and
Key Menu Choice
change the setup to that shown at the bottom left.
CHANNEL SINGLE CHANNEL
MENU Step 7. Verify that the measurement trace falls within the
S-PARAMS Channel 3 limit lines.
User Ratio: b2/1
User Phase Lock: a1

37XXXD OM 13-25
OPERATIONAL CHECKOUT MILLIMETER WAVE

Table 13-6. Limit Line Settings

Limit Model and Frequency Range (GHz)

Type
3740A-Q 3740A-V 3740A-E 3740A-EE 3740A-W and 3740A-EW 3740A-F
33-50 50-75 60-90 56-60 60-85 85-94 65-75 75-100 100-110 90-140

a1/1 (a2/1) –5 –5 –5 –5 –5 –5 –5 –5 –5 –5
UPPER
LIMIT dB

a1/1 (a2/1) –29 –27 –29 –34 –29 –39 –39 –24 –34 –39
LOWER
LIMIT dB

b1/1 (b2/1) –2 –2 –2 –2 –2 –2 –2 –2 –2 –2
UPPER
LIMIT dB

13-26 37XXXD OM
MILLIMETER WAVE OPERATIONAL CHECKOUT

13-11 OPERATIONAL The following test verifies that the transmission high-level noise in the
CHECKOUT— ME7808C Millimeter VNA System will not significantly affect the ac-
TRANSMISSION curacy of subsequent measurements. High-level noise is the random
HIGH LEVEL NOISE noise that exists in the ME7808C Millimeter VNA System. Because it
TEST is non-systematic, it cannot be accurately predicted or measured. Thus,
it cannot be removed using conventional error-correction techniques.
Measurement calibration is not required for this test.
Key Menu Choice
NOTE
SETUP START: Low-end Fre- This test is not applicable if you are only using a single
MENU quency 3740A-X module on Port 1.
STOP: High-end
Frequency
Test Setup
CHAN- DUAL CHANNELS 1 Set up the ME7808C Millimeter VNA System controls as shown at
NEL &3 left.
MENU (two 3740A-X’s)
SINGLE CHANNEL 3
(one 3740A-X and Test Procedure
one 3741A-X) The test procedure is described below.
GRAPH LOG MAGNITUDE
TYPE (both channels)
Step 1. Connect the two modules together.

SET RESOLUTION: 0.050 Step 2. If using two 3740A-X’s, press the Ch 1 key and per-
SCALE dB/DIV
form Steps 3 through 9. Otherwise, go to Step 10.
REF VALUE: 0.0 dB
(both channels)
Step 3. Press the Trace Memory key.
S-PARA Channel 1 S12
MS Channel 3 S21

DATA 401
POINT

VIDEO IF 1 KHz
BW

37XXXD OM 13-27
OPERATIONAL CHECKOUT MILLIMETER WAVE

Step 4. Choose VIEW DATA from the menu (left) and press
the Enter key.
MENU NO1
Step 5. While observing the sweep indicator, allow at least
TRACE MEMORY two complete sweeps to occur. (One complete sweep if
FUNCTIONS
using single channel display.)
VIEW DATA
Step 6. Choose STORE DATA TO MEMORY from menu
VIEW MEMORY
and press the Enter key.
VIEW DATA
AND MEMORY Step 7. Choose VIEW DATA / MEMORY from the menu
and press the Enter key.
VIEW DATA (/)
MEMORY
Step 8. While observing the sweep indicator, allow at least
SELECT two complete sweeps to occur. (One complete sweep if
TRACE MATH using single channel display.)

STORE DATA Step 9. Verify that the peak-to-peak High Level Noise falls
TO MEMORY
within the area between the two limit lines.
DISK
OPERATIONS NOTE
Displayed data is only valid for the first few
sweeps.

Step 10. Press the Ch 3 key.

Step 11. Repeat Steps 4 through 9 for channel 3.

13-28 37XXXD OM
MILLIMETER WAVE OPERATIONAL CHECKOUT

13-12 OPERATIONAL The following test verifies that the reflection high-level noise in the
CHECKOUT— ME7808C Millimeter VNA System will not significantly affect the ac-
REFLECTION HIGH curacy of subsequent measurements. High-level noise is the random
LEVEL NOISE TEST noise that exists in the ME7808C Millimeter VNA System. Because it
is non-systematic, it cannot be accurately predicted or measured. Thus,
it cannot be removed using conventional error-correction techniques.
Measurement calibration is not required for this test.
Key Menu Choice
Test Setup
SETUP START: Low-end Fre- Set up the ME7808C Millimeter VNA System controls as shown at
MENU quency left.
STOP: High-end Fre-
quency
Test Procedure
CHAN- DUAL CHANNELS 1 & 3 The test procedure is described below:
NEL (two 3740A-X’s)
MENU SINGLE CHANNEL 3
Step 1. Attach the flush short to the waveguide port on the
(one 3740A-X and one
3741A-X) 3740A-X on Port 1 (and Port 2, if two are used); leave
the waveguide port on 3741A-X unterminated.
GRAPH LOG MAGNITUDE (both
TYPE channels)
Step 2. Press the Ch 1 key.
SET RESOLUTION: 0.050
SCALE dB/DIV Step 3. Press the Trace Memory key.
REF VALUE: 0.0 dB
(both channels)

S-PARA Channel 1 S11

MS Channel 3 S22

DATA 401
POINT

VIDEO IF 1 KHz
BW

37XXXD OM 13-29
OPERATIONAL CHECKOUT MILLIMETER WAVE

Step 4. Choose VIEW DATA from the menu (left) and press
the Enter key.
MENU NO1
Step 5. While observing the sweep indicator, allow at least
TRACE MEMORY two complete sweeps to occur. (One complete sweep if
FUNCTIONS
using single channel display.)
VIEW DATA
Step 6. Choose STORE DATA TO MEMORY from the
VIEW MEMORY
menu and press the Enter key.
VIEW DATA
AND MEMORY Step 7. Choose VIEW DATA (/) MEMORY from the menu
and press the Enter key.
VIEW DATA (/)
MEMORY
Step 8. While observing sweep indicator, allow at least two
SELECT complete sweeps to occur. (One complete sweep if us-
TRACE MATH ing single channel display.)

STORE DATA Step 9. Verify that the peak-to-peak High Level Noise falls
TO MEMORY
within the area between the two limit lines.

NOTE
Displayed data is only valid for the first few
sweeps.

Step 10. If two 3740A-X’s are used, press the Ch 3 key and re-
peat Steps 4 through 9 for channel 3.

13-30 37XXXD OM
 Chapter 14
ME7808C Broadband
Measurement System
Table of Contents

14-1 INTRODUCTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-3

14-2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-3
Measurement Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-3
Console and Associated Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-4
Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-4
14-3 INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-4
Console and Table Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-4
Instrument Installation into Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-6
System Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-8
14-4 INITIAL ELECTRICAL TESTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-10
Millimeter Module Checkout. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-10
40 MHz to 65 GHz Checkout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-11
14-5 WAFER PROBE STATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-12
14-6 BROADBAND MENUS, FLOW. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-14
14-7 BROADBAND CALIBRATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-15
Merging Calibrations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-15
BROADBAND SYSTEM INTRODUCTION

Chapter 14
ME7808C Broadband
Measurement System
14-1 INTRODUCTION This chapter describes the ME7808C Broadband Measurement System
and the broadband mode of operation (40 MHz to 110 GHz). For other
setup modes, refer to Chapter 13 (Millimeter Wave System), or other
pertinent chapters in this manual. Model 3742A-EW modules (65 to
110 GHz) are assumed to be installed on the system, even though
other modules are available.

The W1 Calibration Kit (P/N 3656) is designed for the purpose of per-
forming coaxial calibrations with the ME7808C Vector Network Ana-
lyzer up to 110 GHz. The calibration kit comprises of Open, Short, and
Load standards to enable two sets of calibrations—a Short Open Load
Thru (SOLT) calibration from 40 MHz to 65 GHz, and a Triple Offset
Short (SSST) calibration from 65 to 110 GHz (refer to Chapter 7, Mea-
surement Calibration for these calibration procedures). The ME7808C
firmware supports concatenation to allow merging of the two calibra-
tions for broadband corrected measurements from 40 MHz to 110 GHz
(discussed later in this chapter). In addition, the calibration kit in-
cludes fixed and interchangeable adapters, which may be used as test
port connector savers. The interchangeable adapters have one fixed
end and one interchangeable end that can be changed to a male or fe-
male for non-insertable device measurements.

37XXXD OM 14-3
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION BROADBAND SYSTEM

14-2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION The ME7808C Broadband system is normally composed of the follow-
ing Anritsu instruments and accessories (your system may vary de-
pending on your application):

Measurement Instruments
q 37X97D Vector Network Analyzer with Options 1A, 2A, and 15V
q Two MG3692B Synthesized Signal Generators with
Options 1B and 3
q 3738A Millimeter Test Set
q 3742A-EW Millimeter Module (quantity 2)
q 66670-2 (left) and 66671-2 (right) Coupler (quantity 1)

Console and Associated

Hardware
q Console
q Table
q Mounting rails for Table (quantity 2)
q Static Dissipative Mat for Table
q Wrist Strap

Cables
q Rigid RF Cable (Upper synthesizer to 3738A)
q Rigid RF Cable (Lower synthesizer to 3738A)
q Cable Assembly (3742A to 3738A front panel) (quantity 2)
q Cable Assembly (3738A rear panel to VNA rear panel) (quan-
tity 1)
q Flexible RF Cable (coupler to VNA) (quantity 4)
q GPIB Cable (VNA to Synthesizer) (quantity 2)
q Power Cord (quantity 4)

14-4 37XXXD OM
BROADBAND SYSTEM INSTALLATION

14-3 INSTALLATION This section describes installation and system check-out without mak-
ing use of a wafer-probe test station. For instructions on installation of
the wafer probe test station, refer to section 14-5.

IMPORTANT NOTES
· The empty console weighs approximately 66kg
(145 pounds). Use two people to remove the console from
the pallet.

· Many of the instruments are quite heavy and require

two people to lift them.

· Instruments should be loaded into the bottom sections of

the console first, to prevent tipping of the console.

· The VNA instrument has fragile RF cables connected to

both the front and rear panels. Be careful not to bend
these cables when handling the instrument.

· If the synthesizers are not installed precisely as de-

scribed below, the system will be non-functional.

· We suggest using an 8 in/lb torque wrench to tighten

SMA connectors (available in most Anritsu VNA Cali-
bration kits) Do not tighten any connectors over 8 in/lbs.

37XXXD OM 14-5
INSTALLATION BROADBAND SYSTEM

Console and Table Setup Set up the console and table as described below.

Step 1. Remove the shipping container and all packaging

and accessories from around the console. Set the ta-
ble aside. Instructions for table installation appear
later.

Step 2. Lift or roll the console off the pallet (to lift: insert
two sections of lumber through the console top and
lift it, using one person on each side).

Step 3. Cut the tie wraps which are securing the table
mounting rails at the console rear door. Cut the tie
wraps which are securing the power cords and wrist
strap ground wire.

Step 4. Attach the mounting rails to the table as shown in

Figure 14-1.

1 0 -3 2 x 1 /2 IN C H 1 0 -3 2 x 1 /2 IN C H
# 1 0 L O C K W A S H E R # 1 0 L O C K W A S H E R
IN S T A L L IN 6 P L A C E S # 1 0 F L A T W A S H E R

IN S T A L L IN T W O P L A C E S A F T E R
P L A C IN G T H E W R IT IN G S U R F A C E
IN T O T H E C O N S O L E .

Figure 14-1. Console Table

14-6 37XXXD OM
BROADBAND SYSTEM INSTALLATION

Instrument Installation Refer to Figures 14-2 and 14-3 for installation of major instruments
into Console and cables.

Step 1. Check the rear panel serial number labels of the syn-
thesizers. The instrument without Option 15 belongs
in the bottom compartment (“RF” synthesizer).

Step 2. Install the synthesizer with Option 15 in the second

opening from the bottom.

Step 3. Install the VNA into the top compartment. Ensure

the three small RF cables are installed onto the front
and rear panels (one in front, and two in back).

Step 4. Install the 3738A Test Set into the compartment be-
low the VNA.

Step 5. Secure all instruments in the console using the

screws provided.

Step 6. On the left front of the console, move the black

ground wire away from the guide of the table-mount-
ing rail, and install the table by sliding the table
rails into the guides.

Step 7. Secure the table rails at the rear of the console using
the screws provided.

37XXXD OM 14-7
INSTALLATION BROADBAND SYSTEM

Step 8. Lay the static-safe mat on the table and attach the
ground cable.

Step 9. Unpack the 3742A-EW modules and set them on the

table. Do not attach the couplers to the module test
ports - they will not be tested at this time. (To test
the couplers requires a W1 (1 mm) Male-Male
adapter for mating of Port 1 to Port 2, or a full instal-
lation on a wafer probe station.)

37397D
Vector Network Analyzer
3738A
Millimeter Test Set
3742A-EW
Millimeter-wave
Modules

Couplers
(Do not install initially)
MG3692B
Synthesized Signal Generators
with Options 1B and 3

Figure 14-2. ME7808C Console Showing Major Components

14-8 37XXXD OM
BROADBAND SYSTEM INSTALLATION

System Cabling Connect ME7808C system cables as described below and shown in Fig-
ure 14-3 on the following page.

Step 1. From the front, connect the rigid RF cable between

the upper synthesizer and the 3738A LO IN connec-
tor. Ensure the connectors are seated correctly and
tightened securely.

Step 2. From the front, connect the rigid RF cable between

the bottom synthesizer and the 3738A RF IN connec-
tor. Ensure the connectors are seated correctly and
tightened securely.

Step 3. From the front, install the two RF cable sets between
the 3738A and the 3742A-EW modules. Connect ex-
actly as the labels indicate.

Step 4. From the rear, unscrew the four small

chain-mounted terminations from on VNA (let them
hang loose) and install the Cable Set. Connect indi-
vidual cables as indicated on the labels .

Step 5. Connect one GPIB cable from the lower (Dedicated)

GPIB connector of the VNA to the upper synthesizer.
Connect the second GPIB cable between the two syn-
thesizers.

Step 6. Insert the power cords into all 4 instruments and

turn all the instruments on.

Step 7. Ensure that the two synthesizers' GPIB addresses

are set correctly. The top unit should be set to ad-
dress 4 and the bottom unit should be set to
address 5. This can be verified or changed by press-
ing SYSTEM |CONFIG |GPIB ADDRESS and en-
tering the appropriate GPIB address.

37XXXD OM 14-9
INSTALLATION BROADBAND SYSTEM

Cable Set.
Install individual
GPIB Cable cables as marked

GPIB Cable

GPIB Cable

Power Cords

Figure 14-3. ME7808C Console Rear Panel Cabling

14-10 37XXXD OM
BROADBAND SYSTEM INITIAL ELECTRICAL TESTS

14-4 INITIAL ELECTRICAL Perform electrical tests as described below:

TESTS

Millimeter Module Checkout Check out the Millimeter Modules as described below:

Step 1. Ensure the VNA displays “Self-Test Passed”. If

self-test fails, contact your Anritsu Representative.

Step 2. To put the system into the “Millimeter” mode, press

the Option Menu key, and select TEST SET
CONFIG / MILLIMETER WAVE, then press Enter.
Select the correct WR modules for your system.

Step 3. Connect the Port 1 and Port 2 3742A-EW waveguide

test ports tightly together.

Step 4. If error messages appear, or the system does not

sweep:

· Look for error messages displayed on the

synthesizers’ front panels (“ovn cold” is not an
error)
· Double-check all cable connections
· Verify the synthesizers’ GPIB addresses are set cor-
rectly
· Verify the power control verniers on top of the
3742A-EW modules are set to maximum power
(fully CW)

Step 5. Ensure the system is set to default settings (press

the Default Program key twice to reset the system).

Step 6. Set the VNA display as follows:

a. Press the Channel Menu key and select
SINGLE CHANNEL from the display menu.
b. Press the Ch3 key
c. Press the Graph Type key and select LOG MAG-
NITUDE from the displayed menu.

Step 7. Ensure the display is similar to Figure 14-4 (next

page).

Step 8. Press the Ch2 key.

Step 9. Press the Graph Type key and select LOG MAGNI-
TUDE from the displayed menu.

37XXXD OM 14-11
INITIAL ELECTRICAL TESTS BROADBAND SYSTEM

Step 10. Ensure the display resembles Figure 14-4.

Figure 14-4. Normal S21 Display of MM Module Uncalibrated Transmission

40 MHz to 65 GHz Checkout Checkout the 40 MHz to 65 GHz range as described below.

Step 1. Install a throughline between the test ports on the

VNA.

Step 2. Disconnect the cables from the rear panel of the

VNA that connect to the Test Set. Install the four
small terminations, which are hanging from the
chains, to the VNA.

Step 3. Press the Option Menu key and select TEST SET
CONFIG / INTERNAL from the displayed menu.

Step 4. View single channel S21 and S12 as described above

and verify that the traces are similar in appearance
to Figure 14-6 on the following page.

14-12 37XXXD OM
BROADBAND SYSTEM WAFER PROBE STATION

Figure 14-5. S21 or S12 Forward Transmission

The preliminary checkout is complete. (Coupler operation can be

checked using the wafer probe station).

You are now ready to install the system to the wafer probe station or
configure it to your needs. To activate the full 40 GHz to 110 GHz
sweep, press the Option Menu key, and select BROADBAND.

14-5 WAFER PROBE The ME7808C VNA can be integrated with any standard probe station
STATION (manual or semi-automatic) for making on-wafer measurements of ac-
tive or passive components to 110 GHz. However, there are some con-
siderations for set-up that will ensure accurate and repeatable mea-
surements.

Figure 14-6 (following page) shows integration of the ME7808C VNA

with a probe station. The primary connection is from the W1 (1.00
mm) coaxial output on the multiplexing coupler to the wafer probes. If
losses through the probes and cables are excessive, the result can be a
poor calibration. Therefore, it is recommended that the distance be-
tween the couplers and the probes be kept as small as possible. This
can be achieved by mounting the millimeter wave modules
(3742A-EW) on top of the positioners, as shown in the following figure.

37XXXD OM 14-13
WAFER PROBE STATION BROADBAND SYSTEM

0.7m Flex Cables

Coupler Scope

Coupler
37397D
(W/Option 15)
. -

Channels Measurement

Display Enhancement

3742A-EW 3742A-EW
3738A

MG3692B Positioner Positioner

(w/Options 1B and 3)
GPIB Address 4

MG3692B
(w/Options 1B and 3)
GPIB Address 5

110 GHz Probes HF Chuck

3700C3
Note: The probe station is positioned in front of the equipment
1.5m Cable rack such that the 65 GHz flex cables from the VNA are kept
equal and as short as possible in length.

Table 14-6. Probe Station Interconnection

This results in increased output power and hence, enhanced system
dynamic range. This concern also applies for the V-connector cables
that connect the 37397D VNA to the multiplexing couplers. Placing
the probe station directly in front of the ME7808C can minimize these
cable lengths. Note that the probe station is shown on the side of the
rack simply for clarity purposes.

For more information on wafer probe station integration, please con-

tact Anritsu at 1-800-ANRITSU.

14-14 37XXXD OM
BROADBAND SYSTEM BROADBAND MENUS, FLOW

14-6 BROADBAND MENUS, The menus associated with the broadband system are shown in
FLOW Figure 14-7.

. -

Channels Measurement

Display Enhancement

Option
Menu

MENU OPTNS

OPTIONS
REAR PANEL
OUTPUT
DIAGNOSTICS
BROADBAND
DEFINITION

RECEIVER MODE

SOURCE CONFIG

TEST SET CONFIG

RF ON/OFF MENU BB4

DURING RETRACE BROADBAND BAND 2
TO SELECT BAND 2 START FREQ
PRESS <ENTER> 65.000000000 GHz
BAND 2 ST0PT FREQ
110.000000000 GHz
DEFAULT RANGE
ACCEPT RANGE

MENU BB2 MENU BB3

BROADBAND BROADBAND
TEST SET MODULES TEST SET PRESS <ENTER>
BROADBAND BAND 2 TO SELECT
PORT 1 MODULE WR10 EXTENDED
3740/41/42/NONE PRESS <CLEAR>
PORT 1 MODULE TO ABORT
3740/41/42/NONE 3742
PORT 2 MODULE
PORT 2 MODULE
ACCEPT CONFIG 3742

WARNING
PRESS <ENTER> CONTINUING
TO SELECT MAY INVALIDATE
OR SWITCH CURRENT
SETUP AND
PRESS <CLEAR> CALIBRATION
TO ABORT

PRESS <ENTER> TO MENU SU1/SU2

TO CONTINUE
PRESS <CLEAR>
TO ABORT

Table 14-7. Broadband System Menu Flow

37XXXD OM 14-15
BROADBAND CALIBRATION BROADBAND SYSTEM

14-7 BROADBAND Broadband coaxial calibrations on the ME7808C are performed using
CALIBRATION the W1 calibration kit (3656). The most accurate calibration can be
achieved during two separate calibrations, an SOLT from 40 MHz to
65 GHz and an SSST from 65 GHz to 110 GHz. Once the SOLT and
SSST calibrations have been performed and saved, they can be merged
for a continuous, single sweep broadband calibration. (Refer to Chap-
ter 7, Measurement Calibration for SOLT and SSST calibration proce-
dures.) Alternatively, the user may perform an SOLT over the entire
band, 40 MHz to 110 GHz, which will result in degraded performance,
compared to the previously mentioned routine.

Merging Calibrations Procced as follows:

Step 1. Press the Appl key.

Step 2. Select MERGE CAL FILES to open menu MRG1

(left).

Step 3. Select MERGE CAL FILES again to open menu

MENU MRG1
MRG2 (below left).
MERGE CAL FILES
Step 4. Select READ CAL FILE 1 FROM HARD DISK or
CAL FILES MUST
EXIST IN THE READ CAL FILE 1 FROM FLOPPY DISK to se-
CURRENT DIRECTORY lect the SOLT calibration file.
MERGE CAL FILES
Step 5. After loading the SOLT cal file, select READ CAL
PRESS <ENTER> FILE 2 FROM HARD DISK or READ CAL FILE
TO SELECT
2 FROM FLOPPY DISK from menu MRG3 (below
right) and select the SSST calibration file. This step
merges the calibration files together.

MENU MRG2 MENU MRG3

MERGE CAL FILES MERGE CAL FILES

READ CAL FILE 1 READ CAL FILE 2

FROM HARD DISK FROM HARD DISK

READ CAL FILE 1 READ CAL FILE 2

FROM FLOPPY FROM FLOPPY
DISK DISK

PRESS <ENTER> PRESS <ENTER>

TO SELECT TO SELECT

PRESS <CLEAR> PRESS <CLEAR>

TO ABORT TO ABORT

Step 6. The system is now ready for calibrated measure-

ments over the 40 MHz to 110 GHz frequency range.

14-16 37XXXD OM
ALPHABETICAL LISTING CONTENTS

Appendix A
Front Panel Menus,
Alphabetical Listing

Contents

Menu ACAL, AutoCal Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-12

Menu ACAL_SETUP, AutoCal Setup Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-13
Menu ACAL_S11 1 PORT, AutoCal S11 1 Port Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-14
Menu ACAL_S22 1 PORT, AutoCal S22 1 Port Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-15
Menu ACAL_FULL, AutoCal Full Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-16
Menu ACAL_AR, AutoCal Adapter Removal Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-17
Menu ACAL_UTILS, AutoCal Utilities Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-18
Menu ACAL_CHAR, AutoCal Characterization Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-19
Menu APPL, Applications Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-20
Menu BB2, Broadband Select Menu1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-21
Menu BB3, Broadband Select Menu 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-22
Menu BB4, Broadband Select Menu3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-23
Menu BW1 or CAL_BW1, Select Video Bandwidth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-24
Menu C1, Select Calibration Data Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-25
Menu C2, Frequency Range of Calibration (Start/Stop) . . . . . . . . . . . . A-26
Menu C2_CENTER, Frequency Range of Calibration (Center/Span) . . . . . A-27
Menu C2A, Insert Individual Frequencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-28
Menu C2C, Calibration Range—Harmonic Cal for Time Domain . . . . . . . A-29
Menu C2B, Single Point Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-29
Menu C2D, Fill Frequency Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-30
Menu C3, Confirm Calibration Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-31
Menu C3A, Confirm Calibration Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-32
Menu C3B, Confirm Calibration Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-33
Menu C3C, Confirm Calibration Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-34

37XXXD OM A-1
CONTENTS ALPHABETICAL LISTING

Menu C3D, Confirm Calibration Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-35

Menu C3E, Confirm Calibration Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-36
Menu C3F, Confirm Calibration Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-37
Menu C3G, Confirm Calibration Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-38
Menu C3H, Confirm Calibration Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-39
Menu C3I, ConfirmCalibration Parameter 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-40
Menu C3J, ConfirmCalibration Parameter 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-41
Menu C4_P1/C4_P2, Select Connector Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-42
Menu C4A_P1/C4A_P2, Select Connector Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-43
Menu C4B, Select Open and Short Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-44
Menu C5, Select Calibration Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-45
Menu C5A, Select 1 Path 2 Port Calibration Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-46
Menu C5B, Select Transmission Freq Response Calibration Type . . . . . . A-46
Menu C5C, Select Reflection Only Calibration Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-47
Menu C5D, Select Use of Isolation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-47
Menu C6, Select Load Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-48
Menu C6A, Enter Broadband Load Impedance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-48
Menu C6B, Enter Broadband Load Impedance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-48
Menu C7-Series, Begin Calibration Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-49
Menu C8, Slide Load to Position X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-49
Menu C9A, Connect Device 1, Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-50
Menu C9, Connect Throughline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-50
Menu C9C, Connect Device 2, Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-51
Menu C9B, Connect Device 2, Line/Lowband. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-51
Menu C11, Begin Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-52
Menu C11A, Select Calibration Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-53
Menu C12_P1/C12_P2, Enter the Capacitance Coefficients for Open Devices A-54
Menu C12A_P1/C12A_P2, Enter the Offset Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-55
Menu C13, Set Reflection Pairing Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-56
Menu C13A, Set Reflection Pairing Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-57
Menu C13B, Set Reflection Pairing Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-57
Menu C14, Select Port X Offset Short Connecotr Type. . . . . . . . . . . . . A-58
Menu C14A, Select Port X Offset Short . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-58

A-2 37XXXD OM
ALPHABETICAL LISTING CONTENTS

Menu C15, Select Waveguide Kit to Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-59

Menu C15A, Enter Waveguide Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-60
Menu C15B, Enter Waveguide Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-60
Menu C15C, Select Waveguide Kit to Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-61
Menu C15D, Enter Waveguide Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-62
Menu C16A, Enter Microstrip Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-63
Menu C16, Select Microstrip Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-63
Menu C17, Enter Line Impedance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-64
Menu C18, Change LRL/LRM Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-64
Menu C18A, Change LRL/LRM Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-65
Menu C18B, Change LRL/LRM Parameters—Two Band Calibration . . . . . A-66
Menu C19, Change LRL/LRM Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-67
Menu C20, Change Through Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-68
Menu C21A, Port X Offset Short 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-69
Menu C21B, Port X Offset Short 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-70
Menu C21C, Port X Offset Short 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-71
Menu Cal_Completed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-72
Menu Cal_Applied . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-73
Menu Cal_EM, Enhancement Menu for Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-74
Menu CAR1, Adapter Removal 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-75
Menu CAR2, Adapter Removal 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-75
Menu EXT_CAR, Adapter Removal Help Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-76
Menu CAR3, Adapter Removal 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-77
Menu CAR4, Adapter Removal 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-77
Menu CM, Select Display Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-78
Menu DE1, E/O Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-79
Menu EXT_DE1, E/O Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-79
Menu DE2, O/E Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-80
Menu EXT_DE2, O/E Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-80
Menu DE3, E/O Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-81
Menu DE3A, E/O Measurement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-81
Menu DE4, De-embed Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-82
Menu DE4A, De-embed Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-82

37XXXD OM A-3
CONTENTS ALPHABETICAL LISTING

Menu DE5, De-embed O/E S2P . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-83

Menu DE5A, De-embed O/E S2P . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-83
Menu DE6, Generate E/O S2P Characterization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-84
Menu DE7, O/E Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-85
Menu DE7A, O/E Measurement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-85
Menu DE8, Embed/De-embed S2P File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-86
Menu EXT_DE8, Embed/De-embed S2P File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-87
Menu DE9, Embed/De-embed S2P File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-88
Menu DE9A, Embed/De-embed S2P File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-89
Menu DF1, Discrete Fill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-90
Menu DF2, Insert Individual Frequencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-91
Menu DFLT, Default Program Selected . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-92
Menu DG1, Diagnostics 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-93
Menu DG3, Diagnostics 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-94
Menu DG2, Troubleshooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-94
Menu DSK_FD, Floppy Disk Utilities. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-95
Menu DSK_HD, Hard Disk Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-96
Menu DSK2, Select File to Read . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-97
Menu DSK3, Select File to Overwrite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-98
Menu DSK6, Type of Files to Delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-99
Menu DSK7, Select File to Delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-100
Menu DSK8, Type of Files to Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-101
Menu DSK9, Select File to Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-102
Menu DSK10, Capture Tabular Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-103
Menu DSK11, Format Floppy Disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-103
Menu DSK12, Format Hard Disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-103
Menu EM, Enhancement Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-104
Menu GC1, Swept Frequency Gain Compression . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-105
Menu EXT_GC1, Gain Compression Help Menu 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-106
Menu GC2, Swept Power Gain Compression 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-107
Menu EXT_GC2, Gain Compression Help Menu 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-108
Menu GC3, Swept Power Gain Compression 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-109
Menu EXT_GC3, Gain Compression Help Menu 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-110

A-4 37XXXD OM
ALPHABETICAL LISTING CONTENTS

Menu GC4, Multiple Frequency Gain Compression 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . A-111

Menu GC4_ABORT, Multiple Frequency Gain Compression 2 . . . . . . . . A-111
Menu EXT_GC4, Gain Compression Help Menu 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-112
Menu GC_DF2, Swept Power Frequencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-113
Menu EXT_GC_DF2, Gain Compression Help Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . A-114
Menu GC_NORM, Normalize S21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-114
Menu GC_RCVR, Receiver Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-115
Menu GC_SU2, Swept Power Gain Compression 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-116
Menu GC_SU8A, Calibrate for Linear Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-117
Menu GC_SU8A-ABORT, Abort Calibrate for Linear Power . . . . . . . . . A-118
Menu EXT_GC_SU8A, Gain Compression Help Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . A-118
Menu GC_S21OPT, S21 Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-119
Menu GP5, Select Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-120
Menu GP7, Display GPIB Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-121
Menu GP8, Network Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-122
Menu GT1/CAL_GT1, Select Graph Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-123
Menu GT2/CAL_GT2, Select Graph Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-124
Menu L1, Set Limits—Magnitude and Phase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-125
Menu L2, Set Limits—Linear Polar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-126
Menu L3, Set Limits—Linear Polar/Smith Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-127
Menu L4, Set Limits—Log Magnitude. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-128
Menu L5, Set Limits—Phase. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-129
Menu L6, Set Limits—Log Polar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-130
Menu L7, Set Limits—Group Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-131
Menu L8, Set Limits—Linear Magnitude . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-132
Menu L9, Set Limits—Linear Magnitude and Phase . . . . . . . . . . . . A-133
Menu L10, Set Limits—Real Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-134
Menu L11, Set Limits—Imaginary Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-135
Menu L12, Set Limits—Real and Imaginary Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-136
Menu L13, Set Limits—SWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-137
Menu L14, Set Limits—Power Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-138
Menu LD1, Define Upper Limit Segment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-139
Menu LD2, Define Lower Limit Segmen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-140

37XXXD OM A-5
CONTENTS ALPHABETICAL LISTING

Menu LF1, Set Limit Frequencies—Log Mag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-141

Menu LF2, Set Limit Frequencies—Phase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-142
Menu LF3, Set Limit Frequencies—Group Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-143
Menu LF4, Set Limit Frequencies—Linear Mag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-144
Menu LF5, Set Limit Frequencies—SWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-145
Menu LF6, Set Limit Frequencies—Real . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-146
Menu LF7, Set Limit Frequencies—Imaginary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-147
Menu LF8, Set Limit Frequencies—Power Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-148
Menu LSX, Segmented Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-149
Menu LTST, Test Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-150
Menu M1, Set Markers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-151
Menu M2, Select DREF Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-152
Menu M3, Select Readout Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-153
Menu M4, Readout Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-154
Menu M5, Set DREF Marker Readout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-155
Menu M6, Marker X All Displayed Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-156
Menu M7, Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-157
Menu M8, Filter Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-158
Menu M8A, Filter Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-159
Menu M9, Marker Readout Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-160
Menu MMW1, Millimeter Wave Test Set Band . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-161
Menu MMW2, Millimeter Wave Test Set Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-162
Menu MMW3, Millimeter Wave Test Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-163
Menu MMW4, mm Wave Band. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-164
Menu EXT_MMW4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-165
Menu MRG1, Merge Calibration Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-166
Menu EXT_MRG1, Merge Calibration Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-166
Menu MRG2, Merge Calibration Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-167
Menu MRG3, Merge Calibration Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-167
Menu NO1, Trace Memory Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-168
Menu NO2, Select Trace Math . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-169
Menu NO3, Trace Memory Disk Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-169
Menu NXN, NxN Solution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-170

A-6 37XXXD OM
ALPHABETICAL LISTING CONTENTS

Menu EXT_NXN, NxN Solution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-171

Menu OM1, Multiple Source Control Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-172
Menu OM1A, Source Lock Polarity Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-173
Menu OM2, Define Bands Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-174
Menu OM3, Edit System Equations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-175
Menu OPTNS, Select Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-176
Menu ORP1, Rear Panel Output Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-177
Menu ORP2, Select Output Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-178
Menu OTS1, Test Set Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-178
Menu OTS2, Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-179
Menu PC1, Select Polar Chart Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-180
Menu PD1, Parameter Definition 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-181
Menu PD2, Parameter Ratio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-182
Menu PD3, Parameter Definition 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-183
Menu PL1, Plot Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-184
Menu PL2, Select Plot Size. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-185
Menu PL3, Select Pen Colors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-186
Menu PM1, Select Data Output Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-187
Menu PM2, Data Output Headers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-188
Menu PM2A, Data Output Headers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-189
Menu PM3, Tabular Printer Output Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-190
Menu PM3A, Graphical Printer Output Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-191
Menu PM4, Disk Output Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-192
Menu PM4A, Disk File Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-193
Menu PM5, Printer Type, Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-194
Menu RCV1, Receiver Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-195
Menu RCV1_WARN, Standard Receiver Mode Warning . . . . . . . . . . . A-195
Menu RCV2, User Defined Receiver Mode Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-196
Menu RCV2_WARN, User Defined Receiver Mode Warning . . . . . . . . . A-197
Menu RCV3, Standard Receiver Mode Warning Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . A-198
Menu RCV4, User Defined Receiver Mode Warning Menu . . . . . . . . . . A-199
Menu RD1, Set Reference Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-200
Menu RD2, Set Dielectric Constant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-201

37XXXD OM A-7
CONTENTS ALPHABETICAL LISTING

Menu SC, Source Configure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-202

Menu SP, Select S Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-203
Menu SR1, Save/Recall Front Panel Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-204
Menu SR2, Recall or Save . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-205
Menu SR3, Save to Internal memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-206
Menu SS1 or CAL_SS1, Set Scaling 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-207
Menu SS2 or CAL_SS2, Set Scaling 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-208
Menu SS3Z/SS3Y or CAL_SS3Z/CALSS3Y, Set Scaling 3 . . . . . . . . . . A-209
Menu SS4 or CAL_SS4, Set Scaling 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-210
Menu SS5 or CAL_SS5, Set Scaling 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-211
Menu SS6 or CAL_SS6, Set Scaling 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-212
Menu SS7 or CAL_SS7, Set Scaling 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-213
Menu SS8 or CAL_SS8, Set Scaling 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-214
Menu SS9 or CAL_SS9, Set Scaling 9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-215
Menu SS10 or CAL_SS10, Set Scaling 10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-216
Menu SS11 or CAL_SS11, Set Scaling 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-217
Menu SS12 or CAL_SS12, Set Scaling 12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-218
Menu SS13 or CAL_SS13, Set Scaling 13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-219
Menu SS14, Set Scaling 14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-220
Menu SU1, Sweep Setup 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-221
Menu SU1_CENTER, Sweep Setup 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-222
Menu SU2 or CAL_SU2, Sweep Setup 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-223
Menu SU2A or CAL_SU2A, Sweep Setup 2A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-224
Menu SU3, Single-Point Measurement Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-225
Menu SU3A, Swept-Power Measurement Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-226
Menu SU4, Select Function for Hold Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-227
Menu SU5, Frequency Marker Sweep . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-228
Menu SU6, Frequency Marker C.W. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-229
Menu SU8 or CAL_SU8, Calibrate For Flat Test Port Power. . . . . . . . . A-230
Menu EXT_SU8 Flat Power Calibration Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . A-231
Menu SU9, Number of Data Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-232
Menu SU9A, Number of Data Points 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-233
Menu TD1, Domain (Frequency/Display) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-234

A-8 37XXXD OM
ALPHABETICAL LISTING CONTENTS

Menu TD2_LP_TIME, Lowpass Time Domain Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . A-235

Menu TD2_LP_DIST, Lowpass Distance Display Setup . . . . . . . . . . . A-236
Menu TD2_BP_TIME, Bandpass Time Domain Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . A-237
Menu TD2_BP_DIST, Bandpass Distance Display Setup . . . . . . . . . . A-238
Menu TD3_BP, Bandpass Time Domain Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-239
Menu TD3_LP, Lowpass Time Domain Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-239
Menu TD4_TIME & TD4_DIST, Gate (Distance/Time) . . . . . . . . . . . A-240
Menu TD5_WINDOW, Shape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-241
Menu TD5_GATE, Shape. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-241
Menu TD6, Set D.C. Term for Low Pass Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-242
Menu TD7_TIME, Time Marker Sweep. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-243
Menu TD7_DIST, Distance Marker Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-244
Menu TRIG, Triggers Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-245
Menu U1, Utility Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-246
Menu U2, Display Instrument State. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-247
Menu U3, Calibration Component Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-249
Menu EXT_U3, SSLT and SSST Waveguide Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . A-249
Menu U4, Display Installed Calibration Components Information 1 . . . . A-250
Menu EXT_U4, SOLT Calibration Kit Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-251
Menu U4A, Display Installed Calibration Components Information 2 . . . A-252
Menu U4B, Display Installed Calibration Components Information 3. . . . A-253
Menu EXT_U4B, SSLT and SSST Calibration Kit Information . . . . . . . A-254
Menu U5, Color Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-255
Menu U5, Color Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-256
Menu U6, Set Date/Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-257
372XXD, 373XXD Rear Panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-4
Pinout Diagram, GPIB and Dedicated GPIB Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . B-6
Pinout Diagram, Printer Connector (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-7
Pinout Diagram, External I/O Connector (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-8
Pinout Diagram, External I/O Connector (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-9
Pinout Diagram, VGA IN/OUT Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-10
Pinout Diagram, Serial Port Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-11
Pinout Diagram, Test Set Control Out Connector (Option 12) . . . . . . . . B-12

37XXXD OM A-9
CONTENTS ALPHABETICAL LISTING

Pinout Diagram, External SCSI-2 (Optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-13

A-10 37XXXD OM
 Appendix A
Front Panel Menus,
Alphabetical Listing
A-1 INTRODUCTION This appendix provides descriptions for all menu choices. Menus are
arranged in alphabetical order by their name (C1, SU2, DSK1, etc.).

A-2 MENUS A listing of all of the menus contained in this appendix is provided in
the contents section at the beginning of this appendix. This listing
gives the menu's call sign, name, and page number.

37XXXD OM A-11
A ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

AUTOCAL None

AUTOCAL TYPE Indicates the current type of AutoCal setup. ACF2P?

XXXXXXXX

CHANGE Calls menu ACAL_SETUP, which lets you change the None
AUTOCAL SETUP AutoCal setup.

START AUTOCAL Calls menu CAL_SEQ, which starts the AutoCal None
calibration sequencing immediately using the current
AutoCal setup.

THRU UPDATE None

CONNECT THROUGH Instruction for connecting the AutoCal to the VNA for Thru None
LINE BETWEEN Update.
PORTS 1 AND 2

NUMBER OF AVGS Enter the number of averages to be used during the Thru ACTUAVG;
XXX Update process (default 4 averages). ACTUAVG?

START THRU UPDATE Calls menu CAL_SEQ, which starts the Thru calibration BEGTU
update.

PRESS <ENTER> Press the Enter key to select or switch. None

TO SELECT
OR SWITCH

Menu ACAL, AutoCal Menu

A-12 37XXXD OM
ALPHABETICAL LISTING A

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

AUTOCAL SETUP None

LINE TYPE Switch between the line type used with the AutoCal LTC; LTW; LTX?
COAXIAL/WAVEGUIDE module.

WAVEGUIDE CUTOFF Enter the Waveguide Cutoff frequency if the Waveguide WCO; WCO?
XX.XXXXXX GHz Line Type is selected.

SWITCH AVERAGING Enter an appropriate amount of SWITCH AVERAGING ACSW; ACSW?

XXXX (recommend 4 for the electronic modules, and 16 for the
electromechanical modules).

NUMBER OF AVGS None

REFLECTION Enter the number of averages to be used with the reflection ACRFL; ACRFL?
XXXX standards in the AutoCal module (default 10 averages).

LOAD Enter the number of averages to be used with the load ACLO; ACLO?
XXXX standard in the AutoCal module (default 10 averages).

THRU Enter the number of averages to be used with the thru ACTU; ACTU?
XXXX standard (default 4 averages).

ISOLATION Enter the number of averages to be used with the isolation ACISO; ACISO?;
XXXX standard in the AutoCal module (default 32 averages). ACIAF?; ACIAX?

AUTOCAL TYPES Select the type of AutoCal calibration to perform.

S11 1 PORT Calls menu ACAL_S11, for more setup. ACS11; ACX?
S22 1 PORT Calls menu ACAL_S22, for more setup. ACS22; ACX?
FULL 2 PORT Calls menu ACAL_FULL, for more setup. ACSF2P; ACX?
ADAPTER REMOVAL Calls menu ACAL_AR, for more setup. ACADR; ACX?

Menu ACAL_SETUP, AutoCal Setup Menu

37XXXD OM A-13
A ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

AUTOCAL None
S11 1 PORT

PORT 1 Switch between the side of the AutoCal module which is ACL1R2; ACR1L2
CONNECTION connected to Port 1 (default LEFT).
LEFT/RIGHT

TEST SIGNALS Calls menu CAL_SU2, which lets you enter calibrate Flat None
Test Port Power or change source power(s) and attenuator
settings.

START AUTOCAL Calls menu CAL_SEQ, which starts the AutoCal calibration None
sequencing.

PRESS <ENTER> Press the Enter key to select or switch. None

TO SELECT
OR SWITCH

Menu ACAL_S11 1 PORT, AutoCal S11 1 Port Menu

A-14 37XXXD OM
ALPHABETICAL LISTING A

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

AUTOCAL None
S22 1 PORT

PORT 2 Switch between the side of the AutoCal module which is ACR1L2; ACL1R2
CONNECTION connected to Port 2 (default RIGHT).
LEFT/RIGHT

TEST SIGNALS Calls menu CAL_SU2, which lets you enter calibrate Flat None
Test Port Power or change source power(s) and attenuator
settings.

START AUTOCAL Calls menu CAL_SEQ, which starts the AutoCal calibration None
sequencing.

PRESS <ENTER> Press the Enter key to select or switch. None

TO SELECT
OR SWITCH

Menu ACAL_S22 1 PORT, AutoCal S22 1 Port Menu

37XXXD OM A-15
A ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

AUTOCAL None
FULL 2 PORTS

ISOLATION None
AVERAGING

OMIT Select to omit the isolation step. ACOMIT

DEFAULT Select to use the Default value during the isolation step. ACDEF

AVERAGING Select for user defined averaging factor during the isolation ACIAF; ACIAF?
FACTOR step.
XXXX

THRU TYPE Switch between the Thru in the AutoCal module ACF2TT;
CALIBRATION/TRUE (CALIBRATOR) and your own port-to-port Thru (TRUE) to ACF2TC;
be use in the Thru Update (default CALIBRATOR). ACF2TX?

PORT CONFIG Switch between the side of the AutoCal module which is ACL1R2; ACRIL2
L=1, R=2 connected to Port 1 and Port 2 (default LEFT connected to
R=1, L=2 Port 1, RIGHT connected to Port 2).

TEST SIGNALS Calls menu CAL_SU2, which lets you enter calibrate Flat None
Test Port Power or change source power(s) and attenuator
settings.

START AUTOCAL Calls menu CAL_SEQ, which starts the AutoCal calibration None
sequencing.

PRESS <ENTER> Press the Enter key to select or switch. None

TO SELECT
OR SWITCH

Menu ACAL_FULL, AutoCal Full Menu

A-16 37XXXD OM
ALPHABETICAL LISTING A

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

AUTOCAL None
ADAPTER REMOVAL

ISOLATION None
AVERAGING

OMIT Select to omit the isolation step. ACOMIT

DEFAULT Select to use the Default value during the isolation step. ACDEF

AVERAGING Select for user defined averaging factor during the isolation ACIAF
FACTOR step.
XXXX

PORT CONFIG Switch between the side of the AutoCal module and ACAL1R2;
ADAPT & L=1, R=2 adapter which is connected to Port 1 and Port 2 (default ACL1AR2;
L=1, ADAPT&R=2 LEFT connected to Adapter which is then connected to ACAR1L2;
ADAPT&R=1, L=2 Port 1, RIGHT connected to Port 2). ACR1AL2;
R=1, ADAPT & L=2 ACARP?

TEST SIGNALS Calls menu CAL_SU2, which lets you enter calibrate Flat None
Test Port Power or change source power(s) and attenuator
settings.

START AUTOCAL Calls menu CAL_SEQ, which starts the AutoCal calibration None
sequencing.

PRESS <ENTER> Press the Enter key to select or switch. None

TO SELECT
OR SWITCH

Menu ACAL_AR, AutoCal Adapter Removal Menu

37XXXD OM A-17
A ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

AUTOCAL None
UTILITIES

AUTOCAL Calls menu ACAL_CHAR, which lets you set None

CHARACTERIZATION characterization values.

SAVE Saves file to the hard disk. SAVE

TO HARD DISK

SAVE Saves file to the floppy disk. SAVE

TO FLOPPY DISK

RECALL Recalls a file from the hard disk. RECALL

FROM HARD DISK

RECALL Recalls a file from the floppy disk. RECALL

FROM FLOPPY DISK

PRESS <ENTER> Press the Enter key to select. None

TO SELECT

Menu ACAL_UTILS, AutoCal Utilities Menu

A-18 37XXXD OM
ALPHABETICAL LISTING A

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

AUTOCAL None
CHARACTERIZATION

SWITCH AVERAGING Enter an appropriate amount of SWITCH AVERAGING ACSW; ACSW?

XXXX (recommend 4 for the electronic modules, and 16 for the
electromechanical modules).

PORT CONFIG Switch between the side of the AutoCal module which is ACL1R2;
L=1, R=2 connected to Port 1 and Port 2 (default LEFT connected to ACR1L2;
R=1, L=2 Port 1, RIGHT connected to Port 2). ACARP?

NUMBER OF AVGS None

REFLECTION Enter the number of averages to be used with the reflection ACRFL; ACRFL?
XXXX standards in the AutoCal module (default 10 averages).

LOAD Enter the number of averages to be used with the load ACLO; ACLO?
XXXX standard in the AutoCal module (default 10 averages).

THRU Enter the number of averages to be used with the thru ACTUAVG;
XXXX standard (default 4 averages). ACTUAVG?

ISOLATION Enter the number of averages to be used with the isolation ACISO; ACISO?
XXXX standard in the AutoCal module (default 32 averages).

START AUTOCAL Calls menu CAL_SEQ, which starts the AutoCal None
CHARACTERIZATION characterization sequencing.

PRESS <ENTER> Press the Enter key to select or switch. None

TO SELECT
OR SWITCH

Menu ACAL_CHAR, AutoCal Characterization Menu

37XXXD OM A-19
A ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

APPLICATIONS None

ADAPTER REMOVAL Calls menu CAR1, which provides options for removing an None
adapter.

SWEPT FREQUENCY Calls menu GC1, which provides options for gain None
GAIN COMPRESSION compression.

SWEPT POWER Calls menu GC2, which provides options for gain None
GAIN COMPRESSION compression.

NxN SOLUTION Calls menu NXN, which lets users select between three None
pairs of devices. They can then solve for the characteristics
of one of the pairs using the NxN simultaneous equation
technique.

E/O MEASUREMENT Calls menu DE1 and EXT_DE1, which provide information None
and options for the E/O measurement application.

O/E MEASUREMENT Calls menu DE2 and EXT_DE2, which provide information None
and options for the O/E measurement application.

EMBED/DE-EMBED Calls menu DE8, which lets users select files to embed. None

MERGE CAL FILES Calls menu MRG1. None

PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the ENTER key implements your selection. None
TO SELECT

Menu APPL, Applications Menu

A-20 37XXXD OM
ALPHABETICAL LISTING B

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

BROADBAND BDMM
TEST SET MODULES

PORT 1 MODULE Switch selection for port 1 module. The 3742 is standard P1MMT; P1MMR;
3740/41/42/NONE for Broadband systems. P1MMA;P1MMN;
P1MMX?

PORT 2 MODULE Switch selection for port 2 module. The 3742 is standard P2MMT; P2MMR;
3740/41/42/NONE for Broadband systems. P2MMA;P2MMN;
P2MMX?

ACCEPT CONFIG Calls menu BB3. None

PRESS <ENTER> Press the Enter key to select or switch. None

TO SELECT
OR SWITCH

PRESS <CLEAR> Press the Clear key to abort the selection. None
TO ABORT

Menu BB2, Broadband Select Menu1

37XXXD OM A-21
B ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

BROADBAND SELBB
TEST SET

BROADBAND BAND 2 Provides information for selections made in menu BB2 None
WR10 EXTENDED (previous menu).

PORT 1 MODULE P1MMT; P1MMR;

3742 P1MMA;P1MMN;
P1MMX?

PORT 2 MODULE P2MMT; P2MMR;

3742 P2MMA;P2MMN;
P2MMX?

WARNING None
CONTINUING
MAY INVALIDATE
CURRENT
SETUP AND
CALIBRATION

PRESS <ENTER> Implements your broadband selection and calls menu SU1 None
TO CONTINUE or SU3.

PRESS <CLEAR> Pressing the Clear key aborts your broadband system None
TO ABORT selection and calls menu OST1.

Menu BB3, Broadband Select Menu 2

A-22 37XXXD OM
ALPHABETICAL LISTING B

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

BROADBAND BAND 2 None

BAND 2 START FREQ Displays the band 2 start frequency (fixed value). BST?
65.000000000 GHz

BAND 2 STOP FREQ Displays the band 2 stop frequency. BSP; BSP?
110.000000000 GHz

DEFAULT RANGE Restores the broadband band 2 frequency range to default. None

ACCEPT RANGE Accepts the new broadband band 2 frequency range. SVBMM

PRESS <ENTER> Implements your broadband selection. None

TO SELECT

PRESS <CLEAR> Aborts your broadband selection and calls menu SU1 or None
TO ABORT SU3.

Menu BB4, Broadband Select Menu3

37XXXD OM A-23
B ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

SELECT VIDEO None

BANDWIDTH

MAXIMUM Selects video bandwidth to be 10 kHz. IF4; IFX?

(10 kHz)

NORMAL Selects video bandwidth to be 1 kHz. IF3; IFN; IFX?

(1 kHz)

REDUCED Selects video bandwidth to be 100 Hz. IF2; IFR; IFX?

(100 Hz)

MINIMUM Selects video bandwidth to be 10 Hz. IF1; IFM; IFX?

(10 Hz)

PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the ENTER key implements your selection. The None
TO SELECT “AND RESUME CAL” text appears when menu is accessed
AND RESUME CAL during calibration.

Menu BW1 or CAL_BW1, Select Video Bandwidth

A-24 37XXXD OM
ALPHABETICAL LISTING C

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

SELECT None
CALIBRATION
DATA POINTS

NORMAL Selects the standard calibration from a start to a stop NOC

(1601 POINTS frequency that provides for up to 1601 equally spaced
MAXIMUM) (except the last) points of data for the defined frequency
range.

C.W. Selects the single frequency (C.W.) calibration sequence CWC

(1 POINT) that provides for 1 data point at a selected frequency.

N-DISCRETE Selects the discrete frequency calibration mode that lets DFC
FREQUENCIES you input a list of 2 to 1601 individual data point
(2 TO 1601 frequencies.
POINTS)

TIME DOMAIN Selects the calibration mode for low-pass time-domain TDC
(HARMONIC) processing.

PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the ENTER key implements your selection. None
TO SELECT

Menu C1, Select Calibration Data Points

37XXXD OM A-25
C ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

FREQUENCY RANGE None

OF CALIBRATION

START Enter the sweep-start frequency for calibration. If you SRT; SRT?
XXX.XXXXXXXXXGHz desire, you can change this frequency for your
measurement when you reach menu SU1, which follows
the final calibration menu. The only restriction is that your
start measurement frequency be greater than or equal to
your start calibration frequency.

STOP Enter the sweep-stop frequency for calibration. Like the STP; STP?
XXX.XXXXXXXXX GHz start frequency, this too can be changed for your
measurement. The stop frequency must be lower than or
equal to your stop calibration frequency. In other words,
your measurement frequency span must be equal to or
smaller than your calibration frequency span.

SET CENTER/SPAN Calls menu C2_CENTER, which lets you enter a center CNTR; SPAN
frequency and span range.

XXX DATA POINTS The program automatically sets the step size, based on the ONP
XXX.XXXXXXXXXGHz selected start and stop frequencies. The step size will be
STEPSIZE the smallest possible (largest number of points up to a
maximum of 1601), based on the chosen frequency span.

MAXIMUM NUMBER
OF DATA POINT(S)

1601 MAX PTS NP1601

801 MAX PTS NP801
401 MAX PTS NP401
201 MAX PTS NP201
101 MAX PTS NP101
51 MAX PTS NP51

NEXT CAL STEP Displays the next menu in the calibration sequence. None

PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the ENTER key implements your menu selection. None
TO SELECT

Menu C2, Frequency Range of Calibration (Start/Stop)

A-26 37XXXD OM
ALPHABETICAL LISTING C

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

CAL FREQ RANGE None

CENTER Enter the center frequency for calibration. If you desire, you CNTR; CNTR?
XXX.XXXXXXXXXGHz can change this frequency for your measurement when you
reach menu SU1_CENTER, which follows the final
calibration menu.

SPAN Enter the span width for calibration. Like the start SPAN; SPAN?
XXX.XXXXXXXXX GHz frequency, this too can be changed for your measurement.

SET START/STOP Calls menu C2, which lets you enter a start and stop SRT; STP
frequency.

XXX DATA POINTS The program automatically sets the step size, based on the ONP
XXX.XXXXXXXXXGHz selected center and span frequencies. The step size will be
STEPSIZE the smallest possible (largest number of points up to a
maximum of 1601), based on the chosen frequency span.

MAXIMUM NUMBER
OF DATA POINT(S)

1601 MAX PTS NP1601

801 MAX PTS NP801
401 MAX PTS NP401
201 MAX PTS NP201
101 MAX PTS NP101
51 MAX PTS NP51

NEXT CAL STEP Displays the next menu in the calibration sequence. None

PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the ENTER key implements your menu selection. None
TO SELECT

Menu C2_CENTER, Frequency Range of Calibration (Center/Span)

37XXXD OM A-27
C ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

INSERT None
INDIVIDUAL
FREQUENCIES

INPUT A FREQ, DFQ

PRESS <ENTER>
TO INSERT

NEXT FREQ. Move the cursor here and enter the next frequency for None
XXX.XXXXXXXXXGHz which you wish calibration data taken. If the AUTO INCR
option is ON, pressing Enter automatically increments the
calibration frequency by the interval in GHz that appears
below the option.

XXXX FREQS. Shows the number of frequencies that you have entered None
ENTERED, and reports the value of the last frequency entered.
LAST FREQ WAS
XXX.XXXXXXXXXGHz

AUTO INCR ON (OFF) Move the cursor here and press ENTER to switch the None
XXX.XXXXXXXXXGHz Auto-Increment mode on or off. If AUTO INCR is on, you
may enter the frequency spacing.

PREVIOUS MENU Calls menu C2D. None

PRESS <ENTER> Pressing Enter will cause actions as described above. None
TO SELECT
OR TURN ON/OFF

Menu C2A, Insert Individual Frequencies

A-28 37XXXD OM
ALPHABETICAL LISTING C

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

SINGLE POINT None

C.W. CALIBRATION

C.W. FREQ Move cursor here and enter the frequency for which CWF; CWF?
XXX.XXXXXXXXXGHz calibration is to be done.

NEXT CAL STEP Move cursor here and press ENTER when finished. None

PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection. None
TO SELECT

Menu C2B, Single Point Calibration

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

CALIBRATION None
RANGE

HARMONIC CAL None

FOR TIME DOMAIN

START (STEP) Move cursor here to enter the desired start frequency. This SRT; SRT?
XXX.XXXXXXXXXGHz frequency also will be used as the frequency increment.

APPROXIMATE STOP Move the cursor here to enter the approximate desired stop APRXSTP?
XXX.XXXXXXXXX GHz frequency. The frequency will be adjusted to the nearest
harmonic multiple of the start frequency.

USING ABOVE The program automatically indicates the number of data ONP; STP?
START AND STOP points and the true (harmonic) stop frequency.
WILL RESULT IN
XXX DATA POINTS
XXX.XXXXXXXXX GHz
TRUE STOP FREQ

NEXT CAL STEP Move the cursor here and press Enter when finished. None

PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection. None
TO SELECT

Menu C2C, Calibration Range—Harmonic Cal for Time Domain

37XXXD OM A-29
C ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

None
DISCRETE FILL

INPUT START, This menu is used to create one or more ranges of discrete None
INCR, POINTS, equally spaced frequency points for calibration.
THEN SELECT
“FILL RANGE”

START FREQ Enter the first frequency of the range. FRS; FRS?
XXX.XXXXXXXXX GHz

INCREMENT Enter the increment (step size) between one frequency and FRI; FRI
XXX.XXXXXXXXX GHz the next.

NUMBER OF PTS Enter the number of frequency points in the range. FRP; FRP?
XXXX POINT(S)

STOP FREQ Enter the stop frequency, in GHz. None

XXX.XXXXXXXXX GHz

FILL RANGE Moving the cursor here and pressing ENTER fills the range FIL
( XXXX ENTERED) and shows the number of frequencies selected (in
NUMBER OF PTS above).

INDIVIDUAL Calls menu C2A, which allows you to set the individual DFQ
FREQ INSERT frequencies.

CLEAR ALL Clears all entries displayed above. FRC

FINISHED Calls menu C3, the next menu in the calibration sequence. None
NEXT CAL STEP

PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection. None
TO SELECT

Menu C2D, Fill Frequency Ranges

A-30 37XXXD OM
ALPHABETICAL LISTING C

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

CONFIRM Used for SOST method and coaxial line type. None
CALIBRATION
PARAMETERS

PORT 1 CONN Calls menu C4_P1 or C4A_P1, which displays the Port 1 None
XXXXXXXX test port connector type to be used during OSL calibration.
This should agree with the connector type that both your
calibration components and the test device mate with.
Move cursor here and press Enter to display menu used to
change connector type.

PORT 2 CONN Calls menu C4_P2 or C4A_P2, which displays the Port 2 None
XXXXXXXX test port connector type to be used during OSL calibration.
This should agree with the connector type that both your
calibration components and the test device mate with.
Move cursor here and press Enter to display menu used to
change connector type.

REFLECTION Calls menu C13, which lets you select the pairing (mixed or None
PAIRING matched) for the types of reflection devices (open/short)
XXXXXX that you will use on Ports 1 and 2 for calibration.

LOAD TYPE Calls menu C6, which displays type of load selected for None
XXXXXXXX calibration—broadband fixed or sliding. Move cursor here
and press ENTER to display menu used to change load
type.

THROUGH LINE Calls menu C20, which lets you enter throughline None
PARAMETERS parameters—including offset length and loss equation
coefficients.

REFERENCE Calls menu C17, which lets you choose the reference None
IMPEDANCE impedance value (1 mW to 1 kW) for the devices connected
to Ports 1 and 2 for calibration. Default value is 50W.

TEST SIGNALS Calls menu CAL_SU2, which lets you enter calibrate Flat None
Test Port Power or change source power(s) and attenuator
settings.

START CAL Starts the standard (OSL) calibration sequence using BEG
coaxial standards.

PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection. None
TO SELECT
OR CHANGE

Menu C3, Confirm Calibration Parameters

37XXXD OM A-31
C ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

CONFIRM Used for Offset-Short method and coaxial line type. None
CALIBRATION
PARAMETERS

PORT 1 CONN Calls menu C14 to select a connector offset short kit for None
W1-CONN (M) Port1.

PORT 2 CONN Calls menu C14 to select a connector offset short kit for None
W1-CONN (M) Port2.

REFLECTION Calls menu C13A for a SSLT calibration or calls None

PAIRING menu C13B for a SSST calibration, which lets you select
XXXXXXXX the pairing (mixed or matched) for the types of reflection
devices (open/short) that you will use on Ports 1 and 2 for
calibration.

LOAD TYPE Calls menu C6, which displays type of load selected for None
XXXXXXXX calibration—broadband, fixed, or sliding. Move cursor here
and press Enter to display the menu used to change the
load type.

THROUGH LINE Calls menu C20, which lets you enter throughline None
PARAMETERS parameters—including offset length and loss equation
coefficients.

REFERENCE Calls menu C15, which lets you choose the reference None
IMPEDANCE impedance value (1 mW to 1 MW) for the devices connected
to Ports 1 and 2 for calibration. Default value is 50W.

TEST SIGNALS Calls menu CAL_SU2, which lets you enter calibrate Flat None
Test Port Power or change source power(s) and attenuator
settings.

START CAL Starts the offset-short calibration sequence using coaxial BEG
standards.

PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection. None
TO SELECT
OR CHANGE

Menu C3A, Confirm Calibration Parameters

A-32 37XXXD OM
ALPHABETICAL LISTING C

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

CONFIRM Used for Offset-Short method and waveguide line type. None
CALIBRATION
PARAMETERS

WAVEGUIDE Calls menu C15, which lets you enter waveguide None
PARAMETERS parameters.
XXXXXX

REFLECTION Calls menu C13A for a SSLT calibration or calls None

PAIRING menu C13B for a SSST calibration, which lets you select
XXXXXX the pairing (mixed or matched) for the types of reflection
devices (open/short) that you will use on Ports 1 and 2 for
calibration.

LOAD TYPE Calls menu C6, which displays type of load selected for None
XXXXXXXX calibration—broadband fixed or sliding. Load type does not
appear for the SSST method.

THROUGH LINE Calls menu C20, which lets you enter throughline None
PARAMETERS parameters—including offset length and loss equation
coefficients.

TEST SIGNALS Calls menu CAL_SU2, which lets you calibrate Flat Test None
Port Power or change source power(s) and attenuator
settings.

START CAL Starts the offset-short calibration sequence using BEG

waveguide standards.

PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection. None
TO SELECT
OR CHANGE

Menu C3B, Confirm Calibration Parameters

37XXXD OM A-33
C ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

CONFIRM Used for Offset-Short method and microstrip line type. None
CALIBRATION
PARAMETERS

PORT 1 SHORTS Calls menu C14A to select an offset short kit for Port 1. None
USER DEFINED

PORT 2 SHORTS Calls menu C14A to select an offset short kit for Port 2. None
USER DEFINED

REFLECTION Calls menu C13A for a SSLT calibration or calls None

PAIRING menu C13B for a SSST calibration, which lets you select
XXXXXX the pairing (mixed or matched) for the types of reflection
devices (open/short) that you will use on Ports 1 and 2 for
calibration.

LOAD Calls menu C6A, which lets you select an impedance type None
IMPEDANCES and/or enter an impedance value.

THROUGH LINE Calls menu C20, which lets you enter throughline None
PARAMETERS parameters—including offset length and loss equation
coefficients.

MICROSTRIP Calls menu C16, which lets you change microstrip None
PARAMETERS parameters.
XXXXXXXXXXX

TEST SIGNALS Calls menu CAL_SU2, which lets you enter calibrate Flat None
Test Port Power or change source power(s) and attenuator
settings.

START CAL Starts the offset-short calibration sequence using microstrip BEG
standards.

PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection. None
TO SELECT
OR CHANGE

Menu C3C, Confirm Calibration Parameters

A-34 37XXXD OM
ALPHABETICAL LISTING C

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

CONFIRM Used for SOLT method and microstrip line type. None
CALIBRATION
PARAMETERS

PORT 1 OPEN/SHORT Calls menu C4B, which is used to select an offset short kit None
XXXXXXXX for Port 1.

PORT 2 OPEN/SHORT Calls menu C4B, which is used to select an offset short kit None
XXXXXXXX for Port 2.

REFLECTION Calls menu C13A for a SSLT calibration or calls None

PAIRING menu C13B for a SSST calibration, which lets you select
XXXXXXXX the pairing (mixed or matched) for the types of reflection
devices (open/short) that you will use on Ports 1 and 2 for
calibration.

LOAD Calls menu C6A, which lets you select an impedance type None
IMPEDANCE and/or enter an impedance value.
XXXXXXXX

THROUGH LINE Calls menu C20, which lets you enter throughline None
PARAMETERS parameters—including offset length and loss equation
XXXXXXXX coefficients.

MICROSTRIP Calls menu C16, which lets you change microstrip None
PARAMETERS parameters.
XXXXXXXX

TEST SIGNALS Calls menu CAL_SU2, which lets you enter calibrate Flat None
Test Port Power or change source power(s) and attenuator
settings.

START CAL Starts the standard calibration sequence using microstrip BEG
standards.

PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection. None
TO SELECT
OR CHANGE

Menu C3D, Confirm Calibration Parameters

37XXXD OM A-35
C ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

CONFIRM Used for LRL/LRM method, coaxial line type. None

CALIBRATION
PARAMETERS

LRL/LRM Calls menu C18, which lets you change LRL/LRM None
PARAMETERS parameters.

REFERENCE Calls menu C17, which lets you change the reference None
IMPEDANCE impedance of the coaxial line standard to other than 50
ohms (default).

TEST SIGNALS Calls menu CAL_SU2, which lets you enter calibrate Flat None
Test Port Power or change source power(s) and attenuator
settings.

START CAL Starts the LRL/LRM calibration sequence using coaxial BEG
standards.

PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection. None
TO SELECT
OR CHANGE

Menu C3E, Confirm Calibration Parameters

A-36 37XXXD OM
ALPHABETICAL LISTING C

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

CONFIRM Used for LRL/LRM method, waveguide line type. None

CALIBRATION
PARAMETERS

LRL/LRM Calls menu C18, which lets you change LRL/LRM None
PARAMETERS parameters.

WAVEGUIDE Calls menu 15B, which lets you enter a waveguide cutoff None
CUTOFF FREQ frequency.

TEST SIGNALS Calls menu CAL_SU2, which lets you enter calibrate Flat None
Test Port Power or change source power(s) and attenuator
settings.

START CAL Starts the LRL/LRM calibration sequence using waveguide BEG
standards.

PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection. None
TO SELECT
OR CHANGE

Menu C3F, Confirm Calibration Parameters

37XXXD OM A-37
C ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

CONFIRM Used for LRL/LRM method, microstrip line type. None

CALIBRATION
PARAMETERS

LRL/LRM Calls menu C18, which lets you change LRL/LRM None
PARAMETERS parameters.

MICROSTRIP Calls menu C16, which lets you change microstrip None
PARAMETERS parameters.
USER DEFINED

TEST SIGNALS Calls menu CAL_SU2, which lets you enter calibrate Flat None
Test Port Power or change source power(s) and attenuator
settings.

START CAL Starts the LRL/LRM calibration sequence using microstrip BEG
standards.

PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection. None
TO SELECT
OR CHANGE

Menu C3G, Confirm Calibration Parameters

A-38 37XXXD OM
ALPHABETICAL LISTING C

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

CONFIRM None
CALIBRATION
PARAMETERS

TRM REFLECT Enter the offset length of the TRM reflection. TOL; TOL?; ROL;
OFFSET LENGTH ROL?
+XXX.XXX mmX

TRM REFLECT TYPE None

GREATER THAN Zo Specifies the reflection to have an impedance value greater RGZ; RXZ?
than the reference impedance (Z0). This is typically an open
device.

LESS THAN Zo Selects the reflection to have an impedance value less than RLZ; RXZ?
the reference impedance (Z0). This is typically a short
device.

TRM MATCH Calls menu C6B, which lets you change the match None
IMPEDANCE impedance of the coaxial line standard to other than 50 W
(default).

REFERENCE Calls menu C17, which lets you change the reference None
IMPEDANCE impedance of the coaxial line standard to other than 50 W
(default).

TEST SIGNALS Calls menu CAL_SU2, which lets you enter calibrate Flat None
Test Port Power or change source power(s) and attenuator
settings.

START CAL Starts the standard calibration sequence using microstrip BEG
standards.

PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection. None
TO SELECT
OR CHANGE

Menu C3H, Confirm Calibration Parameters

37XXXD OM A-39
C ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

CONFIRM None
CALIBRATION
PARAMETERS

TRM REFLECT Enter the offset length of the TRM reflection. TOL; TOL?; ROL;
OFFSET LENGTH ROL?
+XXX.XXX mmX

TRM MATCH Calls menu C6B, which lets you change the match None
IMPEDANCE impedance of the coaxial line standard to other than 50 W
(default).

WAVEGUIDE Calls menu 15B, which lets you enter a waveguide cutoff None
CUTOFF FREQ frequency.

TEST SIGNALS Calls menu CAL_SU2, which lets you enter calibrate Flat None
Test Port Power or change source power(s) and attenuator
settings.

START CAL Starts the standard calibration sequence using microstrip BEG
standards.

PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection. None
TO SELECT
OR CHANGE

Menu C3I, ConfirmCalibration Parameter 2

A-40 37XXXD OM
ALPHABETICAL LISTING C

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

CONFIRM None
CALIBRATION
PARAMETERS

TRM REFLECT Enter the offset length of the TRM reflection. TOL; TOL?; ROL;
OFFSET LENGTH ROL?
+XXX.XXX mmX

TRM REFLECT TYPE None

GREATER THN Zo Specifies the reflection to have an impedance value greater RGZ; RXZ?
than the reference impedance (Z0). This is typically an open
device.

LESS THAN Zo Selects the reflection to have an impedance value less than RLZ; RXZ?
the reference impedance (Z0). This is typically a short
device.

TRM MATCH Calls menu C6B, which lets you change the match None
IMPEDANCE impedance of the coaxial line standard to other than 50 W
(default).

MICROSTRIP Calls menu C16 or 16A, which lets you change microstrip None
PARAMETERS parameters.
XXXXXXX

TEST SIGNALS Calls menu CAL_SU2, which lets you enter calibrate Flat None
Test Port Power or change source power(s) and attenuator
settings.

START CAL Starts the standard calibration sequence using microstrip BEG
standards.

PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection. None
TO SELECT
OR CHANGE

Menu C3J, ConfirmCalibration Parameter 3

37XXXD OM A-41
C ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

SELECT PORT X Applies the four capacitance-coefficient values to the Open None
CONNECTOR TYPE and offset length to the Short. The data appears in the
display area of the screen.

K-CONN (M) Select for K-CONN (M) connector on Port X. CMK; P1C?;P2C?

K-CONN (F) Select for K-CONN (F) connector on Port X. CFK; P1C?;P2C?

V-CONN (M) Select for V-CONN (M) connector on Port X. CMV; P1C?;P2C?

V-CONN (F) Select for V-CONN (F) connector on Port X. CFV; P1C?;P2C?

W1-CONN (M) Select for W1-CONN (M) connector on Port X. CM1; P1C?;P2C?

W1-CONN (F) Select for W1-CONN (F) connector on Port X. CF1; P1C?;P2C?

SMA (M) Select for SMA (M) connector on Port X. CMS; P1C?;P2C?

SMA (F) Select for SMA (F) connector on Port X. CFS; P1C?;P2C?

GPC-3.5 (M) Select for GPC-3.5 (M) connector on Port X. CM3; P1C?;P2C?

GPC-3.5 (F) Select for GPC-3.5 (F) connector on Port X. CF3; P1C?;P2C?

GPC-7 Select for GPC-7 connector on Port X. CNG; P1C?;P2C?

USER DEFINED Calls menu C12, which lets you specify the connector None
coefficients.

MORE Calls menu C4A for additional connector types. None

PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection. None
TO SELECT

Menu C4_P1/C4_P2, Select Connector Type

A-42 37XXXD OM
ALPHABETICAL LISTING C

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

SELECT PORT X Applies the four capacitance-coefficient values to the Open None
CONNECTOR TYPE and offset length to the Short. The data appears in the
display area of the screen.

TYPE N (M) Select for TYPE N (M) connector on Port X. CMN; P1C?;P2C?

TYPE N (F) Select for TYPE N (F) connector on Port X. CFN; P1C?;P2C?

TYPE N (M) 75W Select for Type N (M) 75W connector on Port X. CMN75; P1C?;
P2C?

TYPE N (F) 75W Select for Type N (F) 75W connector on Port X. CFN75;
P1C?;P2C?

7/16 (M) Select for 7/16 (M) connector on Port X. CM7; P1C?;P2C?

7/16 (F) Select for 7/16 (F) connector on Port X. CF7; P1C?;P2C?

TNC (M) Select for TNC (M) connector on Port X. CMC; P1C?;P2C?

TNC (F) Select for TNC (F) connector on Port X. CFC; P1C?;P2C?

2.4 mm (M) Select for 2.4 mm (M) connector on Port X. CM2; P1C?;P2C?

2.4 mm(F) Select for 2.5 mm (F) connector on Port X. CF2; P1C?;P2C?

SPECIAL (M) Select for Special (M) connector on Port X. CMSP;

P1C?;P2C?
SPECIAL (F) Select for Special (F) connector on Port X.
CFSP;
P1C?;P2C?

USER DEFINED Calls menu C12, which lets you specify the connector None
coefficients.

MORE Calls additional connector types to screen. None

PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection. None
WHEN COMPLETE

Menu C4A_P1/C4A_P2, Select Connector Type

37XXXD OM A-43
C ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

SELECT PORT X None

OPEN & SHORT

SPECIAL (M) C12

SPECIAL (F)

USER DEFINED Calls menu C12, which lets you specify the connector None
coefficients.

PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection. None
TO SELECT

Menu C4B, Select Open and Short Type

A-44 37XXXD OM
ALPHABETICAL LISTING C

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

SELECT None
CALIBRATION TYPE

FULL 12-TERM Select calibration using all 12 error terms EDF, ESF, ERF, C12
ETF, ELF, (EXF), EDR, ESR, ERR, ETR, FLR, (EXR).

1 PATH Calls menu C5A, which lets select a correction for forward- None
2 PORT or reverse-direction error terms.

TRANSMISSION Calls menu C5B, which lets select a correction for None
FREQUENCY frequency response error terms.
RESPONSE

REFLECTION Calls menu C5C, which lets select a correction for None
ONLY reflection-only error terms.

PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection. None
TO SELECT

Menu C5, Select Calibration Type

37XXXD OM A-45
C ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

SELECT None
1 PATH 2 PORT
CALIBRATION TYPE

FORWARD PATH For the calibration-correction of the forward transmission C8T

(S11, S21) and reflection error term, ETF, EDF, ESF, ERF, (EXF).

REVERSE PATH For the calibration-correction of the reverse transmission C8R

(S12, S22) and reflection error term, EDR, ESR, ERR, ETR, (EXR).

PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the Enter key implements your selection. None
TO SELECT

Menu C5A, Select 1 Path 2 Port Calibration Type

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

SELECT None
TRANSMISSION
FREQ RESPONSE
CALIBRATION TYPE

FORWARD PATH For the calibration-correction of the forward transmission CFT; CXX?
(S21) frequency-response error term, ETF. (EXF).

REVERSE PATH For the calibration-correction of the reverse CRT; CXX?

(S12) transmission-frequency-response error term, ETR, (EXR).

BOTH PATHS For the calibration-correction of the forward and reverse CBT; CXX?
(S21, S12) transmission-frequency-response error terms ETF, ETR,
(EXF, EXR).

PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection. None
TO SELECT

Menu C5B, Select Transmission Freq Response Calibration Type

A-46 37XXXD OM
ALPHABETICAL LISTING C

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

SELECT None
REFLECTION ONLY
CALIBRATION TYPE

PORT 1 ONLY For the calibration-correction of the forward reflection-only CRF; CXX?
(S11) error terms EDF, ESF, ERF.

PORT 2 ONLY For the calibration-correction of the reverse reflection-only CRR; CXX?
(S22) error terms EDR, ESR, ERR.

BOTH PORTS For the calibration-correction of the forward and reverse CRB; CXX?
(S11, S22) reflection-only error terms EDF, ESF, ERF, EDR, ESR,
ERR.

PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection. None
TO SELECT

Menu C5C, Select Reflection Only Calibration Type

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

SELECT USE None

OF ISOLATION
IN CALIBRATION

INCLUDE Includes isolation term(s). ISN; ISX?

ISOLATION
(STANDARD)

EXCLUDE Excludes isolation term(s). ISF; ISX?

ISOLATION

PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection. None
TO SELECT

PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the ENTER key implements your selection.

TO SELECT

Menu C5D, Select Use of Isolation

37XXXD OM A-47
C ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

SELECT None
TYPE OF LOAD

BROADBAND Selects calibration based on the broadband load being BBL; BBX?
FIXED LOAD used, then calls menu C6A.

SLIDING LOAD Selects calibration based on the sliding load being used. If SLD; BBX?
(MAY ALSO your low-end frequency is below 2 GHz (4 GHz for V
REQUIRE Connector), a fixed broadband load is also required.
BROADBAND
FIXED LOAD)

PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection. None
TO SELECT
Menu C6, Select Load Type

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

BROADBAND LOAD None

PARAMETERS

IMPEDANCE Enter the impedance of the load. BBZ; BBZ?

XX.XXX W

INDUCTANCE Enter the inductance of the load. BBZL; BBZL?

XX.XXX pH

PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection. None
WHEN COMPLETE
Menu C6A, Enter Broadband Load Impedance

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

TRM MATCH None

PARAMETERS

IMPEDANCE Allows entry of the impedance (defaults to 50.000 W). BBZ; BBZ?
XX.XXX W

INDUCTANCE Allows entry of the inductance (defaults to 0.00 pH). BBZL; BBZL?
XX.XXX pH

PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection. None
WHEN COMPLETE
Menu C6B, Enter Broadband Load Impedance

A-48 37XXXD OM
ALPHABETICAL LISTING C

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

CALIBRATION None
SEQUENCE

CONNECT None
CALIBRATION
DEVICE(S)

PORT 1: Connect the required component to Port 1. None

XXXXXXXXXXXX

PORT 2: Connect the required component to Port 2. None

XXXXXXXXXXXX

PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the Enter key sequentially measures the devices None
TO MEASURE connected to Ports 1 and 2, beginning with Port 1.
DEVICE(S)

PRESS <1> FOR Pressing the 1 key, on the keypad, measures the device None
PORT 1 DEVICE connected to Port 1.

PRESS <2> FOR Pressing the 2 key, on the keypad, measures the device None
PORT 2 DEVICE connected to Port 2.

Menu C7-Series, Begin Calibration Sequence

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

CALIBRATION None
SEQUENCE

SLIDE LOAD Slide the load to the next position, then press the Enter None
TO POSITION X key. Moving the slide to six different positions provides
sufficient data for the program to accurately calculate the
effective directivity of the system.

PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the Enter key begins the measurement. None
TO MEASURE
DEVICE (S)

Menu C8, Slide Load to Position X

37XXXD OM A-49
C ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

CALIBRATION None
SEQUENCE

CONNECT Connect Ports 1 and 2 together using the Throughline None

THROUGHLINE standard (zero or non-zero length).
XXXXX
BETWEEN
TEST PORTS

PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the Enter key begins the measurement. None
TO MEASURE
DEVICE(S)

Menu C9, Connect Throughline

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

CALIBRATION None
SEQUENCE

CONNECT Prompts you to connect reference line 1 between test None

DEVICE 1 ports.
LINE 1 (REF)
XXXXX
BETWEEN
TEST PORTS

PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the Enter key begins the measurement. None
TO MEASURE
DEVICE(S)

Menu C9A, Connect Device 1, Line

A-50 37XXXD OM
ALPHABETICAL LISTING C

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

CALIBRATION None
SEQUENCE

CONNECT Connect device 2 between the test ports. This will be a None
DEVICE 2 LINE for LRL measurements or LOWBAND MATCHES for
LINE/ LRM measurements.
LOWBAND
MATCHES
BETWEEN
TEST PORTS

PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the Enter key begins the measurement. None
TO MEASURE
DEVICE(S)

Menu C9B, Connect Device 2, Line/Lowband

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

CALIBRATION None
SEQUENCE

CONNECT Prompts you to connect the second line standard between None
DEVICE 2 the test ports.
LINE
XXXXX
BETWEEN
TEST PORTS

PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the Enter key begins the measurement. None
TO MEASURE
DEVICE(S)

Menu C9C, Connect Device 2, Line

37XXXD OM A-51
C ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

BEGIN CALIBRATION None

KEEP EXISTING Keep existing calibration data. KEC

CAL DATA

REPEAT Repeats the previous calibration. RPC

PREVIOUS CAL

AUTOCAL Calls menu ACAL, which lets you choose AutoCal settings. None

CAL METHOD Displays the calibration method that you have CMX?
XXXXXXX selected—standard,
offset short or LRL/LRM.

TRANSMISSION Indicates type of transmission line currently selected, e. g. LTX?

LINE TYPE: coaxial,
XXXXXXXX waveguide, microstrip.

CHANGE CAL Calls menu C11A, which allows you to change calibration None
METHOD AND method and transmission line type.
LINE TYPE

NEXT CAL STEP Selects the next calibration step. None

PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection. None
TO SELECT

Menu C11, Begin Calibration

A-52 37XXXD OM
ALPHABETICAL LISTING C

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

CHANGE CAL METHOD None

AND LINE TYPE

NEXT CAL STEP Select next calibration step. Must move cursor to here after None
making below selections. Pressing the Enter key then
moves you to the next step.

CAL METHOD None

(SOLT) STANDARD This option and the ones below allow you to select the SCM; CMX?
method (procedure) to be used to calibrate. This method is
independent of the calibration type, which may be 12-term,
reflection only, etc.

SSLT (DOUBLE Selects the double offset short calibration method. OCM; CMX?
OFFSET SHORT
WITH LOAD)

SSST (TRIPLE Selects the triple offset short calibration method. OC3M; CMX?
OFFSET SHORT)

LRL/LRM Selects LRL or LRM method. LCM; CMX?

TRM Selects TRM method. TCM; CMX?

TRANSMISSION None
LINE TYPE

COAXIAL Selects coaxial cable as the transmission line type. LTC; LTX?

WAVEGUIDE Selects waveguide as the transmission line type. LTW; LTX?

MICROSTRIP Selects microstrip as the transmission line type. LTU; LTX?

PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection. None
TO SELECT

Menu C11A, Select Calibration Method

37XXXD OM A-53
C ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

PORT X Enter the capacitance-coefficient values needed to correct None

OPEN DEVICE for your Open device. The capacitive phase shift of the
Open is characterized by the equation: COpen = CO + (C1 x
f) + (C2 x f2) + (C3 x f3)

ENTER THE None

CAPACITANCE
COEFFICIENTS

TERM 1-C0 Enter the term 1 coefficient value (x 10–15 F). CC0; CC0?
± XX.XXe- 15

TERM 2-C1 Enter the term 2 coefficient value (x 10–27 F/Hz). CC1; CC1?
±XXX.XX e - 27

TERM 3-C2 Enter the term 3 coefficient value (x 10–36 F/Hz2). CC2; CC2?
±XXX.XX e - 36

TERM 4-C3 Enter the term 4 coefficient value (x 10–45 F/Hz3). CC3; CC3?
±XXX.XX e - 45

ENTER THE Enter the length of the offset. COO

OFFSET LENGTH

OFFSET LENGTH Select to enter and display offset length of Open. COO?
±XX.XXXX mm

PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the Enter key calls C12A_P1/C12A_P2. None

WHEN COMPLETE

Menu C12_P1/C12_P2, Enter the Capacitance Coefficients for Open Devices

A-54 37XXXD OM
ALPHABETICAL LISTING C

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

PORT X None
SHORT DEVICE

ENTER THE Provide inductance term entries for the short device such None
INDUCTANCE that the frequency dependent inductance is L(w) = L0 + (L1
COEFFICIENTS * f) + (L2 * f^2) + (L3 * f^3). These values default to zero.
They are used in the standard calibration method in
combination with the coaxial and microstrip line types.
They are not used in the offset short and LRL/LRM
calibration methods. The calibration kits provided by
ANRITSU are not to support these terms.

TERM 1 - L0 Enter the term 1 value. CL0; CL0?

- XXXX.XX e-12

TERM 2 - L1 Enter the term 2 value. CL1; CL1?

- XXXX.XX e-24

TERM 3 - L2 Enter the term 3 value. CL2; CL2?

- XXXX.XX e-33

TERM 4 - L3 Enter the term 4 value. CL3; CL3?

- XXXX.XX e-42

ENTER THE Enter the length of the offset device. COS

OFFSET LENGTH

OFFSET LENGTH Displays the offset length value. COS?

-XXX.XXXX mm

PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection. None
WHEN COMPLETE

Menu C12A_P1/C12A_P2, Enter the Offset Length

37XXXD OM A-55
C ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

SET None
REFLECTION
PAIRING

MIXED Selects different reflection devices (open/short or MIX, MIX?

(OPEN–SHORT short/open) to be connected to Ports 1 and 2 for the
SHORT–OPEN) calibration sequencing.

MATCHED Selects the same type of reflection device (open/open or MAT, MIX?
(OPEN–OPEN short/short) to be connected to Ports 1 and 2 for the
SHORT–SHORT) calibration sequencing.

PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection. None
TO SELECT

Menu C13, Set Reflection Pairing Menu

A-56 37XXXD OM
ALPHABETICAL LISTING C

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

SELECT None
REFLECTION
PAIRING

MIXED Selects mixed reflection pairing. MIX

(SHORT1-SHORT2,
SHORT2-SHORT1)

MATCHED Selects matched reflection pairing. MAT

(SHORT1-SHORT1,
SHORT2-SHORT2)

PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection. None
TO SELECT

Menu C13A, Set Reflection Pairing Menu

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

SELECT None
REFLECTION
PAIRING

MIXED Selects mixed reflection pairing. MIX

(SHORT1-SHORT2,
SHORT2-SHORT3,
SHORT3-SHORT1)

MATCHED Selects matched reflection pairing. MAT

(SHORT1-SHORT1,
SHORT2-SHORT2,
SHORT3-SHORT3)

PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection. None
TO SELECT

Menu C13B, Set Reflection Pairing Menu

37XXXD OM A-57
C ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

SELECT PORT X Used with the coaxial line type. None

OFFSET SHORT
CONNECOTR TYPE

W1-CONN (M) Selects W1(M) connector (kit) type on Port X. CM1

W1-CONN (F) Selects W1 (F) connector (kit) type on Port X. CF1
P1C?; P2C?

SPECIAL A (M) Selects Special A (M) connector (kit) type on Port X. CMSPA
SPECIAL A (F) Selects Special A (F) connector (kit) type on Port X. CFSPA
P1C?; P2C?

SPECIAL B (M) Selects Special B (M) connector (kit) type on Port X. CMSPB
SPECIAL B (F) Selects Special B (F) connector (kit) type on Port X. CFSPB
P1C?; P2C?

SPECIAL C (M) Selects Special C (M) connector (kit) type on Port X. CMSPC
SPECIAL C (F) Selects Special C (F) connector (kit) type on Port X. CFSPC
P1C?; P2C?

USER DEFINED Calls menu C21A, C21B, then C21C, which allows you to
define the inductance coefficients and offset length values.

PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection. None
WHEN COMPLETE

Menu C14, Select Port X Offset Short Connecotr Type

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

SELECT PORT X Used with the microstrip line type. None

OFFSET SHORT

SPECIAL A (M) Selects Special A (M) connector (kit) type on Port X. CMSPA
SPECIAL A (F) Selects Special A (F) connector (kit) type on Port X. CFSPA
P1C?; P2C?

SPECIAL B (M) Selects Special B (M) connector (kit) type on Port X. CMSPB
SPECIAL B (F) Selects Special B (F) connector (kit) type on Port X. CFSPB
P1C?; P2C?

SPECIAL C (M) Selects Special C (M) connector (kit) type on Port X. CMSPC
SPECIAL C (F) Selects Special C (F) connector (kit) type on Port X. CFSPC
P1C?; P2C?

USER DEFINED Calls menus C21A, C21B, then C21C, which allows you to
define the inductance coefficients and offset length values.

PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection. None
WHEN COMPLETE

Menu C14A, Select Port X Offset Short

A-58 37XXXD OM
ALPHABETICAL LISTING C

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

SELECT None
WAVEGUIDE
KIT TO USE

-INSTALLED KIT- The lines below indicate the characteristics of the installed None
waveguide calibration kit, if applicable.

IDENTIFIER Displays the type of waveguide used. WGSER?

XXXX

CUTOFF FREQ: Displays the cutoff frequency of the waveguide. WGCUTOFF?

XXX.XXXXXXXXX GHz

SHORT 1 Displays the offset length of the first calibration short. WGSHOFF1?
XX.XXXXmm

SHORT 2 Displays the offset length of the second calibration short. WGSHOFF2?
XX.XXXXmm

USE INSTALLED Move the cursor to this line and press Enter to use the WK1; WKX?
WAVEGUIDE KIT displayed kit.

USER DEFINED Calls menu C15A, which lets you modify the parameters. None

PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection. None
TO SELECT

Menu C15, Select Waveguide Kit to Use

37XXXD OM A-59
C ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COM-

MAND

ENTER WAVEGUIDE None

PARAMETERS

WAVEGUIDE Calls menu C15B that allows you to enter waveguide cutoff None
CUTOFF FREQ frequency.
XXX.XXXXXXXXX GHz

OFFSET LENGTH Move the cursor to this line and enter the offset length of WSH1; WSH1?
OF SHORT 1 Short 1.
X.XXXX mm

OFFSET LENGTH Move the cursor to this line and enter the offset length of WSH2; WSH2?
OF SHORT 2 Short 2.
X.XXXX mm

PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection. None
WHEN COMPLETE

Menu C15A, Enter Waveguide Parameters

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COM-

MAND

ENTER None
WAVEGUIDE
CUTOFF
FREQUENCY

WAVEGUIDE Enter waveguide cutoff frequency. WCO; WCO?

CUTOFF FREQ
XXX.XXXXXXXXX GHz

PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection. None
WHEN COMPLETE

Menu C15B, Enter Waveguide Parameters

A-60 37XXXD OM
ALPHABETICAL LISTING C

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

SELECT Used for the SSST calibration method. None

WAVEGUIDE
KIT TO USE

INSTALLED KIT The lines below indicate the characteristics of the installed None
waveguide calibration kit, if applicable.

IDENTIFIER: Displays the type of waveguide used. WGSER?

XXXXXXXX

CUTOFF FREQ: Displays the cutoff frequency of the waveguide. WGCUTOFF?

XXX.XXXXXXXXX GHz

SHORT 1: Displays the offset length of the first calibration short. WGSHOFF1?
+XX.XXXX mm

SHORT 2: Displays the offset length of the second calibration short. WGSHOFF2?
+XX.XXXX mm

SHORT 3: Displays the offset length of the third calibration short. WGSHOFF3?
+XX.XXXX mm

USE INSTALLED Move the cursor to this line and press Enter to use the WK1; WKX?
WAVEGUIDE KIT displayed kit.

USER DEFINED Calls menu C15C, which lets you modify the parameters. None

PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection. None
TO SELECT

Menu C15C, Select Waveguide Kit to Use

37XXXD OM A-61
C ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COM-

MAND

ENTER Used for the SSST calibration method. None

WAVEGUIDE
PARAMETERS

WAVEGUIDE Calls menu C15B that allows you to enter waveguide cutoff None
CUTOFF FREQ frequency.
XXX.XXXXXXXXX GHz

OFFSET LENGTH Move the cursor to this line and enter the offset length of WSH1; WSH1?
OF SHORT 1 Short 1.
+XXX.XXXX mm

OFFSET LENGTH Move the cursor to this line and enter the offset length of WSH2; WSH2?
OF SHORT 2 Short 2.
+XXX.XXXX mm

OFFSET LENGTH Move the cursor to this line and enter the offset length of WSH3; WSH3?
OF SHORT 3 Short 3.
+XXX.XXXX mm

PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection. None
WHEN COMPLETE

Menu C15D, Enter Waveguide Parameters

A-62 37XXXD OM
ALPHABETICAL LISTING C

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

SELECT None
MICROSTRIP
KIT TO USE

10 MIL KIT Selects parameters for 10 mil UTF kit. U10; UTFX?

15 MIL KIT Selects parameters for 15 mil UTF kit. U15; UTFX?

25 MIL KIT Selects parameters for 25 mil UTF kit. U25; UTFX?

USER DEFINED Calls menu C16A, which lets you modify the parameters. None

PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection. None
TO SELECT

Menu C16, Select Microstrip Parameters

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

ENTER None
MICROSTRIP
PARAMETERS

WIDTH OF Move the cursor to this line and enter the width of the USW; USW?
STRIP microstrip you are using.
XX.XXXX mm

THICKNESS OF Move the cursor to this line and enter the thickness of the SBT; SBT?
SUBSTRATE substrate
XXXX.XXXX mm you are using.

Zc Move the cursor to this line and enter the characteristic USZ; USZ?
XXX.XXX W impedance of the microstrip.

SUBSTRATE Move the cursor to this line and enter the relative dielectric SBD; SBD?
DIELECTRIC constant of the substrate you are using.
XX.XX

EFFECTIVE Move the cursor to this line and enter the effective USE; USE?
DIELECTRIC dielectric constant of the microstrip. A recommended value
XX.XX will also be displayed.
(RECOMMENDED
1.00)

PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection. None
WHEN COMPLETE

Menu C16A, Enter Microstrip Parameters

37XXXD OM A-63
C ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

ENTER None
REFERENCE
IMPEDANCE

REFERENCE Enter the reference impedance (Z0) of the coaxial reference LLZ; LLZ?
IMPEDANCE line standard.
XXX.XXXW

PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection. None
WHEN COMPLETE

Menu C17, Enter Line Impedance

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

CHANGE LRL/LRM None

PARAMETERS

NEXT CAL STEP Selects next calibration step. Must move cursor to here None
after making below selections. Pressing the Enter key then
moves you to the next step. Calls menu C18A for one band
or C18B for two bands.

NUMBER OF None
BANDS USED

ONE BAND Selects a one-band LRL or LRM calibration. LR2; LRX?

TWO BANDS Selects a two-band LRL or LRM calibration (that is, a LR3; LRX?
three-line LRL or concatenated LRL and LRM calibrations).

LOCATION OF None
REFERENCE
PLANES

MIDDLE OF Select reference planes to be at middle of line 1. RM1; RMX?

LINE 1 (REF)

ENDS OF Select reference planes to be at end of line 1. RRP; RMX?

LINE 1 (REF)

PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection. None
TO SELECT

Menu C18, Change LRL/LRM Parameters

A-64 37XXXD OM
ALPHABETICAL LISTING C

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COM-

MAND

CHANGE LRL/LRM None

PARAMETERS

NEXT CAL STEP Selects next calibration step. Must move cursor to here None
after making below selections. Pressing the Enter key then
moves you to the next step. Calls menu C19.

CHARACTERIZE None
CAL DEVICES

DEVICE 1 Enter length of line 1. LL1; LL1?

LINE 1 (REF)
X.XXXX mm

DEVICE 2 Select device 2—LINE or MATCH; if line is selected, enter LL2; LM2;
LINE /MATCH length. LX2?
X.XXXX mm/FULLBAND

PRESS <ENTER> Press Enter to select. If DEVICE 2 is chosen, pressing the None
TO SELECT Enter key toggles between LINE and MATCH.
OR SWITCH

Menu C18A, Change LRL/LRM Parameters

37XXXD OM A-65
C ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

CHANGE LRL/LRM None

PARAMETERS

NEXT CAL STEP Selects next calibration step. Must move cursor to here None
after making below selections. Pressing the Enter key then
moves you to the next step. Calls menu C19.

CHARACTERIZE None
CAL DEVICES

DEVICE 1 Enter length of line 1. LL1; LL1?

LINE 1 (REF)
XX.XXXX

DEVICE 2 Press Enter to toggle between LINE and MATCH. If LINE is LL2; LL2?; LM2;
LINE/MATCH selected, enter line length. If match is selected, LOWBAND LX2?
XX.XXXX/LOWBAND is displayed. This indicates that device 2 is the lowband
match.

DEVICE 3 Press Enter to toggle between LINE and MATCH. If LINE is LL3; LL3?; LM3;
LINE/MATCH selected, enter line length. If match is selected, HIGHBAND LX3?
XX.XXXX/HIGHBAND is displayed. This indicates that device 3 is the high band
match.

FREQ AFTER None

WHICH THE USE
OF DEVICE 2
AND DEVICE 3
IS EXCHANGED

BREAKPOINT Enter breakpoint frequency: end of band 1, beginning of BPF; BPF?

XXX.XXXXXXXXXGHZ band 2.

PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection. None
TO SELECT
OR SWITCH

Menu C18B, Change LRL/LRM Parameters—Two Band Calibration

A-66 37XXXD OM
ALPHABETICAL LISTING C

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

CHANGE LRL/LRM None

PARAMETERS

NEXT CAL STEP Moves to the next calibration step. Must move cursor to None
here after making below selections. Pressing the Enter key
then moves you to the next step.

REFLECTION Enter the offset length of the reflective device. None

OFFSET LENGTH
+XXX.XXXX mm

REFLECTION TYPE ROL; ROL?

GREATER THAN Zo Specifies the reflection to have an impedance value greater RGZ; RXZ?
than the reference impedance (Z0). This is typically an open
device.

LESS THAN Zo Selects the reflection to have an impedance value less than RLZ; RXZ
the reference impedance (Z0). This is typically a short
device.

MATCH PARAMETERS

MATCH IMPEDANCE Allows entry of the impedance (defaults to 50.000 W). LMZ; LMZ?
+XXX.XXX W

MATCH INDUCTANCE Allows entry of the inductance (defaults to 0.00 e-12). LMZL; LMZL?
+XXXX.XXXX pH

PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the Enter key implements the selection. None
TO SELECT

Menu C19, Change LRL/LRM Parameters

37XXXD OM A-67
C ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

ENTER None
THROUGH LINE
PARAMETERS

OFFSET LENGTH Enter offset length of through-line device. TOL; TOL?

X.XXXX mm

THROUGHLINE Enter the impedance of the through-line device. TLZ; TLZ?

IMPEDANCE
X.XXXX W

PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the Enter key brings the next calibration menu. None
WHEN COMPLETE

Menu C20, Change Through Parameters

A-68 37XXXD OM
ALPHABETICAL LISTING C

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

PORT X None
OFFSET SHORT 1

ENTER THE
INDUCTANCE
COEFFICIENTS

L0 [e-12 H] Enter the inductance coeficients of the offset short. None

+XXXX.XXXX

L1 [e-24 H/Hz] Enter the inductance coeficients of the offset short. None
+XXXX.XXXX

L2 [e-33 H/Hz2] Enter the inductance coeficients of the offset short. None
+XXXX.XXXX

L3 [e-42 H/Hz3] Enter the inductance coeficients of the offset short. None
+XXXX.XXXX

ENTER THE
OFFSET LENGTH

OFFSET LENGTH Enter the offset length of the offset short. None
+XXX.XXXX mm

PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the Enter key calls menu C21B. None
WHEN COMPLETE

Menu C21A, Port X Offset Short 1

37XXXD OM A-69
C ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

PORT X None
OFFSET SHORT 2

ENTER THE
INDUCTANCE
COEFFICIENTS

L0 [e-12 H] Enter the inductance coeficients of the offset short. None

+XXXX.XXXX

L1 [e-24 H/Hz] Enter the inductance coeficients of the offset short. None
+XXXX.XXXX

L2 [e-33 H/Hz2] Enter the inductance coeficients of the offset short. None
+XXXX.XXXX

L3 [e-42 H/Hz3] Enter the inductance coeficients of the offset short. None
+XXXX.XXXX

ENTER THE
OFFSET LENGTH

OFFSET LENGTH Enter the offset length of the offset short. None
+XXX.XXXX mm

PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the Enter key calls menu C3X, for a SSLT None
WHEN COMPLETE calibration method, or menu C21B, for a SSST calibration
method.

Menu C21B, Port X Offset Short 2

A-70 37XXXD OM
ALPHABETICAL LISTING C

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

PORT X None
OFFSET SHORT 3

ENTER THE
INDUCTANCE
COEFFICIENTS

L0 [e-12 H] Enter the inductance coeficients of the offset short. None

+XXXX.XXXX

L1 [e-24 H/Hz] Enter the inductance coeficients of the offset short. None
+XXXX.XXXX

L2 [e-33 H/Hz2] Enter the inductance coeficients of the offset short. None
+XXXX.XXXX

L3 [e-42 H/Hz3] Enter the inductance coeficients of the offset short. None
+XXXX.XXXX

ENTER THE
OFFSET LENGTH

OFFSET LENGTH Enter the offset length of the offset short. None
+XXX.XXXX mm

PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the Enter key calls menu C3X. None
WHEN COMPLETE

Menu C21C, Port X Offset Short 3

37XXXD OM A-71
C ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

CALIBRATION None
SEQUENCE
COMPLETED

PRESS Pressing the SAVE/RECALL MENU Key displays menu SR, None
<SAVE/RECALL> which lets you save your calibration data onto a disk or
TO STORE CAL recall previously saved calibration data from a disk. While
DATA ON DISK this menu provides a convenient point at which to save the
calibration data, it is not the only point allowed. You can
OR use the SAVE/RECALL MENU key at any point in the
measurement program.

PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection. None
TO PROCEED

Menu Cal_Completed

A-72 37XXXD OM
ALPHABETICAL LISTING C

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

APPLY None
CALIBRATION

FULL 12-TERM Reflects the type of calibration presently stored in internal

(S11, S21 memory.
S22, S12)

APPLY ON (OFF) Turns calibration on or off. CON; COF;

CALIBRATION CON?

TUNE MODE ON (OFF) For applied Full 12-Term calibration only. When turned off, None
the ratio of forward to reverse sweeps is set to the normal
1:1.When turned on, you can set the ratio of forward
sweeps to reverse sweep from 1:1 to 10,000:1 (below).

NO. OF FWD (REV) Lets you enter a value for the number of forward (or None
SWEEPS BETWEEN reverse) sweeps. Alternatively, this option displays the
REV (FWD) SWEEPS number of forward sweep (or reverse) remaining before a
XXXXX SWEEPS reverse sweep will occur.
(XXXXX REMAINING)

PRESS <APPLY CAL> Press the Apply Cal key to apply the stored calibration. None
TO TURN ON/OFF

PRESS <ENTER> Press the Enter key to turn selected mode on/off. None
TO TURN ON/OFF

Menu Cal_Applied

37XXXD OM A-73
C ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

DATA ENHANCEMENT None
AVERAGING Averages the measured data over time, as follows: AVG; AVG?
XXXX MEAS. 1. The sweep stops at the first frequency point and takes a
number of readings, based on the selected number of
points.
2. The program averages the readings and writes the
average value for that frequency point in the displayed
graph.
3. The sweep then advances to the next sequential
frequency point and repeats the process.
AVERAGING TYPE
POINT-BY-POINT Averages the point-by-point up to the number of averages. PTAVG; SWAVG?
SWEEP-BY-SWEEP Averages the sweep-by-sweep up to the number of SWAVG;
averages. SWAVG?
RESET AVG COUNT Zeroes the counter used for sweep averaging. RSTAVG
XXXX SWEEP(S)
SAMPLERS USED In the normal mode of operation, three samplers are used SAMP2; SAMP3;
PER SWEEP per forward or reverse sweep; two test samplers and a SAMP?
X SAMPLERS reference sampler. This results in both transmission and
reflection parameters simultaneously.
When a device such as a filter with a deep reject-band is
measured, having both test samplers on reduces the
measurement dynamic range. A higher noise floor in the
reject band of the filter is observed. Selecting two samplers
per sweep turns off one of the test samplers. This
eliminates channel interaction and thereby improves the
dynamic range.
The drawbacks of using two sampler per sweep are a
doubling of measurement time, as two complete
one-direction sweeps are needed for both transmission and
reflection parameters.
RESUME CAL
PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection None
TO SELECT and returns you to the calibration setup or sequence.
PRESS
<AVG/SMOOTH MENU>
TO RESET AVG COUNT

Menu Cal_EM, Enhancement Menu for Calibration

A-74 37XXXD OM
ALPHABETICAL LISTING C

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

ADAPTER REMOVAL None

12-TERM CALS FOR None

X AND Y MUST
EXIST IN THE
CURRENT DIRECTORY

ELECTRICAL LENGTH Displays the electrical length of the adapter. The value of ADPL; ADPL?
OF THE ADAPTER the electrical length is used when the two calibrations are
+XXX.XXXX ps merged. It has the same range as the time delay for
reference plane extension and a default value of 0.0000 ps.

REMOVE ADAPTER Calls menu CAR2, which leads you through the reading of None
the Y’-Y and X-X’ calibration files and the computation of
the new 12-term error coefficients.

HELP Calls menu EXT_CAR, which provides help text for using None
this feature.

PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the Enter key implements the selection. None
TO SELECT

Menu CAR1, Adapter Removal 1

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

ADAPTER REMOVAL None

READ CAL FILE OF Calls menu DSK2, which provides instructions. None
X TEST PORT
FROM HARD DISK
(ADAPTER ON
PORT 2)

READ CAL FILE OF Calls menu DSK2, which provides instructions. None
X TEST PORT
FROM FLOPPY DISK
(ADAPTER ON
PORT 2)

PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the Enter key implements the selection. None
TO SELECT

PRESS <CLEAR> Pressing the Clear key aborts the selection. None
TO ABORT

Menu CAR2, Adapter Removal 2

37XXXD OM A-75
C ALPHABETICAL LISTING

Menu EXT_CAR, Adapter Removal Help Menu

A-76 37XXXD OM
ALPHABETICAL LISTING C

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

ADAPTER REMOVAL None

READ CAL FILE OF Calls menu DSK2, which provides instructions. None
THE Y TEST PORT
FROM HARD DISK
(ADAPTER ON
PORT 1)

READ CAL FILE OF Calls menu DSK2, which provides instructions. None
THE Y TEST PORT
FROM FLOPPY DISK
(ADAPTER ON
PORT 1)

PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the Enter key implements the selection. None
TO SELECT

PRESS <CLEAR> Pressing the Clear key aborts the selection. None
TO ABORT

Menu CAR3, Adapter Removal 3

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

ADAPTER REMOVAL None

COMPUTING NEW Information text. None

12-TERM ERROR
COEFFICIENTS

Menu CAR4, Adapter Removal 4

37XXXD OM A-77
C ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

SELECT None
DISPLAY MODE

SINGLE Selects a single channel for display. You select the type of DSP; DSP?
CHANNEL display in menu GT1 or GT2.

DUAL Selects Channels 1 and 3 for display. You select the type of D13
CHANNELS 1 & 3 display in menu GT1 or GT2.

OVERLAY DUAL Lets you simultaneously view the Channel 1 data T13
CHANNELS 1 & 3 superimposed over the Channel 3 data on a single display.
Channel 1 trace displays in red and Channel 3 in yellow.

DUAL Selects Channels 2 and 4 for display. You select the type of D24
CHANNELS 2 & 4 display in menu GT1 or GT2.

OVERLAY DUAL Lets you simultaneously view the Channel 2 data T24
CHANNELS 2 & 4 superimposed over the Channel 4 data on a single display.
Channel 2 trace displays in red and Channel 4 in yellow.

ALL FOUR Selects all four channels for display. You select the type of D14
CHANNELS display in menu GT1 or GT2.

PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection. None
TO SELECT The menu remains on the screen until another menu is
selected for display or until the CLEAR/RET LOC key is
pressed.

Menu CM, Select Display Mode

A-78 37XXXD OM
ALPHABETICAL LISTING D

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

E/O MEASUREMENT None

MEASURE E/O DUT This menu selection calls menu DE3, then DE3A. IODF or LDODF
(MODULATOR)

DE-EMBED TRANSFER This menu selection calls menu DE4, then DE4A. IODF or LDODF
FUNCTION OF A
GENERIC NETWORK

PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection. None
TO SELECT

Menu DE1, E/O Measurement

Menu EXT_DE1, E/O Measurement

37XXXD OM A-79
D ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

O/E MEASUREMENT None

DE-EMBED O/E S2P This menu selection calls menu DE5, then DE5A. IODF or LDODF
(DETECTOR STD)

GENERATE E/O S2P This menu selection calls menu DE6. None
CHARACTERIZATION
(MODULATOR)

MEASURE O/E DUT This menu selection calls menu DE7, then DE7A. IODF or LDODF
(DETECTOR)

PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection. None
TO SELECT

Menu DE2, O/E Measurement

Menu EXT_DE2, O/E Measurement

A-80 37XXXD OM
ALPHABETICAL LISTING D

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

E/O MEASUREMENT None

ORIGINAL CAL FILE

WITH FWD TRANS
CORRECTION

READ CAL FILE This menu selection calls menu DSK2 for *.CAL files on None
FROM HARD DISK the hard disk drive.

READ CAL FILE This menu selection calls menu DSK2 for *.CAL files on None
FROM FLOPPY DISK the floppy disk drive.

PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection. None
TO SELECT

PRESS <CLEAR> Pressing the Clear key aborts your this menu selection None
TO ABORT and calls menu DE1.

Menu DE3, E/O Measurement

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

E/O MEASUREMENT None

TRANSFER STANDARD
TO BE DE-EMBEDED
(DETECTOR STD)

READ S2P FILE This menu selection calls menu DSK2 for *.S2P files on None
FROM HARD DISK the hard disk drive.

READ S2P FILE This menu selection calls menu DSK2 for *.S2P files on None
FROM FLOPPY DISK the floppy disk drive.

PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection. None
TO SELECT

PRESS <CLEAR> Pressing the Clear key aborts this menu selection and None
TO ABORT calls menu DE1.

Menu DE3A, E/O Measurement

37XXXD OM A-81
D ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

DE-EMBED NETWORK None

ORIGINAL CAL FILE

WITH FWD TRANS
CORRECTION

READ CAL FILE This menu selection calls menu DSK2 for *.CAL files on None
FROM HARD DISK the hard disk drive.

READ CAL FILE This menu selection calls menu DSK2 for *.CAL files on None
FROM FLOPPY DISK the floppy disk drive.

PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection. None
TO SELECT

PRESS <CLEAR> Pressing the Clear key aborts this menu selection and None
TO ABORT calls menu DE1.

Menu DE4, De-embed Network

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

DE-EMBED NETWORK None

TRANSFER FUNCTION
TO BE DE-EMBEDED
(GENERIC NETWORK)

READ S2P FILE This menu selection calls menu DSK2 for *.S2P files on None
FROM HARD DISK the hard disk drive.

READ S2P FILE This menu selection calls menu DSK2 for *.S2P files on None
FROM FLOPPY DISK the floppy disk drive.

PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection. None
TO SELECT

PRESS <CLEAR> Pressing the Clear key aborts this menu selection and None
TO ABORT calls menu DE1.

Menu DE4A, De-embed Network

A-82 37XXXD OM
ALPHABETICAL LISTING D

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

DE-EMBED O/E S2P None

ORIGINAL CAL FILE

WITH FWD TRANS
CORRECTION

READ CAL FILE This menu selection calls menu DSK2 for *.CAL files on None
FROM HARD DISK the hard disk drive.

READ CAL FILE This menu selection calls menu DSK2 for *.CAL files on None
FROM FLOPPY DISK the floppy disk drive.

PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection. None
TO SELECT

PRESS <CLEAR> Pressing the Clear key aborts this menu selection and None
TO ABORT calls menu DE2.

Menu DE5, De-embed O/E S2P

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

DE-EMBED O/E S2P None

TRANSFER STANDARD
TO BE DE-EMBEDED
(DETECTOR STANDARD)

READ S2P FILE This menu selection calls menu DSK2 for *.S2P files on None
FROM HARD DISK the hard disk drive.

READ S2P FILE This menu selection calls menu DSK2 for *.S2P files on None
FROM FLOPPY DISK the floppy disk drive.

PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection. None
TO SELECT

PRESS <CLEAR> Pressing the Clear key aborts this menu selection and None
TO ABORT calls menu DE2.

Menu DE5A, De-embed O/E S2P

37XXXD OM A-83
D ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

GENERATE E/O S2P None

CHARACTERIZATION

CONNECT TRANSFER
STANDARD DETECTOR
AND DE-EMBED ITS
CHARACTERIZATION

CONNECT E/O DEVICE

(MODULATOR) AND
APPLY BIAS

INCLUDE ANY OTHER

COMPONENTS WHICH
ARE PART OF THE
MEASUREMENT PATH

WAIT FOR A
COMPLETE SWEEP
BEFORE STORING

SAVE S2P DATA This menu selection calls menu DSK3 for *.S2P files on SAVE
TO HARD DISK the hard disk drive.

SAVE S2P DATA This menu selection calls menu DSK3 for *.S2P files on SAVE
TO FLOPPY DISK the floppy disk drive.

PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection. None
TO SELECT

PRESS <CLEAR> Pressing the Clear key aborts this menu selection and None
TO ABORT calls menu DE2.

Menu DE6, Generate E/O S2P Characterization

A-84 37XXXD OM
ALPHABETICAL LISTING D

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

O/E MEASUREMENT None

ORIGINAL CAL FILE

WITH FWD TRANS
CORRECTION

READ CAL FILE This menu selection calls menu DSK2 for *.CAL files on None
FROM HARD DISK the hard disk drive.

READ CAL FILE This menu selection calls menu DSK2 for *.CAL files on None
FROM FLOPPY DISK the floppy disk drive.

PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection. None
TO SELECT

PRESS <CLEAR> Pressing the Clear key aborts this menu selection and None
TO ABORT calls menu DE2.

Menu DE7, O/E Measurement

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

O/E MEASUREMENT None

TRANSFER STANDARD
TO BE DE-EMBEDED
(MODULATOR)

READ S2P FILE This menu selection calls menu DSK2 for *.S2P files on None
FROM HARD DISK the hard disk drive.

READ S2P FILE This menu selection calls menu DSK2 for *.S2P files on None
FROM FLOPPY DISK the floppy disk drive.

PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection. None
TO SELECT

PRESS <CLEAR> Pressing the Clear key aborts this menu selection and None
TO ABORT calls menu DE2.

Menu DE7A, O/E Measurement

37XXXD OM A-85
D ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

EMBED/DE-EMBED Users can perform any type of calibration. Normally, None

S2P FILE embedding/de-embedding Is applied to a 12-term
calibration. However, user’s can apply lesser types of
embedding/de-embedding depending on the calibration
type: 1-path 2-port (forward, reverse) reflection only (port 1,
,

port 2, both ports), and frequency response (forward, reverse,

both)

Circular interpolation is used. If the calibration has a frequency

range beyond the S2P file data frequency range, then either the
first or last S2P data are used — ‘flat’ extrapolation. The user is
warned that this extension of the S2P data has occurred.
Diabolical configurations will also be detected. For instance,
attaching a network to a port not supported in a calibration,
corrupt cal file, corrupt s2p data, no calibration in cal file, and
other messages may have to be displayed.

PORT 1/PORT 2 Selects between Port 1 or Port 2; Port 1 is the default EDEPORT1;
setting. EDEPORT2;
EDEPORT?

METHOD Selects the method to be used. De-embed is the default EDED; EDEE;
EMBED/DE-EMBED setting. EDENORM
EDEED?

SWAP PORTS OFF (ON) Lets users choose to swap ports for the S2P data. OFF is EDESWAP;
OF S2P DATA the default setting. EDESWAP?

APPLY NETWORK Calls menus DE9 then DE9A. These menus let users read IEDEF; LDEDEF
S2P FILE DATA TO CAL data or S2P data to the hard disk or the floppy disk.
CAL FILE DATA

PRESS <ENTER> Press the ENTER key to implement the menu selection. None
TO SELECT
OR CHANGE

Menu DE8, Embed/De-embed S2P File

A-86 37XXXD OM
ALPHABETICAL LISTING D

- EMBEDDING & DE-EMBEDDING S2P FILES -

THE CALIBRATED ERROR REFERENCE PLANE(S) CAN BE MOVED

TO A DIFFERENT POSITION BY EITHER MATHEMATICALLY ADDING
(EMBEDDING) OR REMOVING (DE-EMBEDDING) A NETWORK (S2P
FILE) TO OR FROM A CALIBRATION (CAL FILE).

- REQUIREMENTS -

- PERFORM AN RF CALIBRATION, ANY TYPE. STORE THE CAL

-

AND FRONT PANEL SETUP TO DISK (e.g. ORIGINAL.CAL).

- THE CHARACTERIZATION OF THE NETWORK TO EMBED/DE-EMBED
-

SHOULD BE IN A FILE USING THE S2P FORMAT (e.g.

NETWORK.S2P). USE AS MANY POINTS AS POSSIBLE TO
IMPROVE INTERPOLATION ACCURACY. MAKE SURE ITS FREQ
RANGE INCLUDES THE FREQ RANGE OF THE CAL FILE.
- CAL FILES AND S2P CHARACTERIZATION FILES MUST BE PLACED IN THE CURRENT
DIRECTORY OF THE DISK.
-

- INSTRUCTIONS -

1. SELECT PORT AND METHOD. EMBEDDING MATHEMATICALLY

ADDS (e.g. MATCHING NETWORK) TO THE SELECTED PORT.
DR-EMBEDDING MATHEMATICALLY REMOVES (e.g. TEST
FIXTURE) FROM THE SELECTED PORT.

2. SWAPPING THE PORTS OF THE S2P DATA EXCHANGES THE

S11 S22 AND S21 S12 WHILE APPLYING.

3. TO EMBED/DE-EMBED THE NETWORK, APPLY A NETWORK

S2P FILE TO A CAL FILE. IF DESIRED, SAVE RESULTS.

Menu EXT_DE8, Embed/De-embed S2P File

37XXXD OM A-87
D ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

EMBED/DE-EMBED None
S2P FILE

ORIGINAL CAL FILE Lets users select a cal file from the hard or floppy disks. None
TO APPLY NETWORK

READ CAL FILE Calls menu DSK2, which lets users select a file from the None
FROM HARD DISK hard disk.

READ CAL FILE Calls menu DSK2, which lets users select a file from the None
FROM FLOPPY DISK floppy disk.

PRESS <ENTER> Press the ENTER key to implement the menu selection. None
TO SELECT

PRESS <CLEAR> Press the CLEAR key to abprt the menu selection. None
TO ABORT

Menu DE9, Embed/De-embed S2P File

A-88 37XXXD OM
ALPHABETICAL LISTING D

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

EMBED/DE-EMBED None
S2P FILE

S2P FILE DATA Lets users select an S2P file from the hard or floppy disks. None
OF THE NETWORK

READ S2P FILE Calls menu DSK2, which lets users select a file from the None
FROM HARD DISK hard disk.

READ S2P FILE Calls menu DSK2, which lets users select a file from the None
FROM FLOPPY DISK floppy disk.

PRESS <ENTER> Press the ENTER key to implement the menu selection. None
TO SELECT

PRESS <CLEAR> Press the CLEAR key to abprt the menu selection. None
TO ABORT

Menu DE9A, Embed/De-embed S2P File

37XXXD OM A-89
D ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

None
DISCRETE FILL

INPUT START, This menu is used to create one or more ranges of None
INCR, POINTS, discrete equally spaced frequency points.
THEN SELECT
“FILL RANGE”

START FREQ Enter the first frequency of the range. None

XXX.XXXXXXXXX GHz

INCREMENT Enter the increment (step size) between one frequency None
XXX.XXXXXXXXX GHz and the next.

NUMBER OF PTS Enter the number of frequency points in the range. None
XXXX POINT(S)

STOP FREQ Enter the stop frequency, in GHz. None

XXX.XXXXXXXXX GHz

FILL RANGE Moving the cursor here and pressing Enter fills the range None
( XXXX ENTERED) and shows the number of frequencies selected (in NUM
OF PTS above).

INDIVIDUAL Calls menu DF2, which allows you to set the individual None
FREQ INSERT frequencies.

CLEAR ALL Clears all entries displayed above. None

FINISHED Closes this menu. None

RETURN TO SWP

PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection. None
TO SELECT

Menu DF1, Discrete Fill

A-90 37XXXD OM
ALPHABETICAL LISTING D

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

INSERT None
INDIVIDUAL
FREQUENCIES

INPUT A FREQ, Enter the start frequency, increment frequency, and number None
PRESS <ENTER> of points; then select the FILL RANGE menu option, below.
TO INSERT

NEXT FREQ Enter the sweep start frequency, in GHz. None

XXX.XXXXXXXXX GHz

XXXX FREQS Enter the frequency, in GHz, by which you want to None
ENTERED increment the start frequency.
LAST FREQ WAS
XXX.XXXXXXXXX GHz

AUTO INCR ON (OFF) Enter the number of points. None

XXX.XXXXXXXXX GHz

PREVIOUS MENU Returns to the previous menu. None

PRESS <ENTER> Press the Enter key to implements your menu selection or None
THEN SELECT to turn a selection on or off.
OR TURN ON/OFF

Menu DF2, Insert Individual Frequencies

37XXXD OM A-91
D ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

WARNING None

DEFAULT
PROGRAM
SELECTED

CONTINUING
WILL ERASE
CURRENT
SETUP AND
CALIBRATION

PRESS Pressing the DEFAULT PROGRAM key a second time

<DEFAULT PRGM> resets the 360 VNA to its default settings. Press the
TO CONFIRM DEFAULT PROGRAM key, the “0” key, then the DEFAULT
PROGRAM key again clears all internal memories. This
keying method can be used to clear memories of data used
for classified operations.

OR

PRESS <CLEAR> Pressing the CLEAR key implements your menu selection.
TO ABORT

Menu DFLT, Default Program Selected

A-92 37XXXD OM
ALPHABETICAL LISTING D

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

DIAGNOSTICS None

START SELF TEST Starts a self test of the 37XXXD. TST; *TST?

INSTALLED OPTIONS Displays the fitted options. *OPT?

PERIPHERAL TESTS Calls menu DG3, which provides tests for peripherals such None
as the LCD, front panel, external keyboard, printer and
GPIB interfaces.

SERVICE FUNCTIONS

READ SERVICE LOG Calls menu DG2, which gives you options for using the None
(FOR SERVICE Service Log.
USE ONLY)

TROUBLESHOOTING Calls menu DG4, which provides options for None

(FOR SERVICE troubleshooting the 37XXXD hardware. This menu is
USE ONLY) intended for use by a qualified service technician. Refer to
the Model 37XXXD Maintenance Manual for additional
information.

H/W CALIBRATIONS Calls menu DG5, which provides for invoking calibration None
(FOR SERVICE routines for use by a qualified service technician. Refer to
USE ONLY) the Model 37XXXD Maintenance Manual for additional
information.

AUTOCAL ASSURANCE Calls Menu ACAL_ASSUR, which provides for performing None
AutoCal assurance routines.

PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection. None
TO SELECT

Menu DG1, Diagnostics 1

37XXXD OM A-93
D ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

WARNING None

DEFAULT
PROGRAM
SELECTED

CONTINUING
WILL ERASE
CURRENT
SETUP AND
CALIBRATION

PRESS Pressing the DEFAULT PROGRAM key a second time

<DEFAULT PROGRAM> resets the VNA to its default settings. Press the DEFAULT
TO CONFIRM PROGRAM key, the “0” key, then the DEFAULT
PROGRAM key again clears all internal memories. This
keying method can be used to clear memories of data used
for classified operations.

PRESS <CLEAR> Pressing the CLEAR key implements your menu selection.
TO ABORT

Menu DG2, Troubleshooting

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

PERIPHERAL TESTS None

DISPLAY Provides a graphic display for evaluating screen colors and

linearity.

FRONT PANEL Provides for testing the front panel keys.

EXTERNAL Provides for testing the external keyboard connected to the

KEYBOARD Keyboard connector on the front panel.

PRINTER INTERFACE Provides for testing the printer interface.

GPIB INTERFACE Provides for testing the GPIB interface.

PREVIOUS MENU Returns to menu DG1. None

PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection. None
TO SELECT

Menu DG3, Diagnostics 3

A-94 37XXXD OM
ALPHABETICAL LISTING D

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COM-

MAND

FLOPPY DISK None

UTILITIES

DISPLAY Directory displays in the screen’s data area. Press <1> for DIR
DIRECTORY previous page, <2> for next page, <0> for first page, and
<3> for last page.

DELETE FILES Calls DSK6, which lets you delete data files. None

COPY FILES Calls DSK8, which lets you copy files to the hard disk. None
TO HARD DISK

FORMAT Formats the floppy disk. INT

FLOPPY DISK

COMMAND LINE Prompts a one-line dialog box that allows you to enter a None
command. The dialog box remains open only for the user
interface.

HARD DISK Calls DSK1-HD, which provides hard disk utilities. None
UTILITIES

PRESS <ENTER> Pressing Enter implements your menu selection. You will be None
TO SELECT returned to the previous menu when your selection is made.

Menu DSK_FD, Floppy Disk Utilities

37XXXD OM A-95
D ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

HARD DISK None

UTILITIES

DISPLAY Directory displays in the screen’s data area. Press <1> for DIR
DIRECTORY previous page, <2> for next page, <0> for first page, and
<3> for last page.

DELETE FILES Calls DSK6, which lets you delete data files. None

COPY FILES Calls DSK8, which lets you copy files to the floppy disk. None
TO FLOPPY DISK

FORMAT Formats the hard disk. None

HARD DISK

COMMAND LINE Prompts a one-line dialog box that allows you to enter a None
command. The dialog box remains open only for the user
interface.

FLOPPY DISK Calls DSK1-FD, which provides floppy disk utilities. None
UTILITIES

PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection. None
TO SELECT

Menu DSK_HD, Hard Disk Utilities

A-96 37XXXD OM
ALPHABETICAL LISTING D

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

SELECT FILE None

TO READ

FILE 1 Displays the data stored in file number 1.

FILE 2 Displays the data stored in file number 2.

FILE 3 Displays the data stored in file number 3.

FILE 4 Displays the data stored in file number 4.

FILE 5 Displays the data stored in file number 5.

FILE 6 Displays the data stored in file number 6.

FILE 7 Displays the data stored in file number 7.

FILE 8 Displays the data stored in file number 8.

PREVIOUS MENU Returns to the previous menu. None

PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection. None
TO SELECT

PRESS <1> FOR Pressing the “1" key on the keypad returns to the previous
PREVIOUS PAGE page.

PRESS <2> Pressing the “2" key on the keypad produces the next None
FOR NEXT PAGE page.

Menu DSK2, Select File to Read

37XXXD OM A-97
D ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

SELECT FILE None

TO OVERWRITE

CREATE NEW FILE

FILE 1 Select file number 1 to be overwritten with new data.

FILE 2 Select file number 2 to be overwritten with new data.

FILE 3 Select file number 3 to be overwritten with new data.

FILE 4 Select file number 4 to be overwritten with new data.

FILE 5 Select file number 5 to be overwritten with new data.

FILE 6 Select file number 6 to be overwritten with new data.

FILE 7 Select file number 7 to be overwritten with new data.

FILE 8 Select file number 8 to be overwritten with new data.

PREVIOUS MENU Returns to the previous menu. None

PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection. None
TO SELECT

PRESS <1> FOR Pressing the “1" key on the keypad returns to the previous
PREVIOUS PAGE page.

PRESS <2> Pressing the “2" key on the keypad produces the next None
FOR NEXT PAGE page.

Menu DSK3, Select File to Overwrite

A-98 37XXXD OM
ALPHABETICAL LISTING D

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

TYPE OF FILES None

TO DELETE

FRONT PANEL Calls menu DSK7, which provides a list of front panel and None
SETUP AND calibration data file.
CAL DATA

TRACE DATA Calls menu DSK7, which provides a list of trace data files None
to delete.

TABULAR DATA Calls menu DSK7, which provides a list of tabular data files None
to delete.

TEXT DATA Calls menu DSK7, which provides a list of text files to None
delete.

S2P DATA Calls menu DSK7, which provides a list of S2P data files to None
delete.

BITMAP DATA Calls menu DSK7, which provides a list of bitmap files to None
delete.

HPGL DATA Calls menu DSK7, which provides a list of HPGL files to None
delete.

ALL TYPES (*.*) Calls menu DSK7, which provides a list of all file types. None

PREVIOUS MENU Returns to the previous menu. None

PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection. None
TO SELECT

Menu DSK6, Type of Files to Delete

37XXXD OM A-99
D ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

SELECT FILE None

TO DELETE

FILE 1 Selects file number 1 data to be deleted.

FILE 2 Selects file number 2 data to be deleted.

FILE 3 Selects file number 3 data to be deleted.

FILE 4 Selects file number 4 data to be deleted.

FILE 5 Selects file number 5 data to be deleted.

FILE 6 Selects file number 6 data to be deleted.

FILE 7 Selects file number 7 data to be deleted.

FILE 8 Selects file number 8 data to be deleted.

PREVIOUS MENU Returns to the previous menu. None

PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection. None
TO SELECT

PRESS <1> FOR Pressing the “1" key on the keypad returns to the previous
PREVIOUS PAGE page.

PRESS <2> Pressing the “2" key on the keypad produces the next None
FOR NEXT PAGE page.

Menu DSK7, Select File to Delete

A-100 37XXXD OM
ALPHABETICAL LISTING D

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

TYPE OF FILES None

TO COPY

FRONT PANEL Calls menu DSK9, which provides a list of front panel and None
SETUP AND calibration data file.
CAL DATA

TRACE DATA Calls menu DSK9, which provides a list of trace data files None
to copy.

TABULAR DATA Calls menu DSK9, which provides a list of tabular data files None
to copy.

TEXT DATA Calls menu DSK9, which provides a list of text files to copy. None

S2P DATA Calls menu DSK9, which provides a list of S2P files to None
copy.

BITMAP DATA Calls menu DSK9, which provides a list of bitmap files to None
copy.

HPGL DATA Calls menu DSK9, which provides a list of HPGL files to None
copy.

ALL TYPES (*.*) Calls menu DSK9, which provides a list of all file types. None

PREVIOUS MENU Returns to the previous menu. None

PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection. None
TO SELECT

Menu DSK8, Type of Files to Copy

37XXXD OM A-101
D ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

SELECT FILE None

TO COPY

FILE 1 Selects file number 1 data to be copied. COPY

FILE 2 Selects file number 2 data to be copied. COPY

FILE 3 Selects file number 3 data to be copied. COPY

FILE 4 Selects file number 4 data to be copied. COPY

FILE 5 Selects file number 5 data to be copied. COPY

FILE 6 Selects file number 6 data to be copied. COPY

FILE 7 Selects file number 7 data to be copied. COPY

FILE 8 Selects file number 8 data to be copied. COPY

PREVIOUS MENU Returns to the previous menu. None

PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection. None
TO SELECT

PRESS <1> FOR Pressing the “1" key on the keypad returns to the previous
PREVIOUS PAGE page.

PRESS <2> Pressing the “2" key on the keypad produces the next None
FOR NEXT PAGE page.

Menu DSK9, Select File to Copy

A-102 37XXXD OM
ALPHABETICAL LISTING D

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

CAPTURE Captures the tabular data to a file when the Enter key is None
TABULAR DATA pressed.

PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection. None
TO CONTINUE

Menu DSK10, Capture Tabular Data

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

CAUTION: ALL None

FLOPPY DISK DATA
WILL BE ERASED

INSERT DISK Ensure that you have the correct floppy diskette for None
TO FORMAT formatting, then press the Enter key to begin the formatting
process.

PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection. None
TO CONTINUE

Menu DSK11, Format Floppy Disk

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

CAUTION: ALL None

HARD DISK DATA
WILL BE ERASED

ASSUME HARD DISK READY Assumes that the hard disk is ready to be formatted; press None
TO FORMAT the Enter key to begin the formatting process.

PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection. None
TO CONTINUE

Menu DSK12, Format Hard Disk

37XXXD OM A-103
E ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

DATA ENHANCEMENT None
AVERAGING Averages the measured data over time, as follows: AVG; AVG?
XXXX MEAS. 1. The sweep stops at the first frequency point and takes a
number of readings, based on the selected number of
points.
2. The program averages the readings and writes the
average value for that frequency point in the displayed
graph.
3. The sweep then advances to the next sequential
frequency point and repeats the process.
AVERAGING TYPE
POINT-BY-POINT Averages the point-by-point up to the number of averages. PTAVG; SWAVG?
SWEEP-BY-SWEEP Averages the sweep-by-sweep up to the number of SWAVG;
sweeps. SWAVG?
RESET AVG COUNT Zeros the counter used for sweep averaging RSTAVG
XXXX SWEEP(S)
SMOOTHING Smooths the measured data over frequency, as follows: SON; SON?;
XX.XX PERCENT 1. The program divides the overall sweep into smaller SOF; SOF?
OF SWEEP segments, based on the selected percent-of-span. (Refer to
XXX POINT(S) Section 4-4 and Figure 4-23 for a description and example
of smoothing.)
2. It takes a data reading at each frequency point within
that percent-of-span segment.
3. It averages the readings with a raised Hamming window
and writes that magnitude value at the mid-frequency point
of the segment in the displayed graph or Smith chart.
4. It then advances the percent-of-span segment to
encompass the next sequential group of frequency points
and repeats the process.
The displayed number of points represents the number of
points for a given percent of sweep and is based on the
max data points, and the sweep start and stop.
SAMPLERS USED Sets the number of samplers used per sweep. SAMP2; SAMP3;
PER SWEEP SAMP?
X SAMPLERS
PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection. None
TO SELECT
PRESS
<AVG/SMOOTH MENU>
TO RESET AVG COUNT

Menu EM, Enhancement Menu

A-104 37XXXD OM
ALPHABETICAL LISTING G

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

SWEPT FREQUENCY None

GAIN COMPRESSION

NOMINAL OFFSET Shows gain of nominal offset. This value is the approximate NOFST?
-XX.XX dB gain (or loss) of the external devices preceding the AUT
(amplifier under test). Specifically, the gain of the amplifier
and attenuator combination. This value is used whenever
flat test port power is turned OFF (while still existing) to
prevent an unexpected jump in the power to the AUT.

CALIBRATE Calls menu GC_SU8, which provides calibration options. None

FOR FLATNESS
(NO CAL EXISTS)

FLATNESS Shows value of the flatness correction. FPX?

CORRECTION
AT -XX.XX dBm

CALIBRATE Calls menu GC_RCVR, which provides calibration options. None

RECEIVER
(NO CAL EXISTS)

NORMALIZE S21 Calls menu GC_NORM. None

(NOT STORED)

GAIN COMPRESSION This option is used with marker search functions. Value GCMP; GCMP?
POINT (0 dB REF) has a range from 0.05 to 9.99 dB and a default value of
XX.XX dB 1.00 dB. The search value is [negative] the gain
compression point value. The reference is based on
(maximum) with tracking ON.

TEST AUT Closes the extended menu and displays the dual channels None
1 & 3, with channel 3 active.

EXIT APPLICATION Exits the gain compression application and returns to None
S-parameter measurements. It restores the measurement
setup.

Menu GC1, Swept Frequency Gain Compression

37XXXD OM A-105
G ALPHABETICAL LISTING

- SWEPTFREQUENCY GAIN COMPRESSION-

PORT1 PORT2
AMP ATTN TEST PORTS ATTN

1 2

NOMINAL OFFSET

- CALIBRATION INSTRUCTIONS -

1. TEST PORT 1 POWER SHOULD BE APPROXIMATELY=

AUT(x dB compression spec) - AUT(gain) - 15 dB

2. PORT 2 INPUT POWER SHOULD BE LESS THAN 0 dBm

(UNLESS OPTION 6 IS INSTALLED).
.
3 NOMINAL OFFSET = APPROXIMATE GAIN (OR LOSS)
OF EXTERNALDEVICES PRECEDINGTHE AUT.

4. DEFAULT DISPLAY IS DUAL CHANNEL1-3 IN WHICH

CHANNEL1 = b2/1 [dBm] AND CHANNEL3 = S21.

- MEASUREMENT INSTRUCTIONS -

1. AFTER THE AUT IS CONNECTED,NORMALIZE S21.

2. INDICATE THE GAIN COMPRESSION POINT VALUE (x dB )
AND SELECT <TEST AUT>.
3. INCREASE TEST PORT 1 POWER UNTIL A 1 dB (or x dB)
DECREASE IN S21 IS OBSERVED.

Menu EXT_GC1, Gain Compression Help Menu 1

A-106 37XXXD OM
ALPHABETICAL LISTING G

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

SWEPT POWER None

GAIN COMPRESSION

SET FREQUENCIES Calls menu GC_DF2, with it extended menu None

EXT_GC_DF2. There the you may enter from 1 to 10
discrete frequencies to be used by the application.

P START Defines the power sweep. The start and stop are limited PSTRT; PSTRT?
-XX.XX dBm by the actual power control range of the internal source.
The stepsize resolution is limited to 0.05 dB.
P STOP PSTOP; PSTOP?
-XX.XX dBm

STEPSIZE PSTEP; PSTEP?

X.XX dB

ATTENUATION Calls menu GC_SU2, which lets you set attenuation values. None

GAIN COMPRESSION This option is used with marker search functions. Value GCMP
POINT (MAX REF) has a range from 0.05 to 9.99 dB and a default value of
XX.XX dB 1.00 dB. The search value is [negative] the gain
compression point value. The reference is based on
(maximum) with tracking ON.

NOMINAL OFFSET This value is the approximate gain (or loss) of the external NOFST; NOFST?
-XX.XX dB devices preceding the AUT. Specifically, the gain of the
amplifier and attenuator combination. This value is used
whenever power linearity is turned OFF (while still existing)
to prevent an unexpected jump in the power to the AUT.

MORE Calls menu GC3, with is companion menu EXT_CG3. None

PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection. None
TO SELECT

Menu GC2, Swept Power Gain Compression 1

37XXXD OM A-107
G ALPHABETICAL LISTING

- SWEPT POWER GAIN COMPRESSION -

PORT1 PORT2
AMP ATTN TEST PORTS ATTN

1 2

NOMINAL OFFSET

- CALIBRATION INSTRUCTIONS -

1. SET FREQUENCIES (FROM 1 TO 10 FREQS ALLOWED).

2. P START POWER SHOULD BE APPROXIMATELY =

AUT (x dB compression spec) - AUT (gain) - 15 dB.

3. P STOP SHOULD BE 20 dB HIGHER THAN P START.

4. PORT 2 INPUT POWER SHOULD BE LESS THAN 0 dB

(UNLESS OPTION 6 IS INSTALLED).

5. INDICATE THE GAIN COMPRESSION POINT VALUE (x dB).

6. NOMINAL OFFSET = APPROXIMATE GAIN (OR LOSS)

OF EXTERNAL DEVICES PRECEDING THE AUT.

Menu EXT_GC2, Gain Compression Help Menu 2

A-108 37XXXD OM
ALPHABETICAL LISTING G

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

SWEPT POWER None

GAIN COMPRESSION

CALIBRATE Calls menu GC_SU8A with extended menu EXT_GC_SU8A None

FOR LINEARITY and menu GC_SU8A_ABORT. Upon a successful power
(NO CAL EXISTS) linearity calibration, menu GC2 reappears with (CAL
EXISTS) and linearity correction ON.

LINEARITY ON (OFF) Toggles the linearity correction on and off. PSWC0;

CORRECTION PSWC1;PSWCX?

CALIBRATE Calls menu GC_RCVR. None

RECEIVER
(NO CAL EXISTS)

S21 OPTIONS Calls menu GC_S21OPT. None

(NOT STORED)

AUT TEST TYPES None

GAIN COMPRESSION Closes the extended menu and displays the dual channels CALR
1 & 3, with channel 3 active. Up to this point, the system is
sweeping frequencies. Once <Test AUT> is pressed, the
power sweep mode is turned ON and the system goes into
single sweep and hold. One power sweep at the current
power freq is done and the system goes into hold with Bias
and RF ON. Pressing the Hold key will restart the sweep.

AM/PM Closes the extended menuand displays dual channel 2 & 4, SPAMPMT
with Channel 4 becoming active.The power sweep mode is
activated and the VNA goes into continuous sweep. The
power sweeps at the current power frequency; the marker
function is turned off, but markers remain. Channel 2
displays S21 on a Phase graph and Channel 4 displays
S21 on a Log Magnitude graph.

MULTIPLE FREQ Calls menu GC4. None

GAIN COMPRESSION

RETURN TO SWEPT Returns program to the swept frequency operational mode. None
FREQUENCY MODE

PREVIOUS MENU Returns to previous menu. None

PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection. None
TO SELECT
OR TURN ON/OFF

Menu GC3, Swept Power Gain Compression 2

37XXXD OM A-109
G ALPHABETICAL LISTING

- SWEPT POWER GAIN COMPRESSION -

PORT1 PORT2
AMP ATTN TEST PORTS ATTN

1 2

NOMINAL OFFSET

- CALIBRATION INSTRUCTIONS -

7. LINEARITY CALIBRATION IMPROVES ACCURACY.

8. RECEIVER CALIBRATION IS DONE AT P STOP.

NORMALIZE S21 AND DISPLAY S21 ARE IS DONE AT P START.

9. DEFAULT DISPLAY IS DUAL CHANNEL 1-3 IN WHICH

CHANNEL 1 = b2/1 [dBm] AND CHANNEL 3 = S21

-MEASUREMENT INSTRUCTIONS-

1. SELECT THE DESIRED S21 OPTION.

2. SELECT <GAIN COMPRESSION> OR <AM/PM> AUT TEST.

3. MARKERS CAN BE USED TO LOCATE THE 1 dB (or x dB)

COMPRESSION POINT. CHANGE THE POWER FREQUENCY TO
MEASURE EACH OF THE OTHER POWER SWEEPS.

4. SELECT <MULTIPLE FREQ GAIN COMPRESSION> TO TEST

THE AUT AT ALL THE SWEPT POWER FREQUENCIES. THE
RESULTS ARE COMPUTED UNDER THE ASSUMPTION THAT
P OUTPUT AT P START IS IN THE AUT’S LINEAR REGION.

Menu EXT_GC3, Gain Compression Help Menu 3

A-110 37XXXD OM
ALPHABETICAL LISTING G

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

MULTIPLE FREQUENCY None

GAIN COMPRESSION

TEST AUT Calls menu GC4_ABORT; and it turns on the power sweep None
mode and conducts a power sweep at each of the swept
power frequencies. The gain compression points are
computed under the assumption that P Output at P Start is
in the AUT's linear region. The frequency, power in, and
power out values are listed in a table. The power out
versus frequency number is displayed in on a graph..

TEXT DATA When either Text Data to Hard Disk or Text Data to Floppy None
TO HARD DISK Disk are selected, the appropriate disk save file menu
DSKx is displayed and the table is captured and recorded
TEXT DATA in a text file.
TO FLOPPY DISK

SWEPT POWER Calls menu CG3, which let you perform a Swept Power None
GAIN COMPRESSION Gain Compression measurement.

RETURN TO SWEPT None

FREQUENCY MODE

PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection. None
TO SELECT

Menu GC4, Multiple Frequency Gain Compression 1

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

MULTIPLE FREQUENCY None

GAIN COMPRESSION

TESTING AUT None

PRESS <CLEAR> Pressing the Clear key aborts the Multiple Frequency Gain None
TO ABORT Compression.

Menu GC4_ABORT, Multiple Frequency Gain Compression 2

37XXXD OM A-111
G ALPHABETICAL LISTING

- MULTIPLE FREQUENCY GAIN COMPRESSION POINT -

SWEPT POWER FREQUENCIES POWER IN POWER OUT

1. XXX.XXXXXXXXX GHz -XX.XX dBm -XX.XX dBm

2. XXX.XXXXXXXXX GHz -XX.XX dBm -XX.XX dBm
3. XXX.XXXXXXXXX GHz -XX.XX dBm -XX.XX dBm
4. XXX.XXXXXXXXX GHz -XX.XX dBm -XX.XX dBm
5. XXX.XXXXXXXXX GHz -XX.XX dBm -XX.XX dBm
6. XXX.XXXXXXXXX GHz -XX.XX dBm -XX.XX dBm
7. XXX.XXXXXXXXX GHz -XX.XX dBm -XX.XX dBm
8. XXX.XXXXXXXXX GHz -XX.XX dBm -XX.XX dBm
9. XXX.XXXXXXXXX GHz -XX.XX dBm -XX.XX dBm

POWER OUT [dBm] 1.00 dB GAIN COMPRESSION POINT

-XX.XX

-XX.XX
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
FREQUENCY NUMBER

Menu EXT_GC4, Gain Compression Help Menu 4

A-112 37XXXD OM
ALPHABETICAL LISTING G

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

SWEPT POWER None

FREQUENCIES

INPUT A FREQ, This menu performs in a similar manner to the menu DF2, None
PRESS <ENTER> Insert Individual Frequencies. The list is updated and kept
TO INSERT in ascending order. Any frequencies which are added or
deleted force a resorting of the list. The user can enter
from 1 to 10 swept power frequencies.

SWEPT POWER Enter the swept power frequencies using the keypad or
FREQUENCY knob. Press <ENTER> to insert into the swept power
XXX.XXXXXXXXX GHz frequency list

CLEAR FREQ NUMBER Enter the number of the frequency to remove from the list
XX using the keypad or knob. Press <ENTER> to remove the
selection from the list.

CLEAR ALL Press <ENTER> to remove all the frequencies from the
swept power frequency list.

FINISHED, After the swept power frequency list is entered, this returns None
RETURN TO POWER to menu GC2.
SWEEP SETUP

PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection. None
TO SELECT

Menu GC_DF2, Swept Power Frequencies

37XXXD OM A-113
G ALPHABETICAL LISTING

- MULTIPLE FREQUENCY GAIN COMPRESSION -

SWEPT POWER FREQUENCIES

1. XXX.XXXXXXXXX GHz
2. XXX.XXXXXXXXX GHz
3. XXX.XXXXXXXXX GHz
4. XXX.XXXXXXXXX GHz
5. XXX.XXXXXXXXX GHz
6. XXX.XXXXXXXXX GHz
7. XXX.XXXXXXXXX GHz
8. XXX.XXXXXXXXX GHz
9. XXX.XXXXXXXXX GHz
10. XXX.XXXXXXXXX GHz

Menu EXT_GC_DF2, Gain Compression Help Menu

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

NORMALIZE S21 This menu lets you see if you have a good NRMS21
connection of the throughline before capturing the SPS21?
data by pressing <Enter>. The calibration may be
aborted by pressing <Clear>. In both cases, menu
GC1 or GC3 is displayed.

CONNECT AUT
AND APPLY BIAS

WAIT FOR ONE

COMPLETE SWEEP
BEFORE STORING

PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the Enter key stores the Normalized S21
TO STORE calibration.

PRESS <CLEAR> Pressing the Clear key aborts the Normalized S21
TO ABORT calibation.

Menu GC_NORM, Normalize S21

A-114 37XXXD OM
ALPHABETICAL LISTING G

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

RECEIVER This menu lets you see if you have a good connection of None
CALIBRATION the throughline before capturing the data by pressing
<Enter>. The calibration may be aborted by pressing
<Clear>. In both cases, menu GC1 or GC2 is displayed.

CONNECT None
THROUGHLINE
BETWEEN
TEST PORTS

INCLUDE ANY None

COMPONENTS WHICH
ARE PART OF THE
MEASUREMENT PATH

WAIT FOR ONE CALR

COMPLETE SWEEP
BEFORE STORING

PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the Enter key stores the receiver calibration. None
TO STORE

PRESS <CLEAR> Pressing the Clear key aborts the Receiver calibation. None
TO ABORT

Menu GC_RCVR, Receiver Calibration

37XXXD OM A-115
G ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

SWEPT POWER None

GAIN COMPRESSION

PORT 1 ATTN Attenuates the microwave source power at port 1 from 0 to SA1; SA1?
0*10 dB (0 - 70) 70 dB, in 10 dB steps. The power is attenuated before
being applied to Port 1 for a forward transmission or
reflection test (S21 or S11, respectively).

PORT 2 ATTN Attenuates from 0 to 40 dB (10 dB steps) the microwave TA; TA2?
0*10 dB (0 - 40) power being input to Port 2 from the device-under-test
(DUT).

PREVIOUS MENU Returns to the previous menu. None

PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection. None
TO SELECT

Menu GC_SU2, Swept Power Gain Compression 2

A-116 37XXXD OM
ALPHABETICAL LISTING G

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

CALIBRATE FOR The power linearity calibration is done for each of the None
LINEAR POWER swept power frequencies across the power sweep range.
The resolution of the calibration points is 0.25 dB. The
maximum will be equal to the power sweep step size.

FORWARD The Linear Power Calibration is only done in the forward None
DIRECTION ONLY direction.

START LINEAR Starts the linear power calibration. PSWC

POWER CALIBRATION

PREVIOUS MENU Returns to previous menu. None

PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection. None
TO SELECT

Menu GC_SU8A, Calibrate for Linear Power

37XXXD OM A-117
G ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

LINEAR POWER None

CALIBRATION

CALIBRATING FOR None

LINEAR POWER . . .

PRESS <CLEAR> Pressing the Clear key aborts the Linear Power Calibration. None
TO ABORT

Menu GC_SU8A-ABORT, Abort Calibrate for Linear Power

- LINEAR POWER CALIBRATION -

- CALIBRATION INSTRUCTIONS -

LINEAR POWER CALIBRATION ADJUSTS THE SOURCE OUTPUT

POWER FOR EACH POWER FREQUENCY POINT ACROSS THE POWER
SWEEP RANGE TO PROVIDE A LINEAR POWER LEVEL AT THE
TEST PORT (FORWARD DIRECTION ONLY).

- INSTRUCTIONS -

1. PRESET, ZERO, AND CALIBRATE THE POWER METER.

2. CREATE AND ACTIVATE THE POWER METER'S CAL

FACTOR LIST FOR THE POWER SENSOR BEING USED.

3. CONNECT THE POWER METER TO THE DEDICATED GPIB

INTERFACE AND THE POWER SENSOR TO THE TEST PORT.

4. SELECT <START LINEAR POWER CALIBRATION>.

Menu EXT_GC_SU8A, Gain Compression Help Menu

A-118 37XXXD OM
ALPHABETICAL LISTING G

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

NORMALIZE S21 This menu lets you see if you have a good connection of NRMS21
the throughline before capturing the data by pressing DSPS21?
<Enter>. The calibration may be aborted by pressing
<Clear>. In both cases, menu GC1 or GC3 is displayed.

CONNECT AUT None

AND APPLY BIAS

RESULTS IN A None
DISPLAY THAT IS
NORMALIZED TO THE
AUT PERFORMANCE
AT P START.
NORMALIZATION IS
AUTOMATIC FOR
EACH POWER SWEEP

DISPLAY S21 DSPS21

DSPS21?

CONNECT THROUGH None

RESULTS IN A None
DISPLAY SHOWING
THE VALUE OF
S21 FOR EACH
POWER SWEEP

WAIT FOR ONE NRMS

COMPLETE SWEEP
BEFORE STORING

CONNECT AUT None

AND APPLY BIAS

PRESS <CLEAR> Pressing the Clear key aborts the Normalized S21 None
TO ABORT calibation.

Menu GC_S21OPT, S21 Options

37XXXD OM A-119
G ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

SELECT LABEL Name your file using the rotary knob to select letters, None
--------- numbers, or both. A letter or number turns red to indicate
ABCDEFGHIJKLM that the letter/number has been chosen for selection.
NOPQRSTUVWXYZ Pressing the Enter key selects the letter or number. the
0123456789()- name you spell out displays in the area below “SELECT
!#$%&'@^_'{}~ NAME.” You are allowed up to eight characters for a file
name and twelve characters for a label.

* ? : \ . SP For keyboard command line entry. None

BKSP CLR DONE Selecting “BKSP” deletes the last letter in the name None
displayed above.
Selecting “CLR” deletes the entire name.
Selecting “DONE” signals that you have finished writing the
name.

TURN KNOB Use the rotary knob to indicate the letter or number you None
TO INDICATE wish to select.
CHARACTER OR You can use the up-arrow and down-arrow keys to move
FUNCTION between rows.

PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection. None
TO SELECT The menu remains on the screen until another menu is
selected for display or until the CLEAR/RET LOC key is
pressed.

NUMBERS MAY You may also select numbers and decimals using the None
ALSO BE keypad.
SELECTED
USING KEYPAD

Menu GP5, Select Name

A-120 37XXXD OM
ALPHABETICAL LISTING G

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

GPIB ADDRESSES None

IEEE 488.2 None

GPIB INTERFACE

ADDRESS: Selects the GPIB address for the 37XXXD analyzer. The ADDGP;
6 default address is 6. ADDGP?

DEDICATED None
GPIB INTERFACE

EXTERNAL SOURCE 1 Selects the address for external source 1. The default SRC1ADD;
4 address is 4. SRC1ADD?

EXTERNAL SOURCE 2 Selects the address for external source 2. The default SRC2ADD;
5 address is 5. SRC2ADD?

PLOTTER Selects the address for a compatible plotter. The default ADDPLT;
8 address is 8. ADDPLT?

POWER METER Selects the address for a compatible power meter. The ADDPM;
13 default address is 13. ADDPM?

FREQUENCY COUNTER Selects the address for an external frequency counter. The ADDFC; ADDFC?
7 default address is 7.

Menu GP7, Display GPIB Status

37XXXD OM A-121
G ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

NETWORK SETUP None

ETHERNET ADDRESS Displays the ethernet address. This address can be found ADDHW?,;
123456789ABC on the A9 PCB. It is programmed by Motorola in the
MVME162.

IP ADDRESS Displays the Internet Protocol address. User can set this ADDIP; ADDIP?
XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX address of four numbers. Address numbers range from 0
to 255 separated by periods.

SUBNET MASK Displays the address of the subnet mask. User can set this SUBMSK;
XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX address of four numbers. Address numbers range from 0 SUBMSK?
to 255 separated by periods.

WARNING
DO NOT CHANGE
DEFAULT GATEWAY
FROM 0.0.0.0
UNLESS ONE EXISTS

DEFAULT GATEWAY Displays the Internet Protocol address. User can set this DEFGT; DEFGT?
XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX address of four numbers. Address numbers range from 0
to 255 separated by periods.

Menu GP8, Network Setup

A-122 37XXXD OM
ALPHABETICAL LISTING G

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

SELECT None
GRAPH TYPE

LOG MAGNITUDE Selects a log magnitude graph for display on the active MAG
channel's selected S-parameter. The active channel is
indicated by its key (CH1, CH2, CH3, CH4) being lit.

PHASE Selects a phase graph for display on the active channel. PHA

LOG MAGNITUDE Selects log magnitude and phase graphs for display on the MPH
AND PHASE active channel.

SMITH CHART Selects a Smith chart for display on the active channel. SMI; SME; SMC
(IMPEDANCE)

SWR Selects an SWR display for the active channel. SWR

GROUP DELAY Selects a Group Delay display for the active channel. DLA

POWER OUT Provides for measuring output power. The measurement of POW
output power is accomplished by using the b2 (or Tb)
measured value normalized to the power supplied to the
AUT at Test Port 1. While the b2 parameter is the most
meaningful for this graph type, you may use any other
parameter.

MORE Calls additional graph type selections on menu GT2. None

PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection None
TO SELECT (and resumes the calibration from where it left off, if in the
AND RESUME CAL calibration mode).

Menu GT1/CAL_GT1, Select Graph Type

37XXXD OM A-123
G ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

SELECT None
GRAPH TYPE

SMITH CHART Selects an Admittance Smith chart for display on the active ISM; ISE; ISC
(ADMITTANCE) channel's
S-parameter.

LINEAR POLAR Selects a Linear Polar graph for display on the active PLR
channel's
S-parameter.

LOG POLAR Selects a Log Polar graph for display on the active PLG
channel's
S-parameter.

LINEAR MAG Selects a Linear Magnitude graph for display on the active LIN
channel's
S-parameter.

LINEAR MAG Selects Linear Magnitude and Phase graphs for display on LPH
AND PHASE the active channel's S-parameter.

REAL Selects Real data for display on the active channel's REL
s-parameter.

IMAGINARY Selects Imaginary data for display on the active channel's IMG
s-parameter.

REAL AND Selects both Real and Imaginary data for display on the RIM
IMAGINARY active channel's S-parameter.

MORE Calls additional graph type selections. None

PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection None
TO SELECT (and resumes the calibration from where it left off, if in the
AND RESUME CAL calibration mode).

Menu GT2/CAL_GT2, Select Graph Type

A-124 37XXXD OM
ALPHABETICAL LISTING L

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

SINGLE LIMITS None

—LOG MAG— None

UPPER LIMIT ON (OFF) Turns the Upper Limit line on or off for the active channel. UPL0; UPL1;
XXX.XXX dB For your convenience, the arbitrarily set limit lines allow UPLX?
you to delineate a go/no go line on your Log Mag display
beyond which the measured values are unacceptable.

LOWER LIMIT ON(OFF) Turns the Lower Limit line on or off for the active channel LOL0; LOL1;
XXX.XXX dB on your Log Mag display. LOLX?

READOUT LIMIT Calls menu LF1, which shows points where the current None
S-parameter intercepts the lower limit.

–PHASE– None

UPPER LIMIT ON (OFF) Turns the Upper Limit line on or off for the active channel UPL0; UPL1;
XXX.XXX° on your Phase display. UPLX?

LOWER LIMIT ON(OFF) Turns the Lower Limit line on or off for the active channel LOL0; LOL1;
XXX.XXX ° on your Phase display. LOLX?

READOUT LIMIT Calls menu LF2, which shows points where the current None
S-parameter intercepts the lower limit.

DISPLAY ON (OFF) Enables both limit lines for the active channel on both the LON; LOF; LON?
LIMITS Log-
Mag and Phase graphs.

TEST LIMITS Calls menu LTST, which provides choices for testing the None
limits.

SEGMENTED LIMITS Calls a menu in the LS series (LSX), which lets you set None
segmented limit lines.

PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection. None
TO SELECT
OR TURN ON/OFF

Menu L1, Set Limits—Magnitude and Phase

37XXXD OM A-125
L ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

SINGLE LIMITS None

–LINEAR POLAR– None

UPPER LIMIT ON (OFF) Turns the Upper Limit line on or off for the active channel. UPL0; UPL1;
XXX.XXX mU For your convenience, the arbitrarily set limit lines allow UPLX?
you to delineate a go/no go line on your Linear Polar
display beyond which the measured values are
unacceptable.

LOWER LIMIT ON(OFF) Turns the Lower Limit line on or off for the active channel LOL0; LOL1;
XXX.XXX mU on your Linear Polar display. LOLX?

DISPLAY ON (OFF) Enables both previously set limit lines to appear for the LON; LOF; LON?
LIMITS active
channel on your polar display.

TEST LIMITS Calls menu LTST, which provides choices for testing the None
limits.

PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection. None
TO SELECT
OR TURN ON/OFF

Menu L2, Set Limits—Linear Polar

A-126 37XXXD OM
ALPHABETICAL LISTING L

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

SINGLE LIMITS None

–SMITH CHART– None

UPPER LIMIT ON (OFF) Turns the Upper Limit line on or off for the active channel. UPL0; UPL1;
XXX.XXX mU For your convenience, the arbitrarily set limit lines allow UPLX?
you to delineate a go/no go line on your Smith Chart
display beyond which the measured values are
unacceptable.

LOWER LIMIT ON(OFF) Turns the Lower Limit line on or off for the active channel LOL0; LOL1;
XXX.XXX mU on your Smith Chart. LOLX?

DISPLAY ON (OFF) Enables both previously set limit lines to appear for the LON; LOF; LON?
LIMITS active
channel on your Smith Chart.

TEST LIMITS Calls menu LTST, which provides choices for testing the None
limits.

PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection. None
TO SELECT
OR TURN ON/OFF

Menu L3, Set Limits—Linear Polar/Smith Chart

37XXXD OM A-127
L ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

SINGLE LIMITS None

–LOG MAG– None

UPPER LIMIT ON (OFF) Turns the Upper Limit line on or off for the active channel. UPL0; UPL1;
XXX.XXX dB For your convenience, the arbitrarily set limit lines allow UPLX?
you to delineate a go/no go line on your Log Mag display
beyond which the measured values are unacceptable.

LOWER LIMIT ON(OFF) Turns the Lower Limit line on or off for the active channel LOL0; LOL1;
XXX.XXX dB on your Log Mag display. LOLX?

READOUT LIMIT Calls menu LF1, which shows points where the current None
S-parameter intercepts the lower limit.

DISPLAY ON (OFF) Enables both previously set limit lines to appear for the LON; LOF; LON?
LIMITS active
channel on your Log Mag display.

TEST LIMITS Calls menu LTST, which provides choices for testing the None
limits.

SEGMENTED LIMITS Calls a menu in the LS series (LSX), which lets you set None
segmented limit lines.

PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection. None
TO SELECT
OR TURN ON/OFF

Menu L4, Set Limits—Log Magnitude

A-128 37XXXD OM
ALPHABETICAL LISTING L

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

SINGLE LIMITS None

–PHASE– None

UPPER LIMIT ON (OFF) Turns the Upper Limit line on or off for the active channel. UPL0; UPL1;
XXX.XXX ° For your convenience, the arbitrarily set limit lines allow UPLX?
you to delineate a go/no go line on your Phase display
beyond which the measured values are unacceptable.

LOWER LIMIT ON(OFF) Turns the Lower Limit line on or off for the active channel LOL0; LOL1;
XXX.XXX ° on your Phase display. LOLX?

READOUT LIMIT Calls menu LF1, which shows points where the current None
S-parameter intercepts the lower limit.

DISPLAY ON (OFF) Enables both limit lines for the active channel on a phase LON; LOF; LON?
LIMITS graph.

TEST LIMITS Calls menu LTST, which provides choices for testing the None
limits.

SEGMENTED LIMITS Calls a menu in the LS series (LSX), which lets you set None
segmented limit lines.

PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection. None
TO SELECT
OR TURN ON/OFF

Menu L5, Set Limits—Phase

37XXXD OM A-129
L ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

SINGLE LIMITS None

–LOG POLAR– None

UPPER LIMIT ON (OFF) Turns the Upper Limit line on or off for the active channel. UPL0; UPL1;
XXX.XXX dB For your convenience, the arbitrarily set limit lines allow UPLX?
you to delineate a go/no go line on your Log Polar display
beyond which the measured values are unacceptable.

LOWER LIMIT ON(OFF) Turns the Lower Limit line on or off for the active channel LOL0; LOL1;
XXX.XXX dB on your Log Polar display. LOLX?

DISPLAY ON (OFF) Enables both previously set limit lines to appear for the LON; LOF; LON?
LIMITS active
channel on your Log Polar display.

TEST LIMITS Calls menu LTST, which provides choices for testing the None
limits.

PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection. None
TO SELECT
OR TURN ON/OFF

Menu L6, Set Limits—Log Polar

A-130 37XXXD OM
ALPHABETICAL LISTING L

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

SINGLE LIMITS None

–GROUP DELAY– None

UPPER LIMIT ON (OFF) Turns the Upper Limit line on or off for the active channel. UPL0; UPL1;
XXX.XXX fs For your convenience, the arbitrarily set limit lines allow UPLX?
you to delineate a go/no go line on your Group Delay
display beyond which the measured values are
unacceptable.

LOWER LIMIT ON(OFF) Turns the Lower Limit line on or off for the active channel LOL0; LOL1;
XXX.XXX fs on your Group Delay display. LOLX?

READOUT LIMIT Calls menu LF1, which shows points where the current None
S-parameter intercepts the lower limit.

DISPLAY ON (OFF) Enables both previously set limit lines to appear for the LON; LOF; LON?
LIMITS active
channel on your Group Delay display.

TEST LIMITS Calls menu LTST, which provides choices for testing the None
limits.

SEGMENTED LIMITS Calls a menu in the LS series (LSX), which lets you set None
segmented limit lines.

PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection. None
TO SELECT
OR TURN ON/OFF

Menu L7, Set Limits—Group Delay

37XXXD OM A-131
L ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

SINGLE LIMITS None

–LINEAR MAG– None

UPPER LIMIT ON (OFF) Turns the Upper Limit line on or off for the active channel. UPL0; UPL1;
XXX.XXX pU For your convenience, the arbitrarily set limit lines allow UPLX?
you to delineate a go/no go line on your Linear Mag display
beyond which the measured values are unacceptable.

LOWER LIMIT ON(OFF) Turns the Lower Limit line on or off for the active channel LOL0; LOL1;
XXX.XXX pU on your Linear Mag display. LOLX?

READOUT LIMIT Calls menu LF1, which shows points where the current None
S-parameter intercepts the lower limit.

DISPLAY ON (OFF) Enables both previously set limit lines to appear for the LON; LOF; LON?
LIMITS active
channel on your Linear Mag display.

TEST LIMITS Calls menu LTST, which provides choices for testing the None
limits.

SEGMENTED LIMITS Calls a menu in the LS series (LSX), which lets you set None
segmented limit lines.

PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection. None
TO SELECT
OR TURN ON/OFF

Menu L8, Set Limits—Linear Magnitude

A-132 37XXXD OM
ALPHABETICAL LISTING L

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

SINGLE LIMITS None

–LINEAR MAG– None

UPPER LIMIT ON (OFF) Turns the Upper Limit line on or off for the active channel. UPL0; UPL1;
XXX.XXX pU For your convenience, the arbitrarily set limit lines allow UPLX?
you to delineate a go/no go line on your Linear Mag display
beyond which the measured values are unacceptable.

LOWER LIMIT ON(OFF) Turns the Lower Limit line on or off for the active channel LOL0; LOL1;
XXX.XXX pU on your Linear Mag display. LOLX?

READOUT LIMIT Calls menu LF4, which shows points where the current None
S-parameter intercepts the lower limit.

-PHASE- None

UPPER LIMIT ON (OFF) Turns the Upper Limit line on or off for the active channel. UPL0; UPL1;
XXX.XXX ° For your convenience, the arbitrarily set limit lines allow UPLX?
you to delineate a go/no go line on your polar display
beyond which the measured values are unacceptable.

LOWER LIMIT ON(OFF) Turns the Lower Limit line on or off for the active channel LOL0; LOL1;
XXX.XXX ° on your Phase display. LOLX?

READOUT LIMIT Calls menu LF2, which shows points where the current None
S-parameter intercepts the lower limit.

DISPLAY ON (OFF) Enables both previously set limit lines to appear for the LON; LOF; LON?
LIMITS active
channel on your Phase display.

TEST LIMITS Calls menu LTST, which provides choices for testing the None
limits.

SEGMENTED LIMITS Calls a menu in the LS series (LSX), which lets you set None
segmented limit lines.

PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection. None
TO SELECT
OR TURN ON/OFF

Menu L9, Set Limits—Linear Magnitude and Phase

37XXXD OM A-133
L ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

SINGLE LIMITS None

–REAL– None

UPPER LIMIT ON (OFF) Turns the Upper Limit line on or off for the active channel. UPL0; UPL1;
XXX.XXX pU For your convenience, the arbitrarily set limit lines allow UPLX?
you to delineate a go/no go line on your Real display
beyond which the measured values are unacceptable.

LOWER LIMIT ON(OFF) Turns the Lower Limit line on or off for the active channel LOL0; LOL1;
XXX.XXX pU on your Real display. LOLX?

READOUT LIMIT Calls menu LF6, which shows points where the current None
S-parameter intercepts the lower limit.

DISPLAY ON (OFF) Enables both previously set limit lines to appear for the LON; LOF; LON?
LIMITS active
channel on your Real values display.

TEST LIMITS Calls menu LTST, which provides choices for testing the None
limits.

SEGMENTED LIMITS Calls a menu in the LS series (LSX), which lets you set None
segmented limit lines.

PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection. None
TO SELECT
OR TURN ON/OFF

Menu L10, Set Limits—Real Values

A-134 37XXXD OM
ALPHABETICAL LISTING L

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

SINGLE LIMITS None

–IMAGINARY– None

UPPER LIMIT ON (OFF) Turns the Upper Limit line on or off for the active channel. UPL0; UPL1;
XXX.XXX pU For your convenience, the arbitrarily set limit lines allow UPLX?
you to delineate a go/no go line on your Imaginary display
beyond which the measured values are unacceptable.

LOWER LIMIT ON(OFF) Turns the Lower Limit line on or off for the active channel LOL0; LOL1;
XXX.XXX pU on your Imaginary display. LOLX?

READOUT LIMIT Calls menu LF7, which shows points where the current None
S-parameter intercepts the lower limit.

DISPLAY ON (OFF) Enables both previously set limit lines to appear for the LON; LOF; LON?
LIMITS active
channel on your Imaginary values display.

TEST LIMITS Calls menu LTST, which provides choices for testing the None
limits.

SEGMENTED LIMITS Calls a menu in the LS series (LSX), which lets you set None
segmented limit lines.

PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection. None
TO SELECT
OR TURN ON/OFF

Menu L11, Set Limits—Imaginary Values

37XXXD OM A-135
L ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

SINGLE LIMITS None

–REAL– None

UPPER LIMIT ON (OFF) Turns the Upper Limit line on or off for the active channel. UPL0; UPL1;
XXX.XXX pU For your convenience, the arbitrarily set limit lines allow UPLX?
you to delineate a go/no go line on your Real display
beyond which the measured values are unacceptable.

LOWER LIMIT ON(OFF) Turns the Lower Limit line on or off for the active channel LOL0; LOL1;
XXX.XXX pU on your Real display. LOLX?

READOUT LIMIT Calls menu LF6, which shows points where the current None
S-parameter intercepts the lower limit.

–IMAGINARY– None

UPPER LIMIT ON (OFF) Turns the Upper Limit line on or off for the active channel. UPL0; UPL1;
XXX.XXX pU For your convenience, the arbitrarily set limit lines allow UPLX?
you to delineate a go/no go line on your Imaginary display
beyond which the measured values are unacceptable.

LOWER LIMIT ON(OFF) Turns the Lower Limit line on or off for the active channel LOL0; LOL1;
XXX.XXX pU on your Imaginary display. LOLX?

READOUT LIMIT Displays menu LF7, which shows points where the current None
S-parameter intercepts the lower limit.

DISPLAY ON (OFF) Enables both previously set limit lines to appear for the LON; LOF; LON?
LIMITS active
channel on your Imaginary values display.

TEST LIMITS Calls menu LTST, which provides choices for testing the None
limits.

SEGMENTED LIMITS Calls a menu in the LS series (LSX), which lets you set None
segmented limit lines.

PRESS Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection. None
TO SELECT
OR TURN ON/OFF

Menu L12, Set Limits—Real and Imaginary Values

A-136 37XXXD OM
ALPHABETICAL LISTING L

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

SINGLE LIMITS None

–SWR— None

UPPER LIMIT ON (OFF) Turns the Upper Limit line on or off for the active channel. UPL0; UPL1;
XXX.XXX pU For your convenience, the arbitrarily set limit lines allow UPLX?
you to delineate a go/no go line on your SWR display
beyond which the measured values are unacceptable.

LOWER LIMIT ON(OFF) Turns the Lower Limit line on or off for the active channel LOL0; LOL1;
XXX.XXX pU on your SWR display. LOLX?

READOUT LIMIT Calls menu LF5, which shows points where the current None
S-parameter intercepts the lower limit.

DISPLAY ON (OFF) Enables both previously set limit lines to appear for the LON; LOF; LON?
LIMITS active
channel.

TEST LIMITS Calls menu LTST, which provides choices for testing the None
limits.

SEGMENTED LIMITS Calls a menu in the LS series (LSX), which lets you set None
segmented limit lines.

PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection. None
TO SELECT
OR TURN ON/OFF

Menu L13, Set Limits—SWR

37XXXD OM A-137
L ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

SINGLE LIMITS None

–POWER OUT— None

UPPER LIMIT ON (OFF) Turns the Upper Limit line on or off for the active channel. UPL0; UPL1;
XXX.XXX dBm For your convenience, the arbitrarily set limit lines allow UPLX?
you to delineate a go/no go line on your power display
beyond which the measured values are unacceptable.

LOWER LIMIT ON(OFF) Turns the Lower Limit line on or off for the active channel LOL0; LOL1;
XXX.XXX dBm on your power display. LOLX?

READOUT LIMIT Calls menu LF5, which shows points where the current None
S-parameter intercepts the lower limit.

DISPLAY ON (OFF) Enables both previously set limit lines to appear for the LON; LOF; LON?
LIMITS active
channel.

TEST LIMITS Calls menu LTST, which provides choices for testing the None
limits.

SEGMENTED LIMITS Calls a menu in the LS series (LSX), which lets you set None
segmented limit lines.

PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection. None
TO SELECT
OR TURN ON/OFF

Menu L14, Set Limits—Power Out

A-138 37XXXD OM
ALPHABETICAL LISTING L

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

DEFINE UPPER SEGS Define the upper limit segment. None

SEGMENT ON (OFF) Enter the segment number that you want to define, and turn US1 - US10;
X it on or off. USX?

START POSITION None

HORIZONTAL Enter the start horizontal value in GHz, seconds, meter, or STH; STH?
XXX.XXXXXXXXX points (domain dependent).
GHz

VERTICAL Enter the start vertical value in dB, degrees, units, or STV; STV?
XX.XXXXX dB seconds (graph-type dependent).

STOP POSITION None

HORIZONTAL Enter the stop horizontal value in GHz, seconds, meter, or STH; STH?
XXX.XXXXXXXXX points (domain dependent).
GHz

VERTICAL Enter the stop vertical value in dB, degrees, units, or STV; STV?
XX.XXXXX dB seconds (graph-type dependent).

BEGIN NEXT Turns the next segment on and sets its start and stop BEGN
postions to the previous segment’s stop position.

ATTACH NEXT Turns the next segment on and sets its start postions to the ATTN
previous segment’s stop position.

CLEAR SEGMENT Turns the current segment-to-define off and sets its start CAS
equal to its stop.

PREVIOUS MENU Returns to the previous menu. None

PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection. None
TO SELECT
OR TURN ON/OFF

Menu LD1, Define Upper Limit Segment

37XXXD OM A-139
L ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

DEFINE LOWER SEGS Define the upper limit segment. None

SEGMENT ON (OFF) Enter the segment number that you want to define, and LS1 - LS10; LSX?
X turn it on or off.

START POSITION None

HORIZONTAL Enter the start horizontal value in GHz, seconds, meter, or STH; STH?
XXX.XXXXXXXXX GHz points (domain dependent).

VERTICAL Enter the start vertical value in dB, degrees, units, or STV; STV?
XX.XXXXX dB seconds (graph-type dependent).

STOP POSITION None

HORIZONTAL Enter the stop horizontal value in GHz, seconds, meter, or STH; STH?
XXX.XXXXXXXXX points (domain dependent).
GHz

VERTICAL Enter the stop vertical value in dB, degrees, units, or STV; STV?
XX.XXXXX dB seconds (graph-type dependent).

BEGIN NEXT Turns the next segment on and sets its start and stop
postions to the previous segment’s stop position.

ATTACH NEXT Turns the next segment on and sets its start postions to the
previous segment’s stop position.

CLEAR SEGMENT Turns the current segment-to-define off and sets its start CAS
equal to its stop.

PREVIOUS MENU Returns to the previous menu. None

PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection. None
TO SELECT
OR TURN ON/OFF

Menu LD2, Define Lower Limit Segmen

A-140 37XXXD OM
ALPHABETICAL LISTING L

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

READOUT LIMIT None

INTERCEPTS

–LOG MAG— None

UPPER LIMIT (REF) Lets you set the UPPER LIMIT (REF) limit line. Changing LUP; LUP?; LUP2;
XXX.XXX dB this value also moves the lower limit line by the LIMIT LUP2?
DIFFERENCE amount.

LOWER LIMITdB Lets you set the LOWER LIMIT dB limit line. Changing this LLO; LLO?; LLO2;
XXX.XXX dB value also changes the LIMIT DIFFERENCE amount LLO2?
relative to the UPPER LIMIT (REF) value.

LIMIT DIFFERENCE Lets you set the LIMIT DIFFERENCE amount. Changing LFD; LFD?; LFD2;
(UPPER-LOWER) this value also changes the lower limit value relative to the LFD2?
XXX.XXX dB UPPER LIMIT (REF) value.

INTERCEPTS AT Displays at which frequencies the data intercepts the lower None
LOWER LIMIT limit. May be interpolated.

XXX.XXXXXXXXX GHz
XXX.XXXXXXXXX GHz
XXX.XXXXXXXXX GHz
XXX.XXXXXXXXX GHz
XXX.XXXXXXXXX GHz

Menu LF1, Set Limit Frequencies—Log Mag

37XXXD OM A-141
L ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

READOUT LIMIT None

INTERCEPTS

–PHASE— None

UPPER LIMIT (REF) Lets you set the UPPER LIMIT (REF) limit line. Changing LUP; LUP?; LUP2;
XXX.XXX ° this value also moves the lower limit line by the LIMIT LUP2?
DIFFERENCE amount.

LOWER LIMITdB Lets you set the LOWER LIMIT dB limit line. Changing this LLO; LLO?; LLO2;
XXX.XXX ° value also changes the LIMIT DIFFERENCE amount LLO2?
relative to the UPPER LIMIT (REF) value.

LIMIT DIFFERENCE Lets you set the LIMIT DIFFERENCE amount. Changing LFD; LFD?; LFD2;
(UPPER-LOWER) this value also changes the lower limit value relative to the LFD2?
UPPER LIMIT (REF) value.

INTERCEPTS AT Displays at which frequencies the data intercepts the lower None
LOWER LIMIT limit. May be interpolated.

XXX.XXXXXXXXX GHz
XXX.XXXXXXXXX GHz
XXX.XXXXXXXXX GHz
XXX.XXXXXXXXX GHz
XXX.XXXXXXXXX GHz

Menu LF2, Set Limit Frequencies—Phase

A-142 37XXXD OM
ALPHABETICAL LISTING L

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

READOUT LIMIT None

INTERCEPTS

–GROUP DELAY— None

UPPER LIMIT (REF) Lets you set the UPPER LIMIT (REF) limit line. Changing LUP; LUP?; LUP2;
XXX.XXX fs this value also moves the lower limit line by the LIMIT LUP2?
DIFFERENCE amount.

LOWER LIMIT Lets you set the LOWER LIMIT dB limit line. Changing this LLO; LLO?; LLO2;
XXX.XXX fs value also changes the LIMIT DIFFERENCE amount LLO2?
relative to the UPPER LIMIT (REF) value.

LIMIT DIFFERENCE Lets you set the LIMIT DIFFERENCE amount. Changing LFD; LFD?; LFD2;
(UPPER-LOWER) this value also changes the lower limit value relative to the LFD2?
UPPER LIMIT (REF) value.

INTERCEPTS AT Displays at which frequencies the data intercepts the lower None
LOWER LIMIT limit. May be interpolated.

XXX.XXXXXXXXX GHz
XXX.XXXXXXXXX GHz
XXX.XXXXXXXXX GHz
XXX.XXXXXXXXX GHz
XXX.XXXXXXXXX GHz

Menu LF3, Set Limit Frequencies—Group Delay

37XXXD OM A-143
L ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

READOUT LIMIT None

INTERCEPTS

–LINEAR MAG— None

UPPER LIMIT (REF) Lets you set the UPPER LIMIT (REF) limit line. Changing LUP; LUP?; LUP2;
XXX.XXX pU this value also moves the lower limit line by the LIMIT LUP2?
DIFFERENCE amount.

LOWER LIMIT Lets you set the LOWER LIMIT dB limit line. Changing this LLO; LLO?; LLO2;
XXX.XXX pU value also changes the LIMIT DIFFERENCE amount LLO2?
relative to the UPPER LIMIT (REF) value.

LIMIT DIFFERENCE Lets you set the LIMIT DIFFERENCE amount. Changing LFD; LFD?; LFD2;
(UPPER-LOWER) this value also changes the lower limit value relative to the LFD2?
XXX.XXX pU UPPER LIMIT (REF) value.

INTERCEPTS AT Displays at which frequencies the data intercepts the lower None
LOWER LIMIT limit. May be interpolated.

XXX.XXXXXXXXX GHz
XXX.XXXXXXXXX GHz
XXX.XXXXXXXXX GHz
XXX.XXXXXXXXX GHz
XXX.XXXXXXXXX GHz

Menu LF4, Set Limit Frequencies—Linear Mag

A-144 37XXXD OM
ALPHABETICAL LISTING L

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

SET LIMIT None

FREQUENCIES

–SWR— None

UPPER LIMIT (REF) Lets you set the UPPER LIMIT (REF) limit line. Changing LUP; LUP?; LUP2;
XXX.XXX pU this value also moves the lower limit line by the LIMIT LUP2?
DIFFERENCE amount.

LOWER LIMIT Lets you set the LOWER LIMIT dB limit line. Changing this LLO; LLO?; LLO2;
XXX.XXX pU value also changes the LIMIT DIFFERENCE amount LLO2?
relative to the UPPER LIMIT (REF) value.

LIMIT DIFFERENCE Lets you set the LIMIT DIFFERENCE amount. Changing LFD; LFD?; LFD2;
(UPPER-LOWER) this value also changes the lower limit value relative to the LFD2?
XXX.XXX pU UPPER LIMIT (REF) value.

INTERCEPTS AT Displays at which frequencies the data intercepts the lower None
LOWER LIMIT limit. May be interpolated.

XXX.XXXXXXXXX GHz
XXX.XXXXXXXXX GHz
XXX.XXXXXXXXX GHz
XXX.XXXXXXXXX GHz
XXX.XXXXXXXXX GHz

Menu LF5, Set Limit Frequencies—SWR

37XXXD OM A-145
L ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

SET LIMIT None

FREQUENCIES

–REAL— None

UPPER LIMIT (REF) Lets you set the UPPER LIMIT (REF) limit line. Changing LUP; LUP?; LUP2;
XXX.XXX pU this value also moves the lower limit line by the LIMIT LUP2?
DIFFERENCE amount.

LOWER LIMIT Lets you set the LOWER LIMIT dB limit line. Changing this LLO; LLO?; LLO2;
XXX.XXX pU value also changes the LIMIT DIFFERENCE amount LLO2?
relative to the UPPER LIMIT (REF) value.

LIMIT DIFFERENCE Lets you set the LIMIT DIFFERENCE amount. Changing LFD; LFD?; LFD2;
(UPPER-LOWER) this value also changes the lower limit value relative to the LFD2?
UPPER LIMIT (REF) value.

INTERCEPTS AT Displays at which frequencies the data intercepts the lower None
LOWER LIMIT limit. May be interpolated.

XXX.XXXXXXXXX GHz
XXX.XXXXXXXXX GHz
XXX.XXXXXXXXX GHz
XXX.XXXXXXXXX GHz
XXX.XXXXXXXXX GHz

Menu LF6, Set Limit Frequencies—Real

A-146 37XXXD OM
ALPHABETICAL LISTING L

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

SET LIMIT None

FREQUENCIES

–IMAGINARY— None

UPPER LIMIT (REF) Lets you set the UPPER LIMIT (REF) limit line. Changing LUP; LUP?; LUP2;
XXX.XXX pU this value also moves the lower limit line by the LIMIT LUP2?
DIFFERENCE amount.

LOWER LIMIT Lets you set the LOWER LIMIT dB limit line. Changing this LLO; LLO?; LLO2;
XXX.XXX pU value also changes the LIMIT DIFFERENCE amount LLO2?
relative to the UPPER LIMIT (REF) value.

LIMIT DIFFERENCE Lets you set the LIMIT DIFFERENCE amount. Changing LFD; LFD?; LFD2;
(UPPER-LOWER) this value also changes the lower limit value relative to the LFD2?
UPPER LIMIT (REF) value.

INTERCEPTS AT Displays at which frequencies the data intercepts the lower None
LOWER LIMIT limit. May be interpolated.

XXX.XXXXXXXXX GHz
XXX.XXXXXXXXX GHz
XXX.XXXXXXXXX GHz
XXX.XXXXXXXXX GHz
XXX.XXXXXXXXX GHz

Menu LF7, Set Limit Frequencies—Imaginary

37XXXD OM A-147
L ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

READOUT LIMIT None

INTERCEPTS

–POWER OUT— None

UPPER LIMIT (REF) Lets you set the UPPER LIMIT (REF) limit line. Changing LUP; LUP?; LUP2;
XXX.XXX dBm this value also moves the lower limit line by the LIMIT LUP2?
DIFFERENCE amount.

LOWER LIMIT Lets you set the LOWER LIMIT dB limit line. Changing this LLO; LLO?; LLO2;
XXX.XXX dBm value also changes the LIMIT DIFFERENCE amount LLO2?
relative to the UPPER LIMIT (REF) value.

LIMIT DIFFERENCE Lets you set the LIMIT DIFFERENCE amount. Changing LFD; LFD?; LFD2;
(UPPER-LOWER) this value also changes the lower limit value relative to the LFD2?
XXX.XXX dBm UPPER LIMIT (REF) value.

INTERCEPTS AT Displays at which frequencies the data intercepts the lower None
LOWER LIMIT limit. May be interpolated.

XXX.XXXXXXXXX GHz
XXX.XXXXXXXXX GHz
XXX.XXXXXXXXX GHz
XXX.XXXXXXXXX GHz
XXX.XXXXXXXXX GHz

Menu LF8, Set Limit Frequencies—Power Out

A-148 37XXXD OM
ALPHABETICAL LISTING L

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

SEGMENTED LIMITS None

–XXXXXXX— Displays the currently active channel’s graph type. None

UPPER LIMIT ON(OFF) Turns the Upper Limit line on or off for the active channel. SLU1; SLU0;
SLUX?

DEFINE UPPER Calls menu LD1, which lets you define an upper segment None
value.

LOWER LIMIT ON(OFF) Turns the Lower Limit line on or off for the active channel. SLL1; SLL0;
SLLX?

DEFINE LOWER Calls menu LD2, which lets you define a lower segment None
value.

SEGMENTED OFFSETS None

HORIZONTAL Enter the horizontal offset to be applied to all of the SLH; SLH?
XXXX GHz channel’s segmented limits, in GHz, seconds, meters, or
points (domain dependent).

VERTICAL Enter the vertical offset to be applied to all of the channel’s SLV; SLV?
XXXX dB segmented limits, in dB, degrees, units, or seconds
(graph-type dependent).

CLEAR ALL Clears all segments. SLC

DISPLAY ON (OFF) Toggle between on and off to display the active channel’s LON; LOF; LON?
LIMITS limits.

TEST LIMITS Calls menu LTST, which lets test for limits. None

SINGLE LIMITS Returns to the appropriate single limits menu. None

PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection. None
TO SELECT
OR TURN ON/OFF

Menu LSX, Segmented Limits

37XXXD OM A-149
L ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

TEST LIMITS None

LIMIT ON (OFF) Turns limit testing for all displayed channels on or off. LON; LOF; LON?
TESTING

BEEP FOR ON (OFF) Turns beeper on or off when limit test fails. LB0; LB1; LBX?
TEST FAILURE

LIMIT TEST TTL Selects between a TTL high or TTL low to indicate that the LVH; LVL; LVX?
FAIL CONDITION limit test has failed.
TTL LOW/TTL HIGH

CHANNEL 1 TEST Displays result of Channel 1 limit test.

PASS (FAIL)

CHANNEL 2 TEST Displays result of Channel 2 limit test.

PASS (FAIL)

CHANNEL 3 TEST Displays result of Channel 3 limit test.

PASS (FAIL)

CHANNEL 4 TEST Displays result of Channel 4 limit test.

PASS (FAIL)

PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection. None
TO SELECT
OR TURN ON/OFF

Menu LTST, Test Limits

A-150 37XXXD OM
ALPHABETICAL LISTING M

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

SET MARKERS None

MARKER 1 ON (OFF) Turns Marker 1 on or off (activates or deactivates). When MR1; MR1?; MK1
XXX.XXXXXXXXX GHz on (active), the frequency, time, or distance may be set MK1?; OM1; MO1
using the keypad or
rotary knob.
NOTE: In this text, markers are referred to as being active
and as being selected. Any marker that has been turned on
and assigned a frequency is considered to be selected. The
marker to which the cursor presently points is considered to
be active. The active marker is the only one for which you
can change the frequency.

MARKER 2 DREF ON (OFF) Turns Marker 2 on or off (activates or deactivates). When MR2; MR2?; MK2
XXX.XXXXXXXXX GHz on (active), the frequency, time, or distance may be set MK2?; OM2; MO2
using the keypad or rotary knob.

MARKER 3 ON (OFF) Turns Marker 3 on or off (activates or deactivates). When MR31; MR3?;
XXX.XXXXXXXXX GHz on (active), the frequency, time, or distance may be set MK3 MK3?; OM3;
using the keypad or rotary knob. MO3

MARKER 4 ON (OFF) Turns Marker 4 on or off (activates or deactivates). When MR4; MR4?; MK4
XXX.XXXXXXXXX GHz on (active), the frequency, time, or distance may be set MK4?; OM4; MO4
using the keypad or rotary knob.

MARKER 5 ON (OFF) Turns Marker 5 on or off (activates or deactivates). When MR5; MR5?; MK5
XXX.XXXXXXXXX GHz on (active), the frequency, time, or distance may be set MK5?; OM5; MO5
using the keypad or rotary knob.

MARKER 6 ON (OFF) Turns Marker 6 on or off (activates or deactivates). When MR6; MR6?; MK6
XXX.XXXXXXX GHz on (active), the frequency, time, or distance may be set MK6?; OM6; MO6
using the keypad or
rotary knob.

DISPLAY ON (OFF) Displays selected markers. MON; MON?;

MARKERS MOF

DREF MODE ON (OFF) Selects the DREF Mode to be on or off. DRF; DRO; DRO?

SELECT Calls menu M2, which lets you select the DREF Marker. None
DREF MARKER

READOUT MARKER Calls menu M9, which lets you select readout marker None
FUNCTIONS parameters.

Menu M1, Set Markers

37XXXD OM A-151
M ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

SELECT None
DREF MARKER

MARKER 1 Marker 1 only appears if it has been activated in menu M1. DR1; DRX?
XXX.XXXXXXXXX GHz Placing the cursor on Marker 1 and pressing the Enter key
here selects it as the DREF marker. The DREF marker is
the one from which the other active markers are compared
and their difference frequency measured and displayed in
menu M3. The marker frequency may be set using the
keypad or rotary knob.

MARKER 3 Same as above, but for Marker 3. This display is DR3; DRX?
XXX.XXXXXXXXX GHz representative if Markers 1, 3, and 4 are selected. Markers
2, 5, and 6 would also show, if they had been selected.

MARKER 4 Same as above, but for Marker 4 DR4; DRX?

XXX.XXXXXXXXXGHz

PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection. None
TO SELECT

Menu M2, Select DREF Marker

A-152 37XXXD OM
ALPHABETICAL LISTING M

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

SELECT None
READOUT MARKER

MARKER 1 Displays the frequency and S-Parameter value(s) of DR1; DRX?

XXX.XXXXXXXXX GHz Marker 1 on all displayed graphs and Smith Charts. The
frequency of Marker 1 also displays here. If Marker 1
was activated in menu M2 as the REF marker, REF
appears as shown for Marker M5 below.

MARKER 2 Same as above, but for Marker 2. DR2; DRX?

XXX.XXXXXXXXX GHz

MARKER 5 Same as above, but for Marker 5 This display is DR5; DRX?
XXX.XXXXXXXXX GHz representative if Markers 1, 2, and 5 are selected.
Markers 3, 4, and 6 would also show, if they had been
selected.

DREF MODE IS ON (OFF) Indicates the status of the DREF mode. DRO; DRO?

PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection. None
TO SELECT

Menu M3, Select Readout Marker

37XXXD OM A-153
M ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

C H 1 — S 1 1, USER Selects channel for readout None

+XXX.XXXX mm REF The constant offset for the channel is displayed. None
+XXX.XXX dB OFFSET
+XXX.XX ° OFFSET

MARKER X The selected marker—that is, the one to which the MR1; MR1? MK1;
XXX.XXXXXXXXX GHz cursor points in menu M1—and its frequency, time, or MK1? OM1
XX.XXX dB distance display here. This could be any one of the six
XXX.XXX ° available markers: Marker 1 through Marker 6.

MARKER TO MAX Causes the active marker to go to the frequency with MMX
the greatest
S-Parameter value on the active channel.

MARKER TO MIN Causes the selected marker to go to the frequency MMN

with the smallest
S-Parameter value on the active channel.

2 XXX.XXXXXXXXX GHz Displays the frequency, magnitude, and phase of the MR2; MR2? MK2;
XX.XXX dB active MK2? OM2
XXX.XXX ° S-Parameter at marker 2, if the marker is enabled.

3 XXX.XXXXXXXXX GHz Displays the frequency, magnitude, and phase of the MR3; MR3? MK3;
XX.XXX dB active MK3? OM3
XXX.XXX ° S-Parameter at marker 3, if the marker is enabled.

4 XXX.XXXXXXXXX GHz Displays the frequency, magnitude, and phase of the MR4; MR4? MK4;
XX.XXX dB active MK4? OM4
XXX.XXX ° S-Parameter at marker 4, if the marker is enabled.

5 XXX.XXXXXXXXX GHz Displays the frequency, magnitude, and phase of the MR5; MR5? MK5;
XX.XXX dB active MK5? OM5
XXX.XXX ° S-Parameter at marker 5, if the marker is enabled.

6 XXX.XXXXXXXXX GHz Displays the frequency, magnitude, and phase of the MR6; MR6? MK6;
XX.XXX dB active MK6? OM6
XXX.XXX ° S-Parameter at marker 6, if the marker is enabled.

MARKER READOUT Calls menu M9, which lets you select readout marker None
FUNCTIONS parameters.

Menu M4, Readout Marker

A-154 37XXXD OM
ALPHABETICAL LISTING M

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

C H 1 — S 1 1, USER None

+XXX.XXXX mm REF The constant offset for the channel is displayed. MK1? - MK6?
+XXX.XXX dB OFFSET
+XXX.XX ° OFFSET

MARKER X The selected marker—that is, the one to which the cursor
XXX.XXXXXXXXX GHz points in menu M1—and its frequency, time, or distance
MARKER TO MAX display here. This could be any one of the six available
MARKER TO MIN markers: Marker 1 through Marker 6.

D(1 - 2) The marker numbers of the REF marker and the next
XXX.XXXXXXXXX GHz lowest-numbered selected marker appear between the
XX.XXX dB parentheses. This example assumes Marker 1 as the Ref
XXX.XXX° marker and Marker 2 as the next lowest-numbered selected
marker. The lines below display the difference frequency,
(or time/distance ) and trace value(s) between these two
markers on the active channel.

D(1 - 3) Same as above, except Marker 3 is the next

XXX.XXXXXXXXX GHz lowest-numbered selected marker.
XX.XXX dB
XXX.XXX°

D(1 - 4) Same as above, except Marker 4 is the next

XXX.XXXXXXXXX GHz lowest-numbered selected marker.
XX.XXX dB
XXX.XXX°

D(1 - 5) Same as above, except Marker 5 is the next

XXX.XXXXXXXXX GHz lowest-numbered selected marker.
XX.XXX dB
XXX.XXX°

D(1 - 6) Same as above, except Marker 6 is the next

XXX.XXXXXXXXX GHz lowest-numbered selected marker.
XX.XXX dB
XXX.XXX°

MARKER READOUT Calls menu M9, which lets you select readout marker None
FUNCTIONS parameters.

Menu M5, Set DREF Marker Readout

37XXXD OM A-155
M ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

MARKER X Displays the active marker number. For each channel None
ALL DISPLAYED being displayed, the channel, S-Parameter, frequency,
CHANNELS time, distance or point number, and the current
readout value for the marker is shown (below). No
marker information is provided for channels that arer
not displayed .

CH 1 — S11 Displays the measured value for the active marker on OAM1
XX.XXXXXXXXX GHz all channels currently being displayed. You can set the
–XXX.XXX dB marker on the active channel in this menu. The active
–XXX.XX ° channel is displayed in GREEN; when not active it is
displayed in BLUE.

CH 2 — S21 See above. OAM2

CH 3 — S12 See above. OAM3

XX.XXXXXXXXX GHz
–XXX.XXX dB
–XXX.XX °

CH 4 — S22 See above. OAM4

MARKER TO MAX Causes the active marker to go to the frequency with MMX
the greatest
S-Parameter value on the active channel.

MARKER TO MIN Causes the selected marker to go to the frequency MMN

with the smallest
S-Parameter value on the active channel.

MARKER READOUT Calls menu M9, which lets you select readout marker None
FUNCTIONS parameters.

PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the Enter key implements menu selection. None
TO SELECT

Menu M6, Marker X All Displayed Channels

A-156 37XXXD OM
ALPHABETICAL LISTING M

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

SEARCH This menu provides control and readout for the marker SRCH
search function. When this function is selected, the
graph type for the active channel is automatically set to
LOG MAGNITUDE (other graph types are not allowed),
and taken out of time domain low pass or band pass
display. Frequency with time gate display is allowed.
VALUE Target search value. A value from -999.999 to 999.999 SRCH
–XXX.XXX dB dB may be entered.
REFERENCE These menu choices let you enter the reference value None
for the search. The reference may be:
-Graticule “0 dB”
-Position of Delta Ref. Marker (Marker 1 is used as the
D Ref Marker)
-Maximum value in Passband (default selection). Marker
1 is used to
indicate maximum.
MAXIMUM VALUE Selects maximum value as the reference. MMX
D REF MARKER Selects D Ref Marker (Marker 1) as the reference. DR1-DR6; DRX?
0 dB Selects 0 dB as the reference. MSR0; MSRX?
VALUE AT REFERENCE Displays the difference between the reference value and OM1
–XXX.XXX dB 0 dB.
SEARCH LEFT Goes to the next data point that is left (or right) of the MKSL
search marker (Marker 2) and whose value is equal to
SEARCH RIGHT MKSR
VALUE plus the reference. If “TRACKING” is ON,
XX.XXXXXXXXX GHz Marker 2 will search both left and right, and go to the
closest point whose value is equal to VALUE plus
reference. If there is no such point, the message
“VALUE NOT FOUND” is displayed in the data area.
Otherwise the marker goes to that coordinate and the
readout (under the search direction) is updated to reflect
that frequency.
SEARCH MRKR VALUES CH1: None
XX.XXX dB
CH2: XX.XXX dB
CH3: XX.XXX dB
CH4: XX.XXX dB
TRACKING ON (OFF) When ON the active marker will change its frequency
value after every sweep to maintain the user entered
loss value. When OFF the marker stays at the same
frequency and reads out the magnitude value at that
frequency, except when a search is triggered.
MARKER READOUT Calls Menu M9, which lets you select readout marker
FUNCTIONS parameters.
Menu M7, Search

37XXXD OM A-157
M ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

FILTER Provides the readouts for the filter measurement functions, as None
PARAMETERS well as some selections. When this function is selected, the
graph type for the active channel is automatically set to LOG
MAGNITUDE, and taken out of time domain low pass or band
pass display. Frequency with time gate display is allowed.

CENTER FREQ Displays the value of Marker 2. Marker 1 displays the FLTC
XX.XXXXXXXXX GHz reference value (maximum filter response, or its set value if
delta ref).

BANDWIDTH Displays the difference between Markers 3 and 4. FLTBW?

XXX.XXX dB
D REF MARKER
XX.XXXXXXXXX GHz

LOSS AT REF Displays the difference between the reference value and 0 FLTL?
–XXX.XXX dB dB.

Q Displays the Q value. FLTQ?

XX.XXX
NOTE: “Q” and “SHAPE FACTOR” are not displayed if they
are toggled OFF in menu M8A.

SHAPE FACTOR Displays the Shape Factor value. FLTS?

X.XXX

TRACKING ON (OFF) When ON the active marker will change its frequency value MKT1; MKT0;
after every sweep to maintain the user entered loss value. MKTX?
When OFF the marker stays at the same frequency and reads
out the magnitude value at that frequency, except when a
search is triggered.

FILTER SETUP Calls menu M8A, which lets you set filter parameters. None

MARKER READOUT Calls menu M9, which lets you select readout marker None
FUNCTIONS parameters.

PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the Enter key implements menu selection, or toggles None
TO SELECT selected option on or off.
OR TURN ON/OFF

Menu M8, Filter Parameters

A-158 37XXXD OM
ALPHABETICAL LISTING M

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

FILTER SETUP None

BANDWIDTH A “loss” is a positive number. A value of 0 to 999.999 dB BWLS; BWL3;

LOSS VALUE may be entered. The search value for bandwidth will be BWLS?
XXX.XXX dB REF minus (-) LOSS. By default, the loss value is set to 3
dB.

REFERENCE These menu choices let you enter the reference value for None
the search. The reference may be:
-Graticule “0 dB”.
-Position of Delta Ref. Marker. (Marker 1 is used as the D
Ref Marker).
-Maximum value in Passband (default selection). Marker 1 is
used to
indicate maximum.

MAXIMUM VALUE Selects maximum value as the reference. MMX

D REF MARKER Selects D Ref Marker (Marker 1) as the reference. MMN

0 dB Selects 0 dB as the reference. MSR0; MSRX?

SHAPE FACTOR

HIGH Enter high and low values for the Shape Factor. The LOW MSFH; MSFH?
XXX.XXX dB entry must be less than the HIGH entry. A value of 0 to
999.999 dB may be entered. The defaults are +6 dB for the
LOW HIGH, and +60 dB for the LOW value. MSFL; MSFL?
XXX.XXX dB

READOUTS None

Q ON (OFF) Toggles Q on or off. DSQ1; DSQ0;

DSQX?
NOTE: “Q” is not displayed in menu M8, if it is toggled OFF.

SHAPE ON (OFF) Toggles the Shape Factor on or off. DSF1; DSF0;

FACTOR DSFX?
NOTE: “SHAPE FACTOR” is not displayed in menu M8, if it
is toggled OFF.

PREVIOUS MENU Returns to the M8 menu.

Menu M8A, Filter Setup

37XXXD OM A-159
M ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

MARKER READOUT None

FUNCTIONS

MARKERS ON Calls menu M3 directly — or causes it to be displayed when None

ACTIVE CHANNEL the Readout Marker key is pressed — if there is no active
marker. Or to it calls or causes menu M4 to be displayed if
there is an active marker. If in delta reference mod, menu M5
is displayed.

ACTIVE MARKERS Calls menu M6 directly —or causes it to be displayed when None
ON ALL CHANNELS the Readout Marker key is pressed.

SEARCH Calls menu M7 directly —or causes it to be displayed when None

the Readout Marker key is pressed.

FILTER Calls menu M8 directly —or causes it to be displayed when None

PARAMETERS the Readout Marker key is pressed.

MARKER MODE None

CONTINUOUS Marker values are interpolated between data points, MKRC; MKRX?
Interpolated markers are allowed only when the horizontal
axis of the display is FREQUENCY. Interpolated markers are
not allowed in CW, Time Domain, or Power Sweep. If a
channel has been set to interpolated markers and the sweep
is changed to CW or Power Sweep, the markers will
automatically revert to normal mode (DISCRETE). Time
Domain will ignore CONTINUOUS mode. Interpolated markers
are allowed in any graph type, as long as the sweep is by
frequency.

DISCRETE Markers are displayed only at actual measured data point MKRD; MKRX?
values.

SET MARKERS Calls menu M1, which lets you set marker parameters. None

PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the Enter key implements menu selection. None
TO SELECT

Menu M9, Marker Readout Functions

A-160 37XXXD OM
ALPHABETICAL LISTING M

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

MILLIMETER WAVE None

TEST SET BAND

WR-22 Selects WR-22 (33 - 50 GHz) waveguide for use with Q22
(33 - 50 GHz) millimeter wave system.

WR-15 Selects WR-15 (50 - 75 GHz) waveguide for use with V15
(50 - 75 GHz) millimeter wave system.

WR-12 Selects WR-12 (60 - 90 GHz) waveguide for use with E12
(60 - 90 GHz) millimeter wave system.

WR-12 EXTENDED Selects WR-12 Extended band (56 - 94 GHz) waveguide E12E
(56 - 94 GHz) for use with millimeter wave system.

WR-10 Selects WR-10 (75 - 110 GHz) waveguide for use with W10
(75 - 110 GHz) millimeter wave system.

WR-10 EXTENDED Selects WR-10 Extended band (65 - 110 GHz) waveguide W10E
(65 - 110 GHz) for use with millimeter wave system.

PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection None
TO SELECT and takes you to menu MMW2.

PRESS <CLEAR> Pressing the Clear key aborts your millimeter wave system None
TO ABORT selection and calls menu OST1.

Menu MMW1, Millimeter Wave Test Set Band

37XXXD OM A-161
M ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

MILLIMETER WAVE None

TEST SET MODULES

PORT 1 MODULE Switch selection for Port 1 Module. P1MMN; P1MMR;

3740/3741/None P1MMNT;
P1MMX?

PORT 2 MODULE Switch selection for Port 2 Module. P2MMN; P2MMR;

3740/3741/None P2MMNT;
P2MMX?

ACCEPT CONFIG Accepts the selected configuration and calls menu MMW3. None

PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection, None
TO SELECT
OR SWITCH

PRESS <CLEAR> Pressing the Clear key aborts your millimeter wave system None
TO ABORT selection and calls menu OST1.

Menu MMW2, Millimeter Wave Test Set Modules

A-162 37XXXD OM
ALPHABETICAL LISTING M

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

MILLIMETER WAVE None

TEST SET

mm WAVE BAND: Provides information for selections made in menu MMW2 None
XXXXXXXXXXX (previous menu).

PORT 1 MODULE P1MMX?

XXXXXXXXXXX

PORT 2 MODULE P2MMX?

XXXXXXXXXXX

WARNING:

CONTINUING
MAY INVALIDATE
CURRENT
SETUP AND
CALIBRATION

PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the Enter key implements your millimeter wave None
TO SELECT selection and calls menu SU1 or SU3.

PRESS <CLEAR> Pressing the Clear key aborts your millimeter wave system None
TO ABORT selection and calls menu OST1.

Menu MMW3, Millimeter Wave Test Set

37XXXD OM A-163
M ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

mm WAVE BAND None

BAND START FREQ Displays the start frequency of the millimeter wave band.
XXXXXXXXXXX

BAND STOP FREQ Displays the stopfrequency of the millimeter wave band.
XXXXXXXXXXX

EQUATION TO EDIT

SOURCE 1 Selects source 1 frequency equation for change.

SOURCE 2 Selects source 2 frequency equation for change.

RECEIVER Selects receiver frequency equation for change.

EQUATION SUMMARY

C.W. ON/OFF Toggles frequency term (F) in equation ON or OFF.

MULTIPLIER Enables changing multiplier term of frequency equation

XXX via key pad or rotary knob.

DIVISOR Enables changing divisor term frequency equation via

XXX key pad or rotary knob.

OFFSET FREQ Enables changing offset frequency term frequency

XXXXXXXX equation via key pad or rotary knob.

DEFAULT EQUATIONS Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection. None

ACCEPT EQUATIONS Pressing the Clear key aborts your millimeter wave None
selection and calls menu SU1 or SU3.

Menu MMW4, mm Wave Band

A-164 37XXXD OM
ALPHABETICAL LISTING M

- MILLIMETER WAVE BAND DEFINITION SUMMARY -

BAND FREQUENCY RANGE
BAND START FBAND STOP F
XXX.XXXXXX XXXXXX.XXXXXX XXX

FREQUENCY = (MULTIPLIER/DIVISOR) * F + OFFSET FREQ)

SOURCE 1 = (1/ 6) * (F – 0.270000 GHz)
SOURCE 2 = (1/ 8) * (F+ 0.000000 GHz)
RECEIVER = (1/ 1) * (0.270000 GHz C.W.)
- NOTES -
1. SELECT <DEFAULT EQUATIONS> TO OVERWRITE DEFINITION
WITH VALUES SUITABLE FOR THE MILLIMETER WAVE BAND.
2. SELECT <ACCEPT EQUATIONS> TO CONFIRM ANY CHANGES.
3. PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATIONS ARE VALID ONLY WHILE
USING THE DEFAULT EQUATIONS OVER THE DEFAULT BAND
FREQUENCY RANGE.
4. DEVIATING FROM THE DEFAULT MAY CAUSE LOCK FAILURES.
PRESS <ENTER> TO SELECT, PRESS <CLEAR> TO ABORT

Menu EXT_MMW4

37XXXD OM A-165
M ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

MERGE CAL FILES None

CAL FILES MUST None

EXIST IN THE
CURRENT DIRECTORY

MERGE CAL FILES Calls menu MRG2, then menu MRG3 to select the LDMCF, IMCF
calibration files.

PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection. None
TO SELECT

Menu MRG1, Merge Calibration Menu

- MERGE CALIBRATION FILES -

RF CALIBRATIONS USING DIFFERENT METHODS AND AT
DIFFERENT FREQUENCIES CAN BE MERGED USING CAL FILES.
- REQUIREMENTS -
- PERFORM TWO RF CALIBRATIONS USING THE SAME CAL TYPE
AND STORE EACH CAL AND FRONT PANEL SETUP TO DISK
(e.g. CALFILE1.CAL AND CALFILE2.CAL).
- CAL FIES MUST BE PLACED IN THE CURRENT DIRECTOY
OF THE HARD OR FLOPPY DISK.
- THE COMBINED FREQ LIST CANNOT EXCEED 1601 POINTS.
- INSTRUCTIONS -
1. SELECT <MERGE CAL FILES> TO READ THE FIRST AND
SECOND CAL FILES FROM DISK (E.G. CALFILE1.CAL AND
CALFILE2.CAL, REPECTIVELY).
2. THE FREQUENCY LISTS AND MATCHING CORRECTIONTERMS
ARE COMBINED. FOR FREQUENCIES WHICH COINCIDE,
THE TERMS FROM THE FIRST CAL FILE ARE USED. THE
FRONT PANEL SETUP FROM THE FIRST CAL FILE IS USED,
EXCEPT THAT THE START AND STOP FREQS ARE ADJUSTED
TO INCLUDETHE ENTIRE RANGE. THE DATA POINT TYPE
IS CHANGED TO MATCH THE RESULTING FREQUENCY LIST
(I.E. NORMAL, N-DISCRETE, TIME DOMAIN HARMINIC).
IF DESIRED, SAVE RESULTS.

Menu EXT_MRG1, Merge Calibration Menu

A-166 37XXXD OM
ALPHABETICAL LISTING M

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

MERGE CAL FILES LDMCF, IMCF

READ CAL FILE 1 Calls menu DSK2 to read the CAL file 1 in the current None
FROM HARD DISK directory of the hard disk. Completion of the file read
takes the user to menu MRG3.

READ CAL FILE 1 Calls menu DSK2 to read the CAL file 1 in the current None
FROM FLOPPY DISK directory of the floppy disk. Completion of the file read
takes the user to menu MRG3.

PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection. None
TO SELECT

PRESS <CLEAR> Pressing the Clear key aborts this menu selection and None
TO ABORT returns to menu MRG1.

Menu MRG2, Merge Calibration Menu

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

MERGE CAL FILES LDMCF, IMCF

READ CAL FILE 2 Calls menu DSK2 to read the CAL file 2 in the current None
FROM HARD DISK directory of the hard disk. Completion of the file read
starts the merge of the calibration terms. Finishing the
merge recalls the front panel setup of the CAL file 1 and
displays the setup menu.

READ CAL FILE 2 Calls menu DSK2 to read the CAL file 2 in the current None
FROM FLOPPY DISK directory of the floppy disk. Completion of the file read
starts the merge of the calibration terms. Finishing the
merge recalls the front panel setup of the CAL file 1 and
displays the setup menu.

PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection. None
TO SELECT

PRESS <CLEAR> Pressing the Clear key aborts this menu selection and None
TO ABORT returns to menu MRG1.

Menu MRG3, Merge Calibration Menu

37XXXD OM A-167
N ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

TRACE MEMORY None

FUNCTIONS

VIEW DATA Displays measured data; that is, the data presently being DAT; DAT?
taken.

VIEW MEMORY Displays stored data; that is, data that was previously taken MEM
and stored in memory.

VIEW DATA Displays measured data superimposed over stored data. DTM
AND MEMORY

VIEW DATA (/) Displays measured data combined with stored data using DNM
MEMORY selected math.

SELECT Calls menu NO2 for selection of the type of math operation None
TRACE MATH to be performed.

STORE DATA Stores the measured data to internal memory. STD

TO MEMORY
(STORED)
(NOT STORED)

DISK Brings up menu NO3, which allows data to be stored to or None

OPERATIONS recalled from the disk.

PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection. None
TO SELECT

Menu NO1, Trace Memory Functions

A-168 37XXXD OM
ALPHABETICAL LISTING N

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

SELECT None
TRACE MATH

ADD (+ ) Selects DATA + MEMORY as the math function. ADD

SUBTRACT (–) Selects DATA – MEMORY as the math function. MIN

MULTIPLY (*) Selects DATA X MEMORY as the math function. MUL

DIVIDE (/) Selects DATA MEMORY as the math function. DIV

PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection. None
TO SELECT The menu returns to the NO1 menu.

Menu NO2, Select Trace Math

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

TRACE MEMORY None

DISK OPERATIONS

CHANNEL X Indicates the channel to be used (active channel). CH1-CH4; CHX?

SAVE MEMORY Calls menu DSK3, which lets you save memory to the hard None
TO HARD DISK disk.

SAVE MEMORY Calls menu DSK3, which lets you save memory to the None
TO FLOPPY DISK floppy disk.

RECALL MEMORY Calls menu DSK2, which lets you recall memory from the None
FROM HARD DISK hard disk.

RECALL MEMORY Calls menu DSK2, which lets you recall memory from the None
FROM FLOPPY DISK floppy disk.

PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection. None
TO SELECT

Menu NO3, Trace Memory Disk Functions

37XXXD OM A-169
N ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

NxN SOLUTION None

LOCATION OF Select where current S2P file is located: hard disk or floppy None
CURRENT DIRECTORY disk.
HARD DISK/FLOPPY

DEVICE PAIR (1+2) Calls menu DSK2, which lets users select the file to read None
PAIR_1_2.S2P inito memory.

DEVICE PAIR (1+3) Calls menu DSK2, which lets users select the file to read None
PAIR_1_3.S2P inito memory.

DEVICE 1 LENGTH NXNL1; NXNL1?

XXX.XXX mm
XXX.XXX ps

DEVICE 2 LENGTH NXNL2; NXNL2?

XXX.XXX mm
XXX.XXX ps

DEVICE 3 LENGTH NXNL3; NXNL3?

XXX.XXX mm
XXX.XXX ps

SOLVE DEVICE 1 Finds a solution for applicable device and calls menu INXNO1;
DSK3. DSK3 lets users overright or create S2P file. INXNSV1;
LDNXNO1;
LDNXNSV1

SOLVE DEVICE 2 INXNO2;

INXNSV2;
LDNXNO2;
LDNXNSV2

SOLVE DEVICE 3 INXNO3;

INXNSV3;
LDNXNO3;
LDNXNSV3

Menu NXN, NxN Solution

A-170 37XXXD OM
ALPHABETICAL LISTING N

- NxN SOLUTION USING S2P FILES -

MEASUREMENTS OF THREE DEVICE PAIRINGS CAN BE COMBINED

TO DEDUCE THE BEHAVIOR OF EACH INDIVIDUAL DEVICE.
PROVIDING THREE S2P FILES CONTAINING THE RESPONSE
MEASUREMENTS OF THE DEVICE PAIRS, THE USER CAN SOLVE
FOR A DEVICE’S RESPONSE CHARACTERISTICS (S2P FILE).

- REQUIREMENTS -

- THE CURRENT DIRECTORY OF THE SELECTED DISK IS USED

FOR THE INPUT AND OUTPUT S2P CHARACTERIZATION FILES.

- THE CHARACTERIZATION OF THE DEVICE PAIRS SHOULD BE

IN 3 FILES USING THE S2P FORMAT (e.g. PAIR 1 2.S2P,
PAIR 1 3.S2P, AND PAIR 2 3.S2P) . USE AS MANY POINTS
AS POSSIBLE TO IMPROVE INTERPOLATION ACCURACY. MAKE
SURE THEIR FREQ RANGES COINCIDE.

- IF THE DEVICE PAIRS TRANSLATE FREQUENCY (MIXERS),

-

DEVICE 2 MUST BE RECIPROCAL. ALSO, DE-EMBED ANY

FILTER AND I.F. INTERCONNECT NETWORK OR THRU LINES
BEFORE CAPTURING THE DEVICE PAIRS’ S2P FILES.

- -IF CONCERNED WITH PHASE WRAPPING, ESTIMATE THE LENGTH

(DELAY) FOR EACH OF THE DEVICES. IF NOT, USE ZERO.

- INSTRUCTIONS -

1. SELECT DISK WHERE THE CURRENT DIRECTORY IS LOCATED.

2. SELECT THE FILENAMES OF THE INPUT DEVICE PAIRS.

3. INPUT THE ESTIMATED LENGTH (DELAY) FOR EACH DEVICE.

4. SOLVE FOR THE DESIRED DEVICE, SAVING AS AN S2P FILE.

Menu EXT_NXN, NxN Solution

37XXXD OM A-171
O ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

MULTIPLE None
SOURCE CONTROL

DEFINE BANDS Calls menu OM1, which lets you define a frequency band. None

SOURCE CONFIG Calls menu SC, which lets you configure the frequency None
source.

MULTIPLE None
SOURCE MODE

OFF Turns multiple source operating mode off placing 37XXXD MS0
VNA in normal operating mode.

DEFINE None

ON Sets multiple source mode to ON. MS1

MORE Calls menu OM1A, which lets you select source-lock None
polarity.

PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection. None
TO SELECT

Menu OM1, Multiple Source Control Menu

A-172 37XXXD OM
ALPHABETICAL LISTING O

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

SOURCE LOCK None

POLARITY

NORMAL Calls menu OM1, which lets you define a frequency band. None
REVERSE

SELECT <REVERSE> None

SOURCE LOCK
POLARITY IF

THE DUT CONTAINS None

MULTI-CONVERSION
STAGES, AND

THE PHASE OF THE None

FINAL OUTPUT I.F.
IS OPPOSITE OF
NORMAL

NORMAL POLARITY None

IS DEFINED BY THE
SOURCE 1 AND 2
EQUATIONS

IF SOURCE 1 FREQ None

IS GREATER THAN
SOURCE 2 FREQ
THEN THE I.F.
IS ASSUMED TO BE
POSITIVE POLARITY
AND VICE VERSA

Menu OM1A, Source Lock Polarity Menu

37XXXD OM A-173
O ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

DEFINE BANDS None

BAND 1 Displays the band number being defined. BD1-BD5

DISPLAYED None
FREQ RANGE

BAND START FREQ Displays the start frequency for the band. BST; BST?
XX.XXXXXX GHz

BAND STOP FREQ Displays the stop frequency for the band. BSP; BSP?
XX.XXXXXX GHz

BAND FUNCTIONS None

EDIT SYSTEM Calls menu OM3, which lets you edit system equations. None
EQUATIONS

STORE BAND 1 Indicates the band that will be stored and, within the SVBMM
BANDS STORED: parenthesis, indicates the bands that have been stored.
(1 2 3 4 5)

CLEAR ALL Clears all the band definitions that may have been CLB; CLBMM
DEFINITIONS previously stored.

SET MULTIPLE Selects Multiple Source Control menu OM0. None

SOURCE STATE

PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection. None
TO SELECT

Menu OM2, Define Bands Menu

A-174 37XXXD OM
ALPHABETICAL LISTING O

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

EDIT SYSTEM None

EQUATIONS

EQUATION None
TO EDIT

SOURCE 1 Selects source 1 frequency equation for change. ED1

SOURCE 2 Selects source 2 frequency equation for change. ED2

RECEIVER Selects receiver frequency equation for change. EDR

EQUATION None
SUMMARY

C.W. ON (OFF) Toggles frequency term (F) in equation ON or OFF. ESW; ECW;
EXW?

MULTIPLIER Enables changing multiplier term of frequency equation via EML

XX key pad or rotary knob.

DIVISOR Enables changing divisor term frequency equation via key EDV
XX pad or rotary knob.

OFFSET FREQ Enables changing offset frequency term frequency equation EOS; EOS?
XXX.XXXXXXXXX GHz via key pad or rotary knob.

PREVIOUS MENU Recalls menu OM1. None

PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection.
TO SELECT

Menu OM3, Edit System Equations

37XXXD OM A-175
O ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

OPTIONS None

TRIGGERS Calls menu TRIG, which lets you define trigger source. None

REAR PANEL Calls menu ORP1, which lets you select an output for the None
OUTPUT rear panel AUX I/O connector.

DIAGNOSTICS Calls menu DG1, which lets you implement system None
diagonistics.

MULTIPLE SOURCE Calls menu OM1, which lets you use and define multiple None
CONTROL sources.

BROADBAND If the Broadband Test Is selected, this option appears in BDMM

DEFINITION place of Multiple Source Control. It calls menu BB4.

MILLIMETER WAVE Calls menu MMW4. None

BAND DEFINITION

RECEIVER MODE Calls menu RCV1, which gives you Receiver Mode control None
options.

SOURCE CONFIG Calls menu SC, which lets you configure the frequency None
source.

RF ON/OFF Turns RF during retrace and switch points ON or OFF. The RT0; RT1; RTX?
DURING RETRACE user must keep the sweep range small, preferably below 2
GHz. Avoid including any switch points where RF would be
blanked for delays due to hardware settling.

PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection. None
TO SELECT

Menu OPTNS, Select Options

A-176 37XXXD OM
ALPHABETICAL LISTING O

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

REAR PANEL None

OUTPUT CONTROL

OUTPUT ON (OFF) Turns the rear panel ANALOG OUT output on or off. RV1; RV0; RV1?

SELECT MODE Calls menu ORP2, which lets you select an output mode. None
XXXXXXXXXX

HORIZONTAL None
OR PHASE LOCK
SCALING

START/LOCK a1 Lets you enter a voltage for the start/lock frequency. Value VST; VST?
X.XXXX V will be a frequency start voltage if SELECT MODE choice
is HORIZONTAL. It will be a phase-lock voltage if SELECT
MODE choice is PHASELOCK.

STOP/LOCK a2 Lets you enter a voltage for the start/lock frequency. Value VSP; VSP?
X.XXXX V will be a frequency stop voltage if SELECT MODE choice
is HORIZONTAL. It will be a phase-lock voltage if SELECT
MODE choice is PHASELOCK.

VERTICAL SCALING None

RESOLUTION Shows fixed value for VERTICAL mode. SCL; SCL?; SCL2;
1.000 V/DIV SCL2?

REFERENCE VALUE Shows fixed value for VERTICAL mode. OFF; OFF?; OFF2;
0.000 V/DIV OFF2?

PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection. None
TO SELECT
OR TURN ON/OFF

Menu ORP1, Rear Panel Output Control

37XXXD OM A-177
O ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

SELECT MODE None

FOR OUTPUT

HORIZONTAL Pressing Enter key selects horizontal drive for external RVH; RVX?
chart recorder connected to ANALOG OUT connector.

VERTICAL Pressing Enter key selects vertical drive for external chart RVV; RVX?
recorder connected to ANALOG OUT connector.

PHASE LOCK Pressing Enter key selects phase-lock for external chart RVL; RVX?
recorder connected to ANALOG OUT connector.

PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection. None
TO SELECT

Menu ORP2, Select Output Mode

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

TEST SET None

CONFIGURATION

INTERNAL Calls menu OTS2. SELINT; SELXX?

S-PARAMETER Calls menu OTS3. SELSP; SELXX?

MILLIMETER WAVE Calls menu MMW1. SELMM; SELXX?

BROADBAND Calls menu BB2. SELBB; SELXX?

PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection.
TO SELECT

Menu OTS1, Test Set Configuration

A-178 37XXXD OM
ALPHABETICAL LISTING O

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

INTERNAL None
TEST SET

WARNING:

CONTINUING
WILL INVALIDATE
CURRENT
SETUP AND
CALIBRATION

PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the Enter key implements internal test set None
TO SELECT configuration.

PRESS <CLEAR> Pressing the Clear key aborts internal test set None
TO ABORT configuration.

Menu OTS2, Warning

37XXXD OM A-179
P ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

SELECT POLAR None

CHART MODE

MAGNITUDE, Selects Polar Chart Display to show magnitude and phase PCP
PHASE for the full frequency range—from start frequency to stop
frequency.

MAGNITUDE, Selects Polar Chart Display to show magnitude information PCS

SWP POSITION only for the phase data that falls between the start and stop
angles selected below.

SET SWEEP Sets the start and stop angles for the data display. AST; ASP
POSITION
BOUNDARIES

START ANGLE AST; AST?

X.XX°

STOP ANGLE ASP; ASP?

X.XX°

PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection. None
TO SELECT

Menu PC1, Select Polar Chart Mode

A-180 37XXXD OM
ALPHABETICAL LISTING P

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

PARAMETER None
DEFINITION

S21/USER 1 Lets you choose between displaying a pre-defined USR1-USR4

S-Parameter or a user-defined parameter.

RATIO Displays the parameters chosen as numerator and DA1; DA2; DB1;
b2 / a1 denominator. DB2; DR1

PHASE LOCK Displays the phase-lock parameter. NA1; NA2; NB1;

a1 NB2; NU1

USER LABEL: Displays the name of the user-defined parameter. USL; USL?
MY S11

CHANGE RATIO Calls menu PD2, which lets you change the ratio. None

CHANGE None
PHASE LOCK

CHANGE LABEL Calls menu GP5, which lets you name your newly defined None
parameter. The label appears at the top of the graph-type
display and under the word “LABEL” in the menu.

PREVIOUS MENU Returns to the previous menu, SP. None

PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the ENTER key implements your menu selection. None
TO SELECT
OR SWITCH

Menu PD1, Parameter Definition 1

37XXXD OM A-181
P ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

PARAMETER RATIO None

NUMERATOR None

a1 Selects a1 as the numerator. NA1

a2 Selects a2 as the numerator. NA2

b1 Selects b1 as the numerator. NB1

b2 Selects b2 as the numerator. NB2

1 (UNITY) Selects the numerator to be 1 (unity). NU1

DENOMINATOR None

a1 Selects a1 as the demoniator. DA1

a2 Selects a2 as the demoniator. DA2

b1 Selects b1 as the demoniator. DB1

b2 Selects b2 as the demoniator. DB2

1 (UNITY) Selects the numerator to be 1 (unity). DE1

PREVIOUS MENU Returns you to menu PD1. None

PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the ENTER key implements your menu selection. None
TO SELECT

Menu PD2, Parameter Ratio

A-182 37XXXD OM
ALPHABETICAL LISTING P

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

PARAMETER None
DEFINITION

PHASE LOCK None

a1 (Ra) Selects a1. None

a2 (Rb) Selects a2. None

PREVIOUS MENU Returns you to menu PD1. None

PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the ENTER key implements your menu selection. None
TO SELECT

Menu PD3, Parameter Definition 2

37XXXD OM A-183
P ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

PLOT OPTIONS None

FULL PLOT The plotter will plot everything displayed on the screen PFS
(data traces, graticule, menu text) when START PRINT
is pressed.

OPTIONS TO PLOT None

HEADER ON (OFF) The plot will include an information header if this option PLH; PLD
is on and START PRINT is pressed.

MENU ON (OFF) The plot will include the menu text if this option is on PMN
and START PRINT is pressed.

LIMITS ON (OFF) The plot will include any limit lines if this option is on PLM; PLD
and START PRINT is pressed.

GRATICULE ON (OFF) The plot will include the graticule and annotation if this PGT; PLD
option is on and START PRINT is pressed. The plotter
plots the graticule.

DATA TRACE(S) ON(OFF) The plot will include the data and any marker that are PLT; PLD
AND MARKERS present if this option is on and START PRINT is
pressed. The plotter plots the graticule.

PLOT FORMAT None

PLOT SIZE Calls menu PL2, which lets you select the size and None
location of
the plot.

PEN COLORS Calls menu PL3, which lets you select pen colors for None
the various elements of the plot: graticule, data traces,
menu text and header. Also lets you select the relative
pen speed.

PLOT ORIENTATION Select the orientation for your plot, either portrait or
PORTRAIT landscape. PORT; PLO?
LANDSCAPE LAND; PLO?

PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the Enter key implements your menu None
TO SELECT selection.
OR TURN ON/OFF

Menu PL1, Plot Options

A-184 37XXXD OM
ALPHABETICAL LISTING P

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

PLOT SIZE None

FULL SIZE Selects a full size (page) plot. PFL

–QUARTER None
SIZE PLOTS–

UPPER LEFT Selects a quarter-size plot, upper-left quadrant. PTL

UPPER RIGHT Selects a quarter-size plot, upper-right quadrant. PTR

LOWER LEFT Selects a quarter-size plot, lower-left quadrant. PBL

LOWER RIGHT Selects a quarter-size plot, lower-right quadrant. PBR

PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection. None
TO SELECT

Menu PL2, Select Plot Size

37XXXD OM A-185
P ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

SELECT None
PEN COLORS

DATA PEN Selects the color in which the data will be plotted. The DPN
n number of the pen displays where the “n” is shown.

DATA TRACE Selects the color in which the 2nd trace in a dual trace TPN
OVERLAY PEN overlay plot will be plotted. The number of the pen displays
n where the “n” is shown.

GRATICULE PEN Selects the color in which the graticule will be plotted. The GPN; GPN?
n number of the pen displays where the “n” is shown.

MARKERS AND Selects the color in which the markers and limits will be MPN; MPN?
LIMITS PEN plotted. The number of the pen displays where the “n” is
n shown.

HEADER PEN Selects the color in which the header information will be HPN; HPN?
n plotted. The number of the pen displays where the “n” is
shown.

PEN SPEED Selects the pen’s speed as a percentage of the plotter’s SPD; SPD?
100 PERCENT maximum speed. (Used to optimize plots on transparencies
OF MAXIMUM or with worn pens.)

PREVIOUS MENU Recalls menu PL1. None

PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection. None
TO SELECT

Menu PL3, Select Pen Colors

A-186 37XXXD OM
ALPHABETICAL LISTING P

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

HARD COPY None

OUTPUT DEVICE Allows hard copy output to be directed to the HDD or None
floppy, in addition to the printer and plotter. In addition to
text (*.txt), S2P (*.s2p), and tabular (*.dat) files, bitmaps
(*.bmp) and HPGL (*.hgl) files are offered to satisfy desktop
publishing requirements. Specifically, color bitmaps and
graphic language files can be imported into Windows
applications, such as Cap3700.

PRINTER Selects the printer as your output device. None

PLOTTER Selects the plotter as your output device. None

DISK FILE Selects a disk file as your output device. None

SETUP & OPERATIONS None

SETUP HEADERS Calls menu PM2, which lets you define the output header None
information.

DISK OPERATIONS Calls menu PM4, which lets you store/recall tabular data None
to/from disk.

OUTPUT OPTIONS None

PRINT OPTIONS Calls menu PM5. None

PLOT OPTIONS Calls menu PL1. None

DISK FILE OPTIONS Calls menu PM4A. None

PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the ENTER key implements your menu selection. None
TO SELECT The menu remains on the screen until another menu is
selected for display or until the CLEAR/RET LOC key is
pressed.

Menu PM1, Select Data Output Type

37XXXD OM A-187
P ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

DATA OUTPUT None

HEADERS

MODEL ON (OFF) Selecting <1> displays menu GP5, which lets you select LMS; LMS?
XXXXXXXXXXXX the letters and/or numbers in your model identifier.

DEVICE ID ON (OFF) Selecting <1> displays menu GP5, which lets you select LID; LID?
XXXXXXXXXXXX the letters and/or numbers in your Device I.D. identifier.

OPERATOR ON (OFF) Selecting <1> displays menu GP5, which lets you select LNM; LNM?
XXXXXXXXXXXX the letters
identifying the operator.

COMMENT ON (OFF) Selecting <1> displays menu GP5, which lets you enter a LOC; LOC?
XXXXXXXXXXXX comment.

DATE ON (OFF) Displays system date and time. Can be set in menu U6. LDT1; LDT0

SETUP LOGO Selecting <1> displays menu PM2A which lets you select None
any of three logo options.

PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the Enter key selects between menu selections. None
TO TURN ON/OFF Pressing the CLEAR/RET LOC key lets you change the
PRESS < 1 > between ON and OFF states.
TO CHANGE
Pressing <1> lets you enter the desired label in menu GP5.

Menu PM2, Data Output Headers

A-188 37XXXD OM
ALPHABETICAL LISTING P

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

LOGO SETUP Lets you turn off the Anritsu logo and select a user-define None
logo.

LOGO ON (OFF) Turns the logo on and off. LOGO1; LOGO0;

LOGOX?

LOGO TYPE Lets you define the logo type. None

STANDARD Causes the standard logo to be displayed. LOGOS

USER LOGO Lets users display their own log. LOGOU

INSTALL USER LOGO FROM None

FLOPPY DISK

FOR PRINTER Lets you define logo for printing. None

FOR PLOTTER Lets you define logo for plotting. None

PREVIOUS MENU Returns to previous menu. None

PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the Enter key selects between menu selections. None
TO SELECT

Menu PM2A, Data Output Headers

37XXXD OM A-189
P ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

TABULAR PRINTER None

OUTPUT FORMAT

MARKER DATA ON (OFF) Provides for printing marker data. PMK; PMT

SWEEP DATA ON (OFF) Provides for printing sweep data. If you choose to print PTB; PMT
the sweep data, you can then choose how may points
of the total sweep to print.

HEADER AND ON (OFF) Provides for printing header and page-break data. HD0; HD1; HDX?
PAGE BREAKS

PRINT DENSITY None

XXX PRINT PT(S) Outputs one point every X points. Use the rotary knob PT0-PT9
OUTPUT PRINTS to select total number of points to output. Skipping
1 POINT EVERY points will reduce the total number of printed points.
XXX POINT(S)

PREVIOUS MENU Returns to menu PM5. None

PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the Enter key selects between menu None
TO SELECT selections. Pressing the CLEAR/RET LOC key lets you
OR TURN ON/OFF change the between ON and OFF states.

TURN KNOB TO None

CHANGE NUMBER
OF POINTS

Menu PM3, Tabular Printer Output Format

A-190 37XXXD OM
ALPHABETICAL LISTING P

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

GRAPHICAL PRINTER None

OUTPUT FORMAT

HEADER ON (OFF) Provides for printing header data. HD1; HD0; HDX?

SCREEN AREA None

TO OUTPUT

FULL SCREEN Prints the full-screen data, including the menus. PFS

GRAPH ONLY Prints only the graph or Smith chart. PGR

BITMAP FILE None

OUTPUT OPTIONS

TRUE COLOR Configures the bitmap disk-file format as true color. BMPT

COLOR ON Configures the bitmap disk-file format to be color on a BMPC

WHITE BACKGROUND white background.

BLACK ON Configures the bitmap disk-file format to be black on a BMPB

WHITE BACKGROUND white background.

PREVIOUS MENU Returns to menu PM5. None

PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the Enter key selects between menu selections. None
TO SELECT Pressing the <ENTER> key lets you change the between
OR TURN ON/OFF ON and OFF states.

Menu PM3A, Graphical Printer Output Format

37XXXD OM A-191
P ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

OUTPUT None
DISK OPERATIONS

TABULAR DATA Calls DSK2 for selection of a measurement data file to be None
FROM HARD DISK output to the printer.
TO PRINTER

TABULAR DATA Calls DSK2 for selection of a measurement data file to be None
FROM FLOPPY DISK output to the printer.
TO PRINTER

PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection. None
TO SELECT

Menu PM4, Disk Output Operations

A-192 37XXXD OM
ALPHABETICAL LISTING P

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

DISK FILE OPTIONS None

DESTINATION None

HARD DISK Selects the output drive destination for the disk file to the None
hard disk (C:).

FLOPPY DISK Selects the output drive destination for the disk file to the None
floppy disk (A:).

FORMAT None

TEXT Text format, predefined. SAVE “*.TXT”

S2P S2P format, predefined. SAVE “*.SP2”

TABULAR DATA Tabular data format is configured via the Print Options SAVE “*.DAT”
(Menu PM5) or Tabular Data (Menu PM3).

BITMAP Bitmap format is configured via the Print Options (Menu SAVE “*.BMP”
PM5), Options (Menu PM5, or Graphical Data (Menu
PM3A).

HPGL HPGL format is configured via the Plot Options (Menu SAVE “*.HGL”
PL1).

PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection. None
TO SELECT

USE <START PRINT> Press the Start Print key at the moment data is to be None
TO CAPTURE DATA captured. This calls menu DSK3 to create a new file or
overwrite an existing file in the current directory.

Menu PM4A, Disk File Options

37XXXD OM A-193
P ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

PRINT OPTIONS None

PRINTER TYPE None

THINKJET Select when HP QuietJet or HP ThinkJet is connected to None

37XXXD VNA.

DESKJET Select when HP DeskJet (B/W) or HP LaserJet II and III None

series is connected to 37XXXD VNA.

EPSON Select when Epson FX, Epson MX, or Epson 9-pin None
compatible is connected to 37XXXD VNA.

FORMAT OF None
PRINTER OUTPUT

GRAPHICAL DATA Prints only the graph or Smith chart, including any and all None
data it contains.

TABULAR DATA Prints a tabulation of the measured data None

PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection. None
TO SELECT

Menu PM5, Printer Type, Options

A-194 37XXXD OM
ALPHABETICAL LISTING R

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

RECEIVER MODE None

STANDARD Selects STANDARD mode (RECEIVER mode is not SDR; SDR?

activated).

USER DEFINED Calls menu RCV2, which lets you define rEceiver Mode None
parameters.

SOURCE CONFIG Calls menu SC, which lets you configure the frequency None
source.

SPUR REDUCTION Switches between NORMAL and OFF for hardware spur SPR1; SPR0;
NORMAL/OFF reduction. Hardware control may not be available. SPRX?

PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the ENTER key implements or switches your None
TO SELECT menu selection.
OR SWITCH

Menu RCV1, Receiver Mode

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

STANDARD None
RECEIVER MODE

WARNING: None

CONTINUING
MAY INVALIDATE
CURRENT SETUP
AND CALIBRATION

PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the ENTER key implements your menu selection.
TO CONTINUE

PRESS <CLEAR> Pressing the CLEAR key aborts the Receiver Mode. None
TO ABORT

Menu RCV1_WARN, Standard Receiver Mode Warning

37XXXD OM A-195
R ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

USER DEFINED None

RECEIVER MODE

SOURCE LOCK Phase locks sources having phase control reference inputs. SL1

TRACKING Phase locks 37XXXD receivers to a known frequency TK1

source.

SET ON Disables source lock circuitry, local oscillators are phase ST1
locked to the 37XXXD internal crystal reference oscillator.

PRESS ENTER Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection or None
TO SELECT turns GPIB control on or off.

Menu RCV2, User Defined Receiver Mode Menu

A-196 37XXXD OM
ALPHABETICAL LISTING R

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

USER DEFINED None

RECEIVER MODE

SET ON (Warning could also read “SOURCE LOCK,” “TRACKING,” None

WITH or “WITHOUT” instead of “SET ON”).
GPIB CONTROL

WARNING: None

CONTINUING
MAY INVALIDATE
CURRENT SETUP
AND CALIBRATION

PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the ENTER key implements your menu selection. None
TO CONTINUE

PRESS <CLEAR> Pressing the CLEAR key aborts the Receiver Mode. None
TO ABORT

Menu RCV2_WARN, User Defined Receiver Mode Warning

37XXXD OM A-197
R ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

STANDARD Indicates that Standard Receiver mode has been selected. None
RECEIVER MODE

WARNING: Indicates that continuing (by pressing the Enter key) will None
erase current setup and calibration stored in the VNA.
CONTINUING
WILL ERASE
CURRENT
SETUP AND
CALIBRATION

Menu RCV3, Standard Receiver Mode Warning Menu

A-198 37XXXD OM
ALPHABETICAL LISTING R

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

USER DEFINED None

RECEIVER MODE

XXXXXXXX Indicates selected mode

WARNING: Indicates that continuing (by pressing the Enter key) will None
erase current setup and calibration stored in theVNA.
CONTINUING
WILL ERASE
CURRENT
SETUP AND
CALIBRATION

PRESS <ENTER> Pressing Enter key implements selected mode. None

TO CONTINUE

OR

PRESS <CLEAR> Pressing the CLEAR key aborts the selected mode; current
TO ABORT setup and calibration data stored in the VNA is preserved.

Menu RCV4, User Defined Receiver Mode Warning Menu

37XXXD OM A-199
R ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COM-

MAND

REFERENCE None
PLANE

AUTO Automatically sets the reference delay so that the RDA

cumulative phase shift is zero. This selection unwinds the
phase in a Smith chart display or reduces the phase
revolutions in a rectilinear display to less than one.

DISTANCE Electrically repositions the measurement reference plane, as RDD; RDD?

XXX.XXXX mm displayed on the active channel, by a distance value entered
in millimeters. This selection lets you compensate for the
phase reversals inherent in a length of transmission line
connected between the test set’s Port 1 connector and the
device-under-test (DUT).

TIME Electrically repositions the measurement reference plane by RDT; RDT?

XXX.XXXX ms a distance value that corresponds to the time in
milliseconds.

SET DIELECTRIC Displays menu RD2, which lets you enter a value for the DIE
XXX dielectric constant of your transmission line.

CONSTANT OFFSET Lets the user apply a constant offset vector to the channel
data. A constant magnitude and phase can be applied to the
data just after the reference plane is applied. The constant
offset is independent of frequency and media dispersion.

MAGNITUDE The magnitude is entered in dB and the phase in degrees. MOSET;

+XXX.XXX dB These values are combined into a vector where the magnitude MOSET?
is converted from Log to Linear. The channel data is then
PHASE vector multiplied by this vector. POSET;
+XXX.XXX° POSET?

PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection. None
TO SELECT

Menu RD1, Set Reference Delay

A-200 37XXXD OM
ALPHABETICAL LISTING R

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

SET None
DIELECTRIC
CONSTANT

AIR Calculates reference delay based on dielectric constant of DIA

(1.000649) air (1.000649).

POLYETHYLENE Calculates reference delay based on the dielectric constant DIP

(2.26) of polyethylene (2.26).

TEFLON Calculates reference delay based on the dielectric constant DIT

(2.10) of
teflon (2.1).

MICROPOROUS Calculates reference delay based on the dielectric constant DIM

TEFLON of microporous teflon (1.69).
(1.69)

OTHER Calculates reference delay based on the value you enter. DIE
XXXX.XX Terminate your entry using any terminator and select with
the Enter key.

PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection None
TO SELECT and returns you to the RD1 menu.

Menu RD2, Set Dielectric Constant

37XXXD OM A-201
S ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

SOURCE CONFIG None

SOURCE 1 None

ACTIVE/ INACTIVE Enables and disables the internal source. SRC1AC;

SRC1AC?

SOURCE LOCATION Changes location of source 1 from internal to external None

INTERNAL / EXTERNAL (NOT CURRENTLY SUPPORTED).

GPIB ADDRESS Changes GPIB address of external source 1. SRC1ADD;

4 SRC1ADD?

GPIB CONTROL ON (OFF) Disables GPIB control of external source 1. SRC1G1;

SRC1G0;
SRC1GX?

SOURCE 2

ACTIVE/ INACTIVE Enables and disables the external source 2. SRC2AC;

SRC2AC?

SOURCE LOCATION None

EXTERNAL

GPIB ADDRESS 4 Changes GPIB address of external source 2. SRC2ADD;

5 SRC2ADD?

GPIB CONTROL ON (OFF) Disables GPIB control of external source 2. SRC2G1;

SRC2G0;
SRC2GX?

PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection.
TO SELECT
OR TURN ON/OFF

Menu SC, Source Configure

A-202 37XXXD OM
ALPHABETICAL LISTING S

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

SELECT None
PARAMETER

S21, FWD TRANS Selects the S21 parameter to be displayed on the active S21
b2 / a1 channel
The parameter can be displayed in any of the available
formats.

S11, USER 2 Selects the S11 parameter to be displayed on the active S11
b2 / 1 channel.
The parameter can be displayed in any of the available
formats.

S12, REV TRANS Selects the S12 parameter to be displayed on the active S12
b1 / a2 channel.
The parameter can be displayed in any of the available
formats.

S22, REV REFL Selects the S22 parameter to be displayed on the active S22
b2 / a2 channel.
The parameter can be displayed in any of the available
formats.

EXT ANALOG IN Switches from a S-parameter or user-defined parameter EANAIN

to an external analog input. This is measured from the
rear panel Ext Anlg In connector input. The values may
be seen on the Real graph type where 1 Unit = 1 Volt.

PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection. None
TO SELECT

PRESS <1> Calls menu PD1, which lets you redefine the selected None
TO REDEFINE parameter.
SELECTED PARAMETER

Menu SP, Select S Parameter

37XXXD OM A-203
S ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

SAVE/RECALL None
FRONT PANEL
AND CAL DATA

SAVE Calls menu SR2, which asks you to select a storage None
RECALL location—internal memory or disk.

PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the Enter key implements your selection. None
TO SELECT
FUNCTION

Menu SR1, Save/Recall Front Panel Information

A-204 37XXXD OM
ALPHABETICAL LISTING S

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

RECALL None
(OR SAVE)

FRONT PANEL Calls menu SR3, which lets you save the front panel setup None
SETUP IN into or recall it from internal memory.
INTERNAL MEMORY

FRONT PANEL Calls menu DKS2 or DSK3, which let you recall or save to None
SETUP AND hard disk memory.
CAL DATA
ON HARD DISK

FRONT PANEL Calls menu DKS2 or DSK3, which let you recall or save to None
SETUP AND floppy disk memory.
CAL DATA
ON FLOPPY DISK

PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the Enter key implements your selection. The None
TO SELECT menu remains on the screen until another menu is selected
for display or until the Clear/Ret Loc key is pressed.

Menu SR2, Recall or Save

37XXXD OM A-205
S ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

SAVE FRONT None

PANEL SETUP TO
(RECALL FRONT
PANEL SETUP FROM)
INTERNAL MEMORY

MEMORY 1* Causes the current front panel setup to be saved to SV1; RC1
memory location 1. If an asterisk appears beside the
selection, the memory is full. Select a different memory
location.

MEMORY 2 Same as above, except the setup saves to memory SV2; RC2
location 2.

MEMORY 3 Same as above, except the setup saves to memory SV3; RC3
location 3.

MEMORY 4* Same as above, except the setup saves to memory SV4; RC4
location 4.

MEMORY 5* Same as above, except the setup saves to memory SV5; RC5
location 5.

MEMORY 6 Same as above, except the setup saves to memory SV6; RC6
location 6.

MEMORY 7 Same as above, except the setup saves to memory SV7; RC7
location 7.

MEMORY 8 Same as above, except the setup saves to memory SV8; RC8
location 8.

MEMORY 9 Same as above, except the setup saves to memory SV9; RC9
location 9.

MEMORY 10 Same as above, except the setup saves to memory SV10; RC10
location 10.

PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection. None
TO SELECT
OR
USE KEYPAD

Menu SR3, Save to Internal memory

A-206 37XXXD OM
ALPHABETICAL LISTING S

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

SET SCALING None

OR PRESS
<AUTOSCALE>

–LOG MAG– None

RESOLUTION Sets the resolution for the vertical axis of the active SCL; SCL?;
XX.XXX dB/DIV channel’s displayed graph. Resolution can by set SCL2; SCL2?
incrementally using the keypad or rotary knob.

REFERENCE VALUE Sets the value at the reference line for the active channel OFF; OFF?
XXX.XXX dB amplitude measurement on the log-magnitude graph. The OFF2; OFF2?
value can be set in increments of 0.001 dB using the
keypad or rotary knob.

REFERENCE LINE Sets the reference line for the active channel’s amplitude REF; REF?;
X measurement on the log-magnitude graph. This is the line REF2; REF2?
about which the amplitude expands with different resolution
values. The reference line can be set to any vertical
division using the rotary knob.

–PHASE– None

RESOLUTION Sets the resolution for the vertical axis of the active SCL; SCL?;
XX.XX ° /DIV channel’s displayed phase graph. Resolution can by set SCL2; SCL2?
incrementally using
the keypad or rotary knob.

REFERENCE VALUE Sets the value at the reference line for the active channel OFF; OFF?
XXX.XX ° amplitude measurement on the phase graph. The value OFF2; OFF2?
can be set in increments of 0.001 dB using the keypad or
rotary knob.

REFERENCE LINE Sets the reference line for the active channel’s phase REF; REF?;
X measurement on the phase graph. This is the line about REF2; REF2?
which the phase expands with different resolution values.
The reference line can be set to any vertical division using
the rotary knob.

PHASE SHIFT Sets the value by which the active channel’s phase PHO; PHO?
X.XX ° measurement is shifted on the phase graph. The shift can
be set in increments of 0.01 degrees using the keypad or
rotary knob. This is useful when phase data is near the 180
degree rollover value.

PRESS <ENTER> On the CAL_SS1 menu, pressing the Enter key returns you None
TO RESUME CAL to the calibration setup or sequence.

Menu SS1 or CAL_SS1, Set Scaling 1

37XXXD OM A-207
S ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

SET SCALING None

OR PRESS
<AUTOSCALE>

–LINEAR POLAR– None

RESOLUTION Sets the resolution for the vertical axis of the active SCL; SCL?;
XX.XXX U/DIV channel’s displayed graph. Resolution can by set SCL2; SCL2?
incrementally using the keypad or rotary knob. The center
is fixed at 0 units; therefore, changing the resolution also
changes the reference value and vice versa

REFERENCE VALUE Sets the value at the reference line for the active channel OFF; OFF?
XXX.XXX U amplitude measurement on the displayed graph. The value OFF2; OFF2?
can be set in increments of 0.001 U using the keypad or
rotary knob.

FIXED Sets the reference line for the active channel’s amplitude REF; REF?;
REFERENCE LINE measurement. This is the line about which the amplitude REF2; REF2?
expands with different resolution values. The reference line
can be set to any vertical division using the rotary knob.

SELECT POLAR Calls menu PC1, which lets you define the phase angles None
CHART MODE between which your polar chart will display data.
MAGNITUDE
PHASE

PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection None
TO SELECT and resumes the calibration from where it left off, if in the
AND RESUME CAL calibration mode.

Menu SS2 or CAL_SS2, Set Scaling 2

A-208 37XXXD OM
ALPHABETICAL LISTING S

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

SET SCALING None

OR PRESS
<AUTOSCALE>

IMPEDANCE Scales an Impedance Smith chart for display in the active SMI; ISM
(ADMITTANCE) channel.
SMITH CHART

NORMAL SMITH Selects a normal Smith chart for display in the active SMI; ISM
(REFL = 1.0000000 channel.
FULL SCALE)

EXPAND 10 dB Selects a 10 dB expansion of the Smith chart being SME10DB;

(REFL = 0.3162278 displayed for the active channel. ISM10DB
FULL SCALE)

EXPAND 20 dB Selects a 20 dB expansion of the Smith chart being SME20DB;

(REFL = 0.1000000 displayed for the active channel. ISM20DB
FULL SCALE)

EXPAND 30 dB Selects a 30 dB expansion of the Smith chart being SME30DB;

(REFL = 0.0316228 displayed for the active channel. ISM30DB
FULL SCALE)

COMPRESS 3 dB Selects a 3 dB compression of the Smith chart being SMC3DB;

(REFL =1.425375 displayed for the active channel. ISM3DB
FULL SCALE)

PRESS <ENTER> On the CAL_SS3Z or Y menu, pressing the Enter key None
TO SELECT returns you to the calibration setup or sequence.
AND RESUME CAL

PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the ENTER key implements your menu selection None
TO SELECT and resumes the calibration from where it left off, if in the
calibration mode.. The menu remains on the screen until
another menu is selected for display or until the
CLEAR/RET LOC key is pressed.

Menu SS3Z/SS3Y or CAL_SS3Z/CALSS3Y, Set Scaling 3

37XXXD OM A-209
S ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

SET SCALING None

OR PRESS
<AUTOSCALE>

–LOG MAG– None

RESOLUTION Sets the resolution for the vertical axis of the active SCL; SCL?;
XX.XXX dB/DIV channel’s displayed graph. Resolution can by set SCL2; SCL2?
incrementally using the keypad or rotary knob.

REFERENCE VALUE Sets the value at the reference line for the active channel OFF; OFF?
XXX.XXX dB amplitude measurement on the displayed graph. The value OFF2; OFF2?
can be set in increments of 0.001 dB using the keypad or
rotary knob.

REFERENCE LINE Sets the reference line for the active channel’s amplitude REF; REF?;
X measurement on the log-magnitude graph. This is the line REF2; REF2?
about which the amplitude expands with different resolution
values. The reference line can be set to any vertical
division using the rotary knob.

PRESS <ENTER> On the CAL_SS4 menu, pressing the Enter key returns you None
TO RESUME CAL to the calibration setup or sequence.

Menu SS4 or CAL_SS4, Set Scaling 4

A-210 37XXXD OM
ALPHABETICAL LISTING S

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

SET SCALING None

OR PRESS
<AUTOSCALE>

–PHASE– None

RESOLUTION Sets the resolution for the vertical axis of the active SCL; SCL?;
XX.XXX °/DIV channel’s displayed graph. Resolution can by set SCL2; SCL2?
incrementally using the keypad or rotary knob.

REFERENCE VALUE Sets the value at the reference line for the active channel OFF; OFF?
XXX.XXX ° amplitude measurement on the displayed graph. The value OFF2; OFF2?
can be set in increments of 0.01 o using the keypad or
rotary knob.

REFERENCE LINE Sets the reference line for the active channel’s amplitude REF; REF?;
X measurement. This is the line about which the amplitude REF2; REF2?
expands with different resolution values. The reference line
can be set to any vertical division using the rotary knob.

PHASE SHIFT Sets the value by which the active channel’s phase PHO; PHO?
X.XX ° measurement is shifted on the phase graph. The shift can
be set in increments of 0.01 degrees using the keypad or
rotary knob. This is useful when phase data is near the 180
degree rollover value.

PRESS <ENTER> On the CAL_SS5 menu, pressing the Enter key returns you v
TO RESUME CAL to the calibration setup or sequence.

Menu SS5 or CAL_SS5, Set Scaling 5

37XXXD OM A-211
S ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

SET SCALING None

OR PRESS
<AUTOSCALE>

–LOG POLAR– None

RESOLUTION Sets the resolution for the vertical axis of the active SCL; SCL?;
XX.XXX dB/DIV channel’s displayed graph. Resolution can by set SCL2; SCL2?
incrementally using the keypad or rotary knob.

REFERENCE VALUE Sets the value at the reference line for the active channel OFF; OFF?
XXX.XXX dB amplitude measurement on the displayed graph. The value OFF2; OFF2?
can be set in increments of 0.001 dB using the keypad or
rotary knob.

FIXED Sets the reference line for the active channel’s amplitude REF; REF?;
REFERENCE LINE measurement. This is the line about which the amplitude REF2; REF2?
expands with different resolution values. The reference line
can be set to any vertical division using the rotary knob.

SELECT POLAR Calls menu PC1, which lets you define the phase angles None
CHART MODE between which your polar chart will display data.
MAGNITUDE
PHASE

PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection None
TO SELECT and resumes the calibration from where it left off, if in the
AND RESUME CAL calibration mode.

Menu SS6 or CAL_SS6, Set Scaling 6

A-212 37XXXD OM
ALPHABETICAL LISTING S

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

SET SCALING None

OR PRESS
<AUTOSCALE>

–GROUP DELAY– None

RESOLUTION Sets the resolution for the vertical axis of the active SCL; SCL?;
XX.XXX fs/DIV channel’s displayed graph. Resolution can by set SCL2; SCL2?
incrementally using the keypad or rotary knob.

REF VALUE Sets the value at the reference line for the active channel OFF; OFF?
XXX.XXX fs amplitude measurement on the displayed graph. The value OFF2; OFF2?
can be set in increments of 0.0001 s using the keypad or
rotary knob.

REFERENCE LINE Sets the reference line for the active channel’s amplitude REF; REF?;
X measurement. This is the line about which the amplitude REF2; REF2?
expands with different resolution values. The reference line
can be set to any vertical division using the rotary knob.

APERTURE Sets and displays the percent of frequency span over APR; APR?
X.X PERCENT which group delay is calculated.
OF SWEEP

PRESS <ENTER> On the CAL_SS7 menu, pressing the Enter key returns you None
TO RESUME CAL to the calibration setup or sequence.

Menu SS7 or CAL_SS7, Set Scaling 7

37XXXD OM A-213
S ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

SET SCALING None

OR PRESS
<AUTOSCALE>

–LINEAR MAG– None

RESOLUTION Sets the resolution for the vertical axis of the active SCL; SCL?;
XX.XXX U/DIV channel’s displayed graph. Resolution can by set SCL2; SCL2?
incrementally using the keypad or rotary knob.

REFERENCE VALUE Sets the value at the reference line for the active channel OFF; OFF?
XXX.XXX pU amplitude measurement on the displayed graph. The value OFF2; OFF2?
can be set in increments of 0.001 U using the keypad or
rotary knob.

REFERENCE LINE Sets the reference line for the active channel’s amplitude REF; REF?;
X measurement. This is the line about which the amplitude REF2; REF2?
expands with different resolution values. The reference line
can be set to any vertical division using the rotary knob.

PRESS <ENTER> On the CAL_SS8 menu, pressing the Enter key returns you None
TO RESUME CAL to the calibration setup or sequence.

Menu SS8 or CAL_SS8, Set Scaling 8

A-214 37XXXD OM
ALPHABETICAL LISTING S

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

SET SCALING None

OR PRESS
<AUTOSCALE>

–LINEAR MAG– None

RESOLUTION Sets the resolution for the vertical axis of the active SCL; SCL?;
XX.XXX U/DIV channel’s displayed graph. Resolution can by set SCL2; SCL2?
incrementally using the keypad or rotary knob.

REFERENCE VALUE Sets the value at the reference line for the active channel OFF; OFF?
XXX.XXX pU amplitude measurement on the displayed graph. The value OFF2; OFF2?
can be set in increments of 0.001 U using the keypad or
rotary knob.

REFERENCE LINE Sets the reference line for the active channel’s amplitude REF; REF?;
X measurement. This is the line about which the amplitude REF2; REF2?
expands with different resolution values. The reference line
can be set to any vertical division using the rotary knob.

–PHASE– None

RESOLUTION Sets the resolution for the vertical axis of the active SCL; SCL?;
XX.XX °/DIV channel’s displayed phase graph. Resolution can by set SCL2; SCL2?
incrementally using the keypad or rotary knob.

REF VALUE Sets the value by which the active channel’s phase OFF; OFF?
XXX.XX ° measurement is offset on the phase graph. The offset can OFF2; OFF2?
be set in increments of 0.01 degrees using the keypad or
rotary knob.

REFERENCE LINE Sets the reference line for the active channel’s phase REF; REF?;
X measurement REF2; REF2?
on the phase graph. This is the line about which the phase
expands with different resolution values. The reference line
can be set to any vertical division using the rotary knob.

PHASE SHIFT Sets the value by which the active channel’s phase PHO; PHO?
X.XX ° measurement is shifted on the phase graph. The shift can
be set in increments of 0.01 degrees using the keypad or
rotary knob. This is useful when phase data is near the 180
degree rollover value.

PRESS <ENTER> On the CAL_SS9 menu, pressing the Enter key returns you None
TO RESUME CAL to the calibration setup or sequence.

Menu SS9 or CAL_SS9, Set Scaling 9

37XXXD OM A-215
S ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

SET SCALING None

OR PRESS
<AUTOSCALE>

–REAL– None

RESOLUTION Sets the resolution for the vertical axis of the active SCL; SCL?;
XX.XXX U/DIV channel’s displayed graph. Resolution can by set SCL2; SCL2?
incrementally using the keypad or rotary knob.

REFERENCE VALUE Sets the value at the reference line for the active channel OFF; OFF?
XXX.XXX pU amplitude measurement on the displayed graph. The value OFF2; OFF2?
can be set in increments of 0.001 U using the keypad or
rotary knob.

REFERENCE LINE Sets the reference line for the active channel’s amplitude REF; REF?;
X measurement. This is the line about which the amplitude REF2; REF2?
expands with different resolution values. The reference line
can be set to any vertical division using the rotary knob.

PRESS <ENTER> On the CAL_SS10 menu, pressing the Enter key returns None
TO RESUME CAL you to the calibration setup or sequence.

Menu SS10 or CAL_SS10, Set Scaling 10

A-216 37XXXD OM
ALPHABETICAL LISTING S

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

SET SCALING None

OR PRESS
<AUTOSCALE>

–IMAGINARY– None

RESOLUTION Sets the resolution for the vertical axis of the active SCL; SCL?;
XX.XXX U/DIV channel’s displayed graph. Resolution can by set SCL2; SCL2?
incrementally using the keypad or rotary knob.

REFERENCE VALUE Sets the value at the reference line for the active channel OFF; OFF?
XXX.XXX pU amplitude measurement on the displayed graph. The value OFF2; OFF2?
can be set in increments of 0.001 U using the keypad or
rotary knob.

REFERENCE LINE Sets the reference line for the active channel’s amplitude REF; REF?;
X measurement. This is the line about which the amplitude REF2; REF2?
expands with different resolution values. The reference line
can be set to any vertical division using the rotary knob.

PRESS <ENTER> On the CAL_SS11 menu, pressing the Enter key returns None
TO RESUME CAL you to the calibration setup or sequence.

Menu SS11 or CAL_SS11, Set Scaling 11

37XXXD OM A-217
S ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

SET SCALING None

OR PRESS
<AUTOSCALE>

–REAL– None

RESOLUTION Sets the resolution for the vertical axis of the active SCL; SCL?;
XX.XXX U/DIV channel’s displayed graph. Resolution can by set SCL2; SCL2?
incrementally using the keypad or rotary knob.

REFERENCE VALUE Sets the value at the reference line for the active channel OFF; OFF?
XXX.XXX pU amplitude measurement on the displayed graph. The value OFF2; OFF2?
can be set in increments of 0.001 U using the keypad or
rotary knob.

REFERENCE LINE Sets the reference line for the active channel’s amplitude REF; REF?;
X measurement. This is the line about which the amplitude REF2; REF2?
expands with different resolution values. The reference line
can be set to any vertical division using the rotary knob.

–IMAGINARY– None

RESOLUTION Sets the resolution for the vertical axis of the active SCL; SCL?;
XX.XX °/DIV channel’s displayed graph. Resolution can by set SCL2; SCL2?
incrementally using the keypad or rotary knob.

REFERENCE VALUE Sets the value by which the active channel’s phase OFF; OFF?
XXX.XX ° measurement is offset on the phase graph. The offset can OFF2; OFF2?
be set in increments of 0.01 degrees using the keypad or
rotary knob.

REFERENCE LINE Sets the reference line for the active channel’s phase REF; REF?;
X measurement on the phase graph. This is the line about REF2; REF2?
which the phase expands with different resolution values.
The reference line can be set to any vertical division using
the rotary knob.

PRESS <ENTER> On the CAL_SS12 menu, pressing the Enter key returns None
TO RESUME CAL you to the calibration setup or sequence.

Menu SS12 or CAL_SS12, Set Scaling 12

A-218 37XXXD OM
ALPHABETICAL LISTING S

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

SET SCALING None

OR PRESS
<AUTOSCALE>

–SWR– None

RESOLUTION Sets the resolution for the vertical axis of the active SCL; SCL?;
XX.XXX U /DIV channel’s displayed graph. Resolution can by set SCL2; SCL2?
incrementally using the keypad or rotary knob.

REFERENCE VALUE Sets the value at the reference line for the active channel OFF; OFF?
XXX.XXX U amplitude measurement on the displayed graph. The value OFF2; OFF2?
can be set in increments of 0.001 U using the keypad or
rotary knob.

REFERENCE LINE Sets the reference line for the active channel’s amplitude REF; REF?;
X measurement. This is the line about which the amplitude REF2; REF2?
expands with different resolution values. The reference line
can be set to any vertical division using the rotary knob.

PRESS <ENTER> On the CAL_SS13 menu, pressing the Enter key returns None
TO RESUME CAL you to the calibration setup or sequence.

Menu SS13 or CAL_SS13, Set Scaling 13

37XXXD OM A-219
S ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

SET SCALING None

OR PRESS
<AUTOSCALE>

–POWER OUT– None

RESOLUTION Sets the resolution for the vertical axis of the active SCL; SCL?;
XX.XXX dB/DIV channel’s displayed graph. Resolution can by set SCL2; SCL2?
incrementally using the keypad or rotary knob.

REFERENCE VALUE Sets the value at the reference line for the active channel OFF; OFF?
XXX.XXX dBm amplitude measurement on the displayed graph. OFF2; OFF2?

REFERENCE LINE Sets the reference line for the active channel’s amplitude REF; REF?;
X measurement. This is the line about which the amplitude REF2; REF2?
expands with different resolution values. The reference line
can be set to any vertical division using the rotary knob.

Menu SS14, Set Scaling 14

A-220 37XXXD OM
ALPHABETICAL LISTING S

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

SWEEP SETUP None

START Enter the sweep-start frequency in GHz. The start SRT

XXX.XXXXXXXXX GHz frequency must be lower than the stop frequency.

STOP Enter the sweep-stop frequency in GHz. The stop STP

XXX.XXXXXXXXX GHz frequency must be higher than the start frequency.

SET CENTER/SPAN Calls menu SU1_CENTER, which lets you set values for None
center frequency and span width.

XXX DATA POINTS Displays the number of frequency points and the spacing None
XXX.XXXXXXXXX GHz between points for the start and stop frequencies
STEPSIZE selected above. The number of points shown provides
the finest frequency resolution possible, based on your
Data Points key menu selection.

C.W. MODE ON (OFF) Move cursor here and press Enter to enable the CW CWF; CWON;
XXX.XXXXXXXXX GHZ mode. Enter CW frequency for measurements. CWON?; SWP;
SWP?

MARKER SWEEP Move cursor here and press Enter to set the start and None
stop frequencies (menu SU5) of the CW frequency
(menu SU6) to the values of any marker.

DISCRETE FILL Calls the Discrete Fill menu (menu DF1). None

HOLD BUTTON Calls menu SU4, which lets you set the action of the None
FUNCTION HOLD key.

TEST SIGNALS Calls menu SU2, which lets you set the source power None
and the values for the attenuators in the 37XXXD. It also
provides entry into the Flat Test Port Power calibration.

PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the ENTER key implements your menu None
TO SELECT selection.
OR TURN ON/OFF

Menu SU1, Sweep Setup 1

37XXXD OM A-221
S ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

SWEEP SETUP None

CENTER Enter the center frequency in GHz. CNTR; CNTR?

XXX.XXXXXXXXX GHz

SPAN Enter the span frequency in GHz. SPAN; SPAN?

XXX.XXXXXXXXX GHz

SET START/STOP Calls menu SU1, which lets you set values for start and None
stop frequencies.

XXX DATA POINT(S) Displays the number of frequency points and the spacing None
XXX.XXXXXXXXX GHz between points for the center and span frequencies
STEPSIZE selected above. The number of points shown provides the
finest frequency resolution possible, based on your Data
Points key menu selection.

C.W. MODE ON (OFF) Move cursor here and press Enter to enable the CW mode. CWF; CWON;
XXX.XXXXXXXXX GHZ Enter CW frequency for measurements. SWP; CWON?

MARKER SWEEP Move cursor here and press Enter to set the start and stop None
frequencies (menu SU5) of the CW frequency (menu SU6)
to the values of any marker.

DISCRETE FILL Calls the Discrete Fill menu (menu DF1). None

HOLD BUTTON Calls menu SU4, which lets you set the action of the HOLD None
FUNCTION key.

TEST SIGNALS Calls menu SU2, which lets you set the source power and None
the values for the attenuators in the 37XXXD. It also
provides entry into the Flat Test Port Power calibration.

PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the ENTER key implements your menu selection. None
TO SELECT
OR TURN ON/OFF

Menu SU1_CENTER, Sweep Setup 1

A-222 37XXXD OM
ALPHABETICAL LISTING S

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

TEST SIGNALS None

POWER CONTROL Enter the delta-power level for the Port 1 output in dB. PWR; PWR?
+XX.X dB
0 TO -15.0 dB)

PORT 1 ATTN Attenuates the microwave source power at port 1 from 0 to SA1; SA1?
XX10 dB (0 - 70) 70 dB, in 10 dB steps. The power is attenuated before
being applied to Port 1 for a forward transmission or
reflection test (S21 or S11, respectively).

PORT 1 POWER Displays the Port 1 power, in dBm. PIP?

-XX.XX dBM

PORT 2 ATTN Attenuates from 0 to 40 dB (10 dB steps) the microwave TA2; TA2?
XX10 dB (0-X0) power being input to Port 2 from the device-under-test
(DUT).

CALIBRATE None
FOR FLATNESS
(CAL EXISTS)

FLATNESS ON(OFF) Calls menu SU8 or CAL_SU8, depending on whether valid FP0; FP1; FPX?
CORRECTION Flat Test Port Power calibration data exists. Both of these
AT XX.X dBm menus provide selection control for the Flat Test Port
Power feature.

EXT SOURCE 1 PWR Enter the power level, in dBm, of the 1st, external PWR1; PWR1?
-XX.XX dBm frequency source.

EXT SOURCE 2 PWR Enter the power level, in dBm, of the 2nd, external PW2; PW2?
-XX.XX dBm frequency source.

PREVIOUS MENU Returns to the previous menu. None

Menu SU2 or CAL_SU2, Sweep Setup 2

37XXXD OM A-223
S ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

TEST SIGNALS None

EXT SOURCE 1 PWR Enter and display the power level, in dBm, of the 1st PWR1; PWR1?
+XX.XX dBm external frequency source.

EXT SOURCE 2 PWR Enter and display the power level, in dBm, of the 2nd, PW2; PW2?
+XX.XX dBm external frequency source.

PORT 1 ATTN Attenuates the microwave source power at port 1 from 0 to SA1; SA1?
0 * 10 dB (0 - 70) 70 dB, in 10 dB steps. The power is attenuated before
being applied to Port 1 for a forward transmission or
reflection test (S21 or S11, respectively).
(NO STEP ATTENUATOR IN MODEL 372XXC)

PORT 2 ATTN Attenuates from 0 to 40 dB (10 dB steps) the microwave TA2; TA2?
0 * 10 dB (0 - 00) power being input to Port 2 from the device-under-test
(DUT).

PREVIOUS MENU Returns you to the previous menu. (RESUME CAL may be None
used instead of PREVIOUS MENU, when accessed during
a calibration.)

PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection. None
TO SELECT
OR TURN ON/OFF

Menu SU2A or CAL_SU2A, Sweep Setup 2A

A-224 37XXXD OM
ALPHABETICAL LISTING S

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

SINGLE POINT None

MEASUREMENT
SETUP

C.W. FREQ Enter the measurement frequency in GHz for continuous CWF; CWF?
XXX.XXXXXXXXX GHz wave (CW) operation.

HOLD BUTTON Calls menu SU4, which lets you set the action of the HOLD None
FUNCTION key.

TEST Calls menu SU2, which lets you set values for the source None
SIGNALS power and attenuators. It also provides entry into the Flat
Test Port Power calibration.

RETURN TO Move cursor here and press Enter to return to the F1-F2 None
SWEEP MODE sweep mode (Menu SU1).

PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection. None
TO SELECT

Menu SU3, Single-Point Measurement Setup

37XXXD OM A-225
S ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

SWEPT POWER None

SETUP

SWEPT POWER Enter the swept-power frequency in GHz. None

FREQUENCY
XXX.XXXXXXXXX GHz

P START Displays the start power value in dBm. PSTRT; PSTRT?

-XX.XX dBm

P STOP Displays the stop power value in dBm. PSTOP; PSTOP?

-XX.XX dBm

STEPSIZE Displays the power step size value in dB. PSTEP; PSTEP?
-XX.XX dB

POWER SWEEP ON(OFF) Turns power sweep on or off. PSWP1; PSWP0;

-XX.XX dBm PSWPX?

HOLD BUTTON Calls menu SU4. None

FUNCTION

SWEPT POWER Calls menu GC3 and extended menu EXT_GC3. None
GAIN COMPRESSION

RETURN TO SWEPT Calls menu SU1. None

FREQUENCY MODE

PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection. None
TO SELECT
OR TURN ON/OFF

Menu SU3A, Swept-Power Measurement Setup

A-226 37XXXD OM
ALPHABETICAL LISTING S

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

SELECT None
FUNCTION FOR
HOLD BUTTON

HOLD/CONTINUE Causes the hold key (button) to stop and start the sweep. HLD/CTN; HLD?

HOLD/RESTART Causes the hold key to stop and restart the sweep. None

SINGLE SWEEP Causes the hold key to trigger a single sweep and hold HLD; TRS
AND HOLD when finished. (Two sweeps, one from Port 1 to 2 and
another from Port 2 to 1, are accomplished for a 12-Term
measurement.)

BIAS/RF HOLD
CONDITIONS

BIAS ON (OFF) Select bias to be on or off (test sets having bias input only) BH1; BH0; BHX?
while system is in hold.

RF ON (OFF) Selects RF to be on or off while system is in hold. RH1; RH0; RHX?

DUT/AUT ON (OFF) When on, a default reset places the system in hold with RF
PROTECTION and bias turned off. This choice is initialized to OFF when
DEFAULT RESET the software version changes or after a Default Program
TURNS ON HOLD key press, so that the system comes up in the sweep
WITH BIAS/RF mode.
TURNED OFF

PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection. None
TO SELECT

Menu SU4, Select Function for Hold Button

37XXXD OM A-227
S ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

FREQUENCY None
MARKER SWEEP

START SWEEP Pressing a number on the keypad causes the associated M1S-M6S
MARKER (X) marker to be the start frequency of the sweep.
XXX.XXXXXXXXX GHz

STOP SWEEP Pressing a number on the keypad causes the associated M1E-M6E
MARKER (X) marker to be the stop frequency of the sweep.
XXX.XXXXXXXXX GHz

USE KEYPAD Use the keypad to select markers 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6. None

TO SELECT
MARKER (1-6)

Menu SU5, Frequency Marker Sweep

A-228 37XXXD OM
ALPHABETICAL LISTING S

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

FREQUENCY None
MARKER C.W.

C.W FREQ Pressing a number on the keypad causes the associated M1C-M6C
MARKER (X) marker to be the C.W. frequency.
XXX.XXXXXXXXX GHz

USE KEYPAD Use the keypad to select markers 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6. None

TO SELECT
MARKER (1-6)

Menu SU6, Frequency Marker C.W.

37XXXD OM A-229
S ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

CALIBRATE FOR None

FLAT PORT POWER

FORWARD None
DIRECTION ONLY

XXX POINTS Displays the number of power points (0 – 50) to be skipped PTS; PTS?
MEASURE 1 PWR during the power sweep. The points not measured are
POINT EVERY interpolated to provide a flat sweep.
XX POINT(S)

POWER TARGET Lets users set a flat output-power value (power target). The PTP; PTP?
-XXX.X dBm VNA defaults to Port 1 power.

START FLAT Begins the calibration. If calibration is successful, you are SFC
POWER CALIBRATION returned to menu SU8. If the calibration unsuccessful due
to a fatal error (Source or power meter inoperable or not
connected), this menus remains displayed. At any time,
you can abort the calibration by pressing the DEFAULT
PROGRAM or CLEAR/RET LOC keys. All other keys are
locked out.

PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection or None
TO SELECT turns the function on/off.

TURN KNOB TO
CHANGE NUMBER
OF POINTS

Menu SU8 or CAL_SU8, Calibrate For Flat Test Port Power

A-230 37XXXD OM
ALPHABETICAL LISTING S

- FLAT POWERCALIBRATION -

FLAT POWERCALIBRATION ADJUSTS THE SOURCE

OUTPUTPOWERAT EACH MEASUREMENT POINT ACROSS
A FREQUENCYSPAN TO PROVIDE A CONSTANTPOWER
LEVEL AT THE TEST PORT (FORWARDDIRECTION ONLY).

- INSTRUCTIONS -

1. PRESET, ZERO, AND CALIBRATE THE POWERMETER.

2. CREATE AND ACTIVATE THE POWERMETER'S CAL

FACTOR LIST FOR THE POWERSENSORBEING USED.

3. CONNECTTHE POWERMETERTO THE DEDICATED GPIB

INTERFACE AND THE POWERSENSORTO THE TEST PORT.

4. SELECT <START FLAT POWERCALIBRATION>.

000.0 %

Menu EXT_SU8 Flat Power Calibration Instructions

37XXXD OM A-231
S ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

NUMBER OF None
DATA POINTS

1601 MAX PTS Selects measurement data points to be 1601. NP1601; FHI;
ONP

801 MAX PTS Selects measurement data points to be 801. NP801; ONP

401 MAX PTS Selects measurement data points to be 401. NP401; ONP;
FME

201 MAX PTS Selects measurement data points to be 201. NP101; ONP

101 MAX PTS Selects measurement data points to be 101. NP101; ONP

51 MAX PTS Selects measurement data points to be 51. NP51; ONP

PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the Enter key implements you selection. None
TO SELECT

Menu SU9, Number of Data Points

A-232 37XXXD OM
ALPHABETICAL LISTING S

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

NUMBER OF None
DATA POINTS

POINTS DRAWN Displays the number of data point, when in the CW mode. CWP; CWP?
IN C.W. This number can be between 1 and 1601.
XXXX POINT(S)

Menu SU9A, Number of Data Points 2

37XXXD OM A-233
T ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

DOMAIN None

FREQUENCY Displays the data in normal frequency domain format.

FREQUENCY Displays the data in the frequency domain after a specific FGT
WITH TIME GATE time range has been sampled by the gate function.

TIME Displays the data in the time (distance) domain, using true TLP
LOWPASS MODE lowpass processing. Data must be taken using a harmonic
series calibration and sweep in order to use this mode.

TIME Displays the data in the time (distance) domain using TBP; TDX?
BANDPASS MODE bandpass processing. Any data sweep range using normal
calibration can be used.

–SETUP– None

DISPLAY Switches the mode of display between time and distance. TDDIST; TDTIME
TIME/DISTANCE This does not affect the actual displayed data, but only the
annotation.

SET RANGE Calls a menu that lets you set the range and other display None
parameters.

SET GATE Calls a menu that lets you set the gate parameters. None

GATE ON/OFF/DISP Switches the gate on or off each time Enter is pressed. GON/GOF/GDS;
GOF?

HELP Displays an informational help menu. None

PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection. None
TO SELECT
OR SWITCH

Menu TD1, Domain (Frequency/Display)

A-234 37XXXD OM
ALPHABETICAL LISTING T

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

LOWPASS TIME None

DOMAIN SETUP

START Sets the start time of the display. GST; GST?

XXX.XXX ps

STOP Sets the stop time of the display.. GSP; GSP?

XXX.XXX ps

CENTER Sets the center time of the display. GCT; GCT?

XXX.XXX ps

SPAN Sets the span (Stop - Start) of the display. GSN; GSN?
XXX.XXX ps

MARKER RANGE Calls a menu that lets you set the display to a range None
determined by two of the markers.

RESPONSE Switches between Impulse and Step response each time LPI/LPS; LPSX?
IMPULSE/STEP Enter is pressed.

MORE Calls a menu that contains additional selections for display None
setup.

PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection. None
TO SELECT

Menu TD2_LP_TIME, Lowpass Time Domain Setup

37XXXD OM A-235
T ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

LOWPASS None
DISTANCE
DISPLAY SETUP

START Sets the start time of the display. GST; GST?

XXX.XXX mm

STOP Sets the stop time of the display. GSP; GSP?

XXX.XXX mm

CENTER Sets the center time of the display. GCT; GCT?

XXX.XXX mm

SPAN Sets the span (Stop - Start) of the display. GSN; GSN?
XXX.XXX mm

MARKER RANGE Calls a menu that lets you set the display to a range None
determined by two of the markers.

RESPONSE Switches between Impulse and Step response each time LPI/LPS; LPSX?
IMPULSE/STEP Enter is pressed.

MORE Calls a menu that contains additional selections for display None
setup.

RELATIVE VELOCITY Indicates the relative velocity of light, as set by the None
X.X dielectric constant in menu RD2.

PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection. None
TO SELECT

Menu TD2_LP_DIST, Lowpass Distance Display Setup

A-236 37XXXD OM
ALPHABETICAL LISTING T

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

BANDPASS TIME None

DOMAIN SETUP

START Sets the start time of the display. ZST; ZST?

XXX.XXX ps

STOP Sets the stop time of the display. ZSP; ZSP?

XXX.XXX ps

CENTER Sets the center time of the display. ZCT; ZCT?

XXX.XXX ps

SPAN Sets the span (Stop - Start) of the display. ZSN; ZSN?
XXX.XXX ps

MARKER RANGE Calls a menu that lets you set the display to a range None
determined by two of the markers.

PHASOR ON/OFF Switches Phasor Impulse processing on or off each time TDPI1; TDPI0;
IMPULSE Enter is pressed. TDPIX?

HELP – PHASOR Displays an informational help menu. None

IMPULSE

MORE Calls a menu that contains additional selections for display None
setup.

PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection. None
TO SELECT
OR TURN ON/OFF

Menu TD2_BP_TIME, Bandpass Time Domain Setup

37XXXD OM A-237
T ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

BANDPASS DISTANCE None

DISPLAY SETUP

START Sets the start time of the display. ZST; ZST?

XXX.XXX mm

STOP Sets the stop time of the display. ZSP; ZSP?

XXX.XXX mm

CENTER Sets the center time of the display. ZCT; ZCT?

XXX.XXX mm

SPAN Sets the span (Stop - Start) of the display. ZSN; ZSN?
XXX.XXX mm

MARKER RANGE Calls a menu that lets you set the display to a range None
determined by two of the markers.

PHASOR ON/OFF Switches Phasor Impulse processing on or off each time TDPI1; TDPI0;
IMPULSE Enter is pressed. TDPIX?

HELP – PHASOR Displays an informational help menu. None

IMPULSE

MORE Calls a menu that contains additional selections for display None
setup.

RELATIVE VELOCITY Indicates the relative velocity of light, as set by the None
X.X dielectric constant in menu RD2.

PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection. None
TO SELECT
OR TURN ON/OFF

Menu TD2_BP_DIST, Bandpass Distance Display Setup

A-238 37XXXD OM
ALPHABETICAL LISTING T

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

BANDPASS TIME None

DOMAIN SETUP

WINDOW SHAPE Calls a menu that lets you change the window type. None
NOMINAL

SET GATE Calls a menu that lets you set the gate parameters. None

PREVIOUS MENU Returns you to the previous menu. None

PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection. None
TO SELECT

Menu TD3_BP, Bandpass Time Domain Setup

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

LOWPASS TIME None

DOMAIN SETUP

WINDOW SHAPE Calls a menu that lets you change the window type. None
NOMINAL

SET GATE Calls a menu that lets you set the gate. None

D.C. TERM Calls a menu that lets you set the D.C. term for lowpass None
XXXXX processing.
XXXXXXXXXX

PREVIOUS MENU Returns you to the previous menu. None

PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection. None
TO SELECT

Menu TD3_LP, Lowpass Time Domain Setup

37XXXD OM A-239
T ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

GATE None

START Sets the start time of the gate. GST; GST?

XXX.XXX xx

STOP Sets the stop time of the gate. GSP; GSP?

XXX.XXX xx

CENTER Sets the center time of the gate. GCT; GCT?

XXX.XXX xx

SPAN Sets the span (Stop - Start) of the gate. Also, provides for GSN; GSN?
XXX.XXX xx an anti-gate if a negative value is entered. Refer to Chapter
9, paragraphs 9-6 and 9-7 for additional information.

SET SHAPE Calls a menu that lets you set the shape of the gate. None
XXXXXXXXX

GATE ON/OFF/DISP Switches the gate on or off each time Enter is pressed. GON/GOF/GDS;
GOF?

SET RANGE Takes you back to menu TD2_XX_XXXX (LP_TIME, None

LP_DIST, BP_TIME, BP_DIST), depending on the type of
measurement you selected in menu TD1.

PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection. None
TO SELECT

Menu TD4_TIME & TD4_DIST, Gate (Distance/Time)

A-240 37XXXD OM
ALPHABETICAL LISTING T

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

SELECT None
WINDOW SHAPE

RECTANGULAR Selects a Rectangular (one-term) shape. WRT

NOMINAL Selects a two-term Hamming shape. WNM

LOW SIDELOBE Selects a three-term Blackman-Harris shape. WLS

MIN SIDELOBE Selects a four-term Blackman-Harris shape. WMS

HELP Displays an informational help menu. None

PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection. None
TO SELECT

Menu TD5_WINDOW, Shape

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

SELECT None
GATE SHAPE

MINIMUM Selects minimum shape. Sharpest rolloff, some frequency GRT

domain ripple. Not allowed with low or minimum sidelobe
window.

NOMINAL Selects a nomimal shape. Good results in most GNM

applications. Not allowed with minimum sidelobe window.

WIDE Selects wide shape. Gradual rolloff and better residual

ripple.

MAXIMUM Selects a maximum shape. Least rolloff and best residual

ripple.

HELP Displays an informational help menu. None

PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection. None
TO SELECT

Menu TD5_GATE, Shape

37XXXD OM A-241
T ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

SET D.C. TERM FOR Since it is impossible to measure the true D.C. term None
LOWPASS PROCESSING required for lowpass processing, a value must be
estimated. This menu allows a choice between five different
selections for this value.

AUTO Sets the D.C. term to a value determined by extrapolating DCA; DCX?
EXTRAPOLATE the data points near the zero frequency.

LINE Sets the D.C. term to the characteristic impedance of the DCZ
IMPEDANCE transmission medium (Z0).

OPEN Sets the D.C. term to correspond to an open circuit. DCO

SHORT Sets the D.C. term to correspond to a short circuit. DCS

OTHER Sets the D.C. term to the value entered. DCV; DCV?
XXX.XXX
(REFLECTION DCX?
COEFFICIENT
X.XXX pU)

PREVIOUS MENU Returns you to the previous menu. None

PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection. None
TO SELECT

Menu TD6, Set D.C. Term for Low Pass Processing

A-242 37XXXD OM
ALPHABETICAL LISTING T

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

TIME None
MARKER SWEEP

START TIME Sets the start time to the value of the selected marker. M1S-M6S
MARKER ( )
XXX.XXX ns

STOP TIME Sets the stop time to the value of the selected marker. M1E-M6E
MARKER ( )
XXX.XXX ns

RESTORE Returns the display to the original time range that was in MRR
ORIGINAL RANGE effect before the marker range was selected.

PREVIOUS MENU Returns you to the previous menu. None

USE KEYPAD Select marker number from keypad. None

TO CHOOSE
MARKER (1 - 6)

PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection.
TO SELECT

Menu TD7_TIME, Time Marker Sweep.

37XXXD OM A-243
T ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

DISTANCE None
MARKER SWEEP

START DIST Sets the start time to the value of the selected marker. M1S-M6S
MARKER ( )
XX.XXXX cm

STOP DIST Sets the stop time to the value of the selected marker. M1E-M6E
MARKER ( )
X.XXXX m

RESTORE Returns the display to the original time range that was in MRR
ORIGINAL RANGE effect before the marker range was selected.

PREVIOUS MENU Returns you to the previous menu. None

USE KEYPAD Select marker number from keypad. None

TO CHOOSE
MARKER (1 - 6)

PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection.
TO SELECT

Menu TD7_DIST, Distance Marker Range

A-244 37XXXD OM
ALPHABETICAL LISTING T

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

TRIGGERS None
MEASUREMENT

INTERNAL Internally triggers a point-by-point measurement. Choosing TIN; TXX?

this option always turns AUTOMATIC I.F. CALIBRATION
off.

EXTERNAL Provides for externally triggering a point-by-point TEX; TXX?

measurement via the rear panel External Trigger connector.
Choosing this option always turns AUTOMATIC I.F.
CALIBRATION off.

MEASUREMENT ON (OFF) Toggles a measurement delay on or off. If toggled on, the MEASDLY0;
DELAY delay time is displayed for user entry. Allowed values range MEASDLY1;
XX.XXX sec from positive 0.1 to 99999.9 ms. MEASDLYX?;
MEASDLY;
MEASDLY?

I.F. CALIBRATION None

AUTOMATIC ON (OFF) Turns on or off the timer for I.F. calibration. The timer HC1; HC0; HCX?
I.F. CAL automatically triggers an I.F. calibration at regular intervals
for internal hardware calibrations. If can be set on or off
when in either INTERNAL or EXTERNAL trigger
measuement mode.

TRIGGER Immediately triggers an I.F. calibration, which calibrates the HCT

I.F. CAL internal hardware. A “CALIBRATING IF...” message is
displayed.

PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection. None
TO SELECT
OR TURN ON/OFF

Menu TRIG, Triggers Measurement

37XXXD OM A-245
U ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

SELECT UTILITY None

FUNCTION OPTIONS

GPIB ADDRESSES Calls menu GP7, which displays the current GPIB None
addresses of the various dedicated instruments.

NETWORK SETUP Calls menu GP8, which lets you select a network protocol. None
You can use FTP, National Instruments NI-VISA,
WINSOCK, and TC[/IP-capable CAPVNA, VNAFTP, and
other VNAUTILS.

DISPLAY Calls menu U2, which lets you display the various None
INSTRUMENT instrument state parameters.
STATE PARAMS

GENERAL DISK Calls menu DSK1-FD, which lets you select between None
UTILITIES several disk utilities.

CAL COMPONENT Calls menu U3, which lets you select between several None
UTILITIES calibration-component utilities.

AUTOCAL Calls menu ACAL_UTIL, which lets you select various None
UTILITIES AutoCal utilities.

COLOR Calls menu U5, which lets you configure the screen colors. None
CONFIGURATION

DATA ON (OFF) Turns data drawing on or off for all channels. DD1; DD0; DD1?
DRAWING

BLANKING Blanks all frequency-identifier information from the 37XXXD FOF; FON; FOX?
FREQUENCY displays, if such information is presently being displayed.
INFORMATION Hides the frequency value with X’s, such as
XXX.XXXXXXXXX GHz.

SET DATE/TIME Lets users set the date and time. None

PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection. None
TO SELECT
OR TURN ON/OFF

Menu U1, Utility Menu

A-246 37XXXD OM
ALPHABETICAL LISTING U

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

DISPLAY INSTRUMENT None

STATE PARAMETERS

SYSTEM Displays all of the system parameters (Readout Text for DGS
U2, on the following pages).

CALIBRATION Displays the calibration parameters. DCP

OPERATING Displays the global operating parameters. DFP

CHANNEL 1 & 2 Displays the Channel 1-2 operating parameters. DC1

CHANNEL 3 & 4 Displays the Channel 3-4 operating parameters. DC3

NEXT PARAM PAGE Alternately displays Readout Text U3 a through e.

PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection. None
TO SELECT

Menu U2, Display Instrument State

37XXXD OM A-247
U ALPHABETICAL LISTING

Readout Text U2, Global Operating Parameters Readout Text U2, System Parameters

Parameter Display Format Parameter Display Format

Number of Points Model xxxxxxxx
Serial Number xxx
Power Control xx.x dB Software Version xxxxxxxx
Port 1 Attenuation xx.x dB Options xxxxxxxx
Porft 2 Attenuation xx.x dB
Source 2 Power xx.x dB IEEE 488.2 GPIB Interface
Address xx
Reference Impedance xx.xxx W Enable Registers xx
Averaging xxx Meas. per point Service Request xx
Smoothing Off/On Standard Event Status
x.x percent of sweep Parallel Poll
Off/On Extended Event Status
Limits Testing Status

Readout Text U2, Channel Parameters Dedicated GPIB Interface

External Source 1 Address xxxxx
Parameter Display Format External Source 2 Address xxxxx
Plotter Address xxxxx
Number of Points Power Meter Address xxxxx
Frequency Counter xxxxx
Power Control xx.x dB
Port 1 Attenuation xx.x dB Measurement Trigger xxxxxx
Porft 2 Attenuation xx.x dB Automatic I.F. Calibration xxxxxxx
Source 2 Power xx.x dB
Diagnostic Mode
Reference Impedance xx.xxx W Troubleshooting xxx
Averaging xxx Meas. per point Receiver Mode xxxxxxxxxxxx
Smoothing Off/On Search for Lock xxx
x.x percent of sweep
Off/On

Readout Text U2, Calibration Parameters

Parameter Display Format

Cal Method xxxxxxxx
Line Type Medium xxxxxxxx
Cal Type xxxxxxxx

Number of Points xxxxxxxx

Start Freq xxxxxxxx
Stop Freq xxxxxxxx

Power Control xx.x dB

Port 1 Attenuator xx.x dB
Port 2 Attenuator xx.x dB
Source 2 Power xx.x dB

Load Type xxxxxxxx

Through Offset xxxxxxxx

A-248 37XXXD OM
ALPHABETICAL LISTING U

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

CALIBRATION None
COMPONENT
UTILITIES

INSTALL KIT Reads into memory the coefficient data from the LKT
INFORMATION calibration-components disk supplied with the calibration
FROM FLOPPY DISK kits.

DISPLAY COAXIAL Calls menu U4 and U4A, which lets you display the None
OPEN & SHORT connector information for the various coaxial connectors
INFORMATION supported.

DISPLAY COAXIAL Calls menu U4B, which lets you display the connector None
OFFSET SHORT information for the various coaxial connectors supported.
INFORMATION

DISPLAY Displays the waveguide information loaded from the floppy DWG
WAVEGUIDE diskette.
INFORMATION

PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection. None
TO SELECT

Menu U3, Calibration Component Utilities

SSLT AND SSST WAVEGUIDE PARAMETERS

IDENTIFIER NOT INSTALLED

CUTOFF FREQUENCY XXX.XXXXXX GHz
OFFSET LENGTH OF SHORT 1 +XXX.XXXX mm
OFFSET LENGTH OF SHORT 2 +XXX.XXXX mm
OFFSET LENGTH OF SHORT 3 +XXX.XXXX mm

Menu EXT_U3, SSLT and SSST Waveguide Parameters

37XXXD OM A-249
U ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

DISPLAY INSTALLED This menu lets you view coefficient data on components. None
OPEN & SHORT The data appears in the display area of the screen (See
TEST PORT readout text on next page).
CONNECTOR INFO

K – CONN (M) Select to display coefficient data for the K Connector male DMK
components.

K – CONN (F) Select to display coefficient data for the K Connector DFK
female male components.

V-CONN (M) Select to display coefficient data for the V Connector male DMV
components.

V-CONN (F) Select to display coefficient data for the V Connector DFV
female components.

W1-CONN (M) Select to display coefficient data for the W1 Connector DM1
male components.

W1-CONN (F) Select to display coefficient data for the W1 Connector DF1
female components.

SMA (M) Select to display coefficient data for the SMA male DMS
components.

SMA (F) Select to display coefficient data for the SMA female DFS
components.

GPC - 3.5 (M) Select to display coefficient data for the GPC-3.5 male DM3
components.

GPC - 3.5 (F) Select to display coefficient data for the GPC-3.5 female DF3
components.

GPC - 7 Select to display coefficient data for the sexless GPC-7 DG7
components.

NEXT CONNECTOR Cycles through selections SMA (M) to GPC 7. None

MORE CONNECTORS Calls up menu U4A and lets you select more connectors. None

PREVIOUS MENU Displays menu U3. None

PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection. None
TO SELECT

Menu U4, Display Installed Calibration Components Information 1

A-250 37XXXD OM
ALPHABETICAL LISTING U

SOLT CALIBRATION KIT

TEST PORT: W1-CONN (MALE)
CALIBRATION COMPONENTS: W1-CONN (FEMALE)
OPEN DEVICE
C0 [e-15 F] +XXXX.XXXX
C1 [e-27 F/Hz] +XXXX.XXXX
C2 [e-36 F/Hz2] +XXXX.XXXX
C3 [e-45 F/Hz3] +XXXX.XXXX
OFFSET LENGTH +XXX.XXXX mm
SERIAL NUMBER “NNNNNN”
SHORT DEVICE
L0 [e-12 H] +XXXX.XXXX
L1 [e-24 H/Hz] +XXXX.XXXX
L2 [e-33 H/Hz2] +XXXX.XXXX
L3 [e-42 H/Hz3] +XXXX.XXXX
OFFSET LENGTH +XXX.XXXX mm
SERIAL NUMBER “NNNNNN”

Menu EXT_U4, SOLT Calibration Kit Information

37XXXD OM A-251
U ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

DISPLAY This menu lets you view coefficient data for connectors. None
INSTALLED The data appears in the display area of the screen.
OPEN & SHORT
TEST PORT
CONNECTOR INFO

TYPE N (M) Select to display coefficient data for the Type N male DMN
components.

TYPE N (F) Select to display coefficient data for the Type N female DFN
components.

TYPE N (M) 75W Select to display coefficient data for the Type N male 75W DMN75
components.

TYPE N (F) 75W Select to display coefficient data for the Type N female 75W DFN75
components.

7/16 (M) Select to display coefficient data for the 7/16 male DM7
components.

7/16 (F) Select to display coefficient data for the 7/16 female male DF7
components.

TNC (M) Select to display coefficient data for the TNC male DMT
components.

TNC (F) Select to display coefficient data for the TNC female male DFT
components.

2.4 mm (M) Select to display coefficient data for the 2.4 mm male DM2
components.

2.4 mm (F) Select to display coefficient data for the 2.4 mm female DF2
components.

NEXT CONNECTOR Cycles through selections V Connector to SPECIAL. None

MORE CONNECTORS Calls up menu U4A and lets you select more connectors. None

PREVIOUS MENU Returns you to menu U3. None

PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection. None
TO SELECT

Menu U4A, Display Installed Calibration Components Information 2

A-252 37XXXD OM
ALPHABETICAL LISTING U

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

DISPLAY INSTALLED This menu lets you view coefficient data for connectors. None
OFFSET SHORT The data appears in the display area of the screen.
TEST PORT
CONNECTOR INFO

W1-CONN (M) Select to display coefficient data for the W1 Connector– DOM1
male components.

W1-CONN (F) Select to display coefficient data for the W1 Connector DOF1
female components.

SPECIAL A (M) Select to display coefficient data for special A male DOASM
components.

SPECIAL A (F) Select to display coefficient data for special A female DOASF
components.

SPECIAL B (M) Select to display coefficient data for special B male DOBSM
components.

SPECIAL B (F) Select to display coefficient data for special B female DOBSF
components.

SPECIAL C (M) Select to display coefficient data for special C male DOCSM
components.

SPECIAL C (F) Select to display coefficient data for special C female DOCSF
components.

NEXT CONNECTOR Cycles through selections W Connector to SPECIAL. None

PREVIOUS MENU Returns you to menu U3. None

PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection. None
TO SELECT

Menu U4B, Display Installed Calibration Components Information 3

37XXXD OM A-253
U ALPHABETICAL LISTING

SSLT AND SSST CALIBRATION KIT

TEST PORT: W1-CONN (MALE)
CALIBRATION COMPONENTS: W1-CONN (FEMALE)
OFFSET SHORT 1 DEVICE
L0 [e-12 H] +XXXX.XXXX
L1 [e-24 H/Hz] +XXXX.XXXX
L2 [e-33 H/Hz2] +XXXX.XXXX
L3 [e-42 H/Hz3] +XXXX.XXXX
OFFSET LENGTH +XXX.XXXX mm
SERIAL NUMBER “NNNNNN”
OFFSET SHORT 2 DEVICE
L0 [e-12 H] +XXXX.XXXX
L1 [e-24 H/Hz] +XXXX.XXXX
L2 [e-33 H/Hz2] +XXXX.XXXX
L3 [e-42 H/Hz3] +XXXX.XXXX
OFFSET LENGTH +XXX.XXXX mm
SERIAL NUMBER “NNNNNN”
OFFSET SHORT 3 DEVICE
L0 [e-12 H] +XXXX.XXXX
L1 [e-24 H/Hz] +XXXX.XXXX
L2 [e-33 H/Hz2] +XXXX.XXXX
L3 [e-42 H/Hz3] +XXXX.XXXX
OFFSET LENGTH +XXX.XXXX mm
SERIAL NUMBER “NNNNNN”

Menu EXT_U4B, SSLT and SSST Calibration Kit Information

A-254 37XXXD OM
ALPHABETICAL LISTING U

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

COLOR None
CONFIGURATION

DATA Sets the color for the data drawn on the display. Use rotary DATCOL;
10 RED knob to cycle between the available colors. Default color is DATCOL?
shown.

OVERLAY DATA Sets the color for the overlay data drawn on the display. LAYCOL;
15 YELLOW Use rotary knob to cycle between the available colors. LAYCOL?
Default color is shown.

MEMORY DATA Sets the color for the memory data drawn on the display. TRCCOL;
24 GREEN Use rotary knob to cycle between the available colors. TRCCOL?
Default color is shown.

MARKERS Sets the color for the markers and limits drawn on the MKRCOL;
AND LIMITS display. Use rotary knob to cycle between the available MKRCOL?
32 CYAN colors. Default color is shown.

GRATICULE Sets the color for the display graticule. Use rotary knob to GRTCOL;
24 GREEN cycle between the available colors. Default color is shown. GRTCOL?

ANNOTATION Sets the color for the annotation and menu text. Use rotary ANNCOL;
AND MENU TEXT knob to cycle between the available colors. Default color is ANNCOL?
24 GREEN shown.

MENU HEADERS Sets the color for the menu headers and information. Use MNUCOL;
(TITLES & INFO) rotary knob to cycle between the available colors. Default MNUCOL?
32 CYAN color is shown.

BACKGROUND Sets the color for the background. Use rotary knob to cycle BCKCOL;
0 BLANK between the available colors. Default color is shown. BCKCOL?

RESET COLORS Resets colors to the default values. RSTCOL

COLOR SCHEMES Calls menu U5A None

PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection. None
TO SELECT

Menu U5, Color Configuration

37XXXD OM A-255
U ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

The user can select various color configurations by choosing between
COLOR SCHEMES
predetermined schemes
Loads the current color configuration with the reset (default) colors
RESET COLORS RSTCOL
Loads the color configuration with the new colors for the "C" models.
NEW COLORS NEWCO
Loads the color configuration with the classic colors used in past mod-
CLASSIC COLORS CLASS
els.
Loads the color configuration with the colors pre-defined for a white
INVERSE COLORS INVER
background.
Loads the color configuration with a pre-defined color set.
BRILLIANT COLORS BRILL
Loads the color configuration with a pre-defined color set.
SOFT COLORS SOFTCO
The user may also store the current color configuration as the reset
TO CUSTOMIZE, None
colors used in <default>. Only <default-0> will restore the colors to the
SELECT A COLOR CLASSIC or NEW (“C” Models) setup.
SCHEME AND/OR
MODIFY THE COLOR
CONFIG, THEN
STORE AS RESET
Stores the current color configuration as the reset colors used in <de-
STORE COLOR STOCO
fault> and as the reset color scheme.
CONFIG AS RESET
(DEFAULT) COLORS

PREVIOUS MENU Returns you to menu U3. None

PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection. None
TO SELECT

Menu U5, Color Configuration

A-256 37XXXD OM
ALPHABETICAL LISTING U

MENU DESCRIPTION GPIB COMMAND

SET DATE/TIME None

YEAR Sets the year. DATE; DATE?

XXXX

MONTH Sets the month. DATE; DATE?

XX

DAY Sets the day. DATE; DATE?

XX

HOUR Sets the hour. TIME; TIME?

XX

MINUTE Sets the minute. TIME; TIME?

XX

DONE, Prompts to set a new time. None

(SET DATE/TIME)

PREVIOUS MENU Returns to the previous menu. None

(DATE/TIME
NOT SET)

PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection. None
TO SELECT

Menu U6, Set Date/Time

37XXXD OM A-257/A-256
 Appendix B
Rear Panel Connectors

Table of Contents

B-1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-3

B-2 REAR PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-3
B-3 CONNECTOR PINOUT DIAGRAMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-3
 Appendix B
Rear Panel Connectors
B-1 INTRODUCTION This appendix provides descriptions and pinout diagrams for the
37XXXD rear panel connectors .

B-2 REAR PANEL The 37XXXD rear panel connectors are described if Figures B-1 and
B-2 on page B-2 and B-3.

B-3 CONNECTOR PINOUT Figures B-3 through B-10 provide pinout diagrams for the rear panel
DIAGRAMS connectors.

37XXXD OM B-3
REAP PANEL DRAWINGS REAR PANEL CONNECTORS

22 21 19 18 17
20 15
16
Test Set
IEEE 488.2 GPIB Refer to manual Control Out
for GPIB Address External SCSI-2 Hard Disk Drive
SH1
AH1
T6
L4
SR1
RL1
PP1
DC1
DT1
C0
E2

CAUTION
Terminate Unused
+20dBM MAX, 0VDC
AVOID STATIC DISCHARGE
Inputs

10 MHz Ref
IF Inputs <270 MHz
In ±5 dBm 50Ω Out ±5 dBm 50Ω a1 b1 a2 b2

Dedicated GPIB
Ext Ext Ext
Anlg In Anlg Out Trigger

14
Peripherals

13
CAUTION
FOR CONTINUED FIRE

12
PROTECTION REPLACE
ONLY WITH SPECIFIED
TYPE AND RATED FUSE.

- LINE INPUT
400 VA MAX
85-264VAC 48-63 Hz
Communications REPLACE FUSE ONLY WITH
SAME TYPE AND RATING

External I/O

11
1 WARNING CAUTION
NO OPERATOR SERVICE-
ABLE PARTS INSIDE. >18 Kg Bias Fuses
REFER SERVICING TO
QUALIFIED PERSONNEL. HEAVYWEIGHT Port 1 Port 2
FU FU
SE S E
FUSE
FUSE

FU FU
SE SE

F .5A 250V

8 10
5 7 9
2 4 6
3
Figure B-1. 372XXD, 373XXD Rear Panel

B-4 37XXXD OM
REAR PANEL CONNECTORS CONNECTOR DESCRIPTIONS

1. Printer Out: 25-pin connector that provides a parallel in- 13. (Option 12) a2: IF input from 3738A Broadband Test Set.
terface to the companion printer. Figure B-3 describes the SMA connector that should be terminated (on chain) when
signal lines and shows the connector pinout. not in use.

2. Serial: 9-pin connector provides provides control for 14. (Option 12) b2: IF input from 3738A Broadband Test Set.
AutoCal module. Figure B-5 provides a pinout diagram. SMA connector that should be terminated (on chain) when
not in use.
3. VGA OUT: 15-pin connector provides VGA output of
37XXXD video display. Figure B-4 provides a pinout dia- 15. (Option 12) Test Set Control Out: Provides control for
gram. 3738A Broadband Test Set. Figure B-6 provides a pinout di-
agram. TTL levels.
4. Ethernet: RJ45 jack allows connection to a Local Area
Network (LAN) for remote programming and data extrac- 16. External Trigger: Allows an external TTL signal to sync
tion. the 37XXXD measurements; 10 kW input impedance, BNC
female.
5. External I/O: Provide I/O access for Channel 1 through 4
limit and Port 1 and 2 bias voltages. Figure B-3 provides a 17. 10 MHz Ref OUT 0dBm 50W: BNC connector that allows
pinout diagram. the internal 10 MHz reference to be used to phase lock an
external counter or other measuring instrument. Level is
6. Bias Fuses, Port 1: Fuse, 0.5A, 3AG, 250V, provides pro- typically 0 dBm into 50W impedance.
tection for external bias being applied to the active device
connected to test port 1 without disturbing the accuracy of 18. External SCSI-2 Hard Disk Drive: Provides for connect-
the 37XXXD measurement. ing an external SCSI-2 hard disk drive (Option 4). Figure
B-7 provides a pinout diagram.
7. Bias Fuses, Port 2: Fuse, 0.5A, 3AG, 250V, provides pro-
tection for external bias being applied to the active device 19. 10 MHz Ref IN 0dBm 50W: BNC connector that allows an
connected to test port 2 without disturbing the accuracy of external 10 MHz signal (–5 to +5 dBm) to be used as the fre-
the 37XXXD measurement. quency reference for phase locking the source frequency.
50W impedance.
8. External Anlg Out: Provides up to a ±10V signal for use in
driving an external plotter or antenna (CW draw). 20. Ext Anlg In: Provides input to the A5 A/D Converter PCB.
BNC connector allows an external dc voltage to be mea-
9. Line Voltage Input: Three-prong ac plug that provides in- sured by the internal analog-to-digital converter circuit.
put for the input-line power. The line voltage must be be-
tween 85 and 264 Vac rms, 43 to 63 Hz. 21. Dedicated GPIB: IEEE 488 standard 24-pin connector
that allows the 37XXXD to remotely control a 2nd frequency
10. Power On/Off: Turns the line power on or off. source, an external plotter, analyzer, or other peripheral.
Figure B-2 provides a pinout diagram.
10. (Option 12) a1: IF input from 3738A Broadband Test Set.
SMA connector that should be terminated (on chain) when 22. IEEE 488.2 GPIB: IEEE 488 standard 24-pin connector
not in use. that provides for remotely controlling the 37XXXD from an
external computer/controller via the IEEE-488 bus (GPIB).
12. (Option 12) b1: IF input from 3738A Broadband Test Set. Figure B-2 provides a pinout diagram.
SMA connector that should be terminated (on chain) when
not in use.

37XXXD OM B-5
CONNECTOR PINOUT DIAGRAMS REAR PANEL CONNECTORS

24 12
23 11
22 10
21 9
20 8
19 7
18 6
17 5
16 4
15 3
14 2
13 1

Pinout Diagram

PIN NAME DESCRIPTION

1-4 DIO 1 through DIO 4 Data Input/Output. Bits are HIGH with the data is logical 0 and LOW when the data is
logical 1.
5 EOI End Or Identify. A low-true state indicates that the last byte of a multibyte message
has been placed on the line.
6 DAV Data Valid. A low-true state indicates that the talker has (1) sensed that NRFD is
LOW, (2) placed a byte of data on the bus, and (3) waited an appropriate length of
time for the data to settle.
7 NRFD Not Ready For Data. A high-true state indicates that valid data has not yet been ac-
cepted by a listener.
8 NDAC Not Data Accepted. A high-false state indicates that the current data byte has been
accepted for internal processing by a listener.
9 IFC Interface Clear. A low-true state places all bus instruments in a known state—such
as, unaddressed to talk, unaddressed to listen, and service request idle.
10 SRQ Service Request. A low-true state indicates that a bus instrument needs service from
the controller.
11 ATN Attention. A low-true state enables the controller to respond to both it’s own lis-
ten/talk address and to appropriate interface messages — such as, device clear and
serial poll.
12 Shield Chassis ground.
13-16 DIO 5 through DIO 8 Data Input/Output. Bits are high with the data is logical 0 and LOW when the data is
logical 1.
17 REN Remote Enable. A low-true state enables bus instruments to be operated remotely,
when addressed.
18-
24 GND Logic ground.

Figure B-2. Pinout Diagram, GPIB and Dedicated GPIB Connectors

B-6 37XXXD OM
REAR PANEL CONNECTORS CONNECTOR PINOUT DIAGRAMS

13 1

25 14

Pinout Diagram

PIN NAME DESCRIPTION

1 STROBE Printer Strobe. A low-true pulse that tells the printer valid data has been placed
onthe bus.
2-9 DATA 1 thru DATA 8 Data Lines. Bits are HIGH when the data is logical 1 and LOW when the data is alog-
ical 0.
10 ACK NLG Printer Acknowledgment. A low-true (it varies from printer to printer) pulse sent back
by the printer to acknowledge that the data has been accepted and the printer is
ready to accept more data.
11 BUSY Printer Busy. High-true level sent by the printer to indicate that it is not available. This
line is HIGH at the following times: (1) During data entry. (2) While printing. (3) When
off-line. (4) When a printer-error has been signaled.
12 PE Printer Error. High-true level sent by the printer to indicate that it is out of paper.
13 SLCT Select. A high-true logic level.
14 AUTO FEED XT Automatic Paper Feed. A low-true level that tells the printer to feed the paper
automatically.
15 ERR Printer Error. A low-true signal that indicates the printer is (1) out of paper,
(2) off-line, or (3) in an error state.
16 INIT Printer Initial State. A low-true pulse that tells the printer to assume its initial state
and clear its print buffer.
17 SLCT IN Printer Select Input. A low-true level that permits the printer to accept data.
18-25 DATA RTN Return lines for DATA 1 thru DATA 8 lines.

Figure B-3. Pinout Diagram, Printer Connector (1 of 2)

37XXXD OM B-7
CONNECTOR PINOUT DIAGRAMS REAR PANEL CONNECTORS

External I/O

1
2 14
3 15
4 16
5 17
6 18
7 19
8 20
9 21
22
10
23
11 24
12 25
13

Pinout Diagram

PIN NAME DESCRIPTION

1 Channel 1 Limit Signal indicating results of Channel 1 limit testing. User selectable TTL-high = Fail or
TTL-low = Fail.
2 Limit 1 Rtn Return for the Channel 1 limit signal
3 Channel 2 Limit Signal indicating results of Channel 2 limit testing. User selectable TTL-high = Fail or
TTL-low = Fail.
4 Limit 2 Rtn Return for the Channel 1 limit signal
5 Channel 3 Limit Signal indicating results of Channel 3 limit testing. User selectable TTL-high = Fail or
TTL-low = Fail.
6 Limit 3 Rtn Return for the Channel 3 limit signal
7 Channel 4Limit Signal indicating results of Channel 4 limit testing. User selectable TTL-high = Fail or
TTL-low = Fail. Pins 7 is also used as the TTL handshake for external trigger mode.
TTL-high = VNA has compeleted a measurement and is ready for another trigger
8 Limit 4 Rtn Return for the Channel 4 limit signal or VNA measurement complete signal. Pin 8 is
also the return for pin 7.
9 Limit Fail Signal indicating failure in any channel limit testing. User selectable TTL-high = Fail
or TTL-low = Fail.
10 Spare
11 Spare
12 Limit Fail Rtn Return for the Limit Fail signal
13 Spare
14 Spare
15 Ext Dig In Allows an external signal to sync the 37XXXD measurements; TTL level
16 Dig In Rtn Return for External Dig In signal

Figure B-5. Pinout Diagram, External I/O Connector (1 of 2)

B-8 37XXXD OM
REAR PANEL CONNECTORS CONNECTOR PINOUT DIAGRAMS

PIN NAME DESCRIPTION

17 Ext Ana Out Provides an up-to-±10V signal for use in driving an external plotter or antenna (CW
draw).
18 Ana Out Rtn Return for Ext Ana Out signal
19 Spare
20 Spare
21 Spare
22 Gnd 1 Return for Port 1 Bias.
23 Port 1 Bias Provides for applying an external bias to the active device connected to test port 1.
24 Port 2 Bias Provides for applying an external bias to the active device connected to test port 2.
25 Gnd 2 Return for Port 2 Bias.

Figure B-3. Pinout Diagram, External I/O Connector (2 of 2)

37XXXD OM B-9
CONNECTOR PINOUT DIAGRAMS REAR PANEL CONNECTORS

6
1 11
7
2 12
8
3 13
9
4 14
10
5 15

Pinout Diagram
PIN NAME DESCRIPTION
1 Red Red signal
2 Green Green signal
3 Blue Blue signal
4 Not Used
5 Not Used
6 Red Return Red return
7 Green Return Green return
8 Blue Return Blue return
9 Not Used
10 Digital Ground Sync ground
11 Not Used
12 Not Used
13 Hsync Horizontal sync
14 Vsync Vertical sync
15 Not Used

Figure B-4. Pinout Diagram, VGA IN/OUT Connector

B-10 37XXXD OM
REAR PANEL CONNECTORS CONNECTOR PINOUT DIAGRAMS

5 1

9 6

PIN DESCRIPTION
1 CD
2 RXD
3 TXD
4 DTR
5 N.C.
6 N.C.
7 RTS
8 CTS
9 N.C.

Figure B-5. Pinout Diagram, Serial Port Connector

37XXXD OM B-11
CONNECTOR PINOUT DIAGRAMS REAR PANEL CONNECTORS

Test Set
Control Out
2
3 7
1
4 6

PIN NAME DESCRIPTION

1 Ground Ground return

2 N/C No connection

3 H Coax/L mm HIGH <65 GHz, LOW >65 GHz

4 N/C No connection

5 L Reverse LOW reverse sweep, HIGH forward sweep

6 N/C No connection

7 L Forward LOW forward sweep, HIGH reverse sweep

Figure B-6. Pinout Diagram, Test Set Control Out Connector (Option 12)

B-12 37XXXD OM
REAR PANEL CONNECTORS CONNECTOR PINOUT DIAGRAMS

25 1
50 26

PIN DESCRIPTION PIN DESCRIPTION

1 thru 25 GND 38 Termination Power

26 DATA 1 39 N.C.
27 DATA 2 40 GND
28 DATA 3 41 ATN
29 DATA 4 42 GND
30 DATA 5 43 BSY
31 DATA 6 44 ACK
32 DATA 7 45 RST
33 DATA 8 46 MSG
34 Data Parity 47 SEL
35 GND 48 CD
36 GND 49 REQ
37 N.C. 50 I/O

Figure B-7. Pinout Diagram, External SCSI-2 (Optional)

37XXXD OM B-13/B-14
 Appendix C
Performance Specifications
This appendix contains a copy of the 37000D Vector Network Ana-
lyzers Technical Data Sheet, Anritsu Part Number 11410-00350.
SUBJECT INDEX ! TO D

Index
! 3651 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
3652 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
3 dB Compressed Smith Chart Display Mode . 6-10 3653 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8 to 1-9
40 MHz to 65 GHz Checkout . . . . . . . . . 14-12 3656 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
3657 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-3
A Model 3650 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-4
Model 3651 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-5
Active Channel Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13 Model 3652 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-6
Active Device Measurements . . . . . . 8-24 to 8-28 Model 3653 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-7
Discussion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-24 to 8-28 Model 3654/3654B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-8
Adapter Removal Measurements Model 3656 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-9
Discussion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-34 to 8-38 Model 3657 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-10
Address, GPIB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7 Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-3
Analog Instrument Status . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12 Calibration Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Analyzer Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4 Ch 1 Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
Apply Cal Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4,4-10 Ch 2 Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
Arrow Key. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9 Ch 3 Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
Autoscale Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6,4-25 Ch 4 Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
Average Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7 Ch1 - Ch4 Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
Avg/Smooth Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7 Channel Menu Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8,4-24
Avg/Smooth Menu Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29 Channels Key-Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
Channels Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
B Cleaning Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-13
Connector Pin Depth. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-11
Bandpass Impulse Response . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5 Connector Pin Depth Tolerance . . . . . . . . 12-12
Beatty Standard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12 Connectors, Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-13
Begin Cal Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4,4-10 Console and Table Setup . . . . . . . . . 13-7,14-6
Bias Input Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6 Copying Data Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41
Broadband Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-16
Merging Calibrations . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-16 D
Broadband Measurement System . . . . . . . 14-3
Broadband Menus, Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-15 Data Display
Active Channel Selection. . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
C Analog Instrument Status . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13 to 6-14
Cable Length Restrictions . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6 Frequency Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-4 Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
CAD System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-28 Linear Phase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Calibrating for a Measurement . . . . . . . . . 7-9 Log Magnitude . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Calibration Markers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
See Measurement Calibration Measurement Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
Calibration Key-Group Description . . 4-10 to 4-19 Plotter Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
Calibration Keys . . . . . . . . . . 4-4,4-10 to 4-19 Polar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Calibration Kits Reference Position Marker . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
3650 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5 Scale Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12

37XXXD OM Index-1
E TO G SUBJECT INDEX

Screen-Image Printout . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15 Enter Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9

Smith . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10 Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
S-parameter Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14 Error Modeling and Flowgraphs . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12 Error Terms
Sweep Marker Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Tabular Printout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15 Evaluating the Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14 External Monitor Connector . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Data Display Modes External SCSI Drive, Setup . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
3 dB Compressed Smith Chart . . . . . . . 6-10
Dual Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4 F
Dual Channel Rectilinear Graticule . . . . . 6-8
Dual Trace Overlay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Four Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 Four Channel Display Mode . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Graph Data Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7 Fourier Transform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Linear Polar Graticule. . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8 Frequency
Log Polar Graticule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9 Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Marker Designation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11 Frequency Domain . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3,9-8,9-12
Normal Smith Chart. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9 Front Panel
Single Channel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 Calibration Key-Group Description . 4-10 to 4-19
Data Display Modes and Types . . . . . . 6-3 to 6-6 Channels Key-Group Description . . . . . . 4-24
Data Entry Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9 Display Key-Group Description . . . 4-25 to 4-28
Data Plotting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31 Key-Group Descriptions . . . . . . . . 4-3 to 4-9
Data Points Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8,4-21 Markers/Limits Key-Group Description . 4-36 to
Default Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3,8-10 4-39
Default Program Key . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4,4-33 Measurement Key-Group Description4-21 to 4-23
Default Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34 Output Key-Group Description . . . 4-31 to 4-32
Device ID Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21 Save/Recall Key, Description . . . . . . . . 4-20
Disk Files, Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40 System State Key-Group Description 4-33 to 4-35
Disk Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
Disk Storage Interface . . . . . . . . . 4-40 to 4-41 G
Diskette Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
Display Key-Group . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25 to 4-28 Gain Compression
Display Keys. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6,4-25 Swep Power Gain Compression Measurement
Domain Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8,4-21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-43
Drive, External SCSI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4 Swept Frequency Measurement . . . . . . . 8-51
Dual Channel Display Mode . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4 Gain Compression Measurements
Dual Channel Rectilinear Display Mode . . . . 6-8 Discussion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-39 to 8-57
Dual Source Control Gating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12
Pre-operational Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-30 General Description . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 to 3-4
Dual Source Control Measurements GHz/10E+3/Ms/m Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
Discussion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-29 to 8-33 GPIB
Dual Trace Overlay Display Mode . . . . . . . . 6-6 Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
GPIB Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
E GPIB Interface to External Plotter . . . . . . . 2-7
GPIB Setup and Interconnection . . . . . . . . 2-6
E/O Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-65 Graph Data Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Equipment Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-65 Graph Type Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6,4-25
Measurement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . 8-66
Enhancement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7,4-29

Index-2 37XXXD OM
SUBJECT INDEX H TO M

H Limits Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5,4-36

Linear Polar Graticule Display Mode . . . . . . 6-8
Hard Copy Load Match . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Plotter Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15 Log Magnitude Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Screen-Image Printout . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15 Log Polar Graticule Display Mode . . . . . . . . 6-9
Tabular Printout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15 LRL/LRM Calibration Procedure
Hard Copy and Disk Output . . . . . . . . . . 6-15 Coaxial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-44
Hard Copy Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5,4-31 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-36 to 7-45
High Level Noise Test Microstrip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-37
Test Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7 Waveguide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-46
High Level Noises Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6 LRL/LRM Calibration Setup Menu Flow . . . 4-15
Hold Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8,4-21
M
I
Marker
Identification Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3 Display of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
Impulse Response. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4 Reference Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Initial Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3 Marker Designation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
Initial Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3 Marker Menu Key. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5,4-36
Insertables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5 Markers/Limits Key-Group . . . . . . . 4-36 to 4-39
Instrument Installation into Console . . . 13-8,14-7 Markers/Limits Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5,4-36
Interface ME7808C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-4
Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6 Measurement Calibration
Disk Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40 to 4-41 Calibration Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3 Discussion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 to 7-12
Error Modeling and Flowgraphs . . . . . . . 7-6
Evaluating the Calibration . . . . . . . . . 7-11
K LRL/LRM Procedure . . . . . . . . . 7-36 to 7-45
Offset-Short Procedure. . . . . . . . 7-28 to 7-31
Keyboard Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7 Sliding Load, Procedure . . . . . . . 7-13 to 7-18
Keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9 Standared (SOLT) Procedure . . . . 7-19 to 7-27
Keys Triple Offset-Short Procedure . . . . 7-32 to 7-35
Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10 to 4-19 Understanding the Calibration System . . . 7-5
Channel Key-Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24 Measurement Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . 14-4
Display Key-Group . . . . . . . . . . 4-25 to 4-28 Measurement Key-Group Description . 4-21 to 4-23
Markers/Limits. . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36 to 4-39 Measurement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8,4-21
Markers/Limits Key-Group . . . . . 4-36 to 4-39 Measurement Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
Measurement Key-Group . . . . . . 4-21 to 4-24 Measurement Uncertainty . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Output Key-Group . . . . . . . . . . 4-31 to 4-32 Measurements
Save/Recall Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20 Active Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-24 to 8-28
System State . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33 to 4-35 Adapter Removal . . . . . . . . . . . 8-34 to 8-38
System State Key-Group. . . . . . . 4-33 to 4-35 Dual Source Control . . . . . . . . . 8-29 to 8-33
kHz/10E-3/ps/mm Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9 Gain Compression . . . . . . . . . . 8-39 to 8-57
Kit Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-3 Receiver Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-58 to 8-61
Time Domain. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
L Transmission and Reflection . . . . . 8-3 to 8-11
Mechanical Shock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-12
Menu Flow
Limit Frequency Readout Function . . . . . . 4-36 Calibration Key-Group Menus . . . 4-10 to 4-19
Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11

37XXXD OM Index-3
N TO P SUBJECT INDEX

MARKER MENU Key . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36 Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16

Save/Recall Key. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20 Primer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5 to 3-11
Menu Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5,4-31 Non-insertables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Menu Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9 Normal Smith Chart Display Mode . . . . . . . 6-9
Menus
Channels Key-Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24 O
Display Key-Group . . . . . . . . . . 4-25 to 4-28
Markers/Limits Key-Group . . . . . 4-36 to 4-39
Measurement Key-Group . . . . . . 4-21 to 4-23 O/E Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-68
Output Key-Group . . . . . . . . . . 4-31 to 4-32 Equipment Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-68
System State Key-Group. . . . . . . 4-33 to 4-35 Measurement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . 8-68
MHz/X1/ns/cm Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9 Offset-Short Calibration Procedure . . 7-28 to 7-31
Microwave Load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13 Offset-Short Calibration Setup Menu Flow . . 4-13
Millimeter Wave Measurements . . . . . . . . . 1-4 Open . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-27
Millimeter Wave System Operational Checkout
Allowable Measurements and Calibrations 13-17 High Level Noise Test . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6
Allowable Module Configurations . . . . . 13-17 Initial Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3
Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12 Required Test Equipment . . . . . . . . . . 11-3
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-3 Sampler Efficiency Test . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4
Effect of Default Program . . . . . . . . . 13-18 Self Test. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3
Measurement Capabilities . . . . . . . . . . 13-5 Optical Application . . . . . . . . . . . 8-65 to 8-76
Measurement Procedures. . . . . . . . . . 13-22 E/O Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-65
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13 O/E Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-68
Operational Checkout-General . . . . . . . 13-24 Option 2 Time Domain
Operational Checkout-High Level Noise Test Menus. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14 to 9-20
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-27,13-29 Option 2A Time Domain
Operational Checkout-IF Power Level Test 13-25 Gating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12 to 9-13
Performance Specifications . . . . . . . . . 13-4 Gating Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14
Remote Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-23 Operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
System Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-4 Windowing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11
Test Port Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . 13-5 Option 4 External SCSI Drive
Model 3650 Calibration Kit . . . . . . . . . . . 12-4 Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Model 3651 Calibration Kit . . . . . . . . . . . 12-5 Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Model 3652 Calibration Kit . . . . . . . . . . . 12-6 Option 5 Receiver Mode
Model 3653 Calibration Kit . . . . . . . . . . . 12-7 Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-59
Model 3654/3654B Calibration Kit . . . . . . . 12-8 Operating Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-60
Model 3656 Calibration Kit . . . . . . . . . . . 12-9 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-59
Model 3657 Calibration Kit . . . . . . . . . . 12-10 Set--On Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-58
Multiple Source Control Sweeper Source Lock Mode . . . . . . . . . 8-58
Control Formula . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-29 Option Menu Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7,4-29
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-31 Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
Output Key-Group . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31 to 4-32
Over Torquing Connectors. . . . . . . . . . . 12-12
N
P
Network Analyzers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
Basics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3 Performance Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
Error Correction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11 Phasor-impulse Response . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9 Pin Depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
Plotter Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15

Index-4 37XXXD OM
SUBJECT INDEX R TO T

Plotting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31 17K50, 17KF50 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7

Polar Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10 17S50, 17SF50 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Port 1 Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6 Pin Depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
Port 1 Test Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4 Used in Calibraton. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Port 2 Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6 Smith Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Port 2 Test Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5 3 dB Compressed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
Preparation for Storage and/or Shipment . . . 2-11 Measurement Discussion . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Preparation for Use. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3 Normal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
Printing Smith Chart Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Stop/Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31 Source Match . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-3 Source Module
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
R S-parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-25
Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9 to 3-10
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Readout Marker key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5 Selection, Display of . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
Readout Marker Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36 Specifications, Performance . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
Receiver Mode Measurements . . . . . 8-58 to 8-61 Standard Calibration Setup Menu Flow . . . . 4-11
Operating Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-60 Start Print Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5,4-31
Recovering, Disk Write/Read Errors . . . . . . 4-41 Start Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
Ref Plane Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6,4-25 Status Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Reference Flat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15 Stop Print Key. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5,4-31
Reference Position Marker . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12 Stop Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
Rotary Knob. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9 Sweep Marker Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
System Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-10,14-9
S System Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
System GPIB Interconnection . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
S Params Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6,4-25 System State Key-Group . . . . . . . . 4-33 to 4-35
S2P File System State Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4,4-33
Comment Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-76
Creating. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-74 T
Data Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-75
Example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-76 Tabular Printout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
File Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-74 Teflon Tuning Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-12
Option Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-75 Test Ports
Sampler Efficiency Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4 Establishing, Discussion . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Test Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-5 Test Set
Save/Recall Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20 Reversing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Save/Recall Menu Key . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4 to 4-5 Test Set Module
Save/Recall Menu Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Scale Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12 Time Domain Measurements . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Scattering Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9 Trace Memory Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6,4-26
Screen-Image Printout . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15 Trace Smooth and Average Keys . . . . . . . . 4-29
SCSI Drive, External . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4 Trace Smooth Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
Self Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3 Tracking. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Set Scale Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6,4-25 Transmission and Reflection Measurements . . 8-3
Setup Menu Key. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8,4-21 Discussion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
Short . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-27 General. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3 to 8-11
Single Channel Display Mode . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 Setup and Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Sliding Load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13

37XXXD OM Index-5
U TO Z SUBJECT INDEX

Smith Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8 3666 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12

Triple Offset Short Calibration Procedure . 7-32 to 3668 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14 to 1-15
7-35 Used in Calibration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
TRM Calibration Setup Menu Flow . . . . . . 4-17 Video IF BW Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7,4-29

U W

Using Connectors Wafer Probe Station . . . . . . . . . 14-13 to 14-14

Mechanical Shock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-12 Windowing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11
Over Torquing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-12
Pin Depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-11 Z
Pin Depth Tolerance . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-12
Teflon Tuning Washers . . . . . . . . . . . 12-12
Utility Menu Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4,4-33 Zo Load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-27
Zo Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13

Verification Kit

Index-6 37XXXD OM